JP7007581B2 - Pachi-slot machine - Google Patents

Description

Regarding the revolving pachinko machine.

In the spinning machine (slot machine), one game is started when the game start instruction device (start lever) is operated after inserting a predetermined number of game medals, and a plurality of symbols are arranged on the outer circumference. As a result of rotating the rotating cylinders (reel) in multiple rows and stopping the rotating cylinders by making full use of the rotating cylinder stop device (stop button) for stopping the rotating operation, a predetermined symbol is displayed on the effective line. When a combination of (for example, a winning combination such as "777") is lined up, a special gaming state in which the player is in a higher profit state than in the normal gaming state (a gaming state in which the lottery probability of a small winning combination is higher than in the normal game state). ) Is generally the type that shifts to. Here, in the rotating cylinder type gaming machine, when an image or the like for directing to enhance the interest of the game is displayed on a display such as a liquid crystal display in a form synchronized with the rotation operation and the stop operation of the reel. When operating the reel stop device, etc., it is configured to predict and enjoy the result of the game while comparing the design displayed on the reel with the image for production displayed on the display. There are many things that are done.

JP 2015-116444

It is desired to provide a highly entertaining spinning machine.

The rotating body type gaming machine according to this aspect is
With multiple reels
The reel unit including the plurality of reels and
A gaming machine housing with an open front and
A front door that is connected to the left side of the gaming machine housing via a hinge mechanism and can be opened and closed,
Equipped with internal lottery means,
Inside the gaming machine housing,
With the reel unit
A fixing part for fixing the reel unit and
The main tank member that stores the game medium and
It is installed in the vicinity of the main tank member, and is provided with an auxiliary tank member for storing the game medium overflowing from the main tank member.
A part of the main tank member is provided with a slope portion that descends from the main tank member toward the auxiliary tank member.
The reel unit and the fixing portion are configured to be holdable by a plurality of conductive locking parts.
In a state where the reel unit and the fixing portion are held by the plurality of locking parts, the slope portion is arranged vertically below a predetermined locking component among the plurality of locking parts.
In a state where the auxiliary tank member is installed inside the gaming machine housing, the first member and the second member for detecting whether or not the game medium stored in the auxiliary tank member is full are provided. At least, the distance between the first member and the second member is configured to be longer than the length in the longitudinal direction of the predetermined locking component.
The internal lottery means is configured to have a case where a predetermined result is determined and a case where a specific result is determined.
In the game in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the predetermined symbol combination can be stopped based on the fact that the player's stop operation is accepted in the predetermined operation mode.
When the predetermined symbol combination is stopped, the number of game media corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is configured to be given.
In the game in which the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, the specific symbol combination can be stopped based on the acceptance of the player's stop operation.
When the specific symbol combination is stopped, the replay is configured to be granted.
In the game in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the operation notification state capable of notifying the predetermined operation mode and the operation notification state.
The first section that does not enter the operation notification state and
The second section that can be in the operation notification state and
It has a difference counter capable of counting the difference number in the second section after shifting to the second section.
When the calculation result related to the difference counter becomes a negative value in the predetermined game in the second section, the specified value can be stored in the difference counter.
When the difference counter meets a predetermined condition, the second section is terminated.
If the power is cut off and then the voltage drops below the specified value, the power cutoff process is executed.
In the game in which the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on each reel stopped by the reception of the stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player. In this situation, when the player's final stop operation for a predetermined reel is accepted at the first timing and the specific symbol combination is stopped, the re-game is given.
In the game in which the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on each reel stopped by the reception of the stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player. In this situation, the power is cut off, and then the player's final stop operation for the predetermined reel is accepted at the first timing until the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the predetermined value, and then when the power is turned off. Even if the processing is executed and the specific symbol combination is not stopped when the plurality of reels are stopped, the re-game is given at the second timing after the power is restored. It is a spinning reel type gaming machine.
<Additional Notes>
In addition, although other embodiments different from this embodiment are listed below, they can be implemented without any limitation.
The rotating body type gaming machine according to this other aspect is
The main process that controls the progress of the game,
During the execution of the main processing, interrupt processing executed by interrupts at predetermined time intervals and
With multiple reels
With multiple stop switches,
Internal lottery means and
An information display unit that can display information and
Equipped with
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction game for displaying information that can identify the advantageous operation mode on the information display unit, and
Of the game sections, the normal section in which the instruction game is not executed and the normal section
Of the game sections, the advantageous section in which the indicated game can be executed, and
An advantageous section indicator that can at least adopt a notification mode that is an advantageous section and a notification mode that is a normal section,
The advantageous section flag that is turned on when it is an advantageous section, and
Equipped with a difference number counter that can measure the number of game values acquired in the advantageous section after newly shifting to the advantageous section.
When the counter value of the difference sheet counter satisfies a predetermined end condition, it is configured to shift to the normal section.
As the main process
Process A for clearing the counter value of the difference number counter and
Process B for making the advantageous section indicator into a notification mode that is the normal section, and
It is possible to at least execute the process C of turning the advantageous interval flag from on to off.
When shifting from an advantageous section to a normal section, the spinning machine is configured to execute the process A and then the process C and then execute the process C.

According to the spinning-type gaming machine according to this aspect, it is possible to provide a gaming machine with a high degree of interest.

FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing a state in which the door of the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment is opened. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the inside of the medal slot in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 4 is a front view and a top view of the medal payout device in the spinning machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 5 is a list of basic specifications of the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 6 is a list of reel arrangements in the spinning machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 7 is a list of symbol combinations 1 in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 8 is a list of symbol combinations 2 in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 9 is a list of symbol combinations 3 in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 10 is a list of conditional devices in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 11 is a list of small winning combination, re-gaming combination, and bonus lottery probability in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 12 is an overall electrical configuration diagram of the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 13 is a main flowchart on the main control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 14 is a flowchart of the setting change device control process on the main control board side in the spinning machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 15 is a flowchart of non-recoverable error processing on the main control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (first sheet) on the main control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (second sheet) on the main control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (third sheet) on the main control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 19 is a flowchart of an internal lottery execution process on the main control board side in the spinning machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 20 is a flowchart of a game number addition execution process on the main control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 21 is a flowchart of the AT state transition control process (first sheet) on the main control board side in the spinning machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 22 is a flowchart of the AT state transition control process (second sheet) on the main control board side in the spinning machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 23 is a flowchart of the AT state transition control process (third sheet) on the main control board side in the spinning machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 24 is a flowchart of the condition device number management process on the main control board side in the spinning machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 25 is a flowchart of the reel rotation start preparation process on the main control board side in the spinning machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 26 is a flowchart of the remaining game number management process on the main control board side in the spinning machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the RT state transition control process on the main control board side in the spinning machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 28 is an RT state transition diagram of the spinning machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 29 is a flowchart of the AT state start control process on the main control board side in the spinning machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 30 is an AT state transition diagram in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 31 is a flowchart of the game section transition control process on the main control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 32 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing on the main control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 33 is a flowchart of a rotating cylinder drive control process on the main control board side in the rotating cylinder type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 34 is a flowchart of the rotating cylinder drive control process on the main control board side in the rotating cylinder type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 35 is an image diagram of a reel rotation operation in the spinning machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 36 is a flowchart of a power supply cutoff process on the main control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 37 is an image diagram of a push order display in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 38 is a flowchart of a sub-side program start process on the sub-control board side in the spinning machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 39 is a flowchart of the sub-main loop processing on the sub-control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 40 is a flowchart of a sub-side power supply cutoff process on the sub-control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 41 is a flowchart of one command processing on the sub-control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 42 is a flowchart of an effect-related determination process when the start lever is operated on the sub-control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 43 is a flowchart of a battle effect execution enablement determination process on the sub-control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 44 is an example of a stay stage determination table on the sub-control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 45 is a flowchart of the effect determination process during AT on the sub-control board side in the spinning machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 46 is a flowchart of the revival possibility effect determination process on the sub-control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 47 is a flowchart of a process when the start lever is operated on the sub-control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 48 is a flowchart of the process during AT when the start lever is operated on the sub-control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 49 is a flowchart of the special precursor processing at the time of starting lever operation on the sub-control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 50 is a flowchart of the addition specialization process when the start lever is operated on the sub-control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 51 is a flowchart of the internal processing of the BB, which is advantageous when the start lever is operated on the sub-control board side, in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 52 is a flowchart of the first cylinder stop reception processing on the sub-control board side in the rotating cylinder type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 53 is a flowchart of the second cylinder stop acceptance processing on the sub-control board side in the rotating cylinder type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 54 is a flowchart of the third cylinder stop effect-related determination process on the sub-control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 55 is a flowchart of the third cylinder stop acceptance processing on the sub-control board side in the rotating cylinder type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 56 is a flowchart of the menu screen display control process on the sub-control board side in the spinning machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 57 is a flowchart of the standby screen display control process on the sub-control board side in the spinning machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 58 is a standby screen transition image diagram of the rotating body type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 59 is a memory map configuration diagram applicable to the gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 60 is an action diagram in a winning game of a re-game applicable to the gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 61 is an action diagram in a winning game of a re-game applicable to the gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 62 is an action diagram in a winning game of replay applicable to the gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 63 is an operation diagram of the winning game of the re-game applicable to the gaming machine according to this example. It is a front view which shows the outline of the relative position of a reel and a hopper. It is a side sectional view which shows the outline of the relative position of a reel and a hopper. It is a perspective view which shows the internal structure of a hopper. It is a front view which shows the outline of the relative position of a reel and a hopper. It is a perspective view which shows the arrangement of the medal auxiliary tank HS and the fullness detection electrode DE. It is a schematic diagram which shows the size and position of a fullness detection electrode and a screw BS. It is a figure which shows the structure of a reel band. It is a figure which shows the structure of a reel band. FIG. 72 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (third sheet) on the main control board side in the rotating cylinder type gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 73 is a flowchart of the freeze execution determination process at the start of rotation on the main control board side in the spinning machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 74 is a flowchart of the reel rotation start preparation process on the main control board side in the spinning machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 75 is a flowchart of a stop freeze execution determination process on the main control board side in the spinning machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 76 is an image diagram of an AT start effect execution in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 77 is an image of a lamp unit lighting configuration applicable to the rotating drum type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 78 is an example of a situation-specific notification mode applicable to the spinning machine according to this example. FIG. 79 is an example of a payout configuration applicable to the spinning machine according to this example. FIG. 80 is an example 1 of a lighting mode of a max bet lamp applicable to the spinning machine according to this example. FIG. 81 is an example 2 of a lighting mode of a max bet lamp applicable to the rotating drum type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 82 is an example 3 of the lighting mode of the max bet lamp, which can be applied to the rotating drum type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 83 is an example 4 of a lighting mode of the max bet lamp applicable to the rotating drum type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 84 is an example 1 of an action at the time of operation of the settlement button, which is applicable to the spinning machine according to this example. FIG. 85 is an example 2 of an action at the time of operation of the settlement button, which is applicable to the spinning machine according to this example. FIG. 86 is an example 3 of the action at the time of operating the settlement button, which is applicable to the rotating drum type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 87 is an example 4 of the action at the time of operating the settlement button, which is applicable to the spinning machine according to this example. FIG. 88 (a) is a timing chart showing a first aspect of timing of power supply to the gaming machine and power off, and FIG. 88 (b) is a second of timing of power supply to the gaming machine and power off. It is a timing chart which shows the aspect of. FIG. 89A is a table showing the relationship between the state of the setting key switch in the first aspect, the power supply state, and the situation, and FIG. 89B is the state of the setting key switch in the second aspect. It is a table showing the relationship between the power supply state and the situation. FIG. 90 is a timing chart showing a process of adding credits, a process of paying out game medals, and a process of outputting a game medium granting sound. FIG. 91 is a front view showing the arrangement of electronic components mounted on the main control board M. FIG. 92 is a side view showing the arrangement of electronic components mounted on the main control board M. FIG. 93 is a flowchart of the AT state transition control process on the main control board side, which can be applied to the spinning machine according to this example. FIG. 94 is a winning information generation table in the spinning machine according to this example. FIG. 95 is an effect group number determination table 1 in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 96 is an effect group number determination table 2 in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 97 is an effect group number determination table 3 in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 98 is an example of the configuration of the lottery table in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 99 is an image of performing an effect during AT in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 100 is an image of executing an effect during AT in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 101 is an image 3 of an effect execution during AT in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 102 is an image of performing an effect during AT in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 103 is a list of symbol combinations 4 in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 104 is a list of conditional devices in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 105 is a list of small winning combination, re-gaming combination, and bonus lottery probability in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 106 is an overall electrical configuration diagram of the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 107 is a main flowchart on the main control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 108 is a flowchart of a setting change device control process on the main control board side in the spinning machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 109 is a flowchart of an unrecoverable error process on the main control board side in the spinning machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 110 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (first sheet) on the main control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 111 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (second sheet) on the main control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 112 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (third sheet) on the main control board side in the spinning machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 113 is a flowchart of an internal lottery execution process on the main control board side in the spinning machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 114 is a flowchart of the AT state transition control process (first sheet) on the main control board side in the spinning machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 115 is a flowchart of the AT state transition control process (second sheet) on the main control board side in the spinning machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 116 is a flowchart of the AT state transition control process (third sheet) on the main control board side in the spinning machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 117 is a flowchart of the AT state transition control process (fourth sheet) on the main control board side in the spinning machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 118 is an example table of the transition of the state related to AT in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 119 is a flowchart of the AT lottery execution process on the main control board side in the spinning machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 120 is a flowchart of the condition device number management process on the main control board side in the spinning machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 121 is a flowchart of a game number addition execution process on the main control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 122 is a flowchart of a freeze lottery execution process on the main control board side in the spinning machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 123 is a flowchart of the reel rotation start preparation process on the main control board side in the spinning machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 124 is a flowchart of the remaining game number management process on the main control board side in the spinning machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 125 is a flowchart of the RT state transition control process on the main control board side in the spinning machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 126 is an RT state transition diagram of the spinning machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 127 is a flowchart of an AT-in-time state start control process on the main control board side in the spinning machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 128 is an AT state transition diagram of the spinning machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 129 is a flowchart of the game section transition control process on the main control board side in the rotating cylinder type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 130 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing on the main control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 131 is a flowchart of a power supply cutoff process on the main control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 132 is a flowchart of a sub-side program start process on the sub-control board side in the spinning machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 133 is a flowchart of the sub-main loop processing on the sub-control board side in the spinning machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 134 is a flowchart of the sub-side power supply cutoff process on the sub-control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 135 is a flowchart of one command processing on the sub-control board side in the spinning machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 136 is a table showing the relationship between the type of effect and the operation (reproduction) start timing of the effect. FIG. 137 is a flowchart of a process when the start lever is operated on the sub-control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 138 is a flowchart of a process during AT when the start lever is operated on the sub-control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 139 is a flowchart of the special precursor processing at the time of starting lever operation on the sub-control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 140 is a flowchart of the addition specialization process when the start lever is operated on the sub-control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 141 is a flowchart of the internal processing of the BB, which is advantageous when the start lever is operated on the sub-control board side, in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 142 is a flowchart of the first cylinder stop reception processing on the sub-control board side in the rotating cylinder type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 143 is a flowchart of the second cylinder stop acceptance processing on the sub-control board side in the rotating cylinder type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 144 is a flowchart of the processing at the time of receiving the third cylinder stop on the sub-control board side in the rotating cylinder type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 145 is a flowchart of the effect content determination process on the sub-control board side in the spinning machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 146 is a subroutine showing a scenario lottery table determination process on the sub-control board side in the spinning machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 147 is a table showing a scenario lottery table (A) and a production lottery table distribution table (B) in the spinning machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 148 is a table showing an effect lottery table in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 149 is a schematic view showing an example of an effect that progresses by the effect content determination process in the rotating body type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 150 shows an effect selection probability table (A) and a scenario selection probability table (B) in the spinning machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 151 is an effect selection probability table (A) and a scenario selection probability table (B) in the spinning machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 152 shows an effect selection probability table (A) and a scenario selection probability table (B) in the spinning machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 153 shows an effect selection probability table (A) and a scenario selection probability table (B) in the spinning machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 154 is an effect selection probability table (A) and a scenario selection probability table (B) in the spinning machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 155 is an effect selection probability table (A) and a scenario selection probability table (B) in the spinning machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 156 is an image diagram showing an effect in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 157 is an image diagram showing an effect in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 158 is an image diagram showing an effect in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 159 is an AT state transition diagram in the rotating cylinder type gaming machine according to the modified example 1-1 from the third embodiment. FIG. 160 is a flowchart showing a part of the AT state transition control process on the main control board side in the spinning machine according to the modification 1-1 from the third embodiment. FIG. 161 is a flowchart showing a part of the AT state transition control process on the main control board side in the rotating cylinder type gaming machine according to the modification 1-1 from the third embodiment. FIG. 162 is an example table of transition of the state related to AT in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the modification 1-1 from the third embodiment. FIG. 163 is a flowchart showing a scenario lottery table determination process in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the modification 1-1 from the third embodiment. FIG. 164 is an effect selection probability table (A) and a scenario selection probability table (B) in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the modification 1-1 from the third embodiment. FIG. 165 is an AT state transition diagram in the rotating cylinder type gaming machine according to the modified example 1-2 from the third embodiment. FIG. 166 is a flowchart showing a part of the AT state transition control process on the main control board side in the rotating cylinder type gaming machine according to the modification 1-2 from the third embodiment. FIG. 167 is an example table of the transition of the state related to AT in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the modification 1-2 from the third embodiment. FIG. 168 is a flowchart showing a scenario lottery table determination process in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the modification 1-2 from the third embodiment. FIG. 169 is an effect selection probability table (A) and a scenario selection probability table (B) in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the modification 1-2 from the third embodiment. FIG. 170 is a block diagram (A) showing an RT state transition diagram and a block diagram (B) showing an AT state transition diagram in the spinning machine according to the modified example 1-3 from the third embodiment. be. FIG. 171 is a block diagram showing an AT state transition diagram of the fourth embodiment. FIG. 172 is a flowchart of the AT state transition control process (first sheet) on the main control board side in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 173 is a flowchart of the AT state transition control process (second sheet) on the main control board side in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 174 is a diagram showing an effect performed in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 175 is an execution image diagram of a rare role suggestion effect applicable to this example. FIG. 176 is an execution image diagram of a rare role suggestion effect applicable to this example. FIG. 177 is an execution image diagram of a rare role suggestion effect applicable to this example. FIG. 178 is an example of a selection mode of a rare role suggestion effect applicable to this example. FIG. 179 is a flowchart of the freeze lottery execution process on the main control board side in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 180 is an image diagram of button effect execution in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 181 is a selection candidate character determination image diagram applicable to this example. FIG. 182 is a selection candidate character determination image diagram applicable to this example. FIG. 183 is a selection candidate character determination image diagram applicable to this example. FIG. 184 is a selection candidate character determination image diagram applicable to this example. FIG. 185 is a back lamp effect execution image diagram applicable to this example. FIG. 186 is a back lamp effect execution image diagram applicable to this example. FIG. 187 is a back lamp effect execution image diagram applicable to this example. FIG. 188 is a push order navigation execution image diagram applicable to this example. FIG. 189 is a push order navigation execution image diagram applicable to this example. FIG. 190 is an example of the volume and BGM tempo configuration applicable to this example. FIG. 191 is a list of basic specifications of the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 192 is a list of reel arrangements in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 193 is a symbol combination list 1 in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 194 is a symbol combination list 2 in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 195 is a symbol combination list 3 in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 196 is a list of conditional devices in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 197 is a list of small winning combination, re-gaming combination, and bonus lottery probability in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 198 is a main flowchart on the main control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 199 is a flowchart of a setting change device control process on the main control board side in the spinning machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 200 is a flowchart of an unrecoverable error process on the main control board side in the spinning machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 201 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (first sheet) on the main control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 202 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (second sheet) on the main control board side in the spinning machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 203 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (third sheet) on the main control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 204 is a flowchart of the internal lottery execution process on the main control board side in the spinning machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 205 is a flowchart of the AT state transition control process on the main control board side in the spinning machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 206 is a diagram showing a low probability advantageous section table (left) and a high probability advantageous section table (right). FIG. 207 is a flowchart of the condition device number management process on the main control board side in the spinning machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 208 is a flowchart of the reel rotation start preparation process on the main control board side in the spinning machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 209 is a flowchart of the remaining game number management process on the main control board side in the spinning machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 210 is a flowchart of the RT state transition control process on the main control board side in the spinning machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 211 is an RT state transition diagram of the spinning machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 212 is a flowchart of the AT state start control process on the main control board side in the spinning machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 213 is an AT state transition diagram in the rotating cylinder type gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 214 is a flowchart of the game section transition control process on the main control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 215 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing on the main control board side in the spinning machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 216 is a flowchart of a rotating cylinder drive control process on the main control board side in the rotating cylinder type gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 217 is a flowchart of a rotating cylinder drive control process on the main control board side in the rotating cylinder type gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 218 is an image diagram relating to the rotation operation of the reel in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 219 is a flowchart of a power supply cutoff process on the main control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 220 is a diagram showing an outline of an advantageous section remaining game number counter, a difference number counter, a lighting flag, and an advantageous section flag stored in a certain storage area of the built-in RAMC 120. FIG. 221 is a timing chart showing the order of end processing of the advantageous section. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the structure of a 7-segment display, and the storage area for turning on or off 8 LEDs. It shows a state in which lighting control is performed by dynamic control of four 7-segment displays. FIG. 223 (a) shows a state in which the 7-segment display D is lit and controlled, FIG. 223 (b) shows a state in which the 7-segment display A is lit and controlled, and FIG. 223 (c) shows a state in which the 7-segment display A is lit. FIG. 223 (d) shows a state in which the segment display B is lit and controlled, FIG. 223 (d) shows a state in which the 7-segment display C is lit and controlled, and FIG. 223 (e) shows a state in which the 7-segment display D is lit and controlled. Indicates the state of being. FIG. 224 (a) is a diagram showing the processing of the difference number counter for each game (for each unit game). FIG. 224 (b) is a diagram showing processing of a counter for the number of games remaining in an advantageous section for each game (for each unit game). FIG. 225 is a diagram showing how the difference number counter value changes as the game progresses. FIG. 226 is a diagram showing how the difference number counter value changes as the game progresses. FIG. 227 is a diagram showing how the difference number counter value changes as the game progresses. FIG. 228 is a diagram showing how the difference number counter value changes as the game progresses. FIG. 229 (a) is a diagram showing the processing of the difference number counter for each game (for each unit game). FIG. 229 (b) is a diagram showing processing of a counter for the number of games remaining in an advantageous section for each game (for each unit game). FIG. 230 is a table showing the number of values for determining the winning probability of each of the conditional devices in each of the plurality of gaming states. FIG. 231 is an RT state transition diagram (upper row) and an AT state transition diagram (lower row) realized by the table shown in FIG. 230. FIG. 232 (a-1) is a table showing the advantageous section transition lottery in the general public, and FIG. 232 (a-2) is a table for comparing with the advantageous section transition lottery (a-2) in the BB interior. Yes, FIG. 232 (b-1) is a table showing the advantageous section transition lottery in the general, and FIG. 232 (b-2) is a table showing the advantageous section transition lottery in the BB, and FIG. 232 ( c-1) is a table showing the relationship between the advantageous section transition lottery and the AT winning in the general, and FIG. 232 (c-2) is a table showing the relationship between the advantageous section transition lottery and the AT winning in the inside of the BB. be. FIG. 233 is a list of basic specifications of the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 234 is a list of reel arrangements in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 235 is a symbol combination list 1 in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 236 is a symbol combination list 2 in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 237 is a symbol combination list 3 in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 238 is a symbol combination list 4 in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 239 is a symbol combination list 5 in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 240 is a list of conditional devices in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 241 is a list of small winning combination, re-gaming combination, and bonus lottery probability in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 242 is a list of small winning combination, re-gaming combination, and bonus lottery probability in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 243 is an RT transition diagram of the spinning machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 244 shows the winning rate of the winning 01 in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment, while the RB is not operating and the RB is operating. FIG. 245 is a list of basic specifications of the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 246 is a list of reel arrangements in the spinning machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 247 is a symbol combination list 1 in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 248 is a symbol combination list 2 in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 249 is a symbol combination list 3 in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 250 is a symbol combination list 4 in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 251 is a list of conditional devices in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 252 is a list of small winning combination, re-gaming combination, and bonus lottery probability in the spinning machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 253 is an RT state transition diagram of the spinning machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 254 is an AT state transition diagram of the spinning machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIGS. 255 (a) and 255 (b) are diagrams showing changes in the RT state and the AT state. FIG. 256 is a list of basic specifications of the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 257 is a list of reel arrangements in the spinning machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 258 is a symbol combination list 1 in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 259 is a symbol combination list 2 in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 260 is a symbol combination list 3 in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 261 is a symbol combination list 4 in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 262 is a list of symbol combinations 5 in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 263 is a symbol combination list 6 in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 264 is a list of conditional devices in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 265 is a list of small winning combination, re-gaming combination, and bonus lottery probability in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 266 is an RT transition diagram of the spinning machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 267 is an image diagram of a bonus winning game in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 268 is an RT transition diagram of the spinning machine according to the first modification from the ninth embodiment. FIG. 269 is a table relating to the state ratio in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 270 is an AT state transition diagram of the spinning machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 271 is an AT state transition diagram of the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the first modification from the ninth embodiment. FIG. 272 is an operation diagram relating to another configuration applicable to the rotating drum type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 273 is a diagram relating to a state ratio applicable to the rotating drum type gaming machine according to this example.

First, the meaning of each term in the present specification will be described. A "random number" is a random number used in a lottery (a lottery by an electronic computer, which may also be called a lottery) for determining some kind of game content in a spinning-type game machine, and is a random number in a narrow sense. It also includes pseudo-random numbers (for example, hard random numbers as random numbers, built-in random numbers generated by a main control chip including a CPU, and soft random numbers as pseudo-random numbers). For example, so-called "basic random numbers" that affect the outcome of the game, specifically, "winning random numbers" related to special roles and winning roles (small roles, replaying roles) for transitioning to special games, etc. Can be mentioned. The term "CPU" is synonymous with what is well known in the art, and is not limited to the architecture (CISC, RISC, number of bits, etc.) and processing performance used. "Power outage" means that the power supply voltage supplied to the gaming machine is below a certain level regardless of whether or not the power switch provided in the gaming machine is operated. For example, power supply It also includes the interruption of power supply due to unforeseen circumstances such as damage to the unit or power outage. "ROM" is synonymous with what is well known in the art, and is "1" if the element configuration is conductive when a current for reading data is applied to physically hold information (for example, "1" for conduction. If the element configuration does not, it will be "0"). RAM is synonymous with what is well known in the industry and holds information electrically (for example, when a current for reading data is given, it is "1" if it is stored, and if it is not stored. It is set to "0". It should be noted that it is generally configured to supply backup power to a part or all of the data held in the RAM at the time of power failure). The "game state" corresponds to, for example, a special game state in which a game medal is easy to obtain and is advantageous for the player (a so-called big hit game, which is called a bonus game, a first-class BB, a second-class BB, or the like. ), The winning rate of the re-gaming combination is higher (or lower) than the normal gaming state in which the winning rate of the re-gaming combination is a predetermined value. Examples include the reel stop order for winning a medal, an AT (assist time) state in which a stop position can be notified, and an ART (assist replay time) state in which the RT state and the AT state are combined. Further, even in the normal gaming state, the lottery probability of transitioning to the RT state, the AT in progress state, and the ART in progress state is different, the high probability normal game state, the low probability normal game state, etc. (in this example, it is referred to as the lottery state. ). In addition, there is no problem even if the game states are combined {Furthermore, these game states and functions (for example, a lottery for shifting to the AT state, output of a notification instruction related to the reel stop order, etc.) control the game progress. There is no problem if all are mounted on the main control board side}. Further, in this example, the AT-related state and the RT state are described separately, and the RT state is referred to as "RT1" and the AT-related state is referred to as "normal gaming state". The state related to ART may be collectively referred to as a "normal gaming state" or the like as a state related to ART. The "winning combination" is a type (or condition device number) of a conditional device won by an internal lottery (sometimes referred to as an internal lottery). The "notification state" is a state related to an AT that can execute the push order navigation described later, and even if the game is won by a conditional device in which the push order navigation is not executed because the winning combination does not differ depending on the reel stop order. , If the state related to AT is a state in which push order navigation can be executed, it is configured to be a "notification state". The "counter value" is also referred to as "the number of playable notification games", and is the number of remaining AT games or the counter value of the AT counter M60, which will be described later. For example, when the "number of playable notification games" is 1 or more (the game in which "0" is set may be included), the push order navigation described later can be executed. In addition, as the "number of playable notification games", the difference in the number of game media obtained based on the winning of the small winning combination (mainly the pushing order bell role) (the number of payouts minus the input number) and the number of pushes. The number of times the winning bell role is won may be adopted. Further, the "special notification state" is a state that is most advantageous to the player among the states related to the AT, and in this example, it is referred to as an "additional specialization state". Further, the "specific condition" is a condition in which the AT counter value can be subtracted, and the specific condition is, for example, that one game is completed, a predetermined combination (for example, a push order bell combination) is won, and the like. "Type 1 special bonus" is a bonus that increases the number of combinations of symbols related to winning for each specified number, or increases the probability that the condition device related to winning for each specified number will operate, and is determined in advance. It operates when the game is played and can be continued until the result of the game is not more than 12 times, and is sometimes called RB (regular bonus). The "first-class special bonus continuous operation device" is a device that can continuously operate the first-class special bonus, and is activated when a specific combination of symbols is displayed and is predetermined. The operation is terminated, and it may be called BB (Big Bonus) or Type 1 BB. "Type 2 special bonus" is a bonus that activates the condition device related to winning regardless of the result of the winning combination, and it operates when it is determined in advance, and the result of one game can be obtained. In that case, the operation is terminated, and it may be called CB (challenge bonus). The "type 2 special accessory continuous operation device" is a device that can continuously operate the type 2 special accessory, and is activated when a specific combination of symbols is displayed and is predetermined. The operation is terminated in the meantime, and it may be called MB (middle bonus) or type 2 BB. The "ordinary accessory" is an accessory that increases the number of combinations of symbols related to winning for each specified number, or increases the probability that the condition device related to winning for each specified number operates, and is a specific symbol. It operates when the combination is displayed and ends when the result of one game is obtained, and may be referred to as SB (single bonus). The "all JACIN type" is a configuration in which when a first-class BB combination is won, it is regarded as JACIN, and the first-class BB is always in RB during execution. Further, the "JACIN lottery type" is a configuration in which non-RB and RB are repeatedly executed when the first type BB is executed. The "uncontrolled reel" is a reel in which the pull-in control that can be executed after the stop operation is not executed is not executed, and the reel is stopped at the nearest reel position that can be stopped from the reel position in which the stop operation is accepted. It is a reel of. The "all CB type" is a configuration in which CB is always in progress when the second type BB is executed. The "CB transition lottery type" is a configuration in which non-CB and CB are repeatedly executed when the second type BB is executed.

It should be noted that this embodiment is merely an example, and relates to the order of each step regarding various processes such as the location and function where each means exists, the timing of turning on / off the flag, the name of the means responsible for the process of each step, and the like. It is not limited to the following aspects. Further, the above-described embodiments and modifications should not be limitedly understood to be applied to specific ones, and may be any combination. For example, it should be understood that a modification of one embodiment is a modification of another embodiment, even if one modification and another modification are described independently. It should be understood that a combination of the modified example and the other modified example is also described.

(The present embodiment)
Here, before explaining each component, the features (outline) of the rotating cylinder type gaming machine P according to the present embodiment will be described. Hereinafter, each element will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

First, with reference to FIG. 1 (FIG. 2 for a part of the configuration), the basic structure on the front side of the rotating cylinder type gaming machine P according to the present embodiment will be described. The revolving gaming machine P mainly consists of a front door (also called a front door), a back box (also called a cabinet or a base), a reel unit installed in the back box, a hopper device, a power supply unit E, and a main control. It is composed of a board M (a board on which a main control chip C including a CPU MC is mounted) and a sub control board S (a board on which a sub control chip SC including a CPU SC is mounted). Hereinafter, these will be described in order.

<Front door DU>
The front door DU includes a mechanism for making the game state visible, a mechanism for enabling input of the game medium, a mechanism for operating the reel unit, and other mechanisms. Specifically, as a mechanism for making the game state visible, the reel window D160, the input number indicator lamp D210, the start lamp D180, the re-game lamp D290, the insertable lamp D300, the special game status display device D250, and the number of credits. A display device D200, a payout number display device (push order display device) D270 (sometimes referred to as a push order display device D270), an AT counter value display device D280, an advantageous section display YH, and the like are attached. In addition, as a mechanism for enabling the insertion of the game medium and the input of the number of bets (number of bets), the medal insertion slot D170, the bet button D220, and the mechanism for allowing the inserted game medium to be paid out are settled. Button D60 is attached. A start lever D50 and a stop button D40 are attached as a mechanism for operating the reel. The rotating body type gaming machine in the present embodiment is a player to which a start lever D50, a stop button D40, a medal slot D170, a bet button D220, a settlement button D60, a sub input button SB, a cross key SB2, etc. are attached. It is equipped with an operation console that protrudes to the side. Hereinafter, each element will be described in detail.

<Mechanism for making the game state visible>
Next, the main part of the mechanism for making the gaming state visible will be described. The reel window D160 is a transparent member formed of a synthetic resin or the like that constitutes a part of the front door DU, and is configured so that the reel unit installed in the gaming machine frame can be visually recognized through the reel window D160. Further, the input number indicator lamp D210 is composed of three LEDs, and the same number of LEDs as the number of medals currently bet (inserting the game medals necessary for starting one game) are lit. It is configured as. Specifically, the input number indicator lamp D210 is composed of three LEDs (lamps) of a 1-bet lamp D211, a 2-bet lamp D212, and a 3-bet lamp D213, and one game medal is bet. In that case, the 1-bet lamp D211: lights up, the 2-bet lamp D212: turns off, the 3-bet lamp D213: turns off, and if there are two game medals bet, the 1-bet lamp D211: lights up, and the 2-bet lamp D212 : Lights up, 3-bet lamp D213: turns off, and when there are 3 game medals bet, 1-bet lamp D211: lights up, 2-bet lamp D212: lights up, and 3-bet lamp D213: lights up (re-game). This is not the case in the next game where is stopped and displayed, and details will be described later). Further, the start lamp D180 is composed of LEDs and lights up when the operation of the start lever D50 is valid (operation is accepted), and the operation of the start lever D50 is invalid (operation is not accepted). It is configured to turn off in some cases. Further, the re-game lamp D290 is composed of LEDs, and is configured to be turned on when the re-game is stopped and displayed, and turned off when the next game when the re-game is stopped and displayed is completed. Further, the insertable lamp D300 is lit (may be blinking) when the insertion of the game medal into the medal insertion slot D170 is effective, or when the operation of the bet button D220 is effective, and the insertion of the game medal is performed. It is configured to turn off when it is invalid or when the operation of the bet button D220 is invalid. Further, the special game status display device D250 is configured by a 7-segment display, and is configured to display the total number of payouts paid out during the special game. It should be noted that the special game status display device D250 may not be provided, and in such a configuration, the total number of payouts may be made by the effect display device S40 (also referred to as the second information display unit) described later. By configuring to display, the player can recognize the total number of payouts paid out during the special game, and can be a user-friendly gaming machine. Further, the credit number display device D200 is configured by a 7-segment display, and is configured to display the total number of medals (number of credits) stored in the game machine as medals possessed by the player. Further, the payout number display device (push order display device) D270 is composed of a 7-segment display, and the number of game medals currently paid out and the reel stop order (left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, right stop button). The winning combination may differ depending on the stop order of D43) {so-called push order combination (sometimes referred to as a push order combination), but when the winning combination or the symbol combination displayed as stopped is different. Is generally configured so that the profit margin (number of payouts, RT state after that, etc.) given to the player can be different}, which is the most advantageous reel for the player in the game. It is configured to notify the stop order (the notification may be referred to as push order navigation). In this way, the payout number display device (push order display device) D270 is configured to be able to execute two displays, that is, the number of game medals currently paid out and the reel stop order that is most profitable to the player. The display mode is such that the player does not misunderstand which of the two displays is being executed, and the details of the display mode will be described later. Further, the AT counter value display device D280 plays a game according to the push order navigation display displayed on the push order display device D270 (also referred to as the first information display unit) among the states related to AT (details will be described later). It is possible to display the number of games that can stay in a state related to AT that is advantageous for the player (in this example, a push order navigation state, which may also be referred to as a notification game, details will be described later), which is guaranteed when the game progresses. It is configured as. It should be noted that the AT counter value display device D280 may not be provided, and in such a configuration, the player may be configured to display the number of games that can stay in the AT state on the effect display device S40. Can recognize the number of games whose state regarding the advantageous AT is guaranteed, and can be a user-friendly gaming machine. The payout number display device (push order display device) D270 may be configured to be divided into two devices, a payout number display device and a push order display device.

Further, the advantageous section indicator YH is composed of LEDs, and is configured to be turned on when it is an "advantageous section" and turned off when it is not an "advantageous section" (for lighting and extinguishing timing). Will be described later). Here, in the revolving gaming machine according to this example, as in the conventional revolving gaming machine, it is easy to obtain a game medal, which is an advantageous special gaming state for the player (so-called big hit game, bonus game). , 1st type BB, 2nd type BB, etc.), the winning rate of the replaying combination is higher (or lower) than the normal gaming state where the winning rate of the replaying combination is a predetermined value. The re-game probability fluctuation game state (RT state), the stop order of the reels for winning the winning combination, the AT (assist time) state in which the stop position can be notified, and the RT state and the AT state are A combined ART (assist replay time) state, etc. can be taken, but apart from these "game states", any one of the three "game sections" of "normal section", "waiting section" and "advantageous section". Can be set. In this example, the "waiting section" is not set, but one of the "normal section" and the "advantageous section" is set. Of these, the "advantageous section" is positioned as being relatively more advantageous to the player than the other "game sections", for example, the "gaming state" is in the AT state or the ART state. It is associated with an "advantageous section". That is, when the "game state" is in the AT state or the ART state, the advantageous section display YH lights up, but as will be described later, the setting control of the "game section" is also the setting control of the "game state". Similarly, since it is performed on the main control board side that controls the progress of the game, whether or not the progress of the game is relatively advantageous to the player depending on the lighting / extinguishing status of the advantageous section indicator YH. It is possible to convey to the player without telling a lie. As will be described later, if the "advantageous section" continues until the predetermined upper limit number of games (for example, 1500 games) is reached, the "normal section" is forcibly set, but in that case, it remains. Since the state related to AT is also forcibly terminated (the information for maintaining the AT state is cleared and initialized), the change of the set "game section" also affects the transition to the "game state". It can be given, and as a result, it is possible to automatically suppress the significant increase in gambling due to the "game state" such as the AT state or the ART state, which has a relatively high degree of freedom in design. It is. As described above, if the "advantageous section" continues until the predetermined upper limit number of games (for example, 1500 games) is reached, the "normal section" is forcibly set, that is, the "advantageous section" ends. However, the end condition of the "advantageous section" is not limited to this. The end condition of the "advantageous section" in the spinning-type gaming machine according to this example is that the small winning combination with the largest number of payouts can be obtained among the small winning combination that constitutes the "pushing order combination (combination with pushing order)". Sequential navigation One execution (for example, if there are 7 cards, 3 cards, and 1 small game as the small game that constitutes the push order game, the 7 cards with the largest number of payouts can be obtained. If there is a push order combination that can acquire 7 or 1 cards depending on the push order and a push order role that can acquire 3 cards depending on the push order, the push order navigation that can acquire 3 cards is referred to here. (Not applicable to push order navigation) "or" Winning any of BB, RB, MB ", and" Arbitrary end condition (40G 1 set loop lottery non-winning (AT), fixed 32G The end condition is to satisfy "Progress (precursor), etc.)" or "Advantageous section 1500G". In the case of a specification that does not have a push order bell combination (example: there is a push order for replay to shift the RT state, but there is no small combination with a different number of payouts depending on the push order). The condition for ending the advantageous section of "one push order navigation that can acquire the small winning combination with the largest number of payouts" is excluded. Further, in the present embodiment, as the small winning combination constituting the push order combination, the small winning combination corresponding to the 11-card combination and the small combination including the small combination corresponding to the 1-card combination are configured, so that "the number of payouts is the largest". "Execution of push order navigation once that can win small wins" means to notify the push order in which 11 medals can be won (11 wins can be won).

<Mechanism for enabling input of game media>
Next, the main part of the mechanism for enabling the input of the game medium will be described. The medal slot D170 is a slot for inserting medals, and the game medals inserted in the slot are guided to the inside of the gaming machine under the condition that medals can be accepted. Further, as sensors for detecting the insertion of medals, the insertion reception sensor D10s, the first insertion sensor D20s, and the second insertion sensor D30s are provided inside the game machine, and are guided to the inside of the game machine. When it is determined that the game medal has been normally inserted, the inserted medal can be detected as a bet medal. Further, the bet button D220 is configured to be operable by the player, and is configured to be able to bet a stored medal (credit medal) by the operation. Further, the settlement button D60 is configured to be operable by the player, and the stored medals (credit medals) and / or the bet medals can be refunded to the player by the operation. There is. The game medals refunded by operating the settlement button D60 are configured to be paid out to the discharge port D240.

<Mechanism for operating the reel unit>
Next, the start lever D50 is configured to be operable by the player, and is configured to be able to start the operation of the reel by operation. Further, the stop button D40 includes a left stop button D41, a middle stop button D42, and a right stop button D43 that can be operated by the player, and the reel operations can be sequentially stopped by operating each stop button. Has been done.

<Other mechanisms provided on the front door DU>
Next, the main parts of other mechanisms provided in the front door DU will be described with reference to a perspective view showing the internal configuration of the rotating cylinder type gaming machine P by opening the front door DU of FIG. The front door DU has an effect display device S40 for displaying effects such as a notice effect and a background effect, and a game effect lamp D26 that can be lit in various lighting modes as a mechanism for enhancing the interest of the game. (Illustrated), a door substrate D for signal relay, a medal selector DS for detecting inserted medals, a speaker S20 capable of outputting sound, a middle panel (intermediate decorative panel) which is a member formed of synthetic resin or the like. , Upper panel D130, lower panel D140, and the like are provided. The effect display device S40 is attached to the upper part on the back surface side of the front door DU so that the display unit for displaying the effect or the like can be visually recognized through the fluoroscopic region formed on the upper panel. Further, the decorative lamp unit D150 and the LED lamp unit S10 have a light emitting source that emits light according to the progress of the game of the rotating cylinder type gaming machine P, and the decorative lamps are on the right side and the left side of the lower panel D140. The unit D150 is provided, and the LED lamp unit S10 is provided on each of the right side and the left side of the upper panel D130 (the decorative lamp unit D150 and the LED lamp unit S10 may be collectively referred to as a lamp unit). ). Further, a door substrate D is attached below the reel window D160 on the back surface of the front door DU, and input signals such as the above-mentioned stop button D40, start lever D50, and settlement button D60 are attached to the door substrate D. Is input, and has the function of a relay board that directly or processes the input signal and outputs it to the main control board M described later. Further, corresponding to the medal insertion slot D170, a medal selector DS, which will be described in detail later, is provided near the door substrate D on the back surface of the front door DU to detect medals inserted from the medal insertion slot D170 and to simplify the detection. It has a function of performing proper authenticity, guiding the proper medal to the hopper H40 described later, and returning the inappropriate medal to the medal tray D230 described later. Further, one speaker S20 is provided on each of the left and right below the door substrate D. The middle panel is an upper part of the operation console and a lower part of the upper panel D130, and is a panel part including the reel window described above. Further, the sub-input button SB and the cross-shaped key SB2 attached to the above-mentioned operation console D190 are an operation on the menu screen described later and a button repeated hitting effect on the sub-control board S side (a continuous hitting operation of the sub-input button SB). It is a member used for the progress of a mini-game (for example, an effect of success or failure of entering the "AT in progress") or the like (for example, an effect relating to whether or not a bonus has been won). The front door DU of the spinning machine P can detect the open / closed state of the medal tray D230 for receiving the game medal (or simply called a medal) released from the discharge port D240, and the front door DU. A door switch D80 is provided. Further, the front door DU is provided with a keyhole D260, and a key (door key) matching the shape of the keyhole D260 is inserted into the keyhole D260 {in addition, twisted in a predetermined direction (for example, clockwise)}. It is configured so that the front door DU can be opened. Further, in the present embodiment, the error state (door opening error, etc.) can be canceled by inserting the door key into the keyhole D260 {in addition, twisting it in a predetermined direction (for example, counterclockwise)}. There is. Further, a bet button lamp S50 is provided inside the bet button D220, and the bet button lamp S50 is composed of an LED controlled by the sub control board S, and the bet button lamp S50 is lit (or blinks). ), It is possible to make the player perceive that the operation of the bet button D220 is effective. Further, a stop button lamp S60 is provided inside the stop button D40 (provided in each of the three stop buttons of the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43), and the stop button lamp S60. Is composed of LEDs controlled by the sub-control board S, and the player indicates that the operation of the stop button D40 is effective depending on the presence / absence (or blinking) of the stop button lamp S60 and / or the lighting color. Can be perceived by. Since only the stop button lamp S60 corresponding to the effective stop button D40 is configured to light in the lighting color corresponding to the effective stop button D40, for example, the left stop button D41 is invalid. When the middle stop button D42 is valid and the right stop button D43 is valid, the stop button lamp S60 corresponding to the left stop button D41 is turned off, the stop button lamp S60 corresponding to the middle stop button D42 is turned on, and the right stop is stopped. As the stop button lamp S60 corresponding to the button D43 is lit, the lighting modes of the three stop button lamps S60 are configured to be different from each other. Further, by differentiating the lighting color and lighting mode of the stop button lamp S60 (may be different such as lighting / blinking or low-speed blinking / high-speed blinking), the push order navigation is executed. In the game, it may be configured so that the player can easily determine the stop button that should be stopped at present. For example, all the reels are rotating, and the pressing order of "left → middle → right" is correct (the correct answer). When the push order bell that is the maximum number of payouts is won, the stop button lamp corresponding to the left stop button blinks in white, and the stop button lamp corresponding to the middle stop button and the stop corresponding to the right stop button are stopped. When the button lamp is turned on in blue and then the player operates the left stop button to stop the left reel, the stop button lamp corresponding to the left stop button is turned off and the middle stop button is supported. The stop button lamp may be configured to blink in white, and the stop button lamp corresponding to the right stop button may be lit in blue.

Next, the back box (also referred to as a cabinet or a substrate) and each device installed in the back box will be described. A reel unit is attached to substantially the center of the back box so that a part thereof can be visually recognized via the reel window D160. The reel unit includes a reel M50 and a drive source (stepping motor or the like) for the reel M50. Further, the reel M50 includes a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, and a right reel M53. Here, each reel portion is formed of synthetic resin or the like, and a plurality of symbols are drawn on the outer periphery of the reel portion (on the reel band MO). Then, based on the operation of each stop button on the start lever D50 and the stop button D40, it is configured to enable the rotation operation and the stop operation of the respective reel portions. Further, although not shown, LEDs (hereinafter, may be referred to as reel backlights and rotating cylinder backlights) are provided inside the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53, and when the LEDs are turned on. Is configured so that the light transmitted through the outer periphery of the reel portion can be visually recognized as if the outer periphery of the reel portion is lit (details of the back lamp effect, which is an effect using the rotating cylinder backlight, will be described later). Further, above the reel M50, a rotating cylinder K, which will be described later, for driving each reel (left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) is stored.

Further, above the reel M50, a main control board M, which will be described later, which controls the entire game, is stored, and on the left side of the reel M50, the effect display device S40, the LED lamp unit S10, and the speaker S20 shown in FIG. A sub-control board S, which will be described later, is stored, which controls various effects performed by using the above. The main control board M has a setting key switch M20 used for executing the setting change device control process (to change the setting) described later, and a setting / reset capable of changing the setting value and canceling an error. The button M30 is connected. Although the setting key switch M20 and the setting / reset button M30 are not shown in FIG. 2, they may be provided at appropriate positions such as on the main control board M (that is, the front door DU is opened). If not, it may be installed in a position where artificial access is difficult).

Below the reel M50, a hopper H40 for collecting inserted game medals and a medal payout device H for paying out game medals are provided, and a power supply board for supplying power to the entire spinning machine P. E is stored. The game medals paid out from the medal payout device H are paid out from the discharge port D240 through the coin shooter D90. Further, on the front surface of the power supply board E (which may also be referred to as a power supply unit E), a power switch E10 for turning on the power of the rotating drum type gaming machine P is also provided. The details of the medal payout device H will be described later.

<Medal Selector DS>
Next, the medal selector DS will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing a path (selector) of a game medal inserted into the medal insertion slot D170 inside the rotating drum type gaming machine P. The medal selector DS is provided with an insertion reception sensor D10s that serves as a passage for game medals inserted from the medal insertion slot D170 near the door board D, and below the insertion reception sensor D10s, a game medal ejection port D240 is provided. A coin shooter D90 or the like is provided to guide the user. The insertion reception sensor D10s has a function of sorting the game medals inserted from the medal insertion slot D170 mainly based on the dimensions and accepting only the game medals conforming to the standard dimensions, and it is determined that this function does not conform. The medals (or other foreign objects) that have been awarded are configured to be refunded to the outlet D240 by the blocker D100. If a game medal is inserted before the player operates the start lever D50 (when the insertion of the game medal is valid), the game medals are selected by the insertion reception sensor D10s, and only those that satisfy the standard are satisfied. The medals that have been inserted into the hopper H40 and do not meet the standards are returned to the discharge port D240 through the coin shooter D90. On the other hand, when the game medal is inserted after the start lever D50 is operated (when the insertion of the game medal is not valid), the inserted game medal is inserted regardless of whether or not the standard is satisfied. Is returned to the discharge port D240 through the coin shooter D90. Further, a sensor related to medal insertion, which will be described in detail later, is provided inside the insertion reception sensor D10s (in the back of the flow path), and when a game medal that meets the dimensional standards and is accepted passes, the first insertion sensor D20s And, it is detected by the second input sensor D30s, and the signal is supplied to the main control board M which will be described later.

Next, the sensor related to the medal insertion will be described in detail. The game medal inserted into the medal insertion slot D170 first passes through the insertion reception sensor D10s. The input reception sensor D10s is a mechanical double sensor, and when the game medal passes, it is turned on by pressing the two protruding mechanisms, and the game medal can normally pass through the passage. .. Further, with such a configuration, when a foreign substance that is not a game medal (a foreign substance that does not satisfy the standard and has a diameter smaller than that of the game medal, for example) is inserted, the two protruding mechanisms are pressed. Not done. Since the medal cannot maintain the standing state, such a medal cannot pass through the passage (the medal collapses) and is returned to the discharge port D240 through the coin shooter D90 as described above. In addition, the input reception sensor D10s is configured to be able to determine an error (as a result, the blocker D100 may be turned off) even when the ON time is continuous for a predetermined time or longer. ..

When the game medal normally passes through the blocker D100, it passes through the first throwing sensor D20s and the second throwing sensor D30s immediately after passing. This throw-in sensor (first throw-in sensor D20s and second throw-in sensor D30s) is composed of two sensors (adjacently arranged at intervals smaller than the standard diameter of the game medal), and each sensor is turned on. -Various errors can be detected by monitoring the off status (the transition order of the on / off combination of the first input sensor D20s and the second input sensor D30s, etc.) and the on / off time. It is configured in.

<Medal payout device H>
Next, the medal payout device H will be described in detail with reference to the front view and the top view of the medal payout device H of FIG. The medal payout device H is operated by the settlement button in a state where credits (game medals electronically stored inside the game machine) or bet medals (medals inserted to start the game) are present. It will be activated when the game medal is paid out by winning or winning. When operating, first, the hopper motor H80 is driven to rotate the disc H50 around the disc rotation shaft H50a. Due to the rotation, the game medals in the medal payout device H displace the release urging means H70 and flow down from the game medal outlet H60 toward the discharge port D240. The payout sensor (first payout sensor H10s and second payout sensor H20s) is composed of two sensors, and the on / off status of each sensor (first payout sensor H10s and second payout sensor H20s on / off). It is configured to be able to detect various errors by monitoring the transition order of the off combination, etc.) and the on / off time. More specifically, for example, when the game medal exit H60 is normally passed, the first payout sensor H10s = off and the second payout sensor H20s = off due to the displacement of the release urging means H70. 1 payout sensor H10s = off, 2nd payout sensor H20s = off → 1st payout sensor H10s = on, 2nd payout sensor H20s = off → 1st payout sensor H10s = on, 2nd payout sensor H20s = on → 1st payout Since the sensor state transition is sensor H10s = off, second payout sensor H20s = on → first payout sensor H10s = off, second payout sensor H20s = off, if a movement contrary to this sensor state transition is detected, , It can be exemplified to configure it to be an error.

Next, FIG. 5 is a list of basic specifications of the rotating drum type gaming machine in the present embodiment. The spinning-type gaming machine according to this embodiment has a specified number (maximum number of game medals that can be bet in one game) of 3, and the number of frames of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53 is 20. The effective line for which the winning is determined is one of "left reel M51 upper stage, middle reel M52 middle stage, right reel M53 lower stage". The maximum number of payouts is 11, and the minimum number of payouts is one (the correspondence between the winning combination and the number of payouts will be described later). In addition, the priority winning order (pull-in priority order) is "replaying role-> small role (bell, watermelon, etc.)-> bonus". For example, when the replaying role and the bonus are established at the same time. , The symbol combination that becomes the re-game role is stopped and displayed, and the bonus cannot be won. In addition, when the bell and watermelon are established, if the stop button is pressed at the position where both can be retracted (the position within 4 frames to the stop position where the prize is won), priority is given to the small winning combination with a large number of payouts. It is configured to pull in. The configuration shown in the figure is just an example, and the number of frames on each reel can be changed (for example, changed to 21 frames), or the configuration of effective lines can be changed (for example, 5 horizontal lines and 2 diagonal lines). There is no problem even if it is changed to one line, left reel M51 lower stage, middle reel M52 middle stage, right reel M53 upper stage). In addition, as a pull-in control when a push order small combination that gives different benefits to the player depending on the push order is won, a small combination with a large number of payouts when operated in a predetermined correct push order. Is controlled to pull in with priority (number of sheets priority control), and if the operation is performed in the wrong answer pressing order different from the correct answer pressing order, the stop display is possible (within 4 frames from the stop operation). Control (number priority control) is performed to increase the possibility of winning among the (arranged) symbols (the most likely to win among the combinations of multiple symbols that can be won).

Next, FIG. 6 is a list of reel arrangements of the rotating drum type gaming machine in the present embodiment. As shown in the figure, the number of frames of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53 is 20 frames (0th to 19th), and the symbols are "black seven", "white seven", and " There are 10 types: "sheep", "blank", "bell", "replay A", "replay B", "watermelon A", "watermelon B", and "cherry". Here, the "blank" is a symbol included in the symbol combination constituting the winning combination like other symbols, and does not mean a symbol not constituting the winning combination, but a symbol constituting the winning combination including the "blank". As a combination, for example, "Watermelon B / Replay A / Blank" is replay 02. The configuration shown in the figure is just an example, and there is no problem even if the types of symbols are increased / decreased / changed.

Next, FIGS. 7 to 9 are a list of symbol combinations 1 to 3 in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, there are a plurality of symbol combinations for each condition device, and as will be described later, depending on the stop order and stop position of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53, any of them will occur. The combination of symbols is configured to be stopped and displayed on the effective line (the above-mentioned one line). Even if the same type of symbols are not aligned on the effective line, it is easy for the player to align the same symbols in a row on the line other than the effective line (in the case of watermelon, in the middle row). It is configured so that three watermelon patterns are aligned in a straight line on any of the reels, such as aligning them in a horizontal straight line). Further, in the present embodiment, a combination of symbols serving as a type 1 BB combination (a so-called type 1 special accessory continuous operation device, but hereinafter, may be simply referred to as a BB combination) is used. Type 1 BB-A (RB-A is operated continuously and ends with a payout of more than 264 sheets) "Sheep / Sheep / Sheep" and Type 1 BB-B (RB-B is operated continuously to end 132 sheets) "Black Seven / Black Seven / Black Seven" that ends with a payout that exceeds, and "White Seven / White Seven / that ends with a payout of more than 132 cards by continuously operating RB-B). It has three symbol combinations with "White Seven". In addition, in this embodiment, when the first-class BB combination is won and the BB is executed (the accessory is activated), one in all the games in the BB during the execution of the BB. It is configured to draw a winning combination (small combination, replaying combination) other than the winning combination by referring to the lottery table (a method in which the table referred to during the combination lottery is not switched during the execution of one BB). (Hereinafter, it may be referred to as an all-JACIN type). The format of the first-class BB combination is not limited to this, and may be configured so that the table referred to at the time of the combination lottery can be switched during the execution of one BB. Further, when the RT state is "RT1" and the symbol combination corresponding to the 14th to 16th replays 04 is stopped and displayed, the game is configured to shift to RT0 (for details of the RT state, refer to the details of the RT state. Will be described later). Since "RT0" is in an RT state that is more disadvantageous to the player than "RT1", the transition from "RT1" to "RT0" may be referred to as a fall. Further, when the symbol combination corresponding to the replay 05 corresponding to No. 17 is stopped and displayed, "Black Seven" can be stopped and displayed at the lower stage of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53, and the number 18 is displayed. When the symbol combination that becomes the corresponding replay 05 is stopped and displayed, "white seven" can be stopped and displayed in the lower row of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53 (details will be described later). ). Further, when the push order bell, which is the condition device of "winning-A1" to "winning-A6" described later, is won, the reels are stopped in the pushing order most advantageous to the player, and the reels are 21st to 27th. The symbol combinations corresponding to "Prize 01" to "Prize 03" are stopped and displayed, and 11 game medals are paid out, while the reels are stopped in a push order different from the push order that is most advantageous for the player. , The symbol combinations of "Prize 08" to "Prize 11" corresponding to Nos. 39 to 56 are stopped and displayed, and one game medal is paid out. In addition, "-" in the figure indicates that any symbol may be stopped and displayed. For example, "Bell-Bell" corresponding to No. 23 is an effective line of the left reel M51 and the right reel M53. If the bell is stopped and displayed on the top, 11 game medals can be obtained regardless of which symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line of the middle reel M52.

Next, FIG. 10 is a list of condition devices according to this embodiment. In the figure, the conditional device number is referred to as a winning number, and the conditional device number may be referred to as a winning number thereafter. In the present embodiment, the re-game combinations are provided from re-game-A to re-game-D3 (winning numbers 1 to 6), and are in the stop order and stop position of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53. Depending on the situation, the re-game combination to be stopped and displayed may be different. Here, in the present embodiment, as shown in the item of "condition device breakdown" in the rightmost column, according to the stop order and stop position of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53. It is configured so that multiple types of symbol combinations can be stopped and displayed, and among the multiple types of symbol combinations, the symbol combinations with the same winning number are grouped together and the item of "conditional device" which is the third column from the right. It is illustrated in. Specifically, for example, in the "re-game-A" which is a conditional device corresponding to the winning number 1, "re-game" is performed according to the stop order and stop position of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53. It is configured so that three types of symbol combinations of "01", "re-game 02", and "re-game 03" can be stopped and displayed. Further, "re-game 01" and the like are names of symbol combinations, and the symbol combinations that become "re-game 01" are configured so that there may be a plurality of types. In addition, a name such as "re-game 01" or a conditional device such as "re-game-A" may be referred to as a re-game combination, and a name such as "winning 01" or a conditional device such as "winning-A1" may be referred to. A player who has a symbol combination in which a game medal is paid out by displaying a stop may be called a small winning combination, and a condition that the BB is started by displaying a stop such as "Type 1 BB-A". The device may be referred to as a BB role. In addition, if the winning numbers 21 to 23 and 25 to 27 are won, the BB combination and the small combination will be won in duplicate, and in such a case, the symbol corresponding to the winning small combination will be stopped. When the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43 are operated at a position where they can be displayed, the symbol corresponding to the BB combination is not stopped and the symbol corresponding to the small combination is stopped and displayed, while the symbol corresponding to the small combination is stopped and displayed. When the left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, and right stop button D43 are operated at a position where the corresponding symbol does not stop and display (cannot be retracted), the symbol corresponding to the small combination does not stop and the symbol corresponding to the BB combination is not displayed. Is configured to stop and display. Specifically, for example, in the case of winning the "1st class BB-B + winning-C" which is the condition device of the winning number 21, the cherry which is "winning 12" or "winning 13" and the "1st class BB". Any of the black sevens that are "-B" can be stopped and displayed. More specifically, when the reels are stopped in the order of left reel M51 → middle reel M52 → right reel M53, (1) symbol numbers 0 to 4 are placed on the upper stage of the left reel M51 at the first stop (FIG. 6). When the left stop button D41 is operated at the operation timing at which (see the reel arrangement of) is located, the symbol number 4 corresponding to "winning 12" is stopped at the upper stage of the left reel M51, and the middle reel M52. And, regardless of the stop position of the right reel M53, "winning 12" is stopped and displayed. (2) When the left stop button D41 is operated at the operation timing in which the symbol numbers 5 to 12 are located on the upper stage of the left reel M51 at the first stop, "winning 13" is displayed on the upper stage of the left reel M51. The symbol numbers 6, 11 or 16 corresponding to the above are stopped, and "winning 13" is stopped and displayed regardless of the stop positions of the middle reel M52 and the right reel M53. (3-1) When the left stop button D41 is operated at the operation timing in which the symbol numbers 13 to 19 are located on the upper stage of the left reel M51 at the first stop, "1" is displayed on the upper stage of the left reel M51. The symbol number 17 or 19 corresponding to "Seed BB-B" is stopped. (3-2) When the middle stop button D42 is operated at the operation timing in which symbol numbers 14 to 18 are located in the middle of the middle reel M52 at the second stop, "1" is placed in the middle of the middle reel M52. The symbol number 18 corresponding to "Seed BB-B" is stopped, and then the right stop button D43 is operated at the operation timing in which the symbol numbers 13 to 17 are located at the lower stage of the right reel M53 at the third stop. In that case, the symbol number 17 corresponding to "Type 1 BB-B" is stopped at the lower stage of the right reel M53, and the BB combination is stopped and displayed. (3-3) When the middle stop button D42 is operated at the operation timing in which the symbol numbers 19 to 13 are located in the middle of the middle reel M52 at the second stop, "1" is placed in the middle of the middle reel M52. The symbol number 18 corresponding to "Seed BB-B" cannot be stopped, and none of the condition devices is stopped and displayed.

Next, in the "role" item, the role of the "conditional device" or the symbol combination that can be stopped and displayed is shown, and the "normal replay" corresponding to the winning number 1 is stopped. Regardless of the order in which the buttons are pressed, the RT state does not change. The replay combination is stopped and displayed. Regardless of this, it is a condition device related to the re-game in which the re-game combination that does not shift to the RT state is stopped and displayed, but by pushing backward (stopping the reels in the order of right reel M53 → middle reel M52 → left reel M51). , The range of symbol numbers 18 to 2 of the right reel M53, the range of symbol numbers 9 to 13 of the middle reel M52, and the range of symbol numbers 5 to 10 of the left reel M51 are located at the bottom of each reel. By operating the stop button at the timing, "White Seven" is stopped and displayed in the lower row of the right reel M53, middle reel M52, and left reel M51, and it seems that the white sevens are aligned in the lower row from the player's point of view. It is configured as. In addition, in the game that won the re-game-B and won the AT addition lottery, the AT addition lottery was won by executing the effect (details will be described later) to instruct to aim at "White Seven" by pushing backward. It is configured to notify the player to that effect. The "forward push black 7 set replay" corresponding to the winning number 3 is a conditional device related to the replay in which the replay combination whose RT state does not shift is stopped and displayed regardless of the order in which the stop buttons are pressed. Stop the reels in the order of left reel M51 → middle reel M52 → right reel M53), the range of symbol numbers 13 to 19 of the left reel M51, the range of symbol numbers 14 to 18 of the middle reel M52, and the right reel. By operating the stop button at the operation timing when the range of symbol numbers 13 to 17 of M53 is located at the bottom of each reel, "Black Seven" is placed at the bottom of the left reel M51, middle reel M52, and right reel M53. Is stopped and displayed, and it is configured so that the black sevens appear to be aligned in the lower row when viewed from the player. In addition, in the game that won the re-game-C and won the AT addition lottery, the AT addition lottery was won by executing the effect (details will be described later) to instruct to aim for "Black Seven" by pushing forward. It is configured to notify the player to that effect.

In addition, "RT maintenance RP1 ** (3 choices)" corresponding to the winning number 4 determines whether the first stop reel is the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, or the right reel M53 (operate any stop button). It is a condition device in which the re-game combination that is stopped and displayed may be different depending on (), and when the first stop reel is the left reel M51, the RT state does not shift to the re-game 01, the re-game 02, or the re-game 03. Is stopped and displayed, and when the first stop reel is set to the middle reel M52 or the right reel M53, the replay 04 in which the RT state can shift from "RT1" to "RT0" is stopped and displayed. In addition, the "RT maintenance RP * 1 * (3 choices)" corresponding to the winning number 5 determines whether the first stop reel is the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, or the right reel M53 (operate any stop button). It is a condition device in which the re-game combination to be stopped and displayed may be different depending on (whether or not), and when the first stop reel is set to the middle reel M52, the re-game 03 in which the RT state does not shift is stopped and displayed, and the first When the stop reel is the left reel M51 or the right reel M53, the replay 04 in which the RT state can shift from "RT1" to "RT0" is stopped and displayed. In addition, "RT maintenance RP ** 1 (3 choices)" corresponding to winning number 6 determines whether the first stop reel is the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, or the right reel M53 (operate any stop button). It is a condition device in which the re-game combination to be stopped and displayed may be different depending on (whether or not), and when the first stop reel is the right reel M53, the re-game 01 or the re-game 03 in which the RT state does not shift is stopped and displayed. When the first stop reel is the left reel M51 or the middle reel M52, the replay 04 in which the RT state can shift from "RT1" to "RT0" is stopped and displayed.

Further, the "push order bell 123" to "push order bell 321" corresponding to the winning numbers 7 to 12 are conditional devices in which the winning small winning combination may differ depending on which of the six reel stop orders is selected. For example, "left reel M51: 1, middle reel M52: 2, right reel M53: 3", and in the case of "123", stop in the order of pushing "left reel M51 → middle reel M52 → right reel M53". For example, in the case of "winning A-1" (winning number 7), stopping in the order of "123" = "left → middle → right" (correctly answering in the order of pressing) is the maximum number of winnings. The symbol combination that becomes "winning 01" that can acquire 11 game medals will be stopped and displayed. In addition, "123" and the like of "push order bell 123" indicate the push order (reel stop order) in which the maximum number of winning sheets in the winning number can be obtained. In addition, when the reels are stopped in a push order other than the push order in which the maximum number of sheets can be obtained, that is, if the correct answer cannot be obtained in the push order, one piece is paid out. Then, in the state related to AT such as "AT in progress", the push order of the re-game combination and the push order of the bell are navigated (the push order that gives the highest profit is displayed on the push order display device D270), and the "normal game state" is displayed. It is possible to create a plurality of gaming states in which the profit margins of the players are different, that is, the push order is not navigated to the states related to AT such as. The state related to AT will be described later.

In addition, the "common bell" corresponding to the winning number 13 can acquire 11 game medals, which is the maximum number of medals, regardless of which of the winning 04 to the winning 07 is stopped, that is, the maximum profit is obtained regardless of the pushing order. It is a conditional device that can be acquired, and is sometimes called a bell regardless of the push order. Further, the "watermelon A" corresponding to the winning number 15 is configured so that three watermelons (either watermelon A or watermelon B) can be easily aligned on the parallel line. For example, the 60th prize in FIG. 9 is won. In 14, three watermelons A are aligned in the middle of each reel. Further, the "watermelon B" corresponding to the winning number 16 is configured so that three watermelons (either watermelon A or watermelon B) can be easily aligned on the diagonal line. For example, the prize number 66 in FIG. 9 is awarded. In No. 16, three watermelons are arranged diagonally downward to the right, such as watermelon B on the upper stage of the left reel M51, watermelon B on the middle stage of the middle reel M52, and watermelon A on the lower stage of the right reel M53. In addition, the "BB medium and weak rare small role (diagonal bell alignment)" corresponding to the winning number 17 is a condition device that allows three bells to be aligned on the effective line, and the details will be described later, but the winning is done during the BB. This is a conditional device in which the AT addition lottery is executed. Further, the "BB medium-strong rare small role (V-shaped bell alignment)" corresponding to the winning number 18 is a condition device in which the bell can be stopped and displayed on the upper stage of the left reel M51, the middle stage of the middle reel M52, and the upper stage of the right reel M53. Although the details will be described later, it is a conditional device in which the AT addition lottery is executed by winning during the BB.

Next, in the item of "bonus winning information", numerical values from 0 to 3 are assigned to each winning number. In the present embodiment, the winning number that does not include the bonus (BB role) has the bonus winning information set to 0, and the winning number that includes the bonus (BB role) is the winning number (19) that includes one type BB-A. Bonus winning information of 1, type 1 BB-B winning number (20-23) bonus winning information 2, 1 type BB-C winning number (24-27) bonus winning information 3 It is supposed to be. By storing the bonus winning information in the main control board M, it is possible to store information relating to which BB is established and which BB combination is won. The details of the bonus winning information will be described later.

Next, in the item of "winning / replay winning information", numerical values from 0 to 18 are assigned to each winning number. In the present embodiment, the winning numbers (winning numbers 0 corresponding to the loss and winning numbers 19/20/24 corresponding to the bonus) that do not include the re-game winning combination and the small winning combination are set to 0 for the winning / re-gaming winning information. , 1 to 18 winning / re-gaming winning information is distributed to each condition device for the winning number including the re-gaming combination or the small winning combination. By storing the winning / re-game winning information in the main control board M, it is possible to store the information relating to which re-game combination or small combination has been won. The details of the winning / replay winning information will be described later.

Next, in the item of "effect group number", numerical values from 0 to 11 are assigned to each winning number. By transmitting the effect group number from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side, the effect to be executed by the sub control board S side can be determined. The details of the production group number will be described later.

Next, in the item of "ball output group number", numerical values from 0 to 13 are assigned to each winning number. The main control board M stores the payout group number, and the stored payout group number is used when executing a lottery related to AT (for example, AT lottery, AT additional lottery) to execute a lottery process related to AT. It is possible to reduce the program and data capacity for this. Even if the condition device in which the payout group number is 0 is won, the AT lottery and the AT addition lottery are not executed. On the other hand, if the conditional device whose payout group number is not 0 is won, the AT lottery or the AT addition lottery can be executed. The details of the payout group number will be described later. Further, even when the condition device in which the payout group number is 0 is won, the AT lottery or the AT addition lottery may be configured so that the payout group number can be executed. When the condition device to be 0 is won and the AT lottery or the AT addition lottery is executed, it is preferable to configure the lottery result so that the lottery result is always lost (non-winning).

Next, FIG. 11 shows a lottery probability in which the winning numbers (also referred to as conditional device numbers and winning combinations) and bonuses (also referred to as BB and BB combinations) relating to the small winning combination and the replaying combination in the present embodiment are determined by the winning combination lottery means. It is a list showing (also called a winning rate). In the figure, the winning rate of the winning numbers is shown.

First, the lottery probabilities in "RT0", "RT1", and "RT2" when the BB is not operating will be described in detail. In the present embodiment, the lottery probability of the winning combination (particularly, the re-gaming combination) can be different depending on the RT state, and the "re-gaming combination" (the lottery probability of the total of all the re-gaming combinations) is ". In the case of "RT1", the lottery probability is higher than in other RT states. In addition, "re-game 04" (so-called fall re-game combination, "RT1", which can be stopped and displayed at winning numbers 4 to 6, and a symbol corresponding to the re-game combination in a situation where the bonus is not won. When the combination is stopped and displayed, it will shift to "RT0" thereafter) is mainly won in "RT1", and almost never appears in "RT0". In "RT2", "re-game 04" that can be stopped and displayed with winning numbers 4 to 6 may appear, but even if "re-game 04" is stopped and displayed, the RT state does not shift. In addition, when "re-game 04" is stopped and displayed in "RT1", it has shifted to "RT0", that is, a fall effect (for example, an effect display device S40) which is an effect of notifying that the RT state has fallen. (Displayed as "Sorry") is executed, and when "Replay 04" is stopped and displayed in "RT0", the fall effect may not be executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to recognize that the player has won the BB because the fall effect was not executed even though the "re-game 04" was stopped and displayed. It can enhance the sex. In addition, in such a configuration, the sound effect output by the stop display of "re-game 04" and the re-game combination other than "re-game 04" (for example, "re-game" in which the RT state does not shift). 01 ") may be configured to be different from the output sound effect due to the stop display, and by such a configuration, the player recognizes that" replay 04 "is stopped and displayed. It can be easily configured. In addition, there are cases related to AT where push order navigation does not occur (for example, "normal gaming state" and may be referred to as non-AT gaming state) and states related to AT where push order navigation can occur (for example, "". It may stay in "RT1" in both cases of "AT in progress" and may be referred to as AT gaming state). At this time, when the winning number that may shift (fall) from "RT1" to "RT0" is won, a special sound effect indicating that the RT state may fall in the non-AT gaming state is played. It may be configured not to output based on the operation of the start lever D50. This makes it possible to shift the gaming state without letting the player realize that there is a possibility of falling to "RT0" in the non-AT gaming state. On the other hand, in the AT game state, a special sound effect indicating that the RT state may fall is output based on the operation of the start lever (and the re-game combination in which the RT state does not fall is stopped and displayed. It may be configured to notify the forward navigation). As a result, the player can operate the stop button D40 after the special sound effect is notified, being careful not to let the RT state fall. In addition, the "re-game 05" that can be stopped and displayed with the winning number 2 or 3 (the re-game role that can notify that the AT addition lottery has been won when the stop is displayed in the AT state) is mainly "RT1". It appears in, and almost never appears in other RT states. It should be noted that the transition of the state related to the RT state accompanying the stop display of the symbol combination that serves as the replaying role will be described later. Further, as will be described later, in the present embodiment, the push order navigation for notifying the player of the reel stop order, which is most advantageous to the player, can be executed by the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40. .. There is no problem even if the lottery probability is changed as appropriate. Further, in the present embodiment, the bonus is configured so that it can overlap with the small winning combination, and overlaps with a part of watermelon A, watermelon B, and cherry. Specifically, the winning numbers 21 to 23 and the winning numbers 25 to 27 are conditional devices in which the bonus and the small winning combination overlap.

Further, in the situation of "RT2", since the BB has been won and the BB is not in operation, the BB roles of the winning numbers 20 and 24 (single roles that do not overlap with the small roles). If a BB role is won, which may be referred to as a single BB role or a single BB), the new winning of the BB role becomes invalid, and only the winning of the small role becomes valid. Specifically, for example, in the case of "RT2" and winning (carrying over) the 1st class BB-A, the winning number 24 "1st class BB-C" is won. , Class 1 BB-C related to the winning number 24 becomes invalid. That is, the situation is the same as when the winning number 0 "missing" is won. In addition, the carry-over type 1 BB-A will continue to be in the winning state. Further, in the situation of "RT2", since the BB has been won and the BB is not in operation, the small winning combination of the winning numbers 21 to 23 and the winning numbers 25 to 27 and the BB role are played. If the overlapping conditional devices are won, the new winning of the BB winning combination is invalid, and only the winning of the small winning combination is valid. Specifically, for example, in the situation where the player is "RT2" and has won (carried over) the 1st class BB-A, he / she won the "1st class BB-B + winning-C" winning number 21. In that case, the type 1 BB-B related to the winning number 21 becomes invalid, and only the winning-C is valid. That is, the situation is the same as when the winning number 14 "winning-C" is won. In addition, the carry-over type 1 BB-A will continue to be in the winning state. It should be noted that the overlap with the bonus is not limited to the small role, and may overlap with a part of the replay role. For example, a part of the replaying roles of winning numbers 4 to 6 may overlap with the bonus role. In this way, by making the bonus overlap with the conditional device including the RT transition replay (replaying combination in which the RT state can be transitioned), the bonus is also won when the conditional device including the RT transition replay is won. There is a possibility, and even if the RT transition replay is stopped and displayed, the bonus will not be denied, so it is possible to give the player expectations. In this configuration, the RT state is controlled so that the RT state does not shift even if the RT transition replay is stopped and displayed. As a result, the player should have changed the RT state (shifted to the RT state where the replay probability is relatively low), but the replay probability is not low (frequently won the replay), etc. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest in the game, such as the possibility of winning the bonus.

Next, the lottery probability in "type 1 BB-A, B, C operating" when BB is operating will be described in detail. In this embodiment, during the BB operation, the "common bell" of the winning number 13 and the "BB medium and weak rare small role (diagonal bell alignment)" of the winning number 17 and the "BB medium and strong rare small role" of the winning number 18 are used. It is configured so that three small roles with "(V-shaped bell alignment)" can be won, and while the BB won in "AT in progress" is operating, "BB medium weak rare small role (diagonal bell alignment)" Or, if the player wins the "BB medium-strong rare small role (V-shaped bell alignment)", the AT addition lottery is executed (details will be described later).

Further, in the upper part of the figure, the small winning combination lottery probability when the set value is 1 is illustrated, and in the common bell (winning number 13), the lottery probability is uniform regardless of the RT state. As shown in the lower part of the figure, the lottery probability of the common bell is configured to differ depending on the set value (6 stages in this example). Specifically, the number in setting 1 is 3204, the number in setting 2 is 3404, the number in setting 3 is 3604, the number in setting 4 is 3904, the number in setting 5 is 4204, and the number in setting 6 is. Is 4504, and the higher the set value, the higher the lottery probability. With this configuration, for example, when a player advances a game while measuring the number of appearances (winning times) of a common bell, the common bell is frequently won to relate to the gaming machine being played. The game can be advanced with the expectation that the set value is a relatively high set value. Further, the higher the set value, the higher the expected value per game, and the higher the set value, the higher the ball output rate. The lottery probability of the common bell is configured to differ depending on the set value, but depending on the winning of the common bell, the AT lottery, the AT addition lottery, and the high probability state transition lottery, which will be described later, are not executed. It is configured so as not to affect the transition lottery of the state related to (also referred to as a lottery related to AT).

In addition, the middle part of the figure is a list of expected values when there is push order navigation. In the figure, when the push order navigation is executed in a state where the push order navigation can be executed by the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 such as "AT in progress state", the reel is stopped according to the navigation. The average number of medals paid out per game (the average number of medals paid out by the winning small winning combination, also called the expected number of game media obtained in one game) and the expected value of medal increase / decrease per game ( It is the ratio of the number of medals paid out to the number of medals inserted when playing with a 3-card bet. If it is larger than 1, the expected value will be positive and the number of medals will increase, while if it is smaller than 1, it is expected. The value becomes negative and the number of medals decreases). The average number of payouts per game is "total number of replays (total number of replays 1 to 6) x number of replays (3) + small wins (11). Total number of placements (small combination lottery probability) (total number of placements for winning numbers 7 to 16) x number of payouts (11 pieces) in small combination (11 pieces) / total number of all numbers (65536) ) ”. Further, the expected value of increase / decrease in medals per game can be calculated as "average number of payouts per game / number of medals inserted per game (3 cards)". The number of medals inserted per game (the number of game media inserted when playing one game) is three, and if the average number of payouts per game is greater than 3, the expected increase or decrease in medals per game is expected. The value is configured to be greater than 1. As shown in the figure, in the present embodiment, "RT1" has the relatively largest expected medal increase / decrease value per game. The figures in the figure do not take into account the increase or decrease in medals due to bonuses. That is, when the game is advanced in a situation where push order navigation occurs (also referred to as a case where the operation is performed in the optimum operation mode or a case where the operation is performed in the advantageous operation mode), the number of medals increases in "RT1". Although not shown in "RT0" and "RT2", the expected value of medal increase / decrease per game is smaller than 1 in the situation where push order navigation does not occur, and medals. Will decrease. In this embodiment, even in "RT0" or "RT2", the expected value of medal increase / decrease per game is larger than 1 when there is push order navigation, but the expected value is not limited to 1, and "RT0" is not limited to this. Or "RT2", the expected value of medal increase / decrease per game when there is push order navigation may be smaller than 1. When the symbol combination that serves as the re-game is stopped and displayed, the number of bets (3) in the previous game is actually automatically bet, but in calculating the expected value of medal increase / decrease in this embodiment, medals are used. The calculation is based on the assumption that three medals will be paid out. In addition, one game may be referred to as one game.

Further, the average number of payouts per game in each RT state is 3.511291504 when the RT state is "RT0" and 4.737915039 when the RT state is "RT1", which is the RT state. In the case of "RT2", it is 3.67137146. Further, the expected value of medal increase / decrease per game in each RT state is 1.170430501 when the RT state is "RT0" and 1.579305013 when the RT state is "RT1", which is the RT state. In the case of "RT2", it is 1.223790487, and when there is push order navigation, the RT state of "RT1" is the most advantageous RT state for the player. The numerical value is the value when the setting is 1. The winning numbers and bonus lottery probabilities for the small winning combination and the re-gaming combination are just examples. For example, the expected value of medal increase / decrease per game in "RT2" in which BB is internally established (when there is push order navigation). The expected value of increase / decrease in medals) may be configured to be less than 1. With such a configuration, when push order navigation occurs and when it is "RT2" (when BB is being established internally), when the bonus is not aligned in the game where the bonus can be aligned. However, the number of medals held will gradually decrease, and if the push order navigation occurs and if it is "RT2" (when BB is being established internally), the bonus can be arranged intentionally in the game. It is possible to prevent a strategy that increases the number of medals held by not arranging bonuses. Specifically, it is preferable to design so that the probability of losing in "RT2" is higher than the winning probability of all the small winning combinations (winning-A1 to winning-I) won in "RT2". It is preferable to determine the winning probability of the re-gaming role so that it is designed so that the winning probability of the re-gaming role is high. It is preferable to design it so that it does not become too much). In "RT2" of this example, the winning probability of all the small wins is 18784/65536, the total winning probability of all the replays is 12501/65536, and the probability of losing is It is 34251/65536 (see FIG. 11), and it is designed so that the probability of losing is higher than the winning probability of all the small winning combinations.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11, in the present embodiment, the lottery probability of the first type BB-A is assigned to 40, which is the same number for all of the settings 1 to 6. Further, the lottery probability of the first type BB-C is assigned to 160, which is the same number for all of the settings 1 to 6. On the other hand, as for the lottery probability of the first type BB-B, 160 is assigned to the setting 1, 180 is assigned to the setting 2, 200 is assigned to the setting 3, and the lottery probability is assigned to the setting 4. 220 is assigned, 240 is assigned to setting 5, and 270 is assigned to setting 6. That is, the lottery probability of the first type BB-B differs depending on the set value. In this way, the 1st class BB-A and the 1st class BB-C are BBs with no setting difference (the 1st class BB-A and the 1st class BB-C may be referred to as a setting difference BB and a setting difference bonus). The type 1 BB-B functions as a BB with a setting difference (the type 1 BB-B may be referred to as a BB with a setting difference and a bonus with a setting difference). Further, the lottery probability is uniform regardless of the RT state (for "RT0" and "RT1") in any of the type 1 BB-A, the type 1 BB-B, and the type 1 BB-C. The lottery probabilities of Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C (total) are the same regardless of the set value, but the lottery probabilities of Type 1 BB-B (total) differ depending on the set value. The lottery probabilities added up as the lottery probabilities of Type 1 BB-B are the same even if the set values are different, but the lottery probabilities for each winning number may be configured to be different depending on the set values. Even when configured, type 1 BB-B may be referred to as BB with a setting difference.

Next, with reference to the block diagram of FIG. 12, the electrical schematic configuration of the rotating cylinder type gaming machine P according to the present embodiment will be described. First, in the revolving gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the main control board M that controls the progress of the game is centered, and the sub control board S, the door board D, the revolving board K, the power supply board E, and the relay board IN. The setting key switch M20, the setting / reset button M30, and the like are connected so as to be able to exchange data. The solid line part in the figure shows the movement related to the exchange of data, and the broken line part in the figure shows the power supply route. The power supply route is not limited to this, and for example, power may be supplied from the power supply board E to the relay board IN and the door board D without going through the main control board.

The main control board (sometimes referred to as a main control means, a main board, a main control means, a main board, and a main game unit) M is a board that controls the progress of the entire game performed by the spinning machine P. The main control chip C is mounted on the main control board M, and the CPUC100 (also referred to as CPUMC), the built-in ROMC110, the built-in RAMC120, and the like are connected to the main control chip C so that data can be exchanged with each other by a bus. It is installed. Then, the main control board M receives a signal or the like indicating that the start lever D50 or the like has been operated from the door board D mounted on the front door DU, and receives the sub control board S, the door board D, and the cylinder board. The operation of these various boards is controlled by outputting a control command (or control signal) toward K or the like {for example, an instruction number (push order number, instruction information, operation information) toward the sub-control board S. By outputting (also referred to as), the sub-control board S can execute push order navigation on the effect display device S40}.

Further, the sub-control board SC (sometimes referred to as a sub-control means, a sub-board, a sub-control means, a sub-board, and a sub-game unit) S also has a sub-control chip SC mounted on the sub-control board M as well as the above-mentioned main control board M. The sub-control chip SC is provided with a CPU SC100, a ROM, a RAM, and the like, and is configured to be connected by a bus so that data can be exchanged with each other. Further, the sub-control board S includes various LED lamps S10 (including a bet button lamp S50 and a stop button lamp S60), a speaker S20, an effect display device S40, a rotating cylinder backlight (also referred to as a back lamp) S30, and the like. Is connected. Here, the rotating cylinder backlight S30 is a light provided inside each of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53, and illuminates the pattern drawn on the surface of the reel from the back side. The sub control board S analyzes the control commands received from the main control board M and outputs various drive signals to the various LED lamps S10, the speaker S20, the effect display device S40, the rotating cylinder backlight S30, and the like. Is being produced. In the rotating cylinder type gaming machine according to this example, the player covers nine ranges of the left reel upper stage, middle stage, lower stage, middle reel upper stage, middle stage, lower stage, and right reel upper stage, middle stage, and lower stage. A plurality of LEDs are provided as the reel back light S30 so that they can be individually identified. As an example, the LED corresponding to the upper stage of the left reel is turned on, and all the other LEDs are turned off, so that the player can identify that the upper stage of the left reel is turned on. Further, in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to this example, when the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the player indicates that the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed by changing the lighting mode of the rotating cylinder backlight S30. (Details will be described later).

On the door substrate D, the above-mentioned input reception sensor D10s, the first input sensor D20s, the second input sensor D30s, the stop button D40 for stopping the rotating reel M50, and the start for starting the rotation of the reel M50. Lever D50, settlement button D60 for paying out stored game medals (credits) and inserted game medals to end the game, and various display panels D70 {not shown, but described above. The input number display lamp D210, start lamp D180, replay lamp D290, inputtable lamp D300, special game status display device D250, payout number display device (push order display device) D270 are credit number display device D200, advantageous section. A collection of display devices such as the display YH}, a door switch D80 for determining the opening / closing of the front door, canceling an error, and changing a set value, a game medal (or a game medal) judged to be incompatible after being inserted. , Other foreign matter) is connected to the blocker D100 or the like for refunding to the discharge port D240. Further, the door board D is connected to the main control board M described above so as to be able to exchange data. Therefore, when the start lever D50, the stop button D40, the settlement button D60, etc. provided on the front door DU are operated, the signal related to the operation is supplied to the main control board M via the door board D. ing. Further, the signal that the insertion reception sensor D10s detects the passage of the game medal is also supplied to the main control board M via the door board D.

Further, a rotating cylinder motor K10 for rotating the reel M50, a rotating cylinder sensor K20 for detecting the rotation position of the reel M50, and the like are connected to the rotating cylinder substrate K. The reel M50 can be stopped at a determined stop position by driving the reel motor K10 while detecting the rotation position of the reel M50 by the reel sensor K20. There is. Further, in the spinning machine of the present embodiment, a so-called step motor (sometimes referred to as a stepping motor) is used for the spinning motor K10. In the step motor, 480 steps are set as the number of steps for the reel M50 to rotate once. Further, each reel (left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) is set with a predetermined number (for example, 20) of symbols having a substantially uniform size, and the number of steps corresponding to one symbol is set. Is set to 24 steps (= 480/20). There is no problem even if the number of steps and the number of symbols per reel lap are changed.

Further, the medal payout device H is connected to the main control board M via the relay board IN, and pays a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game medals based on the control signal from the main control board M. Perform the action to put out. The medal payout device H includes a first payout sensor H10s and a second payout sensor H20s, and a disk H50, which determine whether or not the medals have been paid out normally and measure the number of game medals paid out. A hopper motor H80 for rotating is connected to the hopper motor H80.

The various control boards and the electric power consumed by the boards are supplied from the power supply board E (the board that controls the presence / absence of power supply by the power supply switch E10). In FIG. 12, a state in which electric power is supplied from the power supply board E is represented by a broken line arrow. As shown in the figure, electric power is directly supplied from the power supply board E to the main control board M and the sub control board S, and various boards (door board D, cylinder board K, relay board IN) are supplied with electric power. Power is supplied via the main control board M. A predetermined amount (for example, 100 V) of AC voltage is supplied to the power supply board E, and this power is converted into a DC voltage of a specified voltage and then supplied to each control board and board.

Further, the main control board M has a setting key switch M20 used for executing the setting change device control process (to change the setting) described later, and a setting / reset capable of changing the setting value and canceling an error. Button M30, is connected. Further, the main control board M is a state relating to a reel control means for controlling the rotation and stopping of the reels M50 (left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) and an AT advantageous to the player. AT lottery means to execute AT transition lottery to shift to, and AT addition lottery to increase the number of remaining AT games (or the counter value of AT counter M60), which is the number of games that can stay in the "AT in progress state". It has an AT addition lottery means to be executed.

Next, FIGS. 13 to 36 are flowcharts showing a general flow of processing performed by the main control board M in the present embodiment.

The flowchart is mainly composed of terminals (shown by rounded rectangles) indicating processing steps (shown by rectangles), judgments (shown by diamonds), flow lines (arrows), start / end / return, etc. ing. Further, when the details of the processing steps are shown in another flowchart, the one that refers to the other flowchart is shown as a subroutine (shown by a rectangle in which the left and right lines are double lines). .. Here, at the stage of developing a gaming machine, it is also possible to develop a gaming machine with different specifications at the same time, but in this example, a subroutine (in this example, executed by a gaming machine with different specifications) is executed in the processing on the main side. It is configured so as not to leave a subroutine (which is not normally used), and prevents processing related to an unused subroutine, which is not normally executed, from being executed due to noise or fraudulent activity.

First, FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the flow of processing that is executed for the first time on the CPUC100 of the main control board M after the power of the spinning machine P is turned on (or at the time of system reset or user reset). .. First, in step 1000, the power of the rotating drum type gaming machine P is turned on, and then in step 1002, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the initial setting of the timer interrupt (here, the timer interrupt is started). Instead, it only sets the type of timer interrupt, and in the subsequent processing, when the timer interrupt is started, the flowchart related to the timer interrupt processing described later is periodically executed). Next, in step 1004, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes serial communication settings (speed, data length, data transmission method settings) and the like as function settings of the main control chip C. Next, in step 1006, the CPUC100 of the main control board M calculates the checksum from the start address of the RAM area to the address immediately before the checksum area. Next, in step 1008, the CPUC100 of the main control board M checks the RAM area (for example, the power is turned off and the power is turned off and restored based on the calculated checksum and the checksum data held in the checksum area. Checks whether the data stored in the built-in RAMC 120 is correctly held), and generates power-off / recovery data. Next, in step 1010, the CPUC100 of the main control board M confirms the switch state of the setting key switch M20. Next, in step 1014, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the setting key switch M20 is off.

In the case of Yes in step 1014, in step 1016, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns on / off the power off processing flag in the RAM (turns on in step 1904) and the checksum state of all RAMs (in step 1006). (Check result) is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the power supply cutoff / recovery data in the RAM is normal. In the case of Yes in step 1016, in step 1020, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes initialization of the RAM area within the determined initialization range. Next, in step 1022, the CPUC100 of the main control board M returns the stack pointer based on the data related to the stack pointer saved in the process when the power is turned off (step 1902). Next, in step 1036, the CPUC100 of the main control board M refers to the inside of the RAM area, and determines whether or not the data related to the set value in the RAM area is within the normal range (0 to 5 in this example). judge. In the case of Yes in step 1036, in step 1038, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the reading of the input port. Next, in step 1040, the CPUC100 of the main control board M starts the timer interrupt set in step 1002. Next, in step 1042, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns off the power-off processing completed flag, and returns to the processing at the time of power-off according to the returned stack pointer.

If No in step 1016, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets the backup error display (for example, sets the error number in the register area) in step 1024. Next, in step 1300, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes a non-recoverable error process described later.

If No in step 1036, in step 1046, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets a set value error display (for example, it will be displayed on the payout number display device D270) (for example, in the register area). Set to). Next, in step 1300, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes a non-recoverable error process described later.

If No in step 1014, in step 1028, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns on / off the power off processing flag in the RAM (turns on in step 1904) and the checksum state of all RAMs (step 1904). (Check result in 1006) is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the power supply cutoff / recovery data in the RAM is normal. In the case of Yes in step 1028, in step 1030, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines and sets the initialization range of the RAM to a predetermined range excluding the storage area for storing the set value (set value data) in the RAM. For example, it is set in the register area), and the process proceeds to step 1034. The range not included in the initialization range of the RAM is not limited to the storage area for storing the set value (set value data), and the total number of games in the "advantageous section" and the total cumulative number of game sections (advantageous section +). As a result of calculating the number of games (normal section) and the stay ratio of the "advantageous section", etc. are also within the range not included in the initialization range of the RAM. With this configuration, the ratio of staying in the "advantageous section" in the game (advantageous section ratio) can be calculated and displayed. Further, the calculation process of the advantageous section ratio is configured to be calculated at the timing when the unit game ends. Further, the advantageous section ratio is displayed when the power of the gaming machine is turned on (for example, it is displayed on a 4-digit 7-segment display). As a specific display mode, it is repeated at 5 second intervals in the order of "advantageous section ratio-> continuous bonus ratio per 6000 games-> bonus ratio per 6000 games-> cumulative continuous bonus ratio-> cumulative bonus ratio". Is displayed. The continuous bonus ratio is "the number of payouts / total payouts when the RB is operating", and the bonus ratio is the "number of payouts when the RB, CB, or SB is operating". / Total number of payouts ". On the other hand, if No in step 1028, in step 1032, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the initialization range of the RAM to be a specific range including the storage area for storing the set value (set value data) in the RAM. It is set (for example, set in the register area), and the process proceeds to step 1034. Next, in step 1034, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes initialization of the RAM area within the initialization range determined in step 1030 or step 1032. Next, in step 1100, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the setting change device control process described later.

Although not shown, it is preferable that the initial value (value at the start of processing) of the temporary storage area (RAM area, etc.) mounted on the main control board M is configured so as not to be a value at which a special game is executed. (To prevent the special game from being erroneously executed when the process of determining the execution of the special game is executed due to noise or fraudulent activity immediately after the start of the program process). Further, although not shown, when a random number such as a winning random number is stored in the RAM area of the main control board M, a dedicated storage area is secured and the information related to the random number is stored in the byte. It is preferable to configure it so that only the information related to the random number is stored (other information such as various timer values is not stored) (when operating another data stored in the same 1 byte, due to noise or the like). To prevent the information related to random numbers from being rewritten).

Next, FIG. 14 is a flowchart of the setting change device control process according to the subroutine of step 1100 in FIG. 13, and is also referred to as a setting change mode. First, in step 1102, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets the stack pointer (initializes at the start address of the process). Next, in step 1104, the CPUC100 of the main control board M activates a timer interrupt. Next, in step 1106, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the set value (set value data) in the RAM area is within the normal range (0 to 5 in this example). When the set value (set value data) is managed by 1 to 6, it is necessary to perform the initialization of the RAM and return it to "1" when the set value becomes "0". Therefore, in this example, by managing the normal range of the set value (set value data) as 0 to 5, the set value (set value data) is corrected after the RAM is initialized (step 1106 and). The processing of step 1108) can be eliminated, and the processing time can be shortened and the processing capacity can be reduced. In the case of Yes in step 1106, in step 1108, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets a predetermined value (for example, 0 = the most disadvantageous value for the player) in the set value (set value data), and in step 1110. Transition. On the other hand, even if No in step 1106, the process proceeds to step 1110. Next, in step 1110, the CPUC100 of the main control board M indicates to the error display LED (for example, the payout number display device D270) that the setting change device is operating (for example, "88" for lighting all segments). Then, the set value is displayed on the setting display LED (not shown) (the display related to the set value is a numerical value obtained by adding 1 to the set value (set value data) held in the RAM), and step 1112. Move to. As described above, the payout number display device D270 is also used to notify the push order. Since it is configured in this way, for example, when a failure has occurred in a part of the 7-segment LED (there is a segment that cannot be turned on) and the push order is notified, incorrect information may be notified. possible. In order to prevent such a situation, by making the payout number display device D270 all lights up "88" while the setting change device is operating, it is possible to confirm whether or not the 7 segments are out of order, which is not possible for the player. It is possible to prevent giving profits. Further, as a configuration related to the display of the set value (set value data), the RAM for displaying the set value for storing the data obtained by adding 1 to the set value (set value data) in the storage area for storing the set value is stored. It may be configured to have an area and display a set value with reference to the storage area. Although not shown, after executing the process of step 1110, a process for transmitting a command indicating that the setting change mode has been entered is executed on the sub-control board S side.

Next, in step 1112, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the setting / reset button M30 has been switched from off to on. In the case of Yes in step 1112, in step 1114, the CPUC100 of the main control board M adds 1 to the current set value (set value data) (when the added result set value (set value data) exceeds 5). The set value (set value data) becomes 0), and the process proceeds to step 1116. Even if No in step 1112, the process proceeds to step 1116. Next, in step 1116, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the start lever D50 has been switched from off to on. If No in step 1116, the process proceeds to step 1112, and the processes of steps 1112 to 1116 are looped. In the case of Yes in step 1116, in step 1118, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the setting key switch M20 is switched from on to off. If No in step 1118, the process of step 1118 is looped. On the other hand, in the case of Yes in step 1118, in step 1120, the CPUC100 of the main control board M displays on the error display LED (not shown) that the operation of the setting change device has been completed, and displays the setting display LED (not shown). The display of the set value (set value data) is erased, and the process proceeds to the game progress control process of step 1200. Although not shown, after executing the process of step 1120, a process for transmitting a command indicating that the setting change mode is terminated is executed on the sub-control board S side.

Next, FIG. 15 is a flowchart of non-recoverable error processing according to the subroutine of step 1300 (and called in another flowchart) in FIG. First, in step 1302, the CPUC100 of the main control board M prohibits interrupts (after that, the flowchart related to the timer interrupt time processing described later is not executed). Next, in step 1304, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets the output port address and the number of output ports. Next, in step 1306, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns off the output ports (0 to 6 in this example, display outputs to various LEDs and drive outputs to various motors). Next, in step 1308, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets the next port output address (by repeating this, the display output to various LEDs and the drive output to various motors are sequentially stopped). Next, in step 1310, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the output to each output port is completed. In the case of Yes in step 1310, in step 1312, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the set error display (some error has occurred when executing this process), and the process is concerned. Is repeated, and when the power supply voltage drops, a reset signal is input and the process ends. (That is, since it enters an infinite loop, it does not accept any operation that prompts it to return). If No in step 1310, the process proceeds to step 1306. The processes of steps 1306 to 1310 are processes for clearing the output to the LED / motor (however, since the external output signal is not cleared, information on the error and the game progress status when the error occurs are displayed on the hall computer side. It is possible to output to).

Next, FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (first sheet) according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. First, in step 1202, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets the stack pointer (initializes at the start address of the process). Next, in step 1203, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets data in the RAM area required for the game (for example, the maximum number of bets, valid lines for winning, etc.). In step 1203, the data for clearing the data used in the previous game {for example, the conditional device number (winning number), the effect group number, the instruction information} (“0” for clearing the RAM address). It also includes the process of setting the data) in the RAM. It should be noted that the condition device number, the effect group number, the instruction information, and the like may not be cleared, and the number selected when the next game is executed may be overwritten. Next, in step 1204, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets the RT state (for example, “RT0” or the like) in the game (sets the RT state determined in step 1704 of FIG. 27). Next, in step 1205, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets a command (command to the sub side) related to the RT state set in step 1204. The process of setting the RT state may be executed in step 1704 of FIG. 27. Further, a command related to the RT state (command to the sub side) may be set in step 1704. Further, when the RT state is transmitted to the sub side, it is not necessary to always transmit the RT state, and the RT state may be transmitted to the sub side only when the game section is the “advantageous section”. Next, in step 1206, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets a state related to AT in the game (for example, "AT in progress state", etc.) (step 1420 in FIG. 21, step 1429 in FIG. 22, step 1435 in FIG. 22). Set the state related to AT determined in step 1439, step 1443, step 1444-3 in FIG. 23, and step 1444-4). Next, in step 1207, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets a command (command to the sub side) related to the AT set in step 1206. Further, the process of setting the state related to AT may be executed in step 1416 and step 1428 of FIG. 21, step 1438 of FIG. 22, and step 1444-1 of FIG. 23. Further, when transmitting the state related to AT to the sub side, it is not necessary to always transmit, and the state related to AT may be transmitted to the sub side only when the game section is the “advantageous section”. Next, in step 1208, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets a game section (for example, an “advantageous section”) in the game (the game section determined in steps 3510, 3516, and 3520 in FIG. 31). set). Next, in step 1208-1, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets a command (command to the sub side) related to the game section set in step 1208. Next, in step 1209, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the medal payout device H is full of game medals. Specifically, it is equipped with a medal auxiliary tank HS (details will be described later) for storing medals overflowing from the medal payout device H, and two full detection electrodes DE (details will be described later) that can enter the inside of the medal auxiliary tank HS. It is judged by the continuity / non-conduction of the current due to (if the current is conducted through the medal, it is judged to be full). If Yes in step 1209, the process proceeds to step 1218.

On the other hand, if No in step 1209, in step 1210, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns on the medal full error flag (for example, the inside of the medal full error flag area in the RAM area is updated with a value corresponding to on. ). Next, in step 1212, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the display of the error number corresponding to the medal full error with the 7-segment LED (for example, the storage display LED or the acquired number LED). Next, in step 1214, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the medal full error has been canceled (for example, the current from the two full detection electrodes provided in the medal auxiliary tank HS is non-conducting and is set / set /. Whether or not the reset button M30 is pressed) is determined. In the case of Yes in step 1214, in step 1216, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns off the medal full error flag (for example, updates the inside of the medal full error flag area in the RAM area with a value corresponding to off), and steps. Move to 1218. On the other hand, if No in step 1214, the process proceeds to step 1212. Next, in step 1218, the CPUC100 of the main control board M permits the acceptance of medal insertion (the insertion operation is automatically executed in the next game of the replaying combination), and the next process (step 1220). Process). Here, in step 1218, the blocker D100 is turned on (process for forming the medal flow path). Specifically, when the re-game combination is established in the previous game, the blocker D100 is turned on on the condition that the current storage number (credit) is less than a predetermined value (50 in this example). Execute. In other words, when the current storage number (credit) is a predetermined value, the blocker D100 is not turned on. On the other hand, if the re-game combination is not established in the previous game, the blocker D100 is uniformly turned on. With this configuration, even if the re-game combination is established, if the stored number (credit) does not reach the predetermined value, the game medal can be inserted, such as "RT1". When staying in the RT state (for example, "RT1") where the winning probability of the re-game role is higher than that of the RT state, or when the re-game role is difficult to understand by appearance (re-game pretending to be a small role: Even when the bell-bell-bell or the symbol combination in which the cherry is stopped on the left reel is stopped on the invalid line, the player can play the game with good rhythm (without discomfort). A straight line different from the valid line is called an invalid line.

Next, FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (second sheet) according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. First, in step 1220, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the game medal has not been bet or saved (credit does not exist). In the case of Yes in step 1220, in step 1221, the CPUC100 of the main control board M satisfies the set value display condition (for example, when the door switch D80 and the setting key switch M20 are all turned on, the condition is satisfied). Judge whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 1221, in step 1222, the CPUC100 of the main control board M is set to the setting display LED (not shown, but may be the payout number display device D270, the credit number display device D200, or the input number display lamp D210). The value is displayed (shifts to the setting confirmation mode), and the transition to step 1221 is performed on condition that the setting key switch M20 is turned off. When the transition condition of the setting change mode is satisfied, the process for sending a command indicating to start the setting change mode to the sub control board S side, and the setting change mode when the end condition of the setting change mode is satisfied. Is executing a process to send a command indicating that the command is to be terminated. If No in step 1220 or 1221, in step 1224, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes management related to the insertion and settlement of game medals. Next, in step 1225, the CPUC100 of the main control board M confirms the number of game medals that can be accepted. Next, in step 1226, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the blocker D100 is on. In the case of Yes in step 1226, in step 1227, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the first insertion sensor D20s or the second insertion sensor D30s is on (in this embodiment, the insertion of medals). It has two throw-in sensors for detection, and when the first throw-in sensor D20s or the second throw-in sensor D30s is turned on, it is determined that one game medal has been accepted). In the case of Yes in step 1227, in step 1230, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the first input sensor D20s and the second input sensor D30s are off (first input sensor D20s or second input sensor D20s). When the first throwing sensor D20s and the second throwing sensor D30s are turned off after the sensor D30s is turned on, it is determined that one received game medal has passed through the first throwing sensor D20s and the second throwing sensor D30s. ). In the case of Yes in step 1230, in step 1231, it is determined that the CPUC100 of the main control board M has accepted the insertion of one normal game medal. Although not shown, after step 1231, whether or not the CPUC100 of the main control board M has a maximum number of credits (50 in this example) and a maximum number of bets (3 in this example). If it is determined to be Yes, the blocker D100 is controlled to be off (a state in which a medal flow path is not formed). If No in step 1230, the process of step 1230 is repeated, and if No in step 1226 or 1227, the process proceeds to step 1232.

Next, in step 1232, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the settlement button D60 has been operated. In the case of Yes in step 1232, in step 1233, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not there is a remaining number of credits or a bet game medal. In the case of Yes in step 1233, in step 1234, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns on the hopper drive flag (a flag in the RAM area, which is turned on when the hopper motor H80 is being driven), and the game is played. Pay out one medal. Next, in step 1236, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is on (in the present embodiment, for detecting the payout of medals). It has two payout sensors, and when the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is turned on, it is determined that one game medal is being paid out). If Yes in step 1236, the process proceeds to step 1247. Here, although not specified in the flowchart, if the previous game was a re-game, only the remaining number of credits will be subject to settlement.

On the other hand, if No in step 1236, in step 1241, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the hopper was driven (after the timing of the processing in step 1234). .. Specifically, did the situation in which it was determined that the medal was not paid out continued for a predetermined time even though the hopper drive signal was transmitted to the hopper motor H80 (the hopper motor H80 is rotating)? Judge whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 1241, in step 1242, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns on the medal empty error flag (for example, the inside of the medal empty error flag area is updated with a value corresponding to on). Next, in step 1244, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes a medal empty error display. Next, in step 1245, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the medal empty error has been canceled (for example, whether or not the setting / reset button M30 has been pressed). In the case of Yes in step 1245, in step 1246, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns off the medal empty error flag (for example, updates the inside of the medal empty error flag area in the RAM area with a value corresponding to off), and steps. Move to 1247. On the other hand, if No in step 1245, the process proceeds to step 1244.

Next, in step 1247, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s are off (the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is turned on). When the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s are turned off, it is determined that the payout operation of one game medal in which the payout operation has been performed is completed). In the case of Yes in step 1247, in step 1248, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns off the hopper drive flag and proceeds to step 1233. If No in step 1241 or 1247, the process proceeds to step 1236.

On the other hand, if No in step 1232 or step 1233, the start lever D50 is effective for the CPUC100 of the main control board M in step 1251 (for example, a predetermined number of game medals for starting the game have been inserted, etc.). ), And it is determined whether or not the start lever D50 has been operated. In the case of Yes in step 1251, in step 1253, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the set value in the RAM area is within the normal range (0 to 5 in this example). In the case of Yes in step 1253, in step 1254, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes a process of acquiring a random number and turning off the blocker D100, and then proceeds to the next process (process of step 3600). On the other hand, if No in step 1253, in step 1256, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets the set value error display (for example, the error number is set in the register area). Next, in step 1300, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes an unrecoverable error process. If No in step 1251, the process proceeds to step 1220.

Next, FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (third sheet) according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. First, in step 3600, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes an internal lottery execution process, which will be described later. Next, in step 1259, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state related to the AT is a state in which the AT can be added to the lottery. Here, in this example, the states related to the AT that can execute the AT addition lottery are "AT in progress state", "addition specialization state", "specialization precursor state", and "advantageous BB state". In the "advantageous BB internal middle game", the AT counter value may be larger than 0, but the AT addition lottery is not executed. This is to prevent the player from being advantageous for the player if the player does not dare to align the symbol combinations of the BB in the "advantageous BB internal medium game". In addition, it may be configured so that the AT addition lottery can be executed in the "advantageous BB internal middle game", and in such a configuration, the AT addition lottery is won in the "advantageous BB internal middle game". However, it may be configured to notify the fact that the AT addition lottery has been won at the timing when the BB ends, or the number of AT remaining games after the number of AT games has been added.

In the case of Yes in step 1259, in step 1500, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes an execution process for adding the number of games, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 1400. On the other hand, even if No in step 1259, the process proceeds to step 1400. In this game number addition execution process, it is possible to execute a lottery using a different lottery table depending on the state related to the AT, but the lottery probability does not differ depending on the set value (using the same lottery table). Execute a lottery) is preferable. Next, in step 1400, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the AT state transition control process described later. Next, in step 1450, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the condition device number management process described later.

Here, the states related to AT in this example are listed and described in detail (also shown in the AT state transition diagram of FIG. 30). (1) The "low probability state" is a state in which the AT has not been won (the right to shift to the "AT in progress state" has not been acquired), and the bonus combination has not been won. Since the "low probability state" is a so-called "normal state", it may also be referred to as a "normal state". (2) The "normal BB internal middle game" is a state in which the BB combination is won in the "low probability state", the BB combination is not won, and the AT lottery is not won. (3) The "normal BB state" is when the symbol combination corresponding to the BB combination is stopped and displayed in a situation where the BB combination is won in the "low probability state" and the AT lottery is not won. Alternatively, it is a state to be executed when the symbol combination corresponding to the BB combination is stopped and displayed in the "normal BB internal middle game". (4) The "high probability state" is a state in which the AT lottery has not been won (the right to shift to the "AT in progress state" has not been acquired), and the bonus role has not been won. , It is a state where it is easier to win the AT than the above-mentioned "low probability state". As will be described later, when the game newly shifts to the "high probability state", it is configured not to shift to the "low probability state" until the number of high-securing obstacle games has elapsed. (5) "AT in progress state" "" Is a state in which AT (push order navigation) is performed and the number of remaining AT games (AT counter value) is subtracted. Even if the AT counter value becomes 0, if the continuous lottery described later is won, the predetermined value is set in the AT counter and the "AT in progress state" continues (6) "Specialization precursor state". Is a state in which the right to shift to the "additional specialization state", which is a state in which the number of AT games is relatively easier to be added than in the "AT in progress state", has been acquired. (7) The "additional specialization state" is a state in which the number of AT games is relatively easier to be added than in the "AT in progress state". (8) "Advantageous BB internal middle game" means that the BB role is won in the "high probability state", "AT in progress state", "specialization precursor state" or "additional specialization state", and the BB role is It is in a state where no prize has been won. (9) "Standby BB internal middle game" is a state in which the BB role is won in the "low probability state", the AT lottery is won by the BB role, and the BB role is not won. .. (10) The "advantageous BB state" is a combination of symbols corresponding to the BB role by winning the BB role in the "high probability state", "AT in progress state", "specialization precursor state" or "additional specialization state". The BB combination is won and is executed when the stop display is displayed, or when the symbol combination corresponding to the BB combination is stopped and displayed in the "advantageous BB internal medium game", or in the "low probability state". , The AT lottery was won by the BB combination, and the symbol combination corresponding to the BB combination was stopped and displayed, or the symbol combination corresponding to the BB combination was stopped and displayed in the "standby BB internal medium game". It is a state that is sometimes executed. (12) The "state for effect of resurrection" is a state related to the AT that shifts when the AT counter value becomes 0 and the continuous lottery described later is not won. In the "resurrection possibility production state", the revival lottery described later is executed, and if the revival lottery is won, the state shifts to the "AT in progress state" (a predetermined value is set in the AT counter), and the revival lottery is not performed. If you win, you will be in a "low probability state".

Next, in step 1550, the CPUC100 of the main control board M starts the rotation of all reels, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 1261-1. Next, in step 1261-1, the CPUC100 of the main control board M is requested to determine the stop position of the pull-in point creation request (rotating left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53, and the stop order is It is determined whether or not there is a request as appropriate depending on the stop position of other reels. In the case of Yes in step 1261-1, in step 1262, the CPUC100 of the main control board M creates a pull-in point and proceeds to step 1263. On the other hand, even if No in step 1261-1, the process proceeds to step 1263. In this way, in the "BB internal reeling game", in the game in which the push order bell was won, the stop buttons were not stopped in the correct push order of 11 payouts (for example, in the case of winning-A1). Even if the stop button is not stopped in the order of "left → middle → right" (when the reels are stopped in the order of pressing incorrect answers), 11 symbol combinations will be paid out by the reel stop control. It is configured to win a prize. Next, in step 1263, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes a reel stop acceptance / rejection check. Next, in step 1264, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not any of the stop buttons (left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, right stop button D43) has been operated. In the case of Yes in step 1264, in step 1265, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the stop position of the reel corresponding to the operated stop button (for example, the left reel M51 corresponds to the left stop button D41). .. On the other hand, even if No in step 1264, the process proceeds to step 1266. Next, in step 1266, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the all reel stop check process. Next, in step 1267, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not all the reels (left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) have stopped. In the case of Yes in step 1267, in step 1268, the CPUC100 of the main control board M compares the symbol stop position data in the RAM with the internal winning combination stoptable position data. Next, in step 1269, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the combination of the displayed symbols is normal (abnormal if it does not match the winning combination determined by the internal lottery). Is determined to be). The determination of whether or not the combination of the displayed symbols in step 1269 is normal determines whether or not the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button is normally completed, and the winning combination is won. In the game being played, when the operation of the stop button is executed in an operation mode in which the winning combination can win, the reel position actually stopped is not normal (the winning determined by the internal lottery becomes possible). Even if the winning combination is not displayed as a stop from the appearance of the player), if the reel stop control is normally executed by the processing inside the gaming machine, the game medal based on the winning combination of the winning combination will be awarded. The payout is configured to be performed. If Yes in step 1269, the process proceeds to step 1274. On the other hand, if No in step 1269, in step 1270, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets the display determination error display (for example, it is set in the register area). Next, in step 1300, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes an unrecoverable error process. On the other hand, if No in step 1267, the process proceeds to step 1261-1.

Next, in step 1274, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes a game medal payout process by winning a prize. Next, in step 1275, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not there is a prize for paying out the game medal {the game medal obtained by the prize exceeds the maximum number of credits (50 in this example). If so, the game medal will be paid out}. In the case of Yes in step 1275, in step 1276, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns on the hopper drive flag (the flag that is turned on when driving the hopper motor H80), and executes the payout of one game medal. .. Next, in step 1277, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is on (the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is on). Then, it is determined that one game medal is being paid out). If Yes in step 1277, the process proceeds to step 1286.

On the other hand, if No in step 1277, in step 1279, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the hopper was driven (after the timing of the processing in step 1276). .. In the case of Yes in step 1279, in step 1280, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns on the medal empty error flag (for example, the inside of the medal empty error flag area in the RAM area is updated with a value corresponding to on). Next, in step 1281, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the medal empty error display with the 7-segment LED. Next, in step 1282, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the medal empty error has been canceled (for example, whether or not the setting / reset button M30 has been pressed). In the case of Yes in step 1282, in step 1283, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns off the medal empty error flag (for example, updates the inside of the medal empty error flag area in the RAM area with a value corresponding to off) and steps. Move to 1286. On the other hand, if No in step 1282, the process proceeds to step 1281.

Next, in step 1286, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s are off (the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is turned on). When the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s are turned off, it is determined that the payout operation of one game medal in which the payout operation has been performed is completed). In the case of Yes in step 1286, in step 1288, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns off the hopper drive flag and proceeds to step 1290. If No in step 1279 or step 1286, the process proceeds to step 1277. Next, in step 1290, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the payout corresponding to the prize (the prize that became Yes in step 1275) is completed. In the case of Yes in step 1290, the process proceeds to step 3400. If No in step 1286, the process proceeds to step 1277, if No in step 1275, the process proceeds to step 3400, and if No in step 1290, the process proceeds to step 1276.

Next, in step 3400, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the remaining game number management process, which will be described later. Next, in step 1700, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the RT state transition control process described later. Next, in step 1750, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the AT state start control process described later. Next, in step 3500, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the game section transition control process described later. Next, in step 1293, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes a game end process (for example, clearing the number of bets, transition process of the game state, etc.), and shifts to the next process (process of step 1202).

Next, FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the internal lottery execution process according to the subroutine of step 3600 of FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 3602, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets an internal lottery table (a table used when executing an internal lottery in which a winning number, a set number for comparison with a acquired random number, etc. are stored). Then, the process proceeds to step 3604. Next, in step 3604, the CPUC100 of the main control board M acquires the winning number related to the set internal lottery table address. It should be noted that the winning / replay winning information can be generated from the winning number. In addition, if the bonus and the small winning combination are won in duplicate, or if the bonus and the replaying combination are won in duplicate, both the winning / replaying winning information and the bonus winning information are obtained from the winning number. Winning information can be generated. The specific generation process will be described later. Next, in step 3606, the CPUC100 of the main control board M acquires the number of repetitions related to the set internal lottery table address. Here, the number of repetitions is the number of consecutive winning numbers having the same payout group number and the same number of placements for comparison with the acquired random numbers, and is previously stored in the ROM of the main control board M. It is remembered. For example, the payout group number 2 includes nine winning numbers of winning numbers 4 to 12, and the number of consecutive winning numbers 4 to 6 which are push order replaying roles is the same. Since the number of consecutive winning numbers 7 to 12, which is the push order bell role, is the same, the number of repetitions related to the push order replay combination is 3, and the push order bell is used. The number of repetitions related to the combination is 6. The lottery table used when the winning numbers 4 to 6 which are the push order replaying roles and the lottery table used when the winning numbers 7 to 12 which are the pushing order bell roles are acquired are as a single lottery table. It is configured. Next, in step 3608, the CPUC100 of the main control board M acquires the payout group number related to the set internal lottery table address, and proceeds to step 3610.

Next, in step 3610, the CPUC100 of the main control board M acquires the set value data. Next, in step 3612, the CPUC100 of the main control board M acquires the designated address data. Next, in step 3614, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the internal lottery has been won (whether or not the acquired random number exists in the internal lottery table searched this time). In the case of Yes in step 3614, since it is determined that the internal lottery has been won, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1259) without executing the determination (lottery) for the subsequent internal lottery table address. On the other hand, if No in step 3614, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M updates the number of repetitions in step 3616. Next, in step 3618, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not there is a remaining number of repetitions. In the case of Yes in step 3618, the process proceeds to step 3610, and the processes of steps 3610 to 3618 are repeatedly executed until the remaining number of repetitions is exhausted or the internal lottery is won. If No in step 3618, the CPUC100 of the main control board M updates the internal lottery table address (updates to the address related to the next payout group number) in step 3620, and proceeds to step 3604 to move to step 3604. The subsequent processing is executed. The specific processing of the internal lottery will be described later.

Next, FIG. 20 is a flowchart of the game number addition execution process according to the subroutine of step 1500 of FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 1502, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the state related to AT is "AT in progress state", "specialization precursor state", or "additional specialization state". In the case of Yes in step 1502, in step 1504, the CPUC100 of the main control board M has the payout group number related to the game as an additional AT game (winning number that can add the remaining AT game number in the "AT in progress state"). In this example, it is determined whether or not the payout group number (1, 3 in this example) is related to the re-game-B, the re-game-C, and the winning-D). If Yes in step 1504, the process proceeds to step 1514. Further, in the case of No in step 1502, in other words, when the state related to AT is the advantageous BB state, in step 1512, the CPUC100 of the main control board M has the payout group number related to the game added to the BB ("" In the "advantageous BB state", it is a winning number that can add the number of remaining AT games, and in this example, whether or not it is a payout group number (5, 6 in this example) relating to winning-H, winning-I). To judge. If Yes in step 1512, the process proceeds to step 1514, and if No in step 1512, the process proceeds to step 1518. Further, in the case of No in step 1504, in step 1506, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the state related to the AT is the "additional specialization state". In the case of Yes in step 1506, in step 1508, the CPUC100 of the main control board M can add the remaining AT game number in the specialized middle addition role (in the "additional specialization state"), the payout group number related to the game can be added. In the "AT in progress state", it is a winning number that does not add the number of remaining AT games, and in this example, it is a replay-A, replay-D1 to D3, and winning-A1 to A6). (In this example, it is determined whether or not it is 2, 13). If Yes in step 1508, the process proceeds to step 1514. If No in step 1506 or step 1508, the process proceeds to step 1518.

Next, in step 1514, the CPUC100 of the main control board M refers to the winning game number lottery table, and determines the number of AT added games based on the payout group number related to the game (for example, in the margin). In the lottery table shown, it is determined whether or not the latched random number value falls within the range). It should be noted that determining the number of AT addition games is also referred to as executing an AT addition lottery. Next, in step 1516, the CPUC100 of the main control board M adds the determined number of AT additional games to the counter value of the AT counter M60, and sets the AT counter value after the addition to the AT counter M60. Next, in step 1517, the CPUC100 of the main control board M receives a command related to the determined number of AT additional games (a command to the sub-control board S side, and the sub-control board S receives the command). It is possible to recognize whether or not the number of AT games has been added and how many games have been added), and the process proceeds to step 1518. In addition, the lottery related to AT (AT lottery, AT addition lottery) can be executed even in the case of the payout group numbers 7 to 11, which are the payout group numbers related to the winning numbers (winning numbers 19 to 27) including the bonus. ..

Here, the lottery table shown in the margin of the figure is an example of a lottery table for the number of additional games at the time of winning, and in this embodiment, a part of the state related to the AT in which the push order navigation is executed (in this example, " If the additional winning combination is won in "AT in progress state", "specialization precursor state", "additional specialization state", "advantageous BB state"), based on the payout group number related to the game, The number of AT additional games is determined by lottery from "0" to "300", and the determined value is added to the counter value of the AT counter M60. If "0" is determined, the number of remaining AT games will not increase (if "0" is determined, it may be referred to as non-winning in the AT addition lottery).

In addition, the average value (expected value) of the number of AT additional games when the additional combination is won at the time of winning is a value as shown in the figure, and as a specific calculation method, the winning combination is watermelon A. In the case, {number of placements (600) x number of AT addition games (0) + number of placements (100) x number of AT addition games (10) + number of placements (300) x number of AT addition games (30) + number of placements ( 24) × number of AT additional games (100)} / total number of placements (1024) = 12.1 (game).

Next, if the winning combination is re-game-B or re-game-C, {number of placements (500) x number of AT additional games (0) + number of placements (200) x number of AT additional games (50) + Calculated as the number of units (300) x number of AT additional games (100) + number of units (24) x number of AT additional games (300)} / total number of units (1024) = 46.1 (game). be able to.

Next, if the winning combination is re-game-A or re-game-D1 to D3, and winning-A1 to A6, {number (300) x number of AT additional games (10) + number (600) x It can be calculated as follows: number of AT additional games (30) + number of placements (124) × number of AT addition games (50)} / total number of placements (1024) = 26.61 (game). In addition, when the winning combination is re-game-A or re-game-D1 to D3, and winning-A1 to A6, the number of AT games is added only when the state related to AT is "additional specialization state". It has become.

Next, if the winning combination is a BB medium-weak rare role, {number of placements (800) x number of AT additional games (0) + number of placements (100) x number of AT addition games (10) + number of placements (100) ) × Number of AT additional games (30) + Number of placements (24) × Number of AT additional games (100)} / Total number of placements (1024) = 6.3 (game).

Next, if the winning combination is a BB medium-strong rare role, {number of placements (300) x number of AT additional games (0) + number of placements (300) x number of AT addition games (30) + number of placements (400) ) × Number of AT additional games (50) + Number of placements (24) × Number of AT additional games (300)} / Total number of placements (1024) = 35.4 (game).

In this embodiment, when the AT addition lottery is executed, the average value of the AT addition games may differ depending on the type of winning combination, but the AT addition games number may differ depending on the set value. The average values are configured so that they do not differ. Here, when the AT addition lottery is configured to be executed based on the winning number, for example, when the winning number 7 and the winning number 8 execute the same processing as the AT addition lottery, the winning number is 7. It is necessary to execute a process of determining whether or not the number is 8, but as in the present embodiment, the winning number 7 and the winning number 8 are configured to execute the AT addition lottery based on the payout group number. When the same process is executed as the AT additional lottery, the process related to the AT additional lottery of either the winning number 7 or the winning number 8 should be executed only by determining whether the payout group number is 2. Will be possible.

Returning to the explanation of the flowchart, next, in step 1518, the CPUC100 of the main control board M may determine by the winning number (or the winning / replay winning information, the payout group number, etc.) related to the game. ) Is a winning number for re-game-B (reverse-push white 7 replay, which is a re-game in which White Seven can be aligned with the invalid line by stopping by reverse-push). In the case of Yes in step 1518, in step 1520, whether or not the CPUC100 of the main control board M has added the number of AT games by the replay-B, in other words, the number of AT games added by winning the replay-B. It is determined whether or not it was 0. In the case of Yes in step 1520, in step 1522, the CPUC100 of the main control board M is an invalid line by the reverse push instruction command (command to the sub control board S side and reverse push (“right → middle → left”). Will be executed to instruct to align the white sevens), and the process proceeds to step 1526. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1520, in step 1524, the CPUC100 of the main control board M is a command to avoid the reverse push (a command to the sub control board S side, and is other than the reverse push (“right → middle → left”). The push order is instructed, and the effect of not aligning the white sevens on the invalid line) is set, and the process proceeds to step 1526. Even if No in step 1518, the process proceeds to step 1526. Next, in step 1526, the CPUC100 of the main control board M may determine the winning number (or the winning / replay winning information, the payout group number, etc.) related to the game as the replay-C (or the payout group number, etc.). It is determined whether or not it is a forward push black 7 replay, which is a replay in which the black seven can be aligned with the invalid line by stopping by the forward push. In the case of Yes in step 1526, in step 1528, whether or not the CPUC100 of the main control board M has added the number of AT games by the replay-C, in other words, the number of AT games added by winning the replay-C. It is determined whether or not it was 0. In the case of Yes in step 1528, in step 1530, the CPUC100 of the main control board M is an invalid line by a forward push instruction command (a command to the sub control board S side and forward push (“left → middle → right”). (The effect of instructing the black seven to be aligned) is set in, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1400). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1528, in step 1532, the CPUC100 of the main control board M is a command to avoid the forward push (a command to the sub control board S side, and is a command other than the forward push (“left → middle → right”). The push order is instructed, and the effect of not aligning the black sevens on the invalid line is set), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1400). Even if No in step 1526, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1400). In the present embodiment, a reverse push instruction command, a reverse push avoidance command, a forward push instruction command, and a forward push avoidance command are transmitted to the sub control board S, and the sub control board S receives these commands to subordinate. It is configured so that the control board S side can execute the effect related to the push order navigation, but it is not limited to this, and when the AT additional lottery is won, it is related to the fact that the AT additional lottery is won and the number of AT additional games. When a command (for example, a command related to the number of AT additional games related to the process of step 1517) is transmitted to the sub control board S side and the sub control board S side receives the command, the push order navigation is performed on the sub control board S side. It may be configured to determine the execution timing and the effect mode of the effect related to. As an example, in a game in which the re-game-B is won and the sub-control board S side receives the command (a game in which the number of AT games is added), a production mode in which a reverse push is instructed is selected. It may be configured to be executed, or in the game in which the command is received on the sub-control board S side, the effect of instructing the reverse push is not executed, and a predetermined condition thereafter (for example, a specific replay combination (for example, replay)) is performed. In a game in which (game-B or C) is satisfied), it may be configured to execute an effect of instructing a push order in which 7 lines can be aligned on an invalid line. Alternatively, in the game in which the re-game-B is won and the command is received on the sub-control board S side (a game in which the number of AT games is added), the effect of instructing the reverse push is not executed, and then (For example, after a predetermined number of games (a continuous effect may be executed at the same time, in that case, the final game of the continuous effect) is satisfied, the number of AT games is added to the effect (displayed by the effect display device S40). It is an effect that the display related to the number of remaining AT games is increased, and for example, "+ 30G" may be displayed). In this example, the effect display device S40 also displays the number of remaining AT games. The display is configured to be able to be displayed, and the display and the number of remaining AT games stored on the main control board side may be the same or different. In a game in which B is a winning game and the command is received on the sub-control board S side (a game in which the number of AT games is added), the effect of instructing the reverse push is not executed, and the subsequent predetermined conditions are satisfied. As an example of executing the effect of adding the number of AT games in the game that has been played, when a special effect (for example, a predetermined continuous effect) that encourages the winning of the bonus is being executed on the sub-control board S side (inside the bonus). Then, since the winning probability of re-game-B is low (including 0%), if the push order in which 7 matches are possible is notified, the player will recognize that the bonus has not been won), etc. There is a case where the board S side is executing a special effect. In addition, the main control board M side wins the AT addition lottery, and the sub control board S side determines that the number of remaining AT games has been added. The information includes (1) the number of AT remaining games, which is transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side after the lottery with the AT added. The difference between the information about the game and the information about the number of remaining AT games transmitted this time is calculated, and the number of AT additional games won in the AT additional lottery is grasped. (2) Obtained as a result of the AT additional game on the main control board M side. A command regarding the number of AT additional games has been transmitted to the sub-control board S side. If the AT additional lottery is not won, a command relating to the fact that the AT additional lottery is not won is sent to the sub-control board S side. When the sub-control board S side receives the command, the sub-control board S side may be configured to determine the production mode of the effect related to the push order navigation. As an example, the replay-B may be used. It ’s a winning game. Then, in the game in which the command is received on the sub-control board S side (the game in which the number of AT games is not added), the middle press (the middle stop button is operated as the first stop, and the push order avoids 7 sets). It may be configured to select and execute the effect mode instructing. In addition, as the information that the sub control board S side judges that the AT addition lottery was executed on the main control board M side, but the AT remaining game number was not added, (1) information on the AT remaining game number is used. After the AT addition lottery, transmission is performed from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side. After that, on the sub-control board S side, the difference between the information on the number of AT remaining games transmitted last time and the information on the number of AT remaining games transmitted this time is calculated, and the number of AT added games won in the AT added lottery is grasped. (If the value obtained by subtracting the information on the number of AT remaining games transmitted this time from the information on the number of AT remaining games transmitted last time is 1, it is judged that the AT addition lottery was not won), (2) Main control board As a result of the AT addition lottery on the M side, a command relating to the fact that the number of AT addition games is 0 is transmitted to the sub-control board S side.

Next, FIG. 21 is a flowchart (first sheet) of the AT state transition control process according to the subroutine of step 1400 of FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 1402, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state related to the AT is the state related to the AT capable of executing the AT lottery. In this embodiment, the AT lottery can be executed only in the "high probability state", and by winning the BB in the "high probability state", "advantageous BB internal middle game". After that, when the BB combination wins a prize, it shifts to the "advantageous BB state", and when the executed BB ends, it shifts to the "AT in progress state" and the initial number of AT games is displayed on the AT counter. The value of 50 times will be set. Even if the BB is won in the "low probability state", it shifts to the "normal BB internal medium game" and then does not shift to the "AT in progress state". It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to this, and if the BB is won in the "normal game state", the AT lottery may be won with the BB combination as an opportunity. In such a configuration, if the BB is won in the "normal game state" and the AT lottery is won with the BB role as an opportunity, the game shifts to the "advantageous BB internal medium game", and then the BB is changed. By aligning them, it will shift to the "advantageous BB state". In the internal state where the BB is won in the "normal game state" and the BBs are not aligned, the game section may be set as the "advantageous section" or the "standby section". In the case of Yes in step 1402, in step 1404, in the CPUC100 of the main control board M, the condition device related to the game is an AT lottery combination (in this example, a first-class BB-A or a first type BB combination in which there is no setting difference BB combination). It is determined whether or not it is species BB-C). In this embodiment, the winning numbers (winning numbers 19, 24) of the BB without setting difference and the winning numbers (winning numbers, 25, 26, 27) in which the small winning combination overlaps with the BB without setting difference are used. Both are AT lottery roles. In the case of Yes in step 1404, in step 1406, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the state related to AT after the next game to "advantageous BB internal middle game", and proceeds to step 1410. Further, even if No in step 1402 or 1404, the process proceeds to step 1410. In this embodiment, the AT winning rate (whether or not the winning is possible) related to the AT lottery is different when the state related to AT is different, but when the state related to AT is the same. The AT winning rate related to the AT lottery is the same even if the set value is different (if the BB is won in the "high probability state", the AT is always won regardless of the set value = then " Transition to "AT in progress").

Next, in step 1410, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the state related to the AT after the next game has been determined. In the case of Yes in step 1410, in step 1412, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state related to the AT is a “low probability state”. In the case of Yes in step 1412, in step 1414, the CPUC100 of the main control board M is a small state device in which the condition device related to the game can shift from the “low probability state” to the “high probability state” by winning. It is a role, and in this example, it is determined whether or not it is a cherry). In the case of Yes in step 1414, in step 1416, the CPUC100 of the main control board M wins with a predetermined probability (in this example, it is 1/2, and if it does not differ depending on the set value, there is no problem even if it is changed). Execute a high-probability state transition lottery. Next, in step 1418, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the executed high-probability state transition lottery has been won. In the case of Yes in step 1418, in step 1420, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the state related to the AT after the next game to the “high probability state”, and proceeds to step 1430.

Further, in the case of No in step 1412, in step 1424, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state related to the AT is a “high probability state”. In the case of Yes in step 1424, in step 1426, the CPUC100 of the main control board M has a counter value of 1 for the high securement failure counter KHc (the final game with high securement failure, and the 10th game after the "high probability state" is reached. ). In the case of Yes in step 1426, in step 1428, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the low probability transition condition is satisfied. Here, in the present embodiment, when the state related to AT is the "high probability state", the game section is the "advantageous section", and when the game section is the "advantageous section", the push order It is configured so that the "advantageous section" does not end unless the navigation is executed once or more, or the predetermined number of games (1500 games in this example) "advantageous section" continues. Even if you win the low-probability state transition lottery, if the low-probability transition condition is not satisfied because the push order navigation has not been executed more than once, the "high-probability state" will not end. ). If the BB combination is won during the "advantageous section" and the BB is executed, the "advantageous section" can be performed at any timing even if the push order navigation has not been executed even once in the "advantageous section". It may be configured to be terminated. In the case of Yes in step 1428, in step 1429, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the state related to the AT after the next game to the “low probability state”, and proceeds to step 1430. Here, the low-probability transition condition is satisfied by executing the push order navigation once. In addition, as a push order combination (a winning number in which the winning combination differs depending on the reel stop order and the profit margin of the player differs), a combination with a maximum payout number of 8 and a maximum payout number of 11 is provided. In this case, the low-probability transition condition may be that the push order navigation of the winning combination with a large maximum payout number of 11 is executed once. In addition, even if No in step 1410, step 1414, step 1418, step 1424, step 1426 or step 1428, the process proceeds to step 1430. As described above, in the present embodiment, when a new transition to the "high probability state" is made, 10 games, which are high-securing obstacle games, are set in the high-securing obstacle counter KHc, and until the counter value becomes 0. Is configured not to transition to a "low probability state". It should be noted that such a lottery method is only an example. For example, the low-probability state transition lottery is not executed for 10 games after the transition to the "high-probability state" (the stay in the "high-probability state" is guaranteed. ), The lottery for shifting from the "high probability state" to the "low probability state" may be executed with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/20) in each game after the lapse of the 10 games. It should be noted that the AT lottery combination (low probability AT lottery combination, high probability AT lottery combination) and the state promotion combination have the same winning probability in all the set values.

Next, FIG. 22 is a flowchart (second sheet) of the AT state transition control process according to the subroutine of step 1400 of FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 1430, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state related to AT is the “AT in progress state”. In the case of Yes in step 1430, in step 1431, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the counter value of the AT counter M60 is a predetermined value (4 in this example) or more. Here, in the present embodiment, when the state related to AT is "AT in progress state", the AT counter value is 4 or more, in other words, when the number of remaining AT games is 4 games or more, the watermelon B With a 1/2 chance of winning the game, you can get the right to move to the "additional specialization state" and move to the "specialization precursor state", while the state related to AT is "AT in progress state". , When the AT counter value is 3 or less, in other words, when the number of remaining AT games is 3 games or less, a lottery (specialization) to acquire the right to shift to the "additional specialization state" even if the watermelon B is won. It is configured not to shift to the "specialization precursor state" and the "additional specialization state" without executing the state transition lottery). The lottery is not limited to this, and even if the AT counter value is 3 or less, a lottery to win the watermelon B and acquire the right to shift to the "additional specialization state" (also known as the specialization state transition lottery). It may be configured to be able to execute (sometimes referred to as), and in the situation where the AT counter value is 3 or less, the watermelon B is elected and the right to shift to the "additional specialization state" is given. If the lottery to be won is won, it may be configured so that the next game that wins the lottery can be (shifted to) a "specialized precursor state" or an "additional specialized state", or the AT counter value. May be configured to be (or transition to) a "specialization precursor state" or an "additional specialization state" when becomes a predetermined value (for example, 1 or 0), or the game won in the lottery. After the execution of a predetermined number of games, it may be configured to be (or shift to) a "specialization precursor state" or an "additional specialization state". In addition, when shifting to the "additional specialization state", it is not always necessary to go through the "specialization precursor state". You may. In the case of Yes in step 1431, in step 1432, the CPUC100 of the main control board M can execute a lottery in which the conditional device related to the game can acquire the transfer right to the specialization transition combination (“additional specialization state””. It is a role, and in this example, it is determined whether or not it is a watermelon B). In the case of Yes in step 1432, in step 1433, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes a special state transition lottery that wins with a predetermined probability (1/2 in this example). Next, in step 1434, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the executed specialization state transition lottery has been won. In the case of Yes in step 1434, in step 1435, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the state related to the AT after the next game to the "specialization precursor state", and proceeds to step 1444-1. On the other hand, if No in step 1431, in step 1436, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the counter value of the AT counter M60 is 1 (if the AT counter value is 1, the AT final game is reached). judge. In the case of Yes in step 1436, in step 1437, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes a continuous lottery to win with a predetermined probability (2/3 in this example). Next, in step 1438, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the executed continuous lottery has been won. In the case of Yes in step 1438, in step 1439, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the state related to AT after the next game to "AT in progress state", and shifts to step 1444-1 (AT state shiftable condition). The number of AT initial games (50 in this example) is set in the AT counter to satisfy the requirements. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1438, in step 1443, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the state related to the AT after the next game to the "recoverable / non-recoverable effect state", and proceeds to step 1444-1. In addition, even if No in step 1430, step 1432, step 1434 or step 1436, the process proceeds to step 1444-1. As described above, in the present embodiment, the continuous lottery is executed in the AT final game, and when the continuous lottery is won, the AT counter M60 is set to the initial value of 50 games again. That is, if the addition of the number of AT games is not taken into consideration, the AT of 50 games per set continues to loop at 2/3. The execution timing of the continuous lottery is not limited to the final AT game. For example, after the initial value is set in the first game of AT (the first game newly in the "AT in progress" state or the AT counter M60). The first game) may be configured to perform a continuous lottery. With such a configuration, it has already been determined whether or not the next set (AT related to the winning of the continuous lottery) will be executed (whether or not the AT will continue) in the "AT in progress state". , The effect during AT can be different depending on whether the continuous lottery is won or not. For example, when the continuous lottery is won, the counter value of the AT counter M60 It is possible to change the BGM (song is played, etc.) in a situation of 1 or more (during the execution of AT), or to execute an effect in which it is definite that the continuous lottery has been won.

Next, FIG. 23 is a flowchart (third sheet) of the AT state transition control process according to the subroutine of step 1400 of FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 1444-1, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state related to the AT is a state for effecting resurrection. In the case of Yes in step 1444-1, in step 1444-2, in the CPUC100 of the main control board M, the condition device related to the game is revived (in the next game by winning in the "recoverable / non-recoverable state"). It is determined whether or not it is a role that can shift to the "AT in progress state", in other words, a role that can pull back the AT). Here, in the present embodiment, the resurrection role includes any of watermelon A, watermelon B, cherry, and a bonus role (only the BB role with no setting difference and not the BB role with the setting difference). When the condition device related to the game becomes a resurrection role, it is said that the resurrection lottery is won. In the case of Yes in step 1444-2, in step 1444-3, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the state related to AT after the next game to "AT in progress state", and shifts to step 1445. Here, the number of AT initial games (50 in this example) is set in the AT counter in order to satisfy the AT state transitionable condition. On the other hand, if No in step 1444-2, in step 1444-4, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the state related to AT after the next game to the "low probability state", and shifts to step 1445. Even if No in step 1441-1, the process proceeds to step 1445. As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the game is the final AT game and the continuous lottery is not won, the game shifts to the "recoverable / non-recoverable production state" and is revived in the "revival / non-recoverable production state". If the lottery can be won, it is configured to shift to the "AT in progress state" from the next game. In addition, although the "state for effect of revival possibility" is "advantageous section", the lottery related to AT in the "AT in progress state" (AT addition lottery, continuous lottery, etc.) is not executed, and the revival lottery can be executed. It is configured, and the execution mode of the lottery regarding AT is different between the "AT in progress state" and the "recoverable / non-recoverable effect state".

Next, in step 1445, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the state related to the AT after the next game has been determined. In the case of Yes in step 1445, in step 1446, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the transition condition of the state related to the AT is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 30, “specialization precursor”. Satisfied when 10 games, which is the number of precursor games, are exhausted in "State"). In the case of Yes in step 1446, in step 1447, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the state related to the AT after the next game, and proceeds to step 1448 (for example, as shown in FIG. 30, "specialization". If the number of precursor games is exhausted in "precursor state", it is decided to be "additional specialization state"). Even if No in step 1445 or 1446, the process proceeds to step 1448. Next, in step 1448, the CPUC100 of the main control board M guarantees a high secured fault counter value command (in this example, it is a command to the sub side, and the current high secured fault counter value, in other words, a high probability state is guaranteed. The command related to the remaining number of games has been set), and the process proceeds to step 1449-1. Next, in step 1449-1, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the state related to the AT after the next game is determined to be "advantageous BB internal middle game". In the case of Yes in step 1449-1, in step 1449-2, the CPUC100 of the main control board M clears the counter value of the high securing failure counter KHc to zero, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1450). Even if No in step 1499-1, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1450).

In this embodiment, the AT winning rate is configured to differ depending on the lottery state, and if the BB combination (BB combination with no setting difference) is won in the "low probability state", the AT transition lottery is won. No (then does not shift to the "AT in progress state") On the other hand, if the BB role (BB role with no setting difference) is won in the "high probability state", the AT transition lottery is won (then to the "AT in progress state"). (Migrate), but not limited to this, the condition device A, which is a predetermined condition device, is used as an AT lottery, and the "high probability state A" and "high probability" are the states related to the AT, which is the "advantageous section". When configured to have "state B", if the condition device A is won in the "high probability state A", the AT transition lottery is won at 1/10, and the condition device is won in the "high probability state B". If A is won, the AT transition lottery may be won at 1/2. If the AT transition lottery is won, the AT transition state is changed to the "AT preparation state", which is the preparation state until the transition to the "AT in progress state", and then a predetermined end condition (for example, "AT preparation"). It may be configured to shift to the "AT in progress state" when 10 games have passed since the shift to the "state".

Next, FIG. 24 is a flowchart of the condition device number management process according to the subroutine of step 1450 of FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 1451, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current gaming section is an “advantageous section”. In the case of Yes in step 1451, in step 1452, the CPUC100 of the main control board M is a command related to winning / replay winning information (a command on the sub control board S side, for example, winning / replay winning related to the game). Set the command related to information). Next, in step 1454, in the CPUC100 of the main control board M, the condition device related to the game is a combination with a push order (a condition device in which the winning combination differs depending on the push order, for example, winning-A1 or the like). Judge whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 1454, in step 1458, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines an instruction number (also referred to as a push order number) in the game based on the winning / replay winning information related to the game, and gives an instruction. It is stored in the RAM address for storing the number (an address different from the RAM address for displaying the push order navigation). The instruction number is information related to the pressing order, and in this example, the main control board M is determined and transmitted to the sub control board S (details will be described later). Further, the sub-control board S can display the push order navigation on the effect display device S40 by receiving the instruction number. It should be noted that the instruction number is determined even when the push order navigation is not executed (although not shown, the instruction number becomes the initial value based on clearing the instruction number). When the push order guessing game is executed, a predetermined instruction number (for example, AX) dedicated to the push order guessing game may be determined. Next, in step 1460, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the push order navigation display on the push order display device D270 based on the instruction number related to the game (display of the push order navigation display on the main control board side). See Figure 34 for an image). Next, in step 1466, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets a command (command to the sub side) related to the instruction number determined in step 1458 (for example, sets it in the register area), and proceeds to step 1472. (See FIG. 34 for a display image of the push order navigation display on the sub-control board side). In this example, displaying the stop order of the reels, which is the most profitable for the player, on the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 is referred to as displaying the push order navigation, the push order navigation display, and the like. ing. In this embodiment, the push order navigation is displayed based on the instruction number. For example, the push order of "left → middle → right" is displayed by the push order display device D270 as "= 1". In both the push order bell and the push order replay, it is configured to be displayed as "= 1". In addition, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the case of displaying the push order navigation of "left → middle → right" on the push order display device D270 in the game related to the push order bell, and in the game related to the push order replay game, " The display mode may be different from the case where the push order navigation of "left → middle → right" is displayed on the push order display device D270. That is, the number of types of the push order navigation display mode displayed on the push order display device D270 may be the same as the number of types of winning / replay winning information.

If No in step 1451 or 1454, in step 1468, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes mask processing on the winning / replay winning information of the game, and the masked information is used as the predetermined address of the RAM. Remember in. Here, when the winning / replay winning information related to the game is transmitted to the sub-control board S side, if the winning / replay winning information is recognized due to an illegal act, it is considered to be a high profit related to the game. The push order (reel stop order) will be recognized. Therefore, in this example, the sub-control board S is executed after performing mask processing {processing for concealing winning / replay winning information (especially information related to the push order)} for the winning / replay winning information related to the game. By configuring it to send to, it is configured so that the highly profitable push order cannot be recognized. As the mask processing method in the present embodiment, a plurality of winning / replay winning information (winning / replay winning information having a similar role is suitable, for example, the RT state changes depending on the pushing order. Multiple winning / replay winning information that can be stopped and displayed as a symbol combination that serves as a replaying role is used as one production group number (for example, winning / replay winning information 4 to 6 are designated as production group 4). The group number is configured to be transmitted to the sub control board S side. The method of mask processing is not limited to this, and for example, after the provided winning / replay winning information (0 to 18 in this example), a new winning / replay after mask processing is performed. It may be configured to provide winning information. Even in such a case, a plurality of winning / replay winning information among the existing winning / replay winning information such as the production group number can be used as one winning / replay winning information for winning / replaying after mask processing. It is desirable to configure the game winning information to be provided (for example, the winning / re-gaming winning information 4 to 6 is the winning / re-gaming winning information 19 (newly provided winning) which is the winning / re-gaming winning information after mask processing.・ Re-game winning information), etc.). If it is determined that the game is to notify the operation information (push order navigation) based on the state related to AT on the main control board M, the winning / re-game winning information is transmitted to the sub control board S side. In a game that does not notify the operation information, the effect group number may be transmitted to the sub control board S side. When configured in this way, the command related to the instruction number may be transmitted to the sub-control board S side, or may be configured not to be transmitted.

Next, in step 1470, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets a command (command to the sub side) related to the effect group number after executing the mask processing (for example, sets it in the register area), and then steps. Move to 1472. Next, in step 1472, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets a command (command to the sub side) related to the bonus winning information (whether or not the bonus is won can be recognized by the sub side) (for example,). (Set in the register area), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1550). In this embodiment, the winning / replay winning information and the bonus winning information are derived from the winning number, but the derivation method will be described later. In addition, as shown in the lower part of the figure, as an example of the display of the push order navigation, in the case of "AT in progress", (1) when the fall re-game combination is included → the fall re-game combination is not stopped and displayed. The order is navigating, (2) in the case of bells (1 piece combination / 11 piece combination) → the push order with the largest number of payouts is navigating, and so on. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the game section is an "advantageous section", the winning / re-game winning information (the type of winning combination and the most advantageous pushing order for the player) is displayed on the sub-control board S side. (A number that can specify) and an instruction number (a number that can specify the most advantageous push order for the player), while the sub-control board S when the game section is a "normal section" It is configured so that the production group number (a number that can identify only the outline of the winning combination) can be transmitted to the side. That is, in the "advantageous section", the winning / re-gaming winning information related to the game, including the winning / re-gaming winning information in which the result of the game and the profit of the player differ depending on the pushing order, is used as it is on the sub-control board S side. On the other hand, in a game section that is not an "advantageous section", the winning / replay winning information related to the game is not transmitted, and the result of the game and the profit of the player differ depending on the pushing order. In the case of winning information, it is configured to transmit the effect group number concealing the information related to the push order to the sub-control board S side.

When the game section is not an "advantageous section", mask processing is executed when the winning / re-game winning information determined by the main control board M is transmitted to the sub control board S to determine the effect group number. Then, the effect group number is configured to be transmitted to the sub-control board S. In addition, the production group number is the winning / replay winning information related to the winning combination (for example, the replaying role including the falling replaying role, the push order bell, etc.) having the same role. Are grouped and numbers are assigned. It is configured to execute mask processing {processing to keep the winning / replay winning information (especially information related to the push order) confidential} on the winning / replay winning information related to the game, and then send it to the sub-control board S. This prevents a situation in which the information related to the winning / replay winning information is recognized due to an illegal act, and the pushing order (reel stop order) that is highly profitable related to the game is recognized. The transmission mode of the effect group number is not limited to the configuration shown in the figure, and the effect group number can be transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side only in the "normal section", and in the "advantageous section". May be configured not to transmit the effect group number.

Next, FIG. 25 is a flowchart of the reel rotation start preparation process according to the subroutine of step 1550 of FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 1552, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the timer value of the game interval minimum time timer M70 (subtraction timer) is 0. Here, the game interval minimum time timer M70 is a time (4.1 seconds in this example) that should be secured from a certain game start timing (reel rotation start timing) to the next game start timing (reel rotation start timing). It is a timer to measure. In the case of Yes in step 1552, in step 1554, the CPUC100 of the main control board M newly sets the timer value of the game interval minimum time timer M70 to the minimum time (4.1 seconds in this example) and starts. On the other hand, if No in step 1552, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes an infinite loop process. Next, in step 1556, the CPUC100 of the main control board M clears the information related to the reel stop order and the information related to the push order related to the finished game. Next, in step 1558, the CPUC100 of the main control board M clears the information related to the reel stop related to the finished game and the pull-in point creation request. Next, in step 1560, the CPUC100 of the main control board M initializes the symbol stop position data related to the finished game. Next, in step 1562, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets an output request during reel rotation start standby related to the game. Next, in step 1564, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets a reel control command related to the game, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1260). In other words, by the processing of step 1562 and step 1564, a command for indicating that the reel starts rotating can be transmitted to the sub-control board S.

Next, FIG. 26 is a flowchart of the remaining game number management process according to the subroutine of step 3400 of FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 3402, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current gaming section is an “advantageous section”. Although the details will be described later, the "advantageous section" is one of the game sections, and the game situation is advantageous for the player, such as when the state related to AT is "AT in progress state". It is a game section that is easy to set in. In the case of Yes in step 3402, in step 3404, the CPUC100 of the main control board M initially has 1500, which is the number of games remaining in the advantageous section counter YKc-1 (the decrement counter, which is the maximum number of games that can stay in the "advantageous section". The counter value of (a counter that is set as a value and can be subtracted every game in the "advantageous interval") is subtracted by 1.

Next, in step 3408, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state related to AT is the “AT in progress state”. In the case of Yes in step 3408, in step 3410, the CPUC100 of the main control board M subtracts 1 from the AT counter value. Next, in step 3412, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the state related to the AT is a high probability state. In the case of Yes in step 3412, in step 3414, the CPUC100 of the main control board M subtracts 1 from the counter value of the high securing failure counter KHc, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1700). Even if No in step 3402, step 3408 or step 3412, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1700). As described above, in the present embodiment, when the state related to the AT that can be displayed by the push order navigation is the "AT in progress state", the AT counter value for each game is subtracted, but the "advantageous BB state" and "advantageous BB state" In the case of "advantageous BB internal middle game", "specialization precursor state" or "additional specialization state", the AT counter value is not subtracted even if the game is executed. That is, when the AT counter value remains (1 or more remains) and the state shifts from the "AT in progress state" to the "specialization precursor state", the "AT in progress state" is maintained while the AT counter value is maintained. It is configured so that the transition (transition) can be performed in the order of "state"-> "specialization precursor state"-> "additional specialization state". Even if the state related to AT is "AT in progress", it is possible not to subtract 1 from the AT counter value when the winning number including the bonus combination is determined in the game. At this time, for example, the AT counter value stored in the RAM of the main control board M is not subtracted, but the remaining number of AT games displayed on the effect display device S40 controlled by the sub control board S is displayed so as to be subtracted. You may control it. For example, when the game is executed and the bonus is won when the AT counter value is "30" and the number of remaining AT remaining games displayed on the effect display device S40 is "30", the AT counter value is "30". Is stored, or "30 + α", which is the value obtained by adding the value "α" obtained by the AT addition lottery related to the game, is stored, but is displayed on the effect display device S40 when the start lever D50 is operated. You may display "29" as the number of remaining AT games, or "29 + α" which is the sum of the value "α" obtained by the AT addition lottery (note that the "α" obtained by the addition lottery is , "Α" in a specific game after the game (a game that meets certain conditions at the start of the bonus game, during the bonus game, at the end of the bonus game, or after the end of the bonus game) without notifying the game. You may notify). Then, the number of AT remaining games displayed on the effect display device S40 is subtracted by 1 for each game even in the "advantageous BB internal medium game", and an effect suggesting bonus confirmation (for example, a bonus confirmation screen) is output. It can be configured so that the number of AT remaining games is subtracted for each game. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from immediately grasping the bonus winning when the bonus is won in a state where the push order navigation such as "AT in progress" can be executed. That is, after the winning number including the bonus combination is determined, a continuous effect over a plurality of games that encourages whether or not the bonus is won can be executed by using the effect display device S40 or the like to enhance the interest of the game. The number of remaining AT games displayed on the effect display device S40 after the bonus game is completed is "30", or a value of "30" or more when notifying the result of winning and adding as a result of the AT addition lottery. Can be controlled to display. If the game is executed and the bonus is won when the AT counter value is "1" and the number of remaining AT games displayed on the effect display device S40 is "1", the game is displayed on the effect display device S40. The display related to the number of remaining AT games is "0", but while maintaining this state, continuous production over multiple games is executed to encourage whether or not the bonus is won, and the AT counter value is "1". , The winning number (or winning / re-game winning information, or ball ejection group number) in which the game can be executed and the AT addition lottery can be executed when the number of remaining AT games displayed on the effect display device S40 is "1". If is won and the AT addition lottery is not won, the number of AT games is "0" and the number of AT games displayed on the effect display device S40 is "0". Further, when the number of remaining AT games is small, the probability of executing the continuous effect may be set lower (including 0%) than when the number of remaining AT games is large.

Next, FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the RT state transition control process according to the subroutine of step 1700 of FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 1702, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the RT state transition enable condition is satisfied in the game. Here, in the present embodiment, the RT state transitionable conditions are the execution of RAM clear (RAM initialization), the stop display of the re-game (in this example, the stop display of the re-game 04), and the winning / starting of the BB. -It is configured to be satisfied at the end. In the case of Yes in step 1702, in step 1704, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not RT state transition is possible and the RT state after the next game based on the satisfied RT state transition enable condition (RT state transition in FIG. 28). (Refer to the figure), the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1750). Even if No in step 1702, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1750). In the present embodiment, the RT state transition control process is executed after all reels are stopped, but when shifting to "RT1", the shift timing may be shifted when the lever is turned on. The timing for shifting the RT state (storing the RT number in the RAM) can be appropriately determined.

Next, FIG. 28 is an RT state transition diagram in this embodiment. In the present embodiment, there are four RT states of "RT0" to "RT2" and "type 1 BB-A, B, C operating", and by satisfying the conditions shown by the arrows in the figure. The RT state will shift. As a specific example of transition to the RT state, when the RT state is "RT1", RAM initialization is executed, or when the replay 04 is stopped and displayed, the transition to "RT0" is performed. The stop display of the re-game 04 is specifically when the left stop button is operated as the first stop when the "re-game-D1" is won in the situation where the RT state is "RT1". , Re-games 01 to 03 are stopped and displayed, and "RT1" is maintained as the RT state. On the other hand, if the "re-game-D1" is won in the situation where the RT state is "RT1" and the middle stop button or the right stop button is operated as the first stop, the re-game 04 is stopped and displayed. , The RT state shifts from "RT1" to "RT0".

Further, when the RT state is "RT0" or "RT1", the BB combination is won and the BB combination is not won in the winning game (the condition device related to the first type BB-A, B, C is activated). The RT state shifts to "RT2". Further, when the BB combination is won in "RT2" (one of the first type BB-A, B, C is operated), the process shifts to "when the first type BB-A, B, C is operated". Further, when the BB ends at "when the type 1 BB-A, B, C is operated" (the operation of any of the type 1 BB-A, B, C is completed), the process shifts to "RT1". In addition, when the state related to AT is "low probability state", the BB is won, and when the BB ends, the RT state shifts to "RT1" which is highly profitable for the player. Since the push order navigation does not occur in the state, when the "replay-D1 to D3" is won, the wrong answer push order (the first stop is the left button, the middle button, and the right button). One of the three choices is the correct push order and the re-games other than the re-game 04 are stopped and displayed, and two of the three choices are the incorrect push order and the re-game 04 is stopped and displayed). By stopping the game 04, the replay 04 will be stopped and displayed, and the game will shift from "RT1" to "RT0". In addition, if the state related to AT is "high probability state", "AT in progress state", "specialization precursor state" or "additional specialization state", the BB is won, and if the BB ends, the RT state is reached. Will shift to "RT1", which is highly profitable for the player, and the state related to AT is a state in which push-order navigation occurs, and even when "Re-game-D1 to D3" is won, re-game 04 Will navigate the push order of the correct answer that does not stop and display, so "RT1" can be maintained.

Next, FIG. 29 is a flowchart of the AT state start control process according to the subroutine of step 1750 of FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 1752, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the AT state transitionable condition is satisfied in the game. The conditions for shifting to the AT state are, for example, (1) when the BB with no setting difference won in the "high probability state" is completed, (2) when the continuous lottery is won, and (3) the revival lottery is won. Satisfy if you do. In the case of Yes in step 1752, in step 1754, the CPUC100 of the main control board M newly shifts to the "AT precursor state", and the number of AT initial games (50 in this example, during AT). The number of games in which subtraction is started after shifting to the "state") is set in the AT counter M60, and the process proceeds to step 1756. Even if No in step 1756, the process proceeds to step 1756. Next, in step 1756, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state related to AT is a high probability state. In the case of Yes in step 1756, in step 1758, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the state related to the AT of the next game is a high probability state. In the case of Yes in step 1758, in step 1760, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets the number of high-securing obstacle games (10 in this example) in the high-securing obstacle counter, and performs the next processing (processing of step 3500). Transition. Even if No in step 1756 or step 1758, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 3500). In addition, after winning the BB in the "high probability state" and shifting to the "advantageous BB internal medium game", by winning the BB, the game shifts to the "advantageous BB state" and the AT game in the "advantageous BB state". When the number is added, the initial value set in the AT counter exceeds 50 when the BB ends and the "advantageous BB state" shifts to the "AT in progress state". Specifically, when the number of AT games is added by 30 games in the "advantageous BB state" and then the state shifts to the "AT in progress state", 80 (initial value 50 + additional 30) is set in the AT counter. become. At this time, if the player is informed that 30 games have been added in the "advantageous BB state", the player is informed that the number of AT initial games is 80 at the start of the "AT in progress state". It is desirable to notify, but as another notification method, instead of notifying the player that 30 games have been added in the "advantageous BB state", the initial value is set at the start of the "AT in progress state". After presenting a certain 50 games to the player, the player is informed that 30 games have been added during AT (for example, immediately after the start of "AT in progress" or in a state where the number of remaining AT games in the effect display device S40 is small). A notification method for performing a notification effect is also conceivable. By doing so, the player cannot clearly grasp whether the number of AT games has been added in the "advantageous BB state" or how many games have been added. It is possible to enhance the interest in the additional production that suddenly occurs for unknown reasons during AT (a state in which push order navigation can occur). In this example, the number of AT initial games is set in the AT counter M60 in step 1754, but the execution timing of the process of setting the number of AT initial games is not limited to that of this example. The AT initial game number may be set in the AT counter M60 at the timing of executing the AT state transition control process in step 1400 described above. Further, the number of games set in the AT counter M60 (the number of AT initial games) is configured to be subtracted from the time when the game (the state related to AT is "AT in progress") after the end of BB. (The subtraction does not start during BB). Further, the counter value of the AT counter M60 is configured to be stored in the storage area of the RAM of the main control board M.

Next, FIG. 30 is an AT state transition diagram in this embodiment. In this embodiment, "low probability state", "normal BB internal medium game", "normal BB state", "high probability state", "AT in progress state", "specialization precursor state", "additional specialization state" , "Advantageous BB internal game", "Advantageous BB state", and "Resurrection possibility production state", and there are 10 AT-related states. The state will shift. For example, if the watermelon B is won in the "AT in progress state" and the special state transition lottery in which the watermelon B is won in 1/2 is won, the state shifts to the "specialization precursor state". In addition, when 10 games have passed (digested) after shifting to the "specialized precursor state", the game is configured to shift to the "additional specialized state". As for the game section, the states related to the three ATs of "low probability state", "normal BB internal game", and "normal BB state" are set to "normal section", and "high probability state" and "AT in progress". The seven AT-related states of "state", "specialization precursor state", "additional specialization state", "advantageous BB internal medium game", "advantageous BB state", and "recoverable / non-recoverable production state" have become "advantageous sections". Set. That is, even if the state related to the seven ATs that are the "advantageous section" is transitioned (shifted), if 1500 games have passed without setting the "normal section", the "advantageous section" is forcibly terminated. It is set to "normal section". In addition, the re-game 04 is stopped and displayed when the notification game state in which the push order navigation is displayed is the "AT in progress state", the "specialization precursor state", or the "additional specialization state". However, the gaming state is maintained.

As described above, when the AT counter M60 is in the "AT in progress state" and the counter value of the AT counter M60 is 0 and the continuous lottery is not won, the "revival possibility effect state" is set. If you win the revival lottery in the "Resurrection possibility production state", you can return to the "AT in progress state" again. On the other hand, if the revival lottery is not won in the "resurrection possibility production state", the process shifts to the "low probability state" and the "advantageous section" changes to the "normal section".

When the BB without setting difference (Type 1 BB-A or Type 1 BB-C) is won in the "high probability state", the BB without setting difference operates, and the "advantageous BB state" ends, the "AT in progress state" To move to. Also, when the "AT in progress state" is won with no setting difference BB (Type 1 BB-A or Type 1 BB-C), the setting difference BB operates, and the "advantageous BB state" ends, " It shifts to "AT in progress". In addition, when the BB without setting difference (1st class BB-A or 1st class BB-C) is won in the "state for effect of resurrection", the BB without setting difference operates, and the "advantageous BB state" ends. Also shifts to "AT in progress" (to win the revival lottery). In addition, when the BB with a setting difference (Type 1 BB-B) is won in the "state for effect of resurrection", the BB with a setting difference operates, and the "advantageous BB state" ends, the BB with a setting difference becomes independent. If it is the winning number (winning number 20) related to the BB role, it will be in a "low probability state" after the end of BB (because there is a setting difference and the BB role will not win the revival lottery), and the BB with setting difference is rare. If the winning number is the same as the winning number (winning numbers 21 to 23), it will be in the "AT in progress state" after the end of BB (because the rare role will be the trigger to win the revival lottery).

In addition, when the BB with a setting difference (Type 1 BB-B) is won in the case of the "advantageous section" and the "high probability state", the BB with the setting difference operates, and the "advantageous BB state" ends. Move to "high probability state".

In addition, the state related to AT that shifts after the end of the "advantageous BB state" is after the end of the winning BB (setting difference) during AT ("AT in progress state", "specialization precursor state", "additional specialization state"). (Both with BB and BB without setting difference) shifts to the state related to AT at the time of BB winning among "AT in progress state", "specialization precursor state" or "additional specialization state", and is in non-AT ( After the end of the BB with no setting difference won in the "high probability state"), the state shifts to the "AT in progress state". In addition, there is a setting difference in winning during non-AT (“high probability state”), and after the end of BB, the state shifts to the “high probability state”.

The state related to AT is not limited to that of the present embodiment. For example, an AT lottery is executed by winning a predetermined winning number in a "low probability state" or a "high probability state", and the AT lottery is performed. By winning the game, the player may be configured to shift to the "precursor state" and shift to the "AT in progress state" after 16 to 32 games have elapsed. By winning, the AT lottery is executed, and if the AT lottery is not won, it shifts to the "Gase precursor state" and shifts to the "low probability state" or "high probability state" after 16 to 32 games have passed. It may be configured to do so. Further, a "waiting section" different from the "advantageous section" and the "normal section" may be provided as the game section. For example, when the AT lottery is executed by winning the "cherry", the BB If you win the "BB + Cherry" where the cherry and the cherry overlap, and you win the AT lottery, the state inside the BB until the "BB" of the "BB + Cherry" wins is configured as the "waiting section". You may. In this way, by providing the "waiting section", the BB is won in the "low probability state" and the AT lottery is not won, and the BB is won in the "low probability state" and the AT. In the case where the lottery is won and the period until the symbol combinations of BB are complete (until the advantageous section indicator YH lights up), the advantageous section indicator YH is turned off, so the AT lottery is won. It is possible to incite the player whether or not it is. Further, if the BB is won in the "additional specialization state", the "additional specialization state" may be restarted after the end of the BB. Executes an AT additional lottery different from the BB won in the "AT in progress state" as the BB won in the "addition specialization state" (for example, wins the AT additional lottery than the BB won in the "AT in progress state". It may be configured so that the number of AT games is added and the number of games per game is relatively large). Further, if the BB is elected in the "specialization precursor state", it may be configured to shift to the "additional specialization state" after the end of the BB. The AT addition lottery may be executed in the same manner as the winning BB in the "addition specialization state".

Next, FIG. 31 is a flowchart of the game section transition control process according to the subroutine of step 3500 of FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in the present embodiment, a game section is provided as a section related to the state of the game, and the game section is a "normal section" which is relatively low profit for the player and relatively high for the player. It has two game sections, an "advantageous section" which is a profitable section. As a description of the flowchart, first, in step 3508, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the game section related to the game is a “normal section”. In the case of Yes in step 3508, in step 3510, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the game section after the next game as the game section corresponding to the current AT-related state and the current game situation, and proceeds to step 3528. do. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3508, in other words, when the game section is an "advantageous section", in step 3514, the CPUC100 of the main control board M has a counter value of 0 in the game number counter YKc-1 remaining in the advantageous section. Whether or not, in other words, whether or not the "advantageous section" has reached the maximum number of games that can be continued is determined. In the case of Yes in step 3514, in step 3515, the CPUC100 of the main control board M clears all the information related to AT (thus, the AT counter value becomes 0, and the number of staying games in the "specialization precursor state" is described. Things will also be 0). On the other hand, if No in step 3514, in step 3518, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not an arbitrary advantageous section end condition is satisfied. Here, the arbitrary advantageous section end condition is an end condition of the "advantageous section" other than the case where the counter value of the advantageous section remaining game number counter YKc-1 becomes 0, and for example, the AT counter value is 0. This is the case when the push order navigation is executed a predetermined number of times. If No in step 3518, that is, if any advantageous section end condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step 3515. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the "advantageous section" is completed and the "normal section" is set after the next game, the information related to AT (the number of AT continuous games, the number of AT remaining games, etc.) Since all the information related to) is cleared, the conditions for becoming the "advantageous section" again in the subsequent "normal section" will not be relaxed. The information related to the AT cleared by the processing in step 3515 (processing at the end of the advantageous section) includes a counter value of the game remaining number counter YKc-1 in the advantageous section, a flag indicating the game state, and the like. In addition, these information will be cleared by clearing the RAM when the setting is changed, but depending on the RAM clear when the setting is changed, "conditional device related to the accessory continuous operation device (BB)" or "RT state". , While clearing information related to "number of stored sheets", etc., depending on the process of step 3515 (process at the end of the advantageous section), "conditional device related to the accessory continuous operation device (BB)" or "RT state". , Information related to "number of stored sheets" etc. is not cleared. As described above, the RAM clear range at the time of changing the setting and the clear range at the end of the "advantageous section" (for example, at the time of executing the process of step 3515) are different. It should be noted that the RAM is cleared when the setting is changed, so that the "conditional device related to the accessory continuous operation device (BB)" and the "RT state" may be maintained. In addition, the addresses in the range to be cleared at the end of the "advantageous section" are continuous. By making the addresses in the range to be cleared at the end of the "advantageous section" continuous in this way, it is possible to clear by a simple process of designating the range of the start address to be cleared and the range of the addresses to be cleared in the clearing process. Further, when the "advantageous section" is completed, a command relating to the end of the "advantageous section" is transmitted from the main control board M to the sub control board S. However, even if the sub-control board S side receives the command, it is configured so that the game history such as the fact that it was an "advantageous section" and the information related to how many games the "AT in progress state" was executed is not deleted. ing. However, when the RAM is cleared when the setting is changed, the game history such as the fact that it was an "advantageous section" on the sub-control board S side and the information on how many games the "AT in progress state" was executed. Will also be erased.

When the "advantageous section" ends because the counter value of the game number counter YKc-1 remaining in the advantageous section becomes 0, (1) when the current AT-related state is the "high probability state". In the next game, the state related to AT becomes a "low probability state", and (2) if the current state related to AT is "advantageous BB internal middle game", the state related to AT becomes "low probability state" in the next game. "Normal BB internal game", (3) If the current AT-related state is "advantageous BB state", the AT-related state will be "normal BB state" in the next game, (4) Currently If the AT-related state of is "AT in progress state", "specialization precursor state", "additional specialization state", or "recoverable / non-recoverable production state", the AT-related state is "low probability" in the next game. It is configured to be "state" (because the information related to AT is cleared).

Next, in step 3516, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets the game section after the next game to the “normal section”. Next, in step 3517, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns off the advantageous section indicator YH because the “advantageous section” is completed, and proceeds to step 3528. It should be noted that the advantageous section indicator YH is configured to be turned off when the "advantageous section" is completed and set to the "normal section", but the detailed turn-off timing is not limited to the timing of the present embodiment. For example, the advantageous section indicator YH may be turned off when a game medal is inserted for a game in which the “advantageous section” ends and becomes the “normal section”. In other words, the advantageous section indicator YH may be turned off before the start lever D50, which enables the start of the next game, is operated. On the other hand, in the case of Yes in step 3518, in step 3520, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the game section after the next game as an "advantageous section", and shifts to step 3528.

Next, in step 3528, it was decided that the CPUC100 of the main control board M was newly set to the "advantageous section" in the next game (it was decided to set the "normal section" to the "advantageous section"). Judge whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 3528, in step 3530, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets a predetermined value in the advantageous section remaining game number counter YKc-1. The predetermined value set in the advantageous section remaining game number counter YKc-1 is a fixed value (1500 in this example) common to all the set values. Next, in step 3534, the CPUC100 of the main control board M lights up the advantageous section display YH, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1293). Even if No in step 3528, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1293). In the present embodiment, the lighting process of the advantageous section display YH is executed at the timing of step 3534, but the lighting timing of the advantageous section display YH is not limited to this, and the lighting of the advantageous section display YH is not limited to this. The timing is from the operation timing of the start lever in the game before the new "advantageous section" (the game in the "normal section") to the timing when the game medal can be inserted in the new "advantageous section" game (newly "" If the game before the "advantageous section" is a game related to replay, set appropriately during the period (until the timing when the start lever operation becomes effective in the new "advantageous section" game). May be good.

Next, FIG. 32 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing according to the subroutine of step 1600 in the present embodiment. The processing of the subroutine is started when the timer interrupt is started in the processing of step 1040 or step 1104, and thereafter, a predetermined time (in this example, T is set, but for example, a time of about 2 ms is set. It is configured to be executed periodically with a cycle of).

First, in step 1602, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes a process at the start of an interrupt (for example, saving data held in a register in the CPUC100, checking an input port for a power failure detection signal, and the like). Next, in step 1604, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the power failure is currently detected (in the interrupt processing this time). If No in step 1604, in step 1900, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes a power-off process described later. On the other hand, in the case of Yes in step 1604, in step 1606, the CPUC100 of the main control board M starts timer measurement (update processing of various timers managed by software). Next, in step 1608, the CPUC100 of the main control board M generates input port data and stores the data (updates the storage area of each input port data in the RAM area). Here, the input port data includes the settlement button D60, the start lever D50, the stop button D40, the door switch D80, the setting key switch M20, the setting / reset button M30, the power cutoff detection signal, the on reception sensor D10s, and the first on sensor. Information related to the detection of D20s, the second input sensor D30s, the first payout sensor H10s, the second payout sensor H20s, etc. Will be).

Next, in step 1610, the CPUC100 of the main control board M refers to the input port data in the RAM area, and turns on / off the door switch flag and the setting key switch flag according to the sampling result of each input port data. Switching (for example, when the switch state of the door switch D80 is continuously on for multiple samplings, by turning on the door switch flag, the front door DU is opened without being affected by noise. It can also be detected that it is). Next, in step 6100, the CPUC100 of the main control board M is a rotation cylinder drive control process (process related to drive control of the reel M50) of all reels (left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53), and details thereof. Will be described later). Next, in step 1612, the CPUC100 of the main control board M refers to the AT counter M60 and determines whether or not the counter value is larger than 0. In the case of Yes in step 1612, in step 1613, the CPUC100 of the main control board M displays the number of remaining AT games (number of AT games) on the AT counter value display device D280, and proceeds to step 1614. Even if No in step 1612, the process proceeds to step 1614. If the AT counter value display device D280 controlled by the main control board M is not provided, the processes of steps 1612 and 1613 are unnecessary. Next, in step 1614, the CPUC100 of the main control board M outputs the output data to the output port. Here, the output data is data for driving the reel M50, the blocker D100, and the like. Next, in step 1616, the CPUC100 of the main control board M has all the error flags turned off (although not shown, the inserted medal backflow error flag, the inserted number of sheets error flag, the inserted medal retention error flag, and the inserted abnormal error flag, It is determined whether or not all the flags related to the error such as the payout abnormality error flag, the payout medal retention error flag, the door switch flag, etc. are off). In the case of Yes in step 1616, in step 1618, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets an error undetected command (a command to the sub side and a command related to the fact that an error is not detected) (for example, a register). (Set in the area), and the process proceeds to step 1622. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1616, in step 1620, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets an error detection command (a command to the sub side and a command related to the fact that an error is detected) (for example,). (Set in the register area), and the process proceeds to step 1622. In step 1620, information related to an error corresponding to the error flag that is turned on (an error that is currently occurring) is configured to be transmitted to the sub side. In addition, the error-undetected command may be set only when the error is cleared from the state in which the error occurred (only when it is determined that the flag is turned off), and when the error is not detected, the relevant command is applicable. It is not necessary to execute the information setting process (step 1618 may be omitted). Further, the error detection command may execute the set process only when an error occurs from the state where no error has occurred, or from the state where the first error (for example, the inserted medal retention error) has occurred. The set process may be executed when the type of error changes, such as the second error (for example, the payout medal retention error).

Next, in step 1622, the CPUC100 of the main control board M transmits a control command (command on the sub side) (for example, if it is set in the register area in step 1618 or step 1620, it is set. Control commands will be sent). Here, as commands to be transmitted to the sub-control board S, a command related to the start lever operation timing (sent immediately after the start lever operation) and a command related to the first reel stop acceptance timing (the stop button was operated as the first stop). Command related to the second reel stop acceptance timing (sent immediately after operating the stop button as the second stop), command related to the third reel stop acceptance timing (sending the stop button as the third stop) (Sent immediately after operation), command related to stop timing of stop display symbol (sent immediately after operating the stop button as display symbol stop), winning / re-winning Command related to game winning information (sent immediately after starting lever operation (only during advantageous section)), command related to bonus winning information (sent immediately after starting lever operation), command related to RT status (all reels Commands related to AT status (sent between when all reels are stopped and when the next game is started), Highly secured failure counter value command (sent immediately after starting lever operation), command related to the number of AT remaining games (between all reels stopped until the next game starts, or immediately after starting lever operation (Sent), commands related to the game section (sent between the time all reels stop and the next game start), and so on. Next, in step 1624, the CPUC100 of the main control board M outputs an external terminal signal (a signal for transmitting information from the spinning machine P to an external hall computer or the like). Although not shown, the information related to the error output by the external signal includes a door opening error, a closing error error, a payout error error, a closing reception sensor retention error, and the like. The door opening error is configured to be an error when the front door DU is opened and the door switch flag is turned on, and the insertion reception sensor retention error is when the insertion reception sensor detects the retention of the game medal. Is configured to result in an error. Next, in step 1626, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns on the output data of the LED (7-segment LED lamp, etc.) (for example, a predetermined 7-segment LED unit among the plurality of 7-segment LED units, 7). Outputs (lights a predetermined segment of the segment) (so-called dynamic lighting). Next, in step 1628, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes an LED lighting mode (for example, changing the LED lighting color). Note that step 1628 does not have to be executed. Next, in step 1630, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes soft random number management processing (update processing of random number values managed by software, etc.). Next, in step 1632, the CPUC100 of the main control board M acquires the internal information register data (the internal information register has an area in which the error flag bit is set when an abnormality occurs in the random number generation circuit). .. Next, in step 1634, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the frequency of the random number update clock is normal (whether or not the abnormality flag bit indicating the frequency abnormality is set). Specifically, when the frequency of the random number update clock falls below a predetermined value, the error flag bit is set. In the case of Yes in step 1634, in step 1636, the CPUC100 of the main control board M has whether or not the update state of the built-in random number is normal (whether or not the error flag bit indicating the update state abnormality is set). Is determined. In the case of Yes in step 1636, in step 1638, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the interrupt end process and shifts to the next process (process of step 1602). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1634 or step 1636, in step 1640, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets the built-in random number error display (for example, the error number is set in the register area). Next, in step 1300, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the above-mentioned non-recoverable error processing.

Next, FIG. 33 is a flowchart of the rotating cylinder drive control process according to the subroutine of step 6100 of FIG. 32 in the present embodiment. In this process, the process for one reel is illustrated, but it is supplemented that the process corresponding to each of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53 is executed. First, in step 6102, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the reel rotation start standby state start timing (for example, the timing after the execution of the process of step 1564 in FIG. 25) has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 6102, in step 6104, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the reel drive state to the reel rotation start standby state, and shifts to step 6106. On the other hand, even if No in step 6102, the process proceeds to step 6106.

Next, in step 6106, the CPUMC of the main control board M is the reel acceleration state start timing (the timing at which the reel rotation start standby state ends and the reel acceleration process starts to be executed. For example, in step 1260 of FIG. It is determined whether or not the processing execution timing) has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 6106, in step 6108, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the reel drive state to the reel acceleration state. Next, in step 6110, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the reel acceleration process, and proceeds to step 6112. When the reel is stopped, the rotation of the reel is started by this process. On the other hand, even if No in step 6106, the process proceeds to step 6112.

Next, in step 6112, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the current reel driving state is the reel acceleration state. In the case of Yes in step 6112, in step 6114, the CPUMC of the main control board M has executed all interrupt processing for the end timing of the reel acceleration state (for example, the “number of interrupt executions” in the reel acceleration state in FIG. 35 described later). It is determined whether or not the timing) has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 6114, in step 6116, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the reel drive state to the reel constant speed state. Next, in step 6118, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the reel constant speed maintenance process, and proceeds to step 6120. Even if No in step 6112 or 6114, the process proceeds to step 6120.

Next, in step 6120, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the current reel driving state is the reel constant speed state. In the case of Yes in step 6120, after the CPUMC of the main control board M is in the reel constant speed state (after executing the process of step 6116) in step 6122, the reel sensor corresponds to the reel (process of this subroutine). It is determined whether or not the index provided on the reel) is detected. Here, although not shown, each reel is provided with one index (which may be two or more). The index is provided on the peripheral side surface of the reel, for example, in a convex shape, and is used when detecting whether or not the reel has passed a predetermined position, whether or not the reel has made one rotation, and the like. Then, each index is detected by the reel sensor. The signal of the reel sensor is electrically connected to the main control board M. Then, when the reel sensor detects (turns off) the index, the input signal is input to the main control board M, and it is detected that the reel has passed a predetermined position. In the case of Yes in step 6122, it is determined that the rotation speed of the reel has reached a constant speed, and the process proceeds to step 6130. On the other hand, if No in step 6122, the CPUMC of the main control board M has elapsed a predetermined time (for example, a time value for executing interrupt processing 400 times) after the reel drive state is changed to the reel constant speed state in step 6124. Determine if it has been done. If No in step 6124, it is determined that the rotation speed of the reel has reached a constant speed, and the process proceeds to step 6130. As described above, in this example, it is possible to determine whether the reel rotation speed is normally set to the constant speed by detecting the index by the reel sensor within a predetermined time after the reel drive state becomes the reel constant speed state. It is configured. In this example, the predetermined time is a time value for executing 400 interrupt processes (configured so that 400 steps can be rotated with 400 interrupt processes), and the reel rotation speed is a constant speed. It is longer than the time for one rotation (one turn) of the reel (for example, one rotation of the reel is 336 steps, which is the time value for executing the interrupt process 336 times). With this configuration, how far is the distance between the index and the reel sensor (distance until the reel rotates and the index is detected by the reel sensor) at the timing when the reel drive state becomes the constant speed state. However, when the reel rotation speed is constant, the reel sensor detects the index within the predetermined time (time value for executing interrupt processing 400 times) after the reel drive state becomes the reel constant speed state. It is configured to be able to.

Returning to the explanation of the flowchart, in the case of Yes in step 6124, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the reel drive state to the reel acceleration state in step 6126. Next, in step 6128, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the reel reacceleration process, and shifts to the process of step 6130. As described above, in this example, when the reel sensor does not detect the index within a predetermined time (for example, the time value for executing the interrupt process 400 times) after the reel drive state becomes the reel constant speed state. , The reel drive state is updated again to the reel acceleration state, and the reel reacceleration process (the excitation mode of the stepping motor is the same as that of the reel acceleration process) is executed. Even if No in step 6120, the process proceeds to step 6130. The reel re-acceleration process does not have to be the same as the reel acceleration process described above, and the reel re-acceleration process and the reel acceleration process require interrupt processing for each combination of the exciting phase of the stepping motor and the combination of the exciting phases. The number of executions of may be different.

Next, FIG. 34 is a flowchart of the reel rotation stop process according to the subroutine of step 6200 of FIG. 32 in the present embodiment. First, in step 6106, the CPUMC of the main control board M is the reel deceleration standby state start timing (the timing at which the reel constant speed state ends, and for example, the reel deceleration standby state start timing is set by operating the stop button. It is determined whether or not the reels have been reached. In the case of Yes in step 6130, in step 6132, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the reel drive state to the reel deceleration standby state, and shifts to step 6134. On the other hand, even if No in step 6130, the process proceeds to step 6134.

Next, in step 6134, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the current reel drive state is the reel deceleration standby state. In the case of Yes in step 6136, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the reel deceleration standby state end timing (timing to start execution of the reel deceleration process) has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 6136, in step 6138, the CPUMC of the main control board M starts deceleration of the reel (reel deceleration process). Next, in step 6140, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state, and shifts to the process of step 6142. Even if No in step 6134 or step 6136, the process proceeds to step 6142.

Next, in step 6142, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the current reel drive state is the reel deceleration state. In the case of Yes in step 6142, in step 6144, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the reel deceleration state end timing (timing at which the reel deceleration process is executed ends) has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 6144, in step 6146, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the reel drive state to the reel stop state, and shifts to the next process (process of step 1612). Even if No in step 6142 or step 6144, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1612).

Next, with reference to FIG. 35, the rotational operation of the reel M50 of the spinning machine according to this example will be described in detail. The rotating cylinder type gaming machine according to this example starts the rotation of the stepping motor based on the operation of the start lever D50, and when the rotation speed of the reel reaches a constant speed, the constant speed is maintained thereafter (reel). When the drive state becomes the reel constant speed state, the reel constant speed maintenance process is executed, but the rotation speed may not actually reach the constant speed). Then, when any of the stop buttons is operated, stop control is performed on the reel (stepping motor) corresponding to the operated stop button. Here, the stepping motor is a 4-phase stepping motor having four phases of Φ0, Φ1, Φ2, and Φ3 (there is no problem even if it is not a 4-phase stepping motor), the phase to be excited is switched, and the stepping motor is 1-2. Rotation control is performed by phase excitation. That is, the stepping motor can be rotated in the positive direction by cyclically changing the drive pulse data (combination of exciting phases). In the figure, among Φ0 to Φ3, the one indicating which phase is specified to be excited is shown in the column of “Phase to be excited” (details will be described later).

In addition, as shown in the "reel rotation speed image" at the top of the figure, the drive state from the start of rotation to the stop of the stepping motor is divided into six, and the stepping motor is set according to the drive pattern according to each drive state. The drive is controlled. Here, the drive state includes a "reel stop state", a "reel rotation start standby state", a "reel acceleration state", a "reel constant speed state", a "reel deceleration standby state", and a "reel deceleration state". In the "reel rotation speed image", the vertical axis is the reel rotation speed and the speed increases upward, and the horizontal axis is time and the time elapses to the right. There is. In addition, the example shown in the figure illustrates the case where the reel rotation failure does not occur, and this is limited to the case where the reel rotation failure occurs due to factors such as holding the reel by hand or causing step-out. It is not (the case where the reel rotation failure occurs will be described later).

The "reel stop state" indicates a state in which the reel is stopped, and when the "reel stop state" is in the "reel stop state", the reel is in a stationary state and all four phases of the stepping motor are in a stationary state. Is not excited.

Next, in the "reel stop state", the reel drive state is updated to the "reel rotation start standby state" based on the operation of the start lever D50 at the timing (1) in the figure. .. Here, the "reel rotation start standby state" indicates a state of waiting from the operation of the start lever D50 until the acceleration processing (reel acceleration processing) of the stepping motor is started. This standby period is a period until the reel drive state shifts from the "reel stop state" to the "reel acceleration state". For example, the time from the time when the reel drive state becomes the "reel acceleration state" in the previous game is timed, and the start lever D50 related to this game is operated before the minimum game time (about 4.1 seconds) elapses. If this is the case, the "reel rotation start standby state" is set.

Next, at the timing (2) in the figure, the reel drive state is updated from the "reel rotation start standby state" to the "reel acceleration state". Here, the "reel acceleration state" is a state in which the reel is accelerated in order to reach a constant speed from the state in which the reel is stationary. In this example, when the timer interrupt process is executed 220 times (“100 + 60 + 30 + 15 + 8 + 4 + 2 + 1 = 220”, refer to the number of interrupt executions in the reel acceleration state in the lower left of the figure), the acceleration state ends (the reel drive state is “reel constant speed”. It is configured to update to "state"). Next, the reel rotation speed reaches a constant speed at the timing (3) in the figure, in other words, at the timing when the "reel acceleration state" ends by executing one more timer interrupt process. At this timing, the reel drive state remains the "reel acceleration state". Next, at the timing (4) in the figure, the reel drive state is updated from the "reel rotation start standby state" to the "reel acceleration state", and then the timer interrupt process is executed 220 times to drive the reel. The state is updated to "reel constant speed state". As described above, in this example, after the reel rotation speed reaches a constant speed, the reel drive state remains in the "reel acceleration state" for one timer interrupt process, in other words, the final in the "reel acceleration state". The combination of exciting phases "φ3, φ0" is configured to execute interrupt processing only once, which is the same as the "reel constant speed state" in which interrupt processing is executed once for each combination of exciting phases. (When no abnormal rotation of the reel occurs). With this configuration, the acceleration process until the reel rotation speed reaches a constant speed can be stably executed.

Here, the lower part of the figure is a “step motor excitation image”. In the figure, a step motor excitation image when the reel drive state is the “reel acceleration state” and a step motor excitation image when the reel drive state is the “reel constant speed state” are illustrated. First, the step motor excitation image when the reel drive state is the “reel acceleration state” will be described in detail with reference to the lower left part of the figure. The "exciting phase" is a combination of the exciting phases, and the "number of interrupt executions" indicates the number of times the interrupt processing to be excited by the combination of the exciting phases is executed. In this example, when the reel acceleration process is executed, the step motor (stepping motor) is configured to excite 220 times of the timer interrupt process, and (KA) "φ0" interrupts the interrupt process 100 times → ( KB) Interrupt processing 60 times at "φ0, φ1" → (KC) Interrupt processing 30 times at "φ1" → (KD) Interrupt processing 15 times at "φ1, φ2" → (KE) "φ2" Interrupt processing 8 times at (KF) "φ2, φ3" → Interrupt processing 2 times at (KG) "φ3" → Interrupt at (KH) "φ3, φ0" It is configured to execute interrupt processing once to excite the step motor (stepping motor) (the number of times interrupt processing is executed is just an example, and there is no problem even if it is changed). As described above, in this example, when the reel acceleration processing is executed, the number of times the interrupt processing is executed by the combination of the exciting phases of 1 is gradually reduced.

Next, the step motor excitation image when the reel drive state is the “reel constant speed state” will be described in detail with reference to the lower right part of the figure. In this example, when the reel is in a constant speed state (when executing the reel constant speed maintenance process), interrupt processing is performed once at (TA) "φ0" → (TB) at "φ0, φ1". Interrupt processing once → (TC) “φ1” interrupt processing once → (TD) “φ1, φ2” interrupt processing once → (TE) “φ2” interrupt processing once → (TF) Interrupt processing once at "φ2, φ3" → (TG) Interrupt processing once at "φ3" → (TH) Interrupt processing once at "φ3, φ0" → (TA) " Interrupt processing is executed once at "φ0" → (TB) Interrupt processing is performed once at "φ0, φ1" → ..., (TA) to (TG) are repeatedly executed once for each interrupt processing. It is configured to excite a step motor (stepping motor). As described above, in this example, when the reel constant speed maintenance process is executed, the interrupt process is executed once with the combination of the exciting phases of 1.

Next, in the situation where the reel drive state is the "reel constant speed state", the stop button corresponding to any of the reels is operated at the timing (5) in the figure, and the reel drive state is the "reel deceleration standby state". Is updated to. Here, the "reel constant speed state" is a state in which the rotation speed of the reel is constant (a state in which the combination of exciting phases is switched for each interrupt process), and is a "reel deceleration standby state". "" Indicates the state from the operation of the stop button by the player to the start of the stop control (in the reel deceleration standby state, the reel slips corresponding to the number of slip frames). .. The period of this drive state is determined based on the operation timing of the stop button.

Next, at the timing (6) in the figure, the reel drive state is updated from the "reel deceleration standby state" to the "reel deceleration state", and the reel deceleration is started. When the reel drive state is updated from the "reel deceleration standby state" to the "reel deceleration state", a specific phase of the stepping motor is continuously excited for a predetermined time in order to stop the rotation of the reel. Performs 4-phase excitation to excite everything. Then, when the excitation is performed for a predetermined time, the reel drive state is updated from the "reel deceleration state" to the "reel stop state" at the timing (7) in the figure, and the reel is stopped.

As described above, in the reeling game machine according to this example, the reel sensor detects the index within a predetermined time (for example, the time value for executing the interrupt process 400 times) after the reel drive state becomes the reel constant speed state. If not, the reel drive state is updated again to the reel acceleration state, and the reel reacceleration process (the excitation mode of the stepping motor is the same as the reel acceleration process) is executed. When the reel driving state is the reel acceleration state, in other words, it is not determined whether or not the reel acceleration is normally executed during the reel acceleration processing. Further, whether the reel has been accelerated normally, in other words, whether the reel is at a constant speed (whether a reel rotation failure has occurred) is the process of step 6124 (the reel drive state is changed to the reel constant speed state). Judgment is made after a predetermined time has elapsed since the update), but the reel is not at a constant speed because the reel sensor did not detect the index in the process of step 6124 (reel rotation failure). If it is determined that the reel acceleration process has occurred), the reel reacceleration process is executed, that is, the reel acceleration process is executed again from the beginning. In this way, by configuring so that it is not determined whether or not the reel acceleration is normally executed during the execution of the reel acceleration processing, even if a reel rotation failure occurs during the execution of the reel acceleration processing, the reel rotation failure is subsequently performed. If the reel rotation failure is resolved and the reel rotation speed can be reached to a constant speed by the remaining reel acceleration processing until the reel acceleration processing is completed, the reel drive state is the reel constant speed state. By detecting the index by the reel sensor until a predetermined time elapses after being updated to, the reel constant speed maintenance process is executed without executing the re-acceleration process, and the player is executed by executing the reel re-acceleration process. It is possible to make it difficult for a situation in which the game cannot proceed (the stop button cannot be operated) to occur. Further, by configuring so that the process of determining whether or not the reel acceleration is normally executed is not executed during the execution of the reel acceleration process, the amount of data required for the process related to the rotation of the reel can be reduced. Since it is configured in this way, if a reel rotation failure occurs while the spinning machine according to this example is executing the reel acceleration process, it acts as follows. Will be.

<Action 1>
Reel rotation starts → Reel drive state is updated to reel acceleration state → Reel acceleration process is executed → Reel acceleration process execution ends → Reel drive state is updated to reel constant speed state → Reel constant speed maintenance process is executed → Reel constant Reel rotation failure occurs during execution of speed maintenance processing → Reel rotation failure is detected → Reel reacceleration processing is executed. It is configured to be able to operate as described above.
In addition, the reel rotation failure means that the reel rotation is hindered by a member provided near the reel such as the reel window D160 (the reel rubs against the reel window D160, etc.), and the reel is accelerated due to step-out. Refers to the case where is not executed normally. As described above, by configuring the reel re-acceleration process to be executed even when the reel rotation failure occurs during the execution of the reel constant speed maintenance process, the game can be smoothly advanced.

<Action 2>
Reel rotation starts → Reel drive state is updated to reel acceleration state → Reel acceleration processing is executed → Reel rotation failure occurs during execution of reel acceleration processing → Reel acceleration processing is continuously executed → Reel acceleration processing execution ends → Update the reel drive state to the reel constant speed state → Execute the reel constant speed maintenance process → Detect the reel rotation failure → Execute the reel reacceleration process It is configured to be able to operate as described above. In this way, even if a reel rotation failure occurs during the execution of the reel acceleration process, the game can proceed smoothly by configuring the reel re-acceleration process to be executed when the reel rotation failure is subsequently detected. Will be possible. Further, as described above, even if a reel acceleration process occurs during the execution of the reel acceleration process, the reel acceleration process is continuously executed and an interrupt similar to the case where the reel acceleration process does not occur is interrupted. When the reel acceleration processing is executed for the number of times, the execution of the reel acceleration processing is terminated. With this configuration, if a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after the start of the reel acceleration process, the reel rotation speed can easily reach a constant speed without executing the reel reacceleration process. can.

<Action 3>
Reel rotation starts → Reel drive state is updated to reel acceleration state → Reel acceleration processing is executed → Power cut occurs during execution of reel acceleration processing → Recovery from power cut → Continue execution of reel acceleration processing (unprocessed) Execute reel acceleration processing) → Reel rotation failure occurs during execution of reel acceleration processing → Continue execution of reel acceleration processing (execute unprocessed reel acceleration processing) → End of execution of reel acceleration processing → Reel drive state Is updated to the reel constant speed state → the reel constant speed maintenance process is executed → the reel rotation failure is detected → the reel reacceleration process is executed. In this way, even if a power failure occurs during the execution of the reel acceleration process, the reel acceleration process is continuously executed after the power is restored, and then within a predetermined time after the reel drive state is updated to the reel constant speed state. By executing the reel reacceleration process when the reel sensor does not detect the index, the game can proceed smoothly. In addition, if the power is cut off during the reel acceleration process, the reel acceleration process is continuously executed after the power is restored, and then the reel sensor is within a predetermined time after the reel drive state is updated to the reel constant speed state. Is configured not to execute the reel reacceleration process when the index is detected, and by such a configuration, the player cannot proceed with the game (the stop button cannot be operated) due to the reel reacceleration process. It can be made less likely to occur.

<< Action after operating the final stop button >>
In the spinning machine according to this example, the final reel (a reel that rotates to the end and is also referred to as a third reel) is stopped after the operation of the final stop button (third stop button), and the winning combination is obtained. Although it is configured so that the payout of the game medal can be executed when the symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the action related to the payout of the game medal may be configured as follows.

<Action 1>
Reel rotation starts as a winning game → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button reception is enabled → 1st stop as stop operation of 1st reel Operate the button → Display the stop of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Display the stop of the 2nd reel → Operate the 3rd stop button as the stop operation of the 3rd reel (3rd stop button) (Accepts the operation of) → Updates the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Power cut occurs → The third reel moves to the stop display position (rotation) → Power cut is detected → Power cut processing is executed → Power recovery → Reel The symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination may be configured to operate as described above by displaying the stop display → executing the process related to the payout of the game medal. With this configuration, the stop operation of the third stop button is accepted in the game such as the common bell mentioned above, in which a small winning combination that can be won regardless of the operation timing of the stop button if won is won. Even if a power outage occurs immediately after a power outage in the amusement park, regardless of the planned stop position of the third reel (even if the number of slip frames is the maximum), the power outage is detected before the power outage is detected. It can be configured to complete the movement (rotation) to the planned stop position. In addition, when the symbol combination (for example, the common bell) constituting the winning combination is stopped and displayed after the power is restored, the game medal can be paid out normally, and the player is unlikely to be disadvantaged. Can be configured.

<Action 2>
Reel rotation starts as a winning game → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button reception is enabled → 1st stop as stop operation of 1st reel Operate the button → Display the stop of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Display the stop of the 2nd reel → Operate the 3rd stop button as the stop operation of the 3rd reel (3rd stop button) (Accepts the operation of) → Updates the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Reel rotation failure occurs → The third reel cannot move (rotate) to the scheduled stop position from the player's point of view → The reel wins a prize from the player's point of view Although the symbol combination corresponding to is not stopped and displayed, it is determined that the symbol combination is normal in the determination process of step 1269 (when it is determined that the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button is completed normally). For example, in a game in which the bell role is won, the symbol combination corresponding to the bell role, which is the winning combination, is not stopped and displayed on the reel from the player's point of view, but the game machine corresponding to the operation of the stop button of the player. When the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the bell combination is normally executed by the internal processing) → The processing related to the payout of the game medal is executed. It may be configured to operate as described above. With this configuration, even if the reel rotation failure occurs immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not stopped and displayed on the reel from the player's point of view. , Accepts the operation of the stop button corresponding to each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) at the timing when the winning combination is won by the internal processing of the gaming machine and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination can be stopped and displayed. If the stop control for displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is normally executed, the game medal can be paid out, and the player is less likely to be disadvantaged. can do. The timing at which the reel rotation failure occurs is not limited to the above example, and the reel rotation failure occurs during the period from the stop display of the second reel to the execution of the process related to the payout of the game medal, and as a result, the first reel rotation failure occurs. 3 It is applicable to all cases where the reel corresponding to the stop cannot be stopped at the scheduled stop position (it can also be applied to the action related to the reel rotation failure illustrated below). In the above action 2, the action in the game in which the winning combination is won is illustrated. That is, if the reel rotation failure does not occur, the following actions are obtained (if the rotation failure and the power failure do not occur in other actions, the same action is obtained. May be good).
Reel rotation starts as a winning game → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button reception is enabled → 1st stop as stop operation of 1st reel Operate the button → Display the stop of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Display the stop of the 2nd reel → Operate the 3rd stop button as the stop operation of the 3rd reel (3rd stop button) (Accepts the operation of) → Updates the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → The third reel moves to the scheduled stop position from the player's point of view → The symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed on the reel from the player's point of view In the determination process of step 1269, it is determined that the symbol combination is normal → the process related to the payout of the game medal is executed. Regardless, it may be a winning combination that can be won (for example, a common bell), or a winning combination that may or may not be won depending on the operation timing of the stop button in the winning game (for example, watermelon A, watermelon B, etc.). It may be a cherry). In addition, in a game in which a predetermined winning combination is won in a predetermined gaming state, when the reel rotation failure or power failure does not occur and the symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is stopped and displayed, the reel backlight ( When the back lamp effect corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is configured to be executed as the effect (sometimes referred to as the back lamp effect) in which the back lamp (sometimes referred to as a back lamp) blinks, the game state is changed to the predetermined game state. Even if the reel rotation failure occurs in the game in which the predetermined winning combination is won and the symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is not stopped and displayed, the back corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is not displayed. It may be configured to perform a lamp effect. Further, in this operation, the case where the reel corresponding to the third stop could not be stopped at the scheduled stop position was illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the reel corresponding to the first stop is scheduled to stop due to the reel rotation failure. It may be applied when the reel cannot be stopped at the position, or when the reel corresponding to the second stop cannot be stopped at the scheduled stop position due to a reel rotation failure (the same applies to other actions). Applicable).

<Action 3>
Reel rotation starts as a winning game → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button reception is enabled → 1st stop as stop operation of 1st reel Operate the button → Display the stop of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Display the stop of the 2nd reel → The power supply is cut off and the power supply to the game machine is stopped → 3rd Operate the 3rd stop button as a reel stop operation (accept the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Detect power off → Execute power off processing → 3rd reel is the player Cannot move (rotate) to the scheduled stop position when viewed from It is a case where it is determined that the stop control of the reel based on the operation of the stop button is normally completed. The symbol combination was not stopped and displayed, but when the stop control to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to the bell role was normally executed by the processing inside the game machine corresponding to the operation of the stop button of the player) → Game Execution of processing related to payout of medals It may be configured to operate as described above. The timing of detecting the power failure, the timing of stopping the supply of power to the gaming machine due to the power failure, the timing of determining that the symbol combination is normal in the determination process of step 1269, and the timing of returning the power are , Not limited to the above timing, the timing to detect the power outage and the power to the gaming machine when the power outage occurs during the period from the stop display of the second reel to the execution of the processing related to the payout of the game medal. It suffices if there is a timing at which the supply of the above is stopped, a timing at which the symbol combination is determined to be normal in the determination process of step 1269, and a timing at which the power is restored. Is applicable to all cases where the machine cannot be stopped at the planned stop position (the same applies to the action including the power failure illustrated below). With this configuration, the power is cut off immediately before (or immediately after) the stop operation of the third stop button is accepted, and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination cannot be stopped and displayed on the reel from the player's point of view. Even in this case, the stop button corresponding to each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) can be displayed at the timing when the winning combination is won by the internal processing of the game machine and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination can be stopped and displayed. If the operation is accepted and the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is normally executed, the game medal is paid out after the power is restored (the hopper is driven to pay out the game medal). It is possible to execute not only the payout from the reeling port but also the display (the number of credits) of the credit number display device), and it is configured so that the player is unlikely to be disadvantaged. Can be done. The timing at which the power supply is cut off and the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped may be referred to as the timing at which the power supply is cut off. In addition, in a game in which a predetermined winning combination is won in a predetermined gaming state, when the reel rotation failure or power failure does not occur and the symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is stopped and displayed, the reel backlight ( When the back lamp effect corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is configured to be executed as the effect (sometimes referred to as the back lamp effect) in which the back lamp (sometimes referred to as a back lamp) blinks, the game state is changed to the predetermined game state. Even if the power is cut off and the symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is not stopped and displayed in the game in which the predetermined winning combination is won, the back lamp corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is not displayed. It may be configured to perform the effect. Further, in this operation, the case where the reel corresponding to the third stop could not be stopped at the scheduled stop position was illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the reel corresponding to the first stop is at the scheduled stop position due to the power failure. It may be applied when the reel cannot be stopped due to the power failure, or it may be applied when the reel corresponding to the second stop cannot be stopped at the planned stop position (the same applies to other actions). Is).

<Action 4>
Reel rotation starts as a lost game → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button reception is enabled → 1st stop button as stop operation of 1st reel → Operate the 1st reel stop display → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Operate the 3rd stop button as the stop operation of the 3rd reel (Accept operation) → Update reel drive state to reel deceleration state → Reel rotation failure occurs → 3rd reel cannot move (rotate) to the scheduled stop position from the player's point of view → Reel wins from the player's point of view Although the corresponding symbol combination is displayed as stopped, it is determined that the symbol combination is normal in the determination process of step 1269 (when it is determined that the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button is normally completed, for example. , In the game that was lost, the symbol combination corresponding to the loss was not stopped and displayed on the reel from the player's point of view, but the symbol corresponding to the loss is handled by the internal processing of the game machine corresponding to the operation of the stop button of the player. When the stop control for displaying the combination as a stop is normally executed) → The game medal is not paid out. It may be configured to operate as described above. With this configuration, in a game in which the result of the winning combination lottery is lost, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, and the reel corresponds to the winning combination from the player's point of view. Even if the symbol combination to be played is stopped and displayed, it will be lost in the internal processing of the gaming machine, and each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) will be supported at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the loss can be stopped and displayed. If the operation of the stop button is accepted and the stop control for displaying the stop display of the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is normally executed, the game medal is displayed even if the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed. It can be configured not to execute the payout, and it can be a fair game machine and can be a game machine that does not cause an unintended disadvantage to the game field. It should be noted that the above-mentioned action 4 is not limited to the loss, and for example, in a game in which the bell is not won (a game in which the replaying role is won, a game in which the watermelon is won, etc.), a reel rotation failure occurs. It should be added that it can be applied even when the symbol combination corresponding to the bell is stopped and displayed. Further, in such a case, the symbol combination displayed as stopped from the player's point of view is a symbol combination that is inconsistent with the internal lottery result due to poor rotation, but in the determination process of step 1269. Since it is determined that the symbol combination is normal, a display determination error (unrecoverable error) does not occur (it is not determined that a display determination error has occurred).

<Action 5>
Reel rotation starts as a lost game → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button reception is enabled → 1st stop button as stop operation of 1st reel → 1st reel stop display → 2nd stop button is operated as a stop operation of the 2nd reel → 2nd reel stop display → Power supply is cut off and power supply to the game machine is stopped → 3rd reel Operate the 3rd stop button as a stop operation (accepts the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Detect power off → Execute power off processing → 3 reel is from the player Cannot move (rotate) to the scheduled stop position → The symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed on the reel from the player's point of view, but in the determination process of step 1269, it is determined (stopped) that the symbol combination is normal. This is a case where it is determined that the reel stop control based on the button operation has been completed normally. For example, in a game in which a loss occurs, the player does not stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to the loss on the reel. , When the stop control to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is normally executed by the processing inside the game machine corresponding to the operation of the stop button of the player) → Power return → The game medal is not paid out. It may be configured to act as follows. With this configuration, in a game that has been lost as a result of the winning combination lottery, the power cutoff process is executed immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, and the reel corresponds to the winning combination from the player's point of view. Even if the symbol combination to be played is stopped and displayed, it will be lost in the internal processing of the gaming machine, and each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) will be supported at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the loss can be stopped and displayed. If the operation of the stop button is accepted and the stop control for displaying the stop display of the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is normally executed, the game medal is displayed even if the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed. It can be configured not to execute the payout, and it can be a fair game machine and can be a game machine that does not cause an unintended disadvantage to the game field. It should be noted that the above-mentioned action 5 is not limited to the loss, and for example, in a game in which the bell is not won (a game in which the replaying role is won, a game in which the watermelon is won, etc.), a reel rotation failure occurs. It should be added that it can be applied even when the symbol combination corresponding to the bell is stopped and displayed. Further, in such a case, the symbol combination displayed as stopped from the player's point of view is a symbol combination that is inconsistent with the internal lottery result due to poor rotation, but in the determination process of step 1269. Since it is determined that the symbol combination is normal, a display determination error (unrecoverable error) does not occur (it is not determined that a display determination error has occurred).

<Action 6>
Reel rotation starts as a lost game → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button reception is enabled → 1st stop button as stop operation of 1st reel → Operate the 1st reel stop display → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Operate the 3rd stop button as the stop operation of the 3rd reel (Accept operation) → Update reel drive state to reel deceleration state → Reel rotation failure occurs → 3rd reel cannot move (rotate) to the scheduled stop position from the player's point of view → Bonus role to the reel from the player's point of view For example, the symbol combination corresponding to (BB combination) is stopped and displayed, but in the determination process of step 1269, it is determined that the symbol combination is normal (it is determined that the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button has been completed normally). For example, in a game in which the bonus role has not been won and the game has been lost, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is stopped and displayed on the reel from the player's point of view, but the player's stop button is displayed. When the stop control to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is normally executed by the internal processing of the game machine corresponding to the operation of) → The bonus does not start and the freeze at the start of the bonus is not executed. It may be configured to act as follows. With this configuration, in a game where the result of the winning combination lottery is lost, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, and the reel corresponds to the bonus winning combination from the player's point of view. Even if the symbol combination to be played is stopped and displayed, it will be lost in the internal processing of the gaming machine, and each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) will be supported at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the loss can be stopped and displayed. If the operation of the stop button is accepted and the stop control for displaying the stop display of the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is normally executed, the bonus will be given even if the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed. It can be configured not to start, it can be a fair gaming machine, and it can be a gaming machine that does not cause an unintended disadvantage to the playing field. The above action 6 is not limited to the loss, for example, a game in which the bonus role has not been won (not inside the bonus) and the bonus role has not been won (the replay role has been won). It should be added that it can be applied even when a reel rotation failure occurs and the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed in a game, a game in which a watermelon is won, etc.). In the above action 6, the action in the game in which the bonus combination is not won is illustrated. That is, when the reel rotation failure does not occur, the following actions are obtained (applicable when the rotation failure and the power failure do not occur in other actions).
Reel rotation starts → Update reel drive state to constant speed state → Execute constant speed state maintenance process → Acceptance of stop button becomes effective → Operate 1st stop button as stop operation of 1st reel → 1st reel Stop display → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Stop display of the 2nd reel → Operate the 3rd stop button as the stop operation of the 3rd reel (accept the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Reel The drive state is updated to the reel deceleration state → The third reel moves to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed on the reel from the player's point of view, and step 1269 In the judgment process, it is judged that the symbol combination is normal → the bonus is not executed, and the freeze at the start of the bonus is not executed. On the other hand, if the reel rotation failure does not occur in the game in which the bonus combination is won or inside the bonus, the following actions are obtained.
Reel rotation starts → Update reel drive state to constant speed state → Execute constant speed state maintenance process → Acceptance of stop button becomes effective → Operate 1st stop button as stop operation of 1st reel → 1st reel Stop display → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Stop display of the 2nd reel → Operate the 3rd stop button as the stop operation of the 3rd reel (accept the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Reel Update the drive state to the reel deceleration state → The third reel moves to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the reel from the player's point of view, and in the judgment process of step 1269 It can be exemplified that the symbol combination is determined to be normal → the bonus is started to be executed, and the freeze at the start of the bonus is executed. In the above, the case where the freeze is executed at the start of the bonus is illustrated, but depending on the type of bonus (type of bonus combination), there may be a bonus in which the freeze is executed and a bonus in which the freeze is not executed. , Whether or not the freeze is executed may be different depending on the game state in which the bonus role is won.

<Action 7>
Reel rotation starts as a lost game → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button reception is enabled → 1st stop button as stop operation of 1st reel → 1st reel stop display → 2nd stop button is operated as a stop operation of the 2nd reel → 2nd reel stop display → Power supply is cut off and power supply to the game machine is stopped → 3rd reel Operate the 3rd stop button as a stop operation (accepts the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Detect power off → Execute power off processing → 3 reel is from the player Cannot move (rotate) to the scheduled stop position → The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination (for example, BB combination) is stopped and displayed on the reel from the player's point of view, but the symbol combination is normal in the determination process of step 1269. (When it is determined that the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button has been completed normally. For example, in a game in which the bonus combination has not been won and the game has been lost, the player has determined that. As you can see, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the reel, but the stop control to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to the loss by the processing inside the game machine corresponding to the operation of the stop button of the player is normally performed. (When executed)-> Power recovery-> The bonus does not start, and the freeze at the start of the bonus is not executed. It may be configured to operate as described above. With this configuration, in a game where the result of the winning combination lottery is lost, the power cutoff process is executed immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, and the reel becomes a bonus role from the player's point of view. Even if the corresponding symbol combination is stopped and displayed, it will be lost in the internal processing of the gaming machine, and each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) can be stopped and displayed at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the loss can be stopped and displayed. If the operation of the corresponding stop button is accepted and the stop control for displaying the stop display of the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is normally executed, the game is played even if the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed. It can be configured so that the medal bonus does not start, and it can be a fair gaming machine and can be a gaming machine that does not cause an unintended disadvantage to the playing field. The above action 6 is not limited to the loss, for example, a game in which the bonus role has not been won (not inside the bonus) and the bonus role has not been won (the replay role has been won). It should be added that it can be applied even when a reel rotation failure occurs and the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed in a game, a game in which a watermelon is won, etc.). In the above action 6, the action in the game in which the bonus combination is not won is illustrated. That is, if the power cutoff does not occur, the following actions are obtained (applicable if the rotation failure and the power cutoff do not occur in other actions).
Reel rotation starts → Update reel drive state to constant speed state → Execute constant speed state maintenance process → Acceptance of stop button becomes effective → Operate 1st stop button as stop operation of 1st reel → 1st reel Stop display → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Stop display of the 2nd reel → Operate the 3rd stop button as the stop operation of the 3rd reel (accept the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Reel The drive state is updated to the reel deceleration state → The third reel moves to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed on the reel from the player's point of view, and step 1269 In the judgment process, it is judged that the symbol combination is normal → the bonus is not executed, and the freeze at the start of the bonus is not executed. On the other hand, if the reel power is not cut off in the game in which the bonus combination is won or inside the bonus, the following actions are obtained.
Reel rotation starts → Update reel drive state to constant speed state → Execute constant speed state maintenance process → Acceptance of stop button becomes effective → Operate 1st stop button as stop operation of 1st reel → 1st reel Stop display → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Stop display of the 2nd reel → Operate the 3rd stop button as the stop operation of the 3rd reel (accept the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Reel Update the drive state to the reel deceleration state → The third reel moves to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the reel from the player's point of view, and in the judgment process of step 1269 It can be exemplified that the symbol combination is determined to be normal → the bonus is started to be executed, and the freeze at the start of the bonus is executed. In the above, the case where the freeze is executed at the start of the bonus is illustrated, but depending on the type of bonus (type of bonus combination), there may be a bonus in which the freeze is executed and a bonus in which the freeze is not executed. , Whether or not the freeze is executed may be different depending on the game state in which the bonus role is won.

<Action 8>
Reel rotation starts as a game executed inside the bonus or as a game that won the bonus role → Update the reel drive state to the constant speed state → Execute the constant speed state maintenance process → Acceptance of the stop button becomes effective → Operate the 1st stop button as the stop operation of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Display the stop of the 2nd reel → As the stop operation of the 3rd reel Operate the 3rd stop button (accept the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Reel rotation failure occurs → The 3rd reel moves to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player (rotation) No → From the player's point of view, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination (for example, BB combination) is not stopped and displayed on the reel, but in the determination process of step 1269, it is determined that the symbol combination is normal → the bonus starts, Moreover, it may be configured to act as described above in which the freeze at the start of the bonus is executed. With this configuration, in the game executed in the situation where the bonus is won, or in the game where the bonus combination is won, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is accepted. Even if the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed on the reel from the player's point of view, each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) can be stopped and displayed at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination can be stopped and displayed. When the operation of the corresponding stop button is accepted and the stop control for displaying the stop display of the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is normally executed, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed. It is also significant for players who can be configured to start a bonus and also perform a freeze that is executed at the start of the bonus, where the reel rotation failure prevents the bonus from starting in situations where the bonus should start. It can be configured so as not to cause a disadvantage, and by executing the freeze at the start of the bonus as in the case where the reel rotation failure does not occur, the player can proceed with the game without discomfort. Become.

<Action 9>
Reel rotation starts as a game executed inside the bonus or as a game that won the bonus role → Update the reel drive state to the constant speed state → Execute the constant speed state maintenance process → Acceptance of the stop button becomes effective → Operate the 1st stop button as the stop operation of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Display the stop of the 2nd reel → The game occurs when the power is cut off Power supply to the machine is stopped → Operate the 3rd stop button as the stop operation of the 3rd reel (accept the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Detect power off → Power off Execute time processing → The 3rd reel cannot move (rotate) to the scheduled stop position from the player's point of view → The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination (for example, BB role) is not stopped and displayed on the reel from the player's point of view However, in the determination process of step 1269, it may be configured so that the symbol combination is determined to be normal → the power is restored → the bonus is started, and the freeze at the start of the bonus is executed as described above. With this configuration, in the game executed in the situation where the bonus is won, or in the game where the bonus combination is won, the power cutoff process is executed immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is accepted. , Even if the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed on the reel from the player's point of view, each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) can be stopped and displayed at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination can be stopped and displayed. When the operation of the stop button corresponding to the bonus combination is accepted and the stop control for displaying the stop display of the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is normally executed, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed. Even so, it can be configured to start the bonus and perform a freeze that runs at the start of the bonus, which is significant for players who would not start the bonus due to a power outage in situations where the bonus should start. It can be configured so as not to cause a disadvantage, and by executing the freeze at the start of the bonus as in the case where the reel rotation failure does not occur, the player can proceed with the game without discomfort. Become.

<Action 10>
Reel rotation starts as a lost game → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button reception is enabled → 1st stop button as stop operation of 1st reel → Operate the 1st reel stop display → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Operate the 3rd stop button as the stop operation of the 3rd reel (Accept operation) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Reel rotation failure occurs → The third reel cannot move (rotate) to the scheduled stop position from the player's point of view → Re-playing role on the reel from the player's point of view The symbol combination corresponding to is displayed as stopped, but in the determination process of step 1269, it is determined that the symbol combination is normal (when it is determined that the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button is completed normally). For example, in a game that has been lost, the combination of symbols corresponding to the re-game combination is stopped and displayed on the reel from the player's point of view, but the loss is dealt with by the internal processing of the game machine corresponding to the operation of the stop button of the player. When the stop control for displaying the stop display of the symbol combination is normally executed) → The automatic bet corresponding to the stop display of the re-game combination is not performed, and the re-game lamp D290 does not light up newly. It may be configured. With this configuration, in a game in which the result of the winning combination lottery is lost, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, and the reel becomes a replaying role from the player's point of view. Even if the corresponding symbol combination is stopped and displayed, it will be lost in the internal processing of the game machine, and each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) can be stopped and displayed at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the loss can be stopped and displayed. If the operation of the corresponding stop button is accepted and the stop control for displaying the stop display of the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is normally executed, even if the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game combination is stopped and displayed. The automatic bet is not made, and the re-game lamp D290 is not newly turned on. Further, in the action 10, even if the symbol combination corresponding to the re-gaming combination in which the RT state shifts when the stop display is displayed in the current RT state is stopped and displayed from the player's point of view, the gaming machine It becomes a loss in the internal processing, and the operation of the stop button corresponding to each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) is accepted at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the loss can be stopped and displayed, and the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is accepted. If the stop control for displaying the stop is normally executed, the RT state will not be changed (the symbol combination corresponding to the role to which the RT state other than the replay combination will be changed is stopped and displayed. The same applies to cases). With such a configuration, it is possible to make a gaming machine that does not cause an unintended disadvantage to the gaming field. The above action 10 is not limited to the loss, and is applied to, for example, in a game in which a reel rotation failure occurs and the symbol combination corresponding to the replaying combination is stopped and displayed. Supplement what you can do. That is, when the reel rotation failure does not occur, the following actions are obtained (applicable when the rotation failure and the power failure do not occur in other actions).
Reel rotation starts → Update reel drive state to constant speed state → Execute constant speed state maintenance process → Acceptance of stop button becomes effective → Operate 1st stop button as stop operation of 1st reel → 1st reel Stop display → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Stop display of the 2nd reel → Operate the 3rd stop button as the stop operation of the 3rd reel (accept the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Reel The drive state is updated to the reel deceleration state → The third reel moves to the scheduled stop position when viewed from the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the loss is displayed on the reel as stopped from the player's point of view, and the symbol is displayed in the judgment process of step 1269. It is determined that the combination is normal → automatic betting is not performed, and the action is such that the re-game lamp D290 does not light up anew.
The automatic bet is a bet button (max bet button) because the specified number of game medals (for example, 3 medals) bet in the game in which the re-game combination is won is displayed as stopped by the re-game combination. It is supposed to bet automatically even if there is no operation of or inserting a game medal from the medal slot.
On the other hand, if the reel rotation failure does not occur in the game in which the re-game combination is won, the following actions are obtained.
Reel rotation starts → Update reel drive state to constant speed state → Execute constant speed state maintenance process → Acceptance of stop button becomes effective → Operate 1st stop button as stop operation of 1st reel → 1st reel Stop display → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Stop display of the 2nd reel → Operate the 3rd stop button as the stop operation of the 3rd reel (accept the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Reel The drive state is updated to the reel deceleration state → The third reel moves to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the replaying combination is stopped and displayed on the reel from the player's point of view, and the determination process of step 1269 is performed. Judges that the symbol combination is normal → Automatic betting is executed, and the re-game lamp D290 lights up anew (if the re-game combination was won in the previous game, the re-game lamp D290 lights up. To continue)
Such an action can be exemplified.

<Action 11>
Reel rotation starts as a lost game → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button reception is enabled → 1st stop button as stop operation of 1st reel → 1st reel stop display → 2nd stop button is operated as a stop operation of the 2nd reel → 2nd reel stop display → Power supply is cut off and power supply to the game machine is stopped → 3rd reel Operate the 3rd stop button as a stop operation (accepts the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Detect power off → Execute power off processing → 3 reel is from the player Cannot move (rotate) to the scheduled stop position → The symbol combination corresponding to the replaying combination is stopped and displayed on the reel from the player's point of view, but it is determined that the symbol combination is normal in the determination process of step 1269 ( It is a case where it is determined that the stop control of the reel based on the operation of the stop button is normally completed. However, when the stop control for displaying the stop display of the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is normally executed by the processing inside the game machine corresponding to the operation of the stop button of the player) → power return → stop display of the re-game combination The corresponding automatic bet is not made and the reeling lamp D290 is not newly lit. It may be configured to operate as described above. With this configuration, in a game in which the result of the winning combination lottery is lost, the power cutoff process is executed immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, and the reel is replayed by the player. Even if the symbol combination corresponding to is stopped and displayed, each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) will be lost in the internal processing of the game machine and at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the loss can be stopped and displayed. When the operation of the stop button corresponding to the reel is accepted and the stop control for displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is normally executed, the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game combination is stopped and displayed. However, automatic betting is not performed, and the replay lamp D290 is not newly lit. Further, in the action 10, even if the symbol combination corresponding to the re-gaming combination in which the RT state shifts when the stop display is displayed in the current RT state is stopped and displayed from the player's point of view, the gaming machine It becomes a loss in the internal processing, and the operation of the stop button corresponding to each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) is accepted at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the loss can be stopped and displayed, and the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is accepted. If the stop control for displaying the stop is normally executed, the RT state will not be changed (the symbol combination corresponding to the role to which the RT state other than the replay combination will be changed is stopped and displayed. The same applies to cases). With such a configuration, it is possible to make a gaming machine that does not cause an unintended disadvantage to the gaming field. It should be noted that the above-mentioned action 11 is not limited to the loss, and is applied, for example, in a game in which the replaying combination is not won, when the power is cut off and the symbol combination corresponding to the replaying combination is stopped and displayed. It is supplemented that you can do it. That is, if the power cutoff does not occur, the following actions are obtained (applicable if the rotation failure and the power cutoff do not occur in other actions).
Reel rotation starts → Update reel drive state to constant speed state → Execute constant speed state maintenance process → Acceptance of stop button becomes effective → Operate 1st stop button as stop operation of 1st reel → 1st reel Stop display → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Stop display of the 2nd reel → Operate the 3rd stop button as the stop operation of the 3rd reel (accept the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Reel The drive state is updated to the reel deceleration state → The third reel moves to the scheduled stop position when viewed from the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the loss is displayed on the reel as stopped from the player's point of view, and the symbol is displayed in the judgment process of step 1269. It is determined that the combination is normal → automatic betting is not performed, and the action is such that the re-game lamp D290 does not light up anew. On the other hand, if the power is not cut off in the game in which the replaying role is won, the following actions are obtained.
Reel rotation starts → Update reel drive state to constant speed state → Execute constant speed state maintenance process → Acceptance of stop button becomes effective → Operate 1st stop button as stop operation of 1st reel → 1st reel Stop display → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Stop display of the 2nd reel → Operate the 3rd stop button as the stop operation of the 3rd reel (accept the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Reel The drive state is updated to the reel deceleration state → The third reel moves to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the replaying combination is stopped and displayed on the reel from the player's point of view, and the determination process of step 1269 is performed. Judges that the symbol combination is normal → Automatic betting is executed, and the re-game lamp D290 lights up anew (if the re-game combination was won in the previous game, the re-game lamp D290 lights up. To continue)
Such an action can be exemplified.

<Action 12>
Reel rotation starts as a game won in the re-game → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button reception becomes effective → 1st stop as stop operation of 1st reel Operate the button → Display the stop of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Display the stop of the 2nd reel → Operate the 3rd stop button as the stop operation of the 3rd reel (3rd stop button) (Accepts the operation of) → Updates the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Reel rotation failure occurs → The third reel cannot move (rotate) to the scheduled stop position from the player's point of view → Replay on the reel from the player's point of view The symbol combination corresponding to the combination is not stopped and displayed, but in the determination process of step 1269, it is determined that the symbol combination is normal. → An automatic bet corresponding to the stop display of the reeling combination is performed, and the reeling lamp D290 is set. It may be configured to act as described above when it is newly lit. With this configuration, in a game in which the result of the combination lottery is a replay, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, and the reel has a replay combination from the player's point of view. Even if the symbol combination corresponding to is not stopped and displayed, each reel (left reel) can be stopped and displayed at the timing when the re-game is won by the internal processing of the gaming machine and the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game combination can be stopped and displayed. , Middle reel, right reel) is accepted, and if the stop control for displaying the stop display of the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game combination is normally executed, the re-game combination is supported. Even if the symbol combination to be played is not stopped and displayed, automatic betting is performed and the re-game lamp D290 is newly turned on. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make a gaming machine that does not cause an unintended disadvantage to the player, and since the symbol combination corresponding to the re-gaming combination is not stopped and displayed, the re-gaming is performed even if the reel is visually recognized. Even if it cannot be determined whether or not the winning combination has been won, it is possible to make it difficult to misidentify the situation of the game by visually recognizing whether or not the automatic bet is executed and the lighting of the re-game lamp D290. Further, in the action 12, if the re-game combination in which the RT state shifts when the stop display is displayed in the current RT state is won, the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game combination is stopped and displayed. Even if it is not, the RT state will shift. With this configuration, it is possible to make a gaming machine that is unlikely to cause problems in the progress of the game, and it is possible to configure a user-friendly gaming machine.

<Action 13>
Reel rotation starts as a game won in the re-game → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button reception becomes effective → 1st stop as stop operation of 1st reel Operate the button → Display the stop of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Display the stop of the 2nd reel → The power supply is cut off and the power supply to the game machine is stopped → 3rd Operate the 3rd stop button as a reel stop operation (accept the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Detect power off → Execute power off processing → 3rd reel is the player Cannot move (rotate) to the scheduled stop position when viewed from → Power recovery → Automatic betting corresponding to the stop display of the re-game combination may be performed, and the re-game lamp D290 may be newly lit to operate as described above. With this configuration, in a game in which the result of the winning combination lottery is a replay, the power cutoff process is executed immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is accepted, and the reel is replayed from the player's point of view. Even if the symbol combination corresponding to the combination is not stopped and displayed, each reel (left) is at the timing when the re-game is won by the internal processing of the gaming machine and the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game combination can be stopped and displayed. The operation of the stop button corresponding to (reel, middle reel, right reel) is accepted, and if the stop control for displaying the stop display of the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game combination is normally executed, the re-game combination is used. Even if the corresponding symbol combination is not stopped and displayed, automatic betting is performed and the re-game lamp D290 is newly turned on. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make a gaming machine that does not cause an unintended disadvantage to the player, and since the symbol combination corresponding to the re-gaming combination is not stopped and displayed, the re-gaming is performed even if the reel is visually recognized. Even if it cannot be determined whether or not the winning combination has been won, it is possible to make it difficult to misidentify the situation of the game by visually recognizing whether or not the automatic bet is executed and the lighting of the re-game lamp D290. Further, in the action 13, if the re-game combination in which the RT state shifts when the stop display is displayed in the current RT state is won, the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game combination is stopped and displayed. Even if it is not, the RT state will shift. With this configuration, it is possible to make a gaming machine that is unlikely to cause problems in the progress of the game, and it is possible to configure a user-friendly gaming machine.

<Action 14>
Reel rotation starts as a game that wins the RT state transition role (sometimes called RT transition role) → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button is accepted Enabled → Operate the 1st stop button as the stop operation of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Display the stop of the 2nd reel → Operate the 3rd stop button as a stop operation (accept the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → A reel rotation failure occurs → The 3rd reel moves to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player Cannot (rotate) → The symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition combination is not stopped and displayed from the player's point of view, but in the determination process of step 1269, it is determined that the symbol combination is normal → the RT state shifts as described above. It may be configured to work. With this configuration, in the game in which the RT transition combination is won, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is accepted, and the reel corresponds to the RT transition combination from the player's point of view. Even if the combination is not stopped and displayed, each reel (left reel, middle reel) is selected at the timing when the RT transition combination is won by the internal processing of the gaming machine and the symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition combination can be stopped and displayed. , Right reel), and if the stop control for displaying the stop display of the symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition combination is normally executed, the symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition combination is accepted. The RT state will shift even if is not displayed as stopped. With such a configuration, it is possible to make a gaming machine that does not cause an unintended disadvantage to the player, and it is possible to advance the game along the transition of the gaming state originally possessed by the gaming machine. The administrator can also operate the gaming machine with peace of mind. The RT transition role is a role of shifting to an RT state different from the predetermined RT state by stopping and displaying the symbol combination in the predetermined RT state, and the RT transition role depending on the staying RT state. It can be different whether or not. That is, in the RT state A, the predetermined combination A is the RT transition combination, but in the RT state B, the predetermined combination A may not be the RT transition combination, and in the RT state A, the predetermined combination A is the RT transition combination. However, in the RT state B, the predetermined combination A may not be won.

<Action 15>
Reel rotation starts as a game that wins the RT state transition role (sometimes called RT transition role) → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button is accepted Enabled → Operate the 1st stop button as the stop operation of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Display the stop of the 2nd reel → Power off occurs Then, the supply of power to the game machine is stopped → the third stop button is operated as the stop operation of the third reel (the operation of the third stop button is accepted) → the reel drive state is updated to the reel deceleration state → the power failure is detected. → Execute power off processing → The 3rd reel cannot move (rotate) to the scheduled stop position from the player's point of view → The symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition role from the player's point of view is not stopped, but step 1269 In the judgment process of, it is judged that the symbol combination is normal → the RT state shifts (the RT state may shift after the power is restored, or the RT state may shift before the power is restored).
It may be configured to work as described above. With this configuration, in the game in which the RT transition combination is won, the power cutoff process is executed immediately after receiving the stop operation of the third stop button, and the reel corresponds to the RT transition combination from the player's point of view. Even if the symbol combination is not stopped and displayed, each reel (left reel, middle) is selected at the timing when the RT transition combination is won by the internal processing of the gaming machine and the symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition combination can be stopped and displayed. The operation of the stop button corresponding to the reel (reel, right reel) is accepted, and when the stop control for displaying the stop display of the symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition combination is normally executed, the symbol corresponding to the RT transition combination is accepted. Even if the combination is not displayed as stopped, the RT state will shift. With such a configuration, it is possible to make a gaming machine that does not cause an unintended disadvantage to the player, and it is possible to advance the game along the transition of the gaming state originally possessed by the gaming machine. The administrator can also operate the gaming machine with peace of mind.

<Action 16>
Reel rotation starts as a game that has not won the RT state transition role (sometimes called RT transition role) → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button Reception becomes valid → Operate the 1st stop button as the stop operation of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Stop display of the 2nd reel → 3rd Operate the 3rd stop button as the reel stop operation (accept the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Reel rotation failure occurs → The 3rd reel is the scheduled stop position as seen from the player Cannot move (rotate) to → The symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition combination is stopped and displayed from the player's point of view, but in the determination process of step 1269, it is determined that the symbol combination is normal → The RT state does not transition. It may be configured to act like this. With this configuration, in a game that has not won the RT transition role, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, and the reel corresponds to the RT transition role from the player's point of view. Even if the symbol combination to be displayed is stopped and displayed, the RT state does not shift. With this configuration, for example, when push order navigation is executed to prevent the player from shifting to the RT state, which is disadvantageous to the player during AT, the player operates the stop button according to the push order navigation. Despite this, even if the RT state shifts (falls) due to poor reel rotation and the symbol combination appears to be stopped, the RT state does not shift, which is unintended by the player. It can be a gaming machine that does not generate profits, and the game can be advanced along the transition of the gaming state originally possessed by the gaming machine, so that the manager of the gaming field can operate the gaming machine with peace of mind.

<Action 17>
Reel rotation starts as a game that has not won the RT state transition role (sometimes called RT transition role) → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button Reception becomes valid → Operate the 1st stop button as the stop operation of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Stop display of the 2nd reel → Power off → Stops the supply of power to the game machine → Operates the 3rd stop button as the stop operation of the 3rd reel (accepts the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Updates the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Power off → Executes power off processing → The 3rd reel cannot move (rotate) to the scheduled stop position from the player's point of view → The symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition role from the player's point of view is stopped and displayed. In the determination process of step 1269, it is determined that the symbol combination is normal → the RT state does not shift. It may be configured to operate as described above. With this configuration, in a game that has not won the RT transition role, the power cutoff process is executed immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, and the reel becomes the RT transition role from the player's point of view. Even if the corresponding symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the RT state does not shift. With this configuration, for example, when the push order navigation for preventing the player from shifting to the RT state, which is disadvantageous to the player, is executed in the AT state, the player operates the stop button according to the push order navigation. Despite this, even if the RT state shifts (falls) due to poor reel rotation and the symbol combination appears to be stopped, the RT state does not shift, which is unintended by the player. It can be a gaming machine that does not generate profits, and the game can be advanced along the transition of the gaming state originally possessed by the gaming machine, so that the manager of the gaming field can operate the gaming machine with peace of mind.

<Action 18>
Reel rotation starts as a lost game → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button reception is enabled → 1st stop button as stop operation of 1st reel → 1st reel stop display → 2nd stop button is operated as a stop operation of the 2nd reel → Reel rotation failure occurs → 2nd reel cannot move (rotate) to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player → Game From the point of view of the person, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped on the effective line on the 1st reel and the 2nd reel. → Tempai sound is not output from the speaker.
Reel rotation starts as a lost game → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button reception is enabled → 1st stop button as stop operation of 1st reel → 1st reel stop display → 2nd stop button is operated as a stop operation of the 2nd reel → Reel rotation failure occurs → 2nd reel cannot move (rotate) to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player → Game The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed on the effective line on the 1st reel and the 2nd reel from the viewpoint of the person (when the 2nd reel moves to the scheduled stop position, the 1st reel and the 2nd reel The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the effective line) → Tempai sound is output from the speaker. It may be configured to operate as described above. In addition, as an action when reel rotation failure does not occur,
Reel rotation starts as a lost game → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button reception is enabled → 1st stop button as stop operation of 1st reel → 1st reel stop display → 2nd stop button is operated as a stop operation of the 2nd reel → 2nd reel moves (rotates) to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player → 1st reel as seen by the player And on the effective line on the 2nd reel, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed → Tempai sound is output from the speaker.
Reel rotation starts as a lost game → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button reception is enabled → 1st stop button as stop operation of 1st reel → 1st reel stop display → 2nd stop button is operated as a stop operation of the 2nd reel → 2nd reel moves (rotates) to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player → 1st reel as seen by the player And, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed on the effective line on the second reel. → The tempai sound is not output from the speaker. It may be configured to operate as described above.
With this configuration, in a game in which the result of the winning combination lottery is lost, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after accepting the stop operation of the second stop button, and the symbol combination constituting the bonus symbol is stopped first. And stopped at the second stop, in other words, even if the bonus symbol is tempted, if it stops at the scheduled stop position of this example, the tempai sound is not output if the bonus symbol is not scheduled to be tempted. Therefore, even when the apparent stop position on the reel is not normal due to the occurrence of the reel rotation failure, the player can quickly detect that the reel rotation failure has occurred by the output from the speaker. Similarly, in a game in which the result of the winning combination lottery is lost, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after accepting the stop operation of the second stop button, and the symbol combinations constituting the bonus symbols are the first stop and the second. It did not stop at the stop, in other words, even if the bonus symbol did not temper, if it stopped at the scheduled stop position of this example, the tempai sound is output if the bonus symbol was scheduled to be tempted. Therefore, even when the apparent stop position on the reel is not normal due to the occurrence of the reel rotation failure, the player can quickly detect that the reel rotation failure has occurred by the output from the speaker.

<Action 19>
Reel rotation starts as a lost game → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button reception is enabled → 1st stop button as stop operation of 1st reel → 1st reel stop display → Power cut occurs and power supply to the game machine stops → 2nd stop button is operated as a stop operation of the 2nd reel → Power cut is detected → Power cut processing is performed Execution → The 2nd reel cannot move (rotate) to the scheduled stop position from the player's point of view → The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the effective lines on the 1st and 2nd reels from the player's point of view → Power supply Return → Tempai sound is not output from the speaker.
Reel rotation starts as a lost game → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button reception is enabled → 1st stop button as stop operation of 1st reel → 1st reel stop display → Power cut occurs and power supply to the game machine stops → 2nd stop button is operated as a stop operation of the 2nd reel → Power cut is detected → Power cut processing is performed Execution → The 2nd reel cannot move (rotate) to the scheduled stop position from the player's point of view → The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed on the effective lines on the 1st and 2nd reels from the player's point of view ( When the 2nd reel moves to the scheduled stop position, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the effective line on the 1st reel and the 2nd reel.) → Power recovery → Tempai sound is output from the speaker. It may be configured to work as described above. In addition, as an action when the power supply is not cut off,
Reel rotation starts as a lost game → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button reception is enabled → 1st stop button as stop operation of 1st reel → 1st reel stop display → 2nd stop button is operated as a stop operation of the 2nd reel → 2nd reel moves (rotates) to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player → 1st reel as seen by the player And on the effective line on the 2nd reel, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed → Tempai sound is output from the speaker.
Reel rotation starts as a lost game → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button reception is enabled → 1st stop button as stop operation of 1st reel → 1st reel stop display → 2nd stop button is operated as a stop operation of the 2nd reel → 2nd reel moves (rotates) to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player → 1st reel as seen by the player And, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed on the effective line on the second reel. → The tempai sound is not output from the speaker. It may be configured to operate as described above. The timing of outputting the tempai sound from the speaker may be before the end of the execution of the power cutoff process or after the power supply is restored after the power cutoff occurs.
With this configuration, in a game in which the result of the winning combination lottery is lost, the power cutoff process is executed immediately after receiving the stop operation of the second stop button, and the symbol combination constituting the bonus symbol is the first. Stopped as a stop and a second stop, in other words, even if the bonus symbol is tempted, if it stops at the scheduled stop position in this example, the tempai sound is output if the bonus symbol is not scheduled to be tempted. Therefore, even if the apparent stop position on the reel is not normal due to the occurrence of the reel rotation failure, the player can quickly detect that the reel rotation failure has occurred by the output from the speaker. Similarly, in a game in which the result of the winning combination lottery is lost, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after accepting the stop operation of the second stop button, and the symbol combinations constituting the bonus symbols are the first stop and the second. It did not stop as a stop, in other words, even if the bonus symbol did not temper, if it stopped at the scheduled stop position in this example, the tempai sound was output if the bonus symbol was scheduled to be tempted. Therefore, even when the apparent stop position on the reel is not normal due to the occurrence of the reel rotation failure, the player can quickly detect that the reel rotation failure has occurred by the output from the speaker. In this operation, the case where the reel corresponding to the second stop did not stop at the scheduled stop position was illustrated, but the reel corresponding to the first stop did not stop at the scheduled stop position (execution of the first stop operation). It may be the case that the reel rotation failure occurs immediately after the operation).

<Action 20>
Reel rotation starts as a game that is not inside the bonus and is lost → Update the reel drive state to the constant speed state → Execute the constant speed state maintenance process → The reception of the stop button becomes effective → The first reel Operate the 1st stop button as a stop operation → Operate the 2nd stop button as a stop operation of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as a stop operation of the 2nd reel → A reel rotation failure occurs → The 2nd reel reaches the scheduled stop position as seen from the player Cannot move (rotate) → The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped on the effective line on the 1st and 2nd reels from the player's point of view → The bonus confirmation tempai sound is not output from the speaker.
Reel rotation starts as a game inside the bonus or won the bonus → Update the reel drive state to the constant speed state → Execute the constant speed state maintenance process → The reception of the stop button becomes effective → The first reel Operate the 1st stop button as a stop operation → Display the stop of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as a stop operation of the 2nd reel → A reel rotation failure occurs → The 2nd reel reaches the scheduled stop position as seen from the player Cannot move (rotate) → The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed on the effective lines on the 1st and 2nd reels from the player's point of view (when the 2nd reel moves to the scheduled stop position, the first The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the effective lines on the 1st reel and the 2nd reel.) → The bonus confirmation tempai sound is output from the speaker. In addition, as an action when reel rotation failure does not occur,
Reel rotation starts as a game inside the bonus or won the bonus → Update the reel drive state to the constant speed state → Execute the constant speed state maintenance process → The reception of the stop button becomes effective → The first reel Operate the 1st stop button as a stop operation → Operate the 2nd stop button as a stop operation of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as a stop operation of the 2nd reel → Move (rotate) the 2nd reel to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player → Game From the perspective of the person, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped on the effective line on the 1st reel and the 2nd reel. → The bonus confirmation tempai sound is output from the speaker.
Reel rotation starts as a game that is not inside the bonus and is lost → Update the reel drive state to the constant speed state → Execute the constant speed state maintenance process → The reception of the stop button becomes effective → The first reel Operate the 1st stop button as a stop operation → Operate the 2nd stop button as a stop operation of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as a stop operation of the 2nd reel → Move (rotate) the 2nd reel to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player → Game The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed on the effective lines on the first reel and the second reel from the viewpoint of the person. → The bonus confirmation tempai sound is not output from the speaker. It may be configured to operate as described above. The bonus confirmed tempai sound is a tempai that can be output from the speaker when the symbols constituting the predetermined bonus symbol are stopped and displayed on the effective line (tempai) and the predetermined bonus symbol can be stopped and displayed. It's a sound.
With this configuration, in a game where the result of the winning combination lottery is lost and the bonus is not inside, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after accepting the stop operation of the second stop button, and the symbols constituting the bonus symbol. If the combination is stopped as the first stop and the second stop, in other words, even if the bonus symbol is tempted, if it is stopped at the planned stop position of this example, the bonus symbol is not scheduled to be tempted. Bonus confirmation Tempai sound will not be output, and even if the apparent stop position on the reel is not normal due to the occurrence of reel rotation failure, the player can quickly detect that reel rotation failure has occurred by the output from the speaker. can do.
Similarly, in a game in which the result of the winning combination lottery is a bonus winning combination or a game executed during the bonus, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after the stop operation of the second stop button is accepted, and a bonus symbol is configured. The combination of symbols did not stop as the first stop and the second stop, in other words, even if the bonus symbol did not temper, if it stopped at the planned stop position in this example, the bonus symbol will be tempted. If this is the case, a bonus confirmation tempai sound will be output, and even if the apparent stop position on the reel is not normal due to the occurrence of reel rotation failure, the player will experience reel rotation failure due to the output from the speaker. You can quickly detect what you are doing. In this operation, the case where the reel corresponding to the second stop did not stop at the scheduled stop position was illustrated, but the reel corresponding to the first stop did not stop at the scheduled stop position (execution of the first stop operation). It may be the case that the reel rotation failure occurs immediately after the operation).

<Action 21>
Reel rotation starts as a lost game → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button reception is enabled → 1st stop button as stop operation of 1st reel → 1st reel stop display → Power cut occurs and power supply to the game machine stops → 2nd stop button is operated as a stop operation of the 2nd reel → Power cut is detected → Power cut processing is performed Execution → The 2nd reel cannot move (rotate) to the scheduled stop position from the player's point of view → The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the effective lines on the 1st and 2nd reels from the player's point of view → Power supply Reel → Tempai sound is not output from the speaker Also
Reel rotation starts as a lost game → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button reception is enabled → 1st stop button as stop operation of 1st reel → 1st reel stop display → Power cut occurs and power supply to the game machine stops → 2nd stop button is operated as a stop operation of the 2nd reel → Power cut is detected → Power cut processing is performed Execution → The 2nd reel cannot move (rotate) to the scheduled stop position from the player's point of view → The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed on the effective lines on the 1st and 2nd reels from the player's point of view ( When the 2nd reel moves to the scheduled stop position, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the effective line on the 1st reel and the 2nd reel.) → Power recovery → Tempai sound is output from the speaker. It may be configured to work as described above. In addition, as an action when the power supply is not cut off,
Reel rotation starts as a lost game → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button reception is enabled → 1st stop button as stop operation of 1st reel → 1st reel stop display → 2nd stop button is operated as a stop operation of the 2nd reel → 2nd reel moves (rotates) to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player → 1st reel as seen by the player And on the effective line on the 2nd reel, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed → Tempai sound is output from the speaker.
Reel rotation starts as a lost game → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button reception is enabled → 1st stop button as stop operation of 1st reel → 1st reel stop display → 2nd stop button is operated as a stop operation of the 2nd reel → 2nd reel moves (rotates) to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player → 1st reel as seen by the player And, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed on the effective line on the second reel. → The tempai sound is not output from the speaker. It may be configured to operate as described above. The timing of outputting the tempai sound from the speaker may be before the end of the execution of the power cutoff process or after the power supply is restored after the power cutoff occurs.
With this configuration, in a game in which the result of the winning combination lottery is lost, the power cutoff process is executed immediately after receiving the stop operation of the second stop button, and the symbol combination constituting the bonus symbol is the first. Stopped as a stop and a second stop, in other words, even if the bonus symbol is tempted, if it stops at the scheduled stop position in this example, the tempai sound is output if the bonus symbol is not scheduled to be tempted. Even if the apparent stop position on the reel is not normal due to the power failure, the player can quickly detect that the reel has an abnormality due to the power failure due to the output from the speaker. Can be done. Similarly, in a game in which the result of the winning combination lottery is lost, the power is cut off immediately after the stop operation of the second stop button is accepted, and the symbol combinations constituting the bonus symbols are the first stop and the second stop. Even if the bonus symbol did not stop, if it stopped at the planned stop position in this example, the tempai sound is output if the bonus symbol was scheduled to be tempted. Therefore, even if the apparent stop position on the reel is not normal due to the occurrence of power failure, the player can quickly detect that an abnormality has occurred in the reel due to the occurrence of power interruption due to the output from the speaker. can. In this operation, the case where the reel corresponding to the second stop did not stop at the scheduled stop position was illustrated, but the reel corresponding to the first stop did not stop at the scheduled stop position (execution of the first stop operation). It may be the case that the power cutoff process is executed immediately after the operation is performed.

<Action 22>
Reel rotation starts as a game that is not inside the bonus and is lost → Update the reel drive state to the constant speed state → Execute the constant speed state maintenance process → The reception of the stop button becomes effective → The first reel Operate the 1st stop button as a stop operation → Display the stop of the 1st reel → Stop the power supply to the game machine due to a power outage → Operate the 2nd stop button as a stop operation of the 2nd reel → Turn off the power Detect → Execute power off processing → The 2nd reel cannot move (rotate) to the scheduled stop position from the player's point of view → Corresponds to the bonus combination on the effective lines on the 1st and 2nd reels from the player's point of view Symbol combination is stopped display → Bonus confirmation Tempai sound is not output from the speaker Also
Reel rotation starts as a game inside the bonus or won the bonus → Update the reel drive state to the constant speed state → Execute the constant speed state maintenance process → The reception of the stop button becomes effective → The first reel Operate the 1st stop button as a stop operation → Display the stop of the 1st reel → Stop the power supply to the game machine due to a power off → Operate the 2nd stop button as a stop operation of the 2nd reel → Turn off the power Detect → Execute power off processing → The 2nd reel cannot move (rotate) to the scheduled stop position from the player's point of view → Corresponds to the bonus combination on the effective lines on the 1st and 2nd reels from the player's point of view The symbol combination does not stop and display (when the 2nd reel moves to the scheduled stop position, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the effective lines on the 1st reel and the 2nd reel) → Bonus confirmed from the speaker The tempai sound may be output so as to act as described above. In addition, as an action when the power supply is not cut off,
Reel rotation starts as a game inside the bonus or won the bonus → Update the reel drive state to the constant speed state → Execute the constant speed state maintenance process → The reception of the stop button becomes effective → The first reel Operate the 1st stop button as a stop operation → Operate the 2nd stop button as a stop operation of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as a stop operation of the 2nd reel → Move (rotate) the 2nd reel to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player → Game From the perspective of the person, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped on the effective line on the 1st reel and the 2nd reel. → The bonus confirmation tempai sound is output from the speaker.
Reel rotation starts as a game that is not inside the bonus and is lost → Update the reel drive state to the constant speed state → Execute the constant speed state maintenance process → The reception of the stop button becomes effective → The first reel Operate the 1st stop button as a stop operation → Operate the 2nd stop button as a stop operation of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as a stop operation of the 2nd reel → Move (rotate) the 2nd reel to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player → Game The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed on the effective lines on the first reel and the second reel from the viewpoint of the person. → The bonus confirmation tempai sound is not output from the speaker. It may be configured to operate as described above. The bonus confirmed tempai sound is a tempai that can be output from the speaker when the symbols constituting the predetermined bonus symbol are stopped and displayed on the effective line (tempai) and the predetermined bonus symbol can be stopped and displayed. It's a sound.
With this configuration, in a game in which the result of the winning combination lottery is lost and the bonus is not inside, the power cutoff process is executed immediately after the stop operation of the second stop button is accepted, and the bonus symbol is configured. When the symbol combination is stopped as the first stop and the second stop, in other words, even if the bonus symbol is tempted, if it is stopped at the planned stop position of this example, the bonus symbol is not scheduled to be tempted. Will not output the bonus confirmation tempai sound, and even if the apparent stop position on the reel is not normal due to the power outage, the player will have an abnormality in the reel due to the power outage due to the output from the speaker. Can be detected quickly.
Similarly, in a game in which the result of the winning combination lottery is a bonus winning combination or a game executed during the bonus, the power cutoff process occurs immediately after the stop operation of the second stop button is accepted, and the bonus symbol is displayed. The constituent symbol combinations did not stop as the first stop and the second stop, in other words, even if the bonus symbol did not temper, the bonus symbol tempais if it stopped at the planned stop position in this example. If it was planned, a bonus confirmed tempai sound will be output, and even if the apparent stop position on the reel is not normal due to the occurrence of a power outage, the player will be abnormal on the reel due to the power outage due to the output from the speaker. Can be detected as soon as possible. In this operation, the case where the reel corresponding to the second stop did not stop at the scheduled stop position was illustrated, but the reel corresponding to the first stop did not stop at the scheduled stop position (execution of the first stop operation). It may be the case that the power cutoff process is executed immediately after the operation is performed.

<Action 23>
The number of credits is 1 or more, and the reel starts rotating as a game that wins the predetermined re-game combination → the reel drive state is updated to the constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → the reception of the stop button becomes effective. → Operate the 1st stop button as the stop operation of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Display the stop of the 2nd reel → As the stop operation of the 3rd reel Operate the 3rd stop button (accept the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Reel rotation failure occurs → The 3rd reel moves to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player (rotation) Cannot → The symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined re-game combination does not stop and display → The max bet lamp does not light up.
Reel rotation starts as a game in which the number of credits is 1 or more and the player has not won the replay role → Reel drive state is updated to the constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Acceptance of the stop button becomes effective → Operate the 1st stop button as the stop operation of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Display the stop of the 2nd reel → As the stop operation of the 3rd reel Operate the 3rd stop button (accept the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Reel rotation failure occurs → The 3rd reel moves to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player (rotation) No → The symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined re-game combination may be configured to stop display → the max bet lamp lights up as described above. In addition, as an action when reel rotation failure does not occur,
The number of credits is 1 or more, and the reel starts rotating as a game that wins the predetermined re-game combination → the reel drive state is updated to the constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → the reception of the stop button becomes effective. → Operate the 1st stop button as the stop operation of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Display the stop of the 2nd reel → As the stop operation of the 3rd reel Operate the 3rd stop button (accept the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → The 3rd reel moves (rotates) to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player → The predetermined replay The symbol combination corresponding to the role is stopped display → Max bet lamp does not light up Also
Reel rotation starts as a game in which the number of credits is 1 or more and the player has not won the replay role → Reel drive state is updated to the constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Acceptance of the stop button becomes effective → Operate the 1st stop button as the stop operation of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Display the stop of the 2nd reel → As the stop operation of the 3rd reel Operate the 3rd stop button (accept the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → The 3rd reel moves (rotates) to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player → The predetermined replay The symbol combination corresponding to the combination does not stop and display → The max bet lamp lights up. It may be configured to operate as described above.
With this configuration, in the game in which the re-game is won, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is accepted, and the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game is not stopped and displayed. However, as in the case where the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game is stopped and displayed, the max-bet lamp does not light, so that the player can quickly detect that the operation of the max-bet button is not effective. In addition, in a game in which the re-game has not been won, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is accepted, and the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game is stopped and displayed again. By turning on the max bet lamp, the player can quickly detect that the operation of the max bet button is effective, as in the case where the symbol combination corresponding to the game is not stopped and displayed.

<Action 24>
The number of credits is 1 or more, and the reel starts rotating as a game that wins the predetermined re-game combination → the reel drive state is updated to the constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → the reception of the stop button becomes effective. → Operate the 1st stop button as the stop operation of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Display the stop of the 2nd reel → The game occurs when the power is cut off Power supply to the machine is stopped → Operate the 3rd stop button as the stop operation of the 3rd reel (accept the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Detect power off → Power off Execute time processing → The 3rd reel cannot move (rotate) to the scheduled stop position when viewed from the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined re-game combination does not stop and display → The max bet lamp does not light up.
Reel rotation starts as a game in which the number of credits is 1 or more and the player has not won the replay role → Reel drive state is updated to the constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Acceptance of the stop button becomes effective → Operate the 1st stop button as the stop operation of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Display the stop of the 2nd reel → The game occurs when the power is cut off Power supply to the machine is stopped → Operate the 3rd stop button as the stop operation of the 3rd reel (accept the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Detect power off → Power off Execute time processing → The 3rd reel cannot move (rotate) to the scheduled stop position when viewed from the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined re-game combination is stopped and displayed → The max bet lamp lights up. It may be configured to do so. In addition, as an action when the power supply is not cut off,
The number of credits is 1 or more, and the reel starts rotating as a game that wins the predetermined re-game combination → the reel drive state is updated to the constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → the reception of the stop button becomes effective. → Operate the 1st stop button as the stop operation of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Display the stop of the 2nd reel → As the stop operation of the 3rd reel Operate the 3rd stop button (accept the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → The 3rd reel moves (rotates) to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player → The predetermined replay The symbol combination corresponding to the role is stopped display → Max bet lamp does not light up Also
Reel rotation starts as a game in which the number of credits is 1 or more and the player has not won the replay role → Reel drive state is updated to the constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Acceptance of the stop button becomes effective → Operate the 1st stop button as the stop operation of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Display the stop of the 2nd reel → As the stop operation of the 3rd reel Operate the 3rd stop button (accept the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → The 3rd reel moves (rotates) to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player → The predetermined replay The symbol combination corresponding to the combination does not stop and display → The max bet lamp lights up. It may be configured to operate as described above.
With this configuration, in the game in which the re-game is won, the power cutoff process is executed immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is accepted, and the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game is not stopped and displayed. In addition, the player can quickly detect that the operation of the max bet button is not effective because the max bet lamp does not light, as in the case where the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game is stopped and displayed. In addition, in a game in which the re-game has not been won, the power off-time process is executed immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is accepted, and the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game is stopped and displayed. By turning on the max bet lamp, the player can quickly detect that the operation of the max bet button is effective, as in the case where the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game is not stopped and displayed.

<Action 25>
It is a game during the execution of the bonus, and the winning combination has been won, and the game medal corresponding to the winning combination of the winning combination is given to the player, so that the end condition of the bonus is satisfied as a game of Lille. Rotation starts → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Acceptance of stop button becomes effective → 1st stop button is operated as stop operation of 1st reel → 1st reel stops Display → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Display the stop of the 2nd reel → Operate the 3rd stop button as the stop operation of the 3rd reel (accept the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Reel drive state Is updated to the reel deceleration state → Reel rotation failure occurs → The third reel cannot move (rotate) to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not stopped and displayed → The bonus ends, The freeze at the end of the bonus may be configured to work as described above. In addition, as an action when reel rotation failure does not occur,
It is a game during the execution of the bonus, and the winning combination has been won, and the game medal corresponding to the winning combination of the winning combination is given to the player, so that the end condition of the bonus is satisfied as a game of Lille. Rotation starts → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Acceptance of stop button becomes effective → 1st stop button is operated as stop operation of 1st reel → 1st reel stops Display → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Display the stop of the 2nd reel → Operate the 3rd stop button as the stop operation of the 3rd reel (accept the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Reel drive state Is updated to the reel deceleration state → The 3rd reel moves (rotates) to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed → The bonus ends and the freeze is executed at the end of the bonus It may be configured to work as described above.
With this configuration, the winning combination is won in the final bonus game, and the reel rotation failure occurs immediately after the stop operation of the 3rd stop button is accepted, and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not stopped and displayed. In such a case, as in the case where the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed, the bonus ends and the freeze is executed at the end of the bonus, so that the player can promptly indicate that the bonus has ended normally. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that can be detected and does not give a sense of discomfort to the progress of the game.

<Action 26>
It is a game during the execution of the bonus, and the winning combination has been won, and the game medal corresponding to the winning combination of the winning combination is given to the player, so that the end condition of the bonus is satisfied as a game of Lille. Rotation starts → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Acceptance of stop button becomes effective → 1st stop button is operated as stop operation of 1st reel → 1st reel stops Display → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Stop display of the 2nd reel → Stop the power supply to the game machine due to the power failure → 3rd stop button as the stop operation of the 3rd reel (Accepts the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Updates the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Detects power off → Executes power off processing → Moves the 3rd reel to the scheduled stop position as seen by the player ( (Rotation) is not possible → The symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not stopped and displayed → The bonus ends and the freeze is executed at the end of the bonus. In addition, as an action when the power supply is not cut off,
It is a game during the execution of the bonus, and the winning combination has been won, and the game medal corresponding to the winning combination of the winning combination is given to the player, so that the end condition of the bonus is satisfied as a game of Lille. Rotation starts → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Acceptance of stop button becomes effective → 1st stop button is operated as stop operation of 1st reel → 1st reel stops Display → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Display the stop of the 2nd reel → Operate the 3rd stop button as the stop operation of the 3rd reel (accept the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Reel drive state Is updated to the reel deceleration state → The 3rd reel moves (rotates) to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed → The bonus ends and the freeze is executed at the end of the bonus It may be configured to work as described above.
With this configuration, the winning combination is won in the final bonus game, the power cutoff process is executed immediately after receiving the stop operation of the third stop button, and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed. Even if there is no such thing, the player will be notified that the bonus has ended normally by executing the freeze at the end of the bonus as well as the end of the bonus, as in the case where the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that can be detected quickly and does not give a sense of discomfort to the progress of the game.

In addition, from the configuration related to the reel acceleration processing in the spinning machine according to this example described above,
Execution period of reel acceleration processing when no reel rotation failure occurs during execution of reel acceleration processing = A
Execution period of reel acceleration processing until the rotation failure of the reel occurs when the rotation failure of the reel occurs during the execution of the reel acceleration processing = B
Execution period of reel acceleration processing after a spinning cylinder rotation failure occurs when a spinning reel rotation failure occurs during execution of the reel acceleration processing = C
If so,
A = B + C
It is configured to be.
again,
Number of interrupt processing executions of reel acceleration processing when no reel rotation failure occurs during execution of reel acceleration processing = D
If a spinning reel rotation failure occurs during the execution of the reel acceleration processing, the number of interrupt processing executions of the reel acceleration processing until the reel rotation failure occurs = E
The number of interrupt processing executions of the reel acceleration processing after the reel acceleration processing failure occurs when the reel rotation failure occurs during the execution of the reel acceleration processing = F
If so,
D = E + F
It is configured to be.

Next, FIG. 36 is a flowchart of the power cutoff process according to the subroutine of step 1900 in FIG. 35. First, in step 1902, the CPUC100 of the main control board M saves the stack pointer. Next, in step 1904, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns on the power-off processed flag (for example, the inside of the power-off processed flag area of the RAM area is updated with a value corresponding to on). Next, in step 1906, the CPUC100 of the main control board M calculates a checksum from the start address of the RAM area to the address immediately before the checksum area, and error detection information (for example, the calculation) based on the calculated checksum. The lower 1 byte of the checksum, or its complement) is set in the checksum area. Next, in step 1912, the CPUC100 of the main control board M prohibits the writing of the RAM, and proceeds to step 1914. Next, in step 1914, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes an infinite loop process for waiting for a reset.

Next, FIG. 37 shows an example of an image diagram of a push order display of the rotating drum type gaming machine according to this example. The table on the figure shows the reel stop order and the instruction number indicated by the push order navigation to be executed (information related to the push order, which is determined by the main control board M and transmitted to the sub control board S in this example). It is a table showing the correspondence with. For example, it is shown that the instruction number for notifying "middle-> right-> left" as the push order is "A5". Next, on the left side of the figure, the push order display device D270, the advantageous section display YH, and the effect display device S40 when the push order is “left → middle → right” (corresponding instruction number is “A1”). The image displayed in is illustrated. Here, the push order display device D270 of this example has a 7-segment display method and also serves as a payout number display device. Further, when the medals are paid out, the number of the paid out medals is displayed as a two-digit number on the push order display device D270. Here, even when the push order navigation is executed, if the display of the push order display device D270 is displayed as a two-digit numerical value, the display on the push order display device D270 is whether the number of medals to be paid out or the push order. It becomes difficult to determine whether it is a navigation display. Therefore, in order to distinguish between the number of medals to be paid out and the push order navigation display, the push order display device D270 should display "=" in the left digit like "= 1". By configuring, when the display of the push order display device D270 is a two-digit number, it is a display of the number of medals to be paid out, and the left side is "=" and the right side is a number as the display of the push order display device D270. If there is, it is configured so that it can be determined that it is a push order navigation display, and it is configured to prevent misidentification of the player. Further, in the advantageous section display YH provided at the lower right of the push order display device D270, a lamp indicating that the current game section is an “advantageous section” is lit. At the same time, the display of "remaining 40 games" indicating the number of remaining games in the "advantageous section" (or "AT in progress") is displayed on the effect display device S40. Further, the right side in the figure shows an image displayed on the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 when the push order is “middle → left → right” (corresponding instruction number is “A3”). There is. In addition, since the current game section is an "advantageous section", the advantageous section display YH lights up, and the display of "remaining 25 games" indicating the number of remaining games in the "advantageous section" is displayed on the effect display device S40. Is displayed. It should be noted that, among the condition devices in which the combination displayed as stopped depending on the reel stop order is different, the combination with the push order (the condition device accompanied by the payout of medals, for example, the bell) and the replay combination with the push order (depending on the reel stop order). Among the condition devices having different combinations to be stopped and displayed, the segment display of the instruction number of the condition device related to the replay combination) may be different, and the display method of the push order display device D270 is limited to 7 segments. Instead, for example, an LED display may be used to light a plurality of LEDs according to a lighting pattern corresponding to an instruction number to give an instruction. In addition, the advantageous section display YH may be provided at the lower right of the credit number display device D200. In this case, the timing for turning on the advantageous section indicator YH is preferably until the operation of the settlement button D60 becomes effective. When the player quits the game, he / she visually checks the credit number display device D200 to check if there are any medals left. Then, if there are medals remaining, the settlement button D60 is operated. That is, it is a user-friendly gaming machine that can prevent the game from being accidentally stopped even though it is an "advantageous section" from the next game by turning on the settlement button D60 before it becomes effective. be able to.

Further, the notification mode of the game section in the advantageous section indicator YH is not limited to this example, and a section indicator similar to the advantageous section indicator YH is provided at the lower right of both of the two 7 segments (the section indicator is provided). It may be configured (with two), and in such a configuration, when the section indicator on the left side lights up, it notifies that the current game section is a "normal section", and on the other hand, it is on the right side. When the section indicator lights up, it may be configured to notify that the current game section is an "advantageous section". Furthermore, the "normal section" and the "advantageous section" are distinguished by the color and lighting mode when the section indicator is lit (for example, "green" in the "normal section" and "red" in the "advantageous section". Alternatively, it may be configured to be lit in the "normal section" and "blinking" in the "advantageous section"). Furthermore, the display mode of the section display is configured to be changed according to "AT during BB internal game", "AT during BB state", "AT precursor state", "AT during state", etc. in the "advantageous section". You may. Further, it may be configured so that the current gaming section can be recognized as a "waiting section" by distinguishing it from a "normal section" and an "advantageous section". However, the distinction between "normal section" and "advantageous section" is made easy to distinguish, such as by using different section indicators, and the player recognizes whether or not the current game section is the "advantageous section". It is preferable to make it easy to do.

Further, regarding the display on the effect display device S40 indicating the number of remaining games in the "advantageous section", for example, in the "AT precursor state" or "AT preparation", the number of remaining games in the "advantageous section" is not displayed. It may be configured (not notifying the disadvantage to the player that the number of remaining games in the "advantageous section" is subtracted in a state where the profit is relatively low for the player). However, even in such a configuration, it is preferable to turn on the section indicator to notify the player that the section is in the "advantageous section". At the same time, it is preferable that the section display is configured to be controlled by the main control board M side, and the section display is installed at a position where the display is easily visible to the player.

Next, the control process executed on the sub-control board S side will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 to 57.

<Sub-side program start processing>
First, FIG. 38 is a subroutine showing a sub-side program start process. This sub-side program start process is called and executed when the power is turned on.

First, in step 2002, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S disables interrupts. Next, in step 2004, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S executes various initialization processes such as initialization of the CPU and RAM, calculation of the checksum, and the like.

Next, in step 2008, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the checksum value calculated when the power is turned on and the checksum value calculated and stored when the power is turned off match. In the case of Yes in step 2008, in other words, if it is determined in the determination process of step 2008 that both checksum values match, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes one command process described later in step 2010. It is determined whether or not the state has been restored from the state in which the power was cut off, that is, whether or not the state has been completely restored.

In the case of Yes in step 2010, in other words, when it is determined that the command is completely restored, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S permits interrupts in step 2012, and executes the command when a power failure occurs. 1 Return the process to command processing.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2008, in other words, when it is determined in the determination process of step 2008 that both checksum values do not match, in step 2014, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S clears the RAM. To execute. After executing the process of step 2014, or if No in step 2010, the process is shifted to the sub-main loop process.

<Sub-main loop processing>
Next, FIG. 39 is a subroutine showing the sub-main loop processing. The sub-main loop process is called and executed after the sub-side program start process shown in FIG. 38 is executed.

First, in step 2102, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S clears the watchdog timer. Next, in step 2104, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S starts the operation of the watchdog timer. Next, in step 2106, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S permits interrupts. Next, in step 2108, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the command reception process. This command reception process is a process of receiving various commands transmitted from the main control board M.

Next, in step 2250, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes one command process described later. This one command process is a process executed based on a control command from the main control means 100. Specific processing will be described later. In step 2110, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a predetermined time, for example, 16 ms has elapsed, and if it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed, the process returns to step 2108. On the other hand, when it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed, the process is returned to step 2102. The predetermined time is not limited to 16 ms and can be appropriately changed according to the process.

<Sub-side power off processing>
Next, FIG. 40 is a subroutine showing the sub-side power cutoff process executed on the sub-control board S side. The sub-side power cut-off process is a process started when the sub-control board S detects a power-off.

First, in step 2202, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S stops the watchdog timer. In step 2204, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the sub-side program start process is being executed. If Yes in step 2204, the process proceeds to step 2210. On the other hand, if No in step 2204, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calculates the checksum in step 2206. Next, in step 2208, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S saves various data (checksum calculation result, address of the program being executed, etc.), and proceeds to step 2210.

Next, in step 2210, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not 500 ms has elapsed. Here, when it is determined that 500 ms has elapsed, the power cutoff process is terminated. On the other hand, if No in step 2210, in step 2212, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the power supply has been restored. In the case of Yes in step 2212, in step 2214, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S updates the number of momentary interruption occurrences. Next, in step 2216, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S starts the operation of the watchdog timer and returns to the process executed when the power is turned off. If it is determined in the determination process of step 2212 that the power supply has not been restored, the process is returned to step 2210 described above.

<1 command processing>
Next, FIG. 41 is a subroutine showing one command process called and executed in the process of step 2250 of FIG. 39.

Next, in step 2252, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not it is the operation timing of the start lever. In the case of No in step 2252, in other words, when it is determined that it is the operation timing of the start lever, in step 3000, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calls and executes a subroutine of the effect-related determination process at the time of start lever operation, which will be described later. do. Next, in step 2300, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S executes the start lever operation time process described later, and proceeds to step 7100.

Next, in the case of Yes in step 2252, in other words, if it is not the operation timing of the start lever, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines in step 2254 whether or not it is the first reel stop acceptance timing. In the case of No in step 2254, in other words, in the case of the first reel stop acceptance timing, in step 2500, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calls and executes the subroutine of the first cylinder stop acceptance processing described later. Then, the process proceeds to step 7100.

Next, in the case of Yes in step 2254, in other words, if it is not the first reel stop acceptance timing, in step 2258, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not it is the second reel stop acceptance timing. .. In the case of No in step 2258, in other words, in the case of the second reel stop acceptance timing, in step 2550, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calls and executes the subroutine of the second cylinder stop acceptance processing described later. Then, the process proceeds to step 7100.

Next, in the case of Yes in step 2258, in other words, if it is not the second reel stop acceptance timing, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines in step 2262 whether or not it is the third reel stop acceptance timing. .. In the case of No in step 2262, in other words, in the case of the third reel stop acceptance timing, in step 3200, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calls the subroutine of the third reel stop production related determination process described later. And execute. Next, in step 2600, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the third body stop acceptance processing described later, and proceeds to step 7100.

Next, in the case of Yes in step 2262, in other words, if it is not the third reel stop acceptance timing, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines in step 2266 whether or not it is the stop timing of the stop display symbol. .. In the case of Yes in step 2266, in other words, in the case of the stop timing of the stop display symbol, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the stop display symbol time processing (not shown) in step 2268, and step 7100. Move to. On the other hand, if No in step 2266, in other words, if it is not the stop timing of the stop display symbol, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S immediately shifts to step 7100.

Next, in step 7100, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the menu screen display control process described later. Next, in step 7200, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the standby screen display control process described later, and shifts to the next process (process of step 2110).

Next, FIG. 42 is a subroutine showing the effect-related determination process at the time of start lever operation, which is called and executed in the process of step 3000 of FIG. First, in step 3002, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the state related to the AT of the game is a “high probability state”. In the case of Yes in step 3002, in step 3004, the CPUSC of the sub control board S has the number of high secured failure games remaining at the present time (high probability state) based on the high secured failure counter value command received from the main control board M side. Check how many games are guaranteed). Next, in step 3050, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calls and executes a subroutine of the battle effect execution enable / disable determination process described later, and proceeds to step 3006. Next, in step 3006, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not it is determined that the battle effect is executed in the game. In the case of Yes in step 3006, in step 3008, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has the current stay stage, the state related to the AT of the game, the state related to the AT of the next game, and the current number of high-securing obstacle games. Based on this, the stay stage transition lottery (lottery for whether or not to change the stay stage) is executed with reference to the stay stage determination table (see FIG. 44), and the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2300). Even if No in step 3006, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2300). On the other hand, if No in step 3002, in step 3010, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the state related to the AT of the game is a “low probability state”. In the case of Yes in step 3010, in step 3012, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S uses the stay stage determination table (FIG. 44) based on the current stay stage, the state related to the AT of the game, and the state related to the AT of the next game. Refer to), the stay stage transition lottery is executed, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2300). On the other hand, if No in step 3010, in step 3014, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the state related to AT of the game is "AT in progress". In the case of Yes in step 3014, in step 3100, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calls and executes a subroutine of the effect determination process during AT, which will be described later, and shifts to the next process (process of step 2300). On the other hand, if No in step 3014, in step 3016, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the state related to the AT of the game is the “recoverable / non-recoverable effect state”. In the case of Yes in step 3016, in step 3150, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calls and executes a subroutine of the resurrection possibility effect determination process described later, and shifts to the next process (process of step 2300). On the other hand, if No in step 3016, in step 3018, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S performs the advance notice effect and the stay stage based on the current stay stage, the state related to the AT of the game, and the state related to the AT of the next game. The determination is made, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2300). The stay stage is mainly a background effect displayed on the effect display device S40, and is configured so that any stay stage is always set. If the stay stage is different, the tendency of various effects such as background effect, notice effect, etc. will be different.

Next, FIG. 43 is a subroutine showing a battle effect execution possibility determination process that is called and executed in the process of step 3050 of FIG. 42. First, in step 3052, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the number of high-securing obstacle games is 4 or more. In the case of Yes in step 3052, in step 3054, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the condition device related to the game is a BB combination. In the case of Yes in step 3054, in step 3056, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has a predetermined probability (1/2 in this example) of winning the battle effect execution possibility lottery (whether or not to execute the battle effect (win)). Lottery) is executed. Next, in step 3058, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the lottery for executing the battle effect executed in step 3056 has been won. In the case of Yes in step 3058, in step 3060, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the effect related to the game as a battle effect (win), and shifts to the next process (process of step 3006). On the other hand, if No in step 3058, in step 3062, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the effect related to the game to be an effect other than the battle effect, and shifts to the next process (process of step 3006). Here, the battle effect is a continuous effect executed over a plurality of games, and the battle effect is won, that is, the battle effect (win) is executed, and the BB role is won and the AT lottery is performed. It is structured so that the winning is definite. The configuration related to the battle production is not limited to this, and even if the AT lottery is not won, if the BB role is won (after the end of the BB, the state shifts to the "low probability state" or the "high probability state". ) May be configured to perform a battle effect (victory).

If No in step 3054, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the condition device related to the game is a rare combination. Here, in this example, the rare roles are prize-C (cherry), prize-D (watermelon A), and prize-E (watermelon B), and the role can be won in duplicate with the BB role. It has become. That is, in the case of Yes in step 3064, where the player has the expectation that the rare role is stopped and displayed at the same time as the BB role, in step 3066, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is , A lottery for whether or not to execute the Gase battle effect (a lottery for whether or not to execute the battle effect (defeat)) to win with a predetermined probability (in this example, it is 1/3, which is a lower probability than the predetermined probability in step 3056). ) Is executed. Next, in step 3068, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the lottery for executing the gasse battle effect executed in step 3066 has been won. In the case of Yes in step 3068, in step 3070, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the effect related to the game as a battle effect (defeat), and shifts to the next process (process of step 3006). If No in step 3052, step 3064, or step 3068, in step 3072, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the effect related to the game to be an effect other than the battle effect, and the next process (process of step 3006). ). Here, the battle effect (defeat) may be configured to be executed even in the "normal section".

In this way, when the number of high-securing obstacle games is a predetermined number or more, for example, when it is 4 or more, continuous production such as a battle production can be executed over a plurality of games, while the number of high-securing obstacle games is predetermined. If it is less than the number, for example, if it is less than 4, it is configured not to execute a continuous effect such as a battle effect, so that the "low probability state" is entered even though the continuous effect is being executed. It is possible to prevent the advantageous section indicator YH from turning off due to the transition of ("normal section" is set), and the battle effect is performed only when the advantageous section indicator YH can be lit until the end of the battle effect. By executing this, it is possible to make the game machine user-friendly without impairing the player's expectation for winning the BB.

In addition, when the role of rare is won, it is configured to be able to execute continuous production such as battle production (defeat), so it is possible to guarantee the execution frequency of battle production and always proceed with the game with a sense of expectation. Can be done.

Next, FIG. 44 is an example of a stay stage determination table. The stay stage determination table shown in FIG. 44 is an excerpt of only a part. The stay stage determination table shown in FIG. 44 is used when the game is in the "low probability state" and when the game is in the "high probability state" and the number of high secured obstacle games is 4 or more. It consists of three types: a table and a table used when the game is in a "high probability state" and the number of high-securing obstacle games is 3 or less.

In the stay stage determination table used when the game is in the "low probability state", the relationship between the current stay stage, the state related to the AT of the next game, the stay stage of the skeleton game, and the corresponding number is It is stipulated. In the "low probability state", the current stay stage consists of two types of production stages, the desert stage and the city stage, and the transition stages are the desert stage, the city stage, the conference room stage, and the cave stage. It consists of four types of production stages. There are three states related to the AT of the next game: a "low probability state", a "normal BB internal medium game", and a "high probability state".

If the current stay stage is the desert stage and the next game shifts to the "low probability state" or "normal BB internal medium game", 0 to 979 is assigned as the number of units when the desert stage is maintained in the game. ing. In addition, when the current stay stage is the desert stage and the next game shifts to the "low probability state" or "normal BB internal medium game", the number of placements when shifting from the desert stage to the city stage in the game is 980 to 999 is assigned.

Furthermore, if the current stay stage is the city stage and the next game shifts to the "low probability state" or "normal BB internal medium game", the number of placements when shifting from the city stage to the desert stage in the game is 0 to 19 is assigned. When the current stay stage is the city stage and the next game shifts to the "low probability state" or "normal BB internal medium game", 20 to 999 is assigned as the number of places when the city stage is maintained in the game. ing.

Further, when the current stay stage is the desert stage and the game shifts to the "high probability state" in the next game, 0 to 249 are assigned as the number of units when the desert stage is maintained in the game. When the current stay stage is the desert stage and the game shifts to the "high probability state" in the next game, 250 to 499 is assigned as the number of positions when shifting from the desert stage to the city stage in the game. When the current stay stage is the desert stage and the game shifts to the "high probability state" in the next game, 500 to 749 are assigned as the number of positions when shifting from the desert stage to the conference room stage in the game. When the current stay stage is the desert stage and the game shifts to the "high probability state" in the next game, 750 to 999 are assigned as the number of positions when shifting from the desert stage to the cave stage in the game.

When the current stay stage is the city stage and the game shifts to the "high probability state" in the next game, 0 to 249 are assigned as the number of positions when shifting from the city stage to the desert stage in the game. When the current stay stage is the city stage and the next game shifts to the "high probability state", 250 to 499 is assigned as the number of units when the city stage is maintained in the game. When the current stay stage is the city stage and the next game shifts to the "high probability state", 500 to 749 are assigned as the number of positions when shifting from the city stage to the conference room stage in the game. When the current stay stage is the city stage and the game shifts to the "high probability state" in the next game, 750 to 999 are assigned as the number of positions when shifting from the city stage to the cave stage in the game.

In the stay stage determination table used when the game is in a "high probability state" and the number of highly secured obstacle games is 4 or more, the relationship between the current stay stage, the stay stage of the skeleton game, and the number of placements is defined. Has been done. The current stay stage and the transition stage consist of four types of production stages: the desert stage, the city stage, the conference room stage, and the cave stage.

If the current stay stage is the desert stage and the desert stage is maintained in the game, 0 to 879 is assigned as the number of units. The current stay stage is the desert stage, and 880 to 929 are assigned as the number of positions when shifting from the desert stage to the city stage in the game. The current stay stage is the desert stage, and 930 to 959 are assigned as the number of units when shifting from the desert stage to the conference room stage in the game. The current stay stage is the desert stage, and 960 to 999 are assigned as the number of positions when shifting from the desert stage to the cave stage in the game.

The current stay stage is the city stage, and 0 to 879 is assigned as the number of positions when shifting from the city stage to the desert stage in the game. When the current stay stage is the city stage and the city stage is maintained in the game, 880 to 929 are assigned as the number. The current stay stage is the city stage, and 930 to 959 are assigned as the number of positions when the game shifts from the city stage to the conference room stage. The current stay stage is the city stage, and 960 to 999 are assigned as the number of positions when shifting from the city stage to the cave stage in the game.

The current stay stage is the conference room stage, and 0 to 49 are assigned as the number of units when shifting from the conference room stage to the desert stage in the game. The current stay stage is the conference room stage, and 50 to 99 are assigned as the number of units when the game shifts from the conference room stage to the city stage. When the current stay stage is the conference room stage and the conference room stage is maintained in the game, 100 to 949 are assigned as the number of positions. The current stay stage is the conference room stage, and 950 to 999 are assigned as the number of positions when the game shifts from the conference room stage to the cave stage.

The current stay stage is the cave stage, and 0 to 49 are assigned as the number of positions when transitioning from the cave stage to the desert stage in the game. The current stay stage is a cave stage, and 50 to 99 are assigned as the number of units when transitioning from the cave stage to the city stage in the game. The current stay stage is a cave stage, and 100 to 199 are assigned as the number of units when shifting from the cave stage to the conference room stage in the game. If the current stay stage is a cave stage and the cave stage is maintained in the game, 200 to 999 is assigned as the number of positions.

In the stay stage determination table used when the game is in the "high probability state" and the number of high secured obstacle games is 3 or less, the current stay stage, the state related to the AT of the next game, and the stay stage of the skeleton game are displayed. , The relationship with the number is specified. The current stay stage and the transition stage consist of four types of production stages: the desert stage, the city stage, the conference room stage, and the cave stage. There are three states related to the AT of the next game: "high probability state", "advantageous BB internal medium game", and "low probability state".

If the current stay stage is a desert stage and the next game shifts to a "high probability state" or "advantageous BB internal medium game", 0 to 979 is assigned as the number of units when the desert stage is maintained in the game. ing. If the current stay stage is the desert stage and you want to move to the "high probability state" or "advantageous BB internal medium game" in the next game, the number of places to move from the desert stage to the city stage in the game is 980 to 999. Assigned.

If the current stay stage is the city stage and you want to move to the "high probability state" or "advantageous BB internal medium game" in the next game, the number of places to move from the city stage to the desert stage in the game is 0 to 19. Assigned. When the current stay stage is the city stage and the next game shifts to the "high probability state" or the "advantageous BB internal medium game", 20 to 999 is assigned as the number of units when the city stage is maintained in the game. ing.

When the current stay stage is the conference room stage and the next game shifts to "high probability state" or "advantageous BB internal medium game", the number of places to shift from the conference room stage to the desert stage in the game is 0 to 29 is assigned. When the current stay stage is the conference room stage and the next game shifts to the "high probability state" or "advantageous BB internal medium game", the number of placements when shifting from the conference room stage to the city stage in the game is 30 to 59 is assigned. When the current stay stage is the conference room stage and the next game shifts to the "high probability state" or the "advantageous BB internal medium game", the number of units when the conference room stage is maintained in the game is 60 to 999. Assigned.

If the current stay stage is a cave stage and you want to move to a "high probability state" or "advantageous BB internal medium game" in the next game, the number of places to move from the cave stage to the desert stage in that game is 0 to 29. Assigned. If the current stay stage is a cave stage and the next game shifts to "high probability state" or "advantageous BB internal medium game", the number of placements when shifting from the cave stage to the city stage in the game is 30 to 59. Assigned. When the current stay stage is a cave stage and the next game shifts to "high probability state" or "advantageous BB internal medium game", the number of placements when shifting from the cave stage to the conference room stage in the game is 60 to 99. Is assigned. When the current stay stage is a cave stage and the next game shifts to "high probability state" or "advantageous BB internal medium game", 100 to 999 is assigned as the number of units when the cave stage is maintained in the game. ing.

When the current stay stage is the desert stage and the game shifts to the "low probability state" in the next game, 0 to 499 is assigned as the number of units when the desert stage is maintained in the game. When the current stay stage is the desert stage and the game shifts to the "low probability state" in the next game, 500 to 999 is assigned as the number of positions when shifting from the desert stage to the city stage in the game.

When the current stay stage is the city stage and the game shifts to the "low probability state" in the next game, 0 to 499 is assigned as the number of positions when shifting from the city stage to the desert stage in the game. When the current stay stage is the city stage and the next game shifts to the "low probability state", 500 to 999 is assigned as the number of units when the city stage is maintained in the game.

When the current stay stage is the conference room stage and the game shifts to the "low probability state" in the next game, 0 to 499 is assigned as the number of units when shifting from the conference room stage to the desert stage in the game. When the current stay stage is the conference room stage and the next game shifts to the "low probability state", 500 to 999 is assigned as the number of units when shifting from the conference room stage to the city stage in the game.

When the current stay stage is a cave stage and the game shifts to the "low probability state" in the next game, 0 to 499 is assigned as the number of positions when shifting from the cave stage to the desert stage in the game. When the current stay stage is a cave stage and the next game shifts to a low probability state, 500 to 999 is assigned as the number of positions when shifting from the cave stage to the city stage in the game.

Thus, in the "low probability state", two stages, a desert stage or a city stage, may be selected (step 3012 in FIG. 42). On the other hand, in the "high probability state", four stages, a desert stage, a city stage, a conference room stage, and a cave stage, can be selected (step 3008 in FIG. 42). In other words, four stay stages can be selected in the "advantageous section", while two stay stages can be selected in the "normal section", and can be selected in the "normal section". The stay stage of 2 can also be selected in the "advantageous section". With this configuration, even in the "normal section" where you cannot expect to win the AT lottery, by selecting the stay stage that can be the stay stage in the "advantageous section", you will not get bored even in the "normal section". You can advance the game machine. In addition, when shifting from the "high probability state" to the "low probability state", that is, when the "advantageous section" becomes the "normal section", the "normal section" is selected at the stage of the "advantageous section". By selecting the production stage, it is difficult for the player to determine the transition from the "advantageous section" to the "normal section", and the game can be continued while maintaining a sense of expectation.

A part of the production stage selected in the "normal section" overlaps with the production stage selected in the "advantageous section" (a production stage that can be selected in the "normal section" but is not selected in the "advantageous section". You may have).

In addition, the stay stage determination table used when the number of high-securing obstacle games is 4 or more is different from the stay stage determination table used when the number of high-securing obstacle games is 3 or less, and the number of high-securing obstacle games is increased. When the number of games decreases (3 games or less), do not shift to a stay stage with high expectations, which is an "advantageous section" than the current stay stage (for example, desert stage → conference room stage). By configuring it, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged because the "normal section" is reached with a small number of games even though the stage has shifted to a stay stage with higher expectations. The stay stages are in the order of "desert stage, town stage, cave stage, conference room stage" from those with low expectations (difficult to select in "advantageous section"), which are "advantageous sections".

In addition, the composition of the stay stage is not limited to that of this example, and what can be suggested by the stay stage is won in the expectation degree which is an "advantageous section", the expectation degree which has won the AT lottery, and the BB. It may be configured to suggest a certain degree of expectation. As an example, the stay stage can be changed in the game in which the BB role or the rare role is won (the case where the AT lottery is won by the BB role and the case where the AT lottery is not executed by winning the single rare role. (Including), the expectations of winning the AT lottery will differ depending on the stage of stay that has been transferred, and the expectations will be in the order of "desert stage, city stage, cave stage, conference room stage". It is also possible to configure the stage so that the expectation of winning the BB role differs depending on the stage of stay that has been transferred, and configure the stage in the order of "desert stage, town stage, cave stage, conference room stage" in ascending order of expectation. Good (for example, when moving to the conference room stage, it is definite that the BB internal winning or the AT lottery has been won, etc.).

Next, FIG. 45 is a subroutine showing the effect determination process during AT, which is called and executed in the process of step 3100 of FIG. 42. First, in step 3102, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the number of AT remaining games is 3 games or less. In the case of Yes in step 3102, in step 3104, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not it is the AT final game. In the case of Yes in step 3104, in step 3106, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the continuous lottery has been won. In the case of Yes in step 3106, in step 3108, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S continuously incites the effect related to the game (success) (AT continues to set the initial value in the AT counter M60, in other words. Then, it is definite that the initial value is set in the AT counter M60 continuously for the AT (the effect of notifying that the state related to the AT of the next game is the "AT in progress state") or the AT continuation fanning effect (failure). Instead, the state related to the AT of the next game is determined to be the "AT in progress state" or the "recoverable / non-recoverable effect effect state"), and the process proceeds to step 3126. Here, when the continuous lottery is won, the AT continuous fanning effect (success) and the AT continuous fanning effect (failure) are determined at a ratio of 4: 1. That is, in this embodiment, even if the continuous lottery is won, the AT continuous fanning effect (failure) may be executed, and in such a case, it corresponds to the first game of the next set. In the next game to be played, the revival effect (success) will be executed, and the player is configured to feel as if he / she has won the revival lottery (actually, he / she has won the continuous lottery, and the main control board M. As the control on the side, it is the same as when the AT continuous fanning effect (success) is executed). With this configuration, it is rare to win the revival lottery in the "state for revival possibility production", but {win the lottery of 2320/65536 (in the case of setting 1) in one game}, and win the continuous production. By configuring the game so that the resurrection effect (success) can be executed even if the resurrection effect is executed, the ratio of the resurrection effect (success) being executed when the resurrection effect is executed can be increased, and the player expects the resurrection effect. You can enhance the feeling.

Further, in the case of No in step 3106, in step 3110, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the effect related to the game as the AT continuation fanning effect (failure), and proceeds to step 3126. Further, in the case of No in step 3104, in step 3112, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the effect related to the game to be the AT final stage effect, and proceeds to step 3126. Further, in the case of No in step 3102, in step 3114, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not it is the next game in which the AT continuous fanning effect (failure) is executed. In the case of Yes in step 3114, in step 3116, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S revives the effect related to the game (success) (similar to the resurrection effect (success) executed in the "state for effect of resurrection"). In this process, it is determined that the “AT in progress” has been continued), and the process proceeds to step 3126. On the other hand, even if No in step 3114, the process proceeds to step 3126.

Next, in step 3126, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the number of AT games has been added in the game. In the case of Yes in step 3126, in step 3028, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is an effect of adding an effect related to the game (an effect of notifying that the number of remaining AT games has been added, for example, "+50 GET" or the like. ), And the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2300). On the other hand, if No in step 3126, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the effect related to the game to be an effect during AT (an effect executed during AT such as "AT in progress"), and the next process ( The process proceeds to step 2300).

Next, FIG. 46 is a subroutine showing a resurrection possibility effect determination process that is called and executed in the process of step 3150 of FIG. 42. First, in step 3152, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the revival lottery has been won. In the case of Yes in step 3152, in step 3154, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S revives the effect related to the game (success) (the effect is the same as the effect executed in step 3116 described above. It is a production to notify that the revival lottery has been won in the "recovery availability production state", and in the next game, it will shift to the "AT in progress state" and the initial value will be set in the AT counter M60). The determination is made, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2300). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3152, in step 3156, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S did not win the revival lottery in the revival effect (failure) of the effect related to the game. It is an effect to notify the fact, and it is decided that the game will shift to the "low probability state" in the next game), and the game will move to the next process (process of step 2300).

As mentioned above, the "recoverable / non-recoverable state" is also an advantageous section, that is, the continuous lottery is won in the AT final game (the final game of the "AT in progress") which is the "advantageous section". Even if it does not exist, the player confirms whether or not the advantageous section indicator YH is lit because it is configured to extend the "advantageous section" even in the next game "state for effect of resurrection". It becomes difficult to determine whether or not the revival production is successful, and the result of the revival production will be paid attention to. Further, as described above, the execution mode of the lottery regarding AT is different between the "AT in progress state" and the "recoverable / non-recoverable effect state". That is, the execution mode of the lottery related to AT is different between the next game that wins the continuous lottery in which the resurrection effect (success) is executed and the game that wins the resurrection lottery in which the resurrection effect (success) is executed. ..

In addition, in this embodiment, in the next game in which the AT in-progress state is completed, one game is shifted to the "revival possibility production state", and the revival lottery is executed in the "revival possibility production state". By doing so, both the execution game of the resurrection effect (success) and the execution game of the resurrection effect (failure) are set as "advantageous sections", that is, by configuring the advantageous section indicator YH to be turned on, the effect of the effect is produced. Although it was prevented that it could be determined whether or not the AT was terminated without confirming the result, such a configuration may be configured as follows.
(1) The state related to AT is set to "AT in progress" even in one game in which the resurrection lottery is executed, the resurrection flag is turned on in one game in which the resurrection lottery is executed, and the resurrection in the game before the game in which the resurrection lottery is executed. By turning off the flag, a different lottery mode regarding AT is obtained.
(2) It is configured not to execute the revival lottery, and the control on the main control board M side is configured to determine whether or not the "AT in progress state" ends depending on whether or not the continuous lottery is won. The execution timing of the continuous lottery is set to a game before the AT final game (one game before the AT final game, the first game of the running set, etc.). With such a configuration, the revival effect (success) and the revival effect (failure) can be executed as the effect on the sub-control board S side in the AT final game. As an example of the production, "Game before the final AT game: AT continuation fanning production (success) → AT final game: Production to the effect that the next set of AT will start", "Game before the AT final game: AT continuation fanning" Direction (continue to the next game) → AT final game: AT continuation fanning production (success) "," Game before AT final game: AT continuation fanning production (failure) → AT final game: resurrection production (success) "," AT It may be configured to execute the game before the final game: AT continuation fanning effect (failure) → AT final game: resurrection effect (failure). That is, the main control board M side determines whether or not the "AT in progress state" continues (the next set is executed) depending on whether or not the continuous lottery is won, and the effect on the sub control board S side is It may be configured to execute the AT continuous fanning effect or the revival effect.
(3) In a game in which a resurrection effect (success) is executed, the effect is executed in the same manner as the resurrection effect (failure) until a predetermined timing, and the effect is that the resurrection effect (success) is performed from the predetermined timing. That is, it may be configured to notify the player that the AT will continue at the predetermined timing. In the case of such a configuration, the predetermined timing is
(1) This is the bet button operation timing (game medal insertion timing) related to the game in which the revival effect (success) is executed, and can be executed when the continuous lottery is won.
(2) It is the start lever operation timing related to the game in which the revival effect (success) is executed, and when the start lever operation timing is reached, the effect having the same effect mode as the revival effect (defeat) is not executed.
(3) Timing at which the stop button, which is the first stop related to the game in which the revival effect (success) is executed, is pressed (timing when the first stop is turned on),
(4) Timing when the stop button, which is the first stop related to the game in which the revival effect (success) is executed, is pressed and then the stop button is released (timing when the first stop is turned on → off),
(5) Timing at which the stop button, which is the second stop related to the game in which the revival effect (success) is executed, is pressed (timing when the second stop is turned on),
(6) Timing when the stop button, which is the second stop related to the game in which the revival effect (success) is executed, is pressed and then the stop button is released (timing when the second stop is turned on → off),
(7) Timing at which the stop button, which is the third stop related to the game in which the revival effect (success) is executed, is pressed (timing when the third stop is turned on),
(8) Timing when the stop button, which is the third stop related to the game in which the revival effect (success) is executed, is pressed and then the stop button is released (timing when the third stop is turned on → off),
Etc.
(9) Bet button operation timing (game medal insertion timing) related to the next game of the game in which the revival effect (success) is executed,
(10) Start lever operation timing related to the next game of the game in which the revival effect (success) is executed,
And so on. In addition, when it is configured to determine which of the various timings (1) to (10) to be used by lottery, after the timing when the stop button, which is the first stop, is pressed, is used. Since the advantageous section indicator YH is continuously lit even when neither the continuous lottery nor the revival lottery is won, the player presses the stop button which is the third stop and then the stop button. You can play the game with the expectation that the AT will continue until the timing when you release the game or the start lever operation timing related to the next game in which the revival effect is executed.

<Processing when operating the start lever>
Next, FIG. 47 is a subroutine showing a process during start lever operation that is called and executed in the process of step 2300 of FIG.

Next, in step 2302, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the state related to AT is the AT-in-progress state. In the case of Yes in step 2302, in other words, when the state related to AT is the AT-in-AT state, in step 2350, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads and executes the AT-in-time process when the start lever is operated, which will be described later. , Move to the next process (process of step 2110).

Next, in the case of No in step 2302, in other words, if the state related to AT is not in the AT state, in step 2304, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the state related to AT is a special precursor state. Is determined. In the case of Yes in step 2304, in other words, when the state related to AT is the specialization precursor state, in step 2400, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads out the specialization precursor processing at the time of starting lever operation, which will be described later. It is executed and moved to the next process (process of step 2110).

Next, in the case of No in step 2304, in other words, when the state related to AT is not the "specialization precursor state", in step 2306, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has the state related to AT "additional specialization state". It is determined whether or not it is. In the case of Yes in step 2306, in other words, when the state related to AT is the "addition specialization state", in step 2450, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S performs the addition specialization process when the start lever is operated, which will be described later. It is read and executed, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2110).

Next, in the case of No in step 2306, in other words, when the state related to AT is not the “additional specialization state”, in step 2307, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S changes the state related to AT to “inside the advantageous BB”. It is determined whether or not it is a "game". In the case of Yes in step 2307, in other words, when the state related to AT is "advantageous BB internal intermediate game", in step 2700, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is a subroutine of advantageous BB internal intermediate processing when the start lever is operated. Is called and executed, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2110).

In the case of No in step 2307, in other words, if the state related to AT is not "advantageous BB internal middle game", in step 2308, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is whether or not the RT state is "RT1". To judge. In the case of Yes in step 2308, in other words, when the RT state is "RT1", in step 2310, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has no push order navigation (push order navigation is the state related to AT). It is a state related to AT that does not occur, and it is determined whether or not it is a "low probability state", a "normal BB internal game", a "normal BB state", or the like). In the case of Yes in step 2310, in other words, when the state related to AT is no push order navigation, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines in step 2312 whether or not the avoidance command has been received. As described above, the sub-control board S side receives the reverse push instruction command, the reverse push avoidance command, the forward push instruction command, and the forward push avoidance command. When the AT addition lottery is won, the main control board M side sends a command related to the AT addition lottery winning and the number of AT addition games to the sub control board S side, and the sub control board S side receives the command. In addition, the sub-control board S side may be configured to determine the execution timing and the effect mode of the effect related to the push order navigation.

In the case of Yes in step 2312, in other words, when the avoidance command is received, in step 2314, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays an image for avoiding establishment as a push order navigation display in the first numerical display mode group. Is displayed on the effect display device S40, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2110). As described above, in the present embodiment, the number of games has elapsed from the situation of "RT1" and "AT in progress", and the AT counter value becomes 0, so that the situation shifts to "RT1" and "low probability state". In that case (before the replay 04 is stopped and displayed), if the reverse push white 7 match replay or the forward push black 7 match replay is won, the number of AT games will not be added, so white seven or black seven will be selected. It is configured to navigate the push order that is not in a straight line. In addition, when the number of games elapses from the situation of "RT1" and "AT in progress" and the AT counter value becomes 0, the game shifts to "RT1" and "low probability state", it is still an "advantageous section". In the game in which the push order bell is won, the push order navigation can be generated, but in the game in which the push order replay is won, the push order navigation may not occur.

When the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is No in step 2308, No in step 2310, and No in step 2312, the CPUSC displays the effect image and the background image in step 2316 based on the state related to AT, and then displays the effect image and the background image. (Processing in step 2110).

<Processing during AT when operating the start lever>
Next, FIG. 48 is a subroutine showing a process during AT at the time of start lever operation, which is called and executed in the process of step 2350 of FIG.

Next, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads information about the condition device related to the game in step 2352, confirms the winning / replay winning information related to the game in step 2354, and the instruction number in step 2356. Check the command related to. In this way, in a state related to AT where push order navigation such as "AT in progress" can be executed, the main control board M sends a command related to winning / replay winning information to the sub control board S side, and "low". When sending the production group number in a state related to AT where push order navigation such as "probability state" is not executed (also applicable when the game section is "normal section"), the command related to the instruction number is not sent. good. Furthermore, the main control board M transmits the effect group number to the effect group number and the instruction number in the same manner as in the state related to the AT in which the push order navigation is not executed even if the state is related to the AT in which the push order navigation can be executed. Based on the command, the push order bell (or push order replay) may be won, and the correct push order may be grasped. For example, the push order navigation display when the push order bell is executed and the push order navigation display of the push order replay game are displayed in the same display mode group (for example, the push order is notified by a number and the display color related to the number is the same. ) Can be applied when it is configured to be displayed. Further, in such a configuration, the effect display device S40 is configured to display an effect image (for example, a character image) different from the push order navigation display when the push order navigation is executed, and the push order bell is used. It may be configured to display different production images when the push order navigation is executed and when the push order navigation related to the push order replay is executed.

Next, in step 2358, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the condition device of the game is a push order bell. Here, the push order bell is one of the above-mentioned winning-A1 to winning-A6.

In the case of Yes in step 2358, in other words, when the condition device of the game is a push order bell, in step 2360, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has 6 selections of the push order bell as the push order navigation display. An image suggesting the correct pressing order of the pressing order of is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the first numerical display mode group. The pressing order is information in which each of the first stop button, the second stop button, and the third stop button is associated with the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, if you win the prize-A1 which is the push order bell, the number suggesting the push order corresponding to the push order "left → middle → right" that can obtain the maximum number of payouts is circled. Display in the display mode.

Next, if No in step 2358, in other words, if the condition device of the game is not a push order bell, in step 2362, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines that the condition device of the game is a push order replay. It is determined whether or not it is. Here, the push order re-game is one of the re-game-D1 to D3.

In the case of Yes in step 2362, in other words, when the condition device of the game is the push order replay, in step 2364, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the push order navigation as the push order replay. An image suggesting the correct pressing order among the three-choice pressing order is displayed on the effect display device S40. Here, since there are three push orders, the information is such that the first stop button corresponds to any of the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, when the first stop button is the left stop button D41, only the number 1 is displayed as the push order navigation display.

In the case of No in step 2362, in other words, when the condition device of the game is a push order replay, in step 2366, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the avoidance command has been received. .. Here, the forward push avoidance command and the reverse push avoidance command are collectively referred to as an avoidance command. In the case of Yes in step 2366, in other words, when the avoidance command is received, in step 2368, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the image for avoiding establishment as the push order navigation display in the first numerical display mode. It is displayed on the effect display device S40 as a group.

Next, if No in step 2366, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the process of step 2360, 2364 or 2368 described above, and then displays the background image during AT on the effect display device S40 in step 2370.

Next, in step 2372, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the number of AT remaining games is 3 games or less. In the case of Yes in step 2372, in other words, when the number of AT remaining games is 3 games or less, in step S2374, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the number of AT remaining games in display mode B (display mode described later). It is displayed on the effect display device S40 in a display mode that is less conspicuous than A).

Next, in step 2376, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the forward push instruction command has been received. In the case of Yes in step 2376, in other words, when a forward push instruction command is received, in step 2378, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays an image for avoiding establishment as a push order navigation display. It is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the numerical display mode group.

In the case of No in step 2376, or when the process of step 2378 is executed, in step 2380, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the reverse push instruction command has been received. In the case of Yes in step 2380, in other words, when the reverse push instruction command is received, in step 2382, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays an image for avoiding establishment as a push order navigation display. It is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the numerical display mode group.

The CPUSC of the sub-control board S shifts to the next process (process of step 2110) in the case of No in step 2380 or when the process of step 2382 is executed.

In the case of No in step 2372, in other words, when the number of AT remaining games is 4 or more, in step S2384, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the number of AT remaining games in the display mode A (the above-mentioned display mode). It is displayed on the effect display device S40 in a display mode that is more conspicuous than B). Here, if there are four or more games, the display mode A is displayed, and if there are three games or less, the display mode B is displayed.

Next, in step 2386, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the forward push instruction command has been received. In the case of Yes in step 2386, in other words, when the forward push instruction command is received, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S corresponds to "left → middle → right" as the push order navigation display in step 2388. An image suggesting the order of pressing is displayed on the effect display device S40 as an image of an arrow.

In step 2386, if No, or if the process of step 2388 is executed, in step 2390, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the reverse push instruction command has been received. In the case of Yes in step 2390, in other words, when the reverse push instruction command is received, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S corresponds to "right → middle → left" as the push order navigation display in step 2392. An image suggesting the order of pressing is displayed on the effect display device S40 as an image of an arrow.

The CPUSC of the sub-control board S shifts to the next process (process of step 2110) in the case of No in step 2390 or when the process of step 2392 is executed. In this way, when the number of remaining AT games is small, in other words, when the display of the number of remaining AT games is displayed in the display mode B, which is a display mode that is more conspicuous than the display mode A, the forward push instruction command or the reverse Even if a push instruction command is received, the effect of displaying "Aim for 7!" Along with the image of the arrow is not executed, and the white seven and black seven do not stop and display on the invalid line. It is configured to execute the push order navigation. With this configuration, when the number of AT remaining games is small, the number of AT remaining games is displayed in the display mode B, which is a display mode that encourages the player to have a small number of AT remaining games. Can be configured so as not to interfere with the visibility of the display of the number of remaining AT games in the display mode B by displaying an arrow image or "Aim for 7!". Similarly, in a situation where the number of remaining AT games displayed on the effect display device S40 is small, a continuous effect (for example, a state related to AT in which push order navigation can be executed) is continued. , Battle effect) is configured so that the arrow image and "Aim for 7!" Are not displayed during the battle effect so as not to interfere with the visibility of the battle effect. be able to. Further, by configuring in this way, even when the number of remaining AT games in the effect display device S40 becomes 0 and it is displayed that the battle effect is defeated and the "AT in progress state" ends, the battle effect is in progress. If a forward push instruction command or a reverse push instruction command has been received, the forward push instruction command or the reverse push command is performed at the operation timing of the bet button D220 after the message that "AT in progress" is terminated is displayed. Notify the number of AT additional games based on the instruction command (based on the winning of forward push black 7 replay or reverse push white 7 replay), that is, notify that the number of AT games has been added to the game that won the AT additional lottery. Instead, it can be configured to notify that the number of AT games has been added at a subsequent timing, and the fun of the game is enhanced.

<Specialized precursor processing when operating the start lever>
Next, FIG. 49 is a subroutine showing a special precursor process at the time of start lever operation, which is called and executed in the process of step 2400 of FIG.

Next, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads the information about the condition device related to the game in step 2402, confirms the winning / replay winning information related to the game in step 2404, and the instruction number in step 2406. Check the command related to. In this way, in a state related to AT where push order navigation such as "AT in progress" can be executed, the main control board M sends a command related to winning / replay winning information to the sub control board S side, and "low". When sending the production group number in a state related to AT where push order navigation such as "probability state" is not executed (also applicable when the game section is "normal section"), the command related to the instruction number is not sent. good. Furthermore, the main control board M transmits the effect group number to the effect group number and the instruction number in the same manner as in the state related to the AT in which the push order navigation is not executed even if the state is related to the AT in which the push order navigation can be executed. Based on the command, the push order bell (or push order replay) may be won, and the correct push order may be grasped.

Next, in step 2408, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the condition device of the game is a push order bell. Here, the push order bell is one of the above-mentioned winning-A1 to winning-A6.

In the case of Yes in step 2408, in other words, when the condition device of the game is a push order bell, in step 2410, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has 6 selections of the push order bell as the push order navigation display. An image suggesting the correct pressing order of the pressing order of is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the second numerical display mode group. The pressing order is information in which each of the first stop button, the second stop button, and the third stop button is associated with the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, if you win the prize-A2, which is the push order bell, a number indicating the push order corresponding to the push order "left → right → middle" that can obtain the maximum number of payouts is enclosed in a star. Display in the display mode. In the first numerical display mode group and the second numerical display mode group described above, the numerical values suggesting the push order may be displayed in different display mode groups. For example, the first numerical display mode group is a numerical value. Can be displayed in blue, and the second number display mode group can display numbers in red and the like.

Next, in the case of No in step 2408, in other words, when the condition device of the game is not the push order bell, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is in step 2412, and the condition device of the game is the push order replay. It is determined whether or not it is. Here, the push order re-game is one of the re-game-D1 to D3.

In the case of Yes in step 2412, in other words, if the condition device of the game is a push order replay, in step 2414, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the push order navigation as a push order replay. An image suggesting the correct pressing order among the three-choice pressing order is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the second numerical display mode group. Here, since there are three push orders, the information is such that the first stop button corresponds to any of the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, when the first stop button is the left stop button D41 as the correct push order, the number "1" is displayed on the lower left side from the center of the effect display device S40, and the first stop button is the middle stop button D42. In the case of, the number "1" is displayed on the lower right side of the center of the effect display device S40, and when the first stop button is the right stop button D43, it is on the lower right side of the center of the effect display device S40. The number "1" is displayed as a push order navigation display. In other words, the push order information is displayed at a position close to the stop button D40 corresponding to the reel to be stopped in the effect display device S40.

Next, in the case of No in step 2412, in other words, if the condition device of the game is not a push order replay, in step 2416, whether or not the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has received the forward push instruction command. To judge. In the case of Yes in step 2416, in other words, when the forward push instruction command is received, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S corresponds to "left → middle → right" as the push order navigation display in step 2418. An image suggesting the pressing order is displayed on the effect display device S40 as an image of an arrow.

Next, in the case of No in step 2416, in other words, if the forward push instruction command has not been received, in step 2420, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the reverse push instruction command has been received. to decide. In the case of Yes in step 2420, in other words, when the reverse push instruction command is received, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S corresponds to "right-> middle-> left" as the push order navigation display in step 2422. An image suggesting the pressing order is displayed on the effect display device S40 as an image of an arrow.

Next, in the case of No in step 2420, in other words, if the reverse push instruction command has not been received, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines in step 2424 whether or not the avoidance command has been received. .. Here, the forward push avoidance command and the reverse push avoidance command are collectively referred to as an avoidance command. In the case of Yes in step 2424, in other words, when the avoidance command is received, in step 2426, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays an image for avoiding establishment as a push order navigation display in the second numerical display mode. It is displayed on the effect display device S40 as a group.

Next, when the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the processes of steps 2410, 2414, 2418, 2422, and 2426, or when No in step 2424, the background image during AT is displayed in step 2428. It is displayed on the device S40, and in step S2430, the number of remaining AT games is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the display mode A, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2110).

<Special processing for adding when operating the start lever>
Next, FIG. 50 is a subroutine showing the addition specialization process at the time of start lever operation, which is called and executed in the process of step 2450 of FIG. 47.

Next, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads information about the condition device related to the game in step 2452, confirms the winning / replay winning information related to the game in step 2454, and the instruction number in step 2456. Check the command related to. In this way, in a state related to AT where push order navigation such as "AT in progress" can be executed, the main control board M sends a command related to winning / replay winning information to the sub control board S side, and "low". When sending the production group number in a state related to AT where push order navigation such as "probability state" is not executed (also applicable when the game section is "normal section"), the command related to the instruction number is not sent. good. Furthermore, the main control board M transmits the effect group number to the effect group number and the instruction number in the same manner as in the state related to the AT in which the push order navigation is not executed even if the state is related to the AT in which the push order navigation can be executed. Based on the command, the push order bell (or push order replay) may be won, and the correct push order may be grasped.

Next, in step 2458, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the condition device of the game is a push order bell or a common bell. Here, the push order bell is one of the above-mentioned winning-A1 to winning-A6 and winning-B.

In the case of Yes in step 2458, in other words, if the condition device of the game is a push order bell or a common bell, in step 2460, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the push order bell as a push order navigation display. An image suggesting the correct pressing order among the six-choice pressing order is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the first numerical display mode group. The pressing order is information in which each of the first stop button, the second stop button, and the third stop button is associated with the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, if you win the prize-A4, which is the push order bell, the numbers that suggest the push order corresponding to the push order "right → left → middle" that can obtain the maximum number of payouts are surrounded by a star. It is displayed in the display mode. In the first numerical display mode group and the second numerical display mode group described above, the numerical values suggesting the push order may be displayed in different display mode groups. For example, the first numerical display mode group is a numerical value. Can be displayed in blue, and the second number display mode group can display numbers in red and the like.

Next, if No in step 2458 described above, in other words, if the condition device of the game is neither a push order bell nor a common bell, in step 2462, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is the condition of the game. The device determines whether or not it is a push order replay. Here, the push order re-game is one of the re-game-D1 to D3.

In the case of Yes in step 2462, in other words, when the condition device of the game is the push order replay, in step 2464, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the push order navigation as the push order replay. An image suggesting the correct pressing order among the three-choice pressing order is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the first numerical display mode group. Here, since there are three push orders, the information is such that the first stop button corresponds to any of the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, when the first stop button is the left stop button D41 as the correct push order, the number "1" is displayed on the lower left side from the center of the effect display device S40, and the first stop button is the middle stop button D42. In the case of, the number "1" is displayed on the lower right side of the center of the effect display device S40, and when the first stop button is the right stop button D43, it is on the lower right side of the center of the effect display device S40. The number "1" is displayed as a push order navigation display. In other words, the push order information is displayed at a position close to the stop switch corresponding to the reel to be stopped.

Next, if No in step 2462 described above, in other words, if the condition device of the game is not a push order replay, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S received the forward push instruction command in step 2466. Judge whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 2466, in other words, when the forward push instruction command is received, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S corresponds to "left → middle → right" as the push order navigation display in step 2468. An image suggesting the pressing order is displayed on the effect display device S40 as an image of an arrow. That is, since the pressing order is forward pressing, the first stop button, the second stop button, and the third stop button are, in order, the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43, from left to right. The image of the arrow pointing toward can suggest the push order.

Next, in the case of No in step 2466 described above, in other words, if the forward push instruction command has not been received, in step 2470, whether or not the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has received the reverse push instruction command. Is determined. In the case of Yes in step 2470, in other words, when the reverse push instruction command is received, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S corresponds to "right-> middle-> left" as the push order navigation display in step 2472. An image suggesting the pressing order is displayed on the effect display device S40 as an image of an arrow. That is, since the pressing order is reverse pressing, the first stop button, the second stop button, and the third stop button are, in order, a right stop button D43, a middle stop button D42, and a left stop button D41, from right to left. The image of the arrow pointing toward can suggest the push order.

Next, in the case of No in step 2470 described above, in other words, if the reverse push instruction command has not been received, in step 2474, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the avoidance command has been received. judge. In the case of Yes in step 2474, in other words, when the avoidance command is received, in step 2476, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the image for avoiding establishment as the push order navigation display in the first numerical display mode. It is displayed on the effect display device S40 as a group. Here, the avoidance command is a general term for both the forward push avoidance command and the reverse push avoidance command. Therefore, the process of step 2476 is executed regardless of whether the forward push avoidance command is received or the reverse push avoidance command is received. For example, when a forward push avoidance command is received, the number "1" is displayed on the lower right side of the center of the effect display device S40 in order to avoid the forward push "left → middle → right". Information as if the one stop button is the right stop button D43 is displayed as a push order navigation display.

Next, when the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the above-mentioned processes of steps 2460, 2464, 2468, 2472, and 2476, or when No in 2474, the background image during AT is displayed in step 2480. It is displayed on the device S40, and in step 2482, the number of AT remaining games is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the display mode A, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2110).

<Advantageous BB internal processing when operating the start lever>
Next, FIG. 51 is a subroutine showing the internal processing of the advantageous BB at the time of starting lever operation, which is called and executed in the processing of step 2700 of FIG.

Next, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads information about the condition device related to the game in step 2702, confirms the winning / replay winning information related to the game in step 2704, and in step 2706, the instruction number. Check the command related to. In this way, in a state related to AT where push order navigation such as "AT in progress" can be executed, the main control board M sends a command related to winning / replay winning information to the sub control board S side, and "low". When sending the production group number in a state related to AT where push order navigation such as "probability state" is not executed (also applicable when the game section is "normal section"), the command related to the instruction number is not sent. good. Furthermore, the main control board M transmits the effect group number to the effect group number and the instruction number in the same manner as in the state related to the AT in which the push order navigation is not executed even if the state is related to the AT in which the push order navigation can be executed. Based on the command, the push order bell (or push order replay) may be won, and the correct push order may be grasped.

Next, in step 2708, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a predetermined game (5 games) has elapsed since the transition to the advantageous BB internal middle game. In the case of Yes in step 2708, in other words, if a predetermined game (5 games) has not elapsed since the transition to the advantageous BB internal middle game, in step 2710, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is the game. Condition The device determines whether it is a push order bell or a common bell. Here, the push order bell is one of the above-mentioned winning-A1 to winning-A6 and winning-B.

In the case of Yes in step 2710, in other words, if the condition device of the game is a push order bell or a common bell, in step 2712, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the push order bell as a push order navigation display. An image suggesting the correct pressing order among the six-choice pressing order is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the first numerical display mode group. The pressing order is information in which each of the first stop button, the second stop button, and the third stop button is associated with the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, if you win the prize-A4, which is the push order bell, the numbers that suggest the push order corresponding to the push order "right → left → middle" that can obtain the maximum number of payouts are surrounded by a star. It is displayed in the display mode. In the first numerical display mode group and the second numerical display mode group described above, the numerical values suggesting the push order may be displayed in different display mode groups. For example, the first numerical display mode group is a numerical value. Can be displayed in blue, and the second number display mode group can display numbers in red and the like.

Next, if No in step 2710 described above, in other words, if the condition device of the game is neither a push order bell nor a common bell, in step 2714, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is the condition of the game. The device determines whether or not it is a push order replay. Here, the push order re-game is one of the re-game-D1 to D3.

In the case of Yes in step 2714, in other words, if the condition device of the game is a push order replay, in step 2716, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the push order navigation as a push order replay. An image suggesting the correct pressing order among the three-choice pressing order is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the first numerical display mode group. Here, since there are three push orders, the information is such that the first stop button corresponds to any of the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, when the first stop button is the left stop button D41 as the correct push order, the number "1" is displayed on the lower left side from the center of the effect display device S40, and the first stop button is the middle stop button D42. In the case of, the number "1" is displayed on the lower right side of the center of the effect display device S40, and when the first stop button is the right stop button D43, it is on the lower right side of the center of the effect display device S40. The number "1" is displayed as a push order navigation display. In other words, the push order information is displayed at a position close to the stop switch corresponding to the reel to be stopped.

Next, in the case of No in step 2714 described above, in other words, when the condition device of the game is not a push order replay, in step 2718, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S received a command related to 7 replays. Judge whether or not. Here, the forward push instruction command, the reverse push instruction command, the forward push avoidance command, and the reverse push avoidance command are collectively referred to as a 7 replay command. In the case of Yes in step 2718, in other words, when a command related to 7 replays is received, in step 2720, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays an image for avoiding establishment as a push order navigation display as the first number. It is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the display mode group.

Next, when the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the process of steps 2712, 2716, and 2720 described above, or when No in step 2718, the background image during AT is displayed on the effect display device S40 in step 2722. The display is displayed, and in step S2724, the number of AT remaining games is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the display mode A, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2110).

In the case of No in step 2708, in other words, when a predetermined game (5 games) has elapsed after shifting to the advantageous BB internal middle game, in step 2726, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is the effect display device S40. At, it is notified that the BB has been won (in this process, the push order navigation is not displayed), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2110).

<Processing at the time of receiving the 1st body stop>
Next, FIG. 52 is a subroutine showing the first processing at the time of receiving the body stop, which is called and executed in the processing of step 2500 in FIG.

Next, in step 2502, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the push order navigation is being displayed in the game. In the case of Yes in step 2502, in other words, when the push order navigation is being displayed, in step 2504, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has an operation of the stop button based on the correct push order as the first stop. Judge whether or not.

Next, in the case of Yes in step 2504, in other words, if there is an operation of the stop button based on the correct pressing order as the first stop, in step 2506, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is displayed in the pressing order navigation display. The display related to the first stop is erased, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2110).

Next, in the case of No in step 2504, in other words, if there is no operation of the stop button based on the correct pressing order as the first stop, in step 2508, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is forward-pressed navigation or reverse. It is determined whether or not the push order navigation related to the push navigation is being displayed. Here, 7 replays are a general term for forward-push black 7-match replays and reverse-push white 7-match replays. In step 2508, in the case of Yes, in step 2510, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S darkens the push order navigation (continues to be darkened in the game), and moves to the next process (process of step 2110). Migrate.

If No in step 2508, in other words, if the push order navigation related to 7 replays is not being displayed, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S erases all the push order navigation displays in step 2512, and the push order fails. The effect is executed, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2110).

<Processing at the time of receiving the second body stop>
Next, FIG. 53 is a subroutine showing the second processing at the time of receiving the body stop, which is called and executed in the processing of step 2550 of FIG.

Next, in step 2552, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the push order navigation is being displayed in the game. In the case of Yes in step 2552, in other words, when the push order navigation is being displayed, in step 2554, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the condition device related to the game is the push order bell. judge. In the case of Yes in step 2554, in other words, when the condition device related to the game is a push order bell, in step 2556, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is a stop button based on the correct push order as the second stop. Determine if there is an operation.

Next, in the case of Yes in step 2556, in other words, if there is an operation of the stop button based on the correct pressing order as the second stop, in step 2558, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is the second stop in the pressing order navigation display. 2 The display related to the stop is erased, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2110).

Next, in the case of No in step 2556, in other words, if there is no operation of the stop button based on the correct pressing order as the second stop, in step 2560, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays all the pressing order navigation displays. It is erased, the push order failure effect is executed, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2110).

Next, if No in step 2552, in other words, if the push order navigation is not displayed, or if No in step 2554, in other words, if the condition device related to the game is not a push order bell, immediately. , Move to the next process (process of step 2110).

<3rd production-related decision processing when the body is stopped>
Next, FIG. 54 is a subroutine showing the third effect-related determination process at the time of body stop, which is called and executed in the process of step 3200 of FIG.

Next, in step 3202, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the BB combination has won a prize. In the case of Yes in step 3202, in other words, if the BB combination wins, in step 3204, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S wins during non-AT (“low probability state” or “high probability state”). It is determined whether or not it is a BB role. In the case of Yes in step 3204, in other words, in the case of the BB winning combination during non-AT, in step 3206, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S refers to the non-AT BB start effect determination table and AT of the game. Based on the state and the BB combination, the BB start effect (the effect executed when the BB combination is won) is determined and executed, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2600).

Next, in the case of No in step 3204, in other words, in the BB role that was won during AT (“AT in progress”, “additional specialization state”, “specialization preparation state”, or “recoverable / non-recoverable production state”). If there is, in step 3208, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S refers to the BB start effect determination table during AT, determines and executes the BB start effect based on the AT-related state and the BB combination of the game, and next The process shifts to the process (process of step 2600).

Next, in the case of No in step 3202, in other words, if the BB combination does not win, in step 3210, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines and executes the effect based on the effect executed in the game. The process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2600).

The non-AT BB start effect determination table shown on the lower left of FIG. 54 is a table for determining the effect at the start time of the BB in the non-AT state. The non-AT BB start effect determination table is a table for defining the relationship between the type of BB combination, the state related to AT, the type of BB start effect, and the probability (distribution). There are two types of BB combinations: BB with a setting difference (type 1 BB-B) and BB without a setting difference (type 1 BB-A and type 1 BB-C). There are two types of states related to AT: "normal BB internal medium game" and "advantageous BB internal medium game". There are three types of BB start production: normal production, high-expectation production, and premier production. It should be noted that, depending on the type of BB start effect in the BB won during non-AT, the degree of expectation to shift to the "AT in progress state" after the end of BB is configured to differ, and the one with the lowest degree of expectation is configured to be "normal effect". → High expectations production → Premier production ”.

When the BB combination is a BB (type 1 BB-B) with a setting difference and the state related to the AT of the game is a normal BB internal middle game, the probability that the BB start effect will be a normal effect is 179/256. .. When the BB role is BB (Type 1 BB-B) with a setting difference and the state related to the AT of the game is "normal BB internal medium game", the probability that the BB start effect will be a high expectation effect is 77. / 256. When the BB role is BB (Type 1 BB-B) with a setting difference and the state related to the AT of the game is "normal BB internal medium game", the probability that the BB start effect will be the premier effect is 0/256. Is.

When the BB role is BB (Type 1 BB-B) with a setting difference and the state related to the AT of the game is "advantageous BB internal middle game", the probability that the BB start effect will be a normal effect is 179/256. Is. When the BB role is BB (Type 1 BB-B) with a setting difference and the state related to the AT of the game is "advantageous BB internal middle game", the probability that the BB start effect will be a high expectation effect is 77. / 256. When the BB role is BB (Type 1 BB-B) with a setting difference and the state related to the AT of the game is "advantageous BB internal middle game", the probability that the BB start effect will be the premier effect is 0/256. Is.

When the BB combination is BB (Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C) with no setting difference and the state related to the AT of the game is "normal BB internal medium game", the BB start effect is the normal effect. The probability is 179/256. When the BB role is BB (Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C) with no setting difference and the state related to the AT of the game is "normal BB internal medium game", the BB start effect is a high expectation effect. The probability of becoming is 77/256. When the BB role is BB (Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C) with no setting difference and the state related to the AT of the game is "normal BB internal medium game", the BB start effect is the premier effect. The probability is 0/256.

When the BB combination is BB (Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C) with no setting difference and the state related to the AT of the game is "advantageous BB internal medium game", the BB start effect is the normal effect. The probability is 67/256. When the BB role is BB (Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C) with no setting difference and the state related to the AT of the game is "advantageous BB internal medium game", the BB start effect is a high expectation effect. The probability of becoming 157/256 is. When the BB role is BB (Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C) with no setting difference and the state related to the AT of the game is "advantageous BB internal medium game", the BB start effect is the premier effect. The probability is 32/256.

In the "normal section", even if you win the BB without setting difference (1st class BB-A and 1st class BB-C) or the BB with setting difference (1st class BB-B), the premiere production Is not selected, and it is stipulated that the possibility that a normal effect is selected is higher than that of a high-expectation effect.

Even in an advantageous section, if a BB (Type 1 BB-B) with a setting difference is won, the premier production is not selected, and there is a possibility that the normal production is selected rather than the high expectation production. It is set to be high.

If it is an "advantageous section" and the BB with no setting difference (Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C) is won, the premier production may be selected. With this configuration, by selecting the premier production, it is confirmed that by winning the setting difference BB, it will shift to the "AT in progress state" after the setting difference BB ends. Can be shown to the player. In addition, when the BB (Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C) with no setting difference is won because it is an "advantageous section", there is a high possibility that a high expectation effect is selected rather than a normal effect. (It is less likely that a normal production will be selected). By doing so, the player can infer whether or not the AT will be started after the end of the BB by confirming the BB start effect, and can have a sense of expectation for winning the AT. In addition, the distribution of the BB start production related to the BB (Type 1 BB-B) with a setting difference that won in the "normal BB internal medium game" and the setting differenceless BB that won the prize in the "normal BB internal medium game" ( The distribution is the same as the distribution of the BB start effect according to the type 1 BB-A and the type 1 BB-C). Not limited to this, the distribution of the BB start effect related to the BB (Type 1 BB-B) with a setting difference that won a prize in the "normal BB internal medium game" and the "normal BB internal medium game" The distribution of the BB start effect related to the winning BB without setting difference (Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C) may be different, and by configuring in this way, the BB start related to the BB with setting difference It can be configured so that the distribution differs depending on whether it is an effect or a BB start effect related to a BB without a setting difference.

The BB start effect determination table during AT shown on the lower right of FIG. 54 is a table for determining the effect at the start time of BB during AT. The BB start effect determination table during AT is also a table for defining the relationship between the type of BB combination, the state related to AT, the type of BB start effect, and the probability (distribution). There are two types of BB combinations: BB with a setting difference (type 1 BB-B) and BB without a setting difference (type 1 BB-A and type 1 BB-C). The state related to AT is one type of "advantageous BB internal medium game". There are two types of BB start effects, one that can be added and the other that cannot be added. The add-on possible effect is an effect that suggests that the AT addition lottery can be executed during the execution of the BB, and the add-on non-addition effect is an effect that suggests that the AT addition lottery is not executed during the execution of the BB. For the BB won during AT, there is no element of whether or not to win the AT lottery, and whether or not the AT addition lottery is executed may differ depending on the type of BB. In addition, even in the BB where there is a setting difference in which the AT addition lottery is not executed during the AT, the BB to be executed is the AT addition lottery due to the fact that the game medal can be obtained and the AT is in favor of the player after the BB ends. Is configured to clearly inform whether or not is executed. Hereinafter, specific examples will be described in detail.

When the BB role is BB (Type 1 BB-B) with a setting difference and the state related to the AT of the game is "advantageous BB internal middle game", the probability that the BB start effect can be added is 0 /. It is 256, and the effect that can be added is not executed. When the BB role is BB (Type 1 BB-B) with a setting difference and the state related to the AT of the game is "advantageous BB internal middle game", the probability that the BB start effect cannot be added is 256 /. It is 256, and the effect that cannot be added is always executed. When the BB role is BB (Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C) with no setting difference and the state related to the AT of the game is "advantageous BB internal medium game", the BB start effect can be added. The probability of becoming is 256/256, and the effect that can be added is always executed. When the BB role is BB (Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C) with no setting difference and the state related to the AT of the game is "advantageous BB internal medium game", the BB start effect cannot be added. The probability of becoming is 0/256, and the non-addable effect is not executed.

<Processing at the time of receiving the 3rd body stop>
Next, FIG. 55 is a subroutine showing the third processing at the time of receiving the body stop, which is called and executed in the processing of step 2600 of FIG.

Next, in step 2602, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the push order navigation is being displayed in the game. In the case of Yes in step 2602, in other words, when the push order navigation is being displayed, in step 2604, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the condition device related to the game is the push order bell. judge. In the case of Yes in step 2604, in other words, when the condition device related to the game is a push order bell, in step 2606, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is a stop button based on the correct push order as the third stop. Determine if there is an operation.

Next, in the case of Yes in step 2606, in other words, if there is an operation of the stop button based on the pressing order of the correct answer as the third stop, in step 2608, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is produced as a successful pressing order effect. "GET!" Is displayed on the display device S40. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2606, in other words, when there is no operation of the stop button based on the correct pressing order as the third stop, in step 2610, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S performs the "GET" of the pressing order success effect. ! ”Is not displayed.

If No in step 2602 described above, in other words, if the push order navigation is not displayed, if No in step 2604, in other words, the condition device related to the game is not a push order bell, or step 2608 or 2610. In step 2612, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a command related to the number of AT-added games (command set in step 1517) has been received from the main side. As described above, the main control board M transmits a command indicating the number of remaining AT games to the sub control board S, and the sub control board S calculates the difference from the command indicating the number of remaining AT games received last time. It is also possible to determine whether or not the number of AT games has been added and the number of AT games added, and to display the number of AT games added.

Next, in the case of Yes in step 2612, in other words, when a command related to the number of AT games is received from the main side, in step 2614, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is an AT addition game on the effect display device S40. The number is displayed and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2110). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2612, in other words, when the command related to the number of AT games is not received from the main side, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is added to the AT on the effect display device S40 in step 2616. The process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2110) without displaying the number of games. Further, as a method of notifying the number of AT additional games, (1) all of the additional games are notified by the game, (2) a part of the additional games is notified by the game, and the remaining games are notified after the game. (3) The number of additional games is not notified in the game, and the games after the game (for example, when 7 replays are won, when the common bell is won (when the role that is not originally added), or a plurality of games are notified. After executing a game (continuous effect), the bet button D220 operation of the game in which the number of remaining games of the effect display device S40 is "0", or the next game of the game in which "0" is set, and the operation of the start lever D50. ) Can be notified.

In addition, when the common bell is won in the "addition specialization state", the number of AT addition games is not displayed even if the game is stopped according to the push order navigation (the AT addition lottery is performed in the common bell). do not have).

According to the rotating body type gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the period advantageous for the player in the gaming machine configured to light the advantageous section indicator YH in the "advantageous section" by the above configuration. Can be appropriately notified. In addition, if the continuation effect is won by providing the "state for effect of resurrection" and the resurrection effect (success) is executed after that, the state related to the AT of the game in which the resurrection effect (success) is executed is The advantageous section indicator YH is lit because it is in the "AT in progress state", while the revival effect (failure) is executed even when the revival effect (failure) is executed after the continuous effect is not won. By setting the state related to the AT of the game to be "recoverable / non-recoverable effect state" and the state related to the AT as the "advantageous section", the advantageous section indicator YH is turned on. With this configuration, by visually recognizing the advantageous section display YH in the game that executes the revival effect, it is possible to configure it so that it is difficult to recognize whether the revival effect succeeds or fails. It is possible to secure a highly entertaining gaming machine in a gaming machine configured to be able to appropriately notify a period that is advantageous to the player.

In this example, if the BB combination is won in the "high probability state", the AT lottery can be won, and after the end of the BB, the game can be changed to the "AT in progress state". The configuration related to is not limited to that of this example, for example, if the AT lottery can be won by a rare role such as cherry (it can be won even if it is not the BB role) and the AT lottery is won. It may be configured to shift to the "AT precursor state" as the state related to AT, and to shift to the "AT in progress state" by playing a predetermined number of games (for example, 10 games) in the "AT precursor state".

Next, FIG. 56 is a flowchart of the menu screen display control process according to the subroutine of step 7100 of FIG. 41 in the present embodiment. First, in step 7102, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the menu screen is hidden on the effect display device S40. Here, the menu screen is a screen that can be displayed on the effect display device SG by pressing the sub input button SB or the like, and the player selects from a plurality of items to check various settings and information on the gaming machine. It is a screen that can be used. As an example of the method of selecting and determining an item, operate the cross key SB2 (which has four buttons of an up button, a down button, a left button, and a right button) to move the cursor to a desired item. By operating the sub input button SB, the currently selected item (where the cursor is) is determined, and the screen corresponding to the item is displayed. In this example, it is assumed that both the screen for selecting an item and the screen corresponding to the item displayed after determining the selected item are menu screens. Further, the menu screen may have a plurality of display modes. For example, the items that can be selected on the menu screen may be different depending on the game state, or the design of the background image may be different. In other words, they may be different. Even if there are differences, they are all referred to as menu screens.

<Items that can be selected on the menu screen>
An example of the items that can be selected on the menu screen is listed below.
(1) Volume adjustment: The volume output from the gaming machine may be configured so that the player can adjust it. For example, after displaying the screen corresponding to the volume adjustment, the right button of the cross key SB2 is operated to output. The volume may be increased, and the output volume may be decreased when the left button of the cross key SB2 is operated.
(2) Light intensity adjustment: The light intensity (luminance) of various lamps controlled by the sub-control board S such as the LED lamp S10 (stop button lamp S60, bet button lamp S50) may be configured so that the player can adjust the light intensity. For example, if the screen corresponding to the light amount adjustment is displayed and then the upper button of the cross key SB2 is operated, the light amount (brightness) becomes stronger (brighter), and if the lower button of the cross key SB2 is operated, the light amount (brightness) becomes weaker. It may be configured to be (dark).
(3) Character customization: Characters that appear during the game (hero character, push order navigation voice, battle character, character that supports the game progress that is always displayed on the production display device S40, etc.) can be selected and changed. It may be configured, and after displaying the screen corresponding to the character customization, it is determined by moving the cursor to the character to be selected with the cross key SB2 and operating the sub input button SB.
(4) Reel arrangement table: The reel arrangement may be configured to be displayable on the screen corresponding to the reel arrangement table.
(5) Dividend table: A payout table (a list of symbol combinations constituting a replay or a winning combination by displaying a stop) may be displayed on the screen corresponding to the payout table. When the payout table is divided into a plurality of screens and displayed, for example, the screen of the payout table may be switched between the left button and the right button of the cross key SB2.

Returning to the explanation of the flowchart, in the case of Yes in step 7102, in step 7104, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the menu screen can be displayed. Here, the menu screen displayable state means that the menu screen is displayed when an operation that can display the menu screen (may be configured to be displayed over time) such as an operation of the sub input button SB is executed. As a specific example, it may be configured as follows.
(1) Game end timing (timing when the third stop button is turned on → off, display judgment timing, payout completion timing based on winning, game end processing, a command related to the game end is set or transmitted to the sub-control board S side. The game does not proceed from the timing, the timing when the command related to the end of the game is received by the sub-control board S side, etc. (no new bet operation, no new automatic bet operation based on the stop display of the re-game, new start) The menu screen may be displayed when a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed while the lever is not operated, the reel does not start rotating newly, etc. (until then, the sub input button SB is operated. But the menu screen is not displayed). The betting operation includes both the case of betting by operating the bet button D220 and the case of betting by inserting a game medal into the medal insertion slot D170 (automatic betting based on the stop display of replay). May be included in the betting operation).
(2-1) It may be configured so that the menu screen cannot be displayed during the execution of the game (the game medal is bet, the weight period until the reel rotation starts, and the reel is rotating).
(2-2) It may be configured so that the menu screen can be displayed while the game is being executed (game medals are bet, etc.).
(3) A production that notifies whether or not a predetermined production is being executed (a production that notifies whether or not a bonus has been won, a continuous production that is executed over a plurality of games, and a production that notifies whether or not a lottery has been won by adding the number of AT games. , Etc.) may be configured so that the menu screen can be displayed.
(4) It may be configured so that the menu screen can not be displayed while the re-game combination is stopped and displayed.
In order to make it easier for the player to recognize that the menu screen can be displayed, the sub input button SB (LED provided inside the sub input button SB) is used when the menu screen can be displayed. It may be configured to blink.

Returning to the explanation of the flowchart, in the case of Yes in step 7104, in step 7106, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the sub-input button SB has been operated. In this example, the operation of displaying the menu screen is the operation of the sub input button SB, but the operation of displaying the menu screen may be changed or the operation of displaying the menu screen may be configured to have a plurality of operations. .. In the case of Yes in step 7106, in step 7108, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the menu screen on the effect display device S40. Next, in step 7109, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S stops the standby timer (a timer for measuring the time from the game end timing to the standby screen to be described later) and clears the timer value to zero. Next, in step 7110, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the standby timer timing flag (a flag that is turned on when the standby timer is timing). Next, in step 7111, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is a menu standby timer (a timer for measuring the time for transitioning from the menu screen to the standby screen described later, and is an initial value at the timing when the menu screen is started to be displayed. Is set) to a predetermined time B (in this example, it is 300 seconds, which is longer than the predetermined time A described later), and the timer is started. Next, in step 7112, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns on the menu standby timer timing flag (the flag that is turned on when the menu standby timer is timing), and the next process (process in step 7200). Move to.

Further, in step 7114, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the menu screen end condition is satisfied. The menu screen end condition is a condition for ending the display of the menu screen, in other words, switching the screen (image) displayed on the effect display device S40 from the menu screen to another screen (image), and is a specific example to be satisfied. It may be configured as follows.
(1) It may be configured to be satisfied when there is a new bet operation, a new start lever operation, or a new reel rotation start.
(2) In a situation where the menu screen is continuously displayed, it may be configured to be satisfied when a predetermined time (300 seconds, which is the predetermined time B in this example) has elapsed from the start of the display of the menu screen.
(3) It may be configured to be satisfied by selecting and deciding a predetermined item on the menu screen and performing a predetermined operation on the screen corresponding to the predetermined item. For example, the cursor is placed on the volume adjustment item. By operating the sub input button SB, the screen corresponding to the volume adjustment is displayed. After adjusting the volume to the desired level by operating the cross key SB2, select by operating the sub input button SB again. The volume is set to the medium size, the display of the menu screen ends, and the screen before the menu screen is displayed (sometimes called a normal screen) is displayed.

Returning to the explanation of the flowchart, in the case of Yes in step 7114, in step 7116, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the image displayed on the effect display device S40 before the menu screen is displayed. As an example, if the menu screen is displayed due to the operation of the sub input button SB in the situation where the screen where the main character is walking in the forest is displayed, when the menu screen display ends, it will be displayed again. The screen where the hero is walking in the forest will be displayed. Next, in step 7118, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S stops the menu standby timer and clears it to zero. Next, in step 7120, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the menu standby timer timing flag and shifts to the next process (process of step 7200).

If No in step 7114, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines in step 7122 whether or not the sub input button SB or the cross key SB2 has been operated. In the case of Yes in step 7122, in step 7124, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S resets the predetermined time B (300 seconds in this example) to the menu standby timer, and shifts to the next process (process of step 7200). do. Even if No in step 7104, step 7106, or step 7122, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 7200). As described above, in the present embodiment, when the sub input button SB or the cross key SB2 is operated while the menu screen is displayed, the menu standby timer is set to the predetermined time B (300 in this example). Seconds) are reset, in other words, the time until the standby screen is displayed is measured again from the beginning. In this example, two timers, a standby timer and a menu standby timer, are used as timers related to the display of the standby screen, but the present invention is not limited to this, and only one timer related to the display of the standby screen is used. It may be configured to be used. Specifically, only the standby timer is used as the timer related to the display of the standby screen, and the predetermined time A (180 seconds) set in the above-mentioned standby timer and the predetermined time B (300 seconds) set in the menu standby timer are waited for. It may be configured to be set in a timer. As a specific example, the third stop button is turned on and off, the standby timer is set to the predetermined time A (180 seconds), and then the sub input button SB is operated under the condition that the timer value of the standby timer is 100 seconds. When the menu screen is started to be displayed, the standby timer may be configured to set a predetermined time B (300 seconds).

Next, FIG. 57 is a flowchart of the standby screen display control process according to the subroutine of step 7200 of FIG. 41 in the present embodiment. First, in step 7202, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the standby screen is hidden. Here, the standby screen is a screen that can be displayed on the effect display device SG when it is determined that the game has not been executed for a predetermined time (the game has not progressed), and the effect is executed on the gaming machine. A moving image related to the story is repeatedly played, a display indicating "power saving" is displayed, and a logo mark related to the gaming machine manufacturer is displayed. In this example, the condition for displaying the menu screen described above requires the operation by the player, while the condition for displaying the standby screen does not require the operation by the player.

In the case of Yes in step 7202, in step 7204, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the standby timer timing flag (the flag that is turned on when the standby timer described later is timing) is off. do. In the case of Yes in step 7204, in step 7206, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the game end timing has been reached. In this process, the timing at which the third stop button is turned from on to off is set as the game end timing. In the case of Yes in step 7206, in step 7208, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is a standby timer (a timer for measuring the time from the end of the game to the standby screen, and the initial value is set at the timing when the game ends. The timer is started by setting a predetermined time A (in this example, 180 seconds, which is shorter than the predetermined time B described above). Next, in step 7210, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns on the standby timer timing flag and shifts to step 7212. In the present embodiment, the condition for executing the processes of steps 7208 and 7210 is that the game end timing has been reached, but in addition to this, the sub-input button SB is operated on the menu screen. Therefore, it may be a condition that the image displayed before the display of the menu screen is displayed (the display of the menu screen is finished).

Next, in step 7212, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the timer value of the standby timer has become 0. In the case of Yes in step 7212, in step 7214, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays a standby screen on the effect display device S40, and the process proceeds to step 7216. Next, in step 7216, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S stops the menu standby timer and clears it to zero. Next, in step 7218, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the menu standby timer timing flag. Next, in step 7220, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S stops the standby timer and clears to zero. Next, in step 7222, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the standby timer timing flag and shifts to step 7224. Even if No in step 7206, the process proceeds to step 7224.

Next, in step 7224, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the menu standby timer timing flag is on. If Yes in step 7224, in step 7226, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the timer value of the menu standby timer has become 0. In the case of Yes in step 7226, in step 7228, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the standby screen on the effect display device S40. Next, in step 7230, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S stops the menu standby timer and clears it to zero. Next, in step 7232, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the menu standby timer timing flag. Next, in step 7234, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S stops the standby timer and clears to zero. Next, in step 7236, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the standby timer timing flag and shifts to the next process (process of step 2110). Even if No in step 7224 or step 7226, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2110).

Further, in the case of No in step 7204, in other words, when the standby timer timekeeping flag is on, in step 7238, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the standby timer timekeeping end condition is satisfied. do. Here, the standby timer timing end condition is a condition in which the standby timer timing is terminated and the timer value of the standby timer is cleared to zero, and there is a new bet operation and a new start lever operation. In addition, the standby timer timing end condition is such that the rotation of the reel is newly started. If Yes in step 7238, the process proceeds to step 7212, while if No in step 7238, the process proceeds to step 7216.

If No in step 7202, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines in step 7240 whether or not the standby screen end condition is satisfied. Here, the standby screen end condition is a condition for ending the display of the standby screen. In this example, there is a new bet operation, a new start lever operation, and a new reel rotation. The start, etc. are the conditions for ending the standby screen. It should be noted that the standby screen may be configured to be able to shift to the menu screen (display the menu screen). For example, the menu screen may be displayed by operating the sub input button SB in the situation where the standby screen is displayed. It may be configured as follows. Next, in step 7242, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S displays the image displayed before the display of the standby screen on the effect display device S40, and shifts to the next process (process of step 2110). As an example, in the situation where the screen where the hero is walking in the forest is displayed, when the standby screen is displayed because the A game has not progressed for a predetermined time, the hero is executed again by executing the bet operation. Will be displayed on the screen walking in the forest.

Next, FIG. 58 is a standby screen transition image diagram according to the present embodiment. First, in the case of (a), the menu screen is displayed because the sub input button SB is operated while the menu screen can be displayed. After that, under the situation where the menu screen is displayed, 5 minutes (predetermined time B, 300 seconds) elapses without the operation of the sub input button SB or the bet button D220, and the standby screen is displayed. Next, in the case of (b), the game is executed, the player stops the reels, and all the reels are stopped by performing the stop operation of the third stop button, and the player presses the third stop button. Since 3 minutes (a predetermined time A and 180 seconds) have elapsed from the release timing and the sub input button SB and the bet button D220 have not been operated during that time, the standby screen is displayed. As described above, in this example, a predetermined time B elapses after the menu screen is displayed, and a predetermined time A elapses after the game is finished (after the third stop button is turned on → off). It is configured so that the standby screen can be displayed in, and the predetermined time B is longer than the predetermined time A.

<< Configuration of menu screen and standby screen applicable to this example >>
Here, the configurations related to the menu screen and the standby screen applicable to the spinning machine according to this example will be described in detail below, including the configuration of the present embodiment. It should be noted that the configurations listed below can be applied to all the above-described embodiments, and there is no problem by appropriately combining one or a plurality of configurations.

<Timekeeping start timing of standby timer>
As the timing to set the initial value in the standby timer that measures the time until the standby screen is displayed and start timing, (1) the third stop button as the final stop operation (stop corresponding to the reel rotating to the end) The timekeeping starts from the timing when the button) is turned on and then turned off, (2) the timekeeping starts from the execution timing of the display judgment, (3) the timekeeping starts from the payout completion timing based on the winning, and (4) the game. As the end process, the timing is started from the timing when the command related to the end of the game is set or transmitted to the sub control board S side. (5) The time counting is started from the timing when the command related to the end of the game is received by the sub control board S side. You may. Further, a predetermined time A (a timer value set in the standby timer, for example, 180 seconds) may be set as the initial value.

<Timekeeping start timing of menu standby timer>
As the timing to set the initial value in the menu standby timer that measures the time until the menu screen is displayed and start timing, the time is configured to start from the timing when the menu screen is displayed by operating the sub input button SB. You may. Further, a predetermined time B (a timer value set in the menu standby timer, for example, 300 seconds) may be set as an initial value. The predetermined time B set in the menu standby timer is longer than the predetermined time A (timer value set in the standby timer, for example, 180 seconds) set in the standby timer described above.

<Configuration related to sub input buttons>
It may be configured so that the initial value can be reset to the menu standby timer in the situation where the menu standby timer is timing. For example, operating the sub input button SB or the cross key SB2 while the menu screen is displayed. Therefore, a predetermined time B (a timer value set in the menu standby timer, for example, 300 seconds), which is an initial value, may be set in the menu standby timer. As an example, when the menu screen is started to be displayed, 300 seconds is set in the menu standby timer to start counting, and after 100 seconds, the timer value of the menu standby timer is 200 seconds, and the cross key SB2 is pressed. The menu standby timer may be configured to reset 300 seconds by the operation. In addition, the menu screen can be started to be displayed by operating the sub input button SB, and the menu screen is being displayed (the screen is displayed by operating the sub input button SB or the cross key SB2 after starting the menu screen display. The initial value may be reset to the menu standby timer by operating the cross key SB2 on the transition destination screen (the screen of the transition destination may also be the menu screen), or the menu screen is being displayed (menu). By operating the sub input button SB or the cross key SB2 to the transition destination screen to which the screen has transitioned by operating the sub input button SB or the cross key SB2 after the screen is displayed, the sub input button SB or the cross key SB2 may be operated. It may be configured so that the initial value can be reset in the menu standby timer.

<Configuration related to stop button>
In the situation where the standby timer is timing, the third stop button (the stop button corresponding to the reel that is rotating to the end) is turned on and then turned off as the final stop operation, and then the bet operation is not executed. The stop button (left stop button, middle stop button, right stop button) may be operated depending on the situation, or the standby timer may be configured not to reset the initial value. As an example, as the final stop operation, the third stop button (the stop button corresponding to the reel rotating to the end) is turned on and then turned off, 180 seconds is set in the standby timer, and the timer starts counting. After that, when the bet operation is not executed and the timer value of the standby timer is 100 seconds, even if the stop button is operated, the timer value of the standby timer is not newly reset and the timer value is 100 seconds. It may be configured to remain as it is.

<Structure related to bet operation>
When the third stop button (stop button corresponding to the reel rotating to the end) is turned on and then turned off as the final stop operation in the situation where the standby timer is timing, and then the bet operation is executed (). When a bet is made by operating the bet button D220, or when a game medal is inserted into the medal insertion slot D170 and a bet is made), the time counting of the standby timer is stopped and the timer value is cleared to zero. That is, in the situation where the standby timer is timing, the third stop button (the stop button corresponding to the reel rotating to the end) is turned on and then turned off as the final stop operation, and then the bet operation is executed. , If the other operations are not executed, the standby screen may not be displayed over time. In addition, in such a configuration, the standby screen is not displayed due to the passage of time from the bet operation, but the volume of the sound being output when a specific time (for example, 100 seconds) has elapsed from the bet operation. May be configured to be 0 or smaller. With this configuration, the number of remaining game medals is less than the specified number (for example, 3) (for example, 1), and the remaining 1 game medal is bet (for example, the bet button is operated). When the game is finished, or when the player finishes the game with less than the specified number of game medals remaining in the credit (no bet is made), the bet button is used when the clerk of the game hall cleans the game machine. Even if you operate and bet, the sound will not be output at an unintended volume.

<Display conditions for standby screen>
The standby screen may be displayed on condition that the timer value of the decrement timer (in this example, the standby timer and the menu standby timer) related to the display of the standby screen has changed from "1 to 0". With this configuration, when a bet operation is executed or some abnormality occurs in the timer measurement, the timer value reaches "0" without going through "1" like "20 → 0". Even if this is done (when zero is cleared), the standby screen will not be displayed, and it is possible to prevent the unintended display of the standby screen (then, the timer value is reset and the value changes from 1 to 0). It may be configured to display the standby screen in the event of a timer). A flag for displaying the standby screen may be provided so that the standby screen is displayed when the flag is turned on.

<Structure related to payment button>
In the situation where the standby timer is timing, the third stop button (stop button corresponding to the reel rotating to the end) is turned on and then turned off as the final stop operation, and then one or more credits exist. In the situation, when the settlement of credits is executed by operating the settlement button, a predetermined time A (for example, 180 seconds) has elapsed from the operation timing of the settlement button, or the timing when the settlement of credits is completed (the last game medal is The standby screen may be displayed at the timing of return to the discharge port D240).

<Configuration related to setting key switch>
As the final stop operation, the third stop button (stop button corresponding to the reel rotating to the end) was turned on and then turned off, and then the setting key switch was turned off → on while the power was on. The standby screen may be displayed when a predetermined time A (for example, 180 seconds) has elapsed from the timing. Also, as the final stop operation, the third stop button (the stop button corresponding to the reel rotating to the end) is turned on and then turned off, and then the front door is opened when the power is turned on. The setting key switch may be turned off → on, and then the standby screen may be displayed when a predetermined time A (for example, 180 seconds) has elapsed from the timing when the front door is closed.

<Configuration when a predetermined error occurs>
As the final stop operation, the third stop button (the stop button corresponding to the reel rotating to the end) is turned on and then turned off, and then a predetermined error regarding the main control board M side (for example, the game medal is the medal selector DS). The standby screen may be displayed when a predetermined time A (for example, 180 seconds) has elapsed from the timing when the predetermined error is cleared.

<Structure related to front door>
As the final stop operation, the standby timer starts timing by turning on and then turning off the third stop button (the stop button corresponding to the reel that is rotating to the end), and then the front door is opened and the open state. It may be configured to continue the timing of the standby timer even when the time is maintained. In addition, as the final stop operation, the standby timer starts timing by turning on and then turning off the third stop button (the stop button corresponding to the reel that is rotating to the end), and then the front door is opened. After that, even if the front door is closed, the standby timer may be configured to continue timing.

<Structure 1 during AT>
In a non-AT state (for example, the state related to AT is "normal game state"), the third stop button (stop button corresponding to the reel rotating to the end) is turned on and then turned off as the final stop operation. While the standby screen can be displayed when a predetermined time A (for example, 180 seconds) has elapsed from the set timing, the final stop operation is performed in a situation where AT is in progress (for example, the state related to AT is "AT in progress"). The standby screen is not displayed when a predetermined time A (for example, 180 seconds) elapses from the timing when the third stop button (stop button corresponding to the reel rotating to the end) is turned on and then turned off. You may. Similarly, even during the execution of the continuous effect, the execution of the bonus, or the ART, the standby screen may not be displayed even after a predetermined time A has elapsed from the end of the final stop operation. Also, in a situation where AT is in progress (for example, the state related to AT is "AT in progress"), the third stop button (corresponding to the reel rotating to the end) is supported as the final stop operation in the game in which the push order navigation is executed. When a predetermined time A (for example, 180 seconds) elapses from the timing when the button is turned on and then turned off, the standby screen is not displayed, while AT (for example, the state related to AT is "AT in progress"). In this situation, as the final stop operation in the game in which the push order navigation was not executed, the third stop button (the stop button corresponding to the reel rotating to the end) was turned on and then turned off for a predetermined time. It may be configured so that the standby screen can be displayed when A (for example, 180 seconds) has elapsed.

<Structure 2 during AT>
When the menu screen is displayed by operating the sub input button or the like in a situation where AT is in progress (for example, the state related to AT is "AT in progress"), (1) a predetermined time B (for example, 300 seconds) elapses. The standby screen can be displayed by You may.

<Structure 3 during AT>
In a non-AT state (for example, the state related to AT is "normal game state"), the third stop button (stop button corresponding to the reel rotating to the end) is turned on and then turned off as the final stop operation. When a predetermined time A (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed from the set timing, the standby screen can be displayed, and in a non-AT state (for example, the state related to AT is a "normal gaming state"). The menu screen is displayed, and the standby screen can be displayed when a predetermined time B (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the menu screen display. During AT (for example, the state related to AT is "AT in progress"". ), The menu screen is displayed, and when a predetermined time C (for example, 180 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the menu screen display, the normal screen during AT (the screen displayed before the menu screen is displayed) is displayed. ) May be configured. That is, when the time values are compared, it may be configured so that "predetermined time A = predetermined time B <predetermined time C". The time values of the predetermined time A and the predetermined time B do not have to be the same, and the predetermined time C may be the longest.

<Other configurations 1>
The menu screen may be displayed by inserting a game medal from the medal insertion slot D170 while the standby screen is displayed. The menu screen displayed by inserting a game medal from the medal insertion slot D170 while the standby screen is displayed is (1) the same screen as the menu screen displayed by operating the sub input button, (2). ) The screen displayed by executing a predetermined operation (selecting and determining a predetermined item) from the menu screen displayed by operating the sub input button, (3) by operating the sub input button. It may be configured as a screen different from the displayed menu screen. Further, even if a game medal is inserted from the medal insertion slot D170 while the menu screen displayed by inserting the game medal from the medal insertion slot D170 while the standby screen is displayed is displayed, the menu screen continues to be displayed, while the sub. When a game medal is inserted from the medal insertion slot D170 while the menu screen displayed by operating the input button is displayed, the screen may be returned to the screen displayed before the menu screen is displayed. Also, if you insert a game medal from the medal slot D170 while the standby screen is displayed and bet, the menu screen will be displayed, and if you bet by operating the bet button while the standby screen is displayed, it will be displayed before the menu screen is displayed. The screen (normal screen displayed during the game when the standby screen is displayed immediately after the power is turned on) may be displayed. In addition, when a game medal is inserted from the medal slot D170 while the standby screen is displayed and a bet is made, a menu screen is displayed, the standby screen is being displayed, and the number of game medals stored in the credit is three. In the above situation, if you bet by operating the bet button (for example, the max bet button that allows you to bet 3 cards by one operation), the screen that was displayed before the menu screen was displayed (the standby screen is displayed immediately after the power is turned on). If this is the case, the normal screen displayed during the game) is displayed, the standby screen is being displayed, and the bet button is displayed when the number of game medals stored in the credit is less than the specified number of three. (For example, a max bet button that allows three bets by one operation) may be operated to display a menu screen.

<Other configurations 2>
It has a plurality of display modes of the standby screen, and satisfies a predetermined condition (for example, by inputting a password on the menu screen, it may be a predetermined condition that the game is inherited from the previous game history). If not, the moving image that introduces the story is displayed as the standby screen, but if the predetermined conditions are satisfied, the moving image that introduces the character may be displayed as the standby screen. .. Further, in both the case where the predetermined condition is not satisfied and the case where the predetermined condition is satisfied, the story introduction and the character introduction can be displayed as a standby screen, but is the predetermined condition satisfied? Depending on whether or not, the frequency of displaying the story introduction or the character introduction may be different.

<Other changes>
In this example, the player has a first BB combination in which the first BB is executed by winning a prize, and a second BB combination in which the second BB, which is less profitable for the player than the first BB, is executed by winning the prize. It may be configured, and further, it may be configured so that the first BB combination and the second BB combination can be won in duplicate (providing the combination of "first BB + second BB"). With such a configuration, when the "1st BB + 2nd BB" is won, the symbol combination (1st BB combination) corresponding to the highly profitable execution of the 1st BB can be stopped and displayed, and after the execution of the 1st BB is completed, the first The symbol combination (second BB combination) corresponding to the 2BB may be stopped and displayed (the winning of the second BB is carried over even during the execution of the first BB). In addition, when the "1st BB + 2nd BB" is won, by executing the highly profitable 1st BB first, for example, in the situation where the closing time of the amusement park is approaching, the "1st BB + 2nd BB" is won. In that case, the low-profit second BB is executed first, the game hall is closed during the execution of the second BB, and the high-profit first BB cannot be executed and the game must be terminated. Can be prevented.

Immediately after the operation of the first BB is completed, the winning of the second BB may be notified, or the winning of the second BB may be notified (after a predetermined game has elapsed without notification). If this is the case, the probability of winning the re-game may be increased during the incubation period after the operation of the first BB is completed. Further, when it is hidden, it may be configured to execute an effect suggesting the possibility of winning the second BB (for example, the effect display device S40 displays "BB consecutive villa chance time !!"). .. In such a configuration, if the second BB is not won even if the second BB is not won after the end of the first BB, it will be definite that the production occurrence = the second BB is won, so only the first BB is won. However, it is preferable to configure the display so as to execute the effect suggesting the possibility of winning the second BB even after the operation of the first BB is completed (the effect mode after the end of the first BB is the same as described above. For example, "BB Renso Chance Time !!" is displayed on the production display device S40). Further, even when only the first BB is won and the first BB is won again after the operation of the first BB is completed, the execution of the effect suggesting the possibility of winning the second BB is not stopped. You may. Further, it may be configured to notify the winner of the first BB once after notifying the winner of the second BB (for example, the display of "BB consecutive villa chance time !!" → the display of "sorry" → the "first". 1BB is being won !! ”etc.). Further, when the second BB is hidden after the duplicate winning is won during the AT and the operation of the first BB is completed, the effect display device S40 returns to the AT after the AT is being prepared (after the return, the effect is displayed). (Reducing the number of remaining games, etc.), but the internal reduction of the number of remaining games, etc. may be continuously suspended. If the first BB and the second BB are both elected in duplicate, the number of payouts from the start of the operation of the first BB to the end of the operation of the second BB may be accumulated and displayed on the effect display device S40 or the like.

In this example,
(1) When the first BB and the small winning combination A are elected in duplicate, the first BB is prioritized for stop control.
(2) When the first BB and the small winning combination B are elected in duplicate, the small winning combination B is prioritized for stop control.
That is, a small winning combination that gives priority to the stop control over the BB combination and a small winning combination that gives priority to the stop control of the BB combination may be provided.
(3) When the first BB and the small winning combination A are won in duplicate, when the small winning combination A wins, or a part of the symbol combinations corresponding to the small winning combination A (for example, at the time of the first stop, the first). 2 When stopped), the notification corresponding to the small winning combination A (notification so that the small winning combination A can win) is performed.
That is, the result of the first stop or the second stop (the stop mode after the execution of the first stop or the second stop) is to notify the first BB combination that is normally stopped and controlled in preference to the small winning combination A. Therefore, when the first BB combination cannot win a prize regardless of the position where the third stop is stopped (the small combination A can win a prize), the notification corresponding to the small combination A is performed. Further, when the small winning combination A wins as a result of the game, the notification corresponding to the small winning combination A is performed. With this configuration, it is possible to execute the most advantageous notification to the player according to various game situations that change in the middle of the game, and the content notified by the effect display device S40 or the like and the actual content. It is possible to prevent the winning roles from being inconsistent.
(4) When the first BB and the small winning combination B are elected in duplicate, the notification corresponding to the small winning combination B is performed during the rotation of all reels.

Further, it may be configured to have a display (7-segment or the like) that displays the number of the symbol (or symbol combination) that is stopped and displayed, which is controlled by the main control board M. In such a configuration, the effect display device S40 performs a contradiction effect that does not correspond to the stopped display symbol (or symbol combination). For example, when the replay-replay-replay symbol combination is stopped on the effective line, an effect that is likely to be output when the watermelon is won (for example, making the lamp glow green) is executed.

In this example, an earphone jack that can output (cannot input) from the sub-control board S side may be provided and has the following features.
(1) The volume output from the earphone jack can be selected from a plurality of stages by using the sub input button of the gaming machine.
(2) Even when playing a game using the earphone jack, when an error occurs, an error notification sound is output from the gaming machine at a predetermined volume (for example, it is output from a speaker provided in the gaming machine). ).
(3) When playing a game using the earphone jack, an error notification sound is output from the earphone jack at a predetermined volume other than the maximum volume even when the maximum volume is selected.

Further, during the AT state or the BB execution, the effect sound may be output from the game machine even when the game is played using the earphone jack. Further, the volume for when the earphone jack is not used and the volume for when the earphone jack is not used may be stored separately. Even if the earphone is removed, the volume for when using the earphone jack may not be cleared (default) immediately. For example, if there is no operation for 10 minutes, any volume may be cleared (default value). However, when the earphone is still inserted, it is not necessary to clear (default) the volume for when using the earphone jack. The earphone jack is preferably provided in a place that does not interfere with the game (for example, when the earphone is inserted in the earphone jack, the earphone cord does not get entangled with the player's arm when trying to operate the start lever. ).

In this example,
(1) The winning probability of the re-game combination can be changed between after the end of BB when the number of acquisitions is more than a specific number and after the end of BB when the number of acquisitions is less than a specific number. It may be configured.
(2) There may be a plurality of RT states that shift when the RT state (for example, RT1) in which the winning probability of the re-game combination is relatively high ends. For example, it may be configured to shift to "RT0" after the end of "RT1", or may be configured to shift to "RT3" (a newly provided RT state).
(3) The RT state is changed when a predetermined winning combination is won. That is, the transition of the RT state is not made to have a one-to-one correspondence with the winning, and the transition is made with a certain probability regardless of the conditional device and the winning (for example, the RT transition lottery is executed with a certain probability for each game).
(4) Equipped with 0 RT transition eyes, duplicate winning of 0 cards, and duplicate winning of 0 cards. That is, no matter which push order is stopped, no matter which position the stop operation is performed, a 0-card combination is provided, which is a combination in which one or more winning combinations are not won, and the RT state is changed by winning the 0-card winning combination. It may be configured to enable the duplicate winning of the 0-card combination and the 7-card combination or the duplicate winning of the 0-card combination A and the 0-card combination B. In addition, when the duplicate winning of the 0-card combination is performed, either the 0-card combination that shifts to RT or the 0-card combination that does not shift to RT may be won depending on the pushing order. It is also possible to win the 0-card combination and the BB combination in duplicate, and give priority to the 0-card combination to win the prize.

As in this example, the push order of the push order bell is 6 choices ("left → middle → right", "left → right → middle", "middle → left → right", "middle → right → left", 6 choices of "right → left → middle" and "right → middle → left"), and the push order of the push order replay is configured to be 3 choices (1st stop is 3 choices of left, middle, and right). In that case, as the push order display in the push order display device D270, the push order navigation display related to the push order bell and the push order navigation display related to the push order replay are different, in other words, the push order navigation of 6 choices. The display and the three-choice push order navigation display may be configured to be different. As an example, as the push order display related to 6 choices, "= 1" in the case of "left → middle → right", "= 2" in the case of "left → right → middle", "middle → left →" "= 3" for "right", "= 4" for "middle → right → left", "= 5" for "right → left → middle", "right → middle → left" In the case of, it is displayed as "= 6", and as the push order display related to the three choices, "= 7" when the first stop is on the left and "= 8" when the first stop is in the middle. , When the first stop is on the right, it may be configured to be displayed as "= 9".

In this example, the configuration may be as follows.
(1) The number of AT digested games, which is the number of games continuously digested in the "AT in progress state", "specialization precursor state", or "additional specialization state", is configured to be displayable on the effect display device, and AT is configured. If the number of remaining games becomes 0 and the game shifts from "AT in progress" to "normal game state" and then wins the AT lottery again within a specific game and shifts to "AT in progress", the previous AT While the number of digested games is taken over and added, the "advantageous section" continues for a predetermined number of games (for example, 1500 games), so that the "AT in progress state" is changed to the "normal game state" and then again within a specific game. If the AT lottery is won and the state shifts to the "AT in progress state", the number of AT digestion games is not taken over from the previous number of AT digestion games, and the number of AT digestion games is newly counted from 0 games.
(2) If the stop button is not operated for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after the reel starts rotating, a display prompting the reel to be stopped by the effect display device S40 (for example, "reel" If you do not operate the stop button for a predetermined time after the reel starts rotating in a game in which push order navigation is occurring, (2-1) effect The display areas of the push order navigation display on the display device S40 and the display prompting to stop the reel do not overlap, and (2-2) the display prompting to stop the reel is not displayed.
(3) When the power is turned "on → off → on" in a game in which push order navigation is occurring, the rotation speed of the reel becomes a constant speed and before the operation of the stop button becomes effective. The push order navigation (display on the push order display device D270 and / or display on the effect display device S40) is redisplayed at the timing of.
(4) The state related to a certain AT and the state related to another AT are different in the frequency of occurrence of push order navigation in the game in which the common bell is won, or the state related to AT in which push order navigation can occur. The frequency of push order navigation in the game in which the common bell is won differs between the state related to a certain AT and the state related to another AT, which is a state related to an AT in which push order navigation can occur.
(5) In the RT state (“RT1” in this example), which has the highest probability of winning a replay, the percentage of games in which push-order navigation occurs is higher than the percentage of games in which push-order navigation does not occur. high. For example, the total winning rate of the bell role and the replaying role is 1/2 or more. With this configuration, the player can proceed with the game without getting bored during AT.
It may be configured as described above.

Here, the feature points of the above-mentioned game section will be described in detail below.

≪Normal section≫
(1) The push order navigation is not displayed on the push order display device D270.
(2) The push order navigation is not displayed on the effect display device S40.
(3) The command (signal) related to the condition device in which the profit margin of the player differs depending on the pushing order is not transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side.
(4) The transition lottery to the "advantageous section" can be executed except during the internal winning of the BB and the execution of the BB.

≪Waiting section≫
(1) The push order navigation is not displayed on the push order display device D270.
(2) The push order navigation is not displayed on the effect display device S40.
(3) The command (signal) related to the condition device in which the profit margin of the player differs depending on the pushing order is not transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side.
(4) The transition lottery to the "advantageous section" is not executed.
(5) After the BB wins in the "standby state", it will be an "advantageous section" from the next game.

≪Advantageous section≫
(1) The push order navigation can be displayed on the push order display device D270.
(2) The push order navigation can be displayed on the effect display device S40.
(3) A command (signal) relating to a condition device in which the profit margin of the player differs depending on the pushing order can be transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side.
(4) A lottery for changing the performance of the "advantageous section" (for example, shifting from the "high probability state" to the "AT in progress state" as the state related to AT), a lottery for adding the number of AT games, and the like can be executed.
(5) In the "advantageous section", the advantageous section indicator YH is always lit.
(6) Advantageous section When the counter value of the remaining game number counter YKc-1 becomes 0, the "advantageous section" is basically the "advantageous section" unless BB or push order navigation is executed once or more in the "advantageous section". However, as an exception, if the "advantageous section" continues for a predetermined number of games (1500 in this example), the BB and push order navigation will be performed once in the "advantageous section". Is configured so that the "advantageous section" can be terminated even if it is not executed.
(7) Advantageous section remaining game number counter The measurement of YKc-1 is executed in all games in the "advantageous section" (for example, the value of each game counter is added even during BB execution).

Here, the feature points related to the set lottery for the "advantageous section" will be described in detail below.
(1) Whether or not the "advantageous section" is set is determined based on the result of the winning combination lottery, and whether or not the "advantageous section" is set is not determined as the number of games progresses.
(2) When a condition device having a different lottery probability is established depending on the set value, the set lottery for the "advantageous section" is not executed when the condition device is established.
(3) When a certain condition device is satisfied and the set lottery for the "advantageous section" is executed, the lottery probability is the same even if the set values are different.
(4) The performance of the "advantageous section" does not differ depending on the set value (for example, when a strong cherry is established, the setting 1 shifts to the "high probability state", and the setting 6 shifts to the "AT in progress state". Etc., it does not differ depending on the set value).
(5) Setting to "advantageous section" If you win the lottery, it will basically be "advantageous section" from the next game (setting to "advantageous section" by the BB role established in "normal section". If you win the lottery, you can set it as a "waiting section" in the next game).

Here, the feature points related to the change in the performance of the "advantageous section" will be described in detail below.
(1) The lottery to change the performance of the "advantageous section" with reference to the set value is not executed (as a condition common to all set values, a predetermined number of games may have passed and a predetermined condition device may be established). ..
(2) When a condition device having a different lottery probability is established depending on the set value, the lottery for changing the performance of the "advantageous section" is not executed when the condition device is established. The lottery for adding the number of AT games is not executed.
(3) When the BB is internally elected, the lottery for changing the performance of the "advantageous section" is not executed. The lottery for adding the number of AT games is not executed.
(4) During BB execution, if the lottery probability of the BB combination that triggered the executed BB differs depending on the set value, a lottery to change the performance of the "advantageous section" during the BB execution. Is not executed. The lottery for adding the number of AT games is not executed.
(5) During BB execution, if the lottery probability of the BB combination that triggered the executed BB does not differ depending on the set value, a lottery to change the performance of the "advantageous section" during the BB execution. Can be executed. A lottery for adding the number of AT games can also be executed.

Further, the following configuration may be applied to the rotating drum type gaming machine according to this example. Further, the following configurations may be applied independently, or a plurality of configurations may be combined.

<< Point 1 >>
(1) Although it is an "advantageous section", it is configured to have a "high probability state" as a state related to an AT that is more difficult to win the AT lottery than the "high probability state".
(2) The continuous effect is composed of at least the number of consecutive games of a predetermined G number or more.
(3) It has a normal role that does not win 100% in the AT lottery and a special role that wins 100% in the AT lottery. In this case, if a special role is won during the continuous production, an effect of notifying that the AT lottery has been won is executed even during the continuous production (the continuous production is replaced).
(4) The more games remaining in the number of high-securing obstacle games, the higher the probability of selecting a continuous production with a high expectation (expectation of bonus winning, AT lottery winning), and the remaining games in the number of high-securing obstacle games. The smaller the number, the higher the probability of selecting a continuous production with low expectations.
(5) Highly secured The smaller the number of remaining games in the number of obstacle games, the higher the probability of selecting a one-game completion production with a high expectation (expectation of bonus winning, expectation of AT lottery winning).
(6) If the number of remaining games in the number of high-securing obstacle games is less than or equal to a predetermined value (for example, 4 games), the continuous production that is a loss is not executed, but the continuous production that is a hit (bonus winning, AT lottery winning) is Can be executed. In other words, when the number of remaining games in the number of high-securing obstacle games is less than or equal to a predetermined value (for example, 4 games), the production of completing one game can be executed in both cases of loss and hit, but continuous production is a hit. Can only be executed if.
(7) When the number of ceiling G in the advantageous section (1500 games) is less than the predetermined value (4 games), the continuous effect is not executed.
(8) The selection tendency of the effect differs depending on whether the number of ceiling G in the advantageous section is less than or equal to the predetermined value or more than the predetermined value (frequency of continuous effect, expectation of big hit of predetermined effect, etc.).
(9) When a new shift to the "advantageous section" is made in the middle of the continuous production of loss in the "normal section" (for example, the production of defeat).
(9-1) Rewrite the continuous production (stage change production in the "advantageous section" transition game, "turning around and having a character, Stechen suggestion dialogue", etc.). The rate at which the effect is rewritten in the middle of the continuous effect (defeat) is higher than the rate at which the effect is rewritten during the continuous effect (victory).
(9-2) Change the stay stage after executing the continuous production to the end. The ratio of notifying that the sub-control board S has moved to the "advantageous section" during the execution of the continuous production, and the sub in the game when the continuous production is not executed. The ratio of notifying that the shift has been made on the control board S side is different.

<< Point 2 >>
(1) The stay stage (stage A group) that can be set in the "normal section" is configured to be selectable by the player. For example, it can be selected by operating the sub input button.
(2) The lottery result of whether or not it will be the 1: "advantageous section" of the stay stage A group will be announced in advance when the start lever is turned on in the game.
Stay stage A group 2: The lottery result of whether or not it will be an "advantageous section" will be announced later at the end of the game (or at the time of the next game bet (when the start lever is operated when the replay stop is displayed)).
(3) When the "normal section" is changed from the "advantageous section" and the stay stage other than the stay stage A group, the stay stage is selected from the stay stage A group. When the stage changes from the "advantageous section" and the stay stage other than the production group A to the "normal section", the stay stage is maintained.
(4) The AT expectation degree when the advantageous section indicator YH is turned off and the stay stage A group is turned off is different from the AT expectation degree when the advantageous section indicator YH is turned off and other than the stay stage A group. For example, from the one with the lowest AT expectation, "advantageous section indicator YH is turned off and stay stage A group → advantageous section indicator YH is lit and stay stage A group → advantageous section indicator YH is lit and other than stay stage A group".
(5) The transition of the stay stage (stay stage A group → stay stage B group) is triggered by the production in the game that changed from the "normal section" to the "advantageous section" (including the production of 1G completion and the continuous production). There is a difference between the rate of occurrence and the rate of transition of the stay stage triggered by the production in the game that changed from the "advantageous section" to the "normal section".

<< Point 3 >>
(1) The higher the number of guaranteed games in the "advantageous section" (the number of remaining games with high secured obstacle games), the higher the degree of expectation (the degree of expectation of winning the AT lottery, the degree of expectation of winning the bonus). The higher the probability of selecting the stay stage, and the smaller the number of guaranteed games in the "advantageous section" (the number of remaining games of the number of high-securing obstacle games), the higher the expectation (expectation that has won the AT lottery, and the bonus). There is a high probability of choosing a stay stage with a high degree of expectation.
(2) When the remaining guaranteed games in the "advantageous section" are less than or equal to a predetermined value (4 games or less), the smaller the number of remaining guaranteed games, the lower the probability of selecting the effect of shifting the stay stage.
(3) If you are not staying in a stay stage with a high degree of expectation (expectation that you have won the AT lottery, expectation that you have won the bonus) and a production with a high degree of expectation is selected, the degree of expectation Expectation (winning AT lottery) than when a production with high expectation is selected in a situation where you are staying in a high stay stage (expectation of winning AT lottery, expectation of winning bonus) The degree of expectation that you are doing, the degree of expectation that you have won the bonus) is high.

<< Point 4 >>
(1) If you win the BB in the "Resurrection possibility production state",
(1-1) The AT addition lottery may or may not be executed during the BB.
(1-2) After the end of BB, the state may or may not be changed to the "AT in progress state".
(1-3) The AT addition lottery may or may not be executed during the BB.
(1-4) When the state shifts to the "AT in progress state" after the end of the BB, the number of remaining AT games may or may not be subtracted by one game in the "recoverable / non-recoverable effect state".
(2) The AT addition lottery may or may not be executed in the "state for effect of resurrection". When the AT addition lottery is executed
(3) If you win the reverse push white 7 match replay or the forward push black 7 match replay in "Resurrection possibility production state", avoidance navigation will occur and at the timing after executing the resurrection production (success) Notify the number of additional games.
(4) If a role that can shift to the "advantageous section" is won in the "recovery possibility effect state", the advantage section indicator YH turns off at the start timing of the next game, while the "revival possibility effect state" If you win a role that can shift to the "advantageous section" in the next game when you do not win the revival lottery, the advantageous section indicator YH may light up at the start timing of the next game.
(5) In the case of the specification that the AT addition lottery is not performed although it is an advantageous section in the "state for revival possibility production"
(5-1) Even if you win a role (for example, Watermelon A) that can execute an AT addition lottery in the "Resurrection possibility production state", the number of AT games will not be added, but 1G that executes the resurrection production (success) If a winning combination (for example, watermelon A) that can be added in (“AT in progress”) is won, the number of AT games can be added.
(6) Bonus when the bonus is won and the resurrection production (success) is executed in the resurrection production execution game when "Battle production 3G + resurrection production (failure) 1G" is scheduled to be executed as the production at the end of AT. The number of AT games will not be added in the middle, but the number of AT games will be added in the bonus when the bonus is won and the revival production (success) is executed in the battle production execution game (one of 3G). Can be. In addition, the production tendency during the bonus may be different.

<< Point 5 >>
(1) When the game state A and the game state B are held as the states related to the AT which is the "advantageous section".
(1-1) The winning expectation of the AT addition lottery is "game state A> advantageous state B" (the number of AT games is more likely to be added in the game state A than in the game state B, or the AT addition game. a lot).
(1-2) The number of additional additions that can be added when the combination X is won in the game state A and the number of additional additions that can be added when the combination Y is won in the game state A are different.
(1-3) The number of additions that can be added when the combination X is won in the game state B and the number of additions that can be added when the combination Y is won in the game state B are the same.

<< Point 6 >>
(1) The display mode of the fall avoidance suggestion display is as follows: when the start lever is operated (A), after the first stop to before the second stop (B), and after the second stop to before the third stop (C). Make a difference.
(1-1) The display mode of the fall avoidance suggestion display is in the order of "A <B <C" from the one that is inconspicuous to the player.
(2) When the AT is terminated from the "AT in progress state" and "RT1" state to the "low probability state" and "RT1", and the push order combination is won, the push order display device is used for pushing. The order navigation is displayed, but the push order navigation is not displayed on the effect display device (displayed as "???").
(3) If a prize 18 (falling combination) is won in the third stop in a game in which the fall avoidance suggestion display is displayed, the display is maintained in the same display mode as the display mode after the second stop. ..
(4) When the start lever is operated in a situation where the power is restored and the initial processing related to the display of the effect display device is not completed, the initial processing related to the display of the effect display device is completed. At the previous timing, the push order navigation is executed by the voice from the speaker (for example, "Left!").
(5) Even in a state related to AT that is highly profitable for the player, such as a "additional specialization state", when the fall combination is won, the fall avoidance suggestion effect is displayed with priority.
(6) Even if the falling combination wins in the "advantageous section", the "advantageous section" is maintained.
(7) When the falling combination is configured to be a pushing order combination (whether or not to display a stop is determined by the pushing order), a pushing order combination (pushing order bell, etc.) that is not a falling combination is won and the pushing order is selected. When the navigation is executed and stopped in a push order different from the push order navigation, the display of the effect display device may be dimmed, while when the falling role is won, the display is stopped in a different push order from the push order navigation. In that case, the display of the effect display device is not dimmed (or the display of the fall avoidance suggestion effect is not dimmed).

<< Point 7 >>
(1) When configured to shift to "RT3" and "AT ready state" after the end of BB related to BB with setting difference (similar to change example 1 from this embodiment).
(1-1) By winning a winning combination with a high probability in "RT3", the player wins the AT addition lottery (100% may be won or may be won with a predetermined probability).
(1-2) The RT state to be transferred after the end of the BB is different depending on the type of the BB combination, and the AT addition lottery execution mode (the combination to execute the addition lottery, the addition) according to the combination that is likely to appear in any of the RT states. The lottery winning probability, the number of AT additional games) will be different.
(1-3) Bonus A->RT1-> Promotional Replay A-> RT3 (high replay probability), Bonus B->RT2-> Promotional Replay B-> RT3. The winning rate or the average number of additional games is different.
(1-4) If bonus A → RT1, bonus B → RT2, and promotion replay A and promotion replay B are provided, the winning probability of promotion replay A and promotion replay B is high between RT1 and RT2. It's different.
(1-5) Bonus A → RT1 and bonus B → RT2 are configured so that the promotion replay and the fall replay can be won, respectively, and the winning probabilities of the promotion replay and the fall replay differ between RT1 and RT2.
(1-6) There is a setting difference After the BB ends, it shifts to the dedicated RT state (“RT3” and “AT preparation state”), and then shifts to the “additional specialization state” triggered by the promotion replay.

<< Point 8 >>
(1) It has 1st class BB-B1 and 1st class BB-B2, and shifts to "RT3" after the completion of 1st class BB-B1 and shifts to "RT4" after the completion of 1st class BB-B2. When configured as.
(1-1) The execution mode of the AT additional lottery (the combination of executing the additional lottery, the additional lottery winning probability, the number of AT additional games) is different between "RT3" and "RT4".
(1-2) The production tendency is different between the BB start effect related to the type 1 BB-B1 and the BB start effect related to the type 1 BB-B2 (the selection rate of the highly expected BB start effect is different).
(2) When the replay 04 is stopped and displayed before the replay 06 in the "AT ready state" and "RT3", the game shifts to "RT4" and the treasure chest loss effect is not executed. In "RT4", the re-gaming role promoted to "RT3" is won. In addition, when "RT4" is changed to "RT3", even if the player wins the replay-E1 to E3 after that, the treasure box opening addition effect is not executed.
(3) It has multiple types of BB roles, and even if the BB role is won, it is difficult for the player to visually determine which BB role has won, and depending on the type of BB, after the BB is completed. The RT state of the above is different, and the execution mode of the AT addition lottery when the promotion re-game combination is won differs depending on the RT state. When configured in this way, the selection tendency of the treasure chest acquisition effect performed during BB differs depending on the type of BB (gold treasure chest, silver treasure chest, copper treasure chest, etc.). The number distribution is different).

<< Point 9 >>
(1) There is a setting difference that was won during AT. There is a ratio that the same production mode is obtained between the BB start effect related to BB and the start effect related to BB that was won during AT, and there is a setting difference that was won during non-AT. There is a difference between the BB start effect related to BB and the start effect related to BB with no setting difference won during non-AT, which have the same effect mode.

<< Point 10 >>
(1) The setting value is suggested when the BB without setting difference is won in the "normal section" rather than the probability that the effect suggesting the setting value is selected when the BB with the setting difference is won in the "advantageous section". The probability that the production will be selected is higher.
(2) The BB won during non-AT selects a different BB start effect according to the setting difference, but the BB won during AT selects the same BB start effect regardless of the setting difference.
(3) The ratio of the BB start effect to the same effect mode between the BB with the setting difference won during AT and the BB without the setting difference won during AT, and the setting difference between BB and non-AT won during non-AT. The ratio of the BB start effect to the same effect mode is different between the winning BB and the BB with no setting difference.

<< Point 11 >>
(1) "No setting difference combination (combination whose winning rate does not differ depending on the set value) + BB" When winning, select "Advantageous section indicator lighting + effect B" that can be executed when "No setting difference combination" is won. The probability of selecting "advantageous section indicator off + effect A", which can be executed at the time of winning the "combination with setting difference (combination with different winning rate depending on the set value)", is higher than the probability of selecting {"rare". "Role + BB time" is a production that encourages the winning of BB (for example, a battle production) rather than a production that fuels the transition to a high-probability state (for example, a production that shifts to a stay stage that can stay in a high-probability state). Is easier to execute}.
(2) When a predetermined role (for example, cherry) is won, it is configured to shift to a high probability state at 100%, and the distribution of the number of high-securing obstacle games is "50% → 3G, 40% → 20G, 10%". → 50G ”, and if 3G is selected, the battle will be defeated, and in other cases, the battle will be won. In addition, the degree of expectation of the length of the number of high-accuracy games (whether it is 20 games or 50 games) differs depending on the opponent who won the battle. Further, in the case of the above example, the effect of inciting the continuation is possible at the 20th Gth (it is an effect of inciting whether the game is 20 games or 50 games, and if it succeeds, it is definite that the game is 50 games). ..

<< Point 12 >>
(1) It has a predetermined freeze effect that can be executed in the "normal section", and the probability of occurrence of the freeze effect differs depending on the set value.
(1-1) In the "advantageous section", the predetermined freeze effect is not executed.
(1-2) The predetermined freeze effect is more likely to be executed in the "normal section" than in the "advantageous section".
(1-3) The predetermined freeze effect can be executed in the BB winning game with a setting difference.
(1-4) The predetermined freeze effect can be executed in the BB winning game with a setting difference.
(1-5) The predetermined freeze effect can be executed at the time of loss.

<<< Configuration applicable to this example >>>
The configuration applicable to the spinning machine according to this example will be described in detail below. It should be noted that any of the configurations detailed below can be applied to all the above-described embodiments, one configuration detailed below may be applied, or a plurality of configurations detailed below may be applied. I will add that you may do it.

<< Memory map configuration >>
First, with reference to FIG. 59, a part of the configuration of the memory map in the RAM (sometimes referred to as the first RAM) of the main control board M applicable to the spinning machine according to this example will be described in detail. In the area shown in the figure, from the upper address, (1) "setting value data": area for data related to the number that manages the setting stage, (2) "external signal system data": external signal output. Area for storing related information, (3) "RAM check sum data": Data used in the check sum calculation process executed when the power is turned on, and calculated from the data stored in the RAM when the power is turned off. An area for storing the stored data and storing information for calculating a specific value (for example, "0") in the checksum calculation process executed when the power is turned on, (4) "Control command buffer": Sub Area for storing command information to be sent to the control board side, (5) "Stack pointer temporary storage buffer": Information used when power is turned off and restored, and is stored in the current stack pointer when power is turned off. Area for storing existing data and storing information to be stored in the stack pointer when the power is turned off and on, (6) "Unused area": Area for storing areas not used for games, (7) "Saved data" 1 to save data 8 ”: Areas are used in the order of RAM in which the data to be saved may be written to the maximum in design by a CALL instruction, a PUSH instruction, or the like. In this configuration, the highest address indicated by the stack pointer is "7FF8H" by design, but if an unexpected problem (such as an unexpected power failure) occurs, it is higher than "7FF8H". There is a possibility that the stack pointer will point to the address of. In that case, the saved data may be stored beyond the area of "backed data 1 to saved data 8" reserved as the area of the saved data in advance. In consideration of such a situation, the data that does not affect the progress of the game (the influence is small) to the address (the address close to "7FF8H") that the stack pointer may indicate when the unexpected problem occurs. It is preferable to configure it to store data). Specifically, by providing an address for storing the "set value data" at an address that is at least one address free from the "evacuated data 1 to the saved data 8" secured as the area of the data to be saved in advance, the game is played. It is possible to provide a game machine that does not give a disadvantage not only to the person but also to the game field. In the figure, (5) "stack pointer temporary storage buffer" is data that is not used in the situation where the game is in progress after the power is turned off and restored, and (4) "control command buffer". Is unlikely to affect the progress of the game even if the command cannot be sent to the sub-control board S side, and (3) "RAM check sum data" is used in the situation where the game is progressing after the power is turned off and restored. It is data that does not occur, and (2) "external signal system data" is data to be transmitted to the hall computer, and therefore has little influence on the progress of the game. On the other hand, (1) "set value data" is data related to the set value that affects the result of the game, so that, for example, if the set value is changed to a low set value, the player will be significantly disadvantaged. there is a possibility. Furthermore, for example, if the set value is changed to a high setting value, there is a possibility that a significant disadvantage will occur in the playground. As described above, (1) "set value data" is important data for the normal progress of the game. For this reason, in (1) to (7) in the figure, (1) "set value data" is the highest data (data stored in the higher address). In other words, the addresses between (1) "set value data" and (7) "save data 1 to save data 8" are (2) "external signal system data" and (3) "RAM check sum data". , (4) "Control command buffer", (5) "Stack pointer temporary storage buffer", (6) "Unused area". With this configuration, even if a problem occurs in the gaming machine and the number of data saved from the stack pointer to the RAM exceeds the design, the RAM that is not used for the game is provided. Therefore, it is possible to configure the gaming machine so that an abnormal state is unlikely to occur. In addition, (2) "external signal system data", (3) "RAM checksum data", (4) "control command buffer", (5) "stack pointer temporary storage buffer", (6) "unused area" There is no problem even if the order of the addresses that store the five data of is changed. For example, even if the upper addresses are stored in the order of "(3)->(2)->(4)->(5)->(6)". Alternatively, the data may be stored in the order of "(6)->(5)->(3)->(2)->(4)" from the upper address. Further, (6) may be configured so as not to provide an "unused area". The data stored in the RAM areas (2) to (5) above does not make it impossible to insert a game medal even if the data stored in the RAM area is changed (game medal). There is no error that makes it impossible to input).

The area for storing the "set value data" shown in FIG. 59, in other words, the area (1) in FIG. 59 may be configured to store the following data.
(A) Total score data: An area for storing data related to the number of game medals that play the same role as the total number of game medals that can be inserted in an enclosed type rotating game machine that does not use actual game medals (total score data). When the score data is stored in the area (1) in FIG. 59, it may be configured to have 2 bytes as the area (1) in FIG. 59).
(B) Minimum game time: Data for counting the minimum game time of one time (counter value is subtracted for each interrupt process) (minimum game time of one time is 4.1 seconds)
(C) Counter for the number of acquired sheets when the BB is operated: A counter for determining whether or not the condition (number of payouts) for ending the BB is satisfied (counter corresponding to the value given to the player with the game value). Subtract the value)
(D) Counter for the number of acquired cards when the MB is activated: A counter for determining whether or not the condition (number of payouts) for ending the MB is satisfied (counter corresponding to the value given to the player with the game value). Subtract the value)
It should be noted that the above (A) to (D) and the "set value data" may be configured to be stored (stored at different addresses), or only one of them may be stored. good. Further, in the case of configuring so that a plurality of data can be stored, all of the plurality of data are stored at an address higher than the areas (2) to (7) in FIG. 59 (providing an area for storing). It is preferable to configure it so as to do so. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not give a disadvantage to the player or the playing field. Furthermore, if the address is at least higher than the area (6), the highest address indicated by the stack pointer is "7FF8H" by design, but an unexpected problem (unexpected power failure, etc.) occurred. In some cases, the stack pointer may indicate an address higher than "7FF8H", but it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not give a disadvantage to the player or the amusement park.

<< Actions related to the display of replay stop >>
Next, with reference to FIG. 60, the action of the replay game applicable to the spinning machine according to this example in the winning game will be described in detail. In addition, the configuration illustrated below illustrates a configuration in which a game medal can be inserted even while the stop display of the re-game is displayed.

First, in the game that won the re-game (the previous game is a loss), two reels are stopped and one reel (also called the final reel) is rotating, and the 1-bet lamp D211 and the 2-bet lamp D212, While the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the stop button corresponding to the final reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and the re-game symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing (1) in the figure. .. After that, the stop button is released (on → off) at the timing of (2) in the figure, and then the replay lamp D290 lights up at the timing of (3) in the figure. After that, at the timing (4) in the figure, the 2-bet lamp D212 and the 3-bet lamp D213 are turned off at substantially the same time. After that, at the timing (5) in the figure, the 2-bet lamp is set as an automatic bet operation related to the re-game that is stopped and displayed (when the re-game is stopped and displayed, a bet is placed without inserting a game medal or operating the bet button). D212 lights up. After that, at the timing (6) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes effective, and the 3-bet lamp D213 lights up and the 3-bet lamp D213 lights up as the automatic betting operation related to the replay displayed as a stop. At about the same time, the start lamp D180 and the turnable lamp D300 are turned on (the turnable lamp D300 may be configured to blink).

Here, the characteristic points of the action in the figure will be described in detail below.

<Structure 1>
The start lamp D180 and the 3-bet lamp D213 related to the next game in which the replay is stopped and displayed are configured to light at substantially the same timing. When the insertable lamp D300 is turned on after the start lamp D180, when the player wants to insert the game medal, it is recognized that the game medal cannot be inserted by visually recognizing that the start lamp D180 is turned on first. On the other hand, if the start lamp D180 is turned on after the turnable lamp D300, it may be recognized that the game cannot be started. Therefore, by lighting the insertable lamp D300 and the start lamp D180 substantially at the same time as described above, it is possible to facilitate the player's judgment regarding the insertion of the game medal and the operation of the start lever D50, and the wrong game medal can be obtained. It is possible to prevent turning on and operation of the start lever D50.

<Structure 2>
The 1-bet lamp D211 is always lit from the bet operation timing related to the game in which the re-game is stopped and displayed to the end of the game in the next game in which the re-game is stopped and displayed. With this configuration, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the automatic betting operation by winning the re-game has been performed, and it is possible to notify the player that the re-game has been won as soon as possible, so that the progress of the game can be promoted. Can be smooth.

<Structure 3>
The lighting of the re-game lamp D290 based on the stop display of the re-game is at a timing before the lighting of the start lamp D180. In this way, by turning on the re-game lamp D290 first, it is notified first that the re-game has been won, and then the start lamp D180 is turned on so that the start lever D50 can be operated by the re-game winning. By notifying the player of the fact, the player can smoothly grasp the game situation.

<Structure 4>
The lighting of the re-game lamp D290 based on the stop display of the re-game is at a timing before the lighting of the turnable lamp D300. In this way, by turning on the re-game lamp D290 first, it is notified first that the re-game has been won, and then, by turning on the insertable lamp D300, it is announced that the game medal can be inserted. This makes it possible to smoothly grasp the game situation.

<Structure 5>
The lighting of the re-game lamp D290 based on the stop display of the re-game is set before the lighting of the 3-bet lamp D213. In this way, by turning on the re-game lamp D290 first, it is notified first that the re-game has been won, and it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the automatic betting operation by the re-game winning has been performed. Since it is possible to announce that the re-game has been won as soon as possible, the progress of the game can be smoothed.

<Structure 6>
The lighting of the re-game lamp D290 based on the stop display of the re-game is set before the lighting of the 2-bet lamp D212. In this way, by turning on the re-game lamp D290 first, it is notified first that the re-game has been won, and it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the automatic betting operation by the re-game winning has been performed. Since it is possible to announce that the re-game has been won as soon as possible, the progress of the game can be smoothed.

<Structure 7>
Regarding the lighting of the 2-bet lamp D212 and the 3-bet lamp D213 related to the next game in which the replay is stopped and displayed, the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit after the 2-bet lamp D212 is lit (what are the 2-bet lamp D212 and the 3-bet lamp D213? Does not light up at about the same time). With such a configuration, it becomes easy for the player to recognize that the automatic betting operation by winning the re-game has been performed, and the progress of the game can be smoothed.

<Structure 8>
After the replay is stopped and displayed, the 2-bet lamp D212 and the 3-bet lamp D213 are turned off at substantially the same time. If a plurality of lamps (2-bet lamp D212 and 3-bet lamp D213) are lit, it becomes difficult to grasp the gaming state. Therefore, by turning off the 2-bet lamp D212 and the 3-bet lamp D213 almost at the same time, the player You will be able to quickly grasp the game status.

<Structure 9>
The lighting timing of the re-game lamp D290 based on the stop display of the re-game is earlier than the extinguishing timing of the 2-bet lamp D212 after the stop display of the re-game. In this way, by turning on the re-game lamp D290 first, it is notified first that the re-game has been won, and it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the automatic betting operation by the re-game winning has been performed. Since it is possible to announce that the re-game has been won as soon as possible, the progress of the game can be smoothed.

<Structure 10>
The lighting timing of the re-game lamp D290 based on the stop display of the re-game is earlier than the extinguishing timing of the 3-bet lamp D213 after the stop display of the re-game. In this way, by turning on the re-game lamp D290 first, it is notified first that the re-game has been won, and it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the automatic betting operation by the re-game winning has been performed. Since it is possible to announce that the re-game has been won as soon as possible, the progress of the game can be smoothed.

<Structure 11>
The lighting timings of the start lamp D180 and the 3-bet lamp D213 related to the next game in which the replay is stopped and displayed are substantially the same. With such a configuration, it is possible to promptly notify the player that the operation of the start lever D50 is effective, so that the progress of the game can be smoothed.

<< Other Actions 1 >>
Here, an action different from the configuration of FIG. 60 in the winning game of the replay applicable to the spinning machine according to this example will be described in detail below as another action 1.

<Structure 12>
The 2-bet lamp D212 and the 3-bet lamp D213 may be configured to be always lit from the bet operation timing related to the game in which the re-game is stopped and displayed to the end of the game in the next game in which the re-game is stopped and displayed. With this configuration, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the automatic betting operation has been performed by winning the re-game, and it is possible to notify that the re-game has been won as soon as possible, so that the progress of the game can be achieved. Can be smoothed.

<Structure 13>
The lighting timing of the re-game lamp D290 based on the stop display of the re-game and the extinguishing timing of the 2-bet lamp D212 after the stop display of the re-game may be configured substantially at the same time. I want to notify the player that the automatic betting operation is being performed, but if the bet lamp (2-bet lamp D212) is kept on, it will be difficult to grasp the game status, so the 2-bet lamp D212 is temporarily turned off. By doing so, it is possible to smoothly grasp the game state, and further, the lighting timing of the 2-bet lamp D212 related to the next game in which the re-gaming lamp D290 is stopped and displayed (may be the lighting timing of the insertable lamp D300). It is possible to notify in advance that it is not necessary to insert the game medal by turning on the lamp before.

<Structure 14>
The lighting timing of the re-game lamp D290 based on the stop display of the re-game and the extinguishing timing of the 3-bet lamp D213 after the stop display of the re-game may be configured substantially at the same time. I want to notify the player that the automatic betting operation is being performed, but if the bet lamp (3-bet lamp D213) is kept on, it will be difficult to grasp the game state, so the 2-bet lamp D212 is temporarily turned off. By doing so, it is possible to smoothly grasp the game state, and further, the lighting timing of the 3-bet lamp D213 related to the next game in which the re-gaming lamp D290 is stopped and displayed (may be the lighting timing of the insertable lamp D300). It is possible to notify in advance that it is not necessary to insert the game medal by turning on the lamp before.

<Structure 15>
If the re-game is won in a certain game and the re-game is also won in the next game of the certain game, the re-game lamp D290 is turned on based on the display that the re-game related to the certain game is stopped. Therefore, the re-game lamp D290 may be configured to continue to light until the end of the game of the game one after another. In this way, by continuously lighting the replay lamp D290, the player can be notified of the winning of the replay as soon as possible, and the progress of the game can be smoothed.

<Structure 16>
Various lamps such as the re-game lamp D290, the 3-bet lamp D213, the 2-bet lamp D212, the 1-bet lamp D211, the start lamp D180, and the insertable lamp D300, triggered by the third stop operation (or the re-game symbol stop display). You may perform control of. With such a configuration, it is possible to execute the notification by the lamp according to the progress timing of the game, and it becomes easy for the player to grasp the progress status of the game.

<Structure 17>
The lighting timings of the replay lamp D290, the start lamp D180, and the insertable lamp D300 may be configured to be substantially simultaneous. With this configuration, it is possible to clearly notify that the lamp is lit based on the stop display of the replay.

<Structure 18>
Based on the stop display of the replay, the 3-bet lamp D213, the 2-bet lamp D212, and the 1-bet lamp D211 are turned off almost at the same time, and then the 3-bet lamp D213, the 2-bet lamp D212, and the 1-bet lamp D211 are turned off. It may be configured to light up at substantially the same time. With this configuration, it is possible to clearly notify that the number of game medals automatically bet when the player wins the re-game is three.

<Structure 19>
Based on the stop display of the replay, the 3-bet lamp D213, the 2-bet lamp D212, and the 1-bet lamp D211 are turned off almost at the same time, and then the 3-bet lamp D213, the 2-bet lamp D212, and the 1-bet lamp D211 are turned off again. The game lamp D290, the start lamp D180, and the insertable lamp D300 may be configured to light at substantially the same time. With this configuration, it is possible to clearly notify that the number of game medals to be automatically bet is 3 when the re-game is won, and it is clear that the lamp is lit based on the stop display of the re-game. Can be notified to.

<< Other actions 2 >>
Here, further, an action different from the configuration of FIG. 60 in the winning game of the replay applicable to the spinning machine according to this example is described in detail below as another action 2 using FIGS. 61 to 63. Describe.

<Action diagram 2 when the replay stop is displayed>
Next, with reference to FIG. 61, the operation applicable to the rotating drum type gaming machine of this example will be described in detail.

First, in the game that won the re-game (the previous game is a loss), two reels are stopped and one reel (also called the final reel) is rotating, and the 1-bet lamp D211 and the 2-bet lamp D212, While the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the stop button corresponding to the final reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and the re-game symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing (1) in the figure. At about the same time, the re-game lamp D290 is turned on, and at substantially the same time, the 2-bet lamp D212 and the 3-bet lamp D213 are turned off. After that, the 2-bet lamp D212 is turned on at the timing (2) in the figure. After that, the 3-bet lamp D213 is turned on at the timing (3) in the figure. After that, the stop button is released (on → off) at the timing of (4) in the figure, and then the operation of the start lever D50 becomes effective at the timing of (5) in the figure, and the start lamp D180 and the start lamp D180 are turned on. Possible lamp D300 lights up almost at the same time. The 1-bet lamp D211 remains lit.

<Action diagram 3 when the replay stop is displayed>
First, in the game that won the re-game (the previous game is a loss), two reels are stopped and one reel (also called the final reel) is rotating, and the 1-bet lamp D211 and the 2-bet lamp D212, While the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the stop button corresponding to the final reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and the re-game symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing (1) in the figure. .. After that, the stop button is released (on → off) at the timing of (2) in the figure, and then the replay lamp D290 lights up at the timing of (3) in the figure. After that, at the timing (4) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes effective, and the start lamp D180 and the turnable lamp D300 are turned on at substantially the same time. The 1-bet lamp D211, the 2-bet lamp D212, and the 3-bet lamp D213 are still lit.

<Action diagram 4 when the replay stop is displayed>
First, in the game that won the re-game (the previous game is a loss), two reels are stopped and one reel (also called the final reel) is rotating, and the 1-bet lamp D211 and the 2-bet lamp D212, While the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the stop button corresponding to the final reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and the re-game symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing (1) in the figure. .. After that, at the timing of (2) in the figure, the stop button is released (on → off), and then at the timing of (3) in the figure, the start lamp D180 and the start lamp D180 and the replay lamp D290 are turned on almost at the same time. The turnable lamp D300 lights up. After that, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes effective at the timing (4) in the figure. The 1-bet lamp D211, the 2-bet lamp D212, and the 3-bet lamp D213 are still lit.

<Action diagram 5 when the replay stop is displayed>
First, in the game that won the re-game (the previous game is a loss), two reels are stopped and one reel (also called the final reel) is rotating, and the 1-bet lamp D211 and the 2-bet lamp D212, While the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the stop button corresponding to the final reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and the re-game symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing (1) in the figure. .. After that, at the timing of (2) in the figure, the stop button is released (on → off), and then at the timing of (3) in the figure, the 1-bet lamp D211 and the 2-bet lamp D212 and the 3-bet lamp D213 are displayed. Turns off at about the same time. After that, at the timing (4) in the figure, the 1-bet lamp D211 and the 2-bet lamp D212 and the replay lamp D290 are turned on at substantially the same time. After that, at the timing (5) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes effective, and the 3-bet lamp D213, the start lamp D180, and the insertable lamp D300 are turned on at substantially the same time.

<Action diagram 6 when the replay stop is displayed>
First, in the game that won the re-game (the previous game is a loss), two reels are stopped and one reel (also called the final reel) is rotating, and the 1-bet lamp D211 and the 2-bet lamp D212, While the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the stop button corresponding to the final reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and the re-game symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing (1) in the figure. .. After that, the stop button is released (on → off) at the timing of (2) in the figure, and then, at the timing of (3) in the figure, the replay lamp D290 lights up almost at the same time as the 2-bet lamp. The D212 and the 3-bet lamp D213 are turned off. After that, the 2-bet lamp D212 is turned on at the timing (4) in the figure. After that, at the timing (5) in the figure, the 3-bet lamp D213 is turned on. After that, at the timing (6) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes effective, and the start lamp D180 and the turnable lamp D300 are turned on at substantially the same time. The 1-bet lamp D211 remains lit.

<Action diagram 7 when the replay stop is displayed>
First, in the game that won the re-game (the previous game is a loss), two reels are stopped and one reel (also called the final reel) is rotating, and the 1-bet lamp D211 and the 2-bet lamp D212, While the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the stop button corresponding to the final reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and the re-game symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing (1) in the figure. .. After that, the stop button is released (on → off) at the timing of (2) in the figure, and then the operation of the start lever D50 becomes effective at the timing of (3) in the figure, and the replay lamp D290 is displayed. The start lamp D180 and the insertable lamp D300 light up at substantially the same time. The 1-bet lamp D211, the 2-bet lamp D212, and the 3-bet lamp D213 are still lit.

<Action diagram 8 when the replay stop is displayed>
First, in the game that won the re-game (the previous game is a loss), two reels are stopped and one reel (also called the final reel) is rotating, and the 1-bet lamp D211 and the 2-bet lamp D212, While the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the stop button corresponding to the final reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and the re-game symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing (1) in the figure. .. After that, at the timing of (2) in the figure, the stop button is released (on → off), and then at the timing of (3) in the figure, the 1-bet lamp D211 and the 2-bet lamp D212 and the 3-bet lamp D213 are displayed. Turns off at about the same time. After that, at the timing (4) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes effective, and the replay lamp D290, the 1-bet lamp D211 and the 2-bet lamp D212, the 3-bet lamp D213, the start lamp D180, and the insertable lamp D300 are activated. And lights up almost at the same time.

<Action diagram 9 when the replay stop is displayed>
First, in the game that won the re-game (the previous game is a loss), two reels are stopped and one reel (also called the final reel) is rotating, and the 1-bet lamp D211 and the 2-bet lamp D212, While the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the stop button corresponding to the final reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and the re-game symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing (1) in the figure. .. After that, the stop button is released (on → off) at the timing of (2) in the figure, and then the replay lamp D290 lights up at the timing of (3) in the figure. After that, at the timing (4) in the figure, the 2-bet lamp D212 and the 3-bet lamp D213 are turned off at substantially the same time. After that, the 2-bet lamp D212 is turned on at the timing (5) in the figure. After that, at the timing (6) in the figure, the 3-bet lamp D213 is turned on. After that, at the timing (7) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes effective, and the start lamp D180 and the turnable lamp D300 are turned on at substantially the same time. The 1-bet lamp D211 remains lit.

<Action diagram 10 when the replay stop is displayed>
First, in the game that won the re-game (the previous game is a loss), two reels are stopped and one reel (also called the final reel) is rotating, and the 1-bet lamp D211 and the 2-bet lamp D212, While the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the stop button corresponding to the final reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and the re-game symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing (1) in the figure. .. After that, the stop button is released (on → off) at the timing of (2) in the figure, and then the replay lamp D290 lights up at the timing of (3) in the figure. After that, at the timing (4) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes effective, and the start lamp D180 and the turnable lamp D300 are turned on at substantially the same time. The 1-bet lamp D211, the 2-bet lamp D212, and the 3-bet lamp D213 are still lit.

Of the configurations exemplified in FIGS. 61 to 63, those having the same configuration as the above-mentioned configurations 1 to 19 can produce the same effect as the above-mentioned configurations 1 to 19.

It should be noted that, as described above, the stop display timing of the re-game symbol, the operation timing of the stop button, the on / off timing of the re-game lamp D290, the on / off timing of the 3-bet lamp D213, the on / off timing of the 2-bet lamp D212, 1 It should be added that there is no problem in combining the lighting / extinguishing timing of the bet lamp D211, the lighting timing of the start lamp D180, and the lighting timing of the turnable lamp D300.

In the above, a configuration in which a game medal can be inserted even while the re-game stop display is displayed has been illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the game medal cannot be inserted while the re-game stop display is displayed. It may be configured (applicable to all configurations described above). In such a configuration, the insertable lamp D300 remains off during the period when the replay is stopped and displayed.

Further, the above-mentioned substantially simultaneous is sufficient if it can be recognized as apparently simultaneous when the player visually recognizes it. For example, it may be a process (lighting / extinguishing timing) executed within a period in which the interrupt process is executed 10 times. For example, there is no problem even if they are almost simultaneous.

<< Configuration related to bet button lamps >>
The configuration of the bet button lamp S50 in the spinning machine according to this example may be as follows.

The process of enabling the bet button D220 from invalid by the process of the main control board M is executed, and then the main control board M sends a command for lighting the bet button lamp S50 to the sub control board S side (main control). The board M may be configured to send a command to the effect that the bet button D220 is enabled on the sub control board S side), and then the sub control board S sends a bet button lamp S50 from the main control board M. The process for lighting the bet button lamp S50 may be executed by receiving the command for lighting the bet button lamp S50. With this configuration, the bet button lamp S50 is controlled to be turned on and off on the sub control board S side, but the bet button D220 is effective depending on the game situation on the main control board M side. The bet button lamp S50 can be reliably turned on, and even if the player visually recognizes the lighting of the bet button lamp S50 and determines whether the bet (bet button D220) is effective, the main control board M side It can be configured so that there is no discrepancy with the game situation.

<< Configuration related to stop button lamp >>
The configuration of the stop button lamp S60 in the spinning machine according to this example may be as follows.

The process of disabling the stop button D40 (any of the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43) is executed by the process of the main control board M, and then the main control board M is the sub control board. A command for lighting the stop button lamp S60 (stop button lamp S60 corresponding to the stop button on which the process for enabling is executed) is transmitted to the S side {the main control board M is the stop button on the sub control board S side. It may be configured to send a command indicating that D40 (any of the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43) is enabled}, and then the sub control board S is the main control board. By receiving the command for turning on the stop button lamp S60 transmitted from M, the process for turning on the stop button lamp S60 may be executed. With this configuration, the stop button lamp S60 is controlled to be turned on and off on the sub control board S side, but the stop button lamp S60 is effective depending on the game situation on the main control board M side. The stop button lamp S60 can be reliably turned on, and the player visually recognizes the lighting of the stop button lamp S60 and the stop button D40 (any of the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43). Even if it is determined whether or not is effective, it can be configured so that there is no discrepancy with the game situation on the main control board M side.

<< Configuration related to reel unit RU applicable to this example >>
As shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, the spinning machine according to this example is provided with each of the reels M50 (M51, M52 and M53) rotatably via the reel unit RU. Note that FIG. 64 is a front view showing the arrangement of the reel unit RU and the hopper H40. FIG. 65 is a cross-sectional view showing the arrangement of the reel unit RU and the hopper H40. The reel unit RU of the spinning machine according to this example is an integrated unit that rotatably stores all three reels M51, M52, and M53. The reel unit RU has a substantially semi-cylindrical shape, and an opening RU10 is formed. The three reels M51, M52 and M53 are provided in the reel unit RU so that the symbols of the three reels M51, M52 and M53 can be visually recognized through the opening RU10. The details will be described later, but each of the three reels is formed by attaching a reel band MO to the reel frame MW.

As shown in FIG. 65, the reel unit RU has a top RU 20 and a bottom RU 30 with an opening RU 10 interposed therebetween. By mounting the bottom RU30 of the reel unit RU on the upper surface of the pedestal portion BU described later, the reel unit RU can be provided on the pedestal portion BU.

<Through hole RU40>
As shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, a plurality of, for example, three through holes RU40 are formed in the front end of the bottom RU 30 of the reel unit RU along the longitudinal direction (horizontal direction) of the front end. There is. The three through holes RU40 are formed so as to correspond to, for example, the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53.

<< Pedestal BU >>
The pedestal portion BU is made of a metal plate or the like and has a substantially plate-like shape. The end portion of the pedestal portion BU is attached to the left side surface, the right side surface, the back surface, etc. of the back box with screws or the like (not shown), and the pedestal portion BU is fixed to the back box. The pedestal BU is attached to the back box so as to extend horizontally. As described above, the reel unit RU is mounted on the pedestal portion BU.

<Screw hole BU10>
At the front end of the pedestal BU, a plurality of, for example, three screw holes BU 10 are formed along the longitudinal direction (horizontal direction) of the front end. The plurality of through holes RU40 formed in the bottom portion RU30 of the reel unit RU described above are formed so as to correspond to each of the plurality of screw holes BU10 of the pedestal portion BU. The three screw holes BU10 are formed so as to correspond to, for example, the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53.

The number and positions of the through holes RU40 and the screw holes BU10 may be arranged in the horizontal direction corresponding to each other, and the reel unit RU may be stably mounted on the pedestal portion BU. Further, only the reel unit RU may be configured to be attached to the pedestal portion BU by the screw hole BU10 (and the screw BS) of the pedestal portion BU, or the reel unit may be configured by the screw hole BU10 (and the screw BS) of the pedestal portion BU. Both the RU and one reel (left reel M51, middle reel M52, or right reel M53) may be configured to be attached to the pedestal BU.

<< How to fix the reel unit RU >>
As shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, the reel unit RU is placed on the pedestal portion BU, and each of the through holes RU40 of the reel unit RU communicates with the screw hole BU10 of the corresponding pedestal portion BU. By positioning the unit RU and screwing the screw BS into the screw hole BU10 through the through hole RU40 of the reel unit RU, the reel unit RU can be attached and held at a fixed position on the pedestal portion BU. By doing so, the reel unit RU can be detachably attached to the pedestal portion BU.

In addition to the case where the reel unit RU is attached by a screwing member such as a screw or a bolt in addition to the screw BS, the reel unit RU may be detachably attached by using a detachable rivet, for example, a member such as a push rivet. It suffices if the reel unit RU can be detachably attached to the pedestal portion BU by an engaging member, a locking member, or the like.

<< Hopper H40 and medal auxiliary tank HS >>
FIG. 66 (a) is a perspective view from the right side of the back surface of the hopper H40, and FIG. 66 (b) is a perspective view from the left side of the back surface of the hopper H40. It should be noted that FIGS. 66 (a) and 66 (b) also show arrows indicating the movement of the screw BS, which will be described later. The arrows indicating the movement of the screw BS are shown in FIGS. 66 (a) and 66 (b) for both the positions (1) and (2) of the screw BS and the hopper H40.

The hopper H40 is a funnel-shaped tank molded of ABS (acrylonitrile butadiene styrene) resin or the like. As shown in FIG. 66, the hopper H40 has a front side wall H42, a left side wall H44, a rear side wall H46, and a right side side wall H48. The front side wall H42, the left side wall H44, the rear side wall H46, and the right side wall H48 are arranged so as to rotate around each other, and an opening H30 is formed by the front side wall H42, the left side wall H44, the rear side wall H46, and the right side wall H48. To. The opening H30 is formed so as to open upward. The medals inserted from the above-mentioned medal insertion slot D170 are introduced into the hopper H40 via the opening H30.

Further, the hopper H40 has a hopper bottom portion H52, a right side inclined portion H54, and a left side inclined portion H56. The right-side inclined portion H54 is arranged on the right side of the hopper H40, and the game medal introduced on the right side of the hopper H40 is guided toward the hopper bottom portion H52, which will be described later, by its own weight. The left inclined portion H56 is arranged on the left side of the hopper H40, and guides the medal introduced on the left side of the hopper H40 toward the hopper bottom H52 by its own weight. Further, the left inclined portion H56 has a covering portion H57. The covering portion H57 extends from the left inclined portion H56 and is arranged so as to cover above substantially the left half of the disk H50 described later. By providing the covering portion H57, it is possible to prevent a plurality of game medals from being connected in a row on the hopper bottom portion H52 so that they cannot fall, and the game medals can be smoothly guided toward the hopper bottom portion H52.

By providing the right side inclined portion H54, the left side inclined portion H56, and the covering portion H57, any of the game medals introduced inside the hopper H40 via the opening H30 can be guided to the hopper bottom portion H52. The medals guided by the right inclined portion H54, the left inclined portion H56, and the covering portion H57 are stored in the hopper bottom portion H52. As described above, the right side inclined portion H54, the left side inclined portion H56, and the covering portion H57 function as a storage inclined portion for storing the game medal inside the hopper H40.

A disk H50 as a rotating body is arranged on the bottom H52 of the hopper. The disk H50 is rotationally driven by the hopper motor H80 described above, and the game medal is ejected from the game medal outlet H60 by the rotational operation of the disk H50. In this way, the medals stored in the hopper H40 can be ejected one by one from the game medal outlet H60.

<Discharge guide unit H62>
Inside the front side wall H42, a discharge guide portion H62 is formed along the front side wall H42. The discharge guide portion H62 has an elongated shape and has an inclined surface H64 formed in an inclined manner. When the hopper H40 is arranged in the back box, the right side of the inclined surface H64 is located below the left side of the inclined surface H64. The width of the inclined surface H64 is formed to be substantially constant, but is formed so as to be slightly widened downward (from the left side to the right side).

The discharge guide unit H62 guides the game medal at the top of the hopper H40 to the medal auxiliary tank HS and stores it in the hopper H40 before the game medal is stored in the hopper H40 and the game medal overflows from the hopper H40. It is a member to reduce the number of medals. A discharge port H66 is formed on the right side of the inclined surface H64, and the game medal guided by the inclined surface H64 is discharged to the medal auxiliary tank HS via the discharge port H66. In this way, the discharge guide unit H62 functions as a discharge inclined portion for discharging the game medal to the outside of the hopper H40. As described above, the right side inclined portion H54, the left side inclined portion H56, and the covering portion H57 function as a storage inclined portion for storing the game medal inside the hopper H40, whereas the discharge guide unit H62 holds the game medal. It functions as a discharge inclined portion for discharging to the outside of the hopper H40, and has a function opposite to that of the right inclined portion H54 and the left inclined portion H56.

Further, the left inclined portion H56, the covering portion H57, and the discharge guide portion H62 all move the game medal from the left side to the right side. That is, the left inclined portion H56, the covering portion H57, and the discharge guide portion H62 all have an inclined downward to the right. The final target of the left side inclined portion H56 and the covering portion H57 is the hopper bottom portion H52, and the final target of the discharge guide portion H62 is the medal auxiliary tank HS. The movement of game medals can be aligned from the left side to the right side.

In the vicinity of the discharge port H66 on the depth side of the inclined surface H64 of the discharge guide portion H62, a protruding wall H58 protruding upward is erected along the longitudinal direction of the inclined surface H64. The protruding wall H58 can prevent the medal placed on the inclined surface H64 from falling onto the bottom of the hopper H52.

<Medal auxiliary tank HS>
The medal auxiliary tank HS has a substantially square columnar shape, and has a bottom surface and four side surfaces. The medal auxiliary tank HS has an opening HS10 at the upper portion, and the medals discharged from the hopper H40 are introduced through the opening HS10 and stored inside the medal auxiliary tank HS. The detailed structure and function of the medal auxiliary tank HS will be described later.

<< Dropping of screw BS of reel unit RU >>
A front door DU is attached to the revolving gaming machine so as to be openable and closable with respect to the back box (the front door DU and the back box may be collectively referred to as a housing). The front door DU is rotatably attached to the back box with the left side of the front door DU (left side when viewed from the player) as the center of rotation. Therefore, the right side of the front door DU (the right side when viewed from the player) has the largest movement distance, and when the front door DU is closed, an impact due to contact or collision with the back box is generated and propagates to the back box. Since the impact is generated on the right side of the revolving gaming machine, the impact on the right side of the revolving gaming machine is the largest, and the impact tends to be gradually weakened on the left side of the revolving gaming machine.

As described above, the reel unit RU is detachably attached to the pedestal portion BU by the screw BS. The screw BS is screwed into the screw hole BU10 of the pedestal portion BU at three points on the left side, the center, and the right side, and the right side screw BS screwed into the screw hole BU10 on the right side receives the largest impact. Therefore, the right side screw BS screwed into the right side screw hole BU10 is most likely to loosen due to an impact, and when the screwing is released, the right side screw BS falls off and falls. Further, the central screw BS screwed into the central screw hole BU10 is also subject to an impact, and may loosen and fall off due to the impact. The left screw BS screwed into the screw hole BU10 on the left side is expected to have a small impact to some extent, but it is naturally possible that the left screw BS will loosen and fall off depending on the degree of impact propagation and the usage time.

<< Position of screw BS and hopper H40 (1) >>
As shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, the hopper H40 (medal payout device H) and the medal auxiliary tank HS are arranged at the lower part of the reel unit RU. In the example shown in FIG. 64, the inclined surface H64 of the hopper H40 is located at least below the right side screw BS among the three screw BSs described above.

When the right side screw BS falls off due to an impact, it first falls freely downward (arrow 1A). The dropped right side screw BS reaches the inclined surface H64, and by the weight of the right side screw BS, it rolls on the inclined surface H64 while being guided by the inclined surface H64 and moves along the inclined surface H64 (arrow 1B). When the right side screw BS reaches the discharge port H66, it freely falls toward the medal auxiliary tank HS (arrow 1C) and is stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS.

In this way, even if the right side screw BS is dropped due to an impact, it can be discharged from the hopper H40, and the dropped screw BS is prevented from entering the hopper H40, and the dropped screw BS prevents the dropped screw BS from entering the hopper H40. It is possible to prevent the disk H50 from hindering the rotational operation or damaging the disk H50, and to operate the hopper H40 in a stable manner.

In the above-mentioned example, only the right side screw BS is targeted, but the hopper H40 is located above the inclined surface H64 of the hopper H40 so that all three left side screw BS, center screw BS, and right side screw BS are located above the inclined surface H64 of the hopper H40. And the reel unit RU may be positioned. Even if any of the screw BSs is dropped, the dropped screw BS can be guided to the medal auxiliary tank HS. Further, in this example, a screw BS for mounting the reel unit RU on the pedestal portion BU is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the front door DU is prone to impact due to contact with the back box or collision. A member such as a screw attached to the right side (right side when viewed from the player) may also be configured to be stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS when it falls off.

<< Position of screw BS and hopper H40 (2) >>
FIG. 67 is a front view showing the arrangement of the reel unit RU and the hopper H40. In the example shown in FIG. 67, among the three screw BSs described above, the inclined surface H64 of the hopper H40 is located below the central screw BS, and the medal auxiliary tank HS is located below the right screw BS. In addition, in FIG. 67, the same configuration as in FIG. 64 is shown with the same reference numerals.

When the right side screw BS falls off due to an impact, it freely falls downward (arrow 2A), remains as it is (without contacting the inclined surface H64), and is stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS.

When the central screw BS falls off due to an impact, it first falls freely downward (arrow 3A). The dropped central screw BS reaches the inclined surface H64, rolls on the inclined surface H64 while being guided by the inclined surface H64 by the weight of the central screw BS, and moves along the inclined surface H64 (arrow 3B). When the central screw BS reaches the discharge port H66, it freely falls toward the medal auxiliary tank HS (arrow 3C) and is stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS.

Prevents the dropped right side screw BS and central screw BS from entering the hopper H40, and prevents the dropped screw BS from hindering the rotational operation of the disk H50 or damaging the disk H50. It can be operated stably.

In the above-mentioned example, the right side screw BS and the center screw BS are targeted, but the left side screw BS also positions the hopper H40 and the reel unit RU so as to be located above the inclined surface H64 of the hopper H40. May be good. Even if any of the screw BSs is dropped, the dropped screw BS can be guided to the medal auxiliary tank HS.

As described above, it is preferable to form a protruding wall H58 protruding upward along the longitudinal direction of the inclined surface H64 on the depth side of the inclined surface H64 of the discharge guide portion H62. By providing the protruding wall H58, it is possible to prevent the screw BS that has fallen off and is placed on the inclined surface H64 from falling to the bottom of the hopper H52. The height of the protruding wall H58 is equal to or higher than the height at which the screw BS rebounds when it falls on the inclined surface H64. It is possible to prevent the screw BS from falling to the bottom H52 of the hopper and prevent the screw BS from interfering with or causing a failure of the disk H50.

In this way, even if the screw BS for attaching the reel unit RU is detached due to vibration caused by opening and closing the front door DU, the detached screw BS does not enter the hopper H40 and assists the medal. By configuring it to fall into the tank HS, the manager of the amusement park can easily recover the detached screw BS.

<< Hopper H400 >>
In the example shown in FIG. 67, when the right side screw BS falls, it passes through the outside of the hopper H40 (the right side of the right side wall surface H48 when viewed from the player) (arrow 2A) and is stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS. The dropped right side screw BS can be shared with the hopper H40 shown in FIG. 64 by storing the dropped right side screw BS in the medal auxiliary tank HS without passing through the inside of the hopper H40.

On the other hand, as shown by the broken line in FIG. 67, the hopper H400 having a structure in which the right side wall surface H48 is extended to the right side (right side wall surface H480) may be used. The hopper H400 has a bottom opening H410 formed at the bottom near the right side wall H480, and when the right screw BS falls, it passes through the inside of the hopper H400 and further passes through the bottom opening H410 to enter the medal auxiliary tank. It is stored in HS. In this way, through the bottom opening H410, the dropped right side screw BS can be accurately guided to the medal auxiliary tank HS without invading the hopper H40.

<< Extension RU50 >>
In the above-mentioned example, when the screw BS falls off, it freely falls toward the lower medal auxiliary tank HS as it is. On the other hand, as shown by the broken line in FIG. 65, the extension portion EN may be provided at the lower part of the reel unit RU or the pedestal portion BU. By providing the extension portion EN, even if the screw BS falls off, it does not fall immediately, but can be once guided by the extension portion EN and then dropped into the medal auxiliary tank HS. In this way, the extension portion EN makes it possible to match the position where the screw BS is attached with the position of the medal auxiliary tank HS, and it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in the position where the medal auxiliary tank HS is arranged.

<< Configuration of medal auxiliary tank HS >>
<Through hole HS20 for full detection electrode>
As shown in FIG. 68, the medal auxiliary tank HS is formed with at least two through holes HS20 for full detection electrodes on the inner surface. Further, at the lower part of the back surface of the back box, two full detection electrodes DE and a continuity detection substrate CC (see FIG. 65) are provided. The two full detection electrodes DE have an elongated shape, extend parallel to each other and horizontally, and are arranged so as to project forward. The two full detection electrode through holes HS20 of the medal auxiliary tank HS are formed corresponding to the two full detection electrodes DE. When the medal auxiliary tank HS is arranged at the bottom of the back box, the two full detection electrode DBs pass through the corresponding fullness detection electrode through holes HS20 and project toward the inside of the medal auxiliary tank HS.

As the medals are stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS, the uppermost portion UL of the stored game medals (see FIG. 69 (c)) gradually rises and approaches the two full detection electrodes DE. Note that FIG. 69 (c) is a cross-sectional view showing a state in which game medals are stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS. The line of the uppermost portion UL shown in FIG. 69 (c) is a line connecting the contours of the game medals located in the uppermost portion UL among the game medals stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS (for example, an envelope line). (For convenience, the uppermost UL is illustrated with a smooth curve). When the game medals stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS come into contact with the two full detection electrodes DE and the two full detection electrodes DE conduct with each other through the plurality of medals, between the two full detection electrodes DE. An electrical circuit is formed. Due to the formation of the electric circuit, the continuity detection board CC outputs a signal indicating that the continuity is conducted between the two full detection electrodes DE. By doing so, when the game medals are stored up to the positions of the two full detection electrodes DE, the medal full error can be detected.

The number of full detection electrodes DE is not limited to two, but may be three or more. For example, in the case of providing three, in addition to the two full detection electrodes described above, one full detection electrode is newly provided below the two full detection electrodes, and the newly provided one is provided. It can be configured so that a medal full error can be detected by conducting the fullness detection electrode and any one of the two fullness detection electrodes described above, and by making such a configuration, the medal assist Even when the game medals are not evenly stored in the tank HS (for example, when the game medals are stored unevenly to the right side of the medal auxiliary tank HS), the medal full error can be detected.

<< Material of bis BS and material of medal >>
The material of the screw BS is magnetizable and conductive. For example, it is made of steel. Further, the material of the medal cannot be magnetized and is conductive. For example, it is made of brass plated or stainless steel. With this configuration, even if the screw BS falls on the medal auxiliary tank HS, the screw BS can be easily taken out from the medal auxiliary tank HS by using a magnet or the like.

<< Relationship between the total length BL of the screw BS and the distance EL between the two full detection electrodes DE >>
The left side screw BS, the center screw BS and the right side screw BS described above are used to attach the reel unit RU to the pedestal portion BU. FIG. 69B is a front view showing the entire screw BS. As this screw BS, one having a total length BL in the longitudinal direction (see FIG. 69 (b)) shorter than the distance EL between the two full detection electrodes DE (see FIG. 69 (a)) is used (of the screw BS). Total length BL <distance EL between two full detection electrodes DE). By doing so, even if the screw BS (for example, the right side screw BS) falls off and enters the medal auxiliary tank HS, it is shorter than between the full detection electrodes DE, so two screw BSs alone are used. It does not conduct with the full detection electrode DE (the screw BS does not get caught in the two full detection electrodes DE). The total length BL of the screw BS is the sum of the thickness (length) of the head and the nominal length. Further, FIG. 69 (a) is a plan view of a back portion of the medal auxiliary tank HS showing a state in which the fullness detection electrode DE protrudes inside the medal auxiliary tank HS.

<< Relationship between the length HR of the seating surface of the screw BS and the diameter ED of the full detection electrode DE >>
The radial length HR of the seat surface of the screw BS (see FIG. 69 (b)) is shorter than the diameter ED of the full detection electrode DE (see FIG. 69 (a)) (diametrical length of the seat surface of the screw BS). Length HR <Diameter ED of full detection electrode DE). By doing so, even if the screw BS falls off and enters the medal auxiliary tank HS, the head of the screw BS will not be caught by one of the full detection electrodes DE, and the screw will not be caught. Even when the BS comes into contact with the full detection electrode DE, it can be immediately detached, and the screw BS alone does not accidentally conduct.

In particular, as shown in FIG. 69 (c), one of the two full detection electrodes DE, the full detection electrode DE (for example, the full detection electrode DE on the right side of FIG. 69 (c)) is already stored. When the medal is in contact with the medal (uppermost portion UL), the other full detection electrode DE (for example, the full detection electrode DE on the left side in FIG. 69 (c)) and the screw BS temporarily come into contact with each other. Even if such a case occurs, the screw BS is not hooked on the full detection electrode DE, and the screw BS can be immediately separated from the full detection electrode DE (see the arrow F in FIG. 69 (c)). , The conduction circuit is not formed via the screw BS, and the full state of the medal auxiliary tank HS is not erroneously determined.

As an example, the case where the reel unit RU is an integrated unit that stores all three reels has been described, but even if it is a separate unit that stores each of the three reels separately, the screw BS It is detachably attached to the pedestal portion BU by the reel, and there is a possibility that the screw BS may come off as well. Therefore, configurations such as the medal auxiliary tank HS and the screw BS can be similarly adopted.

<< Reel band configuration >>
FIG. 70A is a front view showing the entire reel band MO. FIG. 70B is a perspective view showing a state in which the reel band MO is curved. FIG. 70 (c) is an enlarged front view showing the vicinity of the cut M59 of the reel band MO in an enlarged manner. FIG. 70 (d) is an enlarged front view showing the vicinity of the “white seven” symbol in an enlarged manner. The "white seven" symbol is a bonus symbol, and BB is started when "white seven, white seven, white seven" is stopped and displayed on the valid line. The reel band MO has a long plate-like shape (strip shape). As described above, a plurality of symbols are drawn on the reel band MO along the longitudinal direction. The reel band MO is flexible and can be curved. In addition, it has translucency, and the design can be illuminated from the back by the light emitted from the rotating cylinder backlight.

It has a first end M55 and a second end M57 in the longitudinal direction of the reel band MO. The first end M55 and the second end M57 are curved so as to face each other and attached to the reel frame MW to form an annular (cylindrical) reel M50. The reel frame MW is mainly composed of two annular frames of the same size, and the two frames are made of a resin such as plastic to reduce the weight. The two frames are arranged parallel to each other and so that their centers are located on the same axis of rotation. Further, the distance between the two frames is arranged so as to be substantially the same as the width of the reel band MO. The reel M50 can be formed by attaching the reel band MO between the two frames along the outer circumference of the two frames.

<Overlapping part M58 and cut M59>
The reel band MO is formed so that the length of the reel band MO in the longitudinal direction is slightly longer than the length of the entire circumference of the reel frame MW. Therefore, when the reel band MO is attached to the reel frame MW, a portion (superimposed portion M58) where a part of the reel band MO overlaps is generated near the first end portion M55 and the second end portion M57. By doing so, the reel band MO can be attached over the entire circumference of the reel frame MW without creating a gap along the circumferential direction (longitudinal direction of the reel band MO). Further, when the reel band MO is attached to the reel frame MW, a part of the reel band MO overlaps, and a cut M59 is formed by the first end portion M55.

As shown in FIG. 70 (c), the reel band MO is attached to the upper side of the second end portion M57, and the cut M59 is formed by the first end portion M55. When attaching the reel band MO to the reel frame MW in this way, first, when starting to attach the reel band MO, start attaching to the reel frame MW from the second end M57, and then attach the reel frame MW to the reel. While gradually rotating in the same direction as the rotation direction of the M50, the reel band MO is attached from the second end M57 toward the first end M55 along the circumference of the reel frame MW, and finally, the first The reel band MO is pasted on the upper side of the end portion M57 of 2, and the pasting is completed up to the first end portion M55. When the reel band MO is attached in such an order, the first end portion M55 ends to be attached in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the reel M50, and the first end is placed on the reel band MO. The parts M55 are overlapped with each other.

On the other hand, the reel band MO is started to be attached to the reel frame MW from the first end M55, and then the reel band MO is gradually rotated in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the reel M50 while the reel band MO is attached to the first end. Paste along the circumference of the reel frame MW from M55 toward the second end M57, and finally, paste the reel band MO on the upper side of the first end M55 and paste it up to the second end M57. It's over. When the reel band MO is pasted in such an order, the second end portion M57 ends to be pasted in the same direction as the rotation direction of the reel M50, and the second end portion is placed on the reel band MO. M57 is in an overlapping state.

Here, the reel band MO is started to be attached to the reel frame MW from the first end portion M55, and then the second end portion M57 is attached to the reel M50 in the same direction as the rotation direction, and the second end portion M57 is attached onto the reel band MO. In the case where the ends M57 of 2 are overlapped with each other, when the reel M50 rotates by executing the game, the air comes into contact with the cross section of the second end M57 (the air resistance is large). , Air easily enters between the second end M57 and the reel band MO on the lower side thereof, and the reel band MO near the second end M57 is gradually peeled off.

On the other hand, the reel band MO is started to be attached to the reel frame MW from the second end M57, and then the first end M55 is attached in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the reel M50, and the reel band MO is attached. In the case where the first end M55 is overlapped on the reel M55, the second end M57 is overlapped on the reel band MO described above when the reel M50 is rotated by executing the game. Compared with, it is difficult for air to come into contact with the cross section of the first end M55 (air resistance is small), and it is difficult for air to enter between the first end M55 and the reel band MO below it. The reel band MO near the first end M55 is in a state where it is difficult to peel off.

From the above, when the reel band MO is attached to the reel frame MW, the reel band MO is started to be attached to the reel frame MW from the second end M57, and then the first end M55 is opposite to the rotation direction of the reel M50. It is preferable that the first end portion M55 is overlapped on the reel band MO after the pasting is completed in the direction.

<Various errors>
As described above, when the reel band MO is attached to the reel frame MW, the overlapping portion M58 is formed between the first end portion M55 and the second end portion M57, and the first end portion M55 or the second end portion M55 or the second end portion M58 is formed. A cut M59 is formed by any end of the end M57. Since the reel frame MW described above is made of a resin such as plastic, an error may occur during molding. In addition, when assembling the reel frame MW, it may be deformed and an error may occur. Further, since the reel band MO has flexibility, when the reel band MO is attached to the reel frame MW, the reel band MO can be attached in a state where the reel band MO is distorted or the like, or the size of the reel frame MW ( The outer circumference) may be installed in a state slightly different from the design value. When a large symbol (for example, "white seven") is configured to be located on the lower reel band MO of the superposed portion M58, the mounting position of the reel band MO is desired due to these various errors. It is also assumed that the upper reel band MO of the superposed portion M58 overlaps with the large symbol when the position is deviated from the above position, and the large symbol is covered by the upper reel band MO.

In addition, the player may aim at the bonus symbol depending on the game state, and when the bonus symbol is placed near the cut M59, the player may aim at the bonus symbol and press the button. , When the bonus symbol is stopped, the cut M59 may also be visually recognized when the bonus symbol is visually recognized. When various errors as described above occur, it is assumed that not only the symbol but also the deviation of the cut M59 and the deviation of the position of the symbol are visually recognized by the player. If the bonus symbol is stopped and displayed as a symbol combination, the player will pay attention to the bonus symbol with joy because it is a symbol combination that is highly profitable for the player. If you visually recognize the deviation of the position of, there is a possibility that the joy of stopping and displaying the symbol combination that is the bonus symbol will decrease.

<For bonus symbols>
In order to prevent such a situation, a symbol smaller than the largest symbol such as a bonus symbol is arranged at the position closest to the cut M59. Specifically, when the length in the longitudinal direction of the symbol (bonus symbol, etc.) having the longest length in the longitudinal direction (longitudinal direction of the reel band MO) is LL, the length in the longitudinal direction is longer than LL. A short design (longitudinal length SL) is placed closest to both the first end M55 and the second end M57.

In this way, by arranging the symbols having a short length in the longitudinal direction at the positions closest to the first end portion M55 and the second end portion M57, even if various errors occur, these The symbol can be arranged at a position separated from the overlapping portion M58 (cut M59), and it is possible to prevent the symbol from being covered by the reel band MO. Further, even when the above-mentioned various errors occur, it is possible to prevent the player from visually recognizing the deviation of the cut M59, the deviation of the position of the symbol, and the like. In the figure, the length in the longitudinal direction of the bell symbol (the symbol that can form the symbol combination corresponding to the bell) and the length in the longitudinal direction of the cherry symbol (the symbol that can form the symbol combination corresponding to the cherry) are shown. Although it is shown as the same SL, if it is shorter than LL, which is the longitudinal length of the bonus symbol (white seven), the longitudinal length of the bell symbol and the longitudinal length of the cherry symbol are different. There is no problem. Further, the symbols arranged in the vicinity of the cut M59 are not limited to the bell symbol and the cherry symbol, and may not be bonus symbols. For example, a replay symbol (a symbol that can form a symbol combination corresponding to the replay). Or watermelon symbol (a symbol that can form a symbol combination corresponding to watermelon) may be arranged in the vicinity of the cut M59. Further, in this example, the longitudinal length of the bonus symbol (white seven) is compared with the longitudinal length of the symbol (for example, the bell symbol) located near the cut M59, but the present invention is not limited to this. , The length of the bonus symbol (white seven) in the lateral direction may be longer than the length of the symbol (for example, the bell symbol) located near the cut M59 in the lateral direction.

In the above-mentioned example, the longitudinal length of the symbol having the longest longitudinal length (bonus symbol, etc.) is LL, and the longitudinal length of the symbol is shorter than LL. The arrangement of the symbols was decided by comparison, but the length in the lateral direction (direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the reel band MO) is LT, and the length in the lateral direction is shorter than LT. The arrangement of the symbols may be determined by comparison with the length ST in the direction.

The lengths LL and SL in the longitudinal direction described above are the lengths of the difference between the portion of the symbol most protruding upward and the portion of the symbol most protruding downward along the longitudinal direction. Similarly, the length LT and ST in the lateral direction are the lengths of the difference between the portion of the symbol most protruding upward and the portion of the symbol most protruding downward along the lateral direction.

<In the case of a small role pattern>
Furthermore, in addition to bonus symbols, symbols such as watermelon symbols and cherry symbols that do not stop and display on the effective line depending on the operation timing of the stop button even if they are won, in other words, are arranged at a distance of more than the maximum number of slip frames. A symbol that has at least one place (sometimes referred to as a symbol corresponding to a rare role, a symbol that may be missed, etc.) is also a symbol that is a target of the eye-catching, and is a symbol that the player wants to see. Is. In addition, in a game in which a rare role is won, the winning of the rare role may not be notified before the stop button is operated, and even in such a case, the player wants to win the rare role, so it is the rarest. In many cases, the stop button is operated at the operation timing (operation mode) of the stop button, which is easy to acquire a role (which is most profitable for the player). It should be noted that there are some gaming machines that have a large number of winning combinations, such as one that is paid out less than one when a prize is won, and in such a case, the operation timing (operation) of the stop button that is most profitable for the player. The stop button is often operated in the mode). It should be noted that operating the stop button at the operation timing (operation mode) of the stop button, which is the most profitable for the player, may be referred to as an optimum game method.

Here, with reference to FIG. 71, an example of the relationship with the break M59 when the game is executed by the optimum game method will be described in detail below. In the gaming machine illustrated in FIG. 71, the effective lines are the left reel upper stage, the middle reel upper stage, the right reel upper stage (upper stage straight line), the left reel middle stage, the middle reel middle stage, and the right reel middle stage (middle stage straight line). Left reel lower, middle reel lower, right reel lower (lower straight), left reel upper, middle reel middle, right reel lower (right down straight), left reel lower, middle reel middle, right reel upper (right up straight) ) And 5 lines, and the specified number is 3 sheets. In addition, it has a watermelon role and a cherry role as rare roles, and when the watermelon role wins, "watermelon, watermelon, watermelon" stops and displays in a straight line on the effective line, and the cherry role wins. Is configured to stop and display "cherry, any, any" (any symbol indicates that any symbol may be used) on the effective line. Further, since the watermelon symbol and the cherry symbol are both rare roles, the symbol has at least one place where the watermelon pattern and the cherry pattern are arranged apart from each other by the maximum number of slip frames or more.

FIG. 71 is an enlarged front view showing a part of the reel band MO in an enlarged manner. In the figure, only the left reel is illustrated. In the example shown in FIG. 71, watermelon, bell, replay, BAR, and cherry are arranged in this order on the reel band MO, and these symbols are located at positions away from the first end M55 and the second end M57. Is located in. When a rare role is won, the player often operates the stop button aiming at a position on the reel where it is easy to detect the winning of the rare role and it is easy to win the rare role. When a certain watermelon role or cherry role is won, the rare role can be won by playing with the above-mentioned optimum game method. Specifically, as the operation timing of the stop button that can win the rare role, it stops between three frames from the timing when the cherry symbol is located in the upper row to the timing when the cherry symbol is located in the lower row. By operating the button, you can win a prize regardless of whether you win the role of watermelon or the role of cherry. When the stop button is operated at such an operation timing (optimal game method), the range of 9 frames from the upper row of the cherry symbol to the lower row of the watermelon symbol is the range that can be stopped and displayed, as shown in the figure. As described above, even when any range of the nine frames is stopped and displayed (in any of the nine stop display modes), the position away from the first end M55 and the second end M57. (There is no cut M59 near the design placed two frames above the watermelon, and there is no cut M59 near the design placed two frames below the cherry), and the deviation of the cut M59. It is possible to prevent the player from visually recognizing the deviation of the position of the pattern or the pattern.

As shown in the figure, a symbol that can be stopped and displayed when the stop button is operated aiming at a position on the reel where the rare combination is easy to win is displayed in the vicinity of the first end portion M55 and the second end portion M57. The first end portion M55 and the second end portion M57 can be configured not to be positioned at the position where the stop is frequently displayed on the reel. Even when the reels are misaligned, it can be configured so that the misalignment of the cut M59 and the misalignment of the symbol position are less likely to be visually recognized by the player.

In this example, the number of steps for one round of the reel is 336 steps, and the number of symbols arranged on one reel is 20 symbols (20 frames). Here, since 336/20 = 16 remainder 16, there is one 17-step frame (design) and 4 16-step frames (design) as the distribution of 20 frames (designs). The reel is configured. Further, since it is preferable that the cut M59 is configured so as not to be visually recognized by the player as much as possible, the frame (design) adjacent to the cut M59 should have 16 steps with a relatively small number of steps. Is preferable.

As the configuration of the spinning machine in this example, it is not necessary to insert and pay out the actual game medals used in the general spinning machine, and a pseudo game medium converted into data is used. It may be configured to enable the progress of the game. In addition, in such a configuration, the effect of preventing unauthorized access to the inside of the revolving pachinko machine can be improved by the amount that it is not necessary to insert and pay out the actual game medal (for example, the opening for inserting the game medal). It does not have a payout opening, the front door and the back box are integrated, etc., which closes the gap where foreign matter is inserted), reduces the risk of illegal game medals being used, etc. It can also be configured to improve the security against such fraudulent acts (so-called goto acts) (sometimes referred to as an enclosed rotating body type gaming machine). It should be added that the configuration of the enclosed type revolving gaming machine can be applied to any of the above-described embodiments (or configurations). The credit and the credit number display device D200 may not be provided. For example, the credit and the total score (total score) may be combined as one total score, and the main control board M and the payout control may be used. The total score may be increased / decreased or displayed on the board H (which may also be referred to as a game value control board or game value control means) or another board.

In addition, it corresponds to a substantive game medal used in a general rotating body type gaming machine, and has a "score" as a pseudo game medium used for playing a game in an enclosed type rotating body type gaming machine. It may be configured. In addition, "score" may be referred to as "score information", "points", "point information", "game value", and "game value information". Physically existing and substantive game medals can be directly picked up and handled by the player. On the other hand, in the enclosed type revolving gaming machine, the player can proceed with the game without directly handling the actual game medal. The score is not a real game medal, but a pseudo game medium that is converted into data so that a CPU such as a main control board can perform arithmetic processing. Further, the "credit" is a score for temporarily storing the score in a bet-able state or a settlement-capable state, and is data mainly managed by the main control board M. Further, the "total score" is all the scores that can be put into the enclosed type rotating gaming machine, and may be data managed by the main control board or the payout control board. The "total score" corresponds to the number of game medals placed on the medal tray of a general rotating machine that uses a substantive game medal. When the configuration of the enclosed type revolving gaming machine is applied to the above-described embodiment, what is referred to as a "game medal" in the present specification is referred to as "score", "score information", and "score information". There is no problem in treating it as "points", "point information", "game value", "game value information", etc., and "score", "score information", "points", "point information" as appropriate. , There is no problem in calling it as "game value" or "game value information". It is not necessary to have "credit". Further, there is no problem in replacing the credit number display device with the total score display device.

(Second Embodiment)
In addition, in this embodiment, it is configured to have an AT-in-progress state as a state related to AT which is advantageous to the player, and in the AT-in-progress state (so-called AT), the push order navigation is executed to be advantageous to the player. However, the configuration of the gaming machine capable of executing the AT is not limited to the configuration of the present embodiment. Therefore, the configuration of the rotating drum type gaming machine capable of executing an AT different from the configuration of the present embodiment is set as the second embodiment, and only the differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIG. 72 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (third sheet) according to the subroutine of step 1200 of FIG. 16 in the second embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment in the figure is step 4100 (second) and step 4200 (second), that is, after executing the above-mentioned conditional device number management process in step 1450, step 4100 (first step). In 2), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the freeze execution determination process at the start of rotation, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 1550.

Further, in step 1750, after executing the above-mentioned AT in-state start control process, in step 4200 (second), the CPU MC of the main control board M executes the stop freeze execution determination process described later, and in step 3500. Transition. Details will be described later, but in the second embodiment, the reel freezes when the reel starts rotating (when the start lever D50 is operated) and when the reel is stopped (when the final reel is stopped and when the third reel is stopped). (The reel does not start rotating for a predetermined time, and the betting operation related to the next game cannot be executed for a predetermined time) is configured to occur.

Next, FIG. 73 is a flowchart of the freeze execution determination process at the start of rotation according to the subroutine of step 4100 (second) of FIG. 72 in the second embodiment. First, in step 4102, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the state related to AT is newly changed to the "AT in progress state" from the game. Here, "newly in AT state" is a case where the state related to AT becomes "AT in progress state" for the first time after winning the AT lottery (sometimes referred to as AT first hit). As an example, (1) Win a BB in the "high probability state" → shift to the "advantageous BB internal medium state" → the BB symbol (bonus symbol) is stopped and displayed, and the transition to the "advantageous BB state" → BB After finishing, it shifts to the "AT in progress state", (2) If the cherry is won in the "high probability state", the AT lottery is won by 1/2, and after winning the AT lottery, the precursor state { It is a state related to AT to give the player a feeling of expectation regarding whether or not he has won the AT lottery, and even if he does not win the AT lottery related to the winning of the cherry, it is the same as the "precursor state". In the case of being configured to have a "precursor state" which is an effect mode (background effect, etc.)}, the cherry is won in the "high probability state" and is based on the winning of the cherry. Since the AT lottery was won, the game state transitions to the "precursor state" → The game state transition such as the transition to the "AT in progress state" is newly performed because the predetermined number of games that are the end conditions of the "precursor state" have been executed. It is in the AT state. " On the other hand, as an example of the case that does not correspond to "newly in AT state", (1) staying in "AT in progress state" → "AT continuation battle state" because the AT counter value became 0 { Transition to "AT in progress" again (possible to stay in a row)} → Transition to "AT in progress" again, (2) Win BB in "AT in progress" → " Transition to "Advantageous BB internal medium state" → BB symbol (bonus symbol) is stopped and displayed, transition to "Advantageous BB state" → BB ends, transitions to "AT in progress" again, etc. It does not correspond to "AT in progress".

Returning to the explanation of the flowchart, in the case of Yes in step 4102, in step 4104, the CPUMC of the main control board M has an AT start freeze execution flag (a flag that freezes at the start of reel rotation by being turned on). ) Is turned on. Next, in step 4106, the CPUMC of the main control board M is an AT start freeze execution command (a command to the sub control board S side, and when the sub control board S side receives the command, the sub control board S side (The AT start effect will be executed) is set, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1550). Even if No in step 4102, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1550). The freeze illustrated in the figure is just an example, and there is no problem even if it is configured to have various types of freezes (execution conditions and execution time).

Next, FIG. 74 is a flowchart of the reel rotation start preparation process according to the subroutine of step 1550 of FIG. 72 in the second embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is step 1568 (second) to step 1574 (second), that is, in step 1568 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M has the AT start freeze execution flag turned on. It is determined whether or not it is. In the case of Yes in step 1568 (second), in step 1570 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the AT start freeze execution flag. Next, in step 1572 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M is a freeze execution timer (a decrement timer, and the freeze execution time executed when a new “AT in progress” state is reached and “AT”. In the timer for measuring the execution time of the freeze executed when the "medium state" ends, the freeze execution time at the start (in this example, 5 seconds, and the "AT in progress state" is newly set. The execution time of the freeze executed in the case) is set, the timer is started, and the process proceeds to step 1574 (second). Next, in step 1574 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the timer value of the freeze execution timer has become 0. If Yes in step 1574 (second), the process proceeds to step 1552. On the other hand, if No in step 1574 (second), the process of step 1574 (second) is repeatedly executed until the freeze execution time at the start of the "AT in progress" elapses. Even if No in step 1568 (second), the process proceeds to step 1552.

As described above, in the second embodiment, the freeze (sometimes referred to as the freeze at the start of AT) is executed when the "AT in progress state" is newly started, and the details will be described later. However, while the freeze is being executed, the AT start effect is executed on the sub-control board S side. In this example, the freeze execution time at the start of AT is set to 5 seconds, but there is no problem even if the execution time is changed, and it is preferable to set it according to the execution time of the AT start effect. In this example, the freeze execution time at the end of AT, which will be described later, is 3 seconds, and the freeze execution time at the start of AT is longer than the freeze execution time at the end of AT. Has been done. In this way, by setting the freeze execution time at the start of AT, which will be advantageous to the player in the future, to be relatively longer than the freeze execution time at the end of AT, it is possible to increase the player's motivation to play. It can be a high-priced gaming machine.

Next, FIG. 75 is a flowchart of the stop freeze execution determination process according to the subroutine of step 4200 (second) of FIG. 75 in the second embodiment. First, in step 4202, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the AT counter value has newly become 0 in the game. "The AT counter value has newly become 0" is a case where the AT counter value has changed from "1 to 0" in a situation where the AT counter value such as "AT in progress" is being subtracted. It does not include the case where the AT counter value is always 0, such as the situation where the state related to AT is "normal gaming state".

Returning to the explanation of the flowchart, in the case of Yes in step 4202, the process proceeds to step 4206. On the other hand, if No in step 4202, in step 4204, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the counter value of the number of remaining games in the advantageous section has newly become 0 in the game. "The counter value of the number of games remaining in the advantageous section is newly set to 0" means that the counter value of the number of games remaining in the advantageous section is subtracted in the situation where the counter value of the number of games remaining in the advantageous section is subtracted, such as "AT in progress". This does not include the case where "1 → 0" is obtained, and the case where the counter value of the number of games remaining in the advantageous section is always 0, such as the situation where the state related to AT is "normal game state", is not included. If Yes in step 4204, the process proceeds to step 4206. Next, in step 4206, the CPUMC of the main control board M has a freeze execution timer (a decrement timer, and the freeze execution time and the "AT in progress" executed when a new "AT in progress" is reached are set. The freeze execution time at the end (in this example, 3 seconds, which is 3 seconds, and the freeze executed when the "AT in progress" ends, is set to the timer for measuring the execution time of the freeze executed at the end. Execution time) is set and the timer is started. Next, in step 4208, the CPUMC of the main control board M is an AT end freeze execution command (a command to the sub control board S side, and when the sub control board S side receives the command, the sub control board S side , The AT end effect will be executed), and the process proceeds to step 4210. Next, in step 4210, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the timer value of the freeze execution timer is 0. If Yes in step 4210, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 3500). On the other hand, if No in step 4210, the process of step 4210 is repeatedly executed until the freeze execution time at the end of the "AT in progress" has elapsed. If No in step 4204, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 3500).

Next, FIG. 76 is an AT start effect execution image diagram in the second embodiment. In the figure, an example of a case where the power cutoff does not occur and a case where the power cutoff occurs during the execution of the AT start effect will be described in detail.

First, in (a) in the figure, the case where the power supply is not cut off during the execution of the AT start effect will be described in detail. First, when the start lever D50 related to the game in which the state related to AT is newly set to the "AT in progress state" is operated (the game start condition is satisfied), the AT start effect is started and the freeze is executed. Will be done. Further, as an effect mode of the AT start effect, "Warp execution!" Is displayed for 1 second on the effect display device S40 (during the execution of the AT start effect, the background effect dedicated to the execution of the AT start effect is always executed). .. In this example, the AT start effect and the freeze execution time are 5 seconds. After that, one second has elapsed from the start of the freeze, and the display "Warp execution!" Is erased on the effect display device S40. It should be noted that the state in which only the background effect dedicated to the execution of the AT start effect is displayed on the effect display device S40 is maintained for 3 seconds. After that, when 4 seconds have passed from the start of freeze execution, "AT50G START !!" is displayed for 1 second on the effect display device S40 as an effect mode of the AT start effect. After that, when 5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the freeze execution, the freeze execution ends, the AT start effect execution ends, and the reel rotation starts. When the execution of the AT start effect is completed, the display of "AT50G START !!" on the effect display device S40 is erased, and the background effect dedicated to the execution of the AT start effect is displayed in the AT state. It will be switched to a possible background effect. In addition, when the above-mentioned push order navigation is executed in the first game in the AT state, (1) Freeze starts to be executed → Freeze ends after 5 seconds have passed → The reel starts to rotate and is produced. The push order navigation is displayed on the display device S40, (2) Freeze starts execution → Freeze ends after 5 seconds have passed → Reel starts rotating → Reel drive state becomes reel constant speed state and the effect display device S40 You may configure it to display the push order navigation. With this configuration, even if the reel rotation start timing is later than before due to the execution of freeze, the player mistakenly operates the stop button corresponding to the pressing order different from the correct pressing order. It is possible to prevent the situation where it ends up.

Next, in (b) of the figure, the case where the power supply is cut off during the execution of the AT start effect will be described in detail. First, when the start lever D50 related to the game in which the state related to AT is newly set to the "AT in progress state" is operated (the game start condition is satisfied), the AT start effect is started and the freeze is executed. Will be done. Further, as an effect mode of the AT start effect, "Warp execution!" Is displayed for 1 second on the effect display device S40 (during the execution of the AT start effect, the background effect dedicated to the execution of the AT start effect is always executed). .. In this example, the AT start effect and the freeze execution time are 5 seconds (excluding the time when the power is off). After that, one second has elapsed from the start of the freeze, and the display "Warp execution!" Is erased on the effect display device S40. It should be noted that the state in which only the background effect dedicated to the execution of the AT start effect is displayed on the effect display device S40 is maintained for 3 seconds. After that, when 2 seconds have passed from the start of freeze execution, the power is cut off (for example, the playground is out of power). After that, when the power is restored, "AT50G START !!" is displayed on the effect display device S40 for 3 seconds, and the freeze is still executed. After that, when the total time from the start of freeze execution except when the power is off is 5 seconds, the freeze execution ends, the AT start effect execution ends, and the reel rotation starts. It will be. As described above, in this example, when the power is cut off during the execution of the freeze (during the execution of the AT start effect) and then recovered from the power off, the freeze execution time is from the state before the power off. It will be executed continuously. As an example, when the freeze execution time is 5 seconds and the power is cut off 1 second after the freeze execution starts, the freeze is executed for 4 seconds after the power is restored, and the freeze is executed. If the power is cut off 3 seconds after the start, the freeze will be executed for 2 seconds after the power is restored.

Further, the execution time of the AT start effect is also the same as the execution time of the freeze. If the power is cut off during the execution of the AT start effect and then the power is restored, the execution time of the AT start effect is the power off. It will be executed continuously from the state before the occurrence. On the other hand, the effect mode of the AT start effect differs between the case where the power cut occurs during the execution of the AT start effect and the case where the power cut does not occur. Specifically, during the execution of the AT start effect. If the power is not cut off, "AT50G START !!" is displayed on the effect display device S40 at the timing when 4 seconds have elapsed from the start of execution of the AT start effect, while the AT start effect is being executed. When the power is cut off, "AT50G START !!" is displayed on the effect display device S40 after the power is turned off, regardless of the timing of the power cut. The display of "AT50G START !!" may be referred to as a game number display at the start of AT. Further, in the figure, as the display of the number of games at the start of AT, it is shown to notify that the number of remaining AT games (at the start of the AT state) is 50 games at the start of AT, but the display mode is The present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when the lottery for adding the number of AT games is enabled to be executed in the "advantageous BB state" executed immediately before the transition to the AT in-progress state, the AT in the "advantageous BB state" is used. Addition of the number of games The number of remaining AT games obtained by winning the lottery is added to 50 games, which is the initial number of AT games, and the number of remaining AT games is displayed on the effect display device S40 as the number of games at the start of AT. May be good. As an example, when the number of remaining AT games of 30 games is acquired by the lottery for adding the number of AT games in the "advantageous BB state", "AT80G START !!" is displayed as the number of games at the start of AT. You may. In the figure, only the AT start effect is illustrated, but similarly, the effect mode of the AT end effect is the case where the power is cut off during the execution of the AT end effect and the case where the power is cut off. It is configured to be different from the case where it was not (for example, when the power supply is not cut off during the execution of the AT end effect, "AT end GET 〇〇" is displayed 2 seconds after the start of the AT end effect. On the other hand, if the power is cut off during the execution of the AT end effect, "AT end GET 〇〇" is displayed after returning from the power cut, regardless of the timing of the power cut.). Further, it is an effect displayed during the execution of the AT start effect or the AT end effect, and is displayed immediately after the power is turned off when the power is cut off during the execution of the AT start effect or the AT end effect. If this is the case, the display is not limited to the number of games displayed at the start of AT, and there is no problem as long as the display allows the player to visually recognize the game so that the game can proceed smoothly.

With the above configuration, according to the gaming machine according to the second embodiment, the freeze can be executed in the case of newly transitioning to the AT-in-progress state and in the case of ending the AT-in-progress state. The AT start effect is executed during the freeze execution when the state is newly changed to the AT state, and the AT end effect is executed during the freeze execution when the AT state ends. In such a configuration, if a power cut occurs during the execution of the AT start effect or the AT end effect, it is scheduled to be displayed from a predetermined timing in the AT start effect or the AT end effect after the power cut is restored. By configuring the display to be displayed immediately after the power is turned off and restored, even if an unintended power off (for example, a power failure in the amusement park) occurs during the execution of the freeze, the game such as the number of remaining AT games can be played. By configuring the player to immediately display the information necessary for grasping the situation of the game, it is possible to prevent the situation where the player cannot grasp the situation of the game.

In the second embodiment, the freeze can be executed depending on the case where the AT state is newly entered and the AT state is terminated, but the freeze execution mode is not limited to this. , It may be configured to be able to be executed at the start of BB, the end of BB, etc., or it may be configured to be able to be executed based on the winning condition device and the game state in which the player is staying.

In addition, from the configuration related to the freeze in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the above-mentioned example,
Freeze execution period when the power is not cut off during freeze execution = A
If the power is cut off during the execution of the freeze, the freeze execution period until the power is cut off = B
If the power is cut off during the execution of the freeze, the freeze execution period after the power outage occurs = C
If so,
A = B + C
It is configured to be.

When the freeze related to the AT start effect ends, the reel acceleration process described above is executed.

<<<<< Configuration 2 applicable to this example >>>>>
The configuration applicable to the spinning machine according to this example will be described in detail below. It should be noted that any of the configurations detailed below can be applied to all the above-described embodiments, one configuration detailed below may be applied, or a plurality of configurations detailed below may be applied. I will add that you may do it.

<<< Lamp unit configuration >>>
First, with reference to FIGS. 77 and 78, a configuration relating to lighting of a lamp unit (general term for the decorative lamp unit D150 and the LED lamp unit S10) applicable to the gaming machine according to this example will be described in detail.

FIG. 77 is an image of a lamp unit lighting configuration. In the figure, the configuration relating to the lighting of the lamp unit applicable to the gaming machine according to this example will be described in detail. It should be noted that each item shown in the figure is only a partial excerpt, and for example, the items shown in the column of element 1 are not limited to only eight items of "red" to "no color". First, as shown in FIG. 77, six types of elements 1 to 6 are included as elements related to lighting of the lamp unit.

<Element 1>
Element 1 is a lighting color, 8 of "red", "blue", "green", "white", "red + green", "blue + green", "blue + white", "no color" It has a kind of lighting color as element 1. The lamp unit according to this example is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and when the lighting color is "red", it means that all the LEDs are lit in red, and the lighting color is "red + blue". In the case of ", out of the N LEDs, which is the total number of LEDs, M LEDs are lit in red and L LEDs are lit in blue (N = M + L). .. In addition, the combination of the order of the LED that lights up in red and the LED that lights up in blue may be only one or a plurality of ways (when a plurality of ways are provided, the lighting color is ". Multiple lighting colors such as "red + blue 1" and "red + blue 2" may be provided). Further, "no color" indicates that the light is off (non-lighting), and is the lighting color that is selected when the light is always off. As described above, the number of items constituting the elements 1 to 6 in the figure is only a partial excerpt, and in the element 1, three or more colors such as "red + blue + green" are used. There is no problem even if it is configured to have a combined lighting color.

<Element 2>
Element 2 is the lighting time, which is "0.1 seconds", "0.2 seconds", "0.3 seconds", "1 second", "3 seconds", "always", and "no lighting". It has seven types of lighting times as element 2. Note that "always" is the lighting time selected when the lighting is always on, and "no lighting" is the lighting time selected when the lighting is always off.

<Element 3>
Element 3 has a turn-off time of "0.1 seconds", "0.2 seconds", "0.3 seconds", "1 second", "3 seconds", "always", and "no lights off". It has seven types of extinguishing times as element 3. Note that "always" is the lighting time selected when the lights are always off, and "no lights" is the lighting time selected when the lights are always on.

<Element 4>
The element 4 has a lighting time pattern, and the lighting time pattern is composed of a combination of the lighting time which is the element 2 and the extinguishing time which is the element 3. "Off", "0.1 seconds on → 0.3 seconds off", "0.2 seconds on → 0.3 seconds off", "1 second on → 0.1 seconds off", "3 seconds on → 0. It has seven types of lighting time patterns of "3 seconds off", "always on", and "always on" as element 4. As an example of the lighting time pattern, in the case of "0.1 second lighting → 0.1 second extinguishing", the lighting time of the element 2 "0.1 second" and the extinguishing of the element 3 "0.1 second" are taken. It is composed in combination with time. In addition, "always on" is a lighting time pattern selected when the lighting is always on, and is configured by combining the lighting time of "always" which is element 2 and the extinguishing time of "no extinguishing" which is element 3. Has been done. Further, "always off" is a lighting time pattern selected when the lights are always off, and is configured by combining the lighting time of "no lighting" which is element 2 and the lighting time of "always" which is element 3. Has been done.

<Element 5>
The element 5 is a lighting element, and the lighting element is configured by combining a lighting color which is the element 1 and a lighting time pattern which is the element 4. In other words, the lighting element is composed of a combination of the lighting color of the element 1, the lighting time of the element 2, and the extinguishing time of the element 3. In the figure, for convenience of explanation, the specific content of the lighting element is shown as the lighting element content, and the identification element sorted according to the lighting element content is shown as the lighting element type. As a lighting element,
Lighting element type a: "0.1 seconds red lighting → 0.1 seconds off"
Lighting element type b: "0.1 seconds blue lighting → 0.1 seconds off"
Lighting element type c: "0.1 seconds red lighting → 0.3 seconds off"
Lighting element type d: "0.1 seconds red + blue lighting → 0.3 seconds off"
Lighting element type e: "0.2 seconds red + blue lighting → 0.3 seconds off"
Lighting element type f: "0.2 seconds blue + green lighting → 0.3 seconds off"
Lighting element type g: "White lighting for 1 second → Off for 0.1 second"
Lighting element type h: "1 second blue + white lighting → 0.1 second off"
Lighting element type i: "Green lighting for 3 seconds → Off for 0.3 seconds"
Lighting element type j: "3 seconds blue + green lights → 0.3 seconds off"
Lighting element type k: "Always red lighting"
Lighting element type l: "Always lit in blue"
Lighting element type m: "Always green lighting"
Lighting element type n: "Always white lighting"
Lighting element type o: "Always red + green lighting"
Lighting element type p: "Always blue + green lighting"
Lighting element type q: "Always blue + white lighting"
Lighting element type r: "Always off (no color)"
It has 18 kinds of lighting elements as element 5. As an example of the lighting element, in the case of "0.1 second lighting → 0.1 second extinguishing", the element 1 "red" and the element 4 "0.1 second lighting → 0.1 second extinguishing" The lighting time pattern (as described above, the lighting time pattern is a combination of the lighting time and the extinguishing time) is configured. Further, "always red + green lighting" is configured by combining "red + green" which is element 1 and "always lighting" which is element 4. Further, the "always off (no color)" is configured by combining the "no color" which is the element 1 and the "always off" which is the element 4.

<Element 6>
The element 6 has a lighting pattern, and is configured by one or a plurality of lighting elements which are the elements 5. In the figure, for convenience of explanation, the specific content of the lighting pattern is shown as the lighting pattern content, and the identification element sorted for each lighting pattern content is shown as the lighting pattern type. As a lighting pattern,
Pattern 1: "a->a->a->a"
Pattern 2: "b → b → b → b"
Pattern 3: "a → b → a → b"
Pattern 4: "a → a → g → g"
Pattern 5: "g → f → j"
Pattern 6: "i → h → b"
Pattern 7: "g → f → b"
Pattern 8: "i → j → g"
Pattern 9: "g → g → g"
Pattern 10: "k"
Pattern 11: "l"
Pattern 12: "m"
Pattern 13: "n"
Pattern 14: "o"
Pattern 15: "p"
Pattern 16: "q"
Pattern 17: "r"
It has 17 kinds of lighting patterns as element 6. As an example of the lighting pattern, in the case of pattern 1: “a → a → a → a”, the element 5 “0.1 second red lighting → 0.1 second extinguished” is configured to be repeated four times. Further, in the case of pattern 8 “i → j → g”, after executing the lighting element type i: “3 seconds green lighting → 0.3 seconds off”, the lighting element type j: “3 seconds blue + green lighting → 0”. It is configured to execute ". 3 seconds off" and "lighting element type g:" 1 second white on → 0.1 second off ". In addition, the lamp unit may be lit in the manner of pattern 1 → pattern 4 by further combining the lighting patterns, or in the manner of pattern 1 → pattern 4 → pattern 1 → pattern 4 → pattern 1 → ... "Pattern 1-> Pattern 4" may be repeatedly lit until the lighting end condition is satisfied. The lighting end condition may be configured to be satisfied when the game situation such as cancellation of a predetermined error changes, or may be configured to be satisfied when a predetermined time has elapsed.

As described above, the lamp unit in the gaming machine according to this example is configured to be lit by a combination of lighting patterns, and the lighting pattern of the element 6 is configured by a combination of the lighting elements of the element 5. The lighting element of element 1 is composed of a combination of the lighting color of element 1 and the lighting time pattern of element 4, and the lighting time pattern of element 4 is composed of a combination of the lighting time of element 2 and the lighting time of element 3. Has been done.

It should be noted that the configuration related to the lighting of the lamp unit has been described in detail as being composed of elements 1 to 6, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of elements may be increased or decreased, or elements 1 to 6 may be increased or decreased. The contents of may be changed (for example, the element 1 may be set to the lighting brightness).

Next, FIG. 78 is an example of a situation-specific notification mode. In the figure, a lighting pattern of the lamp unit (also referred to as a lamp unit lighting pattern) and a lighting mode of the rotating cylinder backlight S30 (also referred to as a back lamp lighting mode) applicable to the gaming machine according to this example may be used. There is), and an example of the configuration for each game situation regarding the sound output from the speaker S20 (which may also be referred to as the sound of the speaker) will be described in detail. It should be noted that each item shown in the figure is only a partial excerpt. For example, the lighting pattern executed during BB execution is not limited to only one type of pattern 7, and the type of BB (conditions related to BB). The lighting pattern may be different depending on the type of device) and the gaming state in which the BB is won, and in one BB, the lighting mode (lighting cycle) in which a plurality of lighting patterns are combined is repeatedly executed until the BB ends. It should be added that it may be configured to do so. As for the error, the medal empty error is illustrated as an example, but the lighting pattern of the lamp unit may be different depending on the type of error. In all of the configurations 1 to 6, the normal game is in progress (the error is not occurring, the power is not immediately turned on, the standby screen is not displayed, the setting confirmation mode is not performed, and the setting change mode is not performed). And the lighting pattern of the lamp unit that can be selected in the situation where the bonus is not being executed) is any of pattern 2, pattern 5, pattern 6, pattern 7, pattern 8, pattern 9, pattern 11, pattern 15, pattern 16, and pattern 17. It is configured to be one or more combinations. Since it is configured to have various gaming states such as a low probability state and an AT in progress state during normal gaming, the lighting pattern of the lamp unit that can be selected may be different depending on the gaming state. In other words, it may be configured to have a lighting pattern that is not selected in a specific gaming state or a lighting pattern that can be selected only in a specific gaming state. It should be noted that the time when the power is turned on is a state from the time when the power is turned on until a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed (immediately after the power is turned on).

<< Configuration 1 >>
<Medal empty error is occurring>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 10 (always red lighting)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights with a relatively small amount of light (light amount smaller than the normal amount of light) Speaker sound: Until the error is cleared During a medal empty error Looping (repeated playback)
<When the power is turned on>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 13 (always white lighting)
Back lamp lighting mode: Off Speaker sound: Outputs a dedicated sound when the power is turned on for a specified time <Standby screen is displayed>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 11 (always blue lighting)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights with normal light intensity Speaker sound: No output <During setting confirmation mode>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 12 (always green lighting)
Back lamp lighting mode: Off Speaker sound: Dedicated sound during setting confirmation mode <During setting change mode>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 9 ("1 second white lighting → 0.1 second off" is repeated 3 times)
Back lamp lighting mode: Off Speaker sound: Dedicated sound during setting change mode <BB is running>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 7 ("1 second white on → 0.1 second off" → "0.2 seconds blue + green on → 0.3 second off" → "0.1 second blue on → 0.1 second" Off ")
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights with normal light intensity Speaker sound: Loops (repeated playback) the dedicated sound during BB execution
It is configured as above. It should be noted that the effect executed at the time of turning on the power may be configured to be different depending on the effect executed before the power cut occurred and the gaming state before the power cut occurred.

As in the configuration 1, only different lighting patterns are selected as the lighting pattern of the lamp unit during the error occurrence such as when a medal empty error occurs and during the normal game, and as the lighting color constituting the lighting pattern. , While red is used when a medal empty error occurs, by configuring so that red is not used during normal games (configuring so that a predetermined lighting color is selected only when an error occurs), players and managers can use it. , It is possible to easily distinguish between the case where an error has occurred and the case where no error has occurred, and it is possible to smooth the sales of the game hall and the progress of the game. Further, by configuring so that different lighting patterns are selected as the lighting patterns of the lamp unit immediately after the power is turned on and during the normal game, the player or the manager can easily distinguish between immediately after the power is turned on and during the normal game. It is possible to smooth the sales of the amusement park and the progress of the game. In addition, there is no misunderstanding that an error has occurred even during normal gaming, the player can proceed with the game without stress, and the administrator can clearly identify the gaming machine in which the error has occurred. Will be. Further, by configuring so that different lighting patterns are selected as the lighting patterns of the lamp unit during the standby screen display and the normal game, the player or the administrator can easily switch between the standby screen display and the normal game. It can be discriminated, and the sales of the game hall and the progress of the game can be smoothed. Further, while the standby screen is being displayed, it is possible to suppress power consumption due to the use of a flashy lighting pattern even though the player is not proceeding with the game. In addition, by configuring the lamp unit to select a different lighting pattern as the lighting pattern between the setting confirmation mode and the normal game, the player or the administrator can easily switch between the setting confirmation mode and the normal game. It can be discriminated, and the sales of the game hall and the progress of the game can be smoothed. In addition, the administrator can immediately determine the unintended setting confirmation mode, quickly determine the unintended setting confirmation mode, and detect if the setting key switch is forgotten to be turned off. can do. In addition, by configuring the lamp unit to select a different lighting pattern as the lighting pattern between the setting change mode and the normal game, the player or the administrator can easily switch between the setting change mode and the normal game. It can be discriminated, and the sales of the game hall and the progress of the game can be smoothed. In addition, the administrator can immediately determine the unintended setting change mode, and can quickly determine the unintended setting change mode. Further, by configuring the lamp unit to select a different lighting pattern as the lighting pattern between the BB execution and the normal game (the state in which the BB is not being executed), the player or the administrator can perform the BB execution and the normal game. It can be easily determined to be in the middle (state in which BB is not being executed), and the player or manager can clearly determine the state of the game.

As described above, the difference between the time when the error related to the lamp unit occurs and the normal game, the difference between immediately after the power is turned on and the normal game, the difference between the display of the standby screen and the normal game, and the setting. The differences between the confirmation mode and the normal game, the differences between the setting change mode and the normal game, and the differences between the BB execution and the normal game are the lighting colors (elements) that are not used during the normal game. It may be configured to have a lighting time (element 2) that is not used during a normal game, or may be configured to have a lighting time (element 3) that is not used during a normal game. It may be configured to have a lighting time pattern (element 4) that is not used during a normal game, or may be configured to have a lighting element (element 5) that is not used during a normal game. , May be configured to have a lighting pattern (element 6) that is not used during a normal game.

<< Configuration 2 >>
<Medal empty error is occurring>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 10 (always red lighting)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights with normal light intensity Speaker sound: Medal empty until error is cleared Looping dedicated sound (repeated playback)
<When the power is turned on>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 17 (always off (no color))
Back lamp lighting mode: Off Speaker sound: No output <Standby screen is displayed>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 11 (always blue lighting)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights (blinks) in a dedicated pattern while the standby screen is displayed.
Speaker sound: No output <During setting confirmation mode>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 10 (always red lighting)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights with normal light intensity Speaker sound: No output <During setting change mode>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 10 (always red lighting)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights with normal light intensity Speaker sound: No output <BB is running>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 7 ("1 second white on → 0.1 second off" → "0.2 seconds blue + green on → 0.3 second off" → "0.1 second blue on → 0.1 second" Off ")
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights with normal light intensity Speaker sound: Loops (repeated playback) the dedicated sound during BB execution
It is configured as above.

<< Configuration 3 >>
<Medal empty error is occurring>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 1 (Repeat "0.1 seconds red on → 0.1 seconds off" 4 times)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights with normal light intensity Speaker sound: Medal empty until error is cleared Looping dedicated sound (repeated playback)
<When the power is turned on>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 13 (always white lighting)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights with normal light intensity Speaker sound: No output <Standby screen is displayed>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 5 ("1 second white on → 0.1 second off" → "0.2 seconds blue + green on → 0.3 second off" → "3 seconds green on → 0.3 second off" )
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights with normal light intensity Speaker sound: No output <During setting confirmation mode>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 10 (always red lighting)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights with normal light intensity Speaker sound: No output <During setting change mode>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 10 (always red lighting)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights with normal light intensity Speaker sound: No output <BB is running>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 6 ("3 seconds green on → 0.3 seconds off" → "1 second blue + white on → 0.1 seconds off" → "0.1 seconds blue on → 0.1 seconds off" )
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights with normal light intensity Speaker sound: Loops (repeated playback) the dedicated sound during BB execution
It is configured as above.

<< Configuration 4 >>
<Medal empty error is occurring>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 14 (always red + green lighting)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights with normal light intensity Speaker sound: Medal empty until error is cleared Looping dedicated sound (repeated playback)
<When the power is turned on>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 13 (always white lighting)
Back lamp lighting mode: Off Speaker sound: No output <Standby screen is displayed>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 11 (always blue lighting)
Back lamp lighting mode: Off Speaker sound: No output <During setting confirmation mode>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 3 ("0.1 seconds red on → 0.1 seconds off" → "0.1 seconds blue on → 0.1 seconds off" → "0.1 seconds red on → 0.1 seconds""Off" → "0.1 seconds blue on → 0.1 seconds off")
Back lamp lighting mode: Off Speaker sound: No output <During setting change mode>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 3 ("0.1 seconds red on → 0.1 seconds off" → "0.1 seconds blue on → 0.1 seconds off" → "0.1 seconds red on → 0.1 seconds""Off" → "0.1 seconds blue on → 0.1 seconds off")
Back lamp lighting mode: Off Speaker sound: No output <BB is running>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 6 ("3 seconds green on → 0.3 seconds off" → "1 second blue + white on → 0.1 seconds off" → "0.1 seconds blue on → 0.1 seconds off" )
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights with normal light intensity Speaker sound: Loops (repeated playback) the dedicated sound during BB execution
It is configured as above. The warning sound output from the speaker while the medal empty error is occurring and the warning sound output from the speaker during the setting confirmation mode and the setting change mode are the same warning sound, and a medal empty error occurs separately from the warning sound. The sound "A medal empty error is occurring" is output from the speaker, "Setting confirmation mode is in progress" is output from the speaker during the setting confirmation mode, and "Setting change mode is in progress" during the setting change mode. It may be configured to output from the speaker. Similarly, for an error different from the medal empty error, the warning sound and the voice of "○○ error is in progress" may be output from the speaker.

<< Configuration 5 >>
<Medal empty error is occurring>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 13 (always white lighting)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights with normal light intensity Speaker sound: Medal empty until error is cleared Looping dedicated sound (repeated playback)
<When the power is turned on>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 17 (always off (no lighting))
Back lamp lighting mode: On → off (lights when normal game is in progress)
Speaker sound: No output <Standby screen is displayed>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 17 (always off (no lighting))
Back lamp lighting mode: Off Speaker sound: No output <During setting confirmation mode>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 13 (always white lighting)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights with normal light intensity Speaker sound: Dedicated sound during setting confirmation mode <During setting change mode>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 13 (always white lighting)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights with normal light intensity Speaker sound: Dedicated sound during setting change mode <BB is running>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 5 ("1 second white on → 0.1 second off" → "0.2 seconds blue + green on → 0.3 seconds off" → "3 seconds blue + green on → 0.3 seconds" Off ")
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights with normal light intensity Speaker sound: Loops (repeated playback) the dedicated sound during BB execution
It is configured as above.

<< Configuration 6 >>
<Medal empty error is occurring>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 1 (Repeat "0.1 seconds red on → 0.1 seconds off" 4 times)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights with normal light intensity Speaker sound: Medal empty until error is cleared Looping dedicated sound (repeated playback)
<When the power is turned on>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 17 (always off (no lighting))
Back lamp lighting mode: Off Speaker sound: No output <Standby screen is displayed>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 11 (always blue lighting)
Back lamp lighting mode: Off Speaker sound: No output <During setting confirmation mode>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 4 ("0.1 seconds red on → 0.1 seconds off" → "0.1 seconds red on → 0.1 seconds off" → "1 second white on → 0.1 seconds off" → "White on for 1 second → Off for 0.1 seconds")
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights with normal light intensity Speaker sound: Dedicated sound during setting confirmation mode <During setting change mode>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 4 ("0.1 seconds red on → 0.1 seconds off" → "0.1 seconds red on → 0.1 seconds off" → "1 second white on → 0.1 seconds off" → "White on for 1 second → Off for 0.1 seconds")
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights with normal light intensity Speaker sound: Dedicated sound during setting change mode <BB is running>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 5 ("1 second white on → 0.1 second off" → "0.2 seconds blue + green on → 0.3 seconds off" → "3 seconds blue + green on → 0.3 seconds" Off ")
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights with normal light intensity Speaker sound: Loops (repeated playback) the dedicated sound during BB execution
It is configured as above.

In the figure, six types of configurations 1 to 6 are illustrated, but the configuration is only an example, and the lamp unit lighting pattern, the back lamp lighting mode, and the sound output from the speaker for each game situation. May be combined from each configuration, or may be changed in any way. Regarding the lighting pattern of the lamp unit, the difference between the time when an error occurs and the normal game, the difference between immediately after the power is turned on and the normal game, and the display of the standby screen and the normal game are related to the lamp unit. The above-mentioned elements 1 to 6 are described as differences, differences between the setting confirmation mode and the normal game, differences between the setting change mode and the normal game, and differences between the BB execution and the normal game. It is preferable to configure any of (see FIG. 77) so that the one that is not selected during the normal game is selected.

Further, in the figure, only the medal empty error is illustrated as an error, but the error is not limited to this, and the display judgment error and the door opening error are also related to the lamp unit when an error occurs and during normal game. Differences, differences between immediately after the power is turned on and during normal game, differences between the standby screen display and normal game, differences between setting confirmation mode and normal game, setting change mode and normal game As the difference from the inside and the difference between the BB execution and the normal game, any one of the above-mentioned elements 1 to 6 (see FIG. 77), which is not selected during the normal game, is selected. It may be configured, or depending on the type of error occurring, such as making any of the above-mentioned elements 1 to 6 (see FIG. 77) related to the lamp unit different between the medal empty error and the display determination error. Any of the above-mentioned elements 1 to 6 (see FIG. 77) related to the lamp unit may be different.

Further, when the re-game combination is stopped and displayed, the player may be notified that the symbol combination related to the re-game combination is stopped and displayed depending on the lighting mode of the lamp unit. In the game executed in the game state of, the lamp unit is configured to light up when the re-game combination is won and the symbol combination related to the re-game combination is stopped and displayed, and any one of the elements 1 to 6. Is included in the lighting mode of the lamp unit, and is not included in the lighting mode of the lamp unit when a symbol combination different from the symbol combination related to the re-game combination is stopped and displayed without winning the re-game combination. It may be configured as follows. With such a configuration, the player can clearly recognize that he / she has won the re-game combination.

<<< Configuration of front door opening and payout >>>
Next, with reference to FIG. 79, the configuration relating to the payout of game medals applicable to the game machine according to this example will be described in detail. In addition, as shown in the figure, "normal" means, for example, that the winning-B (common bell) is won in the "low probability state", and the symbol combination corresponding to the common bell (for example, winning 04) is stopped and displayed. The case where 11 game medals are paid out is shown. Also, for "payout before opening the door" and "payout after opening the door", if the prize-B (common bell) is won and the symbol combination corresponding to the common bell (for example, prize 04) is stopped and displayed. Is illustrated. In the figure, the case where the credit (the number of credits displayed on the credit number display device D200) is the upper limit value (50 in this example) is described in detail.

<< Configuration 1 >>
<In the case of normal payout>
The case where the normal payout in Configuration 1 is performed will be described in detail. First, in a situation where two of the three reels are stopped and the other reel is rotating, the third stop button is pressed (the third stop button is pressed when the third stop button is pressed). (Sometimes referred to as turning on), winning 04 is stopped and displayed. After that, the third stop button is not pressed (the third stop button is being pressed from being pressed by the player releasing the finger from the third stop button, etc.), and the third stop button is being pressed. The fact that the button is not pressed may be referred to as the third stop button being turned from on to off), the game medal corresponding to the winning 04 is paid out, and the payout sound corresponding to the payout of the game medal from the speaker S20 (same as above). The sound B) in the figure is output for a predetermined time.

<When payout is executed before the door is opened>
Next, the case where the payout is executed before the door is opened in the configuration 1 will be described in detail. First, in a situation where two of the three reels are stopped and the other reel is rotating, the third stop button is turned on and the winning 04 is stopped and displayed. After that, the third stop button is turned from on to off, the game medal corresponding to the winning 04 is paid out, and the payout sound corresponding to the payout of the game medal is started to be output from the speaker S20. After that, under the condition that the payout sound corresponding to the payout of the game medal is output, the front door DU is opened, and the front door opening notification sound for notifying that the front door DU is open from the speaker S20 (in the figure). Sound A) is output. That is, the payout sound and the front door opening notification sound are output at the same time. After that, a predetermined time elapses from the start of the output of the payout sound, the output of the payout sound ends, and the output of the front door opening notification sound ends. The front door DU remains open, that is, the front door opening notification sound starts to be output when the front door DU is opened, and is then output even if the front door DU remains open. The output is configured to end when a specific time elapses from the opening. With this configuration, when the administrator opens the front door DU to check the settings or change the settings, the front door opening notification sound will continue to be output until the setting confirmation or setting change is completed. It is possible to check the settings and change the settings without stress without preventing them. In the figure, the output of the front door opening sound ends at the same time as the output of the payout sound ends, but the output is not limited to this, and the output end timing of the payout sound and the output of the front door opening sound are not limited to this. There is no problem even if the timing is different from the end timing.

<When payout is executed after the door is opened>
Next, the case where the payout is executed after the door is opened in the configuration 1 will be described in detail. First, in a situation where two of the three reels are stopped and the other reel is rotating, the third stop button is turned on and the winning 04 is stopped and displayed. After that, under the condition that the third stop button is on, the front door DU is opened, and the front door opening notification sound (sound A in the figure) for notifying that the front door DU is open is output from the speaker S20. The door. That is, regardless of whether the third stop button is on or off, the front door opening notification sound is output when the front door DU is opened. After that, under the condition that the front door DU is opened and the front door opening notification sound is output, the third stop button is turned from on to off, the game medal corresponding to the winning 04 is paid out, and the speaker S20 is used. The payout sound corresponding to the payout of the game medal is started to be output. That is, the payout sound and the front door opening notification sound are output at the same time. After that, a specific time elapses from the opening of the front door DU, and the output of the front door opening notification sound ends. After that, a predetermined time elapses from the start of output of the payout sound, and the output of the payout sound ends.

By configuring the game medal to be paid out regardless of the opening of the front door DU as in the configuration 1, the manager of the game hall forgets to close the front door DU when supplying the game medal to the game machine. Even if the game is closed (not closed tightly), the game medal can be paid out normally, and the player can be configured so as not to cause a disadvantage. Further, by configuring the front door opening notification sound and the payout sound to be output at the same time, the status of the gaming machine can be grasped in real time. In the case of the above configuration 1, it is preferable to set the output mode (tone color, pitch, tempo, etc.) so that the front door opening notification sound and the payout sound can be easily distinguished.

<< Configuration 2 >>
<In the case of normal payout>
The case where the normal payout in the configuration 2 is executed will be described in detail. First, in a situation where two of the three reels are stopped and the other reel is rotating, the third stop button is pressed (the third stop button is pressed when the third stop button is pressed). (Sometimes referred to as turning on), winning 04 is stopped and displayed. After that, the third stop button is not pressed (the third stop button is being pressed from being pressed by the player releasing the finger from the third stop button, etc.), and the third stop button is being pressed. The fact that the button is not pressed may be referred to as the third stop button being turned from on to off), the game medal corresponding to the winning 04 is paid out, and the payout sound corresponding to the payout of the game medal from the speaker S20 (same as above). The sound B) in the figure is output for a predetermined time.

<When payout is executed before the door is opened>
Next, the case where the payout is executed before the door is opened in the configuration 2 will be described in detail. First, in a situation where two of the three reels are stopped and the other reel is rotating, the third stop button is turned on and the winning 04 is stopped and displayed. After that, the third stop button is turned from on to off, the game medal corresponding to the winning 04 is paid out, and the payout sound corresponding to the payout of the game medal is started to be output from the speaker S20. After that, under the condition that the payout sound corresponding to the payout of the game medal is output, the front door DU is opened, and the front door opening notification sound for notifying that the front door DU is open from the speaker S20 (in the figure). At the same time as the sound A) is output, the output of the payout sound ends. After that, a specific time elapses from the opening of the front door DU, and the output of the front door opening notification sound ends. The predetermined time, which is the output period of the payout sound, ends during the output of the front door opening notification sound.

<When payout is executed after the door is opened>
Next, the case where the payout is executed after the door is opened in the configuration 2 will be described in detail. First, in a situation where two of the three reels are stopped and the other reel is rotating, the third stop button is turned on and the winning 04 is stopped and displayed. After that, under the condition that the third stop button is on, the front door DU is opened, and the front door opening notification sound (sound A in the figure) for notifying that the front door DU is open is output from the speaker S20. The door. That is, regardless of whether the third stop button is on or off, the front door opening notification sound is output when the front door DU is opened. After that, under the situation that the front door DU is opened and the front door opening notification sound is output, the third stop button is turned from on to off, and the game medal corresponding to the winning 04 is paid out. The corresponding payout sound is not output. After that, under the situation where the payout of the game medal is being executed, a specific time has elapsed from the opening of the front door DU, the output of the front door opening notification sound ends, and the payout sound corresponding to the winning 04 is output. After that, a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of paying out the game medals corresponding to the winning 04, and the output of the payout sound ends.

By configuring the game medal to be paid out regardless of the opening of the front door DU as in the configuration 2, the manager of the game hall forgets to close the front door DU when the game machine is replenished with the game medal. Even if the game is closed (not closed tightly), the game medal can be paid out normally, and the player can be configured so as not to cause a disadvantage. In addition, by configuring so that the front door opening notification sound and the payout sound are not output at the same time, it is possible to prevent the situation where it is difficult to judge the situation of the gaming machine due to the mixture of the front door opening notification sound and the payout sound. can do. In configuration 2, the payout sound is output even during the output of the front door open notification sound, and the volume of the payout sound is relatively smaller than the volume of the front door open notification sound (volume 0 is also). It may be configured to include).

<< Other configurations >>
When the configuration illustrated in FIG. 79 is applied, even while the front door DU is open, the game medal is inserted, the max bet button (in this example, the bet button D220) is operated, and the bet button lamp S50 (also known as the max bet lamp). It may be configured so that the lighting of the insertable lamp and the bet lamp (1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp) is effective. That is, if a game medal is inserted while the front door DU is open, the insertion of the game medal can be detected (the blocker is on), and the insertion is valid (credit increases or the game medal is displayed). It may be configured to be bet). In such a configuration, the bet sound (or the medal insertion sound) corresponding to the insertion of the game medal or the operation of the bet button (max bet button) may be output from the speaker S20 (front door DU). Even when is not open, the bet sound corresponding to the insertion of the game medal or the operation of the bet button (max bet button) can be output), and the bet sound corresponding to the insertion of the game medal or the operation of the bet button (max bet button) is supported. It may be configured not to output the bet sound.

<<< Configuration related to power off and payout >>>
The operation when the power is turned off while pressing the third stop at the time of winning a small winning combination, which is applicable to the gaming machine according to this example, is illustrated below. It should be added that any of the configurations exemplified below can be applied to all the embodiments according to this example. The configuration described in detail below exemplifies a case where the credit is an upper limit value (for example, 50), in other words, a game medal is paid out to the medal tray D230 by winning a small winning combination. Further, the effect of blinking the rotating body backlight S30 may be referred to as a back lamp effect.

<Structure 1>
In a game in which a small winning combination (for example, a common bell of winning 04) is won, the third stop button is pressed (turned on) to win a small winning combination → the power is cut off while the third stop button is pressed. (Power failure occurs in the game hall, etc.) → Power is restored while the third stop button is pressed → Power is restored and the game medal corresponding to the small winning combination is paid out. You may.

In addition, if the game progresses in a situation where the power is not cut off and the game medal is paid out based on the winning of the small winning combination, the back lamp effect based on the winning of the small winning combination can be executed. Moreover, while the payout sound based on the winning of the small winning combination can be output, the power is restored while pressing the third stop button as in the above-mentioned configuration 1, and the payout of the game medal based on the winning of the small winning combination is executed. In this case, the back lamp effect based on the winning of the small winning combination may not be executed, and the payout sound based on the winning of the small winning combination may not be output. With such a configuration, it is possible to configure the player so as not to surprise the player by suddenly executing the back lamp effect and the output of the payout sound after the power is turned off and restored.

With this configuration, even if the power is cut off when the player presses the third stop and the power is immediately restored, the game medal is paid out based on the winning of the small winning combination. It is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged. Even if any of the predetermined operation members controlled by the main control board M side (for example, the start lever, all the stop buttons, the bet button (max bet button), the settlement button, etc.) is operated, the other predetermined operation member is operated. If the operating member of the above is not operated, the payout of the game medal based on the winning may be feasible. For example, when recovering from a power failure, if both the third stop button and the start lever are operated (turned on), the game medal is not paid out based on the winning prize. May be good. Further, in such a configuration, (1) after that, by releasing the third stop button or the start lever (the operating member controlled by the main control board M side is 1). The payout of the game medal based on the winning may be executed (by only one), or (2) by releasing the third stop button and the start lever (the main control board M side). (By turning off all the controlling operating members), the payout of the game medal based on the winning may be executed.

To exemplify the situation where the power supply is cut off, the power switch is turned from on to off, the power supply cable is broken, a power failure occurs in the playground, the power supply cable is disconnected from the insertion port, and so on. Etc., and in any case, it can be applied to the above-mentioned configuration.

<Structure 2>
In a game in which a small role (for example, a common bell of winning 04) is won, press (turn on) the 3rd stop button to win a small role → open the front door DU while pressing the 3rd stop button. (Opening the front door DU causes a door open error) and power is cut off (turning off the power switch, etc.) → Power is restored while pressing the 3rd stop button (turn on the power switch) → Close the front door DU while pressing the 3rd stop button to cancel the door opening error (for example, insert the door key into the keyhole D260 and twist it in the specified direction) → The door opening error is cleared and , It may be configured to have the above-mentioned action in which the payout of the game medal corresponding to the small winning combination is executed.

In addition, if the game progresses in a situation where the power is not cut off and the game medal is paid out based on the winning of the small winning combination, the back lamp effect based on the winning of the small winning combination can be executed. Moreover, while the payout sound based on the winning of the small winning combination can be output, the door opening error is canceled while the third stop button is held down as in the above configuration 2, and the payout of the game medal based on the winning of the small winning combination is canceled. When is executed, the back lamp effect based on the winning of the small winning combination may not be executed, and the payout sound based on the winning of the small winning combination may not be output. With this configuration, the back lamp effect and the output of the payout sound are suddenly executed after the door opening error is cleared, so that the player can be configured not to be surprised.

<Structure 3>
In a game in which a small winning combination (for example, a common bell of winning 04) is won, the third stop button is pressed (turned on) to win a small winning combination → the power is cut off while the third stop button is pressed. (Power failure occurs in the game hall, etc.) → Release the finger from the 3rd stop button (turn the 3rd stop button from on to off) → Power is restored → Power is restored and the game medal corresponding to the small role is paid out. May be configured as described above.

In addition, if the game progresses in a situation where the power is not cut off and the game medal is paid out based on the winning of the small winning combination, the back lamp effect based on the winning of the small winning combination can be executed. In addition, while the payout sound based on the winning of a small winning combination can be output, the power is turned off while the third stop button is pressed, and the power is restored after the third stop button is released, as in the configuration 3 described above. Therefore, when the payout of the game medal based on the winning of the small winning combination is executed, the back lamp effect based on the winning of the small winning combination is not executed, and the payout sound based on the winning of the small winning combination is not output. good. With such a configuration, it is possible to configure the player so as not to surprise the player by suddenly executing the back lamp effect and the output of the payout sound after the power is turned off and restored.

In the case of the above configuration 1, configuration 2 or configuration 3, it is determined whether or not the third stop button is pressed (whether or not it is on) as a process after the power is turned off and restored. Before executing the process (process executed by the game progress control process), the game medal payout process (process executed by the game progress control process) based on the winning may be executed. Further, as described above, in the situation where the symbol combination in which the small winning combination is a prize is stopped and displayed, the power is turned off while the third stop button is pressed, and then the power is restored while the third stop button is pressed. After that, the payout of the game medal based on the winning may be executed by releasing the third stop button. In such a configuration, the payout sound output and the back lamp effect corresponding to the payout may be executed. May not be executed (when the payout of the game medal based on the winning is executed without power off, the output of the payout sound and the back lamp effect are executed).

<<< Configuration for setting confirmation mode and payout >>>
The operation when the setting key switch is turned on while pressing the third stop at the time of winning a small winning combination, which is applicable to the gaming machine according to this example, is illustrated below. It should be added that any of the configurations exemplified below can be applied to all the embodiments according to this example. The configuration described in detail below exemplifies a case where the credit is an upper limit value (for example, 50), in other words, a game medal is paid out to the medal tray D230 by winning a small winning combination. Further, in the configuration described in detail below, the reel is stopped and the power is turned on, and the main control board side such as the start lever, all stop buttons, the bet button (max bet button), the settlement button, etc. When the front door DU is opened and the setting key switch is turned from off to on when the various operation members controlled by are not operated (not on), it is possible to shift to the setting confirmation mode. The case where it is done is illustrated. In the setting confirmation mode, the effect display device S40 may be configured to notify that the setting confirmation mode is in progress, or may be configured not to notify.

<Structure 1>
In a game in which a small role (for example, a common bell of winning 04) is won, press (turn on) the 3rd stop button to win a small role → open the front door DU while pressing the 3rd stop button. (Opening the front door DU causes a door open error) and turns on the setting key switch (does not shift to the setting confirmation mode) → Close the front door DU while pressing the 3rd stop button. Canceling the door opening error (for example, inserting the door key into the keyhole D260 and twisting it in a predetermined direction) → The setting confirmation mode may not be entered even if the third stop button is released.

In addition, in such a configuration, betting is possible with the setting key switch still on, and the reel can be started to rotate by operating the start lever in the betting situation, and the stop button. It may be configured so that the reel can be stopped by operating (the game can proceed). In addition, if the setting key switch remains on after that, betting may not be possible (game medals cannot be inserted), or betting is possible but the reel does not start rotating even if the start lever is operated. You may. In other words, the game may not be executed if the setting key switch remains on. It should be added that in such a configuration, the effect display device S40 does not display the display indicating that the setting confirmation mode is in progress. In addition, when the front door DU is opened while the setting key switch remains on (after the operation as in configuration 1 above) and the re-game symbol is not stopped and displayed, the mode shifts to the setting confirmation mode. It may be configured to obtain, or it may be configured not to shift to the setting confirmation mode when the front door DU is opened in the situation where the re-game symbol is stopped and displayed. Further, when the front door DU is opened to shift to the setting confirmation mode, the effect display device S40 may be configured to indicate that the setting confirmation mode is in effect.

<<< Configuration related to lighting of Maxbet lamp >>>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 80 to 83, the operation related to the lighting of the max bet lamp (which may also be referred to as the bet button lamp S50) applicable to the spinning machine according to this example will be described in detail. In addition, the configuration illustrated below illustrates a configuration in which a game medal can be inserted even while the stop display of the re-game is displayed. The max bet lamp is controlled on the sub control board S side or the main control board M side, which is provided inside or near the max bet button and notifies that the operation of the max bet button is effective. It's a lamp. In the figure, it is ON that the max bet lamp is lit (or blinking), OFF that the max bet lamp is off, and ON that the 1-bet lamp D211 is lit, and 1 bet. Turn off that the lamp D211 is off, turn on that the 2-bet lamp D212 is on, turn off that the 2-bet lamp D212 is off, and turn on that the 3-bet lamp D213 is on. It is shown that the 3-bet lamp D213 is OFF, the start lamp D180 is ON (or blinking), and the start lamp D180 is OFF. Further, in the figure, when the game medals are inserted one by one from the medal insertion slot D170 (the game medals inserted into the medal insertion slot D170 such as the insertion reception sensor D10s, the first insertion sensor D20s, and the second insertion sensor D30s are detected. (When the sensor detects one game medal at a time) is illustrated, but as a bet button, one game medal can be bet by one operation (off → on), which is different from the max bet button. A 1-bet button or a 2-bet button capable of betting two game medals by one operation (off → on) may be provided, and when such a configuration is provided, one medal slot D170 may be provided. Even if the same action as the game medal insertion (detection of one game medal by the insertion reception sensor D10s, the first insertion sensor D20s, or the second insertion sensor D30s) is applied to one pressing of the 1-bet button, there is a problem. do not have.

<< Configuration 1 >>
First, the configuration 1 in FIG. 80 will be described in detail. The max bet lamp is on, the 1-bet lamp D211 is off, and the 2-bet lamp D212 is off under the condition that the game medal is not bet on the rotating drum type game machine and the bet is valid. The 3-bet lamp D213 is off and the start lamp D180 is off. After that, the first game medal is inserted and the max bet lamp goes out. After that, the max bet lamp lights up and the 1-bet lamp D211 lights up. After that, the second game medal is inserted and the max bet lamp goes out. After that, the max bet lamp lights up and the 2-bet lamp D212 lights up. After that, the third game medal is inserted, the max bet lamp is turned off, the 3-bet lamp D213 is turned on, and the start lamp D180 is turned on.

As in the configuration 1, the max bet lamp is configured to "turn off → turn on" every time one game medal is inserted, so that the period during which the game medal is guided to the inside of the game machine from the medal insertion slot D170 is max. Since the operation of the bet button is invalid, it is possible to accurately notify the period during which the max bet button is valid by turning off the max bet lamp during the guided period. In addition, by accurately notifying the period during which the max bet button is valid, the player can grasp the period during which the max bet button is invalid, in other words, the insertion of the game medal is invalid. It is possible to prevent a situation in which a game medal is inserted during the invalid period and the game medal is not inserted normally, and it is possible to realize a game progress with a good tempo.

Further, as in the configuration 1, when the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit by configuring the 3-bet lamp D213 to light after the third game medal is inserted and the max-bet lamp is turned off. Since the max bet lamp is off, the player can clearly recognize that the specified number of three game medals have been bet.

<< Configuration 2 >>
Next, the configuration 2 in FIG. 80 will be described in detail. The max bet lamp is on, the 1-bet lamp D211 is off, and the 2-bet lamp D212 is off under the condition that the game medal is not bet on the rotating drum type game machine and the bet is valid. The 3-bet lamp D213 is off and the start lamp D180 is off. After that, the first game medal is inserted, the max bet lamp remains lit, and the 1-bet lamp D211 is lit. After that, the second game medal is inserted, the max bet lamp remains lit, and the 2-bet lamp D212 is lit. After that, the third game medal is inserted, the 3-bet lamp D213 is turned on, and the start lamp D180 is turned on. After that, the max bet lamp goes out.

As in configuration 2, a third game medal is inserted and the max bet lamp is turned off after the 3-bet lamp D213 is turned on. In other words, the player presses the max bet button on the 3-bet lamp D213. By configuring the lamps to light up as soon as possible after the operation, the 3-bet lamp D213 can be seamlessly turned on according to the operation of the player, the progress of the game can be smoothed, and the player can be extra. It is possible to prevent a situation in which a game medal is thrown into the bed or a player feels distrust in the performance or behavior of the game machine due to slow operation.

<< Configuration 3 >>
Next, the configuration 3 in FIG. 81 will be described in detail. The max bet lamp is on, the 1-bet lamp D211 is off, and the 2-bet lamp D212 is off under the condition that the game medal is not bet on the rotating drum type game machine and the bet is valid. The 3-bet lamp D213 is off and the start lamp D180 is off. After that, the first game medal is inserted, the max bet lamp remains lit, and the 1-bet lamp D211 is lit. After that, the second game medal is inserted, the max bet lamp remains lit, and the 2-bet lamp D212 is lit. After that, the third game medal is inserted, the max bet lamp is turned off, and the start lamp D180 is turned on. After that, the 3-bet lamp D213 lights up.

As in the configuration 3, when the third game medal is inserted and the max bet lamp before the 3-bet lamp D213 is turned off is turned off, the start lamp D180 is turned on at almost the same time, so that the next game can be played. It is possible to promptly notify the player that it is possible to start, the progress of the game can be smoothed, the player inserts an extra game medal, and the performance of the game machine due to the slow movement. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the behavior is distrustful.

<< Configuration 4 >>
Next, the configuration 4 in FIG. 81 will be described in detail. The max bet lamp is on, the 1-bet lamp D211 is off, and the 2-bet lamp D212 is off under the condition that the game medal is not bet on the rotating drum type game machine and the bet is valid. The 3-bet lamp D213 is off and the start lamp D180 is off. After that, the first game medal is inserted and the max bet lamp goes out. After that, the max bet lamp lights up and the 1-bet lamp D211 lights up. After that, the second game medal is inserted and the max bet lamp goes out. After that, the max bet lamp lights up and the 2-bet lamp D212 lights up. After that, the third game medal is inserted and the max bet lamp goes out. After that, the 3-bet lamp D213 is turned on and the start lamp D180 is turned on.

<< Configuration 5 >>
Next, the configuration 5 in FIG. 82 will be described in detail. The max bet lamp is blinking, the 1-bet lamp D211 is lit, and the 2-bet lamp D212 is lit under the condition that the game medal is not bet on the rotating drum type game machine and the bet is valid. The 3-bet lamp D213 is on and the start lamp D180 is off. After that, the first game medal is inserted, and the 2-bet lamp D212 and the 3-bet lamp D213 are turned off. After that, the second game medal is inserted and the 2-bet lamp D212 is turned on. After that, the third game medal is inserted, the 3-bet lamp D213 is turned on, and the start lamp D180 is turned on. After that, when the max bet lamp blinks, the max bet lamp goes out before (in the middle of lighting) the timing of turning on → off. In addition, in the figure, since the case where the third game medal is inserted in the lighting situation in the blinking in which the max bet lamp is repeatedly turned on and off is illustrated, three medals are used. The max bet lamp is turned on and off at the timing when the game medal of the eye is inserted, but when the third game medal is inserted in the situation where the max bet lamp is blinking and is off. The max bet lamp remains off after the timing when the third game medal is inserted.

Even when the 1-bet lamp D211, the 2-bet lamp D212, and the 3-bet lamp D213 are all lit in a non-bet situation as in the configuration 5, the number of game medals inserted (first). By differentiating the combination of turning on / off the start lamp D180, the 2-bet lamp D212, and the 3-bet lamp D213 depending on the 2nd and 3rd sheets), the player can change the current game situation (how many game medals). Is bet).

<< Configuration 6 >>
Next, the configuration 6 in FIG. 82 will be described in detail. The max bet lamp is on, the 1-bet lamp D211 is off, and the 2-bet lamp D212 is off under the condition that the game medal is not bet on the rotating drum type game machine and the bet is valid. The 3-bet lamp D213 is off and the start lamp D180 is off. After that, the first game medal is inserted, the max bet lamp remains lit, and the 1-bet lamp D211 is lit. After that, the second game medal is inserted, the max bet lamp remains lit, and the 2-bet lamp D212 is lit. After that, the third game medal is inserted, and the start lamp D180 is turned on at the timing when the insertion of the game medal is detected (the timing earlier than the lighting timing of the start lamp D180 and the 3-bet lamp D213 in the configuration 2). The 3-bet lamp D213 lights up. After that, the max bet lamp goes out.

As in configuration 6, a third game medal is inserted and the max bet lamp is turned off after the 3-bet lamp D213 is turned on. In other words, the player presses the max bet button on the 3-bet lamp D213. By configuring the lamps to light up as soon as possible after the operation, the 3-bet lamp D213 can be seamlessly turned on according to the operation of the player, the progress of the game can be smoothed, and the player can be extra. It is possible to prevent a situation in which a game medal is thrown into the bed or a player feels distrust in the performance or behavior of the game machine due to slow operation.

<< Configuration 7 >>
Next, the configuration 7 in FIG. 83 will be described in detail. The max bet lamp is on, the 1-bet lamp D211 is off, and the 2-bet lamp D212 is off under the condition that the game medal is not bet on the rotating drum type game machine and the bet is valid. The 3-bet lamp D213 is off and the start lamp D180 is off. After that, the first game medal is inserted, the max bet lamp remains lit, and the 1-bet lamp D211 is lit. After that, the start lamp D180 lights up (starts blinking). After that, the second game medal is inserted, the max bet lamp remains lit, and the 2-bet lamp D212 is lit. After that, the third game medal is inserted, the max bet lamp is turned off, and the 3-bet lamp D213 is turned on.

As in the configuration 6, after inserting the third game medal, the max bet lamp is turned off and the 3-bet lamp D213 is turned on at almost the same time. In other words, the player maxes the 3-bet lamp D213. By configuring the bet button to light up as soon as possible after operating the bet button, the 3-bet lamp D213 can be seamlessly turned on according to the operation of the player, the progress of the game can be smoothed, and the game can be played. It is possible to prevent a person from inserting an extra game medal or feeling distrust in the performance and behavior of the game machine due to slow operation.

In the above-mentioned configurations 1 to 4, configuration 6 and configuration 7, the max bet lamp is on = the max bet lamp is lit, but the lighting mode is such that the player can recognize that the max bet button is effective. As in the case of the configuration 5, the max bet lamp may be configured to be on = the max bet lamp may be blinking. Further, also in the configuration 5, the max bet lamp may be configured to be on = the max bet lamp may be lit. Similarly, for configurations 1 to 6, the start lamp D180 is on = the start lamp D180 is lit, but any lighting mode is sufficient as long as the player can recognize that the operation of the start lever D50 is effective. , The start lamp D180 may be on = the start lamp D180 may be blinking, as in the configuration 7. Further, also in the configuration 7, the start lamp D180 may be turned on = the start lamp D180 may be turned on. Further, the max bet lamp may be configured to be controlled on the sub control board S side or may be configured to be controlled on the main control board M side.

<<< Configuration related to operation of payment button >>>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 84 to 87, the operation at the time of operating the settlement button D60 applicable to the spinning machine according to this example will be described in detail. The following configuration illustrates a case where three game medals are bet on the game machine and the number of credits displayed on the credit number display device D200 is four. In the figure, it is ON that the Max Bet lamp is lit (or blinking), OFF that the Max Bet lamp is off, ON that the operation of the settlement button is newly detected, and the settlement button. Turn off that the operation of the checkout button is not detected, turn on that the 1-bet lamp D211 is on, and turn off that the 1-bet lamp D211 is off. Turn on that the 2-bet lamp D212 is on, turn off that the 2-bet lamp D212 is off, turn on that the 3-bet lamp D213 is on, and turn off that the 3-bet lamp D213 is off. OFF, ON that the start lamp D180 is lit (or blinking), OFF that the start lamp D180 is off, ON that the turnable lamp D300 is lit (or blinking), turnable lamp It is shown that turning off the D300 is OFF, and that the credit number display device D200 is decremented by 1 is decremented by 1 from OFF → ON → OFF. Further, in the figure, the case where the game medals are inserted one by one from the medal insertion slot D170 is illustrated, but as a bet button, one is performed by one operation (off → on), which is different from the max bet button. A 1-bet button that allows betting of game medals or a 2-bet button that allows betting of two game medals by one operation (off → on) may be provided. There is no problem even if the same action as the insertion of one game medal into the D170 is applied to one pressing of the 1-bet button. In addition, the configuration exemplified below may be configured so that the game medals stored in the gaming machine can be settled even during the stop display of the re-game, or stored in the gaming machine while the stop display of the re-game is displayed. You may configure it so that you cannot settle the game medals you are playing. In addition, as a condition for operating the settlement button D60 and paying out the bet game medal from the ejection port D240 (as a condition for determining that the settlement button has been operated), the settlement button has changed from "on to off". It may be "on", it may be "on for 0.5 seconds or more", or it may be turned on.

<< Configuration 1 >>
First, the configuration 1 in FIG. 84 will be described in detail. In a situation where three game medals are bet on the rotating drum type game machine and the bet is not valid, the max bet lamp is off, the 1-bet lamp D211 is lit, and the 2-bet lamp D212 is lit. The 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the start lamp D180 is lit, and the insertable lamp D300 is lit. After that, the settlement button D60 is operated once (off → on), the 1-bet lamp D211, the 2-bet lamp D212, the 3-bet lamp D213, the start lamp D180, and the insertable lamp D300 are turned off and bet. Three game medals are paid out from the discharge port D240 (payout is started), and then four game medals, which are credits stored in the game machine displayed on the credit number display device D200, are released. It is paid out from the exit D240. Further, at the timing when the game medal to be paid out last (the game medal in which the display of the credit number display device D200 changes from 1 to 0) is paid out, the insertable lamp D300 lights up.

By configuring the bet game medal to be settled (paid out) before the credit as in the configuration 1, it is confirmed that the credit becomes 0 when the player finishes the game. Even if you leave your seat immediately, you can prevent forgetting to settle the bet game medal. In particular, when the game is ended in a situation where the number of credits is small, such as one or two, it is relatively likely that the player will not be able to obtain sufficient game medals and end the game. The attention of the person may also be distracted. Even in such a case, in order not to cause an unintended disadvantage to the player, the bet game medal is settled (paid out) before the credit, and as such. Since it is configured, in the configuration 1, before the number of credits displayed on the credit number display device D200 is subtracted, the 1-bet lamp D211, the 2-bet lamp D212, the 3-bet lamp D213, and the start lamp D180 are configured. , And the turnable lamp D300 is configured to be turned off.

<< Configuration 2 >>
Next, the configuration 2 in FIG. 84 will be described in detail. The max bet lamp is off, the 1-bet lamp D211 is lit, and the 2-bet lamp D212 is lit when three game medals are bet on the rotating drum type gaming machine and the bet is not valid. The 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the start lamp D180 is lit, and the insertable lamp D300 is lit. After that, the settlement button D60 is operated once (off → on), the max bet lamp lights up, and the three bet game medals are paid out from the discharge port D240 (payment is started). After that, the start lamp D180 is turned off and the turnable lamp D300 is turned off. After that, the 3-bet lamp D213 is turned off. After that, the 2-bet lamp D212 goes out. After that, the 1-bet lamp D211 is turned off and the insertable lamp D300 is turned on. In configuration 2, if it is determined that the settlement button D60 has been operated once, the bet game medal is paid out, but the credit is not paid out, and the bet game medal is 0. It is configured to pay out credits when it is determined that the settlement button D60 has been operated once in a certain situation.

When it is determined that the settlement button D60 has been operated once as in the configuration 2, the bet game medal is paid out, but the credit is not paid out, and the settlement button D60 is operated. By configuring the max bet lamp to turn on before the 1-bet lamp D211, the 2-bet lamp D212, the 3-bet lamp D213, the start lamp D180, and the insertable lamp D300 are turned off, the player mistakenly makes a payment button. If you operate, only the bet game medal will be paid out, and the player wants to operate the max bet button again to bet credits, so it is quick to know that the max bet button can be operated. By configuring to notify, the progress of the game can be smoothed.

<< Configuration 3 >>
Next, the configuration 3 in FIG. 85 will be described in detail. The max bet lamp is off, the 1-bet lamp D211 is lit, and the 2-bet lamp D212 is lit when three game medals are bet on the rotating drum type gaming machine and the bet is not valid. The 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the start lamp D180 is lit, and the insertable lamp D300 is lit. After that, the settlement button D60 is operated once (off → on), and the start lamp D180 and the turnable lamp D300 are turned off. Three bet game medals are paid out from the discharge port D240 (payout is started), and then four credits stored in the game machine displayed on the credit number display device D200 are used. The game medal will be paid out from the discharge port D240. Further, after the timing when the finger is released from the settlement button D60, the lights are turned off in the order of the 3-bet lamp D213 → the 2-bet lamp D212 → the 1-bet lamp D211. Further, at the timing when the game medal to be paid out last (the game medal in which the display of the credit number display device D200 changes from 1 to 0) is paid out, the insertable lamp D300 lights up.

<< Configuration 4 >>
Next, the configuration 4 in FIG. 85 will be described in detail. The max bet lamp is off, the 1-bet lamp D211 is lit, and the 2-bet lamp D212 is lit when three game medals are bet on the rotating drum type gaming machine and the bet is not valid. The 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the start lamp D180 is lit, and the insertable lamp D300 is lit. After that, the settlement button D60 is operated once (off → on), the start lamp D180 and the insertable lamp D300 are turned off, and the three bet game medals are paid out from the discharge port D240 (payout starts). Will be). After that, the 3-bet lamp D213 is turned off. After that, the 2-bet lamp D212 goes out. After that, the 1-bet lamp D211 is turned off and the insertable lamp D300 is turned on. After that, the max bet lamp lights up. In configuration 4, if it is determined that the settlement button D60 has been operated once, the bet game medal is paid out, but the credit is not paid out, and the bet game medal is 0. It is configured to pay out credits when it is determined that the settlement button D60 has been operated once in a certain situation.

As in the configuration 4, the bet game medal is paid out, but the credit is not paid out, and the max bet lamp is turned on at a timing after the insertable lamp D300 is turned on. If the player wishes to change to a 1-card bet after betting 3 cards, the checkout button D60 is operated once to settle the 3 game medals bet, and then 1 game medal is placed. Since the betting or the 1-bet button is operated, in such a case, the progress of the game can be smoothed by turning on the put-on possible lamp D300 before the max-bet lamp.

<< Configuration 5 >>
Next, the configuration 5 in FIG. 86 will be described in detail. The max bet lamp is off, the 1-bet lamp D211 is lit, and the 2-bet lamp D212 is lit when three game medals are bet on the rotating drum type gaming machine and the bet is not valid. The 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the start lamp D180 is lit, and the insertable lamp D300 is lit. After that, the settlement button D60 is operated once (off → on), the 1-bet lamp D211, the 2-bet lamp D212, the 3-bet lamp D213, the start lamp D180, and the insertable lamp D300 are turned off and bet. Three game medals are paid out from the discharge port D240 (payout is started). After that, the turnable lamp D300 lights up. After that, the max bet lamp lights up. In configuration 5, if it is determined that the settlement button D60 has been operated once, the bet game medal is paid out, but the credit is not paid out, and the bet game medal is 0. It is configured to pay out credits when it is determined that the settlement button D60 has been operated once in a certain situation.

<< Configuration 6 >>
Next, the configuration 6 in FIG. 86 will be described in detail. The max bet lamp is off, the 1-bet lamp D211 is lit, and the 2-bet lamp D212 is lit when three game medals are bet on the rotating drum type gaming machine and the bet is not valid. The 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the start lamp D180 is lit, and the insertable lamp D300 is lit. After that, at the timing when the settlement button D60 is pressed (the timing when the button is turned off → turned on), the turnable lamp D300 is turned off. After that, the start lamp D180 is turned off. The three bet game medals are paid out from the discharge port 2D40 (the payout is started), and then the four credits stored in the game machine displayed on the credit number display device D200 are used. The game medal will be paid out from the discharge port D240. Further, after the timing at which the settlement button D60 is operated, the 3-bet lamp D213 → the 2-bet lamp D212 → the 1-bet lamp D211 are turned off in this order. Further, after the game medal to be paid out last (the game medal in which the display of the credit number display device D200 changes from 1 to 0) is paid out, the insertable lamp D300 lights up. The max bet lamp remains off.

<< Configuration 7 >>
Next, the configuration 7 in FIG. 87 will be described in detail. The max bet lamp is off, the 1-bet lamp D211 is lit, and the 2-bet lamp D212 is lit when three game medals are bet on the rotating drum type gaming machine and the bet is not valid. The 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the start lamp D180 is lit, and the insertable lamp D300 is lit. After that, at the timing when the settlement button D60 is pressed (the timing when it is turned off → on), the max bet lamp starts blinking and the start lamp D180 is turned off. After that, the insertable lamp D180 is turned off, and the three bet game medals are paid out from the discharge port D240 (payout is started). After that, the 3-bet lamp D213 is turned off. After that, the 2-bet lamp D212 goes out. After that, the 1-bet lamp D211 goes out. After that, the turnable lamp D300 lights up. The max bet lamp remains off. In configuration 7, if it is determined that the settlement button D60 has been operated once, the bet game medal is paid out, but the credit is not paid out, and the bet game medal is 0. It is configured to pay out credits when it is determined that the settlement button D60 has been operated once in a certain situation.

<<<<< Difference in operation due to power failure timing >>>>>
FIG. 88 is a timing chart illustrating the operation of the main control board M and the sub control board S depending on the timing of supplying power to the gaming machine and turning off the power. FIG. 88 (a) is a timing chart showing the first aspect of the timing of power supply to the gaming machine and power off, and FIG. 88 (b) is a timing chart of the timing of power supply to the gaming machine and power off. It is a timing chart which shows the 2nd aspect.

The first aspect is an aspect in which a power failure occurs after the execution of the main program of the main control board M or the subprogram of the sub-control board S is started. On the other hand, the second aspect is a mode in which the power supply is cut off before the execution of the main program of the main control board or the subprogram of the sub-control board is started.

In this example, a power failure is a state in which power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, a state in which the power switch of the gaming machine is turned off, a state in which the power cable is disconnected, a state in which the power cable is disconnected, or a power failure. But it may be. This includes cases where power supply is unintentionally stopped at the amusement park. The timing when the power supply is cut off is the timing when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, the timing when the power switch of the gaming machine is turned off, the timing when the power cable is disconnected, and the power cable is disconnected. It is the timing when the power failure occurred.

In FIGS. 88 (a) and 88 (b), ΔT1 is shown from the start of power supply to the time when the supply voltage to the main control board M reaches a low level (sometimes referred to as an off level) after a power failure occurs. ΔT2 is the time from the start of power supply until the supply voltage to the main control board M reaches the supply level, and ΔT3 is the time from the timing when the power supply is cut off to the supply voltage to the main control board M. It is the time until the low level is reached, ΔT4 is the time from when the supply voltage to the main control board M reaches the supply level until the subprogram of the sub-control board S is activated, and ΔT5 is the time until the subprogram of the sub-control board S is activated. This is the time from when the supply voltage to M reaches the supply level until the main program of the main control board M is started. Here, the relationships ΔT5 <ΔT1, ΔT2 <ΔT3, ΔT5> ΔT3, and ΔT4 <ΔT5 are established.

<<< First aspect >>>
<< Changes in power supply status >>
The power supply to the gaming machine is started at time t1, the power supply is cut off at time t3, and the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped.

<< Operation of main control board >>
<Power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board>
As described above, power supply to the gaming machine is started from time t1. By supplying power to the gaming machine, the power supply unit E starts supplying power to the main control board from time t1. The power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M increases from the off level (time t1) to the supply level (time t2), and becomes constant at the supply level from time t2. It should be noted that the figure illustrates a case where the time from the start of power supply to the main control board to the arrival of the power supply voltage at the supply level is constant, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the main control board is not limited to this. It may be configured so that the time from the start of power supply to the time when the power supply voltage reaches the supply level can vary (randomly). Further, the case where the time from the start of power supply to the sub-control board to the time when the power supply voltage reaches the supply level is constant is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the power supply to the sub-control board is started. The time from when the power supply voltage reaches the supply level may be configured to vary (randomly). Even in such a configuration, the minimum value (minimum time) of the time from the start of power supply to the main control board until the power supply voltage reaches the supply level is the minimum value (minimum time) of the start of power supply to the sub control board. It is preferable to configure the voltage so that it is longer than the maximum value (maximum time) of the time from when the power supply voltage reaches the supply level.

After that, the power is cut off at time t3. Due to this power failure, the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M gradually decreases from the supply level (time t3) to the maintenance level (time t4), and is omitted from the time t4 at the maintenance level. It becomes constant. The power supply unit E has a backup power supply composed of capacitors, and even if the power supply is cut off, the power supply unit E has a substantially constant power supply voltage for a certain period of time (time t4 to time t5). (Maintenance level) can be output (power cutoff processing will be executed when the maintenance level voltage is supplied). In this example, the time to maintain the maintenance level (time from time t3 to time t5) from the start of execution of power off processing (detection of power off) is the time required to execute timer interrupt processing at least 20 times. It is configured to guarantee (time during which the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 32) can be called and executed 20 times).

After that, the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M gradually decreases from time t5 and becomes an off level at time t6.

<Starting the main program>
The main program executed on the main control board is started from the time ta when the power supply voltage becomes constant from the time t2 to ΔT5. By executing this main program, the process of the main control board START (power on) shown in FIG. 13 described above is executed.

As described above, when the setting key switch is off in the determination process of step 1014 in FIG. 13, the processes of steps 1016 to 1022, 1036 to 1046 and 1300 are executed, and the process of step 1040 causes a timer interrupt. Is started.

Further, in the determination process of step 1014 of FIG. 13, when the setting key switch is turned on, the processes of steps 1028 to 1034 and 1100 are executed.

<Activation of timer interrupt>
When the setting key switch is off, the timer interrupt is activated by the process of step 1040 in FIG. 13, and when the setting key switch is on, the timer interrupt is activated by the process of step 1104 of FIG. .. After the timer interrupt is activated, the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 32 is called and executed every predetermined cycle T. The period T at which the timer interrupt is executed is 1.8 msec.

<Detection of power failure>
When a power failure occurs, a power failure detection signal is output from the power supply unit E. The main control board M has an input port into which a power failure detection signal is input. The power-off detection signal is a high-level signal when the power-off has not occurred, and is a low-level signal when the power-off has occurred. The main control board M can determine whether or not a power failure has occurred depending on whether the data read from the input port is a high-level signal or a low-level signal.

In this example, the main control board M detects a power failure in the determination process of step 1604 in FIG. Specifically, the main control board M determines that the power supply has been cut off when the data read from the input port is a low-level signal in both of the two consecutive timer interrupt processes.

As described above, in this example, the occurrence of power failure is detected by two consecutive timer interrupt processes. Therefore, when a power failure occurs after the timer interrupt is activated by the process of step 1040 of FIG. 13 or the process of step 1104 of FIG. 14, it is possible to detect the occurrence of the power failure. On the other hand, if the power cut occurs before the timer interrupt is activated, the occurrence of the power cut cannot be detected.

In this way, when the power supply is cut off after the execution of the main program is started and the timer interrupt is activated by the process of step 1040 in FIG. 13 or the process of step 1104 in FIG. 14, the power supply is cut off. , It is possible to detect that a power failure has occurred due to interrupt processing. When it is detected that a power outage has occurred, the power outage processing shown in FIG. 36 can be executed.

<< Operation of sub-control board >>
<Starting a subprogram>
The subprogram executed on the sub-control board S is started from the time tb when ΔT4 elapses from the time t2 when the power supply voltage becomes constant. By executing this subprogram, the sub-program start process shown in FIG. 38 described above is executed. Note that ΔT4 is shorter than ΔT5 described above, and by starting the sub-control board S before the main control board M, the sub-control board S does not miss the command transmitted from the main control board M. Can be received. In the figure, the timing at which the power supply voltage reaches the supply level after starting the power supply to the main control board M and the timing at which the power supply voltage reaches the supply level after starting the power supply to the sub control board S. Is shown at the same time tb, but the time from the start of power supply to the main control board M until the power supply voltage reaches the supply level and the power supply voltage after the start of power supply to the sub control board S It may be configured so that the time required to reach the supply level is different, and even in such a configuration, from the start of power supply to the main control board M to the start of the main program of the main control board M. It is preferable to set the time to be longer than the time from the start of power supply to the sub control board S to the start of the subprogram of the sub control board S, and the power supply voltage on the main control board M side The time from when the supply level is reached until the main program of the main control board M is started is from when the power supply voltage on the sub control board S side reaches the supply level until the subprogram of the sub control board S is started. It is preferable to configure it for a longer time than the time.

<<< Second aspect >>>
FIG. 88B is a timing chart showing the second aspect of the timing of supplying power to the gaming machine and turning off the power. The second aspect is a mode in which the power supply is cut off before the execution of the main program executed on the main control board M is started. That is, it is an embodiment in which the power supply is cut off before the time t2 to ΔT5 when the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the sub-control board S reaches the supply level elapses.

As described above, in the second aspect, the power is cut off before the execution of the main program is started (before the timer interrupt is activated), so that the power is cut off by the main program. This cannot be detected, and the gaming machine is stopped due to the power failure (the supply voltage reaches the low level) without executing the power supply cutoff process shown in FIG. 36.

<< Operation of main control board >>
<Power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board>
Power supply to the gaming machine is started from time t1. By supplying power to the gaming machine, the power supply unit E starts supplying power to the main control board M from time t1. The power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M increases from the off level (time t1) to the supply level (time t2), and becomes constant at the supply level from time t2.

After that, the power is cut off at time t13. Due to this power failure, the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M gradually decreases from the supply level (time t13) to the maintenance level (time t14), and is omitted from the time t14 at the maintenance level. It becomes constant. After that, the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M gradually decreases from the time t15 and becomes an off level at the time t16.

As described above, in the second aspect, the execution of the main program is started after the power is cut off, but the timer interrupt is activated by the process of step 1040 in FIG. 13 and the process of step 1104 in FIG. The power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M is configured to be at the off level.

Although the first aspect and the second aspect are illustrated in the figure, the configuration applicable to the gaming machine according to this example is as follows.
(1) Immediately after the power supply to the main control board M is started (for example, after the time has elapsed from the start of power supply to the main control board M to execute the timer interrupt process once), the power supply is cut off → the main program is executed. The power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M becomes the off level before the start (the execution of the main program is not started).
(2) Start supplying power to the main control board M → Immediately after the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M reaches the supply level (for example, the power supply voltage supplied to the main control board M is the supply level). Power off occurs after the time has elapsed to execute the timer interrupt process once after reaching Become a level (the execution of the main program will not start)
It may be configured as described above.

<<< Relationship between the state of the setting key switch and the power supply state >>>
FIG. 89A is a table showing the relationship between the state of the setting key switch in the first aspect, the power supply state, and the situation, and FIG. 89B is a state of the setting key switch in the second aspect. It is a table showing the relationship between the power supply state and the situation.

<< Relationship between the state of the setting key switch and the power supply state in the first aspect >>
<State 1>
First, in the state 1 of FIG. 89 (a), the gaming machine is in a normal state, that is, a state in which the game is being executed or a state in which the game can be executed, and the setting key switch is “off”. The "power supply status" is "on".

<State 2>
In the state 2, the power supply is cut off while the setting key switch remains "off", and the "power supply state" becomes "off". At this time, the power off processing of FIG. 36 is executed, and the address of the processing to be executed next in the normal state is saved in the storage area as the return address.

<State 3>
In the state 3, the setting key switch is operated to switch to "on" while the "power supply state" remains "off".

<State 4>
Next, in the state 4, the "power supply state" is switched to "on" by supplying power while the setting key switch is "on". When the "power supply state" becomes "on", the main control board START (power on) process of FIG. 13 is executed. As described above, in the first aspect, the power cutoff occurs after the execution of the main program is started, and the main aspect of FIG. 13 is before the power cutoff occurs (next state 5). The control board START (power on) process can be executed.

In the determination process of step 1014 of FIG. 13 described above, it is determined that the setting key switch is on, the processes of steps 1028 to 1034 are executed, and the setting change device control process is called and executed in step 1100. , Moves from the normal state to the setting change mode. In this setting change device control process, the storage area is initialized by the process of step 1102 shown in FIG. In this way, when the setting key switch is "on" and the "power supply state" is "on", the mode shifts to the setting change mode, and then the setting change switch and the start lever are operated. This makes it possible to change the set value. Further, by the process of step 1622 in FIG. 32, the setting change start command is transmitted to the sub-control board S, so that it is possible to notify that the sub-control board S is in the setting change mode.

<State 5>
Next, in the setting change mode, when the power is cut off while the setting change device control process is being executed, the "power supply state" changes to "off". When the power is cut off, the power off processing of FIG. 36 is called and executed, and by the processing of step 1902, the address of the processing to be executed next in the setting change device control processing (setting change mode) is the return address. Is stored in the storage area as.

<State 6>
In the state 6, the setting key switch is operated and the setting key switch is switched to "off" while the "power supply state" remains "off".

<State 7>
In the state 7, power is supplied while the setting key switch is "off", and the "power supply state" is switched to "on". When the "power supply state" becomes "on", the main control board START (power on) process of FIG. 13 is executed. In the determination process of step 1014 of FIG. 13, the setting key switch is determined to be “off”, and the process of step 1022 is executed. By the process of this step 1022, it returns to the return address saved in the storage area in the state 5, and the execution is started from the process of the return address. As described above, the return address saved in the storage area in the state 5 is the address of the process to be executed next in the setting change device control process, and by returning, the process of the setting change device control process is immediately executed. Will be done. As described above, in the first aspect, the power supply is turned off in the normal state, and the setting change mode is entered by turning on the setting key switch and turning on the power supply in the situation where the power supply is off. This is the basic operation when shifting to the setting change mode, but even if the power supply is turned off during the setting change mode, the setting key switch is turned off, and then the power supply is turned on. Since the setting change mode is stored as the return address, it is configured to be in the setting change mode. With this configuration, even if the power is cut off during the setting change mode (for example, the game hall is out of power), the state before the power outage can be restored, and the gaming machine is abnormal. It is possible to make it difficult for various movements to occur.

<< Relationship between the state of the setting key switch and the power supply state in the second aspect >>
<State 1>
In the state 1 of FIG. 89 (b), similarly to the first aspect, the gaming machine is in a normal state, that is, a state in which the game is being executed or a state in which the game can be executed, and the setting key switch is ". It is "off" and the "power supply state" is "on".

<State 2>
In the state 2, as in the first aspect, the power supply is cut off while the setting key switch remains “off”, and the “power supply state” becomes “off”. At this time, the power off processing of FIG. 36 is executed, and the address of the processing to be executed next in the normal state is saved in the storage area as the return address.

<State 3>
In the state 3, the setting key switch is operated to switch to "on" while the "power supply state" remains "off".

<State 4>
In the state 4, power is supplied while the setting key switch is "on", and the "power supply state" is switched to "on".

<State 5>
In the state 5, the power supply is cut off while the setting key switch is "on", and the "power supply state" is switched to "off". As described above, in the second aspect, the power supply is cut off before the execution of the main program executed on the main control board M is started. Therefore, in the second aspect, the "power supply state" is once "on" (state 4), but immediately after the "power supply state" related to the state 4 is "on" (for example, timer interrupt processing is performed). After the lapse of time for one execution), the "power supply state" is switched to "off". In other words, before the main control board START (power on) process of FIG. 13 is executed (or before the timer interrupt is activated), the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M is off-level. (State 5). Therefore, the setting change device control process is not executed, the return address stored in the storage area is not changed, and the return address stored in the state 2 is stored in the storage area as it is.

<State 6>
Next, in the state 6, the setting key switch is operated and the setting key switch is switched to "off" while the "power supply state" remains "off".

<State 7>
In the state 7, power is supplied while the setting key switch is "off", and the "power supply state" is switched to "on". When the "power supply state" becomes "on", the main control board START (power on) process of FIG. 13 is executed. In the determination process of step 1014 of FIG. 13, the setting key switch is determined to be off, and the process of step 1022 is executed. By the process of this step 1022, it returns to the return address saved in the storage area in the state 2, and the execution is started from the return address. As described above, the return address saved in the storage area in the state 2 is the address of the process to be executed next in the normal state, and the process to be executed next is executed in the normal state. As described above, in the second aspect, even when the setting key switch is "on" and the "power supply state" is "on", before the main program of the main control board M is executed. When the power supply is turned "off", even if the setting key switch is turned "off" and then the power supply is turned "on", the mode is not changed to the setting change mode. .. By configuring as in the second aspect, if the power is cut off immediately after the power of the gaming machine is turned on, there is a possibility that an unintended malfunction may occur in the gaming machine if the mode is changed to the setting change mode. , Even if the setting key switch is on, it can be configured not to shift to the setting change mode, and it is possible to configure a gaming machine that is less likely to cause problems.

<<< Control of medal grant and output control of payout sound >>
As described above, when a small winning combination is won (when the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination is stopped and displayed), the player is awarded the number of medals to be paid out corresponding to the winning small winning combination.

<< Processing of medal award >>
The process of awarding medals includes a process of adding the number of credits and awarding them, and a process of actually paying out the game medals to the outside of the gaming machine and awarding them.

<Addition processing of credits>
When the current number of credits is less than the maximum number of stored cards (for example, less than 50), the CPUC 100 of the main control board M adds the number of credits according to the number of payouts until the number of credits reaches the maximum number of stored cards. This credit number addition process is executed by the arithmetic process of the CPUC100 of the main control board M.

<Payout processing of game medals>
When the current number of credits exceeds the maximum number of stored credits, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M drives the hopper H40 to pay out medals from the medal payout device H to give medals. The payout process from the medal payout device H is executed by outputting a drive signal from the main control board M to the hopper H40.

<< Mode of medal award >>
Depending on the current number of credits and the number of medals to be granted, there is a shift from a mode of adding credits only, a mode of only paying out game medals, and a mode of adding credits to paying out game medals ( There are three types of modes (execution of both credit count addition processing and medal payout processing).

<Aspects of credit addition processing only>
When the current number of credits is equal to or less than the maximum number of stored credits, the CPUC100 of the main control board M adds the number of credits according to the number of payouts until the number of credits reaches the maximum number of stored credits. If the maximum number of stored cards is not reached even after adding the number of payouts, the process of granting medals is completed only by adding the number of credits.

<A mode of shifting from the credit number addition process to the game medal payout process>
When the current number of credits is equal to or less than the maximum number of stored credits, the CPUC100 of the main control board M adds the number of credits according to the number of payouts until the number of credits reaches the maximum number of stored credits. When the number of credits reaches the maximum number of stored credits, the CPUC100 of the main control board M switches from the processing of adding the number of credits to the processing of paying out game medals. The CPUC100 of the main control board M drives the hopper H40 to pay out the remaining number of game medals obtained by subtracting the credit addition amount from the number of payouts from the medal payout device H. The sum of the added amount of credits and the number of game medals paid out from the medal payout device H is the number of payouts corresponding to the winning small winning combination.

In this way, when shifting from the credit number addition process to the game medal payout process, the CPUC100 of the main control board M switches from the credit addition process to the game medal payout process.

<Aspects only for paying out game medals>
When the current number of credits has already reached the maximum number of stored cards, the CPUC100 of the main control board M outputs a drive signal to the hopper H40 and pays out the game medals for the number of medals to be paid out from the medal payout device H.

<< Specific example >>
For example, as shown in FIG. 90, when the current number of credits is 47 and a player is given a medal with 5 payouts, the CPUC100 of the main control board M first sets the number of credits to 1. Add one by one. Specifically, the CPUC100 of the main control board M increases the number of credits to 48, 49, 50. In the example shown in FIG. 90, the number of credits displayed on the credit number display device is 47 → 48 (first sheet (time t1)) → 49 (second sheet (time t2)) → 50 (third sheet (time t2)). It changes at time t3)). When the number of credits reaches 50, the maximum number of stored cards (50 cards) is reached, and the number of credits cannot be increased any more.

Next, the CPUC100 of the main control board M switches from the credit addition process to the game medal payout process, outputs a drive signal to the hopper H40, and subtracts 3 credits from the 5 payouts. 2 cards are paid out from the medal payout device H.

In the example shown in FIG. 90, the CPUC100 of the main control board M outputs a drive signal to the hopper H40 at time t4 to start the payout process. The fourth game medal is paid out from time t4 to time t5, and the fifth game medal is paid out from time t6 to time t7. The CPUC100 of the main control board M counts the number of medals paid out from the medal payout device H, detects that the fifth game medal has been paid out at time t7, and ends the payout process. ..

<< Various times >>
<Unit processing time for credit addition processing and unit processing time for game medal payout processing>
In the credit addition processing by the CPUC100 of the main control board M, a unit processing time a is required to increase the credit number m to the credit number m + 1. For example, as shown in FIG. 90, it takes time t2-time t1 = a to increase the number of credits from 48 (first card) to 49 (second card), and the number of credits is 49 (second card). It takes time t3-time t2 = a to increase the number of credits from 50 (third card). In the credit addition processing, the unit processing time a is substantially constant.

Further, in the process of paying out the game medals from the medal payout device H, a unit processing time c is required from the payout of the nth game medal to the payout of the n + 1th game medal. For example, as shown in FIG. 90, it takes time t6-time t4 = c from the payout of the fourth game medal to the payout of the fifth game medal. In the game medal payout process, the unit processing time c is substantially constant.

One unit processing time a can be defined by the difference in timing between two consecutive addition processes. For example, the unit processing time a is the difference between the timing of the (first) addition process from 47 to 48 (time t1) and the timing of the (second) addition process from 48 to 49 (time t2). It is the difference between the timing (time t2) of the (second) addition process from 48 to 49 and the timing (time t3) of the (third sheet) addition process from 49 to 50.

Further, one unit processing time c can be defined by the difference in the start timing of two consecutive payout processes. For example, the unit processing time c is the difference between the timing of starting the processing of the fifth sheet (time t6) and the timing of starting the addition processing of the fourth sheet (time t4). In this way, the unit processing times a and c may be specified so as to have a constant cycle.

<Switching time from credit addition processing to game medal payout processing e>
As described above, the number of credits is added until the number of credits reaches the maximum number of stored cards, and if all the number of payouts is not given, the process is switched to the payout process of the game medal. It takes a switching time e for the CPUC100 of the main control board M to switch from the credit number addition process to the game medal payout process.

<< Comparison of time >>

<Unit processing time a and unit processing time c>
The unit processing time a described above is different from the unit processing time c. The unit processing time a is the time determined by the arithmetic processing of the CPUC100 of the main control board M, and the unit processing time c is the time required for the arithmetic processing of the CPUC100 of the main control board M and the time required to drive the medal payout device H. It consists of both. The unit processing time c can be made longer than the unit processing time a. By doing so, it is possible to accurately control the payout including the drive time of the medal payout device H.

As described above, the unit processing time c can be made equal to the unit processing time a by adjusting the time required to drive the medal payout device H. By doing so, the payout process can be expedited.

<Switching time e>
The switching time e is different from the unit processing time a. The switching time e can be made longer than the unit processing time a. By lengthening the switching time e, it is possible to stably switch from the credit number addition process to the game medal payout process, and smoothly switch from the arithmetic process of the CPUC100 of the main control board M to the drive of the hopper H40. ..

Further, the switching time e can be made shorter than the unit processing time a. By shortening the switching time e, it is possible to quickly switch from the credit number addition process to the game medal payout process, and by ending the game medal payout process early, the next game can be started immediately. , The consumption of game medals can be increased, the profit of the game field can be increased, and the operating efficiency of the game machine can be improved.

In this way, by making the switching time e different from the unit processing time a, when switching to the game medal payout process, the payout is different from a fixed cycle, and the uplifting feeling that the payout of the game medal to the medal tray starts. Expectations can be given to the game.

The switching time e can be made to match the unit processing time a. When the switching time e is made to match the unit processing time a, medals can be given to the player at a fixed cycle, and the same medals are given in both the credit number addition process and the game medal payout process. It is possible to give a sense of security by showing the player that.

<< Output of game medium addition sound >>
The CPUC100 of the main control board M outputs a payout start command to the sub-control board S when the credit addition process is started (time t1). Upon receiving this payout start command, the sub-control board S starts outputting the game medium addition sound from the speaker S20.

Further, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M outputs a payout end command to the sub control board S when the payout of the game medals is completed (time t7). Upon receiving this payout end command, the sub-control board S ends the output of the game medium imparted sound from the speaker S20. As described above, the CPUC100 of the main control board M counts the number of game medals paid out from the medal payout device H, and all of the payout number of game medals corresponding to the winning small wins are given to the player. Judge whether or not it was granted. When the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines that all of the game medals of the payout number corresponding to the winning small winning combination have been awarded, the CPUC100 of the main control board M ends the output of the payout end command to the sub-control board S and outputs the payout end command from the speaker S20. The output of the game medium addition sound is terminated. When the game medium-added sound is repeatedly reproduced (output) with a sound having a fixed cycle, the game medium-added sound is immediately played at the timing when the sub-control board S side receives the payout end command. It may be configured to end the output, or the output of the game medium addition sound ends at the timing when the cycle of the game medium addition sound that outputs the payout end command at the timing received by the sub-control board S side ends. It may be configured to do so.

The game medium-assigned sound is a sound output from the speaker S20 by reproducing the unit-assigned sound data at least once. The unit-assigned sound data is stored in advance in the RAM of the sub-control board S. As shown in FIG. 90, the reproduction time for one unit-assigned sound data is d, and the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads the unit-assigned sound data from the RAM, and the payout end command is received from the time when the payout start command is received. The game medium-assigned sound is output from the speaker S20 by repeatedly playing back the unit-assigned sound data a plurality of times until the is received.

<First aspect>
The first aspect of the game medium imparted sound shown in FIG. 90 is an embodiment in which the unit assigned sound data is repeatedly reproduced every reproduction time d from the time when the payout start command is received. By playing in this way, the game medium-added sound is output at regular intervals. As described above, even when switching from the credit number addition process to the game medal payout process, the game medium granting sound is output at regular intervals, so that the player does not feel uncomfortable with the payout and the credits are paid. It is possible to give a sense of security by showing the player that both the number addition process and the game medal payout process give the same value.

<Second aspect>
Further, in the second aspect of the game medium imparted sound shown in FIG. 90, the unit assigned sound data is reproduced every playback time d from the time when the payout start command is received, and only the time f is completed after the credit number addition process is completed. This is an embodiment in which the unit-assigned sound data is reproduced, and then, at time t4, the game medal payout process is started and the unit-assigned sound data is reproduced again. When switching to the game medal payout process, the game medium granting sound is output at a timing different from a certain cycle, so that the game can be given an uplifting feeling and expectation that the game medal starts to be paid out to the medal tray. ..

If the game medal of the hopper H40 disappears and a hopper error occurs while the game medal is being paid out from the medal payout device H (for example, if it is determined to be Yes in the process of step 1279), the sub The control board S stops the output of the game medium imparting sound, and outputs a sound indicating that a hopper error has occurred. When the game medal is supplied to the hopper H40 and becomes ready for payout, the main control board M again sends a payout start command to the sub control board S, and the sub control board S starts outputting the game medium imparting sound. .. In addition, the present invention is not limited to this, and even if a hopper error occurs, the game medium-assigned sound is continuously output, but the volume of the game medium-assigned sound is the volume of the sound indicating that the hopper error has occurred. It outputs at a volume lower than the volume (volume = 0 may be set), and when the hopper error is canceled, the output of the sound indicating that the hopper error has occurred is terminated, and the sound added to the game medium is used. It may be configured to restore the volume.

<<< Arrangement of integrated circuits on the board >>
FIG. 91 is a front view showing the arrangement of various electronic components mounted on the main control board M. FIG. 92 is a side view showing the arrangement of electronic components mounted on the main control board M.

The main control board M has a substantially plate-shaped and rectangular printed circuit board MP. A CPUC100, an IC, a resistor, a connector, and the like are mainly mounted on the front side of the printed circuit board MP, and a circuit pattern mainly made of conductors is formed on the back side of the printed circuit board MP. The main control board M (printed circuit board MP) is composed of two longitudinal end portions ML1 and ML2 that are parallel to each other and along the longitudinal direction, and two minor end portions MS1 and MS2 that are parallel to each other and along the lateral direction. It has a rectangular shape.

In this example, the main control board M is mounted so as to stand upright in the housing of the gaming machine. When the main control board M is erected and mounted, the longitudinal end portions ML1 and ML2 are arranged along the horizontal direction, and the short end portions MS1 and MS2 are arranged along the vertical direction. The longitudinal end ML1 is located on the upper side and the longitudinal end ML2 is located on the lower side. Further, when viewed from the front side of the printed circuit board MP, the short end portion MS1 is located on the left side of the short end portion MS2, and the short end portion MS2 is located on the right side of the short end portion MS1.

Hereinafter, the longitudinal end ML1 side is referred to as an upper side, the longitudinal end ML2 side is referred to as a lower side, the short end MS1 side is referred to as a left side, and the short end MS2 side is referred to as a right side.

<CPUC100>
The CPUC100 has a long shape, the length in the longitudinal direction is CLL, and the length in the lateral direction is CSL. The CPUC 100 has a plurality of pins (not shown), and the plurality of pins are formed so as to project from the main body portion. When the CPUC 100 is attached to the printed circuit board MP, an electrical connection is formed by the plurality of pins, and different electrical signals flow through the plurality of pins. Therefore, in the work of attaching the CPUC100 to the printed circuit board MP, it is necessary to attach the CPUC100 in an appropriate orientation in order to cause the CPUC100 to perform a desired operation. The first pin (1P shown in FIG. 91) of the CPUC100 is used as a reference pin for arranging the CPUC100. A mark for visually recognizing the first pin (1P) is formed on the main body of the CPUC 100, and a notch (not shown) for visually recognizing the orientation of the CPUC 100 is formed.

In this example, the CPUC 100 is attached to the printed circuit board MP so that the longitudinal direction of the CPUC 100 coincides with (parallel to) the longitudinal direction of the main control board M. In this example, as shown in FIG. 91, by arranging the CPUC100 so that the first pin of the CPUC100 is located on the lower left side, the CPUC100 is arranged so as to be aligned with the orientation of the IC described later. When attaching the CPUC100 to the printed circuit board MP, it is possible to reduce mistakes in attaching the CPUC100 in the wrong direction.

Further, in general, various character information (not shown) such as a model number and a maker name is printed on the main body of the CPUC 100. The character information is printed so as to be separated from the first pin side along the longitudinal direction of the CPUC 100. It is preferable that the character information such as the model number and the manufacturer name can be easily visually recognized while the CPUC 100 is attached to the printed circuit board MP. As described above, by arranging the CPUC100 so that the first pin of the CPUC100 is located on the lower left side, the CPUC100 can be arranged in an direction in which the printed model number, the manufacturer name, and the like can be easily visually recognized.

When the CPUC100 is attached to the printed circuit board MP, the pin numbers of the CPUC100 increase in order in the counterclockwise direction starting from the first pin (1P) when viewed from the front side of the printed circuit board MP. ..

<IC>
Various ICs (integrated circuits) are also mounted on the front side of the printed circuit board MP. The IC has a long shape, the length in the longitudinal direction is ILL, and the length in the lateral direction is ISL. Like the CPUC100, the IC also has a plurality of pins (not shown), and the plurality of pins are formed so as to project from the main body portion. When the IC is attached to the printed circuit board MP, a plurality of pins form an electrical connection, and different electrical signals flow through the plurality of pins. Therefore, even in the work of attaching the IC to the printed circuit board MP, it is necessary to attach the IC in an appropriate orientation so that the IC can perform the desired operation. Therefore, the first pin of the IC (1P shown in FIG. 91) is also used as a reference pin for arranging the IC. A mark for visually recognizing the first pin (1P) is formed on the main body of the IC, and a notch (not shown) for visually recognizing the direction of the IC is formed on the main body of the IC.

In this example, the IC is attached to the printed circuit board MP so that the longitudinal direction of the IC coincides with (parallel to) the longitudinal direction of the CPUC 100 and the longitudinal direction of the main control board M. Further, the IC is arranged on the printed circuit board MP so that the first pin of the IC is located on the lower left side. In this way, by arranging the IC so that the first pin of the IC is always located on the lower left side, all the ICs are arranged in the same direction, and the work of attaching the IC to the printed circuit board MP At this time, it is possible to reduce mistakes such as mounting the IC in the wrong direction.

Further, in general, various character information (not shown) such as a model number and a maker name is printed on the main body of the IC. The character information is printed so as to be separated from the first pin side along the longitudinal direction of the IC. It is preferable that the character information such as the model number and the manufacturer name of the IC can be easily visually recognized while the IC is attached to the printed circuit board MP. As described above, by arranging the IC so that the first pin of the IC is located on the lower left side, the IC is arranged so that the printed model number, manufacturer name, etc. can be easily seen. You can also.

When the IC is attached to the printed circuit board MP, the pin numbers of the IC increase in order in the counterclockwise direction starting from the first pin (1P) when viewed from the front side of the printed circuit board MP. ..

<Resistance>
Various resistors are also attached to the front side of the printed circuit board MP, and an electrical connection is formed with other electronic components. The IC has a long shape, the length in the longitudinal direction is RLL, and the length in the lateral direction is RSL.

<Connector>
A connector is also attached to the front side of the printed circuit board MP, and an electrical connection is formed with other electronic components. The main control board M is connected to the sub control board S or the like via a connector, and can transmit and receive various signals.

<Distance between CPUC100 and IC>
As shown by the broken line in FIG. 91, only the resistance is arranged inside the predetermined range CSR1 around the CPUC 100, and the IC is not arranged. The predetermined range CSR1 is a range in which the length of the CPUC 100 from the outer peripheral COR is equal to or less than the predetermined length. Here, the predetermined length can be, for example, at least the length CSL in the lateral direction of the CPUC 100. Various currents (currents that change with time, for example, high frequency signals) flow through the IC, and the IC can be a source of noise, which may affect the operation of the CPUC 100. In this way, by not arranging the IC inside the predetermined range CSR1 around the CPUC100, the IC is arranged at a position separated from the CPUC100 by a certain distance (for example, the length CSL), and the noise emitted from the IC is generated. , It is possible not to affect the operation of the CPUC100.

Further, the predetermined length of the CPUC 100 from the outer peripheral COR may be at least the length RLL in the longitudinal direction of the resistance. Since a current flows through the resistance, the resistance can be a heat source, which may affect the operation of the CPUC100. Therefore, by not arranging the resistance inside the predetermined range CSR1 around the CPUC100, the resistance is arranged at a position separated from the CPUC100 by a certain distance (for example, the length RLL), and is emitted from the resistance. The heat generated can be prevented from affecting the operation of the CPUC 100.

<Relationship between the height of CPUC100, the height of IC, and the height of other parts>
FIG. 92 is a side view showing the heights of the various electronic components shown in FIG. 91. As shown in FIG. 92, the height CHT of the CPUC100 is the highest, then the height IHT of the IC is the highest, and the height RHT of the resistance is the lowest. As shown in FIG. 91, only the parts having a height CHT of the CPUC 100 or less are arranged inside the predetermined range CSR2 around the CPUC100. The predetermined range CSR2 is a range in which the length of the CPUC 100 from the outer peripheral COR is equal to or less than the predetermined length. Here, the predetermined length can be, for example, the longitudinal length RLL of the resistance.

In the work of attaching the CPUC100 to the printed circuit board MP, an attachment tool (not shown) is used. The mounting tool is a tool for mounting the CPUC100 by sandwiching it between the tips of the mounting tools and bringing it close to the printed circuit board MP. Since the structure is such that the CPUC 100 is sandwiched by the tip of the mounting tool, the tip of the mounting tool is arranged around the CPUC 100 when the CPUC 100 is sandwiched. Therefore, when mounting the CPUC100, the tip of the mounting tool must also be close to the printed circuit board MP, and a space for the tip of the mounting tool is provided so that the tip of the mounting tool does not interfere with other electronic components. It is necessary to secure it.

Therefore, only the parts having a height CHT of the CPUC 100 or less are arranged in the area CSR2 around the position where the CPUC100 is attached to the printed circuit board MP. By doing so, even if the tip of the mounting tool is closest to the printed circuit board MP, the tip of the mounting tool does not interfere with other parts. The region CSR 2 is a range in which the length of the CPUC 100 from the outer peripheral COR is equal to or less than a predetermined length. Here, the predetermined length can be, for example, at least the longitudinal length RLL of the resistance.

It should be noted that only the parts having a height CHT less than the height CHT of the CPUC100 are arranged only in the area around the position where the CPUC100 is attached to the printed circuit board MP, and the area around the position where the CPUC100 is attached to the printed circuit board MP in the printed circuit board MP. Outside, components having a height CHT of CPUC100 or higher may be attached, or all components attached to the printed circuit board MP may be configured to be components having a height CHT of CPUC100 or less.

In this way, by arranging only electronic components lower than the height CHT of the CPUC100 inside the predetermined range CSR2 around the CPUC100, it is possible to secure a space where the tip of the mounting tool can be approached. Even if the mounting tool is used, the CPUC 100 can be mounted on the printed circuit board MP without damaging other electronic components.

In the above-mentioned example, the main control board M has been described as an example, but all the boards on which electronic components such as CPUs and ICs are mounted, such as the sub-control board S, the door board D, the rotating cylinder board K, and the power supply board E. Can be applied to.

<<< Structure related to AT lottery >>>
Next, with reference to FIG. 93, the configuration of the AT state transition control process applicable to the spinning machine according to this example will be described in detail. It should be added that the configuration illustrated in the figure is applicable to all the above-mentioned configurations when the configuration is configured to have an AT.

First, FIG. 93 is a flowchart of the AT state transition control process according to the subroutine of step 1400 of FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 1401-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state related to AT is an AT lottery possible state. In addition, in the figure, a plurality of gaming states having different probabilities of winning an AT lottery such as a low probability state and a high probability state are not provided, and for example, one gaming state such as a high probability state in the present embodiment is not provided. It is configured so that the AT lottery can be executed only in. Further, as a difference from the present embodiment, the AT lottery is not executed based on the winning of the BB.

In the case of Yes in step 1401-1, in step 1401-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets “2” as the AT lottery type and temporarily stores it in a predetermined RAM area. Here, the AT lottery type is a type provided for reducing the data capacity required for executing the AT lottery, for identifying the winning probability when executing the AT lottery. Next, in step 1401-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the condition device related to the game has no setting difference (condition device having no setting difference in the lottery probability). In the modified example shown in the figure, the condition devices having no setting difference are watermelon B, cherry, watermelon A, replay (may be all replays, or some replays), and so on. It is a push order bell, and in this process, it is determined whether or not the condition device with no setting difference has been won. In addition, although there is a setting difference between the lottery probability of the loss and the common bell (there is a setting difference), in this process, it is configured so as not to determine whether or not the loss or the common bell has been won. ing. It is preferable that the predetermined RAM area for storing the AT lottery type is different from the RAM area for storing the winning number and the effect group number described above. With such a configuration, an area for storing the winning number and an effect group, which is an area in which the information on the condition device having a setting difference in the winning probability and the information on the condition device having no setting difference in the winning probability are stored separately. An area for storing numbers and an area for storing AT lottery types, which is an area in which information about a condition device having a setting difference in winning probability and information about a condition device having no setting difference in winning probability are stored without distinction. Can be configured not to be confused.

In the case of Yes in step 1401-3, in step 1401-4, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the AT lottery type table, sets the AT lottery type, and sets the AT lottery type to the predetermined RAM area (in step 1401-2). (The same RAM area as the predetermined RAM area) is temporarily stored (overwritten), and the process proceeds to steps 1401-5. Even if No in step 1401-3, the process proceeds to step 1401-5. Here, the AT lottery table in the middle right of the figure will be described in detail. In this modified example, when the condition device with no setting difference is won in the situation where the AT lottery can be executed, when the watermelon B is won, "0" is selected as the AT lottery type, and when the cherry is won. Is "0" as the AT lottery type, "1" as the AT lottery type when the watermelon A is won, "2" as the AT lottery type when the replay is won, and "2" when the push order bell is won. It is configured to set "2" as the AT lottery type.

Next, in step 1401-5, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the AT lottery based on the set AT lottery type. Here, as shown in the lower right of the figure, the probability of winning the AT lottery is 56/256 when the AT lottery type is "0", and 18 / when the AT lottery type is "1". It is 256, and when the AT lottery type is "2", it is 1/256, and it is "0 → 1 → 2" in order from the one that is easy to win the AT lottery. Next, in step 1401-6, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the AT lottery executed in step 1401-5 has been won. In the case of Yes in steps 1401-6, in step 1401-7, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined value (for example, 50) as the number of AT initial games in the AT counter. In this modification, unlike the present embodiment, the AT state transition control process is configured to set the AT initial game number in the AT counter, and the AT state start control process sets the AT initial game number. It is configured not to (the number of AT games may be added if the number of AT games is added). Next, in step 1401-8, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the state related to AT after the next game to "AT in progress state", and shifts to the next process (process of step 1430). Even if No in step 1401-1 or step 1401-6, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1430).

In a conventional gaming machine, as an AT lottery, a common lottery process that does not refer to a winning combination and a lottery process that is executed when a condition device having no setting difference is won (a lottery process that refers to a winning combination) are performed. When configured to have, it was necessary to execute the AT lottery at least twice, but by providing the AT lottery type as shown in the figure, a common lottery process that does not refer to the winning combination (in the figure, the common lottery process). The process of step 1401-2 is supported) and the lottery process executed when the conditional device having no setting difference is won (in the figure, the process of step 1401-4 is supported). Can be executed in one lottery process (in the figure, the process of steps 1401-6 corresponds to).

<<< Processing for determining bonus winning information, winning / replay winning information, production group number, and payout group number applicable to this example >>>
In the following, the process of generating bonus winning information and winning / replay winning information from the winning numbers applicable to this example, the process of determining the production group number from the winning / replay winning information, and the determination of the payout group number. The processing to be performed will be described. By executing the processing described below, the program processing stored in the ROM of the main control board M can be simplified, and the program area and the data area required for the program processing can be compressed. It should be added that the process described in detail below can be applied to any of the above-described embodiment and configuration and the later-described embodiment and configuration.

<<< Processing to generate bonus winning information and winning / replay winning information from the winning number >>>
In the following, a process of generating two types of winning information, bonus winning information and winning / replay winning information, from the winning number will be described. As described above, the conditional device number can be referred to as a winning number, and hereinafter, referred to as a winning number. The winning number is determined by the winning combination lottery means. Two types of winning information, bonus winning information and winning / replay winning information, are generated from the determined winning number and stored in another storage area of the built-in RAMC120. In the process here, the winning number itself is not stored in the built-in RAMC 120.

In the process of generating the bonus winning information and the winning / replay winning information, the winning information related to the bonus combination and the winning / replay winning information are generated from the winning number using the winning information generation table shown in FIG. 94. By using the winning information generation table, the control process can be simplified and the burden of the control process can be reduced. The winning information generation table is stored in the built-in ROMC110.

<Specific method>
As the winning number, a numerical value from 0 to 27 is specified. As shown in FIG. 10, the winning numbers 0 to 18 are assigned as winning numbers not including the bonus combination, and the winning numbers 19 to 27 are assigned as the winning numbers including the bonus combination. By allocating in this way, if the winning numbers are 0 to 18, it can be immediately determined that it is either winning or replay winning information. If the winning number is 19 or more, the winning information regarding the bonus combination and the winning / replay winning information are generated from the winning number.

<Table for generating winning information>
A specific example of the winning information generation table is shown in FIG. The winning information generation table shown in FIG. 94 is a table showing the correspondence between the address of the built-in ROMC110 and the data stored in the address. In the example shown in FIG. 94, the address is shown in hexadecimal (H) and the data is shown in decimal (D).

As shown in FIG. 94, the data 19D is stored in the address 1300H, the data 38D is stored in the address 1301H, the data 52D is stored in the address 1302H, and the data 53D is stored in the address 1303H. Data 54D is stored in address 1304H, data 57D is stored in address 1305H, data 71D is stored in address 1306H, data 72D is stored in address 1307H, and data 72D is stored in address 1308H. Data 73D is stored.

The address 1300H corresponds to the winning number 19, the address 1301H corresponds to the winning number 20, the address 1302H corresponds to the winning number 21, the address 1303H corresponds to the winning number 22, and the address 1304H corresponds to the winning number 22. Corresponding to winning number 23, address 1305H corresponds to winning number 24, address 1306H corresponds to winning number 25, address 1307H corresponds to winning number 26, and address 1308H corresponds to winning number 27. ..

The data of the winning information generation table is defined from (bonus winning information) and (winning / replay winning information) shown in FIG. The data stored in the winning information generation table is determined by (data) = (bonus winning information corresponding to the winning number) × 19D + (winning / replay winning information corresponding to the winning number).

For example, the address 1300H corresponds to the winning number 19, and referring to FIG. 10, (bonus winning information of the winning number 19) = 1D, and (winning / replay winning information corresponding to the winning number 19). = 0D. Therefore, the data at the address 1300H becomes 19D by calculating 1D × 19D + 0D. Further, the address 1303H corresponds to the winning number 22, and referring to FIG. 10, (bonus winning information of the winning number 22) = 2D, and (winning / replay winning information corresponding to the winning number 22). = 15D. Therefore, the data at address 1303H becomes 53D by calculating 2D × 19D + 15D. Furthermore, the address 1308H corresponds to the winning number 27, and referring to FIG. 10, (bonus winning information of the winning number 27) = 3D, and (winning / replay winning information corresponding to the winning number 27). ) = 16D. Therefore, the data at address 1308H becomes 73D by calculating 3D × 19D + 16D. The values calculated in advance in this way are stored in each of the addresses 1300H to 1308H of the built-in ROMC110. In other words, (bonus winning information) and (winning / replay winning information) are encoded by the above-mentioned formula, and the values are stored in each of the addresses 1300H to 1308H of the built-in ROMC110.

<Processing of winning information determination>
The winning numbers determined by the winning combination lottery means are stored in the A register and the L register. Next, the comparison operation between the data stored in the A register and the value 19D is executed. Specifically, the process of subtracting 19D from the data stored in the A register is executed. When the carry flag = 1 due to this arithmetic processing, the winning information generation table shown in FIG. 94 is referred to. The comparison operation between the data stored in the A register and the value 19D is a process for determining whether or not to refer to the winning information generation table.

As a result of comparing the data stored in the A register with the value 19D, if the data stored in the A register is less than 19D (when the carry flag = 1), it is stored in the L register. The stored data is stored in the built-in RAMC120 as winning / replay winning information.

As a result of comparing the data stored in the A register with the value 19D, if the data stored in the A register is 19D or more (when the carry flag = 1 is not reached), the following processing is executed. do.

First, 12EDH is stored in the HL register. This 12EDH is an address value obtained by subtracting 13H (19D) from 1300H. In the following processing, the target address is determined using this 12EDH as a reference address.

The A register is added to the address value (12EDH) stored in the HL register to obtain the target address. In other words, the address value (12EDH) stored in the HL register becomes the reference address, and the winning number stored in the A register becomes the offset value. In this way, the target address is obtained by using the reference address and the offset value, the data stored in the target address is read out, and the data is stored in the A register.

Next, the value stored in the A register is divided by 19D, the quotient is stored in the A register, and the remainder is stored in the L register. The value (quotient) of the A register is (bonus winning information), and the value (remainder) of the L register is (winning / replay winning information). By doing so, it is possible to decode into (bonus winning information) and (winning / replay winning information).

Next, the information stored in the A register is stored in the built-in RAMC 120 as bonus winning information, and the information stored in the L register is stored in the built-in RAMC 120 as winning / replay winning information.

<Example 1 When the winning number determined by the winning combination lottery means is 19D (13H) and 19D is stored in the A register>
By executing the comparison operation between the data 19D stored in the A register and the value 19D, the carry flag = 1. Based on this result, 12EDH (HL register) + 13H (A register) is calculated. As a result, the target address becomes 1300H, and the data 19D of 1300H is read out and stored in the A register, so that the A register = 19D.

Next, 19D stored in the A register is divided by the value 19D, and the quotient is stored in the A register and the remainder is stored in the L register. The quotient is 1D and the remainder is 0D. As described above, the address 1300H corresponds to the winning number 19. Therefore, it can be decoded that the (bonus winning information) of the winning number 19 is 1 and the (winning / replay winning information) of the winning number 19 is 0.

<Example 2 When the winning number determined by the winning combination lottery means is 21D (15H) and 21D is stored in the A register>
By executing the comparison operation between the data 21D stored in the A register and the value 19D, the carry flag = 1. Based on this result, 12EDH (HL register) + 15H (A register) is calculated. As a result, the target address becomes 1302H, and the data 52D of 1302H is read out and stored in the A register, so that the A register = 52D.

Next, 52D stored in the A register is divided by the value 19D, and the quotient is stored in the A register and the remainder is stored in the L register. The quotient is 2D and the remainder is 14D. As described above, the address 1302H corresponds to the winning number 21. Therefore, it can be decoded that the (bonus winning information) of the winning number 21 is 2 and the (winning / replay winning information) of the winning number 21 is 14.

<<< Processing to determine the production group number from the winning / replay winning information >>>
The process of determining the production group number from the winning / replay winning information will be described.
In the processing on the main control board M side, the winning / replay winning number is stored in the RAM, and when the bonus combination is won, the winning number of the bonus combination is stored in another storage area of the RAM. Further, in the main control board M, the effect group number determination table is stored in the ROM. The production group number determination table is used to determine the production group number from the winning / replay winning numbers. The production group number determination table is duplicated for the winning / replay winning numbers. By referring to the production group number determination table, the production group number can be determined from the winning / replay winning numbers. In the effect group number determination table, the effect group number is stored corresponding to each of the plurality of addresses. The production group number can be determined by determining the address from the winning / replay winning number and reading the production group number stored in the address.

<Direction group number>
The production group number is information corresponding to winning / replay winning information, and at least a part of the information is grouped. This effect group number is transmitted from the main control board M to the sub control board S. For example, push order replays with fluctuations in RT can be grouped into the same effect group number, and push order bells with different payouts can be grouped into the same effect group number.

<< Example 1 of the production group number determination table >>
The effect group number determination table is a table for specifying the effect group number by using the winning / replay winning information as an offset value. The effect group number determination table is stored in the built-in ROMC 110. FIG. 95 is a diagram showing a first specific example of the effect group number determination table. Hereinafter, it is referred to as an effect group number determination table 1. The effect group number determination table 1 shown in FIG. 95 is a table showing the correspondence between the address of the built-in ROMC 110 and the data stored in the address. In the example shown in FIG. 95, the address is shown in hexadecimal (H) and the data is shown in decimal (D).

As shown in FIG. 95, the data 0D is stored in the address 1200H, the data 1D is stored in the address 1201H, the data 2D is stored in the address 1202H, and the data 3D is stored in the address 1203H. Data 4D is stored in address 1204H, data 4D is stored in address 1205H, data 4D is stored in address 1206H, data 5D is stored in address 1207H, and data 5D is stored in address 1208H. Data 5D is stored, data 5D is stored at address 1209H, data 5D is stored at address 120AH, data 5D is stored at address 120BH, and data 5D is stored at address 120CH. Data 6D is stored in the address 120DH, data 7D is stored in the address 120EH, data 8D is stored in the address 120FH, data 9D is stored in the address 1210H, and data is stored in the address 1211H. 10D is stored, and data 11D is stored at address 1212H.

The address 1200H corresponds to the winning number 0, the address 1201H corresponds to the winning number 1, the address 1202H corresponds to the winning number 2, the address 1203H corresponds to the winning number 3, and the address 1204H corresponds to the winning number 1. Corresponding to winning number 4, address 1205H corresponds to winning number 5, address 1206H corresponds to winning number 6, address 1207H corresponds to winning number 7, and address 1208H corresponds to winning number 8. , Address 1209H corresponds to winning number 9, address 120AH corresponds to winning number 10, address 120BH corresponds to winning number 11, address 120CH corresponds to winning number 12, and address 120DH corresponds to winning number 12. The address 120EH corresponds to the winning number 14, the address 120FH corresponds to the winning number 15, the address 1210H corresponds to the winning number 16, and the address 1211H corresponds to the winning number 17. The address 1212H corresponds to the winning number 18.

<Processing of determining the production group number>
1200H is stored in the HL register, and the winning / replay winning information corresponding to the winning number determined by the winning combination lottery means is stored in the C register. Next, the effect group number can be obtained by adding the value of the C register to the value of the HL register and reading the value stored in the address of the built-in ROMC110 indicated by the added value. In other words, 1200H stored in the HL register becomes the reference address, and the winning / replay winning information stored in the C register becomes the offset value. In this way, by using the reference address and the offset value, the target address can be obtained, the data stored in the target address can be read out, and the effect group number can be acquired.

For example, when the winning number 7 is determined by the winning combination lottery means, 1207H is obtained by 1200H + 7D. The data corresponding to the address 1207H of the effect group number determination table 1 is 5, and the effect group number can be determined to 5. Further, when the winning number 12 is determined by the winning combination lottery means, 120CH is obtained by 1200H + 12D. The data corresponding to the address 120CH of the effect group number determination table 1 is 5, and the effect group number can be determined to 5.

<< Example 2 of the production group number determination table >>
In the above-mentioned example 1 of the effect group number determination table, an example of using the effect group number determination table in which one effect group number is associated with one address of the built-in ROMC110 is shown, but for one address. The effect group number determination table may be defined by associating the two effect group numbers. FIG. 96 is a diagram showing a second specific example of the effect group number determination table. Hereinafter, it is referred to as an effect group number determination table 2. The effect group number determination table 2 shown in FIG. 96 is a table showing the correspondence between the address of the built-in ROMC 110 and the data stored in the address. In the example shown in FIG. 96, the address is shown in hexadecimal (H) and the data is shown in binary (D). In FIG. 96, a symbol “/” is inserted between the high-order and the low-order to clearly indicate the delimiter between the high-order 4-bit data and the low-order 4-bit data. In reality, the data is composed only of 0s and 1s.

The lower 4 bits of the data stored in the effect group number determination table 2 correspond to the even winning numbers, and the upper 4 bits of the data correspond to the odd winning numbers. Specifically, the correspondence is as follows.

As shown in FIG. 96, 0001/0000B is stored in the address 1200H. The lower 4 bits 0000 correspond to the winning number 0, and the upper 4 bits 0001 correspond to the winning number 1. 0011/0010B is stored in the address 1201H. The lower 4 bits 0010 correspond to the winning number 2, and the upper 4 bits 0011 correspond to the winning number 3. 0100/0100B is stored in the address 1202H. The lower 4 bits 0100 corresponds to the winning number 4, and the upper 4 bits 0100 corresponds to the winning number 4. 0101/0100B is stored in the address 1203H. The lower 4 bits 0100 correspond to the winning number 4, and the upper 4 bits 0101 correspond to the winning number 5.

Further, 0101 / 0101B is stored in the address 1204H. The lower 4 bits 0101 correspond to the winning number 5, and the upper 4 bits 0101 correspond to the winning number 5. 0101 / 0101B is stored in the address 1205H. The lower 4 bits 0101 correspond to the winning number 5, and the upper 4 bits 0101 correspond to the winning number 5. 0110 / 0101B is stored in the address 1206H. The lower 4 bits 0101 correspond to the winning number 5, and the upper 4 bits 0110 correspond to the winning number 6. 1000 / 0111B is stored in the address 1207H. The lower 4 bits 0111 correspond to the winning number 7, and the upper 4 bits 1000 correspond to the winning number 8. 1010 / 1001B is stored in the address 1208H. The lower 4 bits 1001 correspond to the winning number 9, and the upper 4 bits 1010 correspond to the winning number 10. 0000 / 1011B is stored in the address 1209H. The lower 4 bits 1011 correspond to the winning number 11.

<Processing of determining the production group number >>
1200H is stored in the HL register, and the winning / replay winning information corresponding to the winning number determined by the winning combination lottery means is stored in the A register. Next, a shift operation for shifting the data in the A register to the right is executed. By this shift operation, if the carry flag is 1, it can be determined that the winning / replay winning information is an odd number, and if the carry flag is 0, it is determined that the winning / replay winning information is an even number. can do. If the winning / replay winning information is odd, the upper 4 bits of the data stored in the built-in ROMC110 may be read, and if the winning / replay winning information is even, it is stored in the built-in ROMC110. The lower 4 bits of the data being stored may be read out.

Further, as described above, since the data in the A register is shifted to the right, the value of the winning / replay winning information is divided by 2. Since this value indicates the relative distance (offset value) from the address 1200H, the address to be read can be calculated by adding the A register to the HL register.

When the winning / replay winning information is odd, the upper 4 bits and the lower 4 bits of the data stored in the address are exchanged, and the logical product is taken with 000001111B, so that the production group number stored in the upper 4 bits is obtained. Can be obtained. Further, when the winning / replay winning information is an even number, the effect group number stored in the lower 4 bits can be acquired by taking the logical product of the data stored in the address as it is with 000001111B.

In this way, by defining the address and the upper 4 bits or the lower 4 bits, the effect group number stored in the effect group number determination table 2 can be determined.

<< Example 3 of the production group number determination table >>
As described above, the effect group number determination table is a table for specifying the effect group number by using the winning / replay winning information as an offset value. The effect group number determination table is stored in the built-in ROMC 110. FIG. 97 is a diagram showing a third specific example of the effect group number determination table. Hereinafter, it is referred to as an effect group number determination table 3. The effect group number determination table 3 shown in FIG. 97 is a table showing the correspondence between the address of the built-in ROMC 110 and the data stored in the address. In the example shown in FIG. 97, the address is shown in hexadecimal (H) and the data is shown in binary (B).

The effect group number determination table 3 shown in FIG. 97 is a table for specifying the effect group number by counting the value (1 (or 0)) defined corresponding to the winning / replay winning information. ..

As shown in FIG. 97, the data 01110011B is stored in the address 1200H, the data 100000111B is stored in the address 1201H, and the data 11100000B is stored in the address 1202H.

The address 1200H corresponds to the winning numbers 0 to 7, the address 1201H corresponds to the winning numbers 8 to 15, and the address 1202H corresponds to the winning numbers 16 to 18. Specifically, the 7th bit of the address 1200H corresponds to the winning number 0, the 6th bit of the address 1200H corresponds to the winning number 1, the 5th bit of the address 1200H corresponds to the winning number 2, and the address 1200H. The 4th bit corresponds to the winning number 3, the 3rd bit of the address 1200H corresponds to the winning number 4, the 2nd bit of the address 1200H corresponds to the winning number 5, and the 1st bit of the address 1200H corresponds to the winning number 6. Correspondingly, the 0th bit of the address 1200H corresponds to the winning number 7.

Further, the 7th bit of the address 1201H corresponds to the winning number 8, the 6th bit of the address 1201H corresponds to the winning number 9, the 5th bit of the address 1201H corresponds to the winning number 10, and the 4th bit of the address 1201H corresponds to the winning number 10. Corresponds to the winning number 11, the third bit of the address 1201H corresponds to the winning number 12, the second bit of the address 1201H corresponds to the winning number 13, and the first bit of the address 1201H corresponds to the winning number 14. The 0th bit of the address 1201H corresponds to the winning number 15.

Further, the 7th bit of the address 1202H corresponds to the winning number 16, the 6th bit of the address 1202H corresponds to the winning number 17, and the 5th bit of the address 1202H corresponds to the winning number 18.

As shown in FIG. 10, in the winning numbers 0 to 18, the production group number of one winning number is the same as that of the case where the production group number of the winning number is increased by 1 with respect to the production group number of the winning number immediately before the winning number. It may be a number. For example, the production group number of the winning number 3 is 3, the production group number of the winning number 2 immediately before the winning number 3 is 2, and the production group number of the winning number 3 is relative to the production group number of the winning number 2. It has increased by one. Further, the production group number of the winning number 11 is 5, the production group number of the winning number 10 immediately before the winning number 11 is 5, and the production group number of the winning number 11 is relative to the production group number of the winning number 10. Does not change.

The effect group number determination table 3 is a table configured by paying attention to such a change in the effect group number. When the production group number of one winning number increases by 1 with respect to the production group number of the immediately preceding winning number, the value corresponding to the one winning number is set to 1, and the value does not change with respect to the immediately preceding production group number. In this case, the effect group number determination table 3 is defined with the value corresponding to one winning number as 0.

In the above example, the production group number of the winning number 3 is 3, the production group number of the winning number 2 immediately before the winning number 3 is 2, and the production group number of the winning number 3 is the production group of the winning number 2. Since the number is increased by 1 with respect to the number, the value corresponding to the winning number 3 is set to 1 (see the 4th bit of the address 1200H). Further, the production group number of the winning number 11 is 5, the production group number of the winning number 10 immediately before the winning number 11 is 5, and the production group number of the winning number 11 is relative to the production group number of the winning number 10. Since it has not changed, the value corresponding to the winning number 11 is set to 0 (see the 4th bit of the address 1201H). That is, the value of the change in the effect group number is stored in the effect group number determination table 3 in correspondence with the winning number.

As described above, in Example 3 of the effect group number determination table, it is sufficient to secure an area for one bit for one winning number, and the table data to be stored in the built-in ROMC 110 can also be compressed.

<Processing of determining the production group number>
First, the data stored in the 1200H of the built-in ROMC110 is read out and stored in the HL register, and the value obtained by adding 1H to the winning / replay winning information corresponding to the winning number determined by the winning combination lottery means is stored in the C register. Let me. Further, 8H is stored in the B register. Next, a shift operation is performed as the number of times to shift the value stored in the C register with respect to the data stored in the HL register. In this process, an operation of shifting to the left is performed, the number of times the carry flag becomes 1H is counted at the time of the shift operation, and the counted result becomes the effect group number.

If the value stored in the C register is less than 8, the data stored in the 1200H of the built-in ROMC110 is read out, stored in the HL register, and shifted with respect to the data stored in the HL register. Perform the operation. The number of times the carry flag becomes 1H in this shift operation is counted, and the counted result is used as the effect group number.

Further, when the value stored in the C register is 8 or more and less than 16, first, the data stored in the 1200H of the built-in ROMC110 is read, stored in the HL register, and stored in the HL register. A shift operation is executed for the data, and the number of times the carry flag becomes 1H is counted. Subsequently, the data stored in 1201H of the built-in ROMC110 is read out, stored in the HL register, a shift operation is executed on the data stored in the HL register, the number of times the carry flag becomes 1H is counted, and the first step is performed. In addition to the counting result of, the added result is used as the production group number. As described above, when the value stored in the C register is 8 or more and less than 16, the effect group number can be acquired by using the data stored in the 1200H and 1201H of the built-in ROMC110.

Furthermore, when the value stored in the C register is 16 or more and less than 19, the data stored in the 1200H of the built-in ROMC110 is first read, stored in the HL register, and stored in the HL register. A shift operation is executed on the data, and the number of times the carry flag becomes 1H is counted. Subsequently, the data stored in 1201H of the built-in ROMC110 is read out, stored in the HL register, a shift operation is executed on the data stored in the HL register, the number of times the carry flag becomes 1H is counted, and the first step is performed. Add to the counting result of. Further, the data stored in 1202H of the built-in ROMC110 is read out, stored in the HL register, a shift operation is executed on the data stored in the HL register, the number of times the carry flag becomes 1H is counted, and the first step is performed. In addition to the counting result of, the added result is used as the production group number. In this way, when the value stored in the C register is 16 or more and less than 19, the effect group number can be acquired by using the data stored in the 1200H, 1201H, and 1202H of the built-in ROMC110. ..

By doing so, the data stored in the built-in ROMC110 1200H to 1202H is read according to the value stored in the C register, and the total number of times the carry flag becomes 1H is calculated to produce the effect. You can get the group number.

<Example 1 When the winning / replay winning information is 0D>
First, since the winning / replay winning information is 0D, the number of shifts is 1 by 0D + 1D. Therefore, after reading the 01111001B stored in the address 1200H of the built-in ROMC110 and storing it in the HL register, the operation of shifting the data stored in the HL register to the left is executed once. By the shift operation, the number of times the carry flag becomes 1H becomes 0D, and "0" is determined as the effect group number.

<Example 2 When the winning / replay winning information is 5D>
First, since the winning / replay winning information is 5D, the number of shifts is 6 times by 5D + 1D. Therefore, after reading the 01111001B stored in the address 1200H of the built-in ROMC110 and storing it in the HL register, the operation of shifting the data stored in the HL register to the left by 6 times is executed. By the shift operation, the number of times the carry flag becomes 1H is 4D, and "4" is determined as the effect group number.

<Example 3 When the winning / replay winning information is 10D>
First, since the winning / replay winning information is 5D, the number of shifts is 11 times by 10D + 1D. Therefore, after reading 01111001B stored in the address 1200H of the built-in ROMC110 and storing it in the HL register, the operation of shifting the data stored in the HL register to the left by eight times is first executed. The number of times the carry flag becomes 1H by the shift operation is 5D.

Further, since the number of shifts is 8 or more, next, 20000111B stored in the address 1201H of the built-in ROMC110 is read, stored in the HL register, and then stored in the HL register. Performs an operation that shifts to the left by a batch. By the shift operation, the number of times the carry flag becomes 1H is 5D, and "5" is determined as the effect group number.

<Example 4 When the winning / replay winning information is 18D>
First, since the winning / replay winning information is 18D, the number of shifts is 19 times due to 18D + 1D. Therefore, after reading the 01111001B stored in the address 1200H of the built-in ROMC110 and storing it in the HL register, the operation of shifting the data stored in the HL register to the left is executed eight times. The number of times the carry flag becomes 1H by the shift operation is 5D.

Further, since the number of shifts is 8 or more, next, after reading 100000111B stored in the address 1201H of the built-in ROMC110 and storing it in the HL register, 8 is obtained with respect to the data stored in the HL register. Performs an operation that shifts to the left by a batch. By the shift operation, the number of times the carry flag becomes 1H is 8D by adding 3D.

Further, since the number of shifts is 16 or more, next, 1110000B stored in the address 1202H of the built-in ROMC110 is read, stored in the HL register, and then stored in the HL register. Performs an operation that shifts to the left by a batch. By the shift operation, the number of times the carry flag becomes 1H is 11D by further adding 3D, and "11" is determined as the effect group number.

In the above-mentioned example, an example in which the number of 1Bs contained in the data stored in the effect group number determination table 3 is counted to determine the effect group number is shown, but it is stored in the effect group number determination table 3. The effect group number may be determined by counting the number of 0Bs included in the data.

By determining the effect group number by the determination method exemplified above and defining the rare combination and the non-rare described later by the effect group number, it is possible to create a gaming machine with reduced complicated processing.

<<< Determining the ball output group number >>>
When determining the winning number by the winning combination lottery means, the lottery table is referred to. In this lottery table, a winning number, a set number for comparison with a random number, and the like are stored. Further, with reference to the lottery table, the payout group number is also determined together with the winning number. For this reason, the so-called lottery table also stores data corresponding to the payout group number. This payout group number is a number used when performing a lottery related to the instruction function (AT lottery, AT addition lottery, state transition lottery related to AT, etc.).

This payout group number is assigned according to the winning number, but it is not always assigned in a one-to-one correspondence, and for some winning numbers, a duplicate payout group number may be assigned. be. As the structure of the lottery table, it is possible to specify all the information for each of the winning numbers, but if the information about the duplicated payout group numbers is also specified, the capacity of the lottery table becomes large and the lottery table is formed. It is also necessary to process the information read from the main control board M, which inevitably complicates the processing on the main control board M. Therefore, when the lottery table is specified, the total capacity of the lottery table can be reduced by including the information indicating that the information regarding the duplicated ball output group numbers is duplicated, and the main control board M It is possible to improve the efficiency by simplifying the processing in.

FIG. 98 is a table showing an example of a lottery table. In addition, in FIG. 98, the case where the payout group number is 2 and the winning numbers are 6 of the winning numbers 7 to 12 is illustrated. The first row of the table shown in FIG. 98 is data indicating that the winning number is designated and that the winning number is 7D. The second row of the table shown in FIG. 98 is data indicating that the information regarding the payout group number is duplicated and that the number of duplications is 6D. The third row of the table shown in FIG. 98 is data indicating that the ball ejection group number is 2D as well as the data indicating the ball ejection group number. The fourth row of the table shown in FIG. 98 is data indicating that the number (determination value, probability data) is 2 bytes. The fifth row of the table shown in FIG. 98 is data indicating that the actual number (determination value, probability data) is 2034D.

In the example shown in FIG. 98, the winning number is 7, and the condition device (name) is the data of winning-A1 (see FIG. 10). As shown in FIG. 10, the conditional device (name) of the winning number 8 is the winning-A2, the conditional device (name) of the winning number 9 is the winning-A3, and the conditional device (name) of the winning number 10. Is winning-A4, the conditional device (name) of winning number 11 is winning-A5, and the conditional device (name) of winning number 12 is winning-A6. The payout group numbers of these winning numbers 7 to 12 are all 2 in common, and are specified in duplicate. As described above, if the information regarding the payout group numbers for the winning numbers 7 to 12 is specified for each winning number, the capacity of the lottery table must be increased.

As shown in FIG. 98, data indicating that the number of duplications is 6 is stored in the second row. Therefore, it is possible to omit the information regarding the payout group number for the winning numbers 8 to 12, and the capacity of the lottery table can be reduced. Further, for the winning numbers 8 to 12, the process of reading the information regarding the payout group number from the lottery table can be omitted, and the process can be simplified and speeded up.

With the above configuration, a plurality of AT-related states are provided, and the push order navigation on the push order display device D270 on the main control board M side and the push order navigation on the effect display device on the sub control board S side. Is notified in an appropriate display mode based on the state related to the AT, so that the user-friendly gaming machine can be obtained.

Next, FIG. 99 is an AT-in-time effect execution image FIG. 1 applicable to this example. First, on the left side of the figure, the daytime background is displayed on the effect display device S40 under the situation that the state related to AT is "AT in progress", and "winning-A1" (pushing order bell) is displayed as a conditional device. The winning order navigation display corresponding to "left-> middle-> right" is displayed as a number (first number display mode group) in a circular figure. Further, in the center of the figure, the daytime background is displayed on the effect display device S40 under the situation that the state related to AT is "specialization precursor state", and "winning-A1" (push order bell) as a condition device. Is won, and the push order navigation display corresponding to "left → middle → right" is displayed as a number (second number display mode group) in the star-shaped figure. In addition, on the right side of the figure, the night background is displayed on the effect display device S40 under the situation that the state related to AT is "additional specialization state", and "winning-A1" (push order bell) as a condition device. Is won, and the push order navigation display corresponding to "left → middle → right" is displayed as a number (first number display mode group) in the circular figure. As described above, although the background effect is different between the case where the state related to AT is the "AT in progress state" and the case where the state is "additional specialization state", the display mode group of the push order navigation in the effect display device S40. Are the same. Further, the background effect is the same between the case where the state related to AT is the "AT in progress state" and the case where the state is "specialization precursor state", but the display mode group of the push order navigation in the effect display device S40 is different. ing. In the figure, the push order navigation of "left → middle → right" is shown as an example, but the same configuration is used when displaying other push order navigations. Further, in this example, the "specialization precursor state" and the "additional specialization state" are configured so that the number of remaining AT games is not subtracted by the execution of the game.

Next, FIG. 100 is an AT-in-time effect execution image FIG. 2 applicable to this example. First, in the upper left of the figure, in the situation where the state related to AT is "AT in progress", the "winning-A1", which is the push order bell role, is won, and the effect display device S40 is used inside the circular figure. The drawn numbers (first number display mode group) display a push order navigation display to the effect that the stop button D40 is operated in the order of "left → middle → right", and at the same time, the push order display device D270 displays "left →". "= 1", which is the display corresponding to the order in which the stop button D40 of "middle → right" is pressed, is displayed. When the player operates the left stop button D41, which is a stop button based on the correct push order as the first stop, a display prompting the operation of the middle stop button D42 is displayed as the second stop (effect display device S40). The display of "2" in the push order navigation display becomes larger). Next, when the middle stop button D42, which is a stop button based on the correct push order as the second stop, is operated, a display prompting the operation of the right stop button D43 is displayed as the third stop (pressing of the effect display device S40). The display of "3" in the forward navigation display becomes larger). Next, when the right stop button D43 is operated, all the operations of the stop button D40 are executed according to the push order navigation, and the bell, which is the maximum number of payouts of 11 pieces, wins a prize, resulting in 11 pieces. The game medal is paid out, and the effect display device S40 displays "GET !!".

On the other hand, on the upper left side of the figure, when the player operates the middle stop button D42, which is a stop button different from the left stop button D41, which is a stop button based on the correct pressing order as the first stop, the effect display device S40. All the push order navigation displays in the above are erased, and the characters "Bad ..." are displayed as a push order failure effect. Next, the right stop button D43 and the left stop button D41 are operated in this order, and all the stop button D40 operations are completed. The operation is performed, and one of the condition devices "winning 08" to "winning 10" wins a prize, and one game medal is paid out. The characters "GET !!" are not displayed on the effect display device S40. That is, when the stop button D40 is operated in the order of pressing the correct answer according to the instruction of the pressing order navigation, there is a maximum payout number (there is the most advantageous payout number in the winning condition device), and the player. On the other hand, when the stop button D40 is operated in the wrong pressing order, the pressing order is displayed when the incorrect answer stop button is operated. Even when a display indicating that the navigation has failed is displayed and all the operations of the stop buttons D40 are completed, the effect display device S40 is configured so that the effect of congratulating the player is not displayed. By stopping the reels in the push order of 11 payouts, which is the maximum number of payouts, "GET!" Is not displayed, but according to the push order navigation displayed on the effect display device S40. "GET!" Will be displayed depending on whether or not the reel is stopped. That is, in the situation where the push order of "left → middle → right" is displayed on the effect display device S40 as the push order navigation, the reels are stopped in the order of "middle → right → left" to obtain the maximum number of payouts. If the reel wins a prize, "GET!" Will not be displayed on the effect display device S40. In addition, in the state related to AT where the push order navigation such as "normal game state" is not displayed, when the push order bell is won and the player stops the reels in any push order, the correct answer happens to be in the push order of 6 choices. Even if 11 payouts are obtained, "GET!" Is not displayed on the effect display device S40. Similarly, regarding the push order failure effect, the push order failure effect is displayed by stopping the reels in the push order in which the maximum number of payouts of 11 is not paid out (one piece is paid out). Not so, the push order failure effect is displayed depending on whether or not the reel is stopped without following the push order navigation displayed on the effect display device S40. That is, in the situation where the push order of "left → middle → right" is displayed on the effect display device S40 as the push order navigation, the reels are stopped in the order of "middle → right → left" to obtain the maximum number of payouts. Even if the reel is won, the effect display device S40 will execute the effect of pushing order failure. If the stop button is operated in a push order different from the correct push order, the push order navigation display on the push order display device D270 is displayed until (1) the reel related to the third stop is stopped (2). Until the stop button that is different from the correct push order is operated, (3) until the stop button that is different from the correct push order is operated and the reel related to the stop button is stopped, and (4) the bet button related to the next game is It may be configured to display until it is operated (5) until the start lever related to the next game is operated.

Next, FIG. 101 is an AT-in-time effect execution image FIG. 3 applicable to this example. First, on the left side of the figure, under the situation where the state related to AT is "additional specialization state" and the state related to RT is "RT1", the player wins "Replay-C" which is a replay with 7 forward push blacks. In addition, the number of AT games is added to the lottery (winning at 1/2), and the black seven can be aligned on the invalid line (lower line) on the production display device S40, which is the push order "left → middle → right". The push order navigation display corresponding to is displayed by an arrow (display mode by the image of the arrow), and the message "Aim at 7 !!" is displayed. The push order display device D270 is hidden (the push order navigation is not displayed). At this time, at the same time, the decorative lamp unit D150 of FIG. 1 is used to emit light that undulates from left to right (for example, the decorative lamp on the left blinks so as to flow from bottom to top, and so on. , The decoration lamp on the right can suggest the flow from left to right by blinking so that it flows from top to bottom.) By doing, it suggests "left → middle → right", etc. The push order navigation may be executed by the lamp unit D150. This makes it possible to suggest that the game is aimed at 7 in the order of "left-> middle-> right" even when the push order navigation cannot be displayed due to a malfunction of the effect display device S40, for example. Further, in this example, the replay is adopted as a role for aligning the 7 sets to the invalid line, but when the push order bell whose number of sheets varies depending on the push order is used as a substitute, the malfunction of the effect display device S40 is fatal. Since it can be a situation, the suggestion of push order navigation using the decorative lamp unit D150 works more effectively. In the case of the push order bell, even if a problem occurs in the effect display device S40, the push order navigation is continuously displayed by the push order display device D270, but in the case of a new player, the push order display device is displayed. Since it is not easy to understand the push order represented by the display mode of the D270, the use of the lighting mode of the decorative lamp unit D150, which is visually easy to understand, can be expected to play an insurance role against irregular situations. After that, when the stop button D40 is operated in the order of "left-> middle-> right", it is displayed that "50 games" are added as the number of AT added games to the effect display device S40. On the other hand, the push order navigation display corresponding to "left → middle → right" is displayed with an arrow (display mode by the image of the arrow), and the message "Aim for 7 !!" is displayed. , If you operate the middle stop button (stop button other than the left stop button which is the correct stop button) in the first stop, the entire screen goes dark, but the arrow push order navigation corresponding to "left → middle → right" The display and the display of the message "Aim for 7 !!" are not deleted. After that, when all the reels are stopped, it is displayed on the effect display device S40 that "50 games" have been added as the number of AT added games. Since the lottery for adding the number of AT games is won at the time of winning the replay with 7 forward push blacks, the number of AT games will be added regardless of whether or not the push order navigation is followed. In addition, on the right side of the figure, under the situation where the state related to AT is "additional specialization state" and the state related to RT is "RT1", the player wins "Replay-C" which is a replay with 7 forward push blacks. In addition, if the lottery for adding the number of AT games is not won (it becomes non-winning at 1/2), the black seven is not aligned on the invalid line (lower line) on the effect display device S40 ("left". As the push order navigation display corresponding to the push order other than "→ middle → right", the push order navigation instructing the middle stop button D42 as the stop button related to the first stop is displayed. The push order display device D270 is hidden. Next, after that, the middle stop button D42 was operated as the first stop button, but the effect of adding the number of games does not occur. As described above, in this example, the "re-game-C1" is a conditional device in which the interests for the player are the same regardless of the pushing order, and the AT addition lottery is executed based on the operation of the start lever. That is, whether or not to win the AT addition lottery is determined based on the operation of the start lever, and it is configured so that the presence or absence of the AT addition lottery is not different depending on the pushing order, but it is shown to the player. As a production for this, if you win the "Replay-C" and win the AT addition lottery, specify the push order ("left → middle → right") that allows Black Seven to line up on the invalid line. As a result, it is possible for the players to feel as if the number of AT games has been increased due to the arrangement of the black sevens, and the interest of the game is improved. On the other hand, if "Re-game-C" is won and the AT addition lottery is not won, the push order (other than "left → middle → right") in which Black Seven cannot be aligned with the invalid line is instructed. By doing so, the player does not notice that Black Seven has won the replay that can be aligned with the invalid line, that is, he does not notice that he has not won the lottery with the number of AT games added, so extra stress is added. You can proceed with the game without feeling it. If the reels are stopped in the push order in which it is impossible for Black Seven to line up with the invalid line, the normal replay (for example, replay 01) that does not shift to the RT state will be stopped and displayed. From this, the player can proceed with the game without any discomfort. In addition, by instructing the push order (other than "left → middle → right") in which it is impossible for Black Seven to line up on the invalid line when the lottery for adding the number of AT games is not won, the number of AT games will not be added. Nevertheless, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the player feels uncomfortable when the Black Seven is aligned on the invalid line. Further, in a state related to AT (sometimes referred to as AT) where normal push order navigation can occur such as "AT in progress state", a particularly high effect can be expected, but push in "normal game state" or the like. The same thing may be done for the state related to AT (sometimes referred to as non-AT) in which forward navigation does not occur. In this case, unlike during AT, push order navigation does not normally occur, so for example, when "Replay-C" is won, it is impossible for Black Seven to line up on the invalid line. Sudden push order (other than "left → middle → right") leads to a sense of discomfort to the player, but there is a possibility that Black 7 will accidentally line up on the invalid line during non-AT. This situation is also undesirable because there is a concern that the 7-match on the invalid line may make the player aware of some benefits. In addition, in the figure, an example of the production regarding the addition of the number of AT games when the player wins the "replay-C" which is the forward push black 7 replay and also wins the AT addition lottery is illustrated. The effect mode for notifying the addition of the number of games is not limited to this. For example, when an AT addition lottery is won in a certain game and the number of remaining AT games is 50 games added, the game that wins the AT addition lottery. In the game that won the "Replay-C1", which is a forward push black 7 replay in the subsequent games, without notifying that the number of remaining AT games has been added, it becomes an invalid line (lower line). The push order navigation display corresponding to "left → middle → right", which is the push order in which Black Seven can be aligned, is displayed with an arrow (display mode by the image of the arrow), and the message "Aim for 7 !!" is displayed. It may be configured to display and notify that the number of remaining AT games has been added by 50 games by aligning the black sevens on the invalid line (lower line). Similarly, for "replay-B", which is a reverse push white 7 replay, for example, when an AT addition lottery is won in a certain game and the number of remaining AT games is 50 games added, the AT addition lottery is performed. In the game that won the prize, the invalid line (lower row) in the game that won the "replay-B", which is a reverse push white 7 replay in the subsequent game, without notifying that the number of remaining AT games has been added. The push order navigation display corresponding to "right → middle → left", which is the push order in which white sevens can be aligned, is displayed with an arrow (display mode by the image of the arrow), and "Aim for 7! Message is displayed, and the white sevens are aligned on the invalid line (lower line) to notify that the number of remaining AT games has been increased by 50 games. In addition, "Re-game-C" and "Re-game-B" are won and the number of AT games is added to the lottery, and the number of AT-added games related to the winning is already won in the previous game. If the situation is not notified, the number of AT added games related to the game and the number of AT added games related to the previous game are added up, and the 7 replays in the game are aligned to the invalid line. It may be configured so that the total number of games can be notified.

Next, FIG. 102 is an AT-in-time effect execution image FIG. 4 applicable to this example. As shown in the upper left of the figure, if the winning-E (watermelon B) is won as a conditional device and the prize is won, "GET!" Is displayed on the effect display device S40 and added. It is shown that you have won. By winning the prize-E, you will win the special status transition lottery and transition to the status shown in the upper center.

As shown in the upper center figure, the battle effect is executed, and the push order navigation is displayed in the second numerical display mode group. The state related to AT at this time is a "specialization precursor state". Further, the number of times the push order navigation is executed is subtracted, and the effect display device S40 displays that the remaining number of push order navigation is 39 games. The battle effect is performed 10 times, and when the battle effect is completed, the state shifts to the state shown in the upper right figure.

As shown in the upper right figure, it changes to a background image showing that the battle production has been won. As a result, the state related to AT shifts to the "additional specialization state". The number of times the push order navigation is executed is subtracted, and the effect display device S40 displays that the remaining number of push order navigation is 29 games.

On the other hand, in the stage of the upper left figure, if the winning-E (watermelon B) is not won as a conditional device, the special state transition lottery is not won and the state is shifted to the state of the lower center figure.

As shown in the lower center figure, the battle effect is executed, and the push order navigation is displayed in the first number display mode group. The state related to AT at this time is "AT in progress state". Further, the number of times the push order navigation is executed is subtracted, and the effect display device S40 displays that the remaining number of push order navigation is 39 games. The battle effect is performed 10 times, and when the battle effect is completed, the state shifts to the state shown in the lower right figure.

As shown in the lower right figure, it is defeated by the battle production and remains in the "AT in progress state". The number of times the push order navigation is executed is subtracted, and the effect display device S40 displays that the remaining number of push order navigation is 29 games. In this example, in the "specialization precursor state", the push order navigation is displayed in the second numerical display mode group at 1/2 when the push order navigation occurs, and the "AT in progress state" and the battle is being produced. In, the push order navigation is configured to be displayed in the second numerical display mode group at 1/5 when the push order navigation occurs, and the player is configured to display the push order navigation executed in the battle effect as the second. By counting the number of times, which is the numerical display mode of, there is a sense of expectation for the battle victory, that is, the transition to the "additional specialization state". It should be noted that the push order navigation, which is the first numerical display mode, can also be displayed during the execution of the battle effect. It should be noted that the above-mentioned "GET!" May not be displayed on the effect display device S40 during the execution of the battle effect. Specifically, if the player is in the "AT in progress" state and the battle effect is not executed, the push order bell is won and the reels are stopped in the correct push order, 11 cards are paid out. While "GET!" Is displayed on the effect display device S40, when the "AT in progress" state and the battle effect is being executed, the push order bell is won and the reels are pushed in the correct push order. When stopped, 11 cards are paid out, but "GET!" Is not displayed on the effect display device S40. With this configuration, the player will pay more attention to the result of the battle effect without disturbing the display of the battle effect. In addition, the configuration in which the entire screen goes dark when the push order navigation is not followed (the stop button is operated in a push order different from the push order navigation) may be applied to the push order bell. As an example, in the "AT in progress" state, when the battle effect is not executed, the push order bell is won, and when the reels are stopped in a push order different from the correct push order, the entire screen is displayed. Is darkened and there is one payout, on the other hand, when the battle effect is being executed and the battle effect is being executed, the push order bell is won and the reels are pushed in a different push order from the correct push order. If it is stopped, one sheet will be paid out, but the entire screen may be configured so as not to darken. With this configuration, the player will pay more attention to the result of the battle effect without disturbing the display of the battle effect.

By configuring as described above, even if the watermelon B is won in the "AT in progress state" and the special transition lottery is not won, the battle effect between 10 games is executed. Every time the player wins the watermelon B in the "AT in progress state", he / she has a feeling of expectation for the transition to the "additional specialization state", and the interest of the game is improved. In addition, during the execution of the battle effect, the state related to the AT is the "AT in progress state". Even during the execution of the battle effect (defeat), the state related to the AT is the "specialized precursor state". Even during execution, the display of the number of remaining AT games on the effect display device S40 is subtracted each time the game is exhausted. With such a configuration, it is difficult for the player to determine which state is related to the AT during the execution of the battle effect, and the player pays attention to the result of the battle effect.

Further, the following configuration may be applied to the rotating drum type gaming machine according to this example. Further, the following configurations may be applied independently, or a plurality of configurations may be combined.

<< Point 1 >>
(1-1) After lottery of various combinations is performed by the main control means (main control board), AT lottery is performed based on one piece of information (combination of condition devices) determined by the lottery result, but no winning (complete loss) is performed. ), The AT lottery is not always performed.
(1-2) The AT lottery includes promotion of the AT lottery state (low probability → high probability). In that case, the above (1-1) is applied, but the AT lottery state is demoted (1-2). When a lottery is performed (high probability → low probability), the above (1-1) does not apply (lottery is possible even if the lottery is completely lost).
(A) When the duration of the AT lottery state (high probability) is determined by the number of games, (1-1) is not applied to the number of games lottery.
Example 1: The number of games varies randomly even with the same combination of condition devices.
Example 2: After winning the promotion lottery in the AT lottery state, a lottery for the number of games is performed separately based on the result of the role lottery (including loss) in the next game and thereafter.
(B) The method of determining the duration of the AT lottery state (high probability) by the number of games and the method of performing the demotion lottery in the AT lottery state are used together (shift to the demotion lottery after the so-called guarantee period).
(1-3) There is an AT state promotion lottery (non-AT → AT) in the AT lottery, and the above (1-1) is applied in that case as well, but the AT state demotion (AT → non-AT). AT) When a lottery is performed, the above (1-1) does not apply (a lottery is possible even if the lottery is completely lost).
(1-4) In the AT lottery, there is a promotion (low probability → high probability) lottery of the transition lottery state to the specialized AT, in which case (1-1) above is applied. Transition to specialized AT When demotion of the lottery state (high probability → low probability) lottery, (1-1) is not applied (lottery is possible even if it is completely lost).
(1-5) The AT lottery includes a promotion lottery to a specialized AT (AT → specialized AT), and (1-1) is also applied in that case, but the AT state is demoted (special). The above (1-1) does not apply when the lottery is performed (type AT → AT) (lottery is possible even if the lottery is completely lost).
In addition, if there is a grace period (so-called latency / precursor game) until the state transition after winning the AT lottery (any of (1-2) to (1-5)), the grace period is determined by ( 1-1) does not apply.

<< Point 2 >>
(2-1) After the lottery of various combinations is performed by the main control means, the AT lottery is performed based on one piece of information (combination of condition devices) determined by the lottery result. be.
(2-2) At the lottery trigger (when the start lever is ON) in (2-1), information about AT can be transmitted from the main control means to the sub control means.
(2-3) The information that can be transmitted in (2-2) includes at least the AT state type in the game and the AT state type in the next game.
(2-4) The sub-control means determines and executes a series of production contents corresponding to the game including the AT state transition notification based on the information of (2-3) transmitted in (2-2). do.
(2-5) The main control means does not output information about AT as an outer end signal / test signal at the lottery trigger in (2-1).
After the game is over, only the AT state type determined by the main control means is output.

<< Point 3 >>
(3-1) When the main control means is in the AT state (AT, specialized AT), if a small winning combination whose payout number and / or RT state changes depending on the push order is won, the main control means is used for a specific display. The information that can specify the push order that is most advantageous for the player is displayed, but if the small role is not won (missing, small role regardless of push order, reverse push 7 set replay that does not change the RT state, Etc.), nothing is displayed.
(3-2) When the sub-control means is in the AT state (AT, specialized AT), the number of continuous remaining games in the AT state (hereinafter referred to as the number of remaining AT games) and the total number of games consumed in the AT state (AT). Below, it is possible to display the total number of AT games * the total net increase may be displayed).
(3-3) The number of AT remaining games is updated based on the number of continuous remaining games in the AT state transmitted from the main control means for each game, but the total number of AT games is updated by the main control means for each game. It is updated based on the AT status type sent from.
Based on the story of the advantageous section, the total number of AT games (including the total net increase) is cleared when AT → non-AT.
(3-4) The number of remaining AT games may be hidden (or not updated) when in the AT state, but the total number of AT games is not hidden (or not updated) when in the AT state. ..
It is assumed that the battle production state before the end of the AT state, the specialized AT state, etc.
(3-5) The number of AT remaining games is not displayed to exceed the number of continuous remaining games in the AT state transmitted from the main control means, but may be displayed to be less than that.

<< Point 4 >>
(4-1) There is a case where the display is performed in a specific display mode on a specific display controlled by the main control means (example: "= 1" is used to display a 6-choice bell forward monitor).
(4-2) When displaying in a specific display mode (example: "= 1"), an operation instruction image (example: 1, 2, 3) is displayed on the image display.
(4-3) When the operation according to the instruction is performed, a series of effect images A corresponding to the operation (example: 1, 2, and 3 are sequentially erased, and the effect image showing the correct answer in the pressing order) is displayed on the image display. Example: Image of defeating an enemy))) is displayed.
(4-4) If the operation according to the instruction is not performed, when it is confirmed that the operation according to the instruction is not performed, the effect image A to the effect image B (example: all the operation instruction images are deleted, and the push order is incorrect. Switch to the production image shown (example: image attacked by the enemy).
(4-5) In the case of (4-3), if a small winning combination (example: 9 small winning combination when the 6-choice bell is correct) wins, a winning notification image (example: GET) is displayed on the image display. However, in the case of (4-4), even if a small winning combination (example: one small winning combination when the 6-choice bell is incorrect) wins, the winning notification image (example: GET) is not displayed on the image display.
(4-6) Even in the case of (4-4), when the game ends, information about AT (eg, the number of additional games) may be displayed.
(4-7) When a predetermined error (door error, etc.) occurs while a specific display mode (example: "= 1") and an operation instruction image (example: 1, 2, 3) are displayed. , The specific display mode maintains the display, but the operation instruction image is hidden.
It is assumed that the main control means displays an error on a separate display.
(4-8) An effect that prompts the operation of the sub button (sub button operation) when nothing is displayed on the specific display than when displaying in a specific display mode (example: "= 1"). In short, additional production) is likely to occur.

<< Point 5 >>
(5-1) There is a case where the display is performed in a specific display mode on a specific display controlled by the main control means (example: "= 1" is used to display a 6-choice bell forward monitor).
(5-2) When displaying the first effect image (example: 1, 2, 3 pressing order + AT image) on the image display when displaying in a specific display mode (example: "= 1"). And, there is a case where a second effect image (eg, push order of 1, 2, and 3 + an image during specialized AT or when an additional confirmed effect occurs) is displayed.
(5-3) It is highly expected that the period of stay in the AT state will be extended when the second effect image is displayed than when the first effect image is displayed.
(5-4) In a game prior to the game displaying the second effect image, it is possible to execute a precursor effect suggesting the display of the second effect image.
(5-5) The second effect image (and precursor effect) is not displayed when the number of AT remaining games is less than a predetermined value (example: in the battle effect state, LAST? Game display).

<< Point 6 >>
(6-1) There is a case where a specific display mode (example: “= 1”) is displayed on a specific display controlled by the main control means.
(6-2) When displaying in a specific display mode (example: "= 1"), a case of displaying in the first display mode (example: 1, 2, 3) and a second display mode of displaying on the image display device. (Example: → (arrow symbol)) may be displayed.
(6-3) The first display mode (example: 1, 2, 3) is a display mode in which the push order composed of numbers can be specified, and the second display mode (example: → (arrow symbol)) is. It is a display mode in which the push order composed of other than numbers can be specified.
(6-4) The degree of expectation that the stay period in the AT state is extended differs between the time of displaying the first display mode and the time of displaying the second display mode.
Even when the second display mode is displayed, if the operation according to the pressing order is not performed, the basic operation at point 4 is followed.

<< Point 7 >>
(7-1) The first lottery result in which the number of payouts differs depending on the push order (example: correct answer push order is left → middle → right push order bell) and the second lottery result in which the number of payouts is the same regardless of the push order (example) : Common bell).
(7-2) When the first lottery result is decided and when the second lottery result is decided, the profit related to the instruction function is different (example: addition of AT ... first lottery result> second Lottery result).
(7-3) When the first lottery result is determined during the notification game, a specific display mode (example: "= 1") is displayed on a specific display controlled by the main control means, and an image is displayed. It is also displayed on the vessel in a display mode in which the push order can be specified.
(7-4) When the second lottery result is determined during the notification game, the push order may be displayed on the image display.
(7-5) When the second lottery result is determined during the notification game, the degree of expectation that the stay period of the notification game will be extended differs depending on whether the push order is displayed on the image display or not. * During the notification game When the second lottery result is determined, the push order is displayed on the image display, and if the push order is not followed, the basic operation of point 4 is followed.

<< Point 8 >>
(8-1) The first lottery result is a lottery result in which the number of payouts differs depending on the push order.
(8-2) If the first lottery result is determined inside the bonus, the reels are stopped and controlled so that the number of payouts is the same regardless of the push order.
(8-3) When the first lottery result is determined during the notification game and inside the bonus, a specific display mode (example: "= 1") is displayed on a specific display controlled by the main control means. ) Is displayed, and the image display is also displayed in a display mode in which the pressing order can be specified.
(8-4) When the first lottery result is determined during the notification game and when the bonus is not inside, and when the first lottery result is determined during the notification game and inside the bonus. Then, the same specific display mode (example: "= 1") is displayed on the specific display, but the push order display of different modes may be displayed on the image display (example: in the former, 1. 2.3, in the latter, → (arrow symbol)).
In the latter case, if the operation according to the pressing order is not performed, the basic operation of point 4 is followed.
(8-5) In the case of (8-3), if the effect of winning the bonus is displayed in the previous game, the display is deleted.
(8-6) Information about AT (example: number of additional games) cannot be displayed during the notification game and inside the bonus.
If the additional amount has been confirmed but the additional amount has not been notified, the notification will be postponed until after the bonus is removed (during the bonus game, after the bonus ends).

<< Point 9 >>
(9-1) The first lottery result in which the degree of advantage changes depending on the push order (example: push order replay in which the first stop maintains a high RT on the left) and the second lottery result in which the degree of advantage does not change depending on the push order (example) Example: Special replay).
(9-2) When the second lottery result is decided, a game that notifies the push order in which a specific symbol combination can be stopped and displayed (example: when the addition of AT is decided (is) or special zone When it is decided (when) to shift to (), and a game in which a specific symbol combination can be stopped and displayed and the push order is not notified.
(9-3) When a specific symbol combination is notified of the push order that can be stopped and displayed, the push order is not notified to the specific display controlled by the main control means, and the image is controlled by the sub control means. The display notifies the pressing order.
(9-4) When the second lottery result is determined and the notification of the push order in which the specific symbol combination can be stopped and displayed (hereinafter, reverse push 7 notification) is performed, the specific symbol combination (example: 7 replays) is prepared. Information about the AT (eg, the number of additional games) may be displayed at the end of the game even if it is not present (even if there is a mistake in pressing the button).
(9-5) When the second lottery result is determined and the reverse push 7 notification is not performed, even if a specific symbol combination (example: 777 replay) is prepared, information about AT (example: additional game) at the end of the game. Number) is not displayed.
(9-6) When the first lottery result is determined, the reverse push 7 notification is not displayed, but when the third lottery result (normal replay without push order) is determined, the reverse push 7 notification is displayed. Can be displayed.
(9-7) Even if the operation according to the reverse push 7 notification is not performed (when the reverse push is not performed or 7 is not stopped at the first stop), the reverse push 7 notification can be maintained. ..

<< Point 10 >>
(10-1) The first lottery result in which the degree of advantage changes depending on the push order (example: push order replay in which the first stop maintains a high RT on the left) and the second lottery result in which the degree of advantage does not change depending on the push order (example: push order replay) Example: Special replay).
(10-2) The second lottery result has a higher probability of winning in the second RT (high RT that is likely to stay during the notification game) than in the first RT.
(10-3) When the second lottery result is decided, a game that notifies the push order in which a specific symbol combination can be stopped and displayed (example: when the addition of AT is decided (is) or a special zone) When it is decided (when) to shift to (), and a game in which a specific symbol combination can be stopped and displayed and the push order is not notified.
(10-4) When the second lottery result is determined after the notification game is completed and before the fall from the second RT to the first RT, the specific symbol combination cannot be stopped and displayed in the push order. Is notified.
In the case of (10-5) (10-4), it is confirmed that the AT lottery will not be performed after the notification game is completed and before the fall from the second RT to the first RT. Even if (example: 777 replays) are complete, information about AT (example: number of additional games) is not displayed at the end of the game.
(10-6) When the first lottery result is decided, the same effect as in the case of (10-4) is not displayed, but when the third lottery result (normal replay without push order) is decided. Can display the same effect as in the case of (10-4).

<< Point 11 >>
(11-1) Correct answer of push order small combination (or replay) The push order is 6 choices, and the image display is notified of the operation order from the first stop to the third stop at the time of the notification game.
(11-2) Correct answer for push order replay (or small winning combination) There are three push orders, but the image display is notified of the operation order from the first stop to the third stop during the notification game.
(11-3) In the case of (11-1) and the case of (11-2), the display mode when notifying the operation order on the image display is the same (in terms of color, shape, etc., the winning combination). Does not notify).
In the case of (11-2), if the operation according to the push order is not performed, there are two ways of correct answer for 3 choices and incorrect answer for the remaining push order or incorrect answer for 3 choices. It works.

(Third Embodiment)
The mode of performing the effect applicable to the spinning machine according to this example is not limited to the above-described configuration. Therefore, the configuration of the spinning-type gaming machine having a configuration relating to the execution mode of the effect different from the configuration described above will be described in detail below as the third embodiment.

First, FIG. 103 is a list of symbol combinations in the third embodiment. In the figure, only the differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail. First, "re-game 06" corresponding to No. 68 in FIG. 104 is a symbol combination that can be transferred (promoted) to RT1, and when the RT state is "RT0" or "RT4", "re-game 06". When the symbol combination that becomes is stopped and displayed, it shifts (promotes) to "RT1". Further, "re-game 07" corresponding to No. 69 is a symbol combination that can shift to "RT4", and when the RT state is "RT1", the symbol combination that becomes "re-game 07" is stopped and displayed. Then, it shifts to "RT4".

Next, FIG. 104 is a list of condition devices according to the third embodiment. In the figure, the conditional device number is referred to as a winning number, and the conditional device number may be referred to as a winning number thereafter. In the third embodiment, the re-game combinations are re-game-A to re-game-D3 (winning numbers 1 to 6), re-game-E1 to E3 (winning numbers 28 to 30), and re-game-F1 to F3 (winning). Numbers 31 to 33) are provided, and the replaying combination to be stopped and displayed may be different depending on the stop order and stop position of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53. Here, in the third embodiment, as shown in the item of "conditional apparatus breakdown" in the rightmost column, depending on the stop order and stop position of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53. It is configured so that multiple types of condition devices can be stopped and displayed, and among the multiple types of condition devices, the condition devices with the same winning number are grouped together in the third column from the right, "condition device". It is shown in the item. Specifically, for example, in the "re-game-A" which is a conditional device corresponding to the winning number 1, "re-game" is performed according to the stop order and stop position of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53. Three types of condition devices, "01", "re-game 02", and "re-game 03", are configured to be stopped and displayed. In addition, a condition device related to a re-game such as "re-game 01" may be referred to as a re-game combination, and a condition device such as "winning 01" in which a game medal is paid out may be referred to as a small role. A condition device in which the BB is started by displaying a stop such as "Type 1 BB-A" may be referred to as a BB combination. In addition, if the winning numbers 21 to 23 and 25 to 27 are won, the BB combination and the small combination will be won in duplicate, and in such a case, the symbol corresponding to the winning small combination will be stopped. When the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43 are operated at a position where they can be displayed, the symbol corresponding to the BB combination is not stopped and the symbol corresponding to the small combination is stopped and displayed, while the symbol corresponding to the small combination is stopped and displayed. When the left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, and right stop button D43 are operated at a position where the corresponding symbol does not stop and display (cannot be retracted), the symbol corresponding to the small combination does not stop and the symbol corresponding to the BB combination is not displayed. Is configured to stop display. Specifically, for example, in the case of winning "1st class BB-B + winning-C" which is a condition device of winning number 21, a cherry which is "winning 12" or "winning 13" and "1st class BB". Any of the black sevens that are "-B" can be stopped and displayed. More specifically, when the reels are stopped in the order of left reel M51 → middle reel M52 → right reel M53, (1) symbol numbers 0 to 4 are placed on the upper stage of the left reel M51 at the first stop (FIG. 6). When the left stop button D41 is operated at the operation timing at which (see the reel arrangement of) is located, the symbol number 4 corresponding to "winning 12" is stopped at the upper stage of the left reel M51, and the middle reel M52. And, regardless of the stop position of the right reel M53, "winning 12" is stopped and displayed. (2) When the left stop button D41 is operated at the operation timing in which the symbol numbers 5 to 12 are located on the upper stage of the left reel M51 at the first stop, "winning 13" is displayed on the upper stage of the left reel M51. The symbol numbers 6, 11 or 16 corresponding to the above are stopped, and "winning 13" is stopped and displayed regardless of the stop positions of the middle reel M52 and the right reel M53. (3-1) When the left stop button D41 is operated at the operation timing in which the symbol numbers 13 to 19 are located on the upper stage of the left reel M51 at the first stop, "1" is displayed on the upper stage of the left reel M51. The symbol number 17 or 19 corresponding to "Seed BB-B" is stopped. (3-2) When the middle stop button D42 is operated at the operation timing in which symbol numbers 14 to 18 are located in the middle of the middle reel M52 at the second stop, "1" is placed in the middle of the middle reel M52. The symbol number 18 corresponding to "Seed BB-B" is stopped, and then the right stop button D43 is operated at the operation timing in which the symbol numbers 13 to 17 are located at the lower stage of the right reel M53 at the third stop. If this is the case, the symbol number 17 corresponding to "Type 1 BB-B" will be stopped at the bottom of the right reel M53, and the BB combination will be stopped and displayed. (3-3) When the middle stop button D42 is operated at the operation timing in which the symbol numbers 19 to 13 are located in the middle of the middle reel M52 at the second stop, "1" is placed in the middle of the middle reel M52. The symbol number 18 corresponding to "Seed BB-B" cannot be stopped, and none of the condition devices is stopped and displayed.

Next, in the item of "role", what kind of role the "conditional device" plays is illustrated, and the "normal replay" corresponding to the winning number 1 is performed regardless of the order in which the stop buttons are pressed. It is a condition device related to the re-game that the re-game combination that does not shift the RT state is stopped and displayed, and the "reverse push white 7 set replay" corresponding to the winning number 2 shifts the RT state regardless of the order in which the stop buttons are pressed. It is a condition device related to the re-game in which the re-game combination is stopped and displayed, but by pushing it backwards (stopping the reels in the order of right reel M53 → middle reel M52 → left reel M51), the symbol number of the right reel M53. Operate the stop button at the operation timing when the range of 18 to 2, the range of symbol numbers 9 to 13 of the middle reel M52, and the range of symbol numbers 5 to 10 of the left reel M51 are located at the bottom of each reel. By doing so, "white seven" is stopped and displayed on the lower tiers of the right reel M53, the middle reel M52, and the left reel M51, and it is configured so that the white sevens appear to be aligned on the lower tier from the player's point of view. In addition, in the game that won the re-game-B and won the AT addition lottery, the AT addition lottery was won by executing the effect (details will be described later) to instruct to aim at "White Seven" by pushing backward. It is configured to notify the player to that effect. The "forward push black 7 set replay" corresponding to the winning number 3 is a condition device related to the replay in which the replay combination whose RT state does not shift is stopped and displayed regardless of the order in which the stop buttons are pressed. Stop the reels in the order of left reel M51 → middle reel M52 → right reel M53), the range of symbol numbers 13 to 19 of the left reel M51, the range of symbol numbers 14 to 18 of the middle reel M52, and the right reel. By operating the stop button at the operation timing when the range of symbol numbers 13 to 17 of M53 is located at the bottom of each reel, "Black Seven" is placed at the bottom of the left reel M51, middle reel M52, and right reel M53. Is stopped and displayed, and it is configured so that the black sevens appear to be aligned in the lower row when viewed from the player. In addition, in the game that won the re-game-C and won the AT addition lottery, the AT addition lottery was won by executing the effect (details will be described later) to instruct to aim for "Black Seven" by pushing forward. It is configured to notify the player to that effect.

In addition, "RT maintenance RP1 ** (3 choices)" corresponding to the winning number 4 determines whether the first stop reel is the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, or the right reel M53 (operate any stop button). It is a condition device in which the re-game combination displayed as stopped may differ depending on (), and when the first stop reel is the left reel M51, the RT state does not shift to "re-game 01" and "re-game 02". Or, when "re-game 03" is stopped and displayed and the first stop reel is the middle reel M52 or the right reel M53, the RT state shifts from "non-RT", "RT1" or "RT3" to "RT0". Possible "re-game 04" is stopped and displayed. In addition, the "RT maintenance RP * 1 * (3 choices)" corresponding to the winning number 5 determines whether the first stop reel is the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, or the right reel M53 (operate any stop button). It is a condition device in which the re-game combination to be stopped and displayed may be different depending on (whether or not), and when the first stop reel is the middle reel M52, "re-game 03" in which the RT state does not shift is stopped and displayed. When the first stop reel is the left reel M51 or the right reel M53, "replay 04" in which the RT state can shift from "non-RT", "RT1" or "RT3" to "RT0" is stopped and displayed. Reel. In addition, "RT maintenance RP ** 1 (3 choices)" corresponding to winning number 6 determines whether the first stop reel is the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, or the right reel M53 (operate any stop button). It is a condition device in which the re-game combination to be stopped and displayed may be different depending on (whether or not), and when the first stop reel is the right reel M53, the RT state does not shift to "re-game 01" or "re-game 03". Is displayed as a stop, and when the first stop reel is the left reel M51 or the middle reel M52, the RT state can shift from "non-RT", "RT1" or "RT3" to "RT0". 04 "is stopped and displayed.

In addition, the small winning combination of "pushing order bell 123" to "pushing order bell 321" corresponding to the winning numbers 7 to 12 and 35 to 40 may differ depending on which of the six reel stop orders is used. It is a conditional device, for example, "left reel M51: 1, middle reel M52: 2, right reel M53: 3", and in the case of "123", "left reel M51 → middle reel M52 → right reel M53" is pushed. It means to stop in order. For example, in the case of "winning A-1" (winning number 7), stopping in the order of "123" = "left → middle → right" (correct answer in the order of pressing) is the maximum. The symbol combination that becomes "winning 01" that can acquire 11 game medals, which is the number of acquired cards, will be stopped and displayed. In addition, "123" and the like of "push order bell 123" indicate the push order (reel stop order) in which the maximum number of winning sheets in the winning number can be obtained. In addition, when the reels are stopped in a push order other than the push order in which the maximum number of sheets can be obtained, that is, if the correct answer cannot be obtained in the push order, one piece is paid out. Then, in the state related to AT such as "AT in progress", the push order of the re-game combination and the push order of the bell are navigated (the push order that gives the highest profit is displayed on the push order display device D270), and the "normal game state" is displayed. It is possible to create a plurality of gaming states in which the profit margins of the players are different, that is, the push order is not navigated to the states related to AT such as. The state related to AT will be described later.

In addition, the "common bell" corresponding to the winning number 13 can acquire 11 game medals, which is the maximum number of medals, regardless of which of the winning 04 to the winning 07 is stopped, that is, the maximum profit is obtained regardless of the pushing order. It is a conditional device that can be acquired, and is sometimes called a bell regardless of the push order. Further, the "watermelon A" corresponding to the winning number 15 is configured so that three watermelons (either watermelon A or watermelon B) can be easily aligned on the parallel line. For example, the 60th prize in FIG. 9 is won. In 14, three watermelons A are aligned in the middle of each reel. Further, the "watermelon B" corresponding to the winning number 16 is configured so that three watermelons (either watermelon A or watermelon B) can be easily aligned on the diagonal line. For example, the prize number 66 in FIG. 9 is awarded. In No. 16, three watermelons are arranged diagonally downward to the right, such as watermelon B on the upper stage of the left reel M51, watermelon B on the middle stage of the middle reel M52, and watermelon A on the lower stage of the right reel M53. In addition, the "BB medium and weak rare small role (diagonal bell alignment)" corresponding to the winning number 17 is a condition device that allows three bells to be aligned on the effective line, and the details will be described later, but the winning is done during the BB. This is a conditional device in which the AT addition lottery is executed. Further, the "BB medium-strong rare small role (V-shaped bell alignment)" corresponding to the winning number 18 is a condition device in which the bell can be stopped and displayed on the upper stage of the left reel M51, the middle stage of the middle reel M52, and the upper stage of the right reel M53. Although the details will be described later, it is a conditional device in which the AT addition lottery is executed by winning during the BB.

In addition, "RT promotion RP1 ** (3 choices)" corresponding to the winning number 28 determines whether the first stop reel is the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, or the right reel M53 (operate any stop button). It is a condition device in which the re-game combination displayed as stopped may differ depending on (), and when the first stop reel is set to the middle reel M52 or the right reel M53, the "re-game 01" in which the RT state does not shift is stopped. When the first stop reel is the left reel M51, "re-game 06" in which the RT state can shift from "RT0" or "RT4" to "RT1" is stopped and displayed. In addition, the "RT promotion RP * 1 * (3 choices)" corresponding to the winning number 29 determines whether the first stop reel is the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, or the right reel M53 (operate any stop button). It is a condition device in which the re-game combination that is stopped and displayed may differ depending on (whether or not), and when the first stop reel is the left reel M51 or the right reel M53, the RT state does not shift to "re-game 01" or "Re-game 02" is stopped and displayed, and when the first stopped reel is the middle reel M52, "Re-game 06" whose RT state can shift from "RT0" or "RT4" to "RT1" is displayed as stopped. Will be done. In addition, "RT promotion RP ** 1 (3 choices)" corresponding to the winning number 30 determines whether the first stop reel is the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, or the right reel M53 (operate any stop button). It is a condition device in which the re-game combination displayed as stopped may differ depending on whether or not the reel is stopped. When the first stop reel is the left reel M51 or the middle reel M52, the RT state does not shift to "re-game 01". When "re-game 02" or "re-game 03" is stopped and displayed and the first stop reel is the right reel M53, the RT state can shift from "RT0" or "RT4" to "RT1". Game 06 "is stopped and displayed.

In addition, the "specialized transition RP1 ** (3 choices)" corresponding to the winning number 31 determines whether the first stop reel is the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, or the right reel M53 (which stop button is used). It is a condition device in which the re-game combination displayed as stopped may differ depending on whether it is operated), and when the first stop reel is the middle reel M52 or the right reel M53, the RT state does not shift to "re-game 01". Is stopped and displayed, and when the first stop reel is the left reel M51, "re-game 07" in which the RT state can shift from "RT1" to "RT4" is stopped and displayed. In addition, the "specialized transition RP * 1 * (3 choices)" corresponding to the winning number 32 determines whether the first stop reel is the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, or the right reel M53 (which stop button). It is a condition device in which the re-game combination displayed to be stopped may differ depending on (whether to operate), and when the first stop reel is the left reel M51 or the right reel M53, the RT state does not shift to "re-game 01". "Or" Replay 02 "is stopped and displayed, and when the first stop reel is set to the middle reel M52," Replay 07 "where the RT state can shift from" RT1 "to" RT4 "is stopped and displayed. .. In addition, the "specialized transition RP ** 1 (3 choices)" corresponding to the winning number 33 determines whether the first stop reel is the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, or the right reel M53 (which stop button). It is a condition device in which the re-game combination that is stopped and displayed may be different depending on (whether to operate), and when the first stop reel is the left reel M51 or the middle reel M52, the RT state does not shift to "re-game 01". , "Re-game 02" or "Re-game 03" is stopped and displayed, and when the first stop reel is the right reel M53, the RT state can shift from "RT1" to "RT4" "Re-game 07". Is stopped and displayed.

Next, in the item of "bonus winning information", numerical values from 0 to 3 are assigned to each winning number. In the third embodiment, the winning number not including the bonus (BB role) has the bonus winning information set to 0, and the winning number including the bonus (BB role) is the winning number (19) including the type 1 BB-A. ) Bonus winning information 1, Bonus winning information of winning number (20-23) including 1st class BB-B 2, Bonus winning information of winning number (24-27) including 1st class BB-C It is set to 3. By storing the bonus winning information in the main control board M, it is possible to store information relating to which BB is established and which BB combination is won. The details of the bonus winning information will be described later.

Next, in the item of "winning / replay winning information", numerical values from 0 to 24 are assigned to each winning number. In the third embodiment, the winning number (winning number 0 corresponding to the loss and winning numbers 19/20/24 corresponding to the bonus) that does not include the re-game winning combination and the small winning combination is 0 for the winning / re-gaming winning information. The winning / re-gaming winning information of 1 to 24 is distributed to each condition device for the winning number including the re-game winning combination or the small winning combination. By storing the winning / re-game winning information in the main control board M, it is possible to store the information relating to which re-game combination or small combination has been won. The details of the winning / replay winning information will be described later.

Next, in the item of "effect group number", numerical values from 0 to 13 are assigned to each winning number. By transmitting the effect group number from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side, the effect to be executed by the sub control board S side can be determined. The details of the production group number will be described later.

Next, in the item of "ball output group number", numerical values from 0 to 17 are assigned to each winning number. The main control board M stores the payout group number, and the stored payout group number is used when executing a lottery related to AT (for example, AT lottery, AT additional lottery) to execute a lottery process related to AT. It is possible to reduce the program and data capacity for this. Even if the condition device in which the payout group number is 0 is won, the AT lottery and the AT addition lottery are not executed. On the other hand, if the conditional device whose payout group number is not 0 is won, the AT lottery or the AT addition lottery can be executed. The details of the payout group number will be described later. Further, even when the condition device in which the payout group number is 0 is won, the AT lottery or the AT addition lottery may be configured so that the payout group number can be executed. When the condition device to be 0 is won and the AT lottery or the AT addition lottery is executed, it is preferable to configure the lottery result so that the lottery result is always lost (non-winning).

Next, FIG. 105 shows a lottery in which the winning numbers (also referred to as conditional device numbers and winning combinations) and bonuses (also referred to as BB and BB combinations) relating to the small winning combination and the replaying combination in the third embodiment are determined by the winning combination lottery means. It is a list showing the probability (also called the winning rate). In the figure, the winning rate of the winning numbers is shown.

First, the lottery probabilities in "RT0", "RT1", "RT2", "RT3", "RT4" and "non-RT" when the BB is not operating will be described in detail. In the third embodiment, the lottery probability of the winning combination (particularly, the re-gaming combination) can be different depending on the RT state, and the "re-gaming combination" (the lottery probability of the total of all the re-gaming combinations) is In the case of "RT1", the lottery probability is higher than in other RT states. In addition, "re-game 04" (so-called fall re-game combination, "RT1", which can be stopped and displayed at winning numbers 4 to 6, and a symbol corresponding to the re-game combination in a situation where the bonus is not won. When the combination is stopped and displayed, it will shift to "RT0" hereafter), which is easier to win (appear) in "RT1", and in "RT0", "RT2" and "RT3" than "RT1". It is difficult to appear, and in "RT4", it is configured so that it does not appear at all. In "RT0" and "RT2", "re-game 04" that can be stopped and displayed at winning numbers 4 to 6 may appear, but even if "re-game 04" is stopped and displayed, it is in the RT state. Does not migrate. In addition, when "re-game 04" is stopped and displayed in "RT1", it has shifted to "RT0", that is, a fall effect (for example, an effect display device S40) which is an effect of notifying that the RT state has fallen. (Displayed as "Sorry") is executed, and when "Replay 04" is stopped and displayed in "RT2", the fall effect may not be executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to recognize that the player has won the BB because the fall effect was not executed even though the "re-game 04" was stopped and displayed. It can enhance the sex. In addition, in such a configuration, the sound effect output by the stop display of "re-game 04" and the re-game combination other than "re-game 04" (for example, "re-game" in which the RT state does not shift). 01 ") may be configured to be different from the output sound effect due to the stop display, and by such a configuration, the player recognizes that" replay 04 "is stopped and displayed. It can be easily configured. In addition, there are cases related to AT where push order navigation does not occur (for example, "normal gaming state" and may be referred to as non-AT gaming state) and states related to AT where push order navigation can occur (for example, "". It may stay in "RT1" in both cases of "AT in progress" and may be referred to as AT gaming state). At this time, when the winning number that may shift (fall) from "RT1" to "RT0" is won, a special sound effect indicating that the RT state may fall in the non-AT gaming state is played. It may be configured not to output based on the operation of the start lever D50. This makes it possible to shift the RT state without letting the player realize that there is a possibility of falling to "RT0" in the non-AT game state. On the other hand, in the AT game state, a special sound effect indicating that the RT state may fall is output based on the operation of the start lever (and the re-game combination in which the RT state does not fall is stopped and displayed. It may be configured to notify the forward navigation). As a result, the player can operate the stop button D40 after the special sound effect is notified, being careful not to let the RT state fall. In addition, "re-game 05" (re-game role that can notify that the AT addition lottery has been won when the stop is displayed in the AT state) that can be stopped and displayed with the winning number 2 or 3 appears in "RT1". It is designed to do. It should be noted that the transition of the state related to the RT state accompanying the stop display of the symbol combination that serves as the replaying role will be described later. Further, as will be described later, in the third embodiment, the push order navigation for notifying the player of the reel stop order, which is most advantageous to the player, can be executed by the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40. There is. There is no problem even if the lottery probability is changed as appropriate. Further, in the third embodiment, the bonus is configured so that it can overlap with the small winning combination, and watermelon A (winning-D), watermelon B (winning-E), cherry (winning-C), and replay (replaying). It overlaps with a part of the game-A) and the push order bell (winning-A1 to A6). Specifically, the winning numbers 21 to 23, the winning numbers 25 to 27, and the winning numbers 34 to 40 are conditional devices in which the bonus and the small winning combination or the replaying combination overlap. It should be noted that "RT0" and "non-RT" may be configured so that the winning probability of the replaying combination and the type of the replaying combination to be won are similar or duplicated, and when such a configuration is made. Is configured to have a similar effect tendency executed on the sub-control board S side, so that it becomes "non-RT" after RAM clear execution, and then changes to "RT0", which is the RT state with the highest stay ratio throughout all games. Even in the case of transition, the player can easily feel that he / she is always staying at “RT0” and can proceed with the game without any discomfort.

Further, in the situation of "RT2", since the BB has been won and the BB is not in operation, the BB roles of the winning numbers 20 and 24 (single roles that do not overlap with the small roles). If a BB role is won, which may be referred to as a single BB role or a single BB), the new winning of the BB role becomes invalid, and only the winning of the small role becomes valid. Specifically, for example, in the case of "RT2" and winning (carrying over) the 1st class BB-A, the winning number 24 "1st class BB-C" is won. , Class 1 BB-C related to the winning number 24 becomes invalid. That is, the situation is the same as when the winning number 0 "missing" is won. In addition, the carry-over type 1 BB-A will continue to be in the winning state. Further, in the situation of "RT2", since the BB has been won and the BB is not in operation, the small winning combination of the winning numbers 21 to 23 and the winning numbers 25 to 27 and the BB role are played. If the overlapping conditional devices are won, the new winning of the BB winning combination is invalid, and only the winning of the small winning combination is valid. Specifically, for example, in the case of "RT2" and winning (carrying over) the 1st class BB-A, the winning number 21 "1st class BB-B + winning C" is won. The type 1 BB-B related to the winning number 21 is invalid, and only the winning C is valid. That is, the situation is the same as when the winning number 14 "winning-C" is won. In addition, the carry-over type 1 BB-A will continue to be in the winning state. It should be noted that the overlap with the bonus is not limited to the small role, and may overlap with a part of the replay role. For example, a part of the replaying roles of winning numbers 4 to 6 may overlap with the bonus. In this way, by making the bonus overlap with the conditional device including the RT transition replay (replaying combination in which the RT state can be transitioned), the bonus is also won when the conditional device including the RT transition replay is won. There is a possibility, and even if the RT transition replay is stopped and displayed, the bonus will not be denied, so it is possible to give the player expectations. In this configuration, the RT state is controlled so that the RT state does not shift even if the RT transition replay is stopped and displayed. As a result, the player should have changed the RT state (shifted to the RT state where the replay probability is relatively low), but the replay probability is not low (frequently won the replay), etc. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest in the game, such as the possibility of winning the bonus.

Further, "RT3" is an RT state after the completion of Type 1 BB-A to Type 1 BB-C. If the AT lottery is not won, the push order navigation does not occur, so that the player wins the re-game-D1 to D3 and "re-game 04" is stopped and displayed, so that the game shifts to "RT0" (. In this example, it is configured to shift to the "low probability state" after the end of BB in the situation where the AT lottery has not been won). On the other hand, when the AT lottery is won, the state related to AT after the end of BB is the AT preparation state 1, and the push order navigation occurs in the AT preparation state 1, so that "AT preparation state 1 → AT preparation". State 2 → AT in progress state ”. In "RT3", the re-game-E1 to the re-game-E3 (winning numbers 28 to 30) and the re-game-F1 to the re-game-F3 (winning numbers 31 to 33) are configured not to be won. On the other hand, when the symbol combination corresponding to the "re-game 04" included in the re-game-D1 to the re-game-D3 (winning numbers 4 to 6) is stopped and displayed, it shifts to "RT0" (AT preparation state 2). do.

Further, "RT4" is a symbol combination corresponding to "re-game 07" included in re-game-F1 to re-game-F3 (winning numbers 31 to 33) when it is in the special omen state (RT1) described later. Is an RT state that shifts when is stopped and displayed. Specifically, when the re-game-F1 to re-game-F3 are won in the special omen state (RT1) and the symbol combination corresponding to "re-game 07" is stopped and displayed according to the push order navigation. It shifts to the additional specialization state (RT4). In addition, when the player is not in the specialization precursor state (RT1), in other words, when the player does not have the right to shift to the additional specialization state (for example, in the AT state), the player does not follow the push order navigation and "re-uses". When the symbol combination corresponding to "Game 07" is stopped and displayed, the state shifts to the specialized state (RT4) after the fall. In "RT4", the re-game-E1 to the re-game-E3 (winning numbers 28 to 30) are configured to be won. Therefore, the symbol corresponding to "re-game 06" included in the re-game-E1 to the re-game-E3 (winning numbers 31 to 33) regardless of whether it is in the additional specialized state or the post-fall specialized state. When the combination is stopped and displayed, it returns to RT1.

Next, the lottery probability at the time of "Type 1 BB-A, B, C operation" which is the time of BB operation will be described in detail. In the third embodiment, while the BB is in operation, the winning number 13 "common bell", the winning number 17 "BB medium weak rare small role (diagonal bell alignment)", and the winning number 18 "BB medium strong rare small" It is configured so that three small roles with "role (V-shaped bell alignment)" can be won, and while the BB won in "AT in progress" is operating, "BB medium weak rare small role (diagonal bell alignment)" "Or" BB medium-strong rare small role (V-shaped bell alignment) "is configured to execute an AT addition lottery (details will be described later).

Further, the lower figure of FIG. 105 exemplifies the small winning combination lottery probability when the set value is 1, and in the common bell (winning number 13), the lottery probability is uniform regardless of the RT state. However, as shown in the lower part of the figure, the lottery probability of the common bell is configured to differ depending on the set value (6 stages in this example). Specifically, the number in setting 1 is 3204, the number in setting 2 is 3404, the number in setting 3 is 3604, the number in setting 4 is 3904, the number in setting 5 is 4204, and the number in setting 6 is. Is 4504, and the higher the set value, the higher the lottery probability. With this configuration, for example, when a player advances a game while measuring the number of appearances (winning times) of a common bell, the common bell is frequently won to relate to the gaming machine being played. The game can be advanced with the expectation that the set value is a relatively high set value. Further, the higher the set value, the higher the expected value per game, and the higher the set value, the higher the ball output rate. The lottery probability of the common bell is configured to differ depending on the set value, but depending on the winning of the common bell, the AT lottery, the AT addition lottery, and the high probability state transition lottery, which will be described later, are not executed. It is configured so as not to affect the transition lottery of the state related to (also referred to as a lottery related to AT).

Next, with reference to the block diagram of FIG. 106, the electrical schematic configuration of the rotating cylinder type gaming machine P according to the third embodiment will be described. First, in the revolving gaming machine according to the third embodiment, the sub-control board S, the door board D, the revolving board K, the power supply board E, and the relay board IN are centered on the main control board M that controls the progress of the game. , Setting key switch M20, setting / reset button M30, etc. are connected so as to be able to exchange data. The solid line part in the figure shows the movement related to the exchange of data, and the broken line part in the figure shows the power supply route. The power supply route is not limited to this, and for example, power may be supplied from the power supply board E to the relay board IN and the door board D without going through the main control board.

The main control board (sometimes referred to as a main control means, a main board, a main control means, a main board, and a main game unit) M is a board that controls the progress of the entire game performed by the spinning machine P. The main control chip C is mounted on the main control board M, and the CPUC100, the built-in ROMC110, the built-in RAMC120, and the like are connected and mounted on the main control chip C so as to be able to exchange data with each other by a bus. Then, the main control board M receives a signal or the like indicating that the start lever D50 or the like has been operated from the door board D mounted on the front door DU, and receives the sub control board S, the door board D, and the cylinder board. The operation of these various boards is controlled by outputting a control command (or control signal) toward K or the like {for example, an instruction number (push order number, instruction information, operation information) toward the sub-control board S. By outputting (also referred to as), the sub-control board S can execute push order navigation on the effect display device S40}.

Further, the sub-control board SC (sometimes referred to as a sub-control means, a sub-board, a sub-control means, a sub-board, and a sub-game unit) S also has a sub-control chip SC mounted on the sub-control board M as well as the above-mentioned main control board M. The sub-control chip SC is provided with a CPU SC100, a ROM, a RAM, and the like, and is configured to be connected by a bus so that data can be exchanged with each other. Further, various LED lamps S10, a speaker S20, an effect display device S40, a rotating cylinder backlight (also referred to as a back lamp) S30, and the like are connected to the sub-control board S. Here, the rotating cylinder backlight S30 is a light provided inside each of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53, and illuminates the pattern drawn on the surface of the reel from the back side. The sub-control board S analyzes the control commands received from the main control board M and outputs various drive signals to the various LED lamps S10, the speaker S20, the effect display device S40, the rotating cylinder backlight S30, and the like. Is being produced.

On the door substrate D, the above-mentioned input reception sensor D10s, the first input sensor D20s, the second input sensor D30s, the stop button D40 for stopping the rotating reel M50, and the start for starting the rotation of the reel M50. Lever D50, settlement button D60 for paying out stored game medals (credits) and inserted game medals to end the game, and various display panels D70 {not shown, but described above. The input number display light D210, the operation state display light D180, the special game state display device D250, the payout number display device (push order display device) D270 is a display device such as a credit number display device D200, an advantageous section display YH, and the like. , A door switch D80 for determining the opening / closing of the front door, canceling an error, and changing the set value, and a game medal (or other foreign matter) that is judged to be incompatible after being inserted. A blocker D100 or the like for refunding to D240 is connected. Further, the door board D is connected to the main control board M described above so as to be able to exchange data. Therefore, when the start lever D50, the stop button D40, the settlement button D60, etc. provided on the front door DU are operated, the signal related to the operation is supplied to the main control board M via the door board D. ing. Further, the signal that the insertion reception sensor D10s detects the passage of the game medal is also supplied to the main control board M via the door board D.

Further, a rotating cylinder motor K10 for rotating the reel M50, a rotating cylinder sensor K20 for detecting the rotation position of the reel M50, and the like are connected to the rotating cylinder substrate K. The reel M50 can be stopped at a determined stop position by driving the reel motor K10 while detecting the rotation position of the reel M50 by the reel sensor K20. There is. Further, in the rotating cylinder type gaming machine of the third embodiment, a so-called step motor (stepping motor) is used for the rotating cylinder motor K10. In the step motor, 480 steps are set as the number of steps for the reel M50 to rotate once. Further, each reel (left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) is set with a predetermined number (for example, 20) of symbols having a substantially uniform size, and the number of steps corresponding to one symbol is set. Is set to 24 steps (= 480/20). There is no problem even if the number of steps and the number of symbols per reel lap are changed.

Further, the medal payout device H is connected to the main control board M via the relay board IN, and pays a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game medals based on the control signal from the main control board M. Perform the action to put out. The medal payout device H includes a first payout sensor H10s and a second payout sensor H20s, and a disk H50, which determine whether or not the medals have been paid out normally and measure the number of game medals paid out. A hopper motor H80 for rotating is connected to the hopper motor H80.

The various control boards and the electric power consumed by the boards are supplied from the power supply board E (the board that controls the presence / absence of power supply by the power supply switch E10). In FIG. 106, a state in which electric power is supplied from the power supply board E is represented by a broken line arrow. As shown in the figure, electric power is directly supplied from the power supply board E to the main control board M and the sub control board S, and various boards (door board D, cylinder board K, relay board IN) are supplied with electric power. Power is supplied via the main control board M. A predetermined amount (for example, 100 V) of AC voltage is supplied to the power supply board E, and this power is converted into a DC voltage of a specified voltage and then supplied to each control board and board.

Further, the main control board M has a setting key switch M20 used for executing the setting change device control process (to change the setting) described later, and a setting / reset capable of changing the setting value and canceling an error. Button M30, is connected. Further, the main control board M is a state relating to a reel control means for controlling the rotation and stopping of the reels M50 (left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) and an AT advantageous to the player. AT lottery means to execute AT transition lottery to shift to, and AT addition lottery to increase the number of remaining AT games (or the counter value of AT counter M60), which is the number of games that can stay in the "AT in progress state". It has an AT addition lottery means to be executed.

Next, FIGS. 107 to 131 are flowcharts showing a general flow of processing performed by the main control board M in the third embodiment.

The flowchart is mainly composed of terminals (shown by rounded rectangles) indicating processing steps (shown by rectangles), judgments (shown by diamonds), flow lines (arrows), start / end / return, etc. ing. Further, when the details of the processing steps are shown in another flowchart, the one that refers to the other flowchart is shown as a subroutine (shown by a rectangle in which the left and right lines are double lines). .. Here, at the stage of developing a gaming machine, it is also possible to develop a gaming machine with different specifications at the same time, but in this example, a subroutine (in this example, executed by a gaming machine with different specifications) is executed in the processing on the main side. It is configured so as not to leave a subroutine (which is not normally used), and prevents processing related to an unused subroutine, which is not normally executed, from being executed due to noise or fraudulent activity.

First, FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing the flow of processing that is executed for the first time on the CPUC100 of the main control board M after the power of the spinning machine P is turned on (or at the time of system reset or user reset). .. First, in step 1000, the power of the rotating drum type gaming machine P is turned on, and then in step 1002, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets a timer interrupt (here, the timer interrupt is not started but the timer is started). Only the type of interrupt is set, and in the subsequent processing, when the timer interrupt is started, the flowchart related to the timer interrupt processing described later is periodically executed). Next, in step 1004, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes serial communication settings (speed, data length, data transmission method settings) and the like as function settings of the main control chip C. Next, in step 1006, the CPUC100 of the main control board M calculates the checksum from the start address of the RAM area to the address immediately before the checksum area. Next, in step 1008, the CPUC100 of the main control board M checks the RAM area (for example, the power is turned off and the power is turned off and restored based on the calculated checksum and the checksum data held in the checksum area. Checks whether the data stored in the built-in RAMC 120 is correctly held), and generates power-off / recovery data. Next, in step 1010, the CPUC100 of the main control board M confirms the switch state of the setting key switch M20. Next, in step 1014, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the setting key switch M20 is off.

In the case of Yes in step 1014, in step 1016, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns on / off the power off processing flag in the RAM (turns on in step 1904) and the checksum state of all RAMs (in step 1006). (Check result) is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the power supply cutoff / recovery data in the RAM is normal. In the case of Yes in step 1016, in step 1020, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes initialization of the RAM area within the initialization range determined in step 1018. Next, in step 1022, the CPUC100 of the main control board M returns the stack pointer based on the data related to the stack pointer saved in the process when the power is turned off (step 1902). Next, in step 1036, the CPUC100 of the main control board M refers to the inside of the RAM area, and determines whether or not the data related to the set value in the RAM area is within the normal range (0 to 5 in this example). judge. In the case of Yes in step 1036, in step 1038, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the reading of the input port. Next, in step 1040, the CPUC100 of the main control board M starts the timer interrupt set in step 1002. Next, in step 1042, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns off the power-off processing completed flag, and returns to the processing at the time of power-off according to the returned stack pointer.

If No in step 1016, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets the backup error display (for example, sets the error number in the register area) in step 1024. Next, in step 1300, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes a non-recoverable error process described later.

If No in step 1036, in step 1046, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets a set value error display (for example, it will be displayed on the payout number display device D270) (for example, in the register area). Set to). Next, in step 1300, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes a non-recoverable error process described later.

If No in step 1014, in step 1028, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns on / off the power off processing flag in the RAM (turns on in step 1904) and the checksum state of all RAMs (step 1904). (Check result in 1006) is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the power supply cutoff / recovery data in the RAM is normal. In the case of Yes in step 1028, in step 1030, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines and sets the initialization range of the RAM to a predetermined range excluding the storage area for storing the set value (set value data) in the RAM. For example, it is set in the register area), and the process proceeds to step 1034. The range not included in the initialization range of the RAM is not limited to the storage area for storing the set value (set value data), and the total number of games in the "advantageous section" and the total cumulative number of game sections (advantageous section +). As a result of calculating the number of games (normal section + standby section) and the stay ratio of the "advantageous section", etc. are also within the range not included in the initialization range of the RAM. With this configuration, the ratio of staying in the "advantageous section" in the game (advantageous section ratio) can be calculated and displayed. Further, the calculation process of the advantageous section ratio is configured to be calculated at the timing when the unit game ends. Further, the advantageous section ratio is displayed when the power of the gaming machine is turned on (for example, it is displayed on a 4-digit 7-segment display). As a specific display mode, it is repeated at 5 second intervals in the order of "advantageous section ratio-> continuous bonus ratio per 6000 games-> bonus ratio per 6000 games-> cumulative continuous bonus ratio-> cumulative bonus ratio". Is displayed. The continuous bonus ratio is "the number of payouts / total payouts when the RB is operating", and the bonus ratio is the "number of payouts when the RB, CB, or SB is operating". / Total number of payouts ". On the other hand, if No in step 1028, in step 1032, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the initialization range of the RAM to be a specific range including the storage area for storing the set value (set value data) in the RAM. It is set (for example, set in the register area), and the process proceeds to step 1034. Next, in step 1034, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes initialization of the RAM area within the initialization range determined in step 1030 or step 1032. Next, in step 1100, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the setting change device control process described later.

Although not shown, it is preferable that the initial value (value at the start of processing) of the temporary storage area (RAM area, etc.) mounted on the main control board M is configured so as not to be a value at which a special game is executed. (To prevent the special game from being erroneously executed when the process of determining the execution of the special game is executed due to noise or fraudulent activity immediately after the start of the program process). Further, although not shown, when a random number such as a winning random number is stored in the RAM area of the main control board M, a dedicated storage area is secured and the information related to the random number is stored in the byte. It is preferable to configure it so that only the information related to the random number is stored (other information such as various timer values is not stored) (when operating another data stored in the same 1 byte, due to noise or the like). To prevent the information related to random numbers from being rewritten).

Next, FIG. 108 is a flowchart of the setting change device control process according to the subroutine of step 1100 in FIG. 107, and is also referred to as a setting change mode. First, in step 1102, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets the stack pointer (initializes at the start address of the process). Next, in step 1104, the CPUC100 of the main control board M activates a timer interrupt. Next, in step 1106, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the set value (set value data) in the RAM area is within the normal range (0 to 5 in this example). When the set value (set value data) is managed by 1 to 6, it is necessary to perform the initialization of the RAM and return it to "1" when the set value becomes "0". Therefore, in this example, by managing the normal range of the set value (set value data) as 0 to 5, the set value (set value data) is corrected after the RAM is initialized (step 1106 and). The processing of step 1108) can be eliminated, and the processing time can be shortened and the processing capacity can be reduced. In the case of Yes in step 1106, in step 1108, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets a predetermined value (for example, 0 = the most disadvantageous value for the player) in the set value (set value data), and in step 1110. Transition. On the other hand, even if No in step 1106, the process proceeds to step 1110. Next, in step 1110, the CPUC100 of the main control board M indicates to the error display LED (for example, the payout number display device D270) that the setting change device is operating (for example, "88" for lighting all segments). Then, the set value is displayed on the setting display LED (not shown) (the display related to the set value is a numerical value obtained by adding 1 to the set value (set value data) held in the RAM), and step 1112. Move to. As described above, the payout number display device D270 is also used to notify the push order. Since it is configured in this way, for example, when a failure has occurred in a part of the 7-segment LED (there is a segment that cannot be turned on) and the push order is notified, incorrect information may be notified. possible. In order to prevent such a situation, by making the payout number display device D270 all lights up "88" while the setting change device is operating, it is possible to confirm whether or not the 7 segments are out of order, which is not suitable for the player. It is possible to prevent giving profits. Further, as a configuration related to the display of the set value, the RAM for displaying the set value for storing the data obtained by adding 1 to the set value (set value data) in the storage area for storing the set value (set value data) is stored. It may be configured to have an area and display a set value with reference to the storage area. Although not shown, after executing the process of step 1110, a process for transmitting a command indicating that the setting change mode has been entered is executed on the sub-control board S side.

Next, in step 1112, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the setting / reset button M30 has been switched from off to on. In the case of Yes in step 1112, in step 1114, the CPUC100 of the main control board M adds 1 to the current set value (set value data) (when the added result set value (set value data) exceeds 5). The set value (set value data) becomes 0), and the process proceeds to step 1116. Even if No in step 1112, the process proceeds to step 1116. Next, in step 1116, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the start lever D50 has been switched from off to on. If No in step 1116, the process proceeds to step 1112, and the processes of steps 1112 to 1116 are looped. In the case of Yes in step 1116, in step 1118, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the setting key switch M20 is switched from on to off. If No in step 1118, the process of step 1118 is looped. On the other hand, in the case of Yes in step 1118, in step 1120, the CPUC100 of the main control board M displays on the error display LED (not shown) that the operation of the setting change device has been completed, and displays the setting display LED (not shown). Clear the display of the set value (set value data). Next, in step 1122, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the RT state after the next game to be "non-RT". In addition, "non-RT" is an RT state that shifts after RAM clear execution, and in the situation of "non-RT", the overflow of the push order bell is stopped and displayed to "RT0". It will be transitioned (the transition to the RT state will be described in detail). Next, in step 1124, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the state related to the AT after the next game to the "low probability state". Next, in step 1126, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the game section after the next game as the normal section. Next, in step 1128, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns off the advantageous section indicator YH (it is turned off when the power is turned off and remains turned off without being newly turned on), and the game progresses in step 1200. Move to control processing. As described above, in the third embodiment, when the setting change device control process is executed, in other words, when the RAM clear is executed, the RT state is "non-RT" and the state related to AT is "low probability". The "state" and the game section are configured to be the "normal section".

Here, the processes of step 1122, step 1124, step 1126, and step 1128 are configured to be executed by the process of step 1034 of FIG. 107 described above (the process of executing the initialization of the RAM within the determined initialization range). You may. Specifically, as the process of step 1034, (1) "0" (data corresponding to "non-RT") is stored in the address (storage area) for managing the RT state, and (2) the state related to AT is managed. "0" (data corresponding to "low probability state") is stored in the address (storage area) to be stored, and (3) "0" (data corresponding to "normal section") is stored in the address (storage area) for managing the game section. ) Is stored, and (4) "0" (data corresponding to the turning off of the advantageous section display YH) is stored in the address that manages the lighting / extinguishing of the advantageous section display YH. You may. The address (storage area) for managing the RT state is either an initialization range (predetermined range) when it is determined to be Yes in step 1028 or an initialization range (specific range) when it is determined to be No in step 1028. It may be configured to be included in the above, or it is not included in the initialization range (predetermined range) when it is determined to be Yes in step 1028, but it is not included in the initialization range (specific range) when it is determined to be No in step 1028. May be configured to be included in. Further, the RAM initialization process in step 1034 may be configured to be executed in the process after step 1118. Specifically, in the case of Yes in step 1028, the processes from step 1102 to step 1118 are performed. After execution, RAM initialization is executed for a predetermined range excluding the storage area for storing the set value (set value data), and if No in step 1028, the set value (set value data) is stored. The RAM is initialized for the area, and after the processes of steps 1102 to 1118 are executed, the RAM is initialized for a predetermined range excluding the storage area for storing the set value (set value data). It may be configured as follows.

Next, FIG. 109 is a flowchart of non-recoverable error processing according to the subroutine of step 1300 (and called in another flowchart) in FIG. 107. First, in step 1302, the CPUC100 of the main control board M prohibits interrupts (after that, the flowchart related to the timer interrupt time processing described later is not executed). Next, in step 1304, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets the output port address and the number of output ports. Next, in step 1306, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns off the output ports (0 to 6 in this example, display outputs to various LEDs and drive outputs to various motors). Next, in step 1308, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets the next port output address (by repeating this, the display output to various LEDs and the drive output to various motors are sequentially stopped). Next, in step 1310, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the output to each output port is completed. In the case of Yes in step 1310, in step 1312, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the set error display (some error has occurred when executing this process), and the process is concerned. Is repeated, and when the power supply voltage drops, a reset signal is input and the process ends. (That is, since it enters an infinite loop, it does not accept any operation that prompts it to return). If No in step 1310, the process proceeds to step 1306. The processes of steps 1306 to 1310 are processes for clearing the output to the LED / motor (however, since the external output signal is not cleared, information on the error and the game progress status when the error occurs are displayed on the hall computer side. It is possible to output to).

Next, FIG. 110 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (first sheet) according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. 108. First, in step 1202, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets the stack pointer (initializes at the start address of the process). Next, in step 1203, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets data in the RAM area required for the game (for example, the maximum number of bets, valid lines for winning, etc.). In step 1203, the data for clearing the data used in the previous game {for example, the conditional device number (winning number), the effect group number, the instruction information} (“0” for clearing the RAM address). It also includes the process of setting the data) in the RAM. It should be noted that the condition device number, the effect group number, the instruction information, and the like may not be cleared, and the number selected when the next game is executed may be overwritten. Next, in step 1204, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets the RT state (for example, “RT0” or the like) in the game. The RT state in the first game after changing the setting (after clearing the RAM) is "non-RT". Next, in step 1205, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets a command (command to the sub side) related to the RT state set in step 1204. The process of setting the RT state may be executed in step 1704 of FIG. Further, a command related to the RT state (command to the sub side) may be set in step 1704. Further, when the RT state is transmitted to the sub side, it is not necessary to always transmit the RT state, and the RT state may be transmitted to the sub side only when the game section is the “advantageous section”. Next, in step 1206, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets a state related to AT in the game (for example, "AT in progress state" or the like). The state related to AT in the first game after changing the setting (after clearing the RAM) is a "low probability state". Next, in step 1207, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets a command (command to the sub-control board S side) related to the AT set in step 1206. Further, the process of setting the state related to AT may be executed in each step described above. Further, when transmitting the state related to AT to the sub control board S side, it is not necessary to always transmit, and the state related to AT is transmitted to the sub control board S side only when the game section is the "advantageous section". You may. Next, in step 1208, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets a game section (for example, an “advantageous section”) in the game. The game section in the first game after the setting is changed (after the RAM is cleared) is the "normal section". Next, in step 1208-1, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets a command (command to the sub side) related to the game section set in step 1208. Next, in step 1209, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the medal payout device H is full of game medals. Specifically, a sub tank (not shown) for storing medals overflowing from the medal payout device H is provided, and a determination is made based on the continuity / non-conduction of current by a plurality of fullness detection sensors provided in the sub tank (via a medal). If the current is conducted, it is judged to be full). If Yes in step 1209, the process proceeds to step 1218.

On the other hand, if No in step 1209, in step 1210, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns on the medal full error flag (for example, the inside of the medal full error flag area in the RAM area is updated with a value corresponding to on. ). Next, in step 1212, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the display of the error number corresponding to the medal full error with the 7-segment LED (for example, the storage display LED or the acquired number LED). Next, in step 1214, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the medal full error has been canceled (for example, whether or not the current from the sub tank is non-conducting and the setting / reset button M30 is pressed). do. In the case of Yes in step 1214, in step 1216, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns off the medal full error flag (for example, updates the inside of the medal full error flag area in the RAM area with a value corresponding to off), and steps. Move to 1218. On the other hand, if No in step 1214, the process proceeds to step 1212. Next, in step 1218, the CPUC100 of the main control board M permits the acceptance of medal insertion (the insertion operation is automatically executed in the next game of the replaying combination), and the next process (step 1220). Process). Here, in step 1218, the blocker D100 is turned on (process for forming the medal flow path). Specifically, when the re-game combination is established in the previous game, the blocker D100 is turned on on the condition that the current storage number (credit) is less than a predetermined value (50 in this example). Execute. In other words, when the current storage number (credit) is a predetermined value, the blocker D100 is not turned on. On the other hand, if the re-game combination is not established in the previous game, the blocker D100 is uniformly turned on. With this configuration, even if the re-game combination is established, if the stored number (credit) does not reach the predetermined value, the game medal can be inserted, such as "RT1". When staying in the RT state (for example, "RT1") where the winning probability of the re-game role is higher than that of the RT state, or when the re-game role is difficult to understand by appearance (re-game pretending to be a small role: Even when the bell-bell-bell or the symbol combination in which the cherry is stopped on the left reel is stopped on the invalid line, the player can play the game with good rhythm (without discomfort).

Next, FIG. 111 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (second sheet) according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. 108. First, in step 1220, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the game medal has not been bet and the credit does not exist. In the case of Yes in step 1220, in step 1221, does the CPUC100 of the main control board M satisfy the setting display condition (for example, when the door switch D80 and the setting key switch M20 are all turned on, the condition is satisfied)? Judge whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 1221, in step 1222, the CPUC100 of the main control board M is set to the setting display LED (not shown, but may be the payout number display device D270, the credit number display device D200, or the input number display lamp D210). The value (setting value data) is displayed (shifts to the setting confirmation mode), and the transition to step 1221 is performed on condition that the setting key switch M20 is turned off. When the transition condition of the setting change mode is satisfied, the process for sending a command indicating to start the setting change mode to the sub control board S side, and the setting change mode when the end condition of the setting change mode is satisfied. Is executing a process to send a command indicating that the command is to be terminated. If No in step 1220 or 1221, in step 1224, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes management related to the insertion and settlement of game medals. Next, in step 1225, the CPUC100 of the main control board M confirms the number of game medals that can be accepted. Next, in step 1226, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the blocker D100 is on. In the case of Yes in step 1226, in step 1227, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the first throwing sensor D20s or the second throwing sensor D30s is on (in the third embodiment, the medal is thrown in). It has two throwing sensors for detecting, and when the first throwing sensor D20s or the second throwing sensor D30s is turned on, it is determined that one game medal has been accepted). In the case of Yes in step 1227, in step 1230, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the first input sensor D20s and the second input sensor D30s are off (first input sensor D20s or second input sensor D20s). When the first throwing sensor D20s and the second throwing sensor D30s are turned off after the sensor D30s is turned on, it is determined that one received game medal has passed through the first throwing sensor D20s and the second throwing sensor D30s. ). In the case of Yes in step 1230, in step 1231, it is determined that the CPUC100 of the main control board M has accepted the insertion of one normal game medal. Although not shown, after step 1231, whether or not the CPUC100 of the main control board M has a maximum number of credits (50 in this example) and a maximum number of bets (3 in this example). If it is determined to be Yes, the blocker D100 is controlled to be off (a state in which a medal flow path is not formed). If No in step 1230, the process of step 1230 is repeated, and if No in step 1226 or 1227, the process proceeds to step 1232.

Next, in step 1232, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the settlement button D60 has been operated. In the case of Yes in step 1232, in step 1233, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not there is a remaining number of credits or a bet game medal. In the case of Yes in step 1233, in step 1234, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns on the hopper drive flag (a flag in the RAM area, which is turned on when the hopper motor H80 is being driven), and the game is played. Pay out one medal. Next, in step 1236, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is on (to detect the payout of medals in the third embodiment). When the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is turned on, it is determined that one game medal is being paid out). If Yes in step 1236, the process proceeds to step 1247. Here, although not specified in the flowchart, if the previous game was a re-game, only the remaining number of credits will be subject to settlement.

On the other hand, if No in step 1236, in step 1241, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the hopper was driven (after the timing of the processing in step 1234). .. Specifically, did the situation in which it was determined that the medal was not paid out continued for a predetermined time even though the hopper drive signal was transmitted to the hopper motor H80 (the hopper motor H80 is rotating)? Judge whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 1241, in step 1242, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns on the medal empty error flag (for example, the inside of the medal empty error flag area is updated with a value corresponding to on). Next, in step 1244, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes a medal empty error display. Next, in step 1245, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the medal empty error has been canceled (for example, whether or not the setting / reset button M30 has been pressed). In the case of Yes in step 1245, in step 1246, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns off the medal empty error flag (for example, updates the inside of the medal empty error flag area in the RAM area with a value corresponding to off), and steps. Move to 1247. On the other hand, if No in step 1245, the process proceeds to step 1244.

Next, in step 1247, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s are off (the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is turned on). When the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s are turned off, it is determined that the payout operation of one game medal in which the payout operation has been performed is completed). In the case of Yes in step 1247, in step 1248, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns off the hopper drive flag and proceeds to step 1233. If No in step 1241 or 1247, the process proceeds to step 1236.

On the other hand, if No in step 1232 or step 1233, the start lever D50 is effective for the CPUC100 of the main control board M in step 1251 (for example, a predetermined number of game medals for starting the game have been inserted, etc.). ), And it is determined whether or not the start lever D50 has been operated. In the case of Yes in step 1251, in step 1253, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the set value (set value data) in the RAM area is within the normal range (0 to 5 in this example). do. In the case of Yes in step 1253, in step 1254, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes a process of acquiring a random number and turning off the blocker D100, and then proceeds to the next process (process of step 3600). On the other hand, if No in step 1253, in step 1256, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets the set value error display (for example, the error number is set in the register area). Next, in step 1300, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes an unrecoverable error process. If No in step 1251, the process proceeds to step 1220.

Next, FIG. 112 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (third sheet) according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. 108. First, in step 3600, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes an internal lottery execution process, which will be described later. Next, in step 1400, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the AT state transition control process described later. Next, in step 1450, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the condition device number management process described later. Next, in step 1259, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state related to the AT is a state in which the AT can be added to the lottery. Here, the states related to the AT that can execute the AT addition lottery according to the third embodiment are "AT in progress state", "addition specialization state", "specialization precursor state", and "advantageous BB state". , In the "advantageous BB internal middle game", the AT counter value may be larger than 0, but the AT addition lottery is not executed. This is to prevent the player from being advantageous for the player if the player does not dare to align the symbol combinations of the BB in the "advantageous BB internal medium game". In addition, it may be configured so that the AT addition lottery can be executed in the "advantageous BB internal middle game", and in such a configuration, the AT addition lottery is won in the "advantageous BB internal middle game". However, it may be configured to notify the fact that the AT addition lottery has been won at the timing when the BB ends, or the number of AT remaining games after the number of AT games has been added. Further, in the third embodiment, the AT addition lottery is not executed even in the "specialized state after falling", the "AT in progress state after falling", and the "post-bell overflowing state". Since the AT counter value is not subtracted in the "specialized state after falling", "AT in progress after falling", and "after bell overflow", the player ignores the push order navigation. , If you configure it so that you can execute the AT additional lottery when you move to the "specialized state after falling", "AT in progress after falling" or "state after bell overflow", you will not follow the push order navigation. There is a risk that it will be more profitable than those who obey. Therefore, in the third embodiment, the AT addition lottery is not executed in the "specialized state after falling", the "AT in progress state after falling", and the "post-bell overflowing state". In the third embodiment, the AT counter value is not subtracted in the "specialized state after falling", the "AT in progress state after falling", and the "state after bell overflow". It may be configured to subtract the AT counter value each time the game is executed. In addition, in such a configuration, it may be configured so that the AT addition lottery can be executed. In the case of Yes in step 1259, in step 1500, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes an execution process for adding the number of games, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 3100. On the other hand, even if No in step 1259, the process proceeds to step 3100. In this game number addition execution process, it is possible to execute a lottery using a different lottery table depending on the state related to the AT, but the lottery probability does not differ depending on the set value (using the same lottery table). Execute a lottery) is preferable. Next, in step 3100, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the freeze lottery execution process described later, and proceeds to step 1550.

Here, the states related to AT in this example are listed and described in detail (also shown in the AT state transition diagram of FIG. 128).
(1) The "low probability state" is a state in which the AT has not been won (the right to shift to the "AT in progress state" has not been acquired), and the bonus combination has not been won. Since the "low probability state" is a so-called "normal state", it may also be referred to as a "normal state".
(2) The "normal BB internal medium game" is a state in which the BB role is won in the "low probability state", the BB role is not won, and the AT lottery is not won. , The BB role has been won in the "fall waiting state", and the BB role has not won a prize (the AT lottery is not won in the "fall waiting state").
(3) The "normal BB state" is when the symbol combination corresponding to the BB combination is stopped and displayed in a situation where the BB combination is won in the "low probability state" and the AT lottery is not won. When the BB combination is won in the "fall waiting state" and the symbol combination corresponding to the BB combination is stopped and displayed, or when the symbol combination corresponding to the BB combination is stopped and displayed in the "normal BB internal medium game". It is a state to be executed.
(4) The "high probability state" is a state in which the AT lottery has not been won (the right to shift to the "AT in progress state" has not been acquired), and the bonus role has not been won. , It is a state where it is easier to win the AT than the above-mentioned "low probability state".
(5) The "AT in progress state" is a state in which AT (push order navigation) is performed and the number of remaining AT games (AT counter value) is subtracted.
(6) The "specialization precursor state" is a state in which the right to shift to the "additional specialization state", which is a state in which the number of AT games is relatively easier to be added than the "AT in progress state", has been acquired. ..
(7) The "additional specialization state" is a state in which the number of AT games is relatively easier to be added than in the "AT in progress state".
(8) "Advantageous BB internal middle game" means that the BB role is won in the "high probability state", "AT in progress state", "specialization precursor state" or "additional specialization state", and the BB role is It is in a state where no prize has been won.
(9) "Standby BB internal middle game" is a state in which the BB role is won in the "low probability state", the AT lottery is won by the BB role, and the BB role is not won. ..
(10) The "advantageous BB state" is a combination of symbols corresponding to the BB role by winning the BB role in the "high probability state", "AT in progress state", "specialization precursor state" or "additional specialization state". The BB combination is won and is executed when the stop display is displayed, or when the symbol combination corresponding to the BB combination is stopped and displayed in the "advantageous BB internal medium game", or in the "low probability state". , The AT lottery was won by the BB combination, and the symbol combination corresponding to the BB combination was stopped and displayed, or the symbol combination corresponding to the BB combination was stopped and displayed in the "standby BB internal medium game". It is a state that is sometimes executed.
(11) The "fall waiting state" is the end of the "AT in progress state" (for example, when the AT counter value becomes 0, or the counter value for counting the number of games in the advantageous section is the upper limit value (1500 games). It is a state that may shift after (when it reaches), and the RT state is a state in which "RT1" is maintained. Even if the RT state at the end of the "AT in progress state" is "RT0" (RT with the highest stay ratio), the state shifts to the "low probability state" instead of the "fall waiting state". good.

(12) The "AT preparation state 1" is a state in which the transition is made on the condition that the advantageous BB state is completed, and the RT state is "RT3". In other words, when the BB ends in the situation where the AT lottery is won, the state shifts to "AT preparation state 1".
(13) The "AT preparation state 2" is a state in which the transition is made on the condition that the AT preparation state 1 is completed, and the RT state is "RT0".
(14) The "AT in progress state after falling" is a state in which the state can be changed when the stop operation is performed in the push order different (ignored) from the executed push order navigation in the "AT in progress state". .. Specifically, in the "AT in progress state", one of "Replay-D1" to "Replay-D3" was won, and the stop operation was performed in a push order different from the push order navigation, so "Replay 04". Is a gaming state that shifts by displaying a stop, and the RT state is "RT0" in which the winning probability of the re-gaming combination is relatively lower than that of "RT1". If any of "Re-game-E1" to "Re-game-E3" is won in the "AT in progress state after falling", the push order navigation is executed and the stop operation is performed according to the push order navigation. By stopping and displaying "Replay 06", it is possible to return to the "AT in progress state" again.
(15) The "specialized state after a fall" is a state in which a stop operation can be performed when the stop operation is performed in a different (ignored) push order from the executed push order navigation when the "AT in progress state" is in progress. .. Specifically, in the "AT in progress state", one of "Replay-F1" to "Replay-F3" was won, and the stop operation was performed in a push order different from the push order navigation, so "Replay 07". Is a gaming state that shifts by displaying a stop, and the RT state is "RT4", which has a winning probability of a re-gaming combination similar to that of "RT1". If any of "Re-game-E1" to "Re-game-E3" is won in the "specialized state after falling", the push order navigation is executed and the stop operation is performed according to the push order navigation. By performing this and displaying the stop display of "replay game 06", it is possible to return to the "AT in progress state" again.
(16) The "state after bell overflow" is "AT in progress state", "specialization precursor state" or "additional specialization state", "post-fall AT in progress state" or "post-fall specialization state". Occasionally, it is a state that can be transferred when the stop operation is performed in a push order different (ignored) from the executed push order navigation. Specifically, "Prize-A1" to "Prize" in "AT in progress state", "Specialization precursor state", "Additional specialization state", "AT in progress state after fall" or "Specialization state after fall" -A6 "is won, and because the stop operation is performed in a push order different from the push order navigation, any of" Win 08 "to" Win 11 "is a gaming state that shifts by stopping and displaying, and is in the RT state. Is a "non-RT" that has a winning probability of a replaying combination similar to that of "RT0" and "RT3". If any of "Re-game-D1" to "Re-game-D3" is won in the "state after bell overflow" and "non-RT", the push order navigation is executed and the push order navigation is executed. By performing a stop operation according to the procedure and displaying the stop display of "replay game 04", the process shifts to "RT0". In addition, if any of "re-game-E1" to "re-game-E3" is won when the "bell overflow state" and "RT0" are set, the push order navigation is executed and the push order is executed. By performing a stop operation according to the navigation and displaying the stop display of "replay game 06", it is possible to shift (return) to the "AT in progress state".

Next, in step 1550, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes a reel rotation start preparation process, which will be described later. Next, in step 1260, the CPUC100 of the main control board M starts rotating all reels. Next, in step 1261-1, the CPUC100 of the main control board M is requested to determine the stop position of the pull-in point creation request (rotating left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53, and the stop order is It is determined whether or not there is a request as appropriate depending on the stop position of other reels. In the case of Yes in step 1261-1, in step 1261-2, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not it is a “BB internal middle game”. Here, "BB internal medium game" is a general term for "normal BB internal medium game" and "advantageous BB internal medium game", and is in a state where the BB role is won and the BB has not won a prize. .. If Yes in step 1261-2, the process proceeds to step 1262. On the other hand, if No in step 1261-2, in step 1261-3, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the condition device related to the game is a push order bell (winning-A1 to winning-A6). judge. In the case of Yes in step 1261-3, in step 1261-4, the CPUC100 of the main control board M creates a pull-in point that is the maximum number of payouts (11 in this example), and proceeds to step 1263. If No in step 1261-3, the process proceeds to step 1262. Next, in step 1262, the CPUC100 of the main control board M creates a pull-in point and proceeds to step 1263. On the other hand, even if No in step 1261-1, the process proceeds to step 1263. In this way, in the "BB internal reeling game", in the game in which the push order bell was won, the stop buttons were not stopped in the correct push order of 11 payouts (for example, in the case of winning-A1). Even if the stop button is not stopped in the order of "left → middle → right" (when the reels are stopped in the order of pressing incorrect answers), 11 symbol combinations will be paid out by the reel stop control. It is configured to win a prize. Next, in step 1263, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes a reel stop acceptance / rejection check. Next, in step 1264, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not any of the stop buttons (left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, right stop button D43) has been operated. In the case of Yes in step 1264, in step 1265, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the stop position of the reel corresponding to the operated stop button (for example, the left reel M51 corresponds to the left stop button D41). , Step 1266. On the other hand, even if No in step 1264, the process proceeds to step 1266. Next, in step 1266, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the all reel stop check process. Next, in step 1267, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not all the reels (left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) have stopped. In the case of Yes in step 1267, in step 1268, the CPUC100 of the main control board M compares the symbol stop position data in the RAM with the internal winning combination stoptable position data. Next, in step 1269, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the combination of the displayed symbols is normal (abnormal if it does not match the winning combination determined by the internal lottery). Is determined to be). If Yes in step 1269, the process proceeds to step 1274. On the other hand, if No in step 1269, in step 1270, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets the display determination error display (for example, it is set in the register area). Next, in step 1300, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes an unrecoverable error process. On the other hand, if No in step 1267, the process proceeds to step 1261.

Next, in step 1274, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes a game medal payout process by winning a prize. Next, in step 1275, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not there is a prize for paying out the game medal {the game medal obtained by the prize exceeds the maximum number of credits (50 in this example). If so, the game medal will be paid out}. In the case of Yes in step 1275, in step 1276, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns on the hopper drive flag (the flag that is turned on when driving the hopper motor H80), and executes the payout of one game medal. .. Next, in step 1277, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is on (the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is on). Then, it is determined that one game medal is being paid out). If Yes in step 1277, the process proceeds to step 1286.

On the other hand, if No in step 1277, in step 1279, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the hopper was driven (after the timing of the processing in step 1276). .. In the case of Yes in step 1279, in step 1280, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns on the medal empty error flag (for example, the inside of the medal empty error flag area in the RAM area is updated with a value corresponding to on). Next, in step 1281, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the medal empty error display with the 7-segment LED. Next, in step 1282, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the medal empty error has been canceled (for example, whether or not the setting / reset button M30 has been pressed). In the case of Yes in step 1282, in step 1283, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns off the medal empty error flag (for example, updates the inside of the medal empty error flag area in the RAM area with a value corresponding to off) and steps. Move to 1286. On the other hand, if No in step 1282, the process proceeds to step 1281.

Next, in step 1286, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s are off (the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is turned on). When the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s are turned off, it is determined that the payout operation of one game medal in which the payout operation has been performed is completed). In the case of Yes in step 1286, in step 1288, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns off the hopper drive flag and proceeds to step 1290. If No in step 1279 or step 1286, the process proceeds to step 1277. Next, in step 1290, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the payout corresponding to the prize (the prize that became Yes in step 1275) is completed. In the case of Yes in step 1290, the process proceeds to step 3400. If No in step 1286, the process proceeds to step 1277, if No in step 1275, the process proceeds to step 3400, and if No in step 1290, the process proceeds to step 1276.

Next, in step 3400, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the remaining game number management process, which will be described later. Next, in step 1700, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the RT state transition control process described later. Next, in step 1750, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the AT-in-time state start control process, which will be described later. Next, in step 3500, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the game section transition control process described later. Next, in step 1293, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes a game end process (for example, clearing the number of bets, a game state transition process, etc.), and shifts to the next process (process of step 1202).

Next, FIG. 113 is a flowchart of the internal lottery execution process according to the subroutine of step 3600 of FIG. 112 in the third embodiment. First, in step 3602, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets an internal lottery table (a table used when executing an internal lottery in which a winning number, a set number for comparison with a acquired random number, etc. are stored). Then, the process proceeds to step 3604. Next, in step 3604, the CPUC100 of the main control board M acquires the winning number related to the set internal lottery table address. It should be noted that the winning / replay winning information can be generated from the winning number. In addition, if the bonus and the small winning combination are won in duplicate, or if the bonus and the replaying combination are won in duplicate, both the winning / replaying winning information and the bonus winning information are obtained from the winning number. Winning information can be generated. The specific generation process will be described later. Next, in step 3606, the CPUC100 of the main control board M acquires the number of repetitions related to the set internal lottery table address. Here, the number of repetitions is the number of consecutive winning numbers having the same payout group number and the same number of placements for comparison with the acquired random numbers, and is previously stored in the ROM of the main control board M. It is remembered. For example, the payout group number 2 includes nine winning numbers of winning numbers 4 to 12, and the number of consecutive winning numbers 4 to 6 which are push order replaying roles is the same. Since the number of consecutive winning numbers 7 to 12, which is the push order bell role, is the same, the number of repetitions related to the push order replay combination is 3, and the push order bell is used. The number of repetitions related to the combination is 6. The lottery table used when the winning numbers 4 to 6 which are the push order replaying roles and the lottery table used when the winning numbers 7 to 12 which are the pushing order bell roles are acquired are as a single lottery table. It is configured. Next, in step 3608, the CPUC100 of the main control board M acquires the payout group number related to the set internal lottery table address, and proceeds to step 3610.

Next, in step 3610, the CPUC100 of the main control board M acquires the set value data. Next, in step 3612, the CPUC100 of the main control board M acquires the designated address data. Next, in step 3614, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the internal lottery has been won (whether or not the acquired random number exists in the internal lottery table searched this time). In the case of Yes in step 3614, since it is determined that the internal lottery has been won, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1400) without executing the determination (lottery) for the subsequent internal lottery table address. On the other hand, if No in step 3614, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M updates the number of repetitions in step 3616. Next, in step 3618, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not there is a remaining number of repetitions. In the case of Yes in step 3618, the process proceeds to step 3610, and the processes of steps 3610 to 3618 are repeatedly executed until the remaining number of repetitions is exhausted or the internal lottery is won. If No in step 3618, the CPUC100 of the main control board M updates the internal lottery table address (updates to the address related to the next payout group number) in step 3620, and proceeds to step 3604 to move to step 3604. The subsequent processing is executed. The specific processing of the internal lottery will be described later.

Next, FIGS. 114 to 117 are flowcharts of the AT state transition control process according to the subroutine of step 1400 of FIG. 112 in the third embodiment. First, in step 1402, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state related to the AT is the state related to the AT capable of executing the AT lottery. In the third embodiment, the states relating to the AT capable of executing the AT lottery are the "low probability state" and the "high probability state". If the BB is won in the "high probability state", the game shifts to the "advantageous BB internal medium game", and then the BB combination wins the prize to shift to the "advantageous BB state" and the executed BB ends. As a result, the state shifts to the "AT in progress state", and the AT counter is set to 50 times, which is the initial value of the number of AT games. In addition, at 1/5 of the case where the BB is won in the "low probability state", the game shifts to the "standby BB internal medium game", and then the BB role wins a prize, thereby shifting to the "advantageous BB state". When the executed BB ends, the state shifts to the "AT in progress state", and the AT counter is set to 50 times, which is the initial value of the number of AT games. In addition, in the state where the BB is won in the "normal game state" and the AT lottery is also won, and the BB is not aligned inside, the game section may be set as the "advantageous section" or the "waiting section". May be. In the case of Yes in step 1402, in step 3000, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the AT lottery execution process described later, and proceeds to step 1408. On the other hand, even if No in step 1402, the process proceeds to step 1408. In the third embodiment, when the state related to AT is different, the AT winning rate related to the AT lottery (whether it is easy to win the AT lottery or difficult to win) is configured to be different, but the state related to AT is different. If they are the same, the AT winning rate related to the AT lottery is the same even if the set value is different (if the BB is won in the "high probability state", it will always be AT regardless of the set value. Winning = then shifts to "AT in progress").

Next, in step 1408, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state related to AT is a “low probability state”. In the case of Yes in step 1408, in step 1410, the CPUC100 of the main control board M is a small state device in which the condition device related to the game can shift from the “low probability state” to the “high probability state” by winning. It is a role, and in this example, it is determined whether or not it is a cherry). In the case of Yes in step 1410, in step 1412, the CPUC100 of the main control board M wins with a predetermined probability (in this example, it is 1/2, and if it does not differ depending on the set value, there is no problem even if it is changed). Execute a high-probability state transition lottery. Next, in step 1414, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the executed high-probability state transition lottery has been won. In the case of Yes in step 1414, in step 1416, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the state related to the AT after the next game to the “high probability state”, and proceeds to step 1802.

If No in step 1408, in step 1418, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state related to AT is a “high probability state”. In the case of Yes in step 1418, in step 1420, the CPUC100 of the main control board M has a role in which the condition device related to the game can shift from a “high probability state” to a “low probability state” by winning. In this example, it is determined whether or not the game is a replay-A). In the case of Yes in step 1420, in step 1422, the CPUC100 of the main control board M wins with a predetermined probability (in this example, it is 1/5, and if it does not differ depending on the set value, there is no problem even if it is changed). Execute a low-probability state transition lottery. Next, in step 1424, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the executed low probability state transition lottery has been won. In the case of Yes in step 1424, in step 1426, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the low probability transition condition is satisfied. Here, in the third embodiment, when the state related to AT is "high probability state", the game section is "advantageous section", and when the game section is "advantageous section", it is pushed. It is configured so that the "advantageous section" does not end unless the forward navigation is executed once or more, or the predetermined number of games (1500 games in this example) "advantageous section" continues. , Even if you win the low-probability state transition lottery, if the low-probability transition condition is not satisfied because the push order navigation is not executed more than once, the "high-probability state" is configured so that it does not end. Yes). If the BB combination is won during the "advantageous section" and the BB is executed, the "advantageous section" can be performed at any timing even if the push order navigation has not been executed even once in the "advantageous section". It may be configured to be terminated. In the case of Yes in step 1426, in step 1428, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the state related to the AT after the next game to the "low probability state", and proceeds to step 1430. In addition, even if No in step 1410, step 1414, step 1418, step 1420, step 1424 or step 1426, the process proceeds to step 1802. It should be noted that such a lottery method is only an example. For example, the low-probability state transition lottery is not executed for 10 games after the transition to the "high-probability state" (the stay in the "high-probability state" is guaranteed. ), The lottery for shifting from the "high probability state" to the "low probability state" may be executed with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/20) in each game after the lapse of the 10 games. It should be noted that the AT lottery combination (low probability AT lottery combination, high probability AT lottery combination) and the state promotion combination have the same winning probability in all the set values.

Next, in step 1802 shown in FIG. 115, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state related to the AT is an advantageous BB state.

In the case of Yes in step 1802, in step 1804, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the BB end condition is satisfied in the game. In the case of Yes in step 1804, in step 1806, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the state related to AT after the next game to the AT preparation state 1, and ends this subroutine.

In the case of No in step 1802 or No in step 1804, in step 1808, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state related to AT is the AT preparation state 1. In the case of Yes in step 1808, in step 1810, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the condition device related to the game is the replay-D1 to D3. In the case of Yes in step 1810, in step 1812, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the selection candidate of the state related to the AT after the next game based on the state related to the current AT and the winning condition device. End this subroutine.

The AT preparation state 2 is included in the selection candidate of the state related to the AT after the next game of the process of step 1812. As shown in FIG. 118, when the AT-related state of the game is the AT preparation state 1, there are two selection candidates, the AT preparation state 1 and the AT preparation state 2. When "re-game 01", "re-game 02", and "re-game 03" are stopped and displayed, AT preparation state 1 is selected as the state related to AT after the next game, and "re-game 04" is stopped. If it is displayed, the AT preparation state 2 is selected as the state related to the AT after the next game.

In the case of No in step 1808 or No in step 1810 described above, in step 1814, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state related to AT is the AT preparation state 2. In the case of Yes in step 1814, in step 1816, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the condition device related to the game is the replay-E1 to E3. In the case of Yes in step 1816, in step 1818, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the selection candidate of the state related to the AT after the next game based on the state related to the current AT and the winning condition device. End this subroutine.

The AT-related state selection candidate for the AT after the next game of the process of step 1818 includes the AT in-progress state. As shown in FIG. 118, when the AT-related state of the game is the AT preparation state 2, there are two selection candidates, the AT preparation state 2 and the AT in progress state. When "re-game 01", "re-game 02", and "re-game 03" are stopped and displayed, AT preparation state 2 is selected as the state related to AT after the next game, and "re-game 06" is stopped. If it is displayed, the AT in-progress state is selected as the state related to AT in the next game and thereafter.

In the case of No in step 1814 or No in step 1816 described above, in step 1820, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state related to AT is the AT state. In the case of Yes in step 1820, in step 1822, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the counter value of the AT counter M60 is equal to or higher than a predetermined value (11 in this example). Here, in the third embodiment, when the state related to AT is "AT in progress state", the AT counter value is 11 or more, in other words, when the number of remaining AT games is 11 games or more, the watermelon When the right to shift to the "additional specialization state" is acquired with a 1/2 chance of winning B and the transition to the "specialization precursor state" is possible, while the state related to AT is the "AT in progress state". In the case where the AT counter value is 10 or less, in other words, the number of remaining AT games is 10 games or less, a lottery (special) to acquire the right to shift to the "additional specialization state" even if the watermelon B is won. It is configured not to shift to the "specialization precursor state" and the "additional specialization state" without executing the conversion state transition lottery). The lottery is not limited to this, and even if the AT counter value is 10 or less, a lottery to win the watermelon B and acquire the right to shift to the "additional specialization state" (also known as the specialization state transition lottery). It may be configured to be able to execute (sometimes referred to as), and in the situation where the AT counter value is 10 or less, the watermelon B is elected and the right to shift to the "additional specialization state" is given. If the lottery to be won is won, it may be configured so that the next game that wins the lottery can be (shifted to) a "specialized precursor state" or an "additional specialized state", or the AT counter value. May be configured to be able to (shift to) a "specialization precursor state" or an "additional specialization state" when becomes a predetermined value (for example, 1 or 0), or the game won in the lottery. After the execution of a predetermined number of games, it may be configured to be (or shift to) a "specialization precursor state" or an "additional specialization state". In addition, when shifting to the "additional specialization state", it is not always necessary to go through the "specialization precursor state". You may. In the case of Yes in step 1822, in step 1824, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes a lottery in which the condition device related to the game acquires the transfer right to the specialization transition role (“additional specialization state”). It is a small role to be obtained, and in this example, it is determined whether or not it is a watermelon B). In the case of Yes in step 1824, in step 1826, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes a special state transition lottery that is won with a predetermined probability (1/2 in this example). Next, in step 1828, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the executed specialization state transition lottery has been won. In the case of Yes in step 1828, in step 1830, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the state related to the AT after the next game as the “specialization precursor state”.

After the processing of step 1830, if No in step 1820, step 1822, step 1824 or step 1828, the process proceeds to step 1832. In step 1832, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state related to the AT is a specialization precursor state. In the case of Yes in step 1832, in step 1834, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the condition device related to the game is the replay-F1 to F3. In the case of Yes in step 1834, in step 1836, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the selection candidate of the state related to the AT after the next game based on the state related to the current AT and the winning condition device. End this subroutine.

The selection candidate of the state related to the AT after the next game of the process of step 1836 includes the additional special state. As shown in FIG. 118, when the state related to the AT of the game is the specialization precursor state, there are two selection candidates, the specialization precursor state and the additional specialization state. When "re-game 01", "re-game 02", and "re-game 03" are stopped and displayed, the special omen state is selected as the state related to AT after the next game, and "re-game 07" is stopped. If it is displayed, the additional specialized state is selected as the state related to AT after the next game.

In the case of No in step 1832 or No in step 1834 described above, in step 1840, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state related to AT is the AT state. In the case of Yes in step 1840, in step 1842, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the condition device related to the game is "replay-F1" to "replay-F3". In the case of Yes in step 1842, in step 1844, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the selection candidate of the state related to the AT after the next game based on the state related to the current AT and the winning condition device. End this subroutine.

The post-fall specialization state is included in the selection candidates of the state related to the AT after the next game of the process of step 1844. As shown in FIG. 118, when the AT-related state of the game is the AT-during state, there are two selection candidates, the AT-during state and the post-fall specialized state. When "re-game 01", "re-game 02", and "re-game 03" are stopped and displayed, the AT-during state is selected as the state related to AT after the next game, and "re-game 07" is stopped and displayed. If so, the post-fall specialized state is selected as the state related to AT after the next game.

If No in step 1842 described above, in step 1846, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the condition device related to the game is "replay-D1" to "replay-D3". do. In the case of Yes in step 1846, in step 1848, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the selection candidate of the state related to the AT after the next game based on the state related to the current AT and the winning condition device. End this subroutine.

The candidate for selecting the state related to AT after the next game of the process of step 1848 includes the state during AT after the fall. As shown in FIG. 118, when the AT state of the game is the AT state, there are two selection candidates, the AT state and the AT state after the fall. When "re-game 01", "re-game 02", and "re-game 03" are stopped and displayed, the AT-during state is selected as the state related to AT after the next game, and "re-game 04" is stopped and displayed. If this is the case, the AT in progress state after the fall is selected as the state related to the AT after the next game.

If No in step 1840 described above, in step 1850, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state related to AT is an additional specialized state or a specialized precursor state. In the case of Yes in step 1850, in the case of No in step 1846, in step 1852, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the condition devices related to the game are "winning-A1" to "winning-A6". Is determined. In the case of Yes in step 1852, in step 1854, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the selection candidate of the state related to the AT after the next game based on the state related to the current AT and the winning condition device. End this subroutine.

The selection candidate of the state related to the AT after the next game of the process of step 1854 includes the state after the bell overflows. As shown in FIG. 118, when the AT-related state of the game is the AT-during state, there are two selection candidates, the AT-during state and the bell-filled state. When "Winning 01" to "Winning 03" are stopped and displayed, the AT in progress state is selected as the state related to AT after the next game, and when "Winning 08" to "Winning 11" are stopped and displayed. Is selected as the state related to AT after the next game after the bell overflows. Further, when the state related to the AT of the game is the addition specialization state, there are two selection candidates, the addition specialization state and the bell overflowing state. When "Prize 01" to "Prize 03" are stopped and displayed, the additional specialized state is selected as the state related to AT after the next game, and "Prize 08" to "Prize 11" are stopped and displayed. Is selected as the state after the bell overflows as the state related to AT after the next game. Further, when the state related to the AT of the game is the specialization precursor state, there are two selection candidates, the specialization precursor state and the bell overflowing state. When "Prize 01" to "Prize 03" are stopped and displayed, the special omen state is selected as the state related to AT after the next game, and "Prize 08" to "Prize 11" are stopped and displayed. Is selected as the state after the bell overflows as the state related to AT after the next game.

In the case of No in step 1850, in the case of No in step 1852, in step 1856, whether the CPUC100 of the main control board M is in the post-fall specialized state or the post-fall AT state. To judge. If No in step 1856, in step 1862, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state related to the AT is the state after the bell overflows. In the case of Yes in step 1862, in step 1864, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current RT state is RT0.

In the case of Yes in step 1856 and Yes in step 1864, in step 1858, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the condition device related to the game is the replay-E1 to E3. In the case of Yes in step 1858, in step 1860, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the selection candidate of the state related to the AT after the next game based on the state related to the current AT and the winning condition device. End this subroutine.

The AT-related state selection candidate for the AT after the next game of the process of step 1860 includes the AT in-progress state. As shown in FIG. 118, when the AT-related state of the game is the post-fall specialized state, there are two selection candidates, the post-fall specialized state and the AT-during state. When "re-game 01", "re-game 02", and "re-game 03" are stopped and displayed, the special state after the fall is selected as the state related to AT after the next game, and "re-game 06" is displayed. When the stop display is displayed, the AT in progress state is selected as the state related to the AT after the next game.

When the AT-related state of the game is the AT-during state after the fall, there are two selection candidates, the AT-during state after the fall and the AT-during state. When "re-game 01", "re-game 02", and "re-game 03" are stopped and displayed, the state during AT after the fall is selected as the state related to AT after the next game, and "re-game 06" is displayed. When the stop display is displayed, the AT in progress state is selected as the state related to the AT after the next game.

Further, when the AT state of the game is the post-bell overflow state and the RT state is RT0 (hereinafter referred to as the post-bell overflow state (RT0)), the post-bell overflow state (hereinafter referred to as the post-bell overflow state (RT0)) is selected. There are two states, RT0) and AT. When "re-game 01", "re-game 02", and "re-game 03" are stopped and displayed, the state after bell overflow (RT0) is selected as the state related to AT after the next game, and "re-game" is selected. When "06" is stopped and displayed, the AT in progress state is selected as the state related to the AT after the next game.

In the case of No in step 1858, No in step 1862, No in step 1864, in step 1870, the CPUC100 of the main control board M satisfies the transition condition to the fall waiting state in the game. Determine if it has been done. Here, when the current state related to AT is the AT in progress state and the AT counter value becomes 0 newly in the game (the number of remaining AT games is exhausted), the transition condition to the fall waiting state is set. Satisfy. In the case of Yes in step 1870, in step 1872, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the state related to the AT after the next game to the fall waiting state.

After step 1872, or if No in step 1870, in step 1440, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the state related to the AT after the next game has been determined. In the case of Yes in step 1440, in step 1442, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the transition condition of the state related to AT is satisfied (for example, the number of precursor games in the “specialized precursor state”). Satisfied when 10 games are digested). In the case of Yes in step 1442, in step 1444, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the state related to the AT after the next game, and ends this subroutine. If No in step 1440 and No in step 1442, the subroutine is immediately terminated.

In the third embodiment, the AT winning rate is configured to differ depending on the lottery state, and if the BB combination is won in the "low probability state", the AT lottery is won at 1/5 (winning). If you do, then you will move to the "AT in progress state") On the other hand, if you win the BB role in the "high probability state", you will always win the AT transition lottery (then you will move to the "AT in progress state"). Although configured, the condition device A, which is a predetermined condition device, is used as an AT lottery, and the states relating to the AT, which is an "advantageous section", are "high probability state A" and "high probability state B". If the condition device A is won in the "high probability state A", the AT transition lottery is won at 1/10, and the condition device A is won in the "high probability state B". In that case, it may be configured to win the AT transition lottery at 1/2. If the AT transition lottery is won, the AT transition state is changed to the "AT preparation state", which is the preparation state until the transition to the "AT in progress state", and then a predetermined end condition (for example, "AT preparation"). It may be configured to shift to the "AT in progress state" when 10 games have passed since the shift to the "state".

Next, FIG. 119 is a flowchart of the AT lottery execution process according to the subroutine of step 3000 in FIG. 114 in the third embodiment. First, in step 3002, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the condition device related to the game is an AT lottery combination (BB combination in this example). It should be noted that a condition device in which a small combination and a BB combination overlap is also included. In the case of Yes in step 3002, in step 3004, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current gaming state is a high probability state. In the case of Yes in step 3004, in step 3006, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the state related to the AT after the next game to the advantageous BB internal middle game, and shifts to the next process (process of step 1408). Here, when the BB that triggered the transition ends, the initial value (50 in this example) is set in the AT counter and the state shifts to the AT in progress state. On the other hand, if No in step 3004, in step 3008, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes an AT lottery to win with a predetermined probability (1/5 in this example). Next, in step 3010, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the AT lottery has been won. In the case of Yes in step 3010, in step 3012, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the state related to the AT after the next game to the standby BB internal middle game, and shifts to the next process (process of step 1408). Here, when the BB that triggered the transition ends, the initial value (50 in this example) is set in the AT counter and the state shifts to the AT in progress state. On the other hand, if No in step 3010, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the state related to the AT after the next game to the normal BB internal middle game, and shifts to the next process (process of step 1408). Even if No in step 3002, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1408).

The AT in-progress state is started after the AT preparation state 2 state ends and the initial value (50) is set in the AT counter. In addition, AT preparation state 1 and AT preparation state 2 are added, specialization state, specialization precursor state, advantageous BB internal game, advantageous BB state, post-fall AT mid-state, post-fall specialization state, and bell overflow state. Then the AT counter value is not subtracted (see FIG. 124).

Next, FIG. 120 is a flowchart of the condition device number management process according to the subroutine of step 1450 of FIG. 112 in the third embodiment. First, in step 1451, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current gaming section is an “advantageous section”. In the case of Yes in step 1451, in step 1452, the CPUC100 of the main control board M is a command related to winning / replay winning information (a command on the sub control board S side, for example, winning / replay winning related to the game). Set the command related to information). Next, in step 1454, in the CPUC100 of the main control board M, the condition device related to the game is a combination with a push order (a condition device in which the winning combination differs depending on the push order, for example, "winning-A1" or the like). It is determined whether or not it is. In the case of Yes in step 1454, in step 1458, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines an instruction number (also referred to as a push order number) in the game based on the winning / replay winning information related to the game, and gives an instruction. It is stored in the RAM address for storing the number (an address different from the RAM address for displaying the push order navigation). The instruction number is information related to the pressing order, and in this example, the main control board M is determined and transmitted to the sub control board S (details will be described later). Further, the sub-control board S can display the push order navigation on the effect display device S40 by receiving the instruction number. It should be noted that the instruction number is determined even when the push order navigation is not executed (although not shown, the instruction number becomes the initial value based on clearing the instruction number). When the push order guessing game is executed, a predetermined instruction number (for example, AX) dedicated to the push order guessing game may be determined. Next, in step 1460, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the push order navigation display on the push order display device D270 based on the instruction number related to the game. Next, in step 1466, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets a command (command to the sub side) related to the instruction number determined in step 1458 (for example, sets it in the register area), and proceeds to step 1472. .. In this example, displaying the stop order of the reels, which is the most profitable for the player, on the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 is referred to as displaying the push order navigation, the push order navigation display, and the like. ing. In the third embodiment, the push order navigation is displayed based on the instruction number. For example, the push order of "left → middle → right" is displayed as "= 1" on the push order display device D270. It is configured to display "= 1" in both the push order bell and the push order replay. In addition, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the case of displaying the push order navigation of "left → middle → right" on the push order display device D270 in the game related to the push order bell, and in the game related to the push order replay game, " The display mode may be different from the case where the push order navigation of "left → middle → right" is displayed on the push order display device D270. That is, the number of types of the push order navigation display mode displayed on the push order display device D270 may be the same as the number of types of winning / replay winning information.

Further, in the case of No in step 1451, in other words, when the game section is a "normal section" or "standby section", or in the case of No in step 1454, in step 1468, the CPUC100 of the main control board M is the game. Mask processing is executed for the winning / replay winning information of, and the masked information is stored in the predetermined address of the RAM. Here, when the winning / replay winning information related to the game is transmitted to the sub-control board S side, if the winning / replay winning information is recognized due to an illegal act, it is considered to be a high profit related to the game. The push order (reel stop order) will be recognized. Therefore, in this example, the sub-control board S is executed after performing mask processing {processing for concealing winning / replay winning information (especially information related to the push order)} for the winning / replay winning information related to the game. By configuring it to send to, it is configured so that the highly profitable push order cannot be recognized. As the mask processing method in the third embodiment, a plurality of winning / replay winning information (winning / replay winning information having a similar role is suitable, for example, the RT state shifts depending on the pushing order. A plurality of winning / replay winning information that can be stopped and displayed as a symbol combination that serves as a replaying role is set as one production group number (for example, winning / replay winning information 4 to 6 are designated as production group 4). The effect group number is configured to be transmitted to the sub-control board S side. The method of mask processing is not limited to this, and for example, after the provided winning / replay winning information (0 to 18 in this example), a new winning / replay after mask processing is performed. It may be configured to provide winning information. Even in such a case, a plurality of winning / replay winning information among the existing winning / replay winning information such as the production group number can be used as one winning / replay winning information for winning / replaying after mask processing. It is desirable to configure the game winning information to be provided (for example, the winning / re-gaming winning information 4 to 6 is the winning / re-gaming winning information 19 (newly provided winning) which is the winning / re-gaming winning information after mask processing.・ Re-game winning information), etc.). If it is determined that the game is to notify the operation information (push order navigation) based on the state related to AT on the main control board M, the winning / re-game winning information is transmitted to the sub control board S side. In a game that does not notify the operation information, the effect group number may be transmitted to the sub control board S side. When configured in this way, the command related to the instruction number may be transmitted to the sub-control board S side, or may be configured not to be transmitted.

Next, in step 1470, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets a command (command to the sub-control board S side) related to the effect group number after the mask processing is executed (for example, set in the register area). Then, the process proceeds to step 1472. Next, in step 1472, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets a command (command to the sub control board S side) related to the bonus winning information (whether or not the bonus is won can be recognized by the sub side). (For example, it is set in the register area), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1259). In the third embodiment, the winning / replay winning information and the bonus winning information are derived from the winning number, but the derivation method will be described later. In addition, as shown in the lower part of the figure, as an example of the display of the push order navigation, in the case of "AT in progress", (1) when the fall re-game combination is included → the fall re-game combination is not stopped and displayed. The order is navigating, (2) in the case of bells (1 piece combination / 11 piece combination) → the push order with the largest number of payouts is navigating, and so on. As described above, in the third embodiment, when the game section is an "advantageous section", the winning / re-game winning information (type of winning combination and the most advantageous pushing order for the player) is sent to the sub-control board S side. While it is configured to be able to transmit (a number that can specify) and an instruction number (a number that can specify the most advantageous push order for the player), when the game section is a "normal section", the sub-control board It is configured so that the effect group number (a number that can identify only the outline of the winning combination) can be transmitted to the S side. That is, in the "advantageous section", the winning / re-gaming winning information related to the game, including the winning / re-gaming winning information in which the result of the game and the profit of the player differ depending on the pushing order, is used as it is on the sub-control board S side. On the other hand, in a game section that is not an "advantageous section", the winning / replay winning information related to the game is not transmitted, and the result of the game and the profit of the player differ depending on the pushing order. In the case of winning information, it is configured to transmit the effect group number concealing the information related to the push order to the sub-control board S side.

When the game section is not an "advantageous section" ("normal section" or "standby section"), the winning / re-game winning information determined by the main control board M is transmitted to the sub-control board S. The mask processing is executed to determine the effect group number, and the effect group number is transmitted to the sub-control board S. In addition, the production group number is the winning / replay winning information related to the winning combination (for example, the replaying role including the falling replaying role, the push order bell, etc.) having the same role. Are grouped and numbers are assigned. It is configured to execute mask processing {processing to keep the winning / replay winning information (especially information related to the push order) confidential} on the winning / replay winning information related to the game, and then send it to the sub-control board S. This prevents a situation in which the information related to the winning / replay winning information is recognized due to an illegal act, and the pushing order (reel stop order) that is highly profitable related to the game is recognized.

Next, FIG. 121 is a flowchart of the game number addition execution process according to the subroutine of step 1500 in FIG. 112 in the third embodiment. First, in step 1502, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the state related to AT is "AT in progress state", "specialization precursor state", or "additional specialization state". It should be noted that the number of AT games is not added in the AT after the fall state, the specialization state after the fall, and the bell overflow state. In the case of Yes in step 1502, in step 1504, the CPUC100 of the main control board M has the payout group number related to the game as an additional AT game (winning number that can add the remaining AT game number in the "AT in progress state"). In this example, whether or not it is a payout group number (1, 3 in this example) related to "replay-B", "replay-C", and "winning-D"). To judge. If Yes in step 1504, the process proceeds to step 1514. Further, in the case of No in step 1502, in other words, when the state related to AT is the advantageous BB state, in step 1512, the CPUC100 of the main control board M has the payout group number related to the game added to the BB ("" It is a winning number that can add the number of remaining AT games in the "advantageous BB state", and in this example, it is the payout group number (5, 6 in this example) related to "winning-H", "winning-I"). Determine if it exists. If Yes in step 1512, the process proceeds to step 1514, and if No in step 1512, the process proceeds to step 1518. Further, in the case of No in step 1504, in step 1506, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the state related to the AT is the "additional specialization state". In the case of Yes in step 1506, in step 1508, the CPUC100 of the main control board M can add the remaining AT game number in the specialized middle addition role (in the "additional specialization state"), the payout group number related to the game can be added. In the "AT in progress state", it is a winning number that does not add the number of remaining AT games. In this example, "replay-A", "replay-D1" to "replay-D3", "winning-A1" to It is determined whether or not the payout group number (2, 13 in this example) is related to (which is "winning-A6"). If Yes in step 1508, the process proceeds to step 1514. If No in step 1506 or step 1508, the process proceeds to step 1518.

Next, in step 1514, the CPUC100 of the main control board M refers to the winning game number lottery table, and determines the number of AT added games based on the payout group number related to the game (for example, in the margin). In the lottery table shown, it is determined whether or not the latched random number value falls within the range). It should be noted that determining the number of AT-added games is also referred to as executing an AT-added lottery. Next, in step 1516, the CPUC100 of the main control board M adds the determined number of AT additional games to the counter value of the AT counter M60, and sets the AT counter value after the addition to the AT counter M60. Next, in step 1517, the CPUC100 of the main control board M receives a command related to the determined number of AT additional games (a command to the sub-control board S side, and the sub-control board S receives the command). It is possible to recognize whether or not the number of AT games has been added and how many games have been added), and the process proceeds to step 1518. In addition, the lottery related to AT (AT lottery, AT addition lottery) can be executed even in the case of the payout group numbers 7 to 11, which are the payout group numbers related to the winning numbers (winning numbers 19 to 27) including the bonus. ..

Here, the lottery table shown in the margin of the figure is an example of a lottery table for the number of additional games at the time of winning, and in the third embodiment, a part of the state related to the AT in which the push order navigation is executed (in this example,). If the additional winning combination is won in "AT in progress state", "specialization precursor state", "additional specialization state", "advantageous BB state"), it is based on the payout group number related to the game. As for the number of AT additional games, "0" to "300" are determined by lottery, and the determined value is added to the counter value of the AT counter M60. If "0" is determined, the number of remaining AT games will not increase (if "0" is determined, it may be referred to as non-winning in the AT addition lottery).

In addition, the average value (expected value) of the number of AT additional games when the additional combination is won at the time of winning is a value as shown in the figure, and as a specific calculation method, the winning combination is watermelon A. In the case, {number of placements (600) x number of AT addition games (0) + number of placements (100) x number of AT addition games (10) + number of placements (300) x number of AT addition games (30) + number of placements ( 24) × number of AT additional games (100)} / total number of placements (1024) = 12.1 (game).

Next, if the winning combination is re-game-B or re-game-C, {number of placements (500) x number of AT additional games (0) + number of placements (200) x number of AT additional games (50) + Calculated as the number of units (300) x number of AT additional games (100) + number of units (24) x number of AT additional games (300)} / total number of units (1024) = 46.1 (game). be able to.

Next, if the winning combination is "re-game-A" or "re-game-D1" to "re-game-D3", "winning-A1" to "winning-A6", {number (300) × Number of AT additional games (10) + Number of placements (600) × Number of AT additional games (30) + Number of placements (124) × Number of AT additional games (50)} / Total number of placements (1024) = 26.61 ( Game), can be calculated as follows. If the winning combination is "re-game-A" or "re-game-D1" to "re-game-D3", or "winning-A1" to "winning-A6", the number of AT games will be added. It is only when the state related to AT is "additional specialization state".

Next, if the winning combination is a BB medium-weak rare role, {number of placements (800) x number of AT additional games (0) + number of placements (100) x number of AT addition games (10) + number of placements (100) ) × Number of AT additional games (30) + Number of placements (24) × Number of AT additional games (100)} / Total number of placements (1024) = 6.3 (game).

Next, if the winning combination is a BB medium-strong rare role, {number of placements (300) x number of AT additional games (0) + number of placements (300) x number of AT addition games (30) + number of placements (400) ) × Number of AT additional games (50) + Number of placements (24) × Number of AT additional games (300)} / Total number of placements (1024) = 35.4 (game).

In the third embodiment, when the AT addition lottery is executed, the average value of the AT addition games may differ depending on the type of winning combination, but the AT addition games number may differ depending on the set value. The average values of are configured so that they do not differ. Here, when the AT addition lottery is configured to be executed based on the winning number, for example, when the winning number 7 and the winning number 8 execute the same processing as the AT addition lottery, the winning number is 7. It is necessary to execute the process of determining whether or not the number is 8, but as in the third embodiment, the winning number 7 and the winning number are configured to execute the AT addition lottery based on the payout group number. When the same processing as the AT addition lottery is executed in 8 and 8, the processing related to any AT addition lottery of the winning number 7 and the winning number 8 is also executed only by determining whether the payout group number is 2. Will be able to.

Returning to the explanation of the flowchart, next, in step 1518, the CPUC100 of the main control board M may determine by the winning number (or the winning / replay winning information, the payout group number, etc.) related to the game. ) Is a winning number for re-game-B (reverse-push white 7 replay, which is a re-game in which White Seven can be aligned with the invalid line by stopping by reverse-push). In the case of Yes in step 1518, in step 1520, whether or not the CPUC100 of the main control board M has added the number of AT games by the replay-B, in other words, the number of AT games added by winning the replay-B. It is determined whether or not it was 0. In the case of Yes in step 1520, in step 1522, the CPUC100 of the main control board M is an invalid line by the reverse push instruction command (command to the sub control board S side and reverse push (“right → middle → left”). Will be executed to instruct to align the white sevens), and the process proceeds to step 1526. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1520, in step 1524, the CPUC100 of the main control board M is a command to avoid the reverse push (a command to the sub control board S side, and is other than the reverse push (“right → middle → left”). The push order is instructed, and the effect of not aligning the white sevens on the invalid line) is set, and the process proceeds to step 1526. Even if No in step 1518, the process proceeds to step 1526. Next, in step 1526, the CPUC100 of the main control board M may determine the winning number (or the winning / replay winning information, the payout group number, etc.) related to the game as the replay-C (or the payout group number, etc.). It is determined whether or not it is a forward push black 7 replay, which is a replay in which the black seven can be aligned with the invalid line by stopping by the forward push. In the case of Yes in step 1526, in step 1528, whether or not the CPUC100 of the main control board M has added the number of AT games by the replay-C, in other words, the number of AT games added by winning the replay-C. It is determined whether or not it was 0. In the case of Yes in step 1528, in step 1530, the CPUC100 of the main control board M is an invalid line by a forward push instruction command (a command to the sub control board S side and forward push (“left → middle → right”). (The effect of instructing the black seven to be aligned) is set in, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 3100). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1528, in step 1532, the CPUC100 of the main control board M is a command to avoid the forward push (a command to the sub control board S side, and is a command other than the forward push (“left → middle → right”). The push order is instructed, and the effect of not aligning the black sevens on the invalid line is set), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 3100). Even if No in step 1526, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 3100). In the third embodiment, a reverse push instruction command, a reverse push avoidance command, a forward push instruction command, and a forward push avoidance command are transmitted to the sub control board S, and the sub control board S receives these commands. It is configured so that the sub-control board S side can execute the effect related to the push order navigation, but it is not limited to this, and when the AT additional lottery is won, the fact that the AT additional lottery is won and the number of AT additional games are added. When the command (for example, the command related to the number of AT additional games related to the process of step 1517) is transmitted to the sub control board S side and the sub control board S side receives the command, the push order is performed on the sub control board S side. It may be configured to determine the execution timing and the effect mode of the effect related to the navigation. As an example, in a game in which the re-game-B is won and the sub-control board S side receives the command (a game in which the number of AT games is added), a production mode in which a reverse push is instructed is selected. It may be configured to be executed, or in the game in which the command is received on the sub-control board S side, the effect of instructing the reverse push is not executed, and a predetermined condition thereafter (for example, a specific replay combination (for example, replay)) is performed. In a game in which (game-B or C) is satisfied), it may be configured to execute an effect of instructing a push order in which 7 lines can be aligned on an invalid line. Alternatively, in the game in which the re-game-B is won and the command is received on the sub-control board S side (a game in which the number of AT games is added), the effect of instructing the reverse push is not executed, and then (For example, after a predetermined number of games (a continuous effect may be executed at the same time, in that case, the final game of the continuous effect) is satisfied, the number of AT games is added to the effect (displayed by the effect display device S40). It is an effect that the display related to the number of remaining AT games is increased, and for example, "+ 30G" may be displayed). In this example, the effect display device S40 also displays the number of remaining AT games. The display is configured to be able to be displayed, and the display and the number of remaining AT games stored on the main control board side may be the same or different. In a game in which B is a winning game and the command is received on the sub-control board S side (a game in which the number of AT games is added), the effect of instructing the reverse push is not executed, and the subsequent predetermined conditions are satisfied. As an example of executing the effect of adding the number of AT games in the game that has been played, when a special effect (for example, a predetermined continuous effect) that encourages the winning of the bonus is being executed on the sub-control board S side (inside the bonus). Then, since the winning probability of re-game-B is low (including 0%), the player will recognize that the bonus has not been won if the push order in which 7 matches are possible is notified). There is a case where the board S side is executing a special effect. In addition, the main control board M side wins the AT addition lottery, and the sub control board S side determines that the number of remaining AT games has been added. The information includes (1) the number of AT remaining games, which is transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side after the lottery with the AT added. The difference between the information about the game and the information about the number of remaining AT games transmitted this time is calculated, and the number of AT additional games won in the AT additional lottery is grasped. (2) Obtained as a result of the AT additional game on the main control board M side. A command regarding the number of AT additional games has been transmitted to the sub-control board S side. If the AT additional lottery is not won, a command relating to the fact that the AT additional lottery is not won is sent to the sub-control board S side. When the sub-control board S side receives the command, the sub-control board S side may be configured to determine the production mode of the effect related to the push order navigation. As an example, the replay-B may be used. It ’s a winning game. Then, in the game in which the command is received on the sub-control board S side (the game in which the number of AT games is not added), the middle press (the middle stop button is operated as the first stop, and the push order avoids 7 sets). It may be configured to select and execute the effect mode instructing. In addition, as the information that the sub control board S side judges that the AT addition lottery was executed on the main control board M side, but the AT remaining game number was not added, (1) information on the AT remaining game number is used. After the AT addition lottery, transmission is performed from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side. After that, on the sub-control board S side, the difference between the information on the number of AT remaining games transmitted last time and the information on the number of AT remaining games transmitted this time is calculated, and the number of AT added games won in the AT added lottery is grasped. (If the value obtained by subtracting the information on the number of AT remaining games transmitted this time from the information on the number of AT remaining games transmitted last time is 1, it is judged that the AT addition lottery was not won), (2) Main control board As a result of the AT addition lottery on the M side, a command relating to the fact that the number of AT addition games is 0 is transmitted to the sub-control board S side.

Next, FIG. 122 is a flowchart of the freeze lottery execution process according to the subroutine of step 3100 of FIG. 112 in the third embodiment. This flowchart shows the process for determining the execution of a specific freeze effect among the freeze effects, and the freeze effect is not only the effect shown in the figure, but is shown as an example of the freeze effect. ing. First, in step 3102, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the state related to the AT of the game is a “high probability state”. As described above, in the third embodiment, the specific freeze effect is configured to be executed only in the "advantageous section" and not in the "normal section" and the "waiting section". Further, the freeze effect is mainly to prevent the stop button from being operable (the processing after step 1554 is not executed) until a predetermined time (60 seconds in this example) has elapsed after the start lever is operated. It is an effect controlled by the control board M side, and the reels may be left stopped or all reels may be configured to rotate at low speed, rotate at high speed, or rotate in the reverse direction while the freeze effect is being executed. good. In the third embodiment, a freeze effect that is executed only in the "advantageous section" is exemplified as a specific freeze effect, but the execution mode of the freeze effect is not limited to this, and the specific freeze effect is. Different freeze effects may be configured to be executed in a game section other than the "advantageous section", or a specific freeze effect may be executed in a game section other than the "advantageous section", and a specific freeze may be executed. The effect may be configured so that the "advantageous section" is easier to be executed (the probability of being executed is higher) than the game section ("normal section" and "waiting section") other than the "advantageous section". That is, a plurality of types of freeze effects may be configured to be executable as freeze effects, a predetermined freeze effect may be configured to be executed in a plurality of types of game sections, and a plurality of predetermined freeze effects may be executed. The execution probability (of a predetermined freeze effect) may be different for each game section when it is configured to be executed in different types of game sections. Further, when the predetermined freeze effect is configured to be executed in the states related to a plurality of types of ATs, the execution probability (of the predetermined freeze effect) for each state related to the AT may be different, and the predetermined freeze effect may be different. The execution probability (of a predetermined freeze effect) may be different for each RT state when it is configured to be executed in a plurality of types of RT states. Further, it is preferable that the freeze effect as illustrated in the third embodiment is configured to be executed in a game that is relatively profitable for the player, and by such a configuration, the freeze effect is produced. It is possible to have a sense of expectation for the result of the game during the period from the end of the game to the operation of the stop button (freeze effect execution period). The execution mode of the freeze effect is not limited to the mode of the third embodiment, and the game freezes at the end of the bonus (the bet or start lever related to the start of the next game is invalidated for a predetermined time), and the number of medals won in the bonus during the freeze. (Or, the total of the number of medals acquired by AT and the acquisition by bonus) may be configured to be displayed on the effect display device S40, or at the end of AT, in other words, when the AT counter value becomes 0. It may be configured to freeze and display the number of medals acquired in the AT (or the total number of medals acquired by the AT and the acquisition by the bonus) on the effect display device S40 during the freeze. In the case of Yes in step 3102, in step 3104, the CPUC100 of the main control board M is a conditional device in which the conditional device related to the game can acquire the right to shift to the AT lottery combination (“AT in progress”, and this example. Then, it is determined whether or not it is a BB role). In step 3102 and step 3104, it is determined whether or not the right to shift to the "AT in progress state" is acquired (in this example, the AT lottery is won). In the case of Yes in step 3104, in step 3106, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes a freeze execution lottery (a lottery for whether or not to execute the freeze effect) that is won with a predetermined probability (1/20 in this example). do. Next, in step 3108, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the freeze execution lottery executed in the process of step 3106 has been won. In the case of Yes in step 3108, in step 3110, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns on the freeze execution flag (when the flag is turned on, the freeze effect is executed in the game). .. Next, in step 3112, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets a freeze execution command (a command to the sub-control board S side and is related to executing a freeze effect in the game), and the next process is performed. (Processing in step 1550). Even if No in step 3102, step 3104, or step 3108, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1550).

Next, FIG. 123 is a flowchart of the reel rotation start preparation process according to the subroutine of step 1550 of FIG. 112 in the third embodiment. First, in step 1568, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the freeze execution flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1568, in step 1570, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns off the freeze execution flag. Next, in step 1572, the CPUC100 of the main control board M is set to the freeze execution timer FZt (a timer for measuring the execution period of the freeze effect, which is a decrement timer), and the freeze execution time (60 seconds in this example). Is set to start the timer. Next, in step 1574, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the timer value of the freeze execution timer FZt is 0. If Yes in step 1574, the process proceeds to step 1552. On the other hand, if No in step 1574, the process of step 1574 is repeatedly executed until the timer value of the freeze execution timer FZt becomes 0. If No in step 1568, the process proceeds to step 1552. Next, in step 1552, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the timer value of the game interval minimum time timer M70 (subtraction timer) is 0. Here, the game interval minimum time timer M70 is a time (4.1 seconds in this example) that should be secured from a certain game start timing (reel rotation start timing) to the next game start timing (reel rotation start timing). It is a timer to measure. In the case of Yes in step 1552, in step 1554, the CPUC100 of the main control board M newly sets the timer value of the game interval minimum time timer M70 to the minimum time (4.1 seconds in this example) and starts. On the other hand, if No in step 1552, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes an infinite loop process. Next, in step 1556, the CPUC100 of the main control board M clears the information related to the reel stop order and the information related to the push order related to the finished game. Next, in step 1558, the CPUC100 of the main control board M clears the information related to the reel stop related to the finished game and the pull-in point creation request. Next, in step 1560, the CPUC100 of the main control board M initializes the symbol stop position data related to the finished game. Next, in step 1562, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets an output request during reel rotation start standby related to the game. Next, in step 1564, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets a reel control command related to the game. In other words, by the processing of step 1562 and step 1564, a command for indicating that the reel starts rotating can be transmitted to the sub-control board S. Next, in step 1566, the CPUC100 of the main control board M updates the reel drive state stored in the RAM area from the reel stop state to the reel rotation start standby state, and moves to the next process (process of step 1260). Transition.

Next, FIG. 124 is a flowchart of the remaining game number management process according to the subroutine of step 3400 of FIG. 112 in the third embodiment. First, in step 3402, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current gaming section is an “advantageous section”. Although the details will be described later, the "advantageous section" is one of the game sections, and the game situation is advantageous for the player, such as when the state related to AT is "AT in progress state". It is a game section that is easy to set in. In the case of Yes in step 3402, in step 3404, the CPUC100 of the main control board M initially has 1500, which is the number of games remaining in the advantageous section counter YKc-1 (the decrement counter, which is the maximum number of games that can stay in the "advantageous section". The counter value of (a counter that is set as a value and can be subtracted every game in the "advantageous interval") is subtracted by 1.

Next, in step 3408, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state related to AT is the “AT in progress state”. In the case of Yes in step 3408, in step 3410, the CPUC100 of the main control board M subtracts 1 from the AT counter value, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1700). Even if No in step 3402 or step 3408, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1700). As described above, in the third embodiment, when the state related to AT that can be displayed by the push order navigation is "AT in progress state", the AT counter value for each game is subtracted, but the state related to AT is "AT". "AT preparation state 1", "AT preparation state 2", "additional specialization state", "specialization precursor state", "advantageous BB internal game", "advantageous BB state", "AT in progress state after falling", " In the case of "specialized state after falling" and "state after bell overflow", the AT counter value is not subtracted even if the game is executed. As an example, when the AT counter value remains (1 or more remains) and the state shifts from the "AT in progress state" to the "specialization precursor state", the AT counter value is maintained and the "AT counter value is maintained." It is configured so that the transition (transition) can be made in the order of "AT in progress state"-> "specialization precursor state"-> "additional specialization state". Even if the state related to AT is "AT in progress", it is possible not to subtract 1 from the AT counter value when the winning number including the bonus combination is determined in the game. At this time, for example, the AT counter value stored in the RAM of the main control board M is not subtracted, but the remaining number of AT games displayed on the effect display device S40 controlled by the sub control board S is displayed so as to be subtracted. You may control it. For example, when the game is executed and the bonus is won when the AT counter value is "30" and the number of remaining AT remaining games displayed on the effect display device S40 is "30", the AT counter value is "30". Is stored, or "30 + α", which is the value obtained by adding the value "α" obtained by the AT addition lottery related to the game, is stored, but is displayed on the effect display device S40 when the start lever D50 is operated. You may display "29" as the number of remaining AT games, or "29 + α" which is the sum of the value "α" obtained by the AT addition lottery (note that the "α" obtained by the addition lottery is , "Α" in a specific game after the game (a game that meets certain conditions at the start of the bonus game, during the bonus game, at the end of the bonus game, or after the end of the bonus game) without notifying the game. You may notify). Then, the number of AT remaining games displayed on the effect display device S40 is subtracted by 1 for each game even in the "advantageous BB internal medium game", and an effect suggesting bonus confirmation (for example, a bonus confirmation screen) is output. It can be configured so that the number of AT remaining games is subtracted for each game. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from immediately grasping the bonus winning when the bonus is won in a state where the push order navigation such as "AT in progress" can be executed. That is, after the winning number including the bonus combination is determined, a continuous effect over a plurality of games that encourages whether or not the bonus is won can be executed by using the effect display device S40 or the like to enhance the interest of the game. The number of remaining AT games displayed on the effect display device S40 after the bonus game is completed is "30", or a value of "30" or more when notifying the result of winning and adding as a result of the AT addition lottery. Can be controlled to display. If the game is executed and the bonus is won when the AT counter value is "1" and the number of remaining AT games displayed on the effect display device S40 is "1", the game is displayed on the effect display device S40. The display related to the number of remaining AT games is "0", but while maintaining this state, continuous production over multiple games is executed to encourage whether or not the bonus is won, and the AT counter value is "1". , The winning number (or winning / re-game winning information, or ball ejection group number) in which the game can be executed and the AT addition lottery can be executed when the number of remaining AT games displayed on the effect display device S40 is "1". If is won and the AT addition lottery is not won, the number of AT games is "0" and the number of AT games displayed on the effect display device S40 is "0". Further, when the number of remaining AT games is small, the probability of executing the continuous effect may be set lower (including 0%) than when the number of remaining AT games is large.

Next, FIG. 125 is a flowchart of the RT state transition control process according to the subroutine of step 1700 in FIG. 112 in the third embodiment. First, in step 1702, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the RT state transition enable condition is satisfied in the game. Here, in the third embodiment, the RT state transitionable condition is that when a predetermined condition is satisfied (specifically, the setting key switch is turned on in a situation where the power is off, and then the power is turned on. Execution of RAM clear (RAM initialization), stop display (in this example, replay 04, replay 06, and so on) before the start of the setting change device control process or at the end of the setting change device control process. It is configured so that it can be satisfied by the stop display of the replay 07 and the stop display of the winnings 08 to 11) and the winning / starting / ending of the BB. In the case of Yes in step 1702, in step 1704, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the RT state transition is possible and the RT state after the next game based on the satisfied RT transition enable condition (see the RT state transition diagram of FIG. 126). (Refer to), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1750). Even if No in step 1702, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1750). In the third embodiment, the RT state transition control process is executed after all reels are stopped, but when shifting to "RT1", the shift timing may be shifted when the lever is turned on. The timing for shifting the RT state (storing the RT number in the RAM) can be appropriately determined.

Next, FIG. 126 is an RT state transition diagram in the third embodiment. In the third embodiment, there are seven RT states of "non-RT", "RT0" to "RT4", and "type 1 BB-A, B, C operating", which are indicated by arrows in the figure. The RT state shifts when the above conditions are met. As a specific example of transition to the RT state, it becomes "non-RT" when RAM initialization is executed. Further, when the RT state is "non-RT", when the replay 04 symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "RT0" (see the arrow in (1) shown in the RT state transition diagram of FIG. 126). The stop display of the re-game 04 is, for example, when the left stop button is operated as the first stop when the "re-game-D1" is won in the situation where the RT state is "non-RT". , Re-games 01 to 03 are stopped and displayed, and "non-RT" is maintained as the RT state. On the other hand, if the "re-game-D1" is won in a situation where the RT state is "non-RT" and the middle stop button or the right stop button is operated as the first stop, the re-game 04 is displayed as a stop. Then, the RT state shifts from "non-RT" to "RT0".

When the RT state is "RT0", "RT1", "RT3" or "RT4", and the push order bell overflows and the stop display is displayed, the state shifts to "non-RT" (RT state transition in FIG. 126). See the arrow in (2) shown in the figure). The push order bell overflow is, for example, when the correct push order is "winning-A1" configured so that the push order is "left → middle → right", the push order other than the correct push order ( For example, it is a sequence of symbols that are stopped and displayed when the stop operation is performed by "middle-> left-> right"). When the stop operation is performed in a push order other than the correct push order, one game medal will be paid out (see FIG. 104). Specifically, the symbol combinations of the winning 08 to the winning 11 correspond to the push order bell overflowing eyes.

When the RT state is "RT0" or "RT4", if the replay 06 is stopped and displayed, the process shifts to "RT1" (see the arrow in (3) shown in the RT state transition diagram of FIG. 126). The stop display of the re-game 06 is, for example, when the "re-game-E1" is won in the situation where the RT state is "RT0" and the left stop button is operated as the first stop. , Re-game 06 is stopped and displayed, and the RT state shifts from "RT0" to "RT1". On the other hand, when the "re-game-E1" is won in the situation where the RT state is "RT0" and the middle stop button or the right stop button is operated as the first stop, the re-game 01 is stopped and displayed. Then, "RT0" is maintained as the RT state. Further, when the "re-game-E1" is won in the situation where the RT state is "RT4" and the left stop button is operated as the first stop, the re-game 06 is stopped and displayed, and the RT state is displayed. Shifts from "RT4" to "RT1". On the other hand, when the "re-game-E1" is won in the situation where the RT state is "RT4" and the middle stop button or the right stop button is operated as the first stop, the re-game 01 is stopped and displayed. However, "RT4" is maintained as the RT state.

Further, when the RT state is "RT1" or "RT3", if the replay 04 is stopped and displayed, the process shifts to "RT0" (see the arrow (1) shown in the RT state transition diagram of FIG. 126). ).

Further, when the RT state is "RT1" and the replay 07 is stopped and displayed, the process shifts to "RT4" (see the arrow (7) shown in the RT state transition diagram of FIG. 126). The stop display of the re-game 07 is, for example, when the "re-game-F1" is won in the situation where the RT state is "RT1" and the left stop button is operated as the first stop. , Re-game 07 is stopped and displayed, and the RT state shifts from "RT1" to "RT4". On the other hand, when the "re-game-E1" is won in the situation where the RT state is "RT1" and the middle stop button or the right stop button is operated as the first stop, the re-game 01 is stopped and displayed. However, "RT1" is maintained as the RT state. In the situation where the RT state is "RT1", the replay 07 is stopped and displayed, and when the RT state shifts from "RT1" to "RT4", the state related to AT when the RT state is "RT1" is In the case of "AT in progress state", the state related to AT in "RT4" is "specialized state after falling", and the state related to AT when the RT state is "RT1" is "specialization precursor state". The state related to AT in "RT4" is "additional specialization state".

Further, when the RT state is "non-RT", "RT0", "RT1", "RT3" or "RT4", the BB combination is won (the condition device related to the first type BB-A, B, C is If the BB combination is not won in the winning game, the RT state shifts to "RT2" (see the arrow in (4) shown in the RT state transition diagram of FIG. 126). Further, when the BB role is won in "RT2" (one of the first type BB-A, B, C is operated), the transition is made to "when the first type BB-A, B, C is operated" (FIG. 126). See the arrow in (5) shown in the RT state transition diagram). Further, when the BB ends at "when the type 1 BB-A, B, C is operated" (the operation of any of the type 1 BB-A, B, C is completed), the process shifts to "RT3". Of the seven RT states in this example, the RT state with the highest stay ratio throughout all games is "RT0", the "AT in progress state" ends, and the game section changes from "advantageous section" to "normal". If you move to "Section", you will stay in "RT0", which has the highest stay ratio. In the "waiting section", the AT lottery (a lottery for acquiring the right to shift to the "AT in progress state") is not won, and the lottery for adding the number of AT games is not won.

Next, FIG. 127 is a flowchart of the AT in-state start control process according to the subroutine of step 1750 of FIG. 112 in the third embodiment. First, in step 1752, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the AT start enable condition is satisfied in the game. It should be noted that this AT startable condition can be satisfied, for example, based on the end of the advantageous BB state after shifting from the normal section to the advantageous section. Specifically, the AT preparation state 1 and the AT preparation state 2 are satisfied. It is satisfied when shifting to the "AT in progress state" from the next game through (see FIG. 128). In the case of Yes in step 1752, in step 1760, the CPUC100 of the main control board M is the number of AT initial games (in this example, it is 50, and the number of games for which subtraction is started after shifting to the "AT in progress state"). Is set in the AT counter M60, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 3500). Even if No in step 1752, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 3500). In addition, after winning the BB role in the "high probability state" and shifting to the "advantageous BB internal medium game", the player shifts to the "advantageous BB state" by winning the BB, and AT in the "advantageous BB state". If the number of games has been added, the initial value set in the AT counter will exceed 50 at the time of shifting to the "AT in progress state". Specifically, when the number of AT games is added by 30 games in the "advantageous BB state" and then the state shifts to the "AT in progress state" via the "AT preparation state 1" and the "AT preparation state 2". , 80 (initial value 50 + additional 30) is set in the AT counter. At this time, if the player is informed that 30 games have been added in the "advantageous BB state", the player is informed that the number of AT initial games is 80 at the start of the "AT in progress state". It is desirable to notify, but as another notification method, "AT preparation state 1" and "AT preparation state" are not performed to notify the player that 30 games have been added in the "advantageous BB state". After presenting 50 games, which are initial values, to the player at the start of "2", "AT in progress", etc., the AT in progress state (for example, the state immediately after the start or the state in which the number of remaining AT games in the effect display device S40 is small). ), A notification method for notifying the player that 30 games have been added is also conceivable. By doing so, the player cannot clearly grasp whether the number of AT games has been added in the "advantageous BB state" or how many games have been added. It is possible to enhance the interest in the additional production that suddenly occurs for unknown reasons during AT (a state in which push order navigation can occur). In this example, the number of AT initial games is set in the AT counter M60 in step 1760, but the execution timing of the process of setting the number of AT initial games is not limited to that of this example. The AT initial game number may be set in the AT counter M60 at the timing of executing the AT lottery execution process of step 3000 described above. Further, the number of games set in the AT counter M60 (the number of AT initial games) is when the "AT in progress state" is reached via the "AT preparation state 1" and the "AT preparation state 2" after the BB ends. It is configured to be subtracted from. Further, the counter value of the AT counter M60 is configured to be stored in the storage area of the RAM of the main control board M.

Next, FIG. 128 is an AT state transition diagram in the third embodiment. In the third embodiment, "low probability state", "normal BB internal medium game", "normal BB state", "high probability state", "AT in progress state", "specialization precursor state", "additional specialization" "State", "Advantageous BB internal game", "Advantageous BB state", "Standby BB internal game", "Waiting for fall", "AT preparation state 1", "AT preparation state 2", "AT after fall" There are 16 AT-related states of "state", "specialized state after falling", and "state after bell overflow", and the state related to AT shifts by satisfying the conditions shown by the arrows in the figure. Become. For example, if the watermelon B is won in the "AT in progress state" and the special state transition lottery in which the watermelon B is won in 1/2 is won, the state shifts to the "specialization precursor state". In addition, when 10 games have passed (digested) after shifting to the "specialized precursor state", the game is configured to shift to the "additional specialized state". As the game section, the states related to the four ATs of "low probability state", "normal BB internal game", "normal BB state", and "fall waiting state" are set as "normal section", and "standby BB" is set. "Internal medium game" is set to "waiting section", "high probability state", "AT in progress state", "specialization precursor state", "additional specialization state", "advantageous BB internal medium game", "advantageous BB" The 11 AT-related states of "state", "AT preparation state 1", "AT preparation state 2", "AT in progress state after falling", "specialized state after falling", and "state after bell overflow" are "advantageous sections". Is set to. That is, even if the states related to the 11 ATs that are the "advantageous section" are transitioned (shifted) (even if the state with the advantageous section is changed to the other state of the advantageous section), set it as the "normal section". If 1500 games have passed in total, the "advantageous section" is forcibly terminated and set to the "normal section".

The state related to AT is not limited to that of the third embodiment. For example, an AT lottery is executed by winning a predetermined winning number in a "low probability state" or a "high probability state", and the AT is concerned. By winning the lottery, it may be configured to shift to the "precursor state" and to shift to the "AT in progress state" after 16 to 32 games have elapsed. The AT lottery is executed by winning the game, and if the AT lottery is not won, the game shifts to the "Gase precursor state", and after 16 to 32 games have passed, the AT lottery is changed to the "low probability state" or the "high probability state". It may be configured to migrate. Further, in the third embodiment, a "waiting section" is provided as a game section, and when the BB is won in the "low probability state" and the AT lottery based on the BB is won, the "waiting section" is used. It is configured to be. Further, it may be configured so that the AT lottery can be won by a condition device other than the BB combination. For example, when the AT lottery is executed by winning the "cherry", the BB and the cherry overlap. If the "BB + cherry" is won and the AT lottery is won, the state inside the BB until the "BB" of the "BB + cherry" is won may be set as the "waiting section". In this way, by providing the "waiting section", the BB is won in the "low probability state" and the AT lottery is not won, and the BB is won in the "low probability state" and the AT. In both cases of winning the lottery, the advantageous section indicator YH is off during the period until the BB symbol combinations are complete (until the advantageous section indicator YH lights up), so AT. It can be fueled by making the player expect whether or not he has won the lottery. In the "standby section", the advantageous section indicator YH may be turned on, or the advantageous section indicator YH may be configured to be turned on or off. (It may be configured to determine the effect to be executed on the sub-control board S based on the lighting / extinguishing of the advantageous section display YH). Further, if the BB is won in the "additional specialization state", the "additional specialization state" may be restarted after the end of the BB. Executes an AT additional lottery different from the BB won in the "AT in progress state" as the BB won in the "addition specialization state" (for example, wins the AT additional lottery than the BB won in the "AT in progress state". It may be configured so that the number of AT games is added and the number of games per game is relatively large). Further, if the BB is elected in the "specialization precursor state", it may be configured to shift to the "additional specialization state" after the end of the BB. The AT addition lottery may be executed in the same manner as the winning BB in the "addition specialization state".

Next, FIG. 129 is a flowchart of the game section transition control process according to the subroutine of step 3500 of FIG. 112 in the third embodiment. First, in the third embodiment, the game section is provided as a section related to the state of the game, and the game section is a "normal section" which is relatively low profit for the player and a relatively low profit for the player. It has two game sections, an "advantageous section", which is a highly profitable section. As a description of the flowchart, first, in step 3502, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the game section related to the game is a “normal section”. In the case of Yes in step 3502, in step 3504, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the game section after the next game based on the determined AT-related state and the current game situation, and proceeds to step 3534. do. On the other hand, if No in step 3502, in step 3506, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the game section related to the game is a “standby section”. In the case of Yes in step 3506, in step 3508, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the BB has been operated. In the case of Yes in step 3508, in step 3510, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the game section after the next game as an "advantageous section", and shifts to step 3534. On the other hand, if No in step 3508, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the game section after the next game as the "standby section" in step 3506, and shifts to step 3534. On the other hand, if No in step 3506, in step 3522, the CPUC100 of the main control board M continues whether or not the counter value of the game number counter YKc-1 remaining in the advantageous section is 0, in other words, the "advantageous section" continues. Determine if the maximum number of games possible has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 3522, in step 3526, the CPUC100 of the main control board M clears all the information related to AT (thus, the AT counter value becomes 0, and the number of staying games in the "specialized precursor state" is described. Things will also be 0). On the other hand, if No in step 3522, in step 3524, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not an arbitrary advantageous section end condition is satisfied. Here, the arbitrary advantageous section end condition is an end condition of the "advantageous section" other than the case where the counter value of the advantageous section remaining game number counter YKc-1 becomes 0, and for example, the AT counter value is 0. This is the case when the push order navigation is executed a predetermined number of times. In the case of Yes in step 3524, in step 3532, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the game section after the next game as an "advantageous section", and shifts to step 3534. On the other hand, if No in step 3524, that is, if any advantageous section end condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step 3526. As described above, in the third embodiment, when the "advantageous section" is completed and the "normal section" is set after the next game, the information related to AT (the number of AT continuous games, the number of AT remaining games, etc.) Since all the information related to the above, etc.) is cleared, the conditions for becoming the "advantageous section" again in the subsequent "normal section" will not be relaxed. The information related to the AT cleared by the processing in step 3526 (processing at the end of the advantageous section) includes a counter value of the game remaining number counter YKc-1 in the advantageous section, a flag indicating the game state, and the like. In addition, these information will be cleared by clearing the RAM when the setting is changed, but depending on the RAM clear when the setting is changed, "conditional device related to the accessory continuous operation device (BB)" or "RT state". , While clearing information related to "number of stored sheets", etc., depending on the process of step 3526 (process at the end of the advantageous section), "conditional device related to the accessory continuous operation device (BB)" or "RT state". , Information related to "number of stored sheets" etc. is not cleared. As described above, the RAM clear range when the setting is changed and the clear range at the end of the "advantageous section" (for example, when the process of step 3526 is executed) are different. It should be noted that the RAM is cleared when the setting is changed, so that the "conditional device related to the accessory continuous operation device (BB)" and the "RT state" may be maintained. In addition, the addresses in the range to be cleared at the end of the "advantageous section" are continuous. By making the addresses in the range to be cleared at the end of the "advantageous section" continuous in this way, it is possible to clear by a simple process of designating the range of the start address to be cleared and the range of the addresses to be cleared in the clearing process. Further, when the "advantageous section" is completed, a command relating to the end of the "advantageous section" is transmitted from the main control board M to the sub control board S. However, even if the sub-control board S side receives the command, it is configured so that the game history such as the fact that it was an "advantageous section" and the information related to how many games the "AT in progress state" was executed is not deleted. ing. However, when the RAM is cleared when the setting is changed, the game history such as the fact that it was an "advantageous section" on the sub-control board S side and the information on how many games the "AT in progress state" was executed. Will also be erased.

When the "advantageous section" ends because the counter value of the game number counter YKc-1 remaining in the advantageous section becomes 0, (1) when the current AT-related state is the "high probability state". In the next game, the state related to AT becomes a "low probability state", and (2) if the current state related to AT is "advantageous BB internal middle game", the state related to AT becomes "low probability state" in the next game. "Normal BB internal game", (3) If the current AT-related state is "advantageous BB state", the AT-related state will be "normal BB state" in the next game, (4) Currently The AT-related states are "AT in progress state", "specialization precursor state", "additional specialization state", "AT preparation state 1", "AT preparation state 2", "after fall state", and "after fall". In the case of "specialized state" or "state after bell overflow", the state related to AT is configured to be "low probability state" or "waiting for fall state" in the next game (related to AT). Because the information is cleared).

Next, in step 3528, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets the game section after the next game to the “normal section”, and shifts to step 3530. Next, in step 3530, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns off the advantageous section indicator YH because the “advantageous section” is completed, and proceeds to step 3534. It should be noted that the advantageous section indicator YH is configured to be turned off when the "advantageous section" is completed and set to the "normal section", but the detailed turn-off timing is limited to the timing of the third embodiment. Instead, for example, the advantageous section indicator YH may be turned off when the game medal related to the game in which the "advantageous section" ends and becomes the "normal section" is inserted. In other words, the advantageous section indicator YH may be turned off before the start lever D50, which enables the start of the next game, is operated.

Next, in step 3534, it was decided that the CPUC100 of the main control board M was newly set to the "advantageous section" in the next game (it was decided to set the "normal section" to the "advantageous section"). Judge whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 3534, in step 3536, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets a predetermined value in the advantageous section remaining game number counter YKc-1. The predetermined value set in the advantageous section remaining game number counter YKc-1 is a fixed value (1500 in this example) common to all the set values. Next, in step 3538, the CPUC100 of the main control board M lights up the advantageous section indicator YH, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1293). Even if No in step 3534, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1293). In the third embodiment, the lighting process of the advantageous section indicator YH is executed at the timing of step 3538, but the lighting timing of the advantageous section indicator YH is not limited to this, and the advantageous section indicator YH is used. The lighting timing is from the operation timing of the start lever in the game before the new "advantageous section" (the game in the "normal section") to the timing when the game medal can be inserted in the new "advantageous section" game (newly). If the game before the "advantageous section" is a game related to replay, set appropriately during the period (until the timing when the start lever operation becomes effective in the new "advantageous section" game). You may.

For example, when BB is executed when the number of continuous games in the "advantageous section" is close to 1500 games, the counter value of the remaining game number counter YKc-1 in the advantageous section is 5 (the number of continuous games in the advantageous section). Is 1495), and when the counter value of the advantageous section remaining game number counter YKc-1 becomes 0 (the number of continuous games in the advantageous section is 1500) during the execution of BB, "normal" It becomes "section".

Next, FIG. 130 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing according to the subroutine of step 1600 in the third embodiment. The processing of the subroutine is started when the timer interrupt is started in the processing of step 1040 or step 1104, and thereafter, a predetermined time (in this example, T is set, but for example, a time of about 2 ms is set. It is configured to be executed periodically with a cycle of).

First, in step 1602, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes a process at the start of an interrupt (for example, saving data held in a register in the CPUC100, checking an input port for a power failure detection signal, and the like). Next, in step 1604, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the power failure is currently detected (in the interrupt processing this time). If No in step 1604, in step 1900, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes a power-off process described later. On the other hand, in the case of Yes in step 1604, in step 1606, the CPUC100 of the main control board M starts timer measurement (update processing of various timers managed by software). Next, in step 1608, the CPUC100 of the main control board M generates input port data and stores the data (updates the storage area of each input port data in the RAM area). Here, the input port data includes the settlement button D60, the start lever D50, the stop button D40, the door switch D80, the setting key switch M20, the setting / reset button M30, the power cutoff detection signal, the on reception sensor D10s, and the first on sensor. Information related to the detection of D20s, the second input sensor D30s, the first payout sensor H10s, the second payout sensor H20s, etc. Will be).

Next, in step 1610, the CPUC100 of the main control board M refers to the input port data in the RAM area, and turns on / off the door switch flag and the setting key switch flag according to the sampling result of each input port data. Switching (for example, when the switch state of the door switch D80 is continuously on for multiple samplings, by turning on the door switch flag, the front door DU is opened without being affected by noise. It can also be detected that it is). Next, in step 1611, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes a turning cylinder drive control process (process related to control of drive of the reel M50) of all reels (left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53). .. Next, in step 1612, the CPUC100 of the main control board M refers to the AT counter M60 and determines whether or not the counter value is larger than 0. In the case of Yes in step 1612, in step 1613, the CPUC100 of the main control board M displays the number of remaining AT games (number of AT games) on the AT counter value display device D280, and proceeds to step 1614. Even if No in step 1612, the process proceeds to step 1614. If the AT counter value display device D280 controlled by the main control board M is not provided, the processes of steps 1612 and 1613 are unnecessary. Next, in step 1614, the CPUC100 of the main control board M outputs the output data to the output port. Here, the output data is data for driving the reel M50, the blocker D100, and the like. Next, in step 1616, the CPUC100 of the main control board M has all the error flags turned off (although not shown, the inserted medal backflow error flag, the inserted number of sheets error flag, the inserted medal retention error flag, and the inserted abnormal error flag, It is determined whether or not all the flags related to the error such as the payout abnormality error flag, the payout medal retention error flag, the door switch flag, etc. are off). In the case of Yes in step 1616, in step 1618, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets an error undetected command (a command to the sub side and a command related to the fact that an error is not detected) (for example, a register). (Set in the area), and the process proceeds to step 1622. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1616, in step 1620, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets an error detection command (a command to the sub side and a command related to the fact that an error is detected) (for example,). (Set in the register area), and the process proceeds to step 1622. In step 1620, information related to an error corresponding to the error flag that is turned on (an error that is currently occurring) is configured to be transmitted to the sub side. In addition, the error-undetected command may be set only when the error is cleared from the state in which the error occurred (only when it is determined that the flag is turned off), and when the error is not detected, the relevant command is applicable. It is not necessary to execute the information setting process (step 1618 may be omitted). Further, the error detection command may execute the set process only when an error occurs from the state where no error has occurred, or from the state where the first error (for example, the inserted medal retention error) has occurred. The set process may be executed when the type of error changes, such as the second error (for example, the payout medal retention error).

Next, in step 1622, the CPUC100 of the main control board M transmits a control command (command on the sub side) (for example, if it is set in the register area in step 1618 or step 1620, it is set. Control commands will be sent). Here, as commands to be transmitted to the sub-control board S, a command related to the start lever operation timing (sent immediately after the start lever operation) and a command related to the first reel stop acceptance timing (the stop button was operated as the first stop). Command related to the second reel stop acceptance timing (sent immediately after operating the stop button as the second stop), command related to the third reel stop acceptance timing (sending the stop button as the third stop) (Sent immediately after operation), command related to production group number (sent immediately after operation of start lever D50), command related to winning / replay winning information (sent immediately after all reels are stopped) Sent immediately after starting lever operation (only during advantageous section), command related to bonus winning information (sent immediately after starting lever operation), command related to RT status (next game after all reels are stopped) (Sent before the start of), commands related to the AT status (sent between the time all reels stop and the next game start), and commands related to the number of remaining AT games. (Sent from the stop of all reels to the start of the next game, or immediately after the start lever operation), forward push instruction command (sent immediately after the start lever operation), forward push avoidance command (Sent immediately after the start lever operation), reverse push instruction command (sent immediately after the start lever operation), reverse push avoidance command (sent immediately after the start lever operation), freeze execution command (main control board M side) Is a command related to the execution of the freeze effect, and is sent after the start lever operation force), and a command related to the game section (sent between the time when all reels are stopped and the time when the next game is started). , Etc. Next, in step 1624, the CPUC100 of the main control board M outputs an external terminal signal (a signal for transmitting information from the spinning machine P to an external hall computer or the like). Although not shown, the information related to the error output by the external signal includes a door opening error, a closing error error, a payout error error, a closing reception sensor retention error, and the like. The door opening error is configured to be an error when the front door DU is opened and the door switch flag is turned on, and the insertion reception sensor retention error is when the insertion reception sensor detects the retention of the game medal. Is configured to result in an error. Next, in step 1626, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns on the output data of the LED (7-segment LED lamp, etc.) (for example, a predetermined 7-segment LED unit among the plurality of 7-segment LED units, 7). Outputs (lights a predetermined segment of the segment) (so-called dynamic lighting). Next, in step 1628, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes an LED lighting mode (for example, changing the LED lighting color). Note that step 1628 does not have to be executed. Next, in step 1630, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes soft random number management processing (update processing of random number values managed by software, etc.). Next, in step 1632, the CPUC100 of the main control board M acquires the internal information register data (the internal information register has an area in which the error flag bit is set when an abnormality occurs in the random number generation circuit). .. Next, in step 1634, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the frequency of the random number update clock is normal (whether or not the abnormality flag bit indicating the frequency abnormality is set). Specifically, when the frequency of the random number update clock falls below a predetermined value, the error flag bit is set. In the case of Yes in step 1634, in step 1636, the CPUC100 of the main control board M has whether or not the update state of the built-in random number is normal (whether or not the error flag bit indicating the update state abnormality is set). Is determined. In the case of Yes in step 1636, in step 1638, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the interrupt end process and shifts to the next process (process of step 1602). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1634 or step 1636, in step 1640, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets the built-in random number error display (for example, the error number is set in the register area). Next, in step 1300, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the above-mentioned non-recoverable error processing.

Next, FIG. 131 is a flowchart of power off / off processing according to the subroutine of step 1900 in FIG. 130. First, in step 1902, the CPUC100 of the main control board M saves the stack pointer. Next, in step 1904, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns on the power-off processed flag (for example, updates the inside of the power-off processed flag area of the RAM area with a value corresponding to on). Next, in step 1906, the CPUC100 of the main control board M calculates a checksum from the start address of the RAM area to the address immediately before the checksum area, and error detection information (for example, the calculation) based on the calculated checksum. The lower 1 byte of the checksum, or its complement) is set in the checksum area. Next, in step 1912, the CPUC100 of the main control board M prohibits the writing of the RAM, and proceeds to step 1914. Next, in step 1914, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes an infinite loop process for waiting for a reset.

Next, the control process executed on the sub-control board S side will be described with reference to FIGS. 132 to 146.

<Sub-side program start processing>
First, FIG. 132 is a subroutine showing a sub-side program start process. This sub-side program start process is called and executed when the power is turned on.

First, in step 2002, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S disables interrupts. Next, in step 2004, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S executes various initialization processes such as initialization of the CPU and RAM, calculation of the checksum, and the like.

Next, in step 2008, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the checksum value calculated when the power is turned on and the checksum value calculated and stored when the power is turned off match. In the case of Yes in step 2008, in other words, if it is determined in the determination process of step 2008 that both checksum values match, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes one command process described later in step 2010. It is determined whether or not the state has been restored from the state in which the power was cut off, that is, whether or not the state has been completely restored.

In the case of Yes in step 2010, in other words, when it is determined that the command is completely restored, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S permits interrupts in step 2012, and executes the command when a power failure occurs. 1 Return the process to command processing.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2008, in other words, when it is determined in the determination process of step 2008 that both checksum values do not match, in step 2014, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S clears the RAM. To execute. After executing the process of step 2014, or if No in step 2010, the process is shifted to the sub-main loop process.

<Sub-main loop processing>
Next, FIG. 133 is a subroutine showing the sub-main loop processing. The sub-main loop process is called and executed after the sub-side program start process shown in FIG. 132 is executed.

First, in step 2102, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S clears the watchdog timer. Next, in step 2104, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S starts the operation of the watchdog timer. Next, in step 2106, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S permits interrupts. Next, in step 2108, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the command reception process. This command reception process is a process of receiving various commands transmitted from the main control board M.

Next, in step 2250, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes one command process described later. This one command process is a process executed based on a control command from the main control means 100. Specific processing will be described later. In step 2110, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a predetermined time, for example, 16 ms has elapsed, and if it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed, the process returns to step 2250. On the other hand, when it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed, the process is returned to step 2102. The predetermined time is not limited to 16 ms and can be appropriately changed according to the process.

<Sub-side power off processing>
Next, FIG. 134 is a subroutine showing the sub-side power cutoff process executed on the sub-control board S side. The sub-side power cut-off process is a process started when the sub-control board S detects a power-off.

First, in step 2202, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S stops the watchdog timer. In step 2204, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the sub-side program start process is being executed. If Yes in step 2204, the process proceeds to step 2210. On the other hand, if No in step 2204, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calculates the checksum in step 2206. Next, in step 2208, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S saves various data (checksum calculation result, address of the program being executed, etc.), and proceeds to step 2210.

Next, in step 2210, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not 500 ms has elapsed. Here, when it is determined that 500 ms has elapsed, the power cutoff process is terminated. On the other hand, if No in step 2210, in step 2212, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the power supply has been restored. In the case of Yes in step 2212, in step 2214, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S updates the number of momentary interruption occurrences. Next, in step 2216, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S starts the operation of the watchdog timer and returns to the process executed when the power is turned off. If it is determined in the determination process of step 2212 that the power supply has not been restored, the process is returned to step 2210 described above.

<1 command processing>
Next, FIG. 135 is a subroutine showing one command process called and executed in the process of step 2250 of FIG.

First, in step 2250, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not it is the operation timing of the bet button. If No in step 2250, in step 2251, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the bet button operation time process, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2110 in FIG. 40). By the process of step 2251, the effect can be started or switched when the bet button is operated. The effect executed in the process of step 2251 is executed according to the content determined in the effect content determination process (process of step 2800 described later) executed in the game or the game at the time before the game. ..

In the case of Yes in step 2250, in step 2252, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not it is the operation timing of the start lever. If Yes in step 2252, the process proceeds to step 2253. On the other hand, if No in step 2252, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the process at the time of starting lever operation in step 2300. By the process of step 2300, the effect can be started or switched when the start lever is operated. Next, in step 2800, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calls and executes a subroutine of the effect content determination process described later, and shifts to the next process (process of step 2110 in FIG. 133).

Next, in step 2253, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not it is the reel rotation start timing. If Yes in step 2253, the process proceeds to step 2255. On the other hand, if No in step 2253, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the reel rotation start processing in step 2254, and shifts to the next processing (processing in step 2110 in FIG. 133). By the process of step 2254, the effect can be started or switched when the reel rotation is started. The effect executed in the process of step 2254 is executed according to the content determined in the effect content determination process (process of step 2800 described later) executed in the game or the game at the time before the game. .. Further, the reel rotation start timing may be the rotation start timing of the reel that started rotation first among the three reels, or may be the rotation start timing of the reel that started rotation last among the three reels (three reels). When the rotation starts at the same time, the rotation start timing).

Next, in step 2255, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not it is the first reel stop acceptance (first stop operation) timing. If No in step 2255, in step 2500, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the first processing at the time of receiving the body stop, and shifts to the next processing (processing in step 2110 in FIG. 133). In other words, in the process of step 2500, the effect is executed with the timing of turning on the first body stop as an opportunity. The timing of turning on will be described later. By the process of step 2500, the effect can be started or switched when the stop button is pressed to stop the first body.

Next, in the case of Yes in step 2254, in step 2258, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not it is the second reel stop acceptance (second stop operation) timing. If No in step 2258, in step 2550, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the second processing at the time of receiving the body stop, and shifts to the next processing (processing in step 2110 in FIG. 133). In other words, the process of step 2550 is performed with the timing of turning on the second reel stop as an opportunity. By the process of step 2550, the effect can be started or switched when the stop button is pressed to stop the second body.

Next, in the case of Yes in step 2258, in step 2262, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not it is the third reel stop acceptance (third stop operation) timing. If No in step 2262, in step 2600, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the third processing at the time of receiving the body stop, and shifts to the next processing (processing in step 2110 in FIG. 133). In other words, in the process of step 2600, the effect is executed with the timing of turning on the third reel stop. By the process of step 2600, the effect can be started or switched when the stop button is pressed to stop the third body.

Next, in the case of Yes in step 2262, in step 2266, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not it is the stop display timing of the symbol. In the case of Yes in step 2266, in step 2268, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a stop display symbol time process (not shown) and shifts to the next process (process of step 2110 in FIG. 133). .. On the other hand, if No in step 2266, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S immediately shifts to the next process (process of step 2110 in FIG. 133). By the process of step 2268, the effect can be started or switched when the stop button pushed to stop the third body is released. In other words, in the process of step 2268, the effect is executed with the timing of turning off the third reel stop. The off timing will be described later.

<Contents of production in the third embodiment>
As described above, in the third embodiment, the operation timing of the bet button, the operation timing of the start lever, the first reel stop acceptance timing, the second reel stop acceptance timing, the third reel stop acceptance timing, and the design The content of the production is decided with the stop display timing of. Hereinafter, the types of effects in the third embodiment will be described.

The production mainly includes stage production (sometimes called background production), advance notice production, push order navigation production, and the like.

<Stage production>
The stage production is mainly performed by displaying a background image or the like. The effect mode in which this stage effect is executed and the advance notice effect is not executed corresponds to the effect of the effect group 1 shown in FIGS. 148 (A) to 148 (C) without the effect (the push order navigation effect is not executed without the effect). It may be configured so that the push order navigation effect can be executed without the effect). That is, in this example, it is assumed that there is no effect = no advance notice effect is executed. Here, the background image includes not only a static image that does not change with time but also a dynamic image that changes with time. Further, only a part thereof may be changed with time, or the whole may be changed. For example, an image from a certain viewpoint such as a landscape or a room is displayed on the entire screen (display area) of the effect display device S40.

The stage effect can be determined mainly by the state of the game determined by the RT state, the state related to the AT, and the like, and can be executed so as to suggest the overall state of the game. In addition, it is configured so that a stage transition lottery for changing the stage effect to be executed can be executed for each game. The number of candidates for stage production and the number of placements related to the stage transition lottery, which can be determined depending on the RT state and the state related to AT, may be different. In addition, the stage production is not limited to displaying images, but also outputs sounds such as music, narration, and sound effects together with the display of the background image, and displays text information together with the background image as needed. (For example, in a game in which the stage effect is changed, a sound for explaining the stage effect is output). In addition, the stage effect can include the effect of lighting or blinking the lamp D26.

The stage production is basically started by the operation of the bet button D220 (including the detection of medal insertion) of the game or the operation of the start lever D50, and the bet button D220 (detection of medal insertion) in the next game or later is also started. Included) or can be terminated by the operation of the start lever D50. The start and end of the stage effect are not limited to these, and may be triggered by the first stop, the second stop, the third stop, or the start of reel rotation. Further, it is not necessary to start or end at the same time as the operation of the bet button D220, the detection of medal insertion, the operation of the start lever D50, the first stop, the second stop, the third stop, or the start of reel rotation, and these timings. It may be started or ended with a delay of a predetermined time from. The start and end timings can be arbitrarily set according to the content of the production and the information to be suggested.

<Notice production>
The advance notice effect can be mainly executed so as to suggest a detailed state desired by the player such as a conditional device won in the game, an RT state, a state related to AT, and a set value. It should be noted that the advance notice effect also includes an effect of notifying information completely unrelated to these states. The notice production is the "character production" of the production group 2 shown in FIGS. 148 (A) to 148 (C), the "conversation production" of the production group 3, the "cut-in production" of the production group 4, and the "cut-in production" of the production group 5. It corresponds to "confrontation production", "additional battle" of production group 6, "common navigation production" of production group 7, and "aiming production" of production group 8.

As for the mode of the advance notice effect, an image showing the advance notice effect is displayed superimposed on the background image (stage effect) on the effect display device S40, or is independently displayed on the entire screen of the effect display device S40. There is. The advance notice effect may be composed of an image that is more dynamic and has a lot of changes over time with respect to the stage effect. Similar to the stage production, the advance notice production is not limited to displaying images, but also outputs sounds such as music, narration, and sound effects together with the display of the background image, and displays text information together with the background image as necessary. It also includes aspects such as. Further, the effect of lighting or blinking the lamp D26 and the operation of a movable body accessory (not shown) is also included.

The content of the advance notice is generally changed or switched within one game. For example, the content is changed by starting the first effect triggered by the operation of the bet button D220 or the operation of the start lever D50, and then starting the intermediate effect triggered by the first stop or the second stop. The contents can be changed or switched by starting the final production with the third stop as an opportunity. In this way, it is possible to suggest various detailed information by developing an effect corresponding to the operation of the player. As an example, in the case of executing a notice effect for the player to incite whether or not the bonus has been won, the expectation that the bonus has been won in the game is suggested by the operation of the start lever D50. It is possible to exemplify an effect mode in which the effect is executed and then the effect of notifying the result of whether or not the bonus is won in the game is executed at the operation timing of the third stop button.

The triggers for switching the notice effect are the operation of the bet button D220, the operation of the start lever D50, the first stop, the second stop, the third stop, etc., but it is not always necessary to use all of these triggers, and the content of the effect. Any opportunity can be used according to the above. Further, it is not necessary to coincide with these triggers, and the production can be started after a predetermined time is delayed from the operated timing. Furthermore, it is also possible to start the effect at the same time as these triggers and display the image in a dynamic manner until a predetermined period elapses, and then display the image in a stationary manner.

In addition, for various operations of the player, the timing when the player applies force to displace the button or lever (timing when the button or lever is turned on) and the timing when the player releases the button or lever and returns (the timing when the player releases the button or lever). There are both on and off timings). It is not necessary to use either of these timings as a trigger, both timings as a trigger, or neither timing as a trigger. By using the on timing and the off timing, it is possible to increase the timing at which the effect can be switched, and it is possible to develop and proceed with the effect in various ways.

For example, the image display as a stage effect is started at the timing when the operation of the bet button D220 or the operation of the start lever D50 is turned on, and the sound effect is output, and the image display as the notice effect is started at the timing when the first stop is turned on. Then, the sound effect is output at the second stop and the lamp is turned on, the image as a warning effect is switched at the timing when the third stop is on, and the sound effect is output at the timing when the third stop is off. Until the timing of turning on the operation of the bet button D220 or the operation of the start lever D50 in the next game, it is possible to perform an effect such as continuing to display an image as a notice effect.

As described above, the advance notice effect is mainly executed so as to suggest a detailed state such as a set value in addition to the condition device, the RT state, and the state related to the AT won in the game. The switching and expansion of the contents of the above can be arbitrarily determined so as to suggest such information.

For example, in the advance notice production, it is possible to suggest the winning condition device, the RT state, the state related to AT, etc. by the display mode such as the color, number, degree of change of characters, items, goods, etc. can. As an example, the winning small role can be notified by the color of the item or goods (red indicates cherry, green indicates watermelon, etc.).

<Push order navigation production>
In the third embodiment, the push order navigation effect is the above-mentioned re-game-B, re-game-C, re-game-D1-re-game-D3, prize-A1-win-A6, re-game-E1-re-game- When a conditional device (sometimes called a push order role) whose stop display role may differ depending on the push order such as E3, re-game-F1 to re-game-F3 is won, the push order is indicated by an image or characters. Displayed on the effect display device S40 (for example, when the first stop is the left reel, "1" is displayed in the area above the left reel in the effect display device S40), or output by voice from the speaker S20. It is a production that can be reeled (for example, output as "Left!").

The player can stop and display the symbol by operating the stop button D40 according to the information displayed on the effect display device S40 or output from the speaker S20. In the case of a push order in which game medals are paid out by displaying a stop, the stop display is configured to indicate the push order in which the number of payouts is the largest. While the stage production and the advance notice production are mainly indirect notification effects that suggest or imply the game state, the push order navigation effect is often a direct notification effect that displays the push order. .. In addition, in the push order navigation effect, indirect information that suggests or implies the push order may be displayed.

Hereinafter, each effect group shown in FIGS. 148 (A) to 148 (C) will be described.

<"No production" of production group 1>
In the third embodiment, "no effect" in Group 1 does not mean that the effect is not executed at all, but means that the above-mentioned advance notice effect is not executed, and the stage effect or the push order navigation effect may be executed. be. That is, the "directing" of the production group 1 means the above-mentioned advance notice production, and the "production" of the production group 1 does not include the stage production and the push order navigation production. Therefore, even when "No effect" of group 1 is selected, the stage effect and push order navigation are executed, and as the stage effect and push order navigation, image display, audio output, lamp lighting, etc. are performed. Will be executed.

<"Character production" of production group 2>
The “character effect” of group 2 is an effect of displaying a character together with a background image on the effect display device S40 (see FIG. 155 (A)). Specifically, it was displayed on the effect display device S40 between the operation of the bet button D220 or the operation of the start lever D50 in the game and the operation of the bet button D220 or the start lever D50 in the next game. This is an effect in which the character performs a predetermined operation (see FIG. 155 (A)).

For example, a background image is displayed when the bet button D220 is operated or the start lever D50 is operated (start of stage production), and then various movements of the character are triggered by the first stop and the second stop. There is an operation, and the final operation of the character is performed (for example, disappearing) triggered by the third stop.

The character effect may be displayed on the effect display device S40 together with a background image (sometimes referred to as a stage effect), and may be additionally decorated with the normal background image. By displaying it as an additional decoration, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored. Whether or not to make a character appear, the type of character to appear, and the like may be determined based on the conditional device won in the game or may be determined regardless of the conditional device. Furthermore, various display modes such as the position, number, and color in which the character is displayed may be different based on the winning condition device. The display mode of the character may be a mode that is visibly different from that of the player.

Here, the character is not only a living body such as a human being or an animal, but also an inorganic object such as an artificial life form such as a robot or a pseudo-living body that can be visually recognized by a player when the player acts with some intention. For example, objects such as vehicles, battleships, and weapons can also be included in the character.

<"Conversation production" of production group 3>
An effect display device S40 displays a display frame (sometimes referred to as a window) in a part such as the lower part together with a background image, and displays character information related to the state of the game, a story, etc. in the area inside the display frame. Is. For example, the character information to be displayed may be determined based on the conditional device won in the game or may be determined regardless of the conditional device. The degree of expectation may be suggested by the color of the display information, the color of the characters, the timing of display, and the like.

The conversation effect may be displayed on the effect display device S40 together with the background image, and may be additionally decorated with the normal background image. By displaying it as an additional decoration, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored. Further, not only the display but also the character information explaining the game playability and the like can be output by voice from the speaker S20, and the sound effect can be output from the speaker S20 together with the display (see FIG. 155 (B)).

For example, when the rotation of the reel starts, the display frame is superimposed and displayed on the effect display device S40 together with the background image (start of the stage effect), and then the characters are triggered by the first stop and the second stop. Information may be displayed one after another, and the final text information may be displayed when the third stop is triggered. As an example, the image, display frame, and character information (line) of character A are displayed when the rotation of the reel starts, and then, at the first stop, the image, display frame, and character information (line) of character B are displayed. Is displayed, it is possible to exemplify an effect mode in which the character A and the character B are having a conversation.

It should be noted that the character information may be displayed in a predetermined area such as the edge of the display area of the effect display device S40 without displaying the display frame or the like.

<"Cut-in production" of production group 4>
The “cut-in effect” is an effect of displaying a cut-in effect image by interrupting from a background image (the above-mentioned stage effect) previously displayed on the effect display device S40 (see FIG. 155 (C)). ). For example, triggered by the operation of the start lever D50, a cut-in effect image completely different from the normally displayed background image is displayed on the entire effect display device S40 for a predetermined time, and then a conditional device won in the game is displayed. Perform a production that suggests. It should be noted that, without executing the cut-in effect, it may be configured so that the same effect as the effect other than the cut-in effect when the above-mentioned cut-in effect is executed can be executed. That is, the operation of the start lever D50 may be used as an opportunity to execute an effect suggesting a conditional device that has been won in the game. The cut-in effect is an example of the effect corresponding to the effect group 4, and the effect corresponding to the effect group 4 is not limited to the cut-in effect. In addition, the production corresponding to the production group 4 is such that the production is executed triggered by the operation of the start lever D50, suggesting the type of the conditional device won in the game, or in the game. It is configured to suggest whether or not the winning condition device includes a bonus combination, and to suggest whether or not the AT lottery has been won.

The above-mentioned "character production" of group 2 and "conversation production" of group 3 were additionally decorated with respect to the normal background image, but this "cut-in production" is basically. , Consists of an image that is independent of the normal background image (the entire screen switches from the background image).

The display of the cut-in effect image is performed in advance on the effect display device S40 in addition to the mode of suddenly switching the cut-in effect image to be displayed on the entire effect display device S40 triggered by the operation of the start lever D50. The cut-in effect image is inserted so that it breaks into a part of the displayed background image, and the originally displayed background screen and the cut-in effect image are temporarily coexisted and displayed. A mode (a mode in which the cut-in image is displayed only in a part of the display area of the effect display device S40) may be used.

By displaying such a cut-in effect image, it is possible to suggest a conditional device or the like that has been won in the game depending on the content of the cut-in effect image. For example, depending on the person (character) appearing in the cut-in effect image, the color, number, degree of change, etc. of the item or goods, the winning condition device, RT state, AT state, etc. Can be suggested.

<"Confrontation production" of production group 5>
The "confrontation effect" is an effect in which at least two types of characters display competing images on the effect display device S40, and the result of the competition (win / loss, success / failure, etc.) is determined in one game (FIG. 155). See (A)). For example, the operation of the bet button D220 or the operation of the start lever D50 triggers the display of an image before the two types of characters start the confrontation on the effect display device S40, and then the first stop triggers the display. An image of two types of characters starting a confrontation is displayed, an image showing the progress of the confrontation triggered by the second stop is displayed, and an image showing the final victory or defeat is displayed triggered by the third stop.

This confrontation is not limited to fighting and struggling, but is not limited to competition between two or more characters (including groups and teams) that are in conflict with each other, such as sports and eating fast, but also the movement of at least one character. It suffices as long as the victory or defeat of the character is determined by. For example, it is a production in which the victory or defeat of the competition is completed in one game, and when one character wins, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation of bonus winning or AT winning depending on the type of winning character. Further, the winning condition device, the RT state, the set value, and the like may be suggested. At the end of one game, character information such as "WIN!" Is displayed. In addition, if the result of the confrontation production is victory, success, etc., it is suggested that the result of the game is advantageous for the player, and it is notified that the bonus role has been won in the game. , Notifies that the AT state will be entered from the next game onward. On the other hand, in the case of defeat, failure, etc. as a result of the confrontation production, it is suggested that the result of the game is not advantageous for the player, and it is notified that the bonus role was not won in the game. Or, it notifies that the AT state will not be entered even after the next game. When the confrontation effect is executed, the effect mode in which the result of the confrontation effect is victory / success, etc. and the effect mode in which the result of the confrontation effect is defeat / failure, etc. are from the start of the effect to immediately before the result notification (for example, the first). 3 Until the stop button is operated), the same effect mode is used, and the result is determined by whether the result of the confrontation effect is victory / success or defeat / failure at the result notification timing (for example, the third stop operation timing). It may be configured to have different aspects.

<"Additional battle (only during ART)" of production group 6>
"Additional battle (only during ART)" is a production in which at least two types of characters display competing images on the production display device S40, similar to the "confrontation production", and the result of the competition in one game (win or lose, etc.). Is the effect to be determined (see FIG. 157 (B)). Similar to the confrontation production, it is not limited to fighting and struggle, but it is not limited to two or more characters (including groups and teams) competing with each other, such as sports and eating fast, but also the movement of at least one character. It suffices as long as the victory or defeat of the character is determined by.

In particular, the operation of the bet button D220 or the operation of the start lever D50 triggers the display of an image before the two types of characters start the confrontation on the effect display device S40, and then the first stop triggers the display. An AT game that displays an image of two types of characters starting a confrontation, displays the progress of the confrontation triggered by the second stop, and is added with an image showing the final victory or defeat triggered by the third stop. Information indicating the number is displayed. In addition, if the result of the additional battle (only during ART) is victory, success, etc., it is suggested that the result of the game is advantageous for the player, and the number of AT games is added in the game. Notify that you have won. On the other hand, if the result of the additional battle (only during ART) is defeat, failure, etc., it will be notified that the additional AT game number was not won in the game, but AT in the game. Although you have won the additional game number, as a result of the additional battle (only during ART), you will be notified of defeat, failure, etc., and then the specified conditions (next additional battle (only during ART) will be executed, the specified game. By satisfying the number elapsed, the operation of the bet button D220 for the next game, etc.), it may be notified that the number of AT games has been added.

In both the "confrontation production" and the "additional battle (only during ART)", the characters are not only life forms such as humans and animals, but also artificial life forms such as robots and pseudo. Characters can include not only moving objects such as life forms that can be seen by the player when they act with some intention, but also inorganic objects such as vehicles, battleships, and weapons.

<"Common navigation production" of production group 7>
The "common navigation effect" is an effect of displaying a common navigation effect image while the background image (the above-mentioned stage effect) previously displayed on the effect display device S40 is displayed. For example, it is suggested that the image for the common navigation effect is displayed in a part of the area of the effect display device S40 for a predetermined time by the operation of the start lever D50, and then the rare role is won in the game. Perform the production. The details will be described later, but the common navigation effect is an effect that can be executed when a rare role is won in the AT preparation state 1 or the AT preparation state 2. In the AT preparation state 1 and the AT preparation state 2, the player has a feeling of expectation for the ball to be ejected after the transition to the AT in-progress state. There is a risk that the motivation for playing will be discouraged if a fanning effect is performed. Therefore, in the AT preparation state 1 and the AT preparation state 2, when the rare role is won, the fact that the rare role is won is notified, but the number of AT games is not added as in the AT state. Even in this case, the additional battle is not performed to incite the success or failure of the additional AT games.

<"Aiming production" of production group 8>
For example, when the reverse push 7-match replay (replay-B) or the forward push 7-match replay (replay-C) is won, the "aiming effect" displays character information, image information, etc. on the effect display device S40. It is an effect performed by doing (see FIG. 158). For example, an image prompting the alignment of the symbols 7 is displayed on the effect display device S40 triggered by the operation of the start lever D50. The player can perform a stop operation aiming at the symbol 7 according to the image, and align the symbol 7 with a line that is not a valid line (sometimes also referred to as an invalid line). If the player can align the symbols 7 according to the "aiming effect" in the game state where the lottery for adding the number of AT games can be executed, such as when the state related to AT is in the AT state, the number of AT games is added. It is configured to notify you that you have won. It should be noted that the reverse push 7-match replay (replay-B) and the forward push 7-match replay (replay-C) are replays in which the player's profit does not differ depending on the push order (not the push order replay). , When the reverse push 7-match replay (replay-B) or the forward push 7-match replay (replay-C) is won, the aiming effect occurs, and the game is not executed in the push order suggested by the aiming effect. In this case, it is not notified that the number of AT games has been added, but since the number of AT games has been won, the number of added games will be notified at the timing when the predetermined condition is satisfied. In addition, as another production mode of the aiming effect, when the push order bell role or the push order replaying role is won, the image such as "? ...?" Without notifying the push order that is the most profitable. Is displayed, and the effect mode of executing the push order guessing game in which the player guesses the correct push order (the push order with the highest profit) by himself / herself can be mentioned. In such a case, for example, when the player executes the game in the order of pressing the correct answer in a low probability state, the player is configured to shift to the AT state, which is highly profitable for the player, and is high for the player. While notifying that it will be profitable, if the player executes the game in the order of pushing incorrect answers, it is configured to maintain a low probability state that does not result in high profit for the player, and does not result in high profit for the player. It may be configured to notify the fact.

<"Push order navigation production">
In addition, although the details will be described later, as described above, the "push order navigation effect" includes re-game-B, re-game-C, re-game-D1 to re-game-D3, and winning-A1-winning-. A6, re-game-E1 to re-game-E3, re-game-F1 to re-game-F3, etc. The most advantageous role is to display the push order to be stopped and displayed as an image or text, or to output it by voice. By operating the stop button D40 according to the displayed or output information, the player stops and displays the most advantageous symbol, obtains a specified number of medals, or shifts to an advantageous gaming state. Can be done. Even if the player wins a re-game (a re-game that is not a push-order re-game) in which the player's profit does not differ depending on the push order of the re-game-B, re-game-C, etc. described above, the push order navigation effect is executed. It may be configured to be possible.

As described above, the "directing" of the "no directing" of the directing group 1 does not include the stage directing or the push order navigation directing, and even when the "no directing" of the group 1 is selected. Stage production and push order navigation production are executed. In addition, the push order navigation effect can be executed together with the stage effect and the advance notice effect. For example, the push order navigation effect can be executed together with the stage effect, or the push order navigation effect can be executed together with the cut-in effect.

<< Relationship between the type of production and the operation (playback) start timing of the production >>
FIG. 136 is a table showing the relationship between the type of effect and the operation (reproduction) start timing of the effect. As shown in FIG. 136, the operation (reproduction) start timing of the effect includes the operation timing of the start lever, the rotation start timing of the reel, the first reel stop acceptance timing, and the second reel stop acceptance timing. , There is a third reel stop acceptance timing and a bet button operation timing. The rotation start timing of the reel can also be determined by the sub control board S by receiving the signal from the main control board M.

The types of production include "no production" in production group 1, "character production" in production group 2, "conversation production" in production group 3, and "cut-in production" in production group 4. There are "confrontation production" of group 5, "additional battle" of production group 6, "common navigation production" of production group 7, and "aiming production" of production group 8.

<"No production" of production group 1>
In the "no effect" of the effect group 1, the background image (stage effect) is continuously displayed from the operation timing of the start lever to the operation timing of the bet button of the next game. That is, the background image continues to be displayed throughout the game, but no other new preview image or the like is displayed.

<"Character production" of production group 2>
In the "character effect" of the effect group 2, the character image is displayed so as to be superimposed on the background image at the subsequent reel rotation start timing without executing the effect at the operation timing of the start lever. As described above, the display of the character image may be an additional decoration to the background image, and the character may be displayed at any timing from the reel rotation start timing to the operation timing of the bet button of the next game. The image of the character displayed or the image of the character displayed in advance may execute the action. It should be noted that the character's operation may be displayed so as to change at any of the first reel stop acceptance timing, the second reel stop acceptance timing, and the third reel stop acceptance timing. It is not necessary to change the movement of the character at each of these timings, and the movement of the character can be changed at any timing.

In this case, the operation timing of the bet button in the next game does not develop into a confrontation effect (additional battle). In addition, it may be configured to develop into a confrontation effect (additional battle) at the operation timing of the bet button in the next game.

<"Conversation production" of production group 3>
In the "conversation effect" of the effect group 3, the effect is not executed at the operation timing of the start lever D50, but is started by displaying the image of the display frame so as to be superimposed on the background image at the subsequent reel rotation start timing. In "conversation production", character information related to the state of the game and the story of the production is displayed in the inner area of the display frame at any timing from the reel rotation start timing of the game to the operation timing of the bet button of the next game. It should be done. It should be noted that the content of the character information may be displayed so as to change depending on the timing of accepting the stop of the first reel, the timing of accepting the stop of the second reel, and the timing of accepting the stop of the third reel. It is not necessary to change the content of the character information at each of these timings, and the content of the character information can be changed at any timing. The display of the character information may be an additional decoration to the background image. As a specific example in which the content of the character information changes, the image of the dialogue frame is displayed at the reel rotation start timing, and the dialogue corresponding to the character A is displayed together with the image of the character A at the first stop timing. After that, at the third stop timing, a new dialogue frame, an image of the character B, and dialogue corresponding to the character B may be displayed.

In this case, the operation timing of the bet button in the next game does not develop into a confrontation effect (additional battle). In addition, it may be configured to develop into a confrontation effect (additional battle) at the operation timing of the bet button in the next game.

<"Cut-in production" of production group 4>
In the "cut-in effect" of the effect group 4, the effect is executed at the operation timing of the start lever D50 (for example, a cut-in warning sound, a cut-in image, etc.). Next, at the timing of the start of rotation of the reel, the background image is switched to the effect image for announcing the small role. Further, from the timing of accepting the stop of the first reel to the timing of accepting the stop of the third reel, the condition device won in the game is displayed by using the effect image for notifying the small winning combination. It is also possible to sequentially switch and display the effect image for small role notification at each of the first reel stop acceptance timing to the third reel stop acceptance timing.

In this case, the confrontation effect (additional battle) may develop at the operation timing of the bet button in the next game. In this way, when the cut-in effect is executed, the effect is executed at the operation timing of the start lever, and in the above-mentioned character effect and conversation effect, the effect is not executed at the operation timing of the start lever. By configuring the game that executes the cut-in effect to be more profitable for the player than the game that executes the character effect or the conversation effect, the player can produce the effect at the operation timing of the start lever. When executed, we can expect that a highly profitable event will occur. In addition, in the game in which the character production and the conversation production are executed, a highly profitable event does not occur (it does not occur in the bonus winning game, it does not occur in the AT lottery winning game, it does not occur in the rare role winning game, etc.). May be good.

<"Confrontation production" of production group 5 and "Additional battle (only during ART)" of group 6>
In the "confrontation production" of the production group 5 and the "additional battle (only during ART)" of the group 6, at least two types of characters confront each other between the operation timing of the start lever and the operation timing of the bet button of the next game. The image to be displayed is displayed. In addition, when the rare role is won in the immediately preceding game and the cut-in effect is executed, the "confrontation effect" or the "additional battle (ART)" can be performed by operating the bet button after the end of the immediately preceding game. It may be an effect mode in which "confrontation effect" or "additional battle (only during ART)" is started from the operation timing of the start lever of the game when the notification that "medium only)" is started. The "confrontation production" of the production group 5 is mainly used for bonus notification, and the additional battle (dedicated during ART) is mainly used for additional notification of the number of AT games. Further, it is possible to display so that the confrontation state gradually changes from the first reel stop acceptance timing to the third reel stop acceptance timing. For example, it is possible to display an image in which the turn of the confrontation changes from the first reel stop acceptance timing to the third reel stop acceptance timing. In addition, the "confrontation effect" can be executed in a plurality of consecutive games. It is possible to display an image in which a provisional victory or defeat is determined for each of a plurality of games, and the final victory or defeat is determined in the final game. By doing so, it is possible to maintain or increase the player's expectation over a plurality of consecutive games.

<Group 7 "common navigation production">
In the "common navigation effect" of the group 7, as described above, the image for the common navigation effect is displayed triggered by the operation of the start lever D50.

In this case, the confrontation effect (additional battle) may develop at the operation timing of the bet button in the next game.

<Group 8 "Aiming">
In Group 8's "Aiming Production", as mentioned above, when the reverse push 7-match replay (replay-B) or the forward push 7-match replay (replay-C) is won, there is information that 7 will be aligned. Is displayed. Alternatively, when the push order bell role or the push order replay game is won, an image such as "? ・? ・?" Is displayed without notifying the push order that is the most profitable, and the correct answer is given to the player. It is also possible to execute a push order guessing game in which the push order (the push order that is the most profitable) is guessed by oneself.

In this case, the background image (stage effect) can be switched depending on whether or not the predetermined combination can be stopped and displayed at the operation timing of the bet button in the next game.

<"Push order navigation production">
In the "push order navigation effect", as described above, the push order is displayed in images or characters or output by voice for each of the first reel stop reception timing to the third reel stop reception timing.

In this case, the confrontation effect (additional battle) may develop at the operation timing of the bet button in the next game.

<Processing when operating the start lever>
Next, FIG. 137 is a subroutine showing a process during start lever operation that is called and executed in the process of step 2300 of FIG.

First, in step 2302, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the state related to AT is the AT-in-progress state. In the case of Yes in step 2302, in other words, when the state related to AT is the AT-in-AT state, in step 2350, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads and executes the AT-in-time process when the start lever is operated, which will be described later. , Move to the next process (process of step 2800). The determination process in step 2302 is not only when the state related to AT is "AT in progress", but also in "AT in progress after falling", "specialized state after falling", and "state after bell overflow". Even in this case, it is determined to be YES.

Next, in the case of No in step 2302, in other words, if the state related to AT is not in the AT state, in step 2304, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the state related to AT is a special precursor state. Is determined. In the case of Yes in step 2304, in other words, when the state related to AT is the specialization precursor state, in step 2400, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads out the specialization precursor processing at the time of start lever operation, which will be described later. Execute and move to the next process (process of step 2800).

Next, in the case of No in step 2304, in other words, when the state related to AT is not the "specialization precursor state", in step 2306, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has the state related to AT "additional specialization state". It is determined whether or not it is. In the case of Yes in step 2306, in other words, when the state related to AT is the "addition specialization state", in step 2450, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S performs the addition specialization process when the start lever is operated, which will be described later. It is read and executed, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2800).

Next, in the case of No in step 2306, in other words, when the state related to AT is not the "additional specialization state", in step 2307, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S changes the state related to AT to "advantageous BB inside". It is determined whether or not it is a "game". In the case of Yes in step 2307, in other words, when the state related to AT is "advantageous BB internal intermediate game", in step 2700, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is a subroutine of advantageous BB internal intermediate processing when the start lever is operated. Is called and executed, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2800).

In the case of No in step 2307, in other words, if the state related to AT is not "advantageous BB internal middle game", in step 2308, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is whether or not the RT state is "RT1". To judge. In the case of Yes in step 2308, in other words, when the RT state is "RT1", in step 2310, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has no push order navigation (push order navigation is the state related to AT). It is a state related to AT that does not occur, and it is determined whether or not it is a "low probability state", a "normal BB internal game", a "normal BB state", or the like). In the case of Yes in step 2310, in other words, when the state related to AT is no push order navigation, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines in step 2312 whether or not the avoidance command has been received. As described above, the sub-control board S side receives the reverse push instruction command, the reverse push avoidance command, the forward push instruction command, and the forward push avoidance command, so that the effect related to the push order navigation cannot be executed. When the AT addition lottery is won, the main control board M side sends a command related to the AT addition lottery winning and the number of AT addition games to the sub control board S side, and the sub control board S side receives the command. In addition, the sub-control board S side may be configured to determine the execution timing and the effect mode of the effect related to the push order navigation.

In the case of Yes in step 2312, in other words, when the avoidance command is received, in step 2314, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays an image for avoiding establishment as a push order navigation display in the first numerical display mode group. Is displayed on the effect display device S40, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2110). As described above, in the third embodiment, when the number of games elapses from the situation of "RT1" and "AT in progress" and the AT counter value becomes 0, the situation shifts to "RT1" and "low probability state". If you win the reverse push white 7 match replay or the forward push black 7 match replay (before the replay 04 is stopped and displayed), the number of AT games will not be added, so white seven or black seven Is configured to navigate the push order that is not in a straight line. In addition, when the number of games elapses from the situation of "RT1" and "AT in progress" and the AT counter value becomes 0, and the situation shifts to "RT1" and "low probability state", it is still an "advantageous section". The push order navigation is generated for the push order bell, but the push order navigation may not be generated for the push order replay.

When the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is No in step 2308, No in step 2310, and No in step 2312, the CPUSC displays the effect image and the background image in step 2316 based on the state related to AT, and then displays the effect image and the background image. (Processing in step 2800).

<Processing during AT when operating the start lever>
Next, FIG. 138 is a subroutine showing a process during AT at the time of start lever operation, which is called and executed in the process of step 2350 of FIG. 137.

First, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads information about the condition device related to the game in step 2352, confirms the winning / replay winning information related to the game in step 2354, and sets the instruction number in step 2356. Check the relevant command. In this way, in a state related to AT where push order navigation such as "AT in progress" can be executed, the main control board M sends a command related to winning / replay winning information to the sub control board S side, and "low". When sending the production group number in a state related to AT where push order navigation such as "probability state" is not executed (also applicable when the game section is "normal section"), the command related to the instruction number is not sent. good. Furthermore, the main control board M transmits the effect group number to the effect group number and the instruction number in the same manner as in the state related to the AT in which the push order navigation is not executed even if the state is related to the AT in which the push order navigation can be executed. Based on the command, the push order bell (or push order replay) may be won, and the correct push order may be grasped. For example, the push order navigation display when the push order bell is executed and the push order navigation display of the push order re-game are displayed in the same display mode group (for example, the push order is notified by a number and the display color related to the number is the same. ) Can be applied when it is configured to be displayed. Further, in such a configuration, the effect display device S40 is configured to display an effect image (for example, a character image) different from the push order navigation display when the push order navigation is executed, and the push order bell is used. It may be configured to display different production images when the push order navigation is executed and when the push order navigation related to the push order replay is executed.

Next, in step 2358, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the condition device of the game is a push order bell. Here, the push order bell is one of the above-mentioned winning-A1 to winning-A6.

In the case of Yes in step 2358, in other words, when the condition device of the game is a push order bell, in step 2360, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has 6 selections of the push order bell as the push order navigation display. An image suggesting the correct pressing order of the pressing order of is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the first numerical display mode group. The pressing order is information in which each of the first stop button, the second stop button, and the third stop button is associated with the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, if you win the prize-A1 which is the push order bell, the number suggesting the push order corresponding to the push order "left → middle → right" that can obtain the maximum number of payouts is circled. Display in the display mode.

Next, if No in step 2358, in other words, if the condition device of the game is not a push order bell, in step 2362, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines that the condition device of the game is a push order replay. It is determined whether or not it is. Here, the push order re-game is one of re-game-A and re-game-D1 to D3.

In the case of Yes in step 2362, in other words, when the condition device of the game is the push order replay, in step 2364, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the push order navigation as the push order replay. An image suggesting the correct pressing order among the three-choice pressing order is displayed on the effect display device S40. Here, since there are three push orders, the information is such that the first stop button corresponds to any of the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, when the first stop button is the left stop button D41, only the number 1 is displayed as the push order navigation display.

In the case of No in step 2362, in other words, when the condition device of the game is a push order replay, in step 2366, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the avoidance command has been received. .. In the case of Yes in step 2366, in other words, when the avoidance command is received, in step 2368, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the image for avoiding establishment as the push order navigation display in the first numerical display mode. It is displayed on the effect display device S40 as a group.

Next, if No in step 2366, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the process of step 2360, 2364 or 2368 described above, and then displays the background image during AT on the effect display device S40 in step 2370.

Next, in step 2372, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the number of AT remaining games is 10 games or less. In the case of Yes in step 2372, in other words, when the number of AT remaining games is 10 games or less, in step 2374, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the number of AT remaining games in display mode B (display mode described later). It is displayed on the effect display device S40 in a display mode that is less conspicuous than A).

Next, in step 2376, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the forward push instruction command has been received. In the case of Yes in step 2376, in other words, when a forward push instruction command is received, in step 2378, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays an image for avoiding establishment as a push order navigation display. It is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the numerical display mode group.

In the case of No in step 2376, or when the process of step 2378 is executed, in step 2380, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the reverse push instruction command has been received. In the case of Yes in step 2380, in other words, when the reverse push instruction command is received, in step 2382, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays an image for avoiding establishment as a push order navigation display. It is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the numerical display mode group.

The CPUSC of the sub-control board S shifts to the next process (process of step 2800) in the case of No in step 2380 or when the process of step 2382 is executed.

In the case of No in step 2372, in other words, when the number of AT remaining games is 11 games or more, in step 2384, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the number of AT remaining games in the display mode A (the above-mentioned display mode). It is displayed on the effect display device S40 in a display mode that is more conspicuous than B).

Next, in step 2386, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the forward push instruction command has been received. In the case of Yes in step 2386, in other words, when the forward push instruction command is received, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S corresponds to "left → middle → right" as the push order navigation display in step 2388. An image suggesting the order of pressing is displayed on the effect display device S40 as an image of an arrow.

In step 2386, if No, or if the process of step 2388 is executed, in step 2390, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the reverse push instruction command has been received. In the case of Yes in step 2390, in other words, when the reverse push instruction command is received, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S corresponds to "right → middle → left" as the push order navigation display in step 2392. An image suggesting the order of pressing is displayed on the effect display device S40 as an image of an arrow.

If the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is No in step 2390, or if the process of step 2392 is executed, the CPU SC shifts to the next process (process of step 2800). In this way, when the number of remaining AT games is small, in other words, when the display of the number of remaining AT games is displayed in the display mode B, which is a display mode that is more conspicuous than the display mode A, the forward push instruction command or the reverse Even if a push instruction command is received, the effect of displaying "Aim for 7!" Along with the image of the arrow is not executed, and the white seven and black seven do not stop and display on the invalid line. It is configured to execute the push order navigation. With this configuration, when the number of AT remaining games is small, the number of AT remaining games is displayed in the display mode B, which is a display mode that encourages the player to have a small number of AT remaining games. Can be configured so as not to interfere with the visibility of the display of the number of remaining AT games in the display mode B by displaying an arrow image or "Aim for 7!". Similarly, in a situation where the number of remaining AT games displayed on the effect display device S40 is small, a continuous effect (for example, a state related to AT in which push order navigation can be executed) is continued. , Battle effect) is configured so that the arrow image and "Aim for 7!" Are not displayed during the battle effect so as not to interfere with the visibility of the battle effect. be able to. Further, by configuring in this way, even when the number of remaining AT games in the effect display device S40 becomes 0 and it is displayed that the battle effect is defeated and the "AT in progress state" ends, the battle effect is in progress. If a forward push instruction command or a reverse push instruction command has been received, the forward push instruction command or the reverse push command is performed at the operation timing of the bet button D220 after the message that "AT in progress" is terminated is displayed. Notify the number of AT additional games based on the instruction command (based on the winning of forward push black 7 replay or reverse push white 7 replay), that is, notify that the number of AT games has been added to the game that won the AT additional lottery. Instead, it can be configured to notify that the number of AT games has been added at a subsequent timing, and the fun of the game is enhanced.

<Specialized precursor processing when operating the start lever>
Next, FIG. 139 is a subroutine showing a special precursor process at the time of start lever operation, which is called and executed in the process of step 2400 of FIG. 137.

First, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads information about the condition device related to the game in step 2402, confirms the winning / replay winning information related to the game in step 2404, and uses the instruction number in step 2406. Check the relevant command. In this way, in a state related to AT where push order navigation such as "AT in progress" can be executed, the main control board M sends a command related to winning / replay winning information to the sub control board S side, and "low". When sending the production group number in a state related to AT where push order navigation such as "probability state" is not executed (also applicable when the game section is "normal section"), the command related to the instruction number is not sent. good. Furthermore, the main control board M transmits the effect group number to the effect group number and the instruction number in the same manner as in the state related to the AT in which the push order navigation is not executed even if the state is related to the AT in which the push order navigation can be executed. Based on the command, the push order bell (or push order replay) may be won, and the correct push order may be grasped.

Next, in step 2408, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the condition device of the game is a push order bell. Here, the push order bell is one of the above-mentioned winning-A1 to winning-A6.

In the case of Yes in step 2408, in other words, when the condition device of the game is a push order bell, in step 2410, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has 6 selections of the push order bell as the push order navigation display. An image suggesting the correct pressing order of the pressing order of is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the second numerical display mode group. The pressing order is information in which each of the first stop button, the second stop button, and the third stop button is associated with the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, if you win the prize-A2, which is the push order bell, a number indicating the push order corresponding to the push order "left → right → middle" that can obtain the maximum number of payouts is enclosed in a star. Display in the display mode. In the first numerical display mode group and the second numerical display mode group described above, the numerical values suggesting the push order may be displayed in different display mode groups. For example, the first numerical display mode group is a numerical value. Can be displayed in blue, and the second number display mode group can display numbers in red and the like.

Next, in the case of No in step 2408, in other words, when the condition device of the game is not the push order bell, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is in step 2412, and the condition device of the game is the push order replay. It is determined whether or not it is. Here, the push order re-game is one of re-game-A and re-game-D1 to D3.

In the case of Yes in step 2412, in other words, when the condition device of the game is the push order replay, in step 2414, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the push order navigation as the push order replay. An image suggesting the correct pressing order among the three-choice pressing order is displayed on the effect display device S40. Here, since there are three push orders, the information is such that the first stop button corresponds to any of the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, when the first stop button is the left stop button D41 as the correct push order, the number "1" is displayed on the lower left side from the center of the effect display device S40, and the first stop button is the middle stop button D42. In the case of, the number "1" is displayed on the lower right side of the center of the effect display device S40, and when the first stop button is the right stop button D43, it is on the lower right side of the center of the effect display device S40. The number "1" is displayed as a push order navigation display. In other words, the push order information is displayed at a position close to the stop button D40 corresponding to the reel to be stopped in the effect display device S40.

Next, in the case of No in step 2412, in other words, if the condition device of the game is not a push order replay, in step 2416, whether or not the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has received the forward push instruction command. To judge. In the case of Yes in step 2416, in other words, when the forward push instruction command is received, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S corresponds to "left → middle → right" as the push order navigation display in step 2418. An image suggesting the pressing order is displayed on the effect display device S40 as an image of an arrow.

Next, in the case of No in step 2416, in other words, if the forward push instruction command has not been received, in step 2420, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the reverse push instruction command has been received. to decide. In the case of Yes in step 2420, in other words, when the reverse push instruction command is received, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S corresponds to "right-> middle-> left" as the push order navigation display in step 2422. An image suggesting the pressing order is displayed on the effect display device S40 as an image of an arrow.

Next, in the case of No in step 2420, in other words, if the reverse push instruction command has not been received, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines in step 2424 whether or not the avoidance command has been received. .. In the case of Yes in step 2424, in other words, when the avoidance command is received, in step 2426, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays an image for avoiding establishment as a push order navigation display in the second numerical display mode. It is displayed on the effect display device S40 as a group.

Next, when the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the processes of steps 2410, 2414, 2418, 2422, and 2426, or when No in step 2424, the background image during AT is displayed in step 2428. It is displayed on the device S40, and in step 2430, the number of remaining AT games is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the display mode A, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2800).

<Special processing for adding when operating the start lever>
Next, FIG. 140 is a subroutine showing the addition specialization process at the time of start lever operation, which is called and executed in the process of step 2450 of FIG. 137.

First, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads information about the condition device related to the game in step 2452, confirms the winning / replay winning information related to the game in step 2454, and uses the instruction number in step 2456. Check the relevant command. In this way, in a state related to AT where push order navigation such as "AT in progress" can be executed, the main control board M sends a command related to winning / replay winning information to the sub control board S side, and "low". When sending the production group number in a state related to AT where push order navigation such as "probability state" is not executed (also applicable when the game section is "normal section"), the command related to the instruction number is not sent. good. Furthermore, the main control board M transmits the effect group number to the effect group number and the instruction number in the same manner as in the state related to the AT in which the push order navigation is not executed even if the state is related to the AT in which the push order navigation can be executed. Based on the command, the push order bell (or push order replay) may be won, and the correct push order may be grasped.

Next, in step 2458, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the condition device of the game is a push order bell or a common bell. Here, the push order bell is one of the above-mentioned winning-A1 to winning-A6.

In the case of Yes in step 2458, in other words, if the condition device of the game is a push order bell or a common bell, in step 2460, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the push order bell as a push order navigation display. An image suggesting the correct pressing order among the six-choice pressing order is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the second numerical display mode group. The pressing order is information in which each of the first stop button, the second stop button, and the third stop button is associated with the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, if you win the prize-A4, which is the push order bell, the number suggesting the push order corresponding to the push order "right → left → middle" that can obtain the maximum number of payouts is surrounded by a star. It is displayed in the display mode. In the first numerical display mode group and the second numerical display mode group described above, the numerical values suggesting the push order may be displayed in different display mode groups. For example, the first numerical display mode group is a numerical value. Can be displayed in blue, and the second number display mode group can display numbers in red and the like.

Next, if No in step 2458 described above, in other words, if the condition device of the game is neither a push order bell nor a common bell, in step 2462, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is the condition of the game. The device determines whether or not it is a push order replay. Here, the push order re-game is one of re-game-A and re-game-D1 to D3.

In the case of Yes in step 2462, in other words, when the condition device of the game is the push order replay, in step 2464, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the push order navigation as the push order replay. An image suggesting the correct pressing order among the three-choice pressing order is displayed on the effect display device S40. Here, since there are three push orders, the information is such that the first stop button corresponds to any of the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, when the first stop button is the left stop button D41 as the correct push order, the number "1" is displayed on the lower left side from the center of the effect display device S40, and the first stop button is the middle stop button D42. In the case of, the number "1" is displayed on the lower right side of the center of the effect display device S40, and when the first stop button is the right stop button D43, it is on the lower right side of the center of the effect display device S40. The number "1" is displayed as a push order navigation display. In other words, the push order information is displayed at a position close to the stop switch corresponding to the reel to be stopped.

Next, if No in step 2462 described above, in other words, if the condition device of the game is not a push order replay, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S received the forward push instruction command in step 2466. Judge whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 2466, in other words, when the forward push instruction command is received, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S corresponds to "left → middle → right" as the push order navigation display in step 2468. An image suggesting the pressing order is displayed on the effect display device S40 as an image of an arrow. That is, since the pressing order is forward pressing, the first stop button, the second stop button, and the third stop button are, in order, the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43, from left to right. The image of the arrow pointing toward can suggest the push order.

Next, in the case of No in step 2466 described above, in other words, if the forward push instruction command has not been received, whether or not the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has received the reverse push instruction command in step 2470. Is determined. In the case of Yes in step 2470, in other words, when the reverse push instruction command is received, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S corresponds to "right-> middle-> left" as the reverse push navigation display in step 2472. An image suggesting the pressing order is displayed on the effect display device S40 as an image of an arrow. That is, since the pressing order is reverse pressing, the first stop button, the second stop button, and the third stop button are, in order, a right stop button D43, a middle stop button D42, and a left stop button D41, from right to left. The image of the arrow pointing toward can suggest the push order.

Next, in the case of No in step 2470 described above, in other words, if the reverse push instruction command has not been received, in step 2474, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the avoidance command has been received. judge. In the case of Yes in step 2474, in other words, when the avoidance command is received, in step 2476, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays an image for avoiding establishment as a push order navigation display in the first numerical display mode. It is displayed on the effect display device S40 as a group. Here, the avoidance command is a general term for both the forward push avoidance command and the reverse push avoidance command. Therefore, the process of step 2476 is executed regardless of whether the forward push avoidance command is received or the reverse push avoidance command is received. For example, when a forward push avoidance command is received, the number "1" is displayed on the lower right side of the center of the effect display device S40 in order to avoid the forward push "left → middle → right". Information as if the one stop button is the right stop button D43 is displayed as a push order navigation display.

Next, in the case of No in step 2474 described above, in other words, when the avoidance command is not received, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S does not display the push order navigation in step 2478.

Next, when the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the process of steps 2460, 2464, 2468, 2472, 2476 or 2478 described above, in step 2480, the background image during AT is displayed on the effect display device S40. In step 2482, the number of AT remaining games is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the display mode A, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2800).

<Advantageous BB internal processing when operating the start lever>
Next, FIG. 141 is a subroutine showing the addition specialization process at the time of start lever operation, which is called and executed in the process of step 2700 of FIG. 137.

First, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads information about the condition device related to the game in step 2702, confirms the winning / replay winning information related to the game in step 2704, and sets the instruction number in step 2706. Check the relevant command. In this way, in a state related to AT where push order navigation such as "AT in progress" can be executed, the main control board M sends a command related to winning / replay winning information to the sub control board S side, and "low". When sending the production group number in a state related to AT where push order navigation such as "probability state" is not executed (also applicable when the game section is "normal section"), the command related to the instruction number is not sent. good. Furthermore, the main control board M transmits the effect group number to the effect group number and the instruction number in the same manner as in the state related to the AT in which the push order navigation is not executed even if the state is related to the AT in which the push order navigation can be executed. Based on the command, the push order bell (or push order replay) may be won, and the correct push order may be grasped.

Next, in step 2708, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a predetermined game (5 games) has elapsed since the transition to the advantageous BB internal middle game. In the case of Yes in step 2708, in other words, if a predetermined game (5 games) has not elapsed since the transition to the advantageous BB internal middle game, in step 2710, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is the game. Condition The device determines whether it is a push order bell or a common bell. Here, the push order bell is one of the above-mentioned winning-A1 to winning-A6.

In the case of Yes in step 2710, in other words, if the condition device of the game is a push order bell or a common bell, in step 2712, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the push order bell as a push order navigation display. An image suggesting the correct pressing order among the six-choice pressing order is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the first numerical display mode group. The pressing order is information in which each of the first stop button, the second stop button, and the third stop button is associated with the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, if you win the prize-A4, which is the push order bell, the number suggesting the push order corresponding to the push order "right → left → middle" that can obtain the maximum number of payouts is surrounded by a star. It is displayed in the display mode. In the first numerical display mode group and the second numerical display mode group described above, the numerical values suggesting the push order may be displayed in different display mode groups. For example, the first numerical display mode group is a numerical value. Can be displayed in blue, and the second number display mode group can display numbers in red and the like.

Next, if No in step 2710 described above, in other words, if the condition device of the game is neither a push order bell nor a common bell, in step 2714, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is the condition of the game. The device determines whether or not it is a push order replay. Here, the push order re-game is one of re-game-A and re-game-D1 to D3.

In the case of Yes in step 2714, in other words, if the condition device of the game is a push order replay, in step 2716, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the push order navigation as a push order replay. An image suggesting the correct pressing order among the three-choice pressing order is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the first numerical display mode group. Here, since there are three push orders, the information is such that the first stop button corresponds to any of the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, when the first stop button is the left stop button D41 as the correct push order, the number "1" is displayed on the lower left side from the center of the effect display device S40, and the first stop button is the middle stop button D42. In the case of, the number "1" is displayed on the lower right side of the center of the effect display device S40, and when the first stop button is the right stop button D43, it is on the lower right side of the center of the effect display device S40. The number "1" is displayed as a push order navigation display. In other words, the push order information is displayed at a position close to the stop switch corresponding to the reel to be stopped.

Next, in the case of No in step 2714 described above, in other words, when the condition device of the game is not a push order replay, in step 2718, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S received a command related to 7 replays. Judge whether or not. Here, the forward push instruction command, the reverse push instruction command, the forward push avoidance command, and the reverse push avoidance command are collectively referred to as a 7 replay command. In the case of Yes in step 2718, in other words, when a command related to 7 replays is received, in step 2720, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays an image for avoiding establishment as a push order navigation display as the first number. It is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the display mode group.

Next, when the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the process of steps 2712, 2716, and 2720 described above, or when No in step 2718, the background image during AT is displayed on the effect display device S40 in step 2722. It is displayed, and in step 2724, the number of AT remaining games is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the display mode A, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2800).

In the case of No in step 2708, in other words, when a predetermined game (5 games) has elapsed after shifting to the advantageous BB internal middle game, in step 2726, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is the effect display device S40. At, it is notified that the BB has been won (in this process, the push order navigation is not displayed), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2110).

<Processing at the time of receiving the 1st body stop>
Next, FIG. 142 is a subroutine showing the first processing at the time of receiving the body stop, which is called and executed in the processing of step 2500 in FIG.

Next, in step 2502, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the push order navigation is being displayed in the game. In the case of Yes in step 2502, in other words, when the push order navigation is being displayed, in step 2504, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has an operation of the stop button based on the correct push order as the first stop. Judge whether or not.

Next, in the case of Yes in step 2504, in other words, if there is an operation of the stop button based on the correct pressing order as the first stop, in step 2506, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is displayed in the pressing order navigation display. The display related to the first stop is erased, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2110).

Next, in the case of No in step 2504, in other words, if there is no operation of the stop button based on the correct pressing order as the first stop, in step 2508, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is forward-pressed navigation or reverse. It is determined whether or not the push order navigation related to the push navigation (the push order navigation instructing the forward push black replay or the reverse push white 7 replay to be aligned with the invalid line) is being displayed. In step 2508, in the case of Yes, in step 2510, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S darkens the push order navigation (continues to be darkened in the game), and moves to the next process (process of step 2110). Migrate.

If No in step 2508, in other words, if the push order navigation related to 7 replays is not being displayed, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S erases all the push order navigation displays in step 2512, and the push order fails. The effect is executed, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2110).

In the third embodiment, the push order navigation can be displayed even in the AT state after the fall, the bell overflow state, and the specialized state after the fall, and this first processing at the time of receiving the torso stop allows the display of the push order navigation. The display can be erased or dimmed.

<Processing at the time of receiving the second body stop>
Next, FIG. 143 is a subroutine showing the second processing at the time of receiving the body stop, which is called and executed in the processing of step 2550 of FIG.

Next, in step 2552, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the push order navigation is being displayed in the game. In the case of Yes in step 2552, in other words, when the push order navigation is being displayed, in step 2554, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the condition device related to the game is the push order bell. judge. In the case of Yes in step 2554, in other words, when the condition device related to the game is a push order bell, in step 2556, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is a stop button based on the correct push order as the second stop. Determine if there is an operation.

Next, in the case of Yes in step 2556, in other words, if there is an operation of the stop button based on the correct pressing order as the second stop, in step 2558, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is the second stop in the pressing order navigation display. 2 The display related to the stop is erased, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2110).

Next, in the case of No in step 2556, in other words, if there is no operation of the stop button based on the correct pressing order as the second stop, in step 2560, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays all the pressing order navigation displays. It is erased, the push order failure effect is executed, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2110).

Next, if No in step 2552, in other words, if the push order navigation is not displayed, or if No in step 2554, in other words, if the condition device related to the game is not a push order bell, immediately. , Move to the next process (process of step 2110).

In the third embodiment, the push order navigation can be displayed even in the case of the AT in progress state after the fall, the bell overflow state, and the specialization state after the fall, and this second processing at the time of receiving the torso stop. The display can be erased by.

<Processing at the time of receiving the 3rd body stop>
Next, FIG. 144 is a subroutine showing the third processing at the time of receiving the body stop, which is called and executed in the processing of step 2600 of FIG.

Next, in step 2602, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the push order navigation is being displayed in the game. In the case of Yes in step 2602, in other words, when the push order navigation is being displayed, in step 2604, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the condition device related to the game is the push order bell. judge. In the case of Yes in step 2604, in other words, when the condition device related to the game is a push order bell, in step 2606, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is a stop button based on the correct push order as the third stop. Determine if there is an operation.

Next, in the case of Yes in step 2606, in other words, if there is an operation of the stop button based on the pressing order of the correct answer as the third stop, in step 2608, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is produced as a successful pressing order effect. "GET!" Is displayed on the display device S40. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2606, in other words, when there is no operation of the stop button based on the correct pressing order as the third stop, in step 2610, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S performs the "GET" of the pressing order success effect. ! ”Is not displayed.

If No in step 2602 described above, in other words, if the push order navigation is not displayed, if No in step 2604, in other words, the condition device related to the game is not a push order bell, or step 2608 or 2610. In step 2612, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a command related to the number of AT-added games (command set in step 1517) has been received from the main side. As described above, the main control board M transmits a command indicating the number of remaining AT games to the sub control board S, and the sub control board S calculates the difference from the command indicating the number of remaining AT games received last time. It is also possible to determine whether or not the number of AT games has been added and the number of AT games added, and to display the number of AT games added.

Next, in the case of Yes in step 2612, in other words, when a command related to the number of AT games is received from the main side, in step 2614, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is an AT addition game on the effect display device S40. The number is displayed and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2110). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2612, in other words, when the command related to the number of AT games is not received from the main side, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is added to the AT on the effect display device S40 in step 2616. The process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2110) without displaying the number of games. Further, as a method of notifying the number of AT additional games, (1) all of the additional games are notified by the game, (2) a part of the additional games is notified by the game, and the remaining games are notified after the game. (3) The number of additional games is not notified in the game, and the games after the game (for example, when 7 replays are won, when the common bell is won (when the role that is not originally added), or a plurality of games are notified. After executing a game (continuous effect), the bet button D220 operation of the game in which the number of remaining games of the effect display device S40 is "0", or the next game of the game in which "0" is set, and the operation of the start lever D50. ) Can be notified.

In the third embodiment, the push order navigation can be displayed even in the case of the AT in progress state after the fall, the bell overflow state, and the specialization state after the fall. It is possible to execute a successful push order effect.

It should be noted that the common bell in the special addition state does not display the number of AT addition games even when stopped according to the push order navigation (the AT addition lottery is not performed in the common bell).

<< Production content determination process >>
<Outline of scenario decision and production decision>
The outline of the scenario decision and the production decision is as follows. In the third embodiment, six scenario lottery tables, T1, T2, T3, T6, T7, and T8, are defined as the scenario lottery table. Each of the scenario lottery tables defines three scenarios (scenarios 1 to 3) that can be selected and their selection probabilities. First, one scenario lottery table is selected from the six scenario lottery tables based on the state related to AT and the RT state. This scenario lottery table is a table for selecting one scenario from scenarios 1 to 3 by lottery processing.

Next, using the selected scenario lottery table, one scenario is selected from the three scenarios based on the conditional device won in the game. Each of the scenarios defines the production lottery table to be used and its order. The effect lottery table is a table for selecting one effect from a plurality of effects by lottery processing. The order of the effect lottery table is determined by the determined scenario, and the content (effect group) of the effect of each game is determined by the lottery process using the effect lottery table according to the determined order. That is, the scenario can determine the flow of production in a plurality of consecutive games.

In the third embodiment, as shown in scenario 1 of FIG. 147 (B), there is a scenario in which only the effect lottery table used in the first game (the game) is specified. The second and subsequent games of scenario 1 are defined as "no scenario". Therefore, when scenario 1 is selected in the first game, the second game of scenario 1 is "no scenario", so the scenario is executed in the determination process of step 4002 described later in the second game. If it is determined that the game has not been created, the process of drawing a scenario is executed in the process of step 4006, and a new scenario is selected. As described above, when the scenario 1 is selected in the game, a new scenario is selected by the lottery process in the next game. With this configuration, when scenario 1 is selected, it is possible to execute an effect that is completed in one game.

On the other hand, as shown in scenario 2 and scenario 3 of FIG. 147 (B), there is also a scenario in which a production lottery table used in each of a plurality of (for example, the first to fourth games) games is specified. When scenario 2 or 3 is selected, the effect lottery table assigned to each of the plurality of games specified in scenario 2 or 3 is selected in each game, and the content of the effect of each game is displayed. It is determined. With this configuration, when scenario 2 or 3 is selected, it is possible to execute a continuous effect over a plurality of games. In the case of scenario 2 or 3, since the fifth game is "no scenario", it is determined that the scenario is being executed in the judgment process of step 4002 described later up to the fifth game, and the scenario is executed in the process of step 4006. Is not executed.

In the third embodiment, an example in which each of the six scenario lottery tables can select three scenarios is shown, but the number of scenario lottery tables and the number of scenarios that each scenario lottery table can select are limited to these. It's not a thing. By increasing the number of scenario lottery tables and scenarios, it is possible to diversify the contents of the effects performed as the game progresses. On the other hand, by reducing the number of scenario lottery tables and scenarios, the processing can be lightened, the storage capacity of the required scenario lottery table can be reduced, and the processing can be simplified or speeded up. Hereinafter, specific processing will be described in detail.

<Details of scenario decision and production decision>
FIG. 145 is a subroutine showing an effect content determination process called and executed in the process of step 2800 of FIG. 135.

First, in step 4002, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the scenario is being executed in the game (whether or not the scenario is being executed and does not correspond to no scenario). As described above, the scenario defines the order of the effect lottery tables used to determine the content of the effect performed in each of one or more consecutive games. In the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 147 (A), three scenarios 1 to 3 are defined in the scenario lottery table. In each of scenarios 1 to 3, the number of placements is defined for each type of conditional device, and the ease of selection differs depending on the type of conditional device won in the game. The table number shown in FIG. 147 (A) shows an example when the denominator value is 256, but the denominator value is not limited to this value and may be other values such as 65536. Often, it can be appropriately determined according to the type of condition device, the type of effect, and the processing.

The scenario lottery table shown in FIG. 147 (A) shows, as an example, a scenario lottery table selected when the game section is a normal section and the RT state is RT0. The scenario lottery table selected in other gaming states is also defined in the same manner corresponding to the gaming section (normal section or advantageous section, etc.) and RT state (RT0, RT1, etc.), but is omitted here. In the following, a case where the game section is a normal section and the RT state is RT0 will be described as an example. In the following, the rare roles are common bell (winning-B), cherry (winning-C), watermelon A (winning-D), and watermelon B (winning-E), and the non-rare roles are other than the rare role. It is the role of. The rare role is just an example, and the common bell (winning-B) may be a non-rare role, or the re-game-B or the re-game-C may be a rare role.

In the example shown in FIG. 147 (A), scenario 1 is most likely to be selected when the conditional device is a loss or non-overlapping bonus (conditional device that does not overlap with the bonus) and is a non-rare combination (number setting). The value is 250). Scenario 1 may also be selected when the conditional device has a bonus overlap (number of digits is 24 or 12), and the conditional device is less than a rare combination (number of digits is 12). It is easy to be selected when it is a rare role (value of the number is 24). It should be noted that scenario 1 is not selected when the condition device is a non-overlapping bonus and is a rare combination (the value of the number is 0).

Further, scenario 2 of the example shown in FIG. 147 (A) is most likely to be selected when the condition device has a non-overlapping bonus and is a rare combination (the value of the number is 192). Next, scenario 2 is more likely to be selected when the conditional device has a bonus overlap (number of digits is 116 or 122), and the conditional device is a rare combination (number of digits) rather than a non-rare combination (number of digits is 116). When the value of is 122), it is a little easier to select. Further, scenario 2 is most difficult to be selected when the condition device is lost or non-overlapping bonus and is a non-rare role (the value of the number is 4).

Further, scenario 3 of the example shown in FIG. 147 (A) is most likely to be selected when the conditional device is a bonus overlap (number of digits is 116 or 122), and the conditional device is a non-rare combination (value of the number of digits). Is a little easier to select when it is a rare combination (value of the number is 122) than 116). Next, scenario 3 is likely to be selected when the conditional device is a non-overlapping bonus and a rare combination (value of the number is 64), and when the conditional device is lost or non-overlapping a bonus and is a non-rare combination (setting). The number value is the most difficult to select for 2).

As shown in FIG. 147 (B), in the scenario 1, the effect lottery table A is assigned in the first game (the game). In scenario 1, the production lottery table is not assigned to the second and subsequent games (after the next game of the game). That is, the scenario 1 is a scenario for determining only the content of the effect in the game, and is not for determining the content of the effect in a plurality of consecutive games.

Further, in scenario 2, in the first game (the game), the production lottery table A is assigned, in the second and third games, the production lottery table B is assigned, and in the fourth game, the production lottery table C is assigned. It is assigned, and in the fifth game, the production lottery table is not assigned. As described above, the scenario 2 is for determining the content of the effect in four consecutive games including the game.

Further, in scenario 3, in the first game (the game), the production lottery table A is assigned, in the second and third games, the production lottery table D is assigned, and in the fourth game, the production lottery table E is assigned. It is assigned, and in the fifth game, the production lottery table is not assigned. As described above, the scenario 3 is for determining the content of the effect in four consecutive games including the game.

As described above, in the third embodiment, the scenarios 2 and 3 are for determining the content of the production in the four consecutive games including the game, but the number of consecutive games is limited to four times. It is not a thing, and it may be more or less than this. When the number is large, it is possible to execute a production that makes the person feel a story, and when the number is small, the content of the production can be swiftly switched according to the winning condition device or the like. In this way, the condition device referred to when determining the scenario is a rare role, and the condition device referred to when determining the scenario includes a bonus (single bonus or a condition device overlapping with the bonus). ), It is configured so that it can be easily determined in scenario 2 or scenario 3. In other words, the condition device referred to when deciding the scenario is a rare role, and the condition device referred to when deciding the scenario includes a bonus (single bonus or a condition device overlapping with the bonus). In some cases, it is configured so that an effect based on the same scenario can be easily executed over a plurality of games. With this configuration, scenario 2 or scenario 3 is determined when there is a possibility that it will be highly profitable for the player such as when a rare role is won, which has a relatively high expectation of winning a bonus or AT lottery. , It can be configured so that it is easy to incite whether or not it will be highly profitable over multiple games.

If No in step 4002, in step 4004, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calls and executes the scenario lottery table determination process (FIG. 146) described later. As described above, in the third embodiment, six scenario lottery tables T1, T2, T3, T6, T7, and T8 are defined as the scenario lottery table, and one scenario lottery is performed by the scenario lottery table determination process. The table is decided.

Next, in step 4006, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines one of the scenarios 1 to 3 using the scenario lottery table determined in step 4004.

In the case of Yes in step 4002, or when the process of step 4006 is executed, in step 4008, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the effect lottery table. The process of step 4008 determines the effect lottery table defined in the scenario determined in the process of step 4006. By the process of step 4008, the effect lottery table to be used in the game can be determined.

Next, in step 4010, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the content of one specific effect by the lottery process using the effect lottery table determined in step 4008, and ends the subroutine. By the process of this step 4010, it is possible to determine the specific content of the effect of the game. Specifically, by the process of step 4010, one of the effect groups (contents of the effect) of the effect group 1 to the effect group 8 shown in FIGS. 148 (A) to 148 (C) is determined in step 4008. It is decided by the production lottery table.

In the third embodiment, the determination of the production content and the determination of the production group are synonymous, and each of the production group 1 to the production group 8 shown in FIGS. 148 (A) to 148 (C) is assigned to the production group 1. "No production" belongs to, "Character production" belongs to production group 2, "conversation production" belongs to production group 3, "cut-in production" belongs to production group 4, and production group 5 belongs to. "Confrontation production" belongs, "additional battle" belongs to production group 6, "common navigation production" belongs to production group 7, and "aiming production" belongs to production group 8. Therefore, in the third embodiment, by determining any one of the production groups 1 to 8, the specific production content belonging to the production group is determined.

Further, as shown in FIG. 147, in the following, the condition devices may be grouped and shown. The group "loss" belongs to the "loss" of the condition device shown in FIGS. 104 and 105. In the group "re-game", the condition devices shown in FIGS. 104 and 105 are "re-game-A", "re-game-B", "re-game-C", "re-game-D1-D3", and "re-game". "Game-E1 to E3" and "Re-game-F1 to F3" belong to it. The group "bell" belongs to "winning-A1 to A6", "winning-H", and "winning-I" of the condition devices shown in FIGS. 104 and 105. The group "rare role" includes "winning-B", "winning-C", "winning-D", and "winning-E" of the condition devices shown in FIGS. 104 and 105. The group "Type 1 BB" belongs to the condition devices "Type 1 BB-A", "Type 1 BB-B", and "Type 1 BB-C" shown in FIGS. 104 and 105.

Further, as shown in FIG. 147, the effect group number corresponds to each of the grouped condition devices (see FIG. 104). The production group number 0 corresponds to the group "missing" with no bonus duplication. The production group numbers 1, 2, 3, 4, 12, and 13 correspond to the group "replay" without overlapping bonuses. The production group number 5 corresponds to the group "bell" with no overlapping bonuses. The production group numbers 6, 7, 8 and 9 correspond to the group "rare role" without overlapping bonuses. In addition, the production group number 0 corresponds to the group "Type 1 BB" with overlapping bonuses, and the production group number 2 corresponds to the group "replay" with overlapping bonuses, and the group "Bell" with overlapping bonuses. Corresponds to the production group number 5, and the production group numbers 7, 8 and 9 correspond to the group "rare role" with overlapping bonuses.

Furthermore, in the following, the conditional device belonging to the group "rare role" may be collectively referred to simply as a rare role, and the conditional device belonging to the group "replay" and the group "bell" may be simply collectively referred to as a non-rare role. ..

As described above, when the winning / replay winning information related to the game is transmitted from the main control board M to the sub control board S side, if the winning / replay winning information can be obtained by an illegal act. , There is a high possibility that the push order (reel stop order) related to the game will be recognized, and an unreasonably high profit can be obtained. Therefore, when it is an advantageous section and the condition device has a push order, the winning / replay winning information is transmitted to the sub-control board S side (see steps 1458 and 1466 in FIG. 120). If it is a section or a standby section, or if it is an advantageous section and the condition device does not have a push order, the effect group number masked with the winning / replay winning information is transmitted to the sub-control board S side. (See steps 1468 and 1470 in FIG. 120). The bonus winning information is similarly transmitted to the sub-control board S side in the advantageous section, the normal section, and the standby section (see step 1472 in FIG. 120). Therefore, the sub control board S determines the content of the effect by referring to either the winning / replay winning information or the effect group number and the bonus winning information transmitted from the main control board M based on the game situation. be able to.

<Scenario lottery table determination process>
FIG. 146 is a subroutine showing a scenario lottery table determination process called and executed in the process of step 4004 of FIG. 145.

First, in step 4102, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a specific freeze execution command transmitted from the main control board M has been received.

In the case of Yes in step 4102, in step 4104, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S selects a specific freeze-time table and ends this subroutine. In the third embodiment, the freeze effect is executed on the sub-control board S while the operation of the stop button is disabled on the main control board M until a predetermined time elapses after the start lever is operated. It is an effect to be performed, and a specific freeze effect is configured to be executed only in the "advantageous section". By this step 4104, it is possible to determine a specific freeze effect to be executed in the game. Further, as shown in the figure, when a specific freeze occurs, regardless of which of the game states (AT-related state, RT state), the dedicated freeze-time table is referred to. It is configured to determine the content of the production in the game.

If No in step 4102, in step 4106, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the gaming section is an advantageous section.

In the case of Yes in step 4106, in step 4108, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the state related to AT is the AT-in-progress state. In the case of Yes in step 4108, that is, when the state related to AT is the AT in progress state, in step 4110, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S selects the scenario effect table T3.

Next, in step 4112, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not another scenario lottery table selection condition is satisfied. The determination process of step 4112 is a process of determining whether or not the conditions for selecting another scenario lottery table are satisfied according to the game section, the RT state, the state related to AT, and the like. In the third embodiment, the other scenario lottery tables are omitted. In the case of Yes in step 4112, in step 4114, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S selects another scenario lottery table and ends this subroutine.

If No in step 4108, in step 4116, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the state related to AT is in AT preparation state 1 or AT preparation state 2. In the case of Yes in step 4116, in step 4118, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S selects the scenario effect table T2.

If No in step 4116, in step 4120, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the state related to AT is the fall state during AT or the special fall state. In the case of Yes in step 4120, in step 4122, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S selects the scenario effect table T8.

If No in step 4120, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S shifts the process to step 4112.

If No in step 4106, in step 4124, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the game section is a normal section.

In the case of Yes in step 4124, in step 4126, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the state related to the AT is a fall waiting state.

In the case of Yes in step 4126, in step 4128, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S selects the scenario effect table T6.

If No in step 4126, in step 4130, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the state related to AT is a low probability state.

In the case of Yes in step 4130, in step 4132, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the RT state is RT1.

In the case of Yes in step 4132, in step 4134, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S selects the scenario effect table T7.

If No in step 4132, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S selects the scenario effect table T1 in step 4136.

In the case of No in step 4124, in the case of No in step 4130, the process is transferred to step 4112.

By this scenario lottery table determination process, one scenario effect table from six of the scenario effect tables T1, T2, T3, T6, T7, and T8 is determined according to the game section, the RT state, the state related to AT, and the like.

<< Example of production lottery table >>
FIGS. 148 (A) to 148 (C) are tables showing an example of an effect lottery table. Each of the above-mentioned scenarios 1 to 3 is data that defines the time-series order of the effect lottery table used to determine the content of the effect to be executed in each of a plurality of consecutive games (FIG. 147 (B). )reference). As shown in FIG. 148, the effect lottery table defines various effect contents and their selection probabilities. The number of placements for each of the production contents is defined for each type of condition device, and the ease of selection differs depending on the type of the condition device won in the game. The table numbers shown in FIGS. 148 (A) to 148 (C) show an example when the denominator value is 256, but the denominator value is not limited to this value and is 65536. Other values such as, etc. may be used, and can be appropriately determined according to the type of condition device, the type of effect, and the processing.

148 (A) shows the effect lottery table A, FIG. 148 (B) shows the effect lottery table B, and FIG. 148 (C) shows the effect lottery table C. As shown in FIG. 147 (B), the production lottery tables D and E are also defined in the scenarios 2 and 3, but in FIG. 148, only the production lottery tables A to C are shown. All of these effect lottery tables A to E are tables that can be selected when the game section is a normal section and the RT state is RT0, and the effect lottery tables are selected in other game states. There are some, but I omitted them here. It should be noted that at least one of the effect lottery tables A to E may or may not be configured so that it can be selected even in other gaming states.

FIGS. 148 (A) to 148 (C) are effect lottery tables for selecting a plurality of specific effect contents including "no effect" of the effect group 1 by lottery processing. As shown in FIGS. 148 (A) to 148 (C), specific production contents include "no production" in the production group 1, "character production" in the production group 2, and "conversation production" in the production group 3. Eight types of production group 4 "cut-in production", production group 5 "confrontation production", production group 6 "additional battle", production group 7 "common navigation production" and production group 8 "aiming production" The content of the production is specified. Here, the name such as "character production" indicates a representative name of the production content belonging to the production group. That is, the production content corresponding to each of the production groups is not one by one, and as an example, the production content corresponding to the production group 2 is not limited to the character production alone.

In the third embodiment, each of the effect group 1 to the effect group 8 is configured so that only one specific effect content shown in FIGS. 148 (A) to 148 (C) belongs. However, it may be configured so that a plurality of specific production contents belong to each of the production groups. In the case of such a configuration, first, the effect group may be determined by the lottery process in step 4010 of FIG. 145, and then one specific effect content belonging to the effect group may be determined by the lottery process (FIG. FIG. Not shown).

<Other production contents>
Further, the production content (stage production, advance notice production, push order navigation production) is not limited to the production content shown in FIGS. 148 (A) to 148 (C), and includes "W notification" and "small role notification". (Color) ”,“ Ambiguous notification ”,“ Continuous production ”,“ Sub input button ”,“ Stage change ”,“ Episode production ”,“ Movie production ”,“ BGM change ”,“ Hit notification ”,“ Development notification ” , "Additional notice", "Notice sound / lever sound", etc.

<W announcement>
The "W notification" is mainly an effect for suggesting a conditional device or the like that has been won in the game, and is information indicating at least two conditional devices, that is, the conditional device that has been won in the game and the other conditional devices. Is an effect to be displayed on the effect display device S40. The "W announcement" is a notice production and belongs to the "cut-in production" of the production group 4. For example, triggered by the operation of the bet button D220 or the operation of the start lever D50, information indicating at least two condition devices, that is, the condition device won in the game and the other condition devices, is displayed on the effect display device S40. .. The player makes the first stop and the second stop while imagining which condition device, and with the third stop as an opportunity, the information indicating the winning condition device in the game is transmitted to the effect display device S40. indicate. As an example, an image (moving image) displaying a character A wearing red clothes and a character B wearing yellow clothes is displayed on the effect display device S40 triggered by the operation of the start lever, and the effect is displayed. Suggests that the conditional device won in the game is a cherry or bell (push order bell or common bell). When performing such an effect, the condition device corresponding to the clothes worn by the character B was won more than the condition device corresponding to the clothes worn by the character A was won. The case may be configured to be more profitable for the player (the probability of winning the bonus or AT lottery is high), or there are two pieces of information (color) corresponding to the condition device displayed in the W notification. It may be configured so that the W notification can be executed in the same production mode, and when the W notification is executed in such an effect mode, it is relative when all the W notifications are executed. It may be configured to be highly profitable for the player.

<Small role announcement (color)>
"Small role announcement (color)" is an effect that suggests the condition device won in the game by color, and "small role announcement (color)" is a notice effect, and "cut-in effect" of the effect group 4. And so on. As described above, in the advance notice effect, it is possible to suggest the winning condition device, the RT state, the state related to the AT, and the like depending on the display mode such as the color of the item, the goods, and the like displayed on the effect display device S40. For example, the character is displayed when the bet button D220 is operated or the start lever D50 is operated, and the goods owned by the character are displayed when the first stop is performed. The color of the goods displayed at this time suggests the winning condition device, and the number of goods displayed at this time and the timing at which the goods are displayed (third stop, etc.) indicate the RT state, the state related to AT, and the AT. It is possible to suggest whether or not the lottery has been won.

<Ambiguous announcement>
The ambiguous notification is triggered by the operation of the bet button D220 or the start lever D50 to execute the above-mentioned conversation effect on the effect display device S40, turn on the decorative lamp unit D150, or turn off the backlight S30. It is a production that does. This ambiguous effect does not necessarily suggest the winning condition device, the current gaming state, etc., and is an effect mode regardless of the condition device won in the game, the current RT state, the current AT state, and the like. May be determined. Therefore, the player cannot always obtain information on the winning condition device and the current gaming state by ambiguous notification. On the other hand, the W notification described above and the small role notification described later are effects for suggesting the condition device and the like won in the game to the player, and are effects that can suggest information that the player wants to know. On the other hand, the ambiguous effect is different in that, as described above, it does not necessarily suggest the conditional device won in the game, the current game state, or the like.

<Continuous production>
The "continuous production" is a production that is continuously executed over a plurality of games, and it is preferable that the content of the production evolves or changes as the game progresses. In the "continuous production", the "confrontation production" of the production group 5 and the "additional battle" of the production group 6 are executed over multiple games, and the result (bonus winning / non-winning, AT lottery winning / non-winning, etc.) in the final continuous production game, etc. ) Is notified. Further, even when the above-mentioned scenario 2 or scenario 3 is determined, the continuous effect can be executed. For example, in the first game (the game), the operation of the bet button D220 or the start lever D50 The first sound effect is output with the operation of. In the next game, the operation of the bet button D220 or the operation of the start lever D50 triggers the output of a second sound effect having a pitch different from that of the first sound effect and a different length. Further, in the next game, the operation of the bet button D220 or the operation of the start lever D50 triggers the output of a third sound effect having a pitch different from that of the first sound effect and the second sound effect and a different length. do. In this way, by executing an effect that changes as the game progresses gradually, it is possible to make the player feel a sense of incongruity different from the usual one, and to recognize that some kind of gaming state has occurred. Specifically, the degree of expectation for bonus winning or AT lottery winning can be suggested by the number of consecutive games and the difference in sound effects.

<Sub input button>
The "sub-input button" is an effect that encourages the operation of the sub-input button SB, which is an effect button that can be operated by the player, and the player operates the sub-input button SB (for example, a single press, repeated hits, long presses, etc.). By performing the operation), image information, character information, etc. are displayed on the effect display device S40 (the effect is displayed in a display mode different from that when there is no predetermined operation on the sub input button SB), and the effect is in the middle of the effect. It is possible to suggest the degree of expectation of bonus winning or AT winning at the timing immediately before notifying the timing or the final result. For example, after the operation of the bet button D220 or the operation of the start lever D50, an image or character information prompting the operation of the sub button is displayed on the effect display device S40 when the third stop is triggered. When the player operates the sub button, information suggesting the degree of expectation of bonus winning or AT winning is displayed on the effect display device S40.

Further, the sub-input button SB may be configured to have not only a detection device for detecting the operation of the player but also a drive device (motor, solenoid, etc.). For example, when the player operates the sub-input button SB, the sub-input button SB may be vibrated by the drive device, and the magnitude and length of the vibration may indicate the degree of expectation of bonus winning or AT winning (for example). It may be configured so that some highly profitable event becomes deterministic at the time of vibration). Further, by vibrating the sub-input button SB in a manner recognizable by the player's visual recognition at a predetermined trigger, for example, the end of the third stop operation, the player can see the sub-input button SB. It is also possible to prompt the operation. That is, an image prompting the operation of the sub-input button SB may be displayed on the effect display device S40, or the player may be configured to prompt the player to operate the sub-input button SB by vibrating the sub-input button SB itself. good. The position and configuration of the sub-input button SB are not limited to those of this example, and for example, the lower panel D140 may be configured to be operable as the sub-input button SB (driving to an operable state when the button validity period is reached). do).

Further, a lamp or the like may be built in the sub input button SB. It is also possible to suggest the degree of expectation of bonus winning or AT lottery winning depending on the emission color, brightness, blinking mode, etc. of the lamp.

<Stage change>
"Stage change" is an effect of changing the background image of the above-mentioned stage effect. As described above, the stage effect is an effect mainly performed by displaying a background image or the like. A stage change can be performed by determining one background image from a plurality of predetermined background images based on information about the RT state and AT. For example, after the operation of the bet button D220 or the operation of the start lever D50, a background image is determined based on the RT state and the state related to AT, and the background image is displayed on the screen of the effect display device S40. Since the background image is determined based on the RT state and the AT-related state, the background image may be changed depending on the RT state and the AT-related state. It should be noted that the game may be configured to be determined based on the winning condition device.

Further, between the third stop of the game and the operation of the bet button D220 or the start lever D50 of the next game, the above-mentioned "confrontation effect" is executed, and the result of the confrontation effect is defeated in the next game. With the operation of the bet button D220 or the operation of the start lever D50 as an opportunity, the background image can be determined and the stage can be changed based on the RT state and the state related to AT. By directing in this way, it is possible to give a story and change the stage smoothly.

<Episode production>
The "episode effect" is an effect of displaying character information indicating a story adopted as an effect on the screen of the effect display device S40. For example, after the operation of the bet button D220 or the operation of the start lever D50, the background image is determined based on the RT state and the state related to AT, and the episode is displayed on the screen of the effect display device S40 together with the background image. It should be noted that the "episode effect" may be one that ends in one game, or one that is executed over a plurality of consecutive games. As the number of consecutive times increases, the expectation of winning a bonus or winning an AT increases, so that the player's expectation can be increased. Further, the character information indicating the story may be displayed on the screen of the effect display device S40 together with the image during the bonus.

<Movie production>
The "movie effect" is an effect executed in one game, and is an effect of displaying a movie showing an outline of a story or the like adopted as an effect, an introduction of a character, or the like on the screen of the effect display device S40. For example, a predetermined movie is displayed on the screen of the effect display device S40 from the operation of the bet button D220 or the start lever D50 of the game to the operation of the bet button D220 or the start lever D50 of the next game. can do. For example, one movie can be determined from a plurality of predetermined movies based on information about the RT state and AT, and displayed on the screen of the effect display device S40.

<BGM change>
"BGM change" is an effect of changing the BGM output from the speaker S20. It may be a BGM used in one game or a BGM used in a plurality of consecutive games. With the operation of the bet button D220 or the operation of the start lever D50 as an opportunity, the BGM is determined based on the condition device determined in the game, the RT state, and the state related to AT, and the determined BGM is output from the speaker S20. .. Since the BGM is determined based on the conditional device, RT state, and AT-related state determined in the game, the BGM determined by the conditional device, RT state, and AT-related state determined in the game may change. be. In addition, a BGM without a song and a BGM with a song may be prepared so that when the number of remaining AT games is large (for example, 50 or more), the BGM with a song can be selected. With this configuration, when the player recognizes that the BGM with the song is output, it can be recognized that a large number of AT games remain.

<Notice of hit>
The "hit notification" is an effect of displaying an image suggesting the degree of expectation of bonus winning or AT winning on the effect display device S40, or outputting a sound effect suggesting the degree of expectation from the speaker S20. In particular, when bonus winning or AT winning is confirmed, by using images (rainbow-colored items, goods, etc.) and sound effects (sound effects such as "Kyuin") that are different from other images and sound effects, The player can be satisfied.

<Development notice>
"Development notice" is a production that is executed after a continuous production is executed over a plurality of consecutive games. For example, when a rare role is won, the rare role is won. A continuous effect is executed from the game, and "development !!" is displayed on the effect display device S40 at the third stop operation timing after several games, and an effect mode in which the confrontation effect or the like is executed from the next game can be exemplified.

The "addition notice" is an effect executed based on the determination of the number of AT games added when the state related to the AT is a gaming state in which the number of AT games can be added, such as the state during AT. For example, after the third stop in the game in which the number of AT games is added, information indicating that the number of games to be added is determined together with the number of games to be added is displayed on the effect display device S40. Further, it can be performed together with the above-mentioned "sub input button SB". For example, when 10 games are added, the number of games is displayed as it is on the effect display device S40, and when 50 games are added, the operation of the "sub input button SB" is prompted after the operation of the third stop button. When the information is displayed on the effect display device S40 and the player operates the "sub input button SB", the number of games is displayed on the effect display device S40, which is highly profitable for the player ( When the number of additional games is relatively large), it may be configured to prompt the operation of the sub input button SB.

The "lever warning sound" is an effect of outputting a sound when the reel is rotated, triggered by the operation of the start lever D50. With the operation of the start lever D50 as an opportunity, the type of the lever warning sound is determined based on the condition device determined in the game, the RT state, and the state related to the AT, and the lever warning sound is output when the reel is rotated. The output timing of the lever warning sound may be configured to be output at a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds) later than the normal timing, and in such a configuration, the timing may be delayed. When the lever warning sound is output, the expectation of relatively high profit may be higher than when the lever warning sound is output at a normal timing.

In particular, the player's expectation can be raised by determining the tone color to be output, the delay time until the output, and the like depending on the RT state and the state related to AT.

The selection of the effect content defined in the effect lottery table A shown in FIG. 148 (A) is configured as follows.

If the condition device is a non-overlapping bonus and is a loss or a non-rare role, "no effect" is most likely to be selected (number value 128), followed by "character effect" (number number). The value is 64), and "conversation effect" (number value is 62) is easily selected, and other effects are not selected (number value is 0).

In addition, when the condition device is a non-overlapping bonus and is a rare role, "cut-in effect" is most likely to be selected (number value is 128), followed by "character effect" and "conversation effect" (place). The number value is 64), and other effects are not selected (the number value is 0).

When the condition device is a bonus duplication and is a non-rare role, "conversation effect" is most likely to be selected (number value is 192), and then "cut-in effect" (value of number is 192). 32), "Character effect" (number value is 16) and "no effect" are easily selected, and other effects are not selected (number value is 0).

When the condition device is a bonus duplication and is a rare role, "cut-in effect" is most likely to be selected (number value is 192), followed by "conversation effect" (number value is 32). ), "Character effect" (number value is 16) and "no effect" are easily selected, and other effects are not selected (number value is 0).

In this way, when the effect lottery table A shown in FIG. 148 (A) is selected, either "conversation effect" or "cut-in effect" is most likely to be performed (number of units) if the bonus overlaps. The value is 192). When "conversation effect" is selected, there is a high possibility that the condition device is a non-rare role due to overlapping bonuses. In addition, when "cut-in effect" is selected, there is a high possibility that the condition device has a duplicate bonus and is a rare role.

Next, if the bonuses do not overlap, either "no effect" or "cut-in effect" is most likely to be performed (number of digits is 128). When "No effect" is selected, it is highly possible that the condition device is a non-overlapping bonus and a non-rare role. Further, when "cut-in effect" is selected, there is a high possibility that the condition device is a rare role because the bonus does not overlap.

As described above, when the effect lottery table A shown in FIG. 148 (A) is selected and "cut-in effect" is selected, the condition device is a rare of either bonus non-overlap or bonus overlap. It is likely to be a role.

Further, the selection of the effect defined in the effect lottery table B shown in FIG. 148 (B) is configured as follows.

In all cases where the condition device has bonus duplication and bonus non-overlapping, only "character effect" (number value is 256) is selected, and other effects are not selected (number). The value of is 0).

Further, the selection of the effect defined in the effect lottery table C shown in FIG. 148 (C) is configured as follows.

In all cases where the condition device has bonus duplication and bonus non-duplication, only "confrontation effect" (number value is 256) is selected, and other effects are not selected (number). The value of is 0).

<< Specific example of the progress of the production >>
FIG. 149 is a schematic view showing an example of an effect that progresses by the above-mentioned effect content determination process.

<1st game>
As shown in FIG. 149, first, in the first game, the result of the lottery process is a loss. Further, in the first game, the scenario has not been selected yet (stage of presence / absence of scenario in FIG. 149), it is determined that the scenario has not been executed in step 4002 of FIG. 145, and AT in step 4004 of FIG. 145. A scenario lottery table is selected according to the state and the RT state, and in step 4006 of FIG. 145, scenario 1 is selected from the scenario lottery table (scenario lottery stage of FIG. 149). Next, in step 4008 of FIG. 145, the effect lottery table A is selected (the stage of the effect lottery table of FIG. 149), and in step 4010 of FIG. 145, the effect is produced in the first game by the lottery process using the effect lottery table A. It is determined that there is none (stage of the production lottery in FIG. 149). Since scenario 1 is selected in this first game, it is determined that there is no scenario (stage of the production lottery table in FIG. 149) in the second game (see FIG. 147 (B)).

<2nd game>
In the second game, the result of the lottery process is replay-A. Further, even in the second game, the scenario has not been selected yet (stage of presence / absence of scenario in FIG. 149), it is determined that the scenario has not been executed in step 4002 of FIG. 145, and AT in step 4004 of FIG. 145. The scenario lottery table according to the state and the RT state is selected, and in step 4006 of FIG. 145, scenario 1 is selected again from the scenario lottery table (scenario lottery stage of FIG. 149). Next, in step 4008 of FIG. 145, the effect lottery table A is selected (the stage of the effect lottery table of FIG. 149), and in step 4010 of FIG. 145, the effect is produced in the second game by the lottery process using the effect lottery table A. It is determined to be none (stage of the production lottery in FIG. 149). Since scenario 1 is also selected in this second game, it is determined that there is no scenario in the third game (stage of the production lottery table in FIG. 149) (see FIG. 147 (B)).

<Third game>
In the third game, the result of the lottery process is winning-A1. Further, even in the third game, the scenario has not been selected yet (stage of presence / absence of scenario in FIG. 149), it is determined that the scenario has not been executed in step 4002 of FIG. 145, and AT in step 4004 of FIG. 145. A scenario lottery table is selected according to the state and the RT state, and in step 4006 of FIG. 145, scenario 1 is selected from the scenario lottery table (scenario lottery stage of FIG. 149). Next, in step 4008 of FIG. 145, the effect lottery table A is selected (the stage of the effect lottery table of FIG. 149), and in step 4010 of FIG. It is determined to be a production (stage of the production lottery in FIG. 149). Since scenario 1 is also selected in this third game, it is determined that there is no scenario in the fourth game (stage of the production lottery table in FIG. 149) (see FIG. 147 (B)).

<4th game>
In the fourth game, the result of the lottery process is winning-C. Further, even in the fourth game, the scenario has not been selected yet (stage of presence / absence of scenario in FIG. 149), it is determined that the scenario has not been executed in step 4002 of FIG. 145, and AT in step 4004 of FIG. 145. A scenario lottery table is selected according to the state and the RT state, and in step 4006 of FIG. 145, scenario 2 is selected from the scenario lottery table (scenario lottery stage of FIG. 149). Next, in step 4008 of FIG. 145, the effect lottery table A is selected (the stage of the effect lottery table of FIG. 149), and in step 4010 of FIG. It is determined to be an in-production (stage of the production lottery in FIG. 149). In this 4th game, since scenario 2 is selected, the 5th game is determined to be the production lottery table B, the 6th game is determined to be the production lottery table B, and the 7th game is the production lottery table C. It is determined, and it is determined that there is no scenario in the eighth game (stage of the production lottery table in FIG. 149) (see FIG. 147 (B)).

<5th game>
In the fifth game, the result of the lottery process is a loss. Further, in the fifth game, since scenario 2 is already selected (stage of presence / absence of scenario in FIG. 149), it is determined that the scenario is executed in step 4002 of FIG. 145, and steps 4004 and 4006 of FIG. 145 are used. The process is not executed, and in step 4008 of FIG. 145, the effect lottery table B is selected (the stage of the effect lottery table of FIG. 145), and in step 4010 of FIG. In the game, it is decided to be a character production (stage of production lottery in FIG. 149). Since scenario 2 is selected in the 4th game in this 5th game, the production lottery table up to the 7th game is determined (stage of the production lottery table in FIG. 149) (FIG. 147 (B)). reference).

<6th game>
In the sixth game, the result of the lottery process is replay-A. Further, in the sixth game, since scenario 2 is already selected (stage of presence / absence of scenario in FIG. 149), it is determined that the scenario is executed in step 4002 of FIG. 145, and steps 4004 and 4006 of FIG. 145 are used. The process is not executed, and in step 4008 of FIG. 145, the effect lottery table B is selected (the stage of the effect lottery table of FIG. 149), and in step 4010 of FIG. In the game, it is decided to be a character production (stage of production lottery in FIG. 149). Since scenario 2 is selected in the 4th game in this 6th game as well, the production lottery table up to the 7th game is determined (stage of the production lottery table in FIG. 149) (FIG. 147 (B)). reference).

<7th game>
In the seventh game, the result of the lottery process is winning-B. Further, in the seventh game, since scenario 2 has already been selected (stage of presence / absence of scenario in FIG. 149), it is determined that the scenario is being executed in step 4002 of FIG. 145, and steps 4004 and 4006 of FIG. 145 are used. The process is not executed, and in step 4008 of FIG. 145, the effect lottery table C is selected (the stage of the effect lottery table of FIG. 149), and in step 4010 of FIG. In the game, it is decided to be a confrontation production (stage of production lottery in FIG. 149). Since scenario 2 is selected in the 4th game also in this 7th game, the production lottery table up to the 7th game is determined (stage of the production lottery table in FIG. 149) (FIG. 147 (B)). reference).

<8th game>
In the eighth game, the result of the lottery process is a loss. Further, in the 8th game, the scenario 2 is already selected, but in the 8th game, there is no scenario (see the 5th game of the scenario 2 in FIG. 147 (B)). , It is determined that the scenario is not executed in step 4002 of FIG. 145, the scenario lottery table according to the state related to AT and the RT state is selected in step 4004 of FIG. 145, and the scenario lottery table is selected in step 4006 of FIG. 145. Scenario 1 is selected from (Scenario lottery stage in FIG. 149). In step 4008 of FIG. 145, the effect lottery table A is selected (the stage of the effect lottery table of FIG. 149), and in step 4010 of FIG. It is decided (the stage of the production lottery in FIG. 149). Since scenario 1 is selected in this 8th game, it is determined that there is no scenario in the 9th game (stage of the production lottery table in FIG. 149) (see FIG. 147 (B)).

<9th game>
In the ninth game, the result of the lottery process is replay-A. Further, in the ninth game, the scenario is not selected (stage of presence / absence of scenario in FIG. 149), it is determined that the scenario is not executed in step 4002 of FIG. 145, and the state related to AT is determined in step 4004 of FIG. 145. And the scenario lottery table according to the RT state is selected, and in step 4006 of FIG. 145, scenario 1 is selected from the scenario lottery table (scenario lottery stage of FIG. 149). Next, in step 4008 of FIG. 145, the effect lottery table A is selected (the stage of the effect lottery table of FIG. 149), and in step 4010 of FIG. 145, the effect is produced in the ninth game by the lottery process using the effect lottery table A. It is determined to be none (stage of the production lottery in FIG. 149). Since scenario 1 is also selected in this 9th game, it is determined that there is no scenario in the 10th game (stage of the production lottery table in FIG. 149) (see FIG. 147 (B)).

<10th game>
In the tenth game, the result of the lottery process is winning-A1. Further, in the tenth game, the scenario is not selected (stage of presence / absence of scenario in FIG. 149), it is determined that the scenario is not executed in step 4002 of FIG. 145, and the state related to AT is determined in step 4004 of FIG. 145. And the scenario lottery table according to the RT state is selected, and in step 4006 of FIG. 145, scenario 1 is selected from the scenario lottery table (scenario lottery stage of FIG. 149). Next, in step 4008 of FIG. 145, the effect lottery table A is selected, and in step 4010 of FIG. 145, one of the effect contents is determined by the lottery process using the effect lottery table A.

<<< Example of production selection result >>>
FIGS. 150 (A) to 155 (A) show the above-mentioned eight types of "no production", "character production", "conversation production", "cut-in production", "confrontation production", and "additional battle (during ART)". This is an effect selection probability table showing the probability that the effects of "dedicated)", "common navigation effect", and "aiming effect" are selected corresponding to each of the conditional devices.
Further, FIGS. 150 (B) to 155 (B) are scenario selection probability tables showing the probabilities that the above-mentioned three scenarios are selected corresponding to each of the conditional devices. 150 (A) and 150 (B) to 155 (A) and 155 (B) show the game section, the RT state, and the state related to AT, focusing on six typical types. It's a table. In the following, it is assumed that the setting is 1.

150 (A) and 150 (B) show an effect when the game section is a normal section, the RT state is RT0, and the state related to AT is a low probability state (hereinafter, referred to as a first target game state). It is a selection probability table and a scenario selection probability table. FIGS. 151 (A) and 151 (B) show a case where the game section is an advantageous section, the RT state is RT0, and the state related to AT is the AT preparation state 2 (hereinafter referred to as the second target game state). It is an effect selection probability table and a scenario selection probability table. FIGS. 152 (A) and 152 (B) show an effect when the game section is an advantageous section, the RT state is RT1, and the state related to AT is the AT in progress state (hereinafter, referred to as a third target game state). It is a selection probability table and a scenario selection probability table. FIGS. 153 (A) and 153 (B) show an effect when the game section is a normal section, the RT state is RT1, and the state related to AT is a fall waiting state (hereinafter, referred to as a fourth target game state). It is a selection probability table and a scenario selection probability table. FIGS. 154 (A) and 154 (B) show a case where the game section is a normal section, the RT state is RT1 (a state in which the player shifts to RT1 by himself / herself), and the state related to AT is a low probability state (hereinafter, the first). It is an effect selection probability table and a scenario selection probability table of 5). FIGS. 155 (A) and 155 (B) show a case where the game section is an advantageous section, the RT state is RT0, and the state related to AT is the AT in progress state after the fall (hereinafter referred to as the sixth target game state). It is an effect selection probability table and a scenario selection probability table.

The numerical values indicating the probabilities shown in each of FIGS. 150 (A) and (B) to 155 (A) and (B) are set in the setting 1, and the first target gaming state to the sixth described above are set. It is a value which shows the aggregated result for each of the target game states.

<< First target game state >>
As described above, in the first target gaming state, the gaming section is a normal section, the RT state is RT0, and the state related to AT is a low probability state. FIG. 150 (A) is an effect selection probability table in the case of the first target gaming state. Further, FIG. 150 (B) is a scenario selection probability table in the case of the first target gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 150 (B), when the condition devices are bonus non-overlapping and are lost or non-rare, scenario 1 is most likely to be selected, and scenarios 2 and 3 may be selected. .. Further, when the condition device is a non-overlapping bonus and a rare role, scenario 2 is most likely to be selected, then scenario 3 is most likely to be selected, but scenario 1 is not selected. When the condition device is a bonus overlap and a non-rare combination, either scenario 2 or 3 is most likely to be selected, and then scenario 1 is most likely to be selected. When the condition device is a bonus duplication and a rare role, scenario 2 is most likely to be selected, then scenario 3 is most likely to be selected, and scenario 1 may be selected.

As shown in FIG. 150 (A), when the condition device is a non-overlapping bonus and is a loss or a non-rare role, "no production" is most likely to be selected, followed by "character production" and "conversation". It is easy to select in the order of "directing", and "confrontation directing" may be selected, but other directing is not selected. If the condition device is a non-overlapping bonus and a rare role, one of "character production", "conversation production", "cut-in production", and "confrontation production" is selected with the same probability, but the others. The production of is never selected. When the condition device is a bonus overlap and is a loss or a non-rare role, "confrontation production" is most likely to be selected, then "conversation production" is most likely to be selected, and "no production" or "character production". May be selected, but no other effect is selected. When the condition device is a bonus duplication and a rare role, "cut-in effect" or "confrontation effect" is most likely to be selected, then "conversation effect" is most likely to be selected, and "no effect" or "character". "Direction" may be selected, but no other effect is selected.

<< Second target game state >>
As described above, in the second target gaming state, the gaming section is an advantageous section, the RT state is RT0, and the state related to AT is the AT preparation state 2. FIG. 151 (A) is an effect selection probability table in the case of the second target gaming state. Further, FIG. 151 (B) is a scenario selection probability table in the case of the second target gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 151 (B), when the condition device is a bonus non-overlapping and is a loss, a non-rare role, and a rare role, only scenario 1 is selected, and other scenarios 2 and 3 are selected. There is no case. When the condition device is a bonus overlap and is a loss, a non-rare role, and a rare role, scenario 1 is most likely to be selected, and then scenario 2 or 3 is likely to be selected.

As shown in FIG. 151 (A), when the condition device is a bonus non-overlapping and is a loss or a non-rare role, only "no effect" is selected, and no other effect is selected. .. When the condition device is a non-overlapping bonus and is a rare role, only the "common navigation effect" is selected, and no other effect is selected. When the condition device is a bonus duplication and is a loss or a non-rare role, only "no effect" is selected, and no other effect is selected. When the condition device is a bonus duplication and a rare role, only the "common navigation effect" is selected, and no other effect is selected.

<< Third target game state >>
As described above, in the third target gaming state, the gaming section is an advantageous section, the RT state is RT1, and the state related to AT is the AT in-progress state. FIG. 152 (A) is an effect selection probability table in the case of the third target gaming state. Further, FIG. 152 (B) is a scenario selection probability table in the case of the third target gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 152 (B), when the condition devices are bonus non-overlapping and are lost or non-rare, scenario 1 is most likely to be selected, followed by scenario 2 and scenario 3. Easy to do. Further, when the condition device is a non-overlapping bonus and a rare role, scenario 2 is most likely to be selected, then scenario 3 is most likely to be selected, but scenario 1 is not selected. When the condition device is a bonus overlap and is a loss or a non-rare role and a rare role, the scenario 2 is most likely to be selected, then the scenario 3 is easily selected, and the scenario 1 may be selected.

As shown in FIG. 152 (A), when the condition device is a non-overlapping bonus and is a loss or a non-rare role, "no effect" is most likely to be selected, and then "conversation effect" is selected. It is easy, and "confrontation production" may be selected, but other productions are not selected. If the condition device is a non-overlapping bonus and a rare role, one of "cut-in effect", "confrontation effect", and "additional battle (only during ART)" is selected with the same probability, and "conversation effect" is selected. "Is sometimes selected, but no other effect is selected. When the condition device is a bonus overlap and is a loss or a non-rare role, "no production" is most likely to be selected, followed by "conversation production", cut-in production, and "confrontation production". It is easy to do, but no other production is selected. If the condition device has duplicate bonuses and is a rare role, one of "cut-in effect", "confrontation effect", and "additional battle (only during ART)" is selected with the same probability, and then "effect". Either "None" or "Conversation effect" is likely to be selected with the same probability, but the other effect is not selected.

<< Fourth target game state >>
As described above, in the fourth target gaming state, the gaming section is the normal section, the RT state is RT1, and the state related to AT is the fall waiting state. FIG. 153 (A) is an effect selection probability table in the case of the sixth target gaming state. Further, FIG. 153 (B) is a scenario selection probability table in the case of the sixth target gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 153 (B), when the condition device is a bonus non-overlapping and is a loss, a non-rare role, and a rare role, only scenario 1 is selected, and other scenarios 2 and 3 are selected. There is no case. When the condition device is a bonus overlap and is a loss, a non-rare role, and a rare role, scenario 2 is most likely to be selected, and then either scenario 1 or 3 is likely to be selected with the same probability.

As shown in FIG. 153 (A), when the condition device is a non-overlapping bonus and is a lost or non-rare role, "no effect" is most likely to be selected, followed by "character effect" or "conversation". It is easy to select one of the "effects" with the same probability, but the other effects are not selected. When the condition device is a bonus non-overlapping and a rare role, or a bonus duplication and a lost non-rare role or a rare role, "cut-in effect" is most likely to be selected, followed by "character". Either "effect" or "conversation effect" is likely to be selected with the same probability, but no other effect is selected.

<< Fifth target game state >>
As described above, in the fifth target gaming state, the gaming section is a normal section, the RT state is RT1 (a state in which the player shifts to RT1 by himself / herself), and the state related to AT is a low probability state. FIG. 154 (A) is an effect selection probability table in the case of the fifth target gaming state. Further, FIG. 154 (B) is a scenario selection probability table in the case of the fifth target gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 154 (B), when the condition device is a bonus non-overlapping and is a lost or non-rare combination, only scenario 1 is selected, and scenarios 2 and 3 are not selected. When the condition device is a bonus overlap and is a loss or a non-rare combination, either scenario 2 or 3 is most likely to be selected, and then scenario 1 is most likely to be selected. When the condition device is a bonus duplication and a rare role, scenario 2 is most likely to be selected, then scenario 3 is most likely to be selected, and scenario 1 may be selected.

As shown in FIG. 154 (A), when the condition devices are non-overlapping bonuses and are lost, "no effect" is most likely to be selected, followed by "character effect" and "conversation effect". It is easy to select with, and "confrontation effect" may be selected, but other effects are not selected. When the condition device is a non-overlapping bonus and a non-rare role, only the "aiming effect" is selected, and no other effect is selected. If the condition device is a non-overlapping bonus and a rare role, one of "character production", "conversation production", "cut-in production", and "confrontation production" is selected with the same probability, but the others. The production of is never selected. When the condition device is a bonus overlap and is a loss or a non-rare role, "confrontation production" is most likely to be selected, then "conversation production" is most likely to be selected, and "no production" or "character production". May be selected, but no other effect is selected. When the condition device is a bonus duplication and a rare role, "cut-in effect" or "confrontation effect" is most likely to be selected, then "conversation effect" is most likely to be selected, and "no effect" or "character". "Direction" may be selected, but no other effect is selected.

<< 6th target game state >>
As described above, in the sixth target gaming state, the gaming section is an advantageous section, the RT state is RT0, and the state related to AT is the AT in progress state after the fall. FIG. 155 (A) is an effect selection probability table in the case of the sixth target gaming state. Further, FIG. 155 (B) is a scenario selection probability table in the case of the sixth target gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 155 (B), when the conditional devices are bonus non-overlapping and bonus duplication, and are lost, non-rare role, and rare role, only scenario 1 is selected, and other scenarios 2 and 3 are selected. Is not selected.

As shown in FIG. 155 (A), when the condition device is a bonus non-overlapping and is a loss or a non-rare role, only "no effect" is selected, and no other effect is selected. .. When the condition device is a non-overlapping bonus and is a rare role, "additional battle (only during ART)" is most likely to be selected, and then either "cut-in effect" or "confrontation effect" is the same. It is easy to select by probability, and then "conversation effect" is easy to select, but no other effect is selected. When the condition device is a bonus overlap and is a loss or a non-rare role, "no production" is most likely to be selected, followed by "conversation production", "confrontation production", and cut-in production. It is easy to do, but no other production is selected. When the condition device is a bonus overlap and a rare role, either "cut-in effect" or "confrontation effect" is likely to be selected with the same probability, and then "no effect" or "conversation effect". One of them is likely to be selected with the same probability, but the other effect is not selected.

<<< Comparison of target game states >>>
Below,
(Comparison 1) First target game state and second target game state (Comparison 2) Second target game state and third target game state (Comparison 3) First target game state and fourth target game State (Comparison 4) The probability that the effect is executed for the combination of the five target gaming states of the third target gaming state and the sixth target gaming state is compared. In the comparison here, it is assumed that the setting 1 is set as well as excluding the inside of the BB. Further, as described above, the conditional device belonging to the group "rare role" is simply referred to as "rare role", and the conditional device belonging to the group "replay" and the group "bell" is simply referred to as "non-rare role". , The condition device belonging to the group "Type 1 BB" may be simply referred to as "Type 1 BB" or "Single type 1 BB". The group "Type 1 BB" is composed of "Type 1 BB-A", "Type 1 BB-B", and "Type 1 BB-C", and may be referred to as a "single bonus".

<< (Comparison 1) First target game state and second target game state >>
<First target game state>
First, the probability that the effect will be executed in the first target game state is determined.
(A) When the conditional device is a "rare role" with non-overlapping bonuses (b) When the conditional device is "missing" and "non-rare role" with non-overlapping bonuses (c) When the conditional device overlaps with the bonus " In the case of "rare role" (d) Calculated for each of the cases where the condition device overlaps with the bonus and is "type 1 BB" and "non-rare role". As described above, in the first target gaming state, the gaming section is a normal section, the RT state is RT0, and the state related to AT is a low probability state.

<(A) When the condition device is a "rare role" with non-overlapping bonuses>
The winning rate in which the condition device when the game is executed in the first target game state becomes a "rare role" with non-overlapping bonuses is the sum of the number of all the condition devices belonging to the group "rare role" with non-overlapping bonuses. Obtained by doing. In particular,
(3204 + 1000 + 700 + 300) / 65536
= 5204/65536 equation (1-1)
(See the number of columns in the RT0 column in FIG. 105). In the formula (1-1), the number of "winning-B" is 3204, the number of "winning-C" is 1000, the number of "winning-D" is 700, and the number of "winning-E" is set. The number 300 was used (see the number of columns in the RT0 column in FIG. 105).

In addition, when the condition device is a "rare role" with no bonus overlap in the first target game state, "no effect" is not selected, and the effect is executed with a 100% probability (Fig.). See the "Rare role" column for 150 bonus non-overlapping). As shown in FIG. 150, specifically, in the case of non-overlapping bonuses, "character production" (25%), "conversation production" (25%), "cut-in production" (25%), and "confrontation". One of the effects of "Production" (25%) is selected. Therefore, the probability that some effect will be executed when the condition device is a "rare role" with non-overlapping bonuses in the first target game state is
5204/65536 × 100/100
= 5204/65536 equation (1-2)
Will be. Here, the result of the equation (1-1) (“5204/65536”) was used.

<(B) When the condition device is "missing" and "non-rare role" with non-overlapping bonus>
The winning rate when the condition device when the game is executed in the first target game state is "lost" and "non-rare role" due to non-overlapping bonus is all belonging to the group "lost" and the group "non-rare role". It is obtained by adding the number of condition devices. In particular,
(65536-376-5204) / 65536
= 59965/65536 formula (1-3)
Will be. Here, the numerical value "367" in the equation (1-3) is the sum of the number of places where the conditional device that is the single bonus wins and the number of places that the conditional device that overlaps with the bonus wins.

The sum of the number of units won by the condition device that is a single bonus is the number of units of "Type 1 BB-A" 40, the number of units of "Type 1 BB-B" 40, and the number of "Type 1 BB-C". It is the sum of the number 40 and 120 (= 40 + 40 + 40) (see the number of columns of RT0 in FIG. 105).

In addition, the number of places that the condition device that overlaps with the bonus wins is the number of places of "1 type BB-B + prize-C" 40, the number of places of "1 type BB-B + prize-D", and "1 type". BB-B + prize-E "number 40," 1 type BB-C + prize-C "number 40," 1 type BB-C + prize-D "number 40, and" 1 type BB- " The sum of the numbers 240 (= 40 + 40 + 40 + 40 + 40 + 40) with the number 40 of "C + winning-E" (see the number of columns of RT0 in FIG. 105) and the number 1 of "Type 1 BB-B + Replay-A" , "Class 1 BB-B + Winning-A1", "Class 1 BB-B + Winning-A2", "Class 1 BB-B + Winning-A3", and "Class 1 BB-B + Winning-A3". The sum of 1 of "1st class BB-B + winning-A4", 1 of "1st class BB-B + winning-A5", and 1 of "1st class BB-B + winning-A6" (7) = 1 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1) (see the number of columns of RT0 in FIG. 105) and the sum 247 (= 240 + 7).

Therefore, the numerical value "367" in the equation (1-3) can be calculated by the sum of the number 120 in which the condition device that is the single bonus is won and the number 247 in which the condition device that overlaps with the bonus is won. Further, the numerical value "5204" in the equation (1-3) is the result of the equation (1-1). As shown in the formula (1-3), by calculating "65536-376-5204", the number of places where the condition device that becomes a single bonus wins, the number of places where the condition device that overlaps with the bonus wins, and the number of places that the condition device overlaps with the bonus wins. It is possible to exclude the number of "rare roles", and it is possible to calculate the number of positions when the condition device is "missing" and "non-rare role" with non-overlapping bonuses.

In addition, when the condition devices are "lost" and "non-rare role" with non-overlapping bonuses in the first target game state, the effects are both executed with a probability of 50% (non-bonus in FIG. 150). Refer to the columns of "Loss" and "Non-rare role" due to duplication). As shown in FIG. 150, the probability of "no effect" in each of the group "loss", the group "replay", and the group "bell" is 50%, and the probability that some effect is executed is 100. -50 = 50. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 150, all of the group "loss", the group "replay", and the group "bell" are "character production" (25%), "conversation production" (24%), and "confrontation". One of the effects of "Production" (1%) is selected.

Therefore, the probability that some effect will be executed when the condition device is "lost" and "non-rare role" with non-overlapping bonuses in the first target game state is
59965/65536 × 50/100
≈ 29983/65536 equation (1-4)
Will be. Here, the result of equation (1-3) (“59965/65536”) was used.

<Probability that some effect will be executed when the condition device is non-overlapping bonus>
From the above, the probability that some effect will be executed when the condition device is non-overlapping in the first target game state is 5204/65536 + 29983/65536 from the equations (1-2) and (1-4).
= 35187/65536 formula (1-5)
Will be.

<(C) When the condition device overlaps with the bonus and is a "rare role">
The winning rate in which the condition device when the game is executed in the first target game state overlaps with the bonus and becomes a "rare role" is added to the number of all the condition devices belonging to the group "rare role" with the bonus overlap. It can be obtained by. In particular,
(80 + 80 + 80) / 65536
= 240/65536 equation (1-6)
Will be. In the formula (1-6), the first "80" is the sum of the number 40 of "1st class BB-B + winning-C" and the number 40 of "1st class BB-C + winning-C". Yes, the next "80" is the sum of the number 40 of "Type 1 BB-B + Winning-D" and the number 40 of "Type 1 BB-C + Winning-D", and the final "80" is , The sum of the number 40 of "Type 1 BB-B + Winning-E" and the number 40 of "Type 1 BB-C + Winning-E" (see the number of columns of RT0 in FIG. 105).

Further, in the first target game state, when the condition device overlaps with the bonus and is a "rare role", the effect is executed with a probability of 93.75%. That is, as shown in FIG. 150, the probability of "no effect" in the group "rare role" is 6.25%, and the probability that some effect is executed is 100-6.25 = 93.75. .. Specifically, as shown in the column of "rare role" due to the duplication of bonuses in FIG. 150, "character production" (6.25%), "conversation production" (12.5%), "cut-in production" ( Either 37.5%) or "confrontation effect" (37.5%) is selected.

Therefore, the probability that some effect will be executed when the condition device overlaps with the bonus and is a "rare role" in the first target game state is determined by using the equation (1-6).
240/65536 × 93.75 / 100
= 225/65536 equation (1-7)
Will be.

<(D) When the condition device overlaps with the bonus and is "Type 1 BB" and "Non-rare role">
The winning rate when the condition device when the game is executed in the first target game state overlaps with the bonus and becomes "Type 1 BB" and "Non-rare role" is the group "Type 1 BB" and the group "Non-rare role". It is obtained by adding the number of all condition devices belonging to. In particular,
(120 + 1 + 6) / 65536
= 127/65536 equation (1-8)
Will be. In the formula (1-8), the first "120" is the number 40 of "Type 1 BB-A", the number 40 of "Type 1 BB-B", and "Type 1 BB-C". The next "1" is the number 1 of "Type 1 BB-B + Replay-A", and the final "6" is "Type 1 BB-B + Winning A1". It is the sum 6 of the number 1 of "1" to "1 type BB-B + winning A6" (see the number of columns of RT0 in FIG. 105).

Further, in the case where the condition device overlaps with the bonus and is "Type 1 BB" and "Non-rare role" in the first target game state, the effects are both executed with a probability of 93.75%. That is, as shown in FIG. 150, the probability of "no effect" of the group "Type 1 BB", the probability of "no effect" of the group "replay", and the probability of "no effect" of the group "bell" are any. Is also 6.25%, and the probability that some kind of effect will be executed is 100-6.25 = 93.75. Specifically, as shown in the columns of "Type 1 BB" and "Non-rare role" due to the duplication of bonuses in FIG. 150, all of the group "Type 1 BB", the group "replay", and the group "Bell" are "Bell". One of "Character production" (6.25%), "Conversation production" (12.5%), and "Confrontation production" (75%) is selected.

Therefore, the probability that some effect will be executed when the condition device overlaps with the bonus and is "Type 1 BB" and "Non-rare role" in the first target game state is
127/65536 × 93.75 / 100
≒ 119/65536 formula (1-9)
Will be.

<Probability that some effect will be executed when the condition device overlaps with the bonus>
From the above, the probability that some effect will be executed when the condition device overlaps with the bonus in the first target game state is 225/65536 + 119/65536 from the equations (1-7) and (1-9).
= 344/65536 equation (1-10)
Will be.

<Probability that the effect is executed in the first target game state>
From the above, the probability that some effect will be executed in the first target game state is determined from the equations (1-5) and (1-10).
35187/65536 + 344/65536
= 35531/65536 equation (1-11)
Will be.

<Second target game state>
Next, the probability that the effect is executed in the second target game state is set to the same as in the first target game state.
(A) When the conditional device is a "rare role" with non-overlapping bonuses (b) When the conditional device is "missing" and "non-rare role" with non-overlapping bonuses (c) When the conditional device overlaps with the bonus " In the case of "rare role" (d) Calculated for each of the cases where the condition device overlaps with the bonus and is "type 1 BB" and "non-rare role". As described above, in the second target gaming state, the gaming section is an advantageous section, the RT state is RT0, and the state related to AT is the AT preparation state 2.

<(A) When the condition device is a "rare role" with non-overlapping bonuses>
The winning rate in which the condition device when the game is executed in the second target game state becomes a "rare role" with non-overlapping bonuses is the sum of the number of all the condition devices belonging to the group "rare role" with non-overlapping bonuses. Obtained by doing. In particular,
(3204 + 1000 + 700 + 300) / 65536
= 5204/65536 equation (2-1)
(See the number of columns in the RT0 column in FIG. 105). In the formula (2-1), as in the formula (1-1), the number of "winning-B" is 3204, the number of "winning-C" is 1000, and the number of "winning-D". 700 and the number 300 of "winning-E" were used (see the number of columns of RT0 in FIG. 105).

In addition, when the condition device is a "rare role" with no bonus overlap in the second target game state, "no effect" is not selected, and the effect is executed with a 100% probability (Fig.). See the "Rare role" column for 151 bonus non-overlapping). As shown in FIG. 151, specifically, in the case of non-overlapping bonuses, "common navigation effect" is always selected. Therefore, the probability that some effect will be executed when the condition device is a "rare role" with non-overlapping bonuses in the second target game state is
5204/65536 × 100/100
= 5204/65536 formula (2-2)
Will be. Here, the result of equation (2-1) (“5204/65536”) was used.

<(B) When the condition device is "missing" and "non-rare role" with non-overlapping bonus>
Condition when the game is executed in the second target game state The winning rate of "lost" and "non-rare role" is all the conditions belonging to the group "lost" and the group "non-rare role" because the device is non-overlapping bonus. It is obtained by adding the number of devices. In particular,
(65536-376-5204) / 65536
= 59965/65536 formula (2-3)
Will be. Here, the numerical value "367" in the equation (2-3) is the sum of the number of places where the conditional device that is the single bonus wins and the number of places that the conditional device that overlaps with the bonus wins. The numerical value "367" can be calculated in the same manner as in the formula (1-3) of the first target gaming state (see the number of columns of RT0 in FIG. 105).

In addition, when the condition devices are non-overlapping bonuses and are "lost" and "non-rare role" in the second target game state, the probability of "no effect" is 100% for all (FIG. 151). (Refer to the columns of "Loss" and "Non-rare role" for non-overlapping bonuses), there is no case where the production is executed.

Therefore, the probability that some effect will be executed when the condition device is "lost" and "non-rare role" with non-overlapping bonuses in the second target gaming state is
59965/65536 × 0/100
= 0/65536 equation (2-4)
Will be.

<Probability that some effect will be executed when the condition device is non-overlapping bonus>
From the above, the probability that some effect will be executed when the condition device is non-overlapping in the second target game state is 5204/65536 + 0/65536 from the equations (2-2) and (2-4).
= 5204/65536 formula (2-5)
Will be.

<(C) When the condition device overlaps with the bonus and is a "rare role">
The winning rate in which the condition device when the game is executed in the second target game state overlaps with the bonus and becomes a "rare role" is the number of all the condition devices belonging to the group "rare role" with the bonus overlap. It can be obtained by. In particular,
(80 + 80 + 80) / 65536
= 240/65536 formula (2-6)
Will be. It should be noted that this equation (2-6) can be calculated in the same manner as the equation (1-6) of the first target gaming state (see the number of columns of RT0 in FIG. 105).

In addition, when the condition device overlaps with the bonus and is a "rare role" in the second target game state, "no effect" is not selected and the effect is executed with a 100% probability (Fig.). See the "Rare role" column for 151 bonus duplication). Specifically, when the condition device overlaps with the bonus, only "common navigation effect" is selected. Therefore, the probability that some effect will be executed when the condition device overlaps with the bonus and is a "rare role" in the second target game state is
240/65536 × 100/100
= 240/65536 formula (2-7)
Will be. Here, the result of equation (2-6) ("240/65536") was used.

<(D) When the condition device overlaps with the bonus and is "Type 1 BB" and "Non-rare role">
The winning rate when the condition device when the game is executed in the second target game state overlaps with the bonus and becomes "Type 1 BB" and "Non-rare role" is the group "Type 1 BB" and the group "Non-rare role". It is obtained by adding the number of all condition devices belonging to. In particular,
(120 + 1 + 6) / 65536
= 127/65536 formula (2-8)
Will be. It should be noted that this equation (2-8) can be calculated in the same manner as the equation (1-8) of the first target gaming state (see the number of columns of RT0 in FIG. 105).

Further, in the second target game state, when the condition device overlaps with the bonus and is "Type 1 BB" and "Non-rare role", the production is executed with a probability of 0% (see FIG. 151). ).

Therefore, the probability that some effect will be executed when the conditional device overlaps with the bonus and is "Type 1 BB" and "Non-rare role" in the second target gaming state is
127/65536 × 0/100
= 0/65536 formula (2-9)
Will be. Here, the result of equation (2-8) (“127/65536”) was used.

<Probability that some effect will be executed when the condition device overlaps with the bonus>
From the above, the probability that some effect will be executed when the conditional device overlaps with the bonus in the second target game state is 240/65536 + 0/65536 from the equations (2-7) and (2-9).
= 240/65536 formula (2-10)
Will be.

<Probability that the effect is executed in the second target game state>
From the above, the probability that some effect will be executed in the second target game state is determined from the equations (2-5) and (2-10).
5204/65536 + 240/65536
= 5444/65536 formula (2-11)
Will be.

<Comparison result between the first target game state and the second target game state>
The probability of executing some effect in the first target game state is determined from the equation (1-11).
35531/65536
Is. In addition, the probability of executing some effect in the second target game state is determined from the equation (2-11).
5444/65536
Is.

therefore,
35531/65536> 5444/65536 formula (2-12)
Is established, and when the first target game state and the second target game state are compared, the probability of executing some effect in the first target game state is higher than the probability of executing some effect in the second target game state. Is also configured to be high.
As described above, in the first target gaming state, the gaming section is a normal section, the RT state is RT0, and the state related to AT is a low probability state. On the other hand, in the second target gaming state, the gaming section is an advantageous section, the RT state is RT0, and the state related to AT is the AT preparation state 2. Therefore, when the RT states of the target game state are both RT0, the effect is more easily executed in the normal section than in the advantageous section. If the player looks at the advantageous section indicator YH, it is possible to determine whether or not the game section is currently an advantageous section. For this reason, if the game section can be recognized as a normal section, the motivation for the game is reduced. Therefore, in the normal section, various effects are frequently executed to move to an advantageous section. Since it is possible to raise the expectation for the transition of, the probability of executing some kind of production in the first target game state is increased. In the first target gaming state, the effect suggesting the current set value may be more easily executed than in the second target gaming state. For example, in a game related to a loss that has not been won in a bonus or AT lottery, an effect that can be executed only in a normal section may be provided, and the effect may be configured so that the higher the set value, the higher the occurrence rate. With such a configuration, the player will be more motivated to proceed with the game even in the normal section.

<< (Comparison 2) Second target game state and third target game state >>

<Second target game state>
As described above, the probability of executing some kind of effect in the second target gaming state is determined by the equation (2-11).
5444/65536
Is.

<Third target game state>
First, the probability that the effect will be executed in the third target gaming state is determined.
(A) When the conditional device is a "rare role" with non-overlapping bonuses (b) When the conditional device is "missing" and "non-rare role" with non-overlapping bonuses (c) When the conditional device overlaps with the bonus " In the case of "rare role" (d) Calculated for each of the cases where the condition device overlaps with the bonus and is "type 1 BB" and "non-rare role". As described above, in the third target gaming state, the gaming section is an advantageous section, the RT state is RT1, and the state related to AT is the AT in-progress state.

<(A) When the condition device is a "rare role" with non-overlapping bonuses>
The winning rate in which the conditional device when the game is executed in the third target game state becomes a "rare role" with non-overlapping bonuses is the sum of the number of all the conditional devices belonging to the group "rare role" with non-overlapping bonuses. Obtained by doing. In particular,
(3204 + 1000 + 700 + 300) / 65536
= 5204/65536 equation (3-1)
(See the number of columns in the RT1 column in FIG. 105). In the formula (3-1), the number of "winning-B" is 3204, the number of "winning-C" is 1000, the number of "winning-D" is 700, and the number of "winning-E" is set. The number 300 was used (see the number in the column of RT1 in FIG. 105).

In addition, when the condition device is a "rare role" with no bonus overlap in the third target game state, "no effect" is not selected, and the effect is executed with a 100% probability (Fig.). See the "Rare role" column for 152 non-overlapping bonuses). As shown in FIG. 152, specifically, in the case of non-overlapping bonuses, "conversation effect" (12.5%), "cut-in effect" (25%), "confrontation effect" (25%), One of the effects of "Additional battle (only during ART)" (37.5%) is selected. Therefore, the probability that some effect will be executed when the condition device is a "rare role" with non-overlapping bonuses in the third target game state is
5204/65536 × 100/100
= 5204/65536 formula (3-2)
Will be. Here, the result of equation (3-1) (“5204/65536”) was used.

<(B) When the condition device is "missing" and "non-rare role" with non-overlapping bonus>
The winning rate when the condition device when the game is executed in the third target game state is "lost" and "non-rare role" due to non-overlapping bonus is all belonging to the group "lost" and the group "non-rare role". It is obtained by adding the number of condition devices. In particular,
(65536-376-5204) / 65536
= 59965/65536 formula (3-3)
Will be. Here, the numerical value "367" in the equation (3-3) is the sum of the number of units won by the conditional device that is the single bonus and the number of units that the conditional device that overlaps with the bonus wins.

The sum of the number of units won by the condition device that is a single bonus is the number of units of "Type 1 BB-A" 40, the number of units of "Type 1 BB-B" 40, and the number of "Type 1 BB-C". It is the sum of the number 40 and 120 (= 40 + 40 + 40) (see the number in the column of RT1 in FIG. 105).

In addition, the number of places that the condition device that overlaps with the bonus wins is the number of places of "1 type BB-B + prize-C" 40, the number of places of "1 type BB-B + prize-D", and "1 type". BB-B + prize-E "number 40," 1 type BB-C + prize-C "number 40," 1 type BB-C + prize-D "number 40, and" 1 type BB- " The sum of the numbers 240 (= 40 + 40 + 40 + 40 + 40 + 40) with the number 40 of "C + winning-E" (see the number of columns in RT1 in FIG. 105) and the number 1 of "Type 1 BB-B + Replay-A" , "Class 1 BB-B + Winning-A1", "Class 1 BB-B + Winning-A2", "Class 1 BB-B + Winning-A3", and "Class 1 BB-B + Winning-A3". The sum of 1 of "1st class BB-B + winning-A4", 1 of "1st class BB-B + winning-A5", and 1 of "1st class BB-B + winning-A6" (7) = 1 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1) (see the number of columns in RT1 in FIG. 105) and the sum 247 (= 240 + 7).

Therefore, the numerical value "367" in the equation (3-3) can be calculated by the sum of the number 120 in which the condition device that is the single bonus is won and the number 247 in which the condition device that overlaps with the bonus is won. Further, the numerical value "5204" in the equation (3-3) is the result of the equation (3-1). As shown in the formula (3-3), by calculating "65536-376-5204", the number of places where the condition device that becomes a single bonus wins, the number of places that the condition device that overlaps with the bonus wins, and the number of times that the condition device overlaps with the bonus wins. It is possible to exclude the number of "rare roles", and it is possible to calculate the number of positions when the condition device is "missing" and "non-rare role" with non-overlapping bonuses.

Further, in the third target game state, when the condition devices are "missing" and "non-rare role" with non-overlapping bonuses, the effects are both executed with a probability of 13.5% (FIG. 152). See the "Loss" and "Non-rare roles" columns for non-overlapping bonuses). As shown in FIG. 152, the probability of "no effect" in each of the group "loss", the group "replay", and the group "bell" is 86.5%, and the probability that some effect is executed is , 100-86.5 = 13.5. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 152, all of the group "loss", the group "replay", and the group "bell" are "conversation production" (12.5%) and "confrontation production" (1%). ) Is selected.

Therefore, the probability that some effect will be executed when the condition device is a "loss" and a "non-rare role" with non-overlapping bonuses in the third target gaming state is
59965/65536 × 13.5 / 100
≒ 8095/65536 formula (3-4)
Will be. Here, the result of equation (3-3) (“59965/65536”) was used.

<Probability that some effect will be executed when the condition device is non-overlapping bonus>
From the above, the probability that some effect will be executed when the condition device is non-overlapping in the third target gaming state is 5204/65536 + 8095/65536 from the equations (3-2) and (3-4).
= 13299/65536 formula (3-5)
Will be.

<(C) When the condition device overlaps with the bonus and is a "rare role">
The winning rate in which the condition device when the game is executed in the third target game state overlaps with the bonus and becomes a "rare role" is the number of all the condition devices belonging to the group "rare role" with the bonus overlap. It can be obtained by. In particular,
(80 + 80 + 80) / 65536
= 240/65536 formula (3-6)
Will be. In the formula (3-6), the first "80" is the sum of the number 40 of "1st class BB-B + winning-C" and the number 40 of "1st class BB-C + winning-C". Yes, the next "80" is the sum of the number 40 of "Type 1 BB-B + Winning-D" and the number 40 of "Type 1 BB-C + Winning-D", and the final "80" is , The sum of the number 40 of "Type 1 BB-B + Winning-E" and the number 40 of "Type 1 BB-C + Winning-E" (see the number of columns of RT1 in FIG. 105).

Further, in the third target game state, when the condition device overlaps with the bonus and is a "rare role", the effect is executed with a probability of 87.5%. That is, as shown in FIG. 152, the probability of "no effect" in the group "rare role" is 12.5%, and the probability that some effect is executed is 100-12.5 = 87.5. .. Specifically, as shown in the column of "rare role", which overlaps with the bonus in FIG. 152, "conversation production" (12.5%), "cut-in production" (25%), and "confrontation production" (25). %) Or "Additional battle (only during ART)" (25%) is selected.

Therefore, the probability that some effect will be executed when the conditional device overlaps with the bonus and is a "rare role" in the third target game state is determined by using the equation (3-6).
240/65536 × 87.5 / 100
= 210/65536 formula (3-7)
Will be.

<(D) When the condition device overlaps with the bonus and is "Type 1 BB" and "Non-rare role">
The winning rate when the condition device when the game is executed in the third target game state overlaps with the bonus and becomes "Type 1 BB" and "Non-rare role" is the group "Type 1 BB" and the group "Non-rare role". It is obtained by adding the number of all condition devices belonging to. In particular,
(120 + 1 + 6) / 65536
= 127/65536 formula (3-8)
Will be. In the formula (3-8), the first "120" is the number 40 of "Type 1 BB-A", the number 40 of "Type 1 BB-B", and "Type 1 BB-C". The next "1" is the number 1 of "Type 1 BB-B + Replay-A", and the final "6" is "Type 1 BB-B + Winning A1". It is the sum 6 of the number 1 of "1" to "1 type BB-B + winning A6" (see the number of columns of RT1 in FIG. 105).

Further, in the third target gaming state, when the condition device overlaps with the bonus and is "Type 1 BB" and "Non-rare role", the production is executed with a probability of 43.75%. That is, as shown in FIG. 152, the probability of "no production" in the group "Type 1 BB", the probability of "no production" in the group "replay", and the probability of "no production" in the group "bell" are any. Is also 56.25%, and the probability that some kind of effect will be executed is 100-56.25 = 43.75. Specifically, as shown in the columns of "Type 1 BB" and "Non-rare role", which overlaps with the bonus in FIG. 152, all of the group "Type 1 BB", the group "replay", and the group "Bell" One of "conversation production" (25%), "cut-in production" (6.25%), and "confrontation production" (12.5%) is selected.

Therefore, the probability that some effect will be executed when the conditional device overlaps with the bonus and is "Type 1 BB" and "Non-rare role" in the third target gaming state is
127/65536 × 43.75 / 100
≒ 56/65536 formula (3-9)
Will be.

<Probability that some effect will be executed when the condition device overlaps with the bonus>
From the above, the probability that some effect will be executed when the conditional device overlaps with the bonus in the third target game state is 210/65536 + 56/65536 from the equations (3-7) and (3-9).
= 266/65536 equation (3-10)
Will be.

<Probability that the production is executed in the third target game state>
From the above, the probability that some effect will be executed in the third target game state is determined from the equations (3-5) and (3-10).
13299/65536 + 266/65536
= 13565/65536 formula (3-11)
Will be.

<Comparison result between the second target game state and the third target game state>
The probability of executing some kind of effect in the second target game state is calculated from equation (2-11).
5444/65536
Is. In addition, the probability of executing some effect in the third target game state is determined from the equation (3-11).
13565/65536
Is.

therefore,
5444/65536 <13565/65536 formula (3-12)
Is established, and when the second target game state and the third target game state are compared, the probability of executing some effect in the third target game state is higher than the probability of executing some effect in the second target game state. Is also configured to be high.

As described above, in the second target gaming state, the gaming section is an advantageous section, the RT state is RT0, and the state related to AT is the AT preparation state 2. On the other hand, in the third target gaming state, the gaming section is an advantageous section, the RT state is RT1, and the state related to AT is the AT in progress state. Therefore, when the gaming sections in the target gaming state are both advantageous sections, the effect is more easily executed when the RT state is RT1 than when the RT state is RT0. Since the second target gaming state is the AT preparation state 2 and it is certain that the transition to the third target gaming state is made, the player expects to shift to the third target gaming state. Since it is not necessary to feel the expectation of the production (it is not necessary to excessively incite the player by the production), it is preferable to make the production as simple as possible and end the second target game state. The probability of executing some kind of effect in the target game state of 2 is lowered.

<< (Comparison 3) First target game state and fourth target game state >>

<First target game state>
As described above, the probability of executing some kind of effect in the first target game state is determined by the equation (1-11).
35531/65536
Is.

<Fourth target game state>
First, the probability that the effect will be executed in the fourth target game state is determined.
(A) When the conditional device is a "rare role" with non-overlapping bonuses (b) When the conditional device is a "missing" and "non-rare" role with non-overlapping bonuses (c) When the conditional device overlaps with the bonus " In the case of "rare role" (d) Calculated for each of the cases where the condition device overlaps with the bonus and is "type 1 BB" and "non-rare role". As described above, in the fourth target gaming state, the gaming section is the normal section, the RT state is RT1, and the state related to AT is the fall waiting state.

<(A) When the condition device is a "rare role" with non-overlapping bonuses>
The winning rate in which the condition device when the game is executed in the fourth target game state becomes a "rare role" with a non-overlapping bonus is the number of all the conditional devices belonging to the group "rare role" with a non-overlapping bonus. Obtained by doing. In particular,
(3204 + 1000 + 700 + 300) / 65536
= 5204/65536 equation (4-1)
(See the number of columns in the RT1 column in FIG. 105). In the formula (4-1), the number of "winning-B" is 3204, the number of "winning-C" is 1000, the number of "winning-D" is 700, and the number of "winning-E" is set. The number 300 was used (see the number in the column of RT1 in FIG. 105).

In addition, when the condition device is a "rare role" with no bonus overlap in the fourth target game state, "no effect" is not selected, and the effect is executed with a 100% probability (Fig.). See the "Rare role" column for 153 non-overlapping bonuses). As shown in FIG. 153, specifically, in the case of non-overlapping bonuses, one of "character production" (5%), "conversation production" (5%), and "cut-in production" (90%). The production of is selected. Therefore, the probability that some effect will be executed when the condition device is a "rare role" with non-overlapping bonuses in the fourth target game state is
5204/65536 × 100/100
= 5204/65536 equation (4-2)
Will be. Here, the result of equation (4-1) (“5204/65536”) was used.

<(B) When the condition device is "missing" and "non-rare role" with non-overlapping bonus>
The winning rate when the condition device when the game is executed in the fourth target game state is "lost" and "non-rare role" due to non-overlapping bonus is all belonging to the group "lost" and the group "non-rare role". It is obtained by adding the positions of the condition devices (see the number of columns of RT1 in FIG. 105). In particular,
(65536-376-5204) / 65536
= 59965/65536 formula (4-3)
Will be. Here, the RT state of the fourth target gaming state is RT1, and the equation (4-3) can be calculated in the same manner as the equation (3-3).

Further, in the fourth target game state, when the condition devices are "missing" and "non-rare role" due to non-overlapping bonuses, the effects are both executed with a probability of 5% (non-bonus in FIG. 153). Refer to the columns of "Loss" and "Non-rare role" due to duplication). As shown in FIG. 153, the probability of "no effect" in each of the group "loss", the group "replay", and the group "bell" is 95%, and the probability that some effect is executed is 100. -95 = 5. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 153, all of the group "loss", the group "replay", and the group "bell" are "character production" (2.5%) and "conversation production" (2). One of the effects of .5%) is selected.

Therefore, the probability that some effect will be executed when the condition device is a "loss" and a "non-rare role" with non-overlapping bonuses in the fourth target game state is
59965/65536 × 5/100
≒ 2998/65536 formula (4-4)
Will be. Here, the result of equation (4-3) (“59965/65536”) was used.

<Probability that some effect will be executed when the condition device is non-overlapping bonus>
From the above, the probability that some effect will be executed when the condition device is non-overlapping in the fourth target gaming state is 5204/65536 + 2998/65536 from the equations (4-2) and (4-4).
= 8202/65536 formula (4-5)
Will be.

<(C) When the condition device overlaps with the bonus and is a "rare role">
The winning rate in which the condition device when the game is executed in the fourth target game state overlaps with the bonus and becomes a "rare role" is added to the number of all the condition devices belonging to the group "rare role" with the bonus overlap. It can be obtained by. In particular,
(80 + 80 + 80) / 65536
= 240/65536 formula (4-6)
Will be. The equation (4-6) can be calculated in the same manner as the equation (3-6) (see the number of columns of RT1 in FIG. 105).

In addition, when the condition device overlaps with the bonus and is a "rare role" in the fourth target game state, "no effect" is not selected, and the effect is executed with a 100% probability (Fig.). Overlap with the 153 bonus and see the "Rare Role" column). As shown in FIG. 153, specifically, in the case of non-overlapping bonuses, one of "character production" (5%), "conversation production" (5%), and "cut-in production" (90%). The production of is selected.

Therefore, the probability that some effect will be executed when the conditional device overlaps with the bonus and is a "rare role" in the third target game state is
240/65536 × 100/100
= 240/65536 formula (4-7)
Will be. Here, the result of equation (4-6) (“240/65536”) was used.

<(D) When the condition device overlaps with the bonus and is "Type 1 BB" and "Non-rare role">
The winning rate when the condition device when the game is executed in the fourth target game state overlaps with the bonus and becomes "Type 1 BB" and "Non-rare role" is the group "Type 1 BB" and the group "Non-rare role". It is obtained by adding the number of all condition devices belonging to. In particular,
(120 + 1 + 6) / 65536
= 127/65536 formula (4-8)
Will be. The equation (4-8) can be calculated in the same manner as the equation (3-8) (see the number of columns of RT1 in FIG. 105).

In addition, when the condition device overlaps with the bonus in the fourth target game state and is "Type 1 BB" and "Non-rare role", "No effect" is not selected and the effect is 100%. It is executed with probability (see the columns of "Type 1 BB" and "Non-rare role" due to the bonus duplication in FIG. 153). As shown in FIG. 153, specifically, when it overlaps with the bonus, one of "character production" (5%), "conversation production" (5%), and "cut-in production" (90%). The production of is selected.

Therefore, the probability that some effect will be executed when the condition device overlaps with the bonus and is "Type 1 BB" and "Non-rare role" in the fourth target game state is
127/65536 × 100/100
= 127/65536 formula (4-9)
Will be.

<Probability that some effect will be executed when the condition device overlaps with the bonus>
From the above, the probability that some effect will be executed when the conditional device overlaps with the bonus in the fourth target game state is 240/65536 + 127/65536 from the equations (4-7) and (4-9).
= 367/65536 equation (4-10)
Will be.

<Probability that the production is executed in the fourth target game state>
From the above, the probability that some effect will be executed in the fourth target game state is determined from the equations (4-5) and (4-10).
8202/65536 + 367/65536
= 8569/65536 formula (4-11)
Will be.

<Comparison result between the first target game state and the fourth target game state>
The probability of executing some effect in the first target game state is determined from the equation (1-11).
35531/65536
Is. In addition, the probability of executing some effect in the fourth target game state is determined from the equation (4-11).
8569/65536
Is.

therefore,
35531/65536> 8569/65536 formula (4-12)
Is established, and when the first target game state and the fourth target game state are compared, the probability of executing some effect in the first target game state is higher than the probability of executing some effect in the fourth target game state. Is also configured to be high.

As described above, in the first target gaming state, the gaming section is a normal section, the RT state is RT0, and the state related to AT is a low probability state. On the other hand, in the fourth target gaming state, the gaming section is a normal section, the RT state is RT1, and the state related to AT is a fall waiting state. Therefore, when the gaming sections in the target gaming state are both normal sections, the effect is more easily executed when the RT state is RT0 than when the RT state is RT1. In this case, the fourth target gaming state is a fall waiting state until it shifts from the advantageous section to the normal section and shifts to the low probability state, shifts to the low probability state as soon as possible, and then next. It is preferable to shift to the advantageous section again, it is not necessary to give a sense of expectation by directing, and it is not necessary to make it feel as if it is still an advantageous section, so in the fourth target game state. The probability of performing some kind of production is low. That is, in the fall waiting state, since the ART state has ended = the high profit state has ended for the player, we would like to encourage the player to proceed with the game aiming at the next AT winning, and information on the advantageous section is available. It is configured so that the frequency of occurrence of the production is relatively low in order to clarify that all have been cleared.

<< (Comparison 4) Third target game state and sixth target game state >>

<Third target game state>
As described above, the probability of executing some effect in the third target game state is determined from the equation (3-11).
13565/65536
Is.

<Sixth target game state>
First, the probability that the effect will be executed in the sixth target game state is determined.
(A) When the conditional device is a "rare role" with non-overlapping bonuses (b) When the conditional device is "missing" and "non-rare role" with non-overlapping bonuses (c) When the conditional device overlaps with the bonus " In the case of "rare role" (d) Calculated for each of the cases where the condition device overlaps with the bonus and is "type 1 BB" and "non-rare role". As described above, in the sixth target gaming state, the gaming section is an advantageous section, the RT state is RT0, and the state related to AT is the AT in progress state after the fall.

<(A) When the condition device is a "rare role" with non-overlapping bonuses>
The winning rate in which the conditional device when the game is executed in the sixth target game state becomes a "rare role" with non-overlapping bonuses is the sum of the number of all the conditional devices belonging to the group "rare role" with non-overlapping bonuses. Obtained by doing. In particular,
(3204 + 1000 + 700 + 300) / 65536
= 5204/65536 equation (6-1)
(See the number of columns in the RT0 column in FIG. 105). The equation (2-1) can be calculated in the same manner as the equation (1-1) (see the number of columns of RT0 in FIG. 105).

In addition, when the condition device is a "rare role" with no bonus overlap in the sixth target game state, "no effect" is not selected, and the effect is executed with a 100% probability (Fig.). See the "Rare role" column for 155 bonus non-overlapping). As shown in FIG. 155, specifically, in the case of non-overlapping bonuses, "conversation effect" (12.5%), "cut-in effect" (25%), "confrontation effect" (25%), One of the "additional battles (only for ART)" (37.5%) is always selected. Therefore, the probability that some effect will be executed when the condition device is a "rare role" with non-overlapping bonuses in the sixth target game state is
5204/65536 × 100/100
= 5204/65536 formula (6-2)
Will be. Here, the result of equation (6-1) (“5204/65536”) was used.

<(B) When the condition device is "missing" and "non-rare role" with non-overlapping bonus>
The winning rate when the condition device when the game is executed in the sixth target game state is "lost" and "non-rare role" due to non-overlapping bonus is all belonging to the group "lost" and the group "non-rare role". It is obtained by adding the number of condition devices. In particular,
(65536-376-5204) / 65536
= 59965/65536 formula (6-3)
Will be. Here, the numerical value "367" in the equation (6-3) is the sum of the number of single bonus wins and the number of bonus duplicate wins. The numerical value "367" can be calculated in the same manner as in the formula (1-3) of the first target gaming state.

In addition, when the condition devices are non-overlapping bonuses and are "lost" and "non-rare role" in the sixth target game state, the probability of "no effect" is 100% for all (FIG. 151). (Refer to the columns of "Loss" and "Non-rare role" for non-overlapping bonuses), there is no case where the production is executed.

Therefore, the probability that some effect will be executed when the condition device is "lost" and "non-rare role" with non-overlapping bonuses in the second target gaming state is
59965/65536 × 0/100
= 0/65536 equation (6-4)
Will be.

<Probability that some effect will be executed when the condition device is non-overlapping bonus>
From the above, the probability that some effect will be executed when the condition device is non-overlapping in the sixth target game state is 5204/65536 + 0/65536 from the equations (6-2) and (6-4).
= 5204/65536 formula (6-5)
Will be.

<(C) When the condition device overlaps with the bonus and is a "rare role">
The winning rate in which the condition device when the game is executed in the sixth target game state overlaps with the bonus and becomes a "rare role" is added to the number of all the condition devices belonging to the group "rare role" with the bonus overlap. It can be obtained by. In particular,
(80 + 80 + 80) / 65536
= 240/65536 formula (6-6)
Will be. It should be noted that this equation (6-6) can be calculated in the same manner as the equation (1-6) of the first target gaming state.

In addition, when the condition device overlaps with the bonus and is a "rare role" in the sixth target game state, the effects are all executed with a probability of 12.5% (the bonus overlap in FIG. 155 is "rare". See the "role" column). The probability that some effect will be executed is 100-12.5 = 87.5. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 155, any one of "conversation effect" (12.5%), "cut-in effect" (37.5%), and "confrontation effect" (37.5%). The production of is selected.

Therefore, the probability that some effect will be executed when the condition device overlaps with the bonus and is a "rare role" in the sixth target game state is determined by using the equation (6-6).
240/65536 × 87.5 / 100
= 210/65536 formula (6-7)
Will be. Here, the result (“240/65536”) of the equation (6-6) was used.

<(D) When the condition device overlaps with the bonus and is "Type 1 BB" and "Non-rare role">
The winning rate when the condition device when the game is executed in the sixth target game state overlaps with the bonus and becomes "Type 1 BB" and "Non-rare role" is the group "Type 1 BB" and the group "Non-rare role". It is obtained by adding the number of all condition devices belonging to. In particular,
(120 + 1 + 6) / 65536
= 127/65536 formula (6-8)
Will be. It should be noted that this equation (6-8) can be calculated in the same manner as the equation (1-8) of the first target gaming state.

In addition, in the sixth target game state, when the condition device overlaps with the bonus and is "Type 1 BB" and "Non-rare role", the production is executed with a probability of 43.75% (Fig.). Overlap with the 155 bonus and see the "Rare Role" column). The probability that some effect will be executed is 100-56.25 = 43.75. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 155, one of "conversation production" (25%), "cut-in production" (6.25%), and "confrontation production" (12.5%). Is selected.

Therefore, the probability that some effect will be executed when the condition device overlaps with the bonus and is "Type 1 BB" and "Non-rare role" in the sixth target game state is
127/65536 × 43.75 / 100
= 56/65536 formula (6-9)
Will be. Here, the result of equation (6-8) (“127/65536”) was used.

<Probability that some effect will be executed when the condition device overlaps with the bonus>
From the above, the probability that some effect will be executed when the conditional device overlaps with the bonus in the sixth target game state is 210/65536 + 56/65536 from the equations (6-7) and (6-9).
= 266/65536 equation (6-10)
Will be.

<Probability that the effect is executed in the sixth target game state>
From the above, the probability that some effect will be executed in the second target game state is determined from the equations (6-5) and (6-10).
5204/65536 + 266/65536
= 5470/65536 formula (6-11)

<Comparison result between the third target game state and the sixth target game state>
The probability of executing some kind of effect in the third target game state is calculated from equation (3-11).
13565/65536
Is. Further, the probability of executing some effect in the sixth target game state is determined from the equation (6-11).
5470/65536
Is.

therefore,
5470/65536 <13565/65536 formula (6-12)
Is established, and when the third target game state and the sixth target game state are compared, the probability of executing some effect in the third target game state is higher than the probability of executing some effect in the sixth target game state. Is also configured to be high.

As described above, in the third target gaming state, the gaming section is an advantageous section, the RT state is RT1, and the state related to AT is the AT in-progress state. On the other hand, in the sixth target gaming state, the gaming section is an advantageous section, the RT state is RT0, and the state related to AT is the AT in progress state after the fall. Therefore, when both game sections are advantageous sections, the effect is more easily executed when the RT state is RT1 than when the RT state is RT0. This tendency is the same as in Comparison 2, and when the game section is an advantageous section, the effect is likely to be executed when the RT state is RT1. In this case, the RT state has changed from RT1 to RT0 even though it is in the AT state, and it is a little earlier than raising the expectation by the production when the RT state is RT0. Since it is preferable to return the RT state to RT1, the probability that some effect will be executed in the sixth target game state is lowered. Further, by providing a dedicated effect in this state, it is possible to prevent the processing from becoming complicated and securing the image data for the effect.

<<< Modification 1-1 >>>
In the third embodiment described above, the AT counter is subtracted when the state related to AT is in the AT state, and the state related to AT is shifted to the fall waiting state on condition that the value of the AT counter becomes 0. It was configured to shift the AT-related state to the low-probability state on condition that the RT state changed from RT1 to RT0 when the AT-related state was in the fall waiting state.

FIG. 159 is a block diagram showing an AT state transition diagram of Modification 1-1. In the modified example 1-1, as shown in FIG. 159, when the value of the AT counter becomes 0 in the situation where the game section is an advantageous section, the state shifts to the AT fall waiting state and the RT state is not performed because the navigation is not performed. When it changes from RT1 to RT0, it shifts the state related to AT to the pullback (weak) state. As described above, in the modified example 1-1, the game section is an advantageous section, the RT state is RT0, and the state related to AT is the pullback (weak) state (hereinafter referred to as the seventh target game state). ) Is provided.

Then, in this pullback (weak) state (during 10 games), if the rare role (winning-C, winning-D, winning-E) is won, the state related to AT is pulled back (weak). To shift to the recovery precursor state. Further, if the replay 06 symbol can be stopped and displayed by the navigation when the state is a sign of return, it is possible to return to the AT state. If the rare role (winning-C, winning-D, winning-E) is not won in the pullback (weak) state, the advantageous section ends and the probability shifts to the low probability state.

<< AT state transition control process >>
160 and 161 are flowcharts showing a part of the AT state transition control process in the modified example 1-1. In the first modification, the process of FIG. 114 of the third embodiment is executed in the same manner. FIG. 160 is a process corresponding to FIG. 116 of the third embodiment, and when No in step 1832 or 1834 of FIG. 115, the process shown in FIG. 160 is executed. Further, FIG. 161 is a process corresponding to FIG. 117 of the third embodiment, and the same reference numerals are given to the steps for performing the same process as in FIG. 117. As described above, in the modified example 1-1, first, the processes of FIGS. 114 and 115 of the third embodiment are executed, and then the processes of FIGS. 160 and 161 are executed.

First, in the case of No in step 1832 or 1834 of FIG. 115, in step 1952 of FIG. 160, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state related to AT is the AT in progress state. In the case of Yes in step 1952, in step 1954, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the AT counter value becomes 0 in the game. In the case of Yes in step 1954, in step 1956, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the state related to AT after the next game to the AT fall waiting state, and ends this subroutine. If No in step 1954, this subroutine is immediately terminated.

If No in step 1952, in step 1958, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state related to AT is the AT fall waiting state. In the case of Yes in step 1958, in step 1960, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the condition device related to the game is the replay-D1 to D3. In the case of Yes in step 1960, in step 1962, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the selection candidate of the state related to the AT after the next game based on the state related to the current AT and the winning condition device. , End this subroutine. If No in step 1960, this subroutine is immediately terminated.

The selection candidate of the state related to the AT after the next game of the process of step 1962 includes the pullback (weak) state. As shown in FIG. 162, when the AT-related state of the game is the AT fall waiting state, there are two selection candidates, the AT falling waiting state and the pullback (weak) state. When the re-game 01, the re-game 02, and the re-game 03 are stopped and displayed, the AT fall waiting state is selected as the state related to the AT after the next game, and when the re-game 04 is stopped and displayed, the next The pullback (weak) state is selected as the state related to AT after the game.

If No in step 1958, in step 1964, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state related to the AT is a pullback (weak) state. In the case of Yes in step 1964, in step 1966, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not 10 games have been executed in the pulled back (weak) state. In the case of Yes in step 1966, in step 1968, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the state related to AT after the next game to a low probability state, and ends this subroutine.

If No in step 1966, in step 1970, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the prize-C, the prize-D, and the prize-E have been won. In the case of Yes in step 1970, in step 1972, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the state related to the AT after the next game to the return precursor state, and ends this subroutine. If No in step 1970, this subroutine is immediately terminated.

If No in step 1964, in step 1974, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state related to the AT is a return precursor state. In the case of Yes in step 1974, in step 1976, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the condition device related to the game is the replay-E1 to E3. In the case of Yes in step 1976, in step 1978, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the selection candidate of the state related to the AT after the next game based on the state related to the current AT and the winning condition device. , End this subroutine.

The AT-related state selection candidates for the AT after the next game of the process of step 1978 include the AT in-progress state. As shown in FIG. 162, when the state related to the AT of the game is the return precursor state, there are two selection candidates, the return precursor state and the AT in progress state. When the re-game 01, the re-game 02, and the re-game 03 are stopped and displayed, the return precursor state is selected as the state related to the AT after the next game, and when the re-game 06 is stopped and displayed, the next game is displayed. The AT in progress state is selected as the state related to the subsequent AT.

If No in step 1974 or 1976, the process is transferred to step 1440 in FIG. Steps 1440, 1442 and 1444 of FIG. 161 are similar to the process shown in FIG. 117.

<< Scenario lottery table determination process >>
FIG. 163 is a flowchart showing the scenario lottery table determination process in the modified example 1-1. As described above, in the modification 1-1, the pullback (weak) state is included in the state related to the AT, and the scenario effect table corresponding to the pullback (weak) state is selected. In the flowchart shown in FIG. 163, the same reference numerals are given to the steps for performing the same processing as in the third embodiment.

First, if No in step 4120, in step 4152, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the state related to AT is pulled back (weak).

In the case of Yes in step 4152, in step 4154, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S selects the scenario effect table T4. In this way, the scenario effect table T4 is selected as the scenario effect table corresponding to the pullback (weak) state.

If No in step 4152, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S shifts the process to step 4112.

Further, as shown in the AT state transition diagram of FIG. 159, the modified example 1-1 does not have a fall waiting state as a state related to AT. Therefore, in the case of Yes in step 4124, in step 4130, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the state related to AT is a low probability state. In the case of Yes in step 4130, in step 4132, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the RT state is RT1.

In the case of Yes in step 4132, in step 4134, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S selects the scenario effect table T7.

If No in step 4132, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S selects the scenario effect table T1 in step 4136.

If No in step 4124 and No in step 4130, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S shifts the process to step 4112.

<< 7th target game state >>
As described above, in the seventh target gaming state, the gaming section is an advantageous section, the RT state is RT0, and the state related to AT is a pullback (weak) state. FIG. 164 (A) is an effect selection probability table in the case of the seventh target gaming state. Further, FIG. 164 (B) is a scenario selection probability table in the case of the seventh target gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 164 (B), when the conditional devices are bonus non-overlapping and bonus duplication, and are lost, non-rare role, and rare role, only scenario 1 is selected, and other scenarios 2 and 3 are selected. Is not selected.

As shown in FIG. 164 (A), when the condition device is a bonus non-overlapping and is a loss or a non-rare role, only "no effect" is selected, and no other effect is selected. .. If the condition device is a bonus non-overlapping and a rare role, or a bonus duplication and a lost non-rare role or a rare role, only "cut-in effect" is selected and another effect is selected. Will not be done.

Next, the probability that the effect is executed in the seventh target game state is determined.
(A) When the conditional device is a "rare role" with non-overlapping bonuses (b) When the conditional device is "missing" and "non-rare role" with non-overlapping bonuses (c) When the conditional device overlaps with the bonus " In the case of "rare role" (d) Calculated for each of the cases where the condition device overlaps with the bonus and is "type 1 BB" and "non-rare role". As described above, in the seventh target gaming state, the gaming section is an advantageous section, the RT state is RT0, and the state related to AT is a pullback (weak) state.

<(A) When the condition device is a "rare role" with non-overlapping bonuses>
The winning rate in which the condition device when the game is executed in the seventh target game state becomes a "rare role" with non-overlapping bonuses is the sum of the number of all the condition devices belonging to the group "rare role" with non-overlapping bonuses. Obtained by doing. In particular,
(3204 + 1000 + 700 + 300) / 65536
= 5204/65536 formula (7-1)
(See the number of columns in the RT0 column in FIG. 105). In the formula (7-1), as in the formula (2-1), the number of "winning-B" is 3204, the number of "winning-C" is 1000, and the number of "winning-D". 700 and the number 300 of "winning-E" were used (see the number of columns of RT0 in FIG. 105).

In addition, when the condition device is a "rare role" with no bonus overlap in the seventh target game state, "no effect" is not selected, and the effect is executed with a 100% probability (Fig.). See the "Rare role" column for 164 bonus non-overlapping). As shown in FIG. 164, specifically, in the case of non-overlapping bonuses, "cut-in effect" is always selected. Therefore, the probability that some effect will be executed when the condition device is a "rare role" with non-overlapping bonuses in the second target game state is
5204/65536 × 100/100
= 5204/65536 formula (7-2)
Will be. Here, the result of equation (7-1) (“5204/65536”) was used.

<(B) When the condition device is "missing" and "non-rare role" with non-overlapping bonus>
7th condition when the game is executed in the target game state The winning rate of "lost" and "non-rare role" is all the conditions belonging to the group "lost" and the group "non-rare role" because the device is non-overlapping bonus. It is obtained by adding the number of devices. In particular,
(65536-376-5204) / 65536
= 59965/65536 formula (7-3)
Will be. Here, the numerical value "367" in the equation (7-3) is the sum of the number of places where the conditional device that is the single bonus wins and the number of places that the conditional device that overlaps with the bonus wins. The numerical value "367" can be calculated in the same manner as in the second target gaming state equation (2-3) (see the number of columns in the RT0 column of FIG. 105).

In addition, when the condition device is a non-overlapping bonus and is a "loss" and a "non-rare role" in the seventh target game state, the probability of "no production" is 100% for all (FIG. 164). (Refer to the columns of "Loss" and "Non-rare role" for non-overlapping bonuses), there is no case where the production is executed.

Therefore, the probability that some effect will be executed when the condition device is a "loss" and a "non-rare role" with non-overlapping bonuses in the seventh target game state is
59965/65536 × 0/100
= 0/65536 formula (7-4)
Will be.

<Probability that some effect will be executed when the condition device is non-overlapping bonus>
From the above, the probability that some effect will be executed when the condition device is non-overlapping in the seventh target game state is 5204/65536 + 0/65536 from the equations (7-2) and (7-4).
= 5204/65536 formula (7-5)
Will be.

<(C) When the condition device overlaps with the bonus and is a "rare role">
The winning rate in which the condition device when the game is executed in the seventh target game state overlaps with the bonus and becomes a "rare role" is added to the number of all the condition devices belonging to the group "rare role" with the bonus overlap. It can be obtained by. In particular,
(80 + 80 + 80) / 65536
= 240/65536 formula (7-6)
Will be. It should be noted that this equation (7-6) can be calculated in the same manner as the equation (2-6) of the second target gaming state (see the number of columns of RT0 in FIG. 105).

In addition, when the condition device overlaps with the bonus and is a "rare role" in the seventh target game state, "no effect" is not selected, and the effect is executed with a 100% probability (Fig.). See the "Rare role" column for 164 bonus duplications). Specifically, when the condition device overlaps with the bonus, only "cut-in effect" is selected. Therefore, the probability that some effect will be executed when the condition device overlaps with the bonus and is a "rare role" in the seventh target game state is
240/65536 × 100/100
= 240/65536 formula (7-7)
Will be. Here, the result (“240/65536”) of the equation (7-6) was used.

<(D) When the condition device overlaps with the bonus and is "Type 1 BB" and "Non-rare role">
The winning rate when the condition device when the game is executed in the second target game state overlaps with the bonus and becomes "Type 1 BB" and "Non-rare role" is the group "Type 1 BB" and the group "Non-rare role". It is obtained by adding the number of all condition devices belonging to. In particular,
(120 + 1 + 6) / 65536
= 127/65536 formula (7-8)
Will be. It should be noted that this equation (7-8) can be calculated in the same manner as the equation (2-8) of the second target gaming state (see the number of columns of RT0 in FIG. 105).

Further, in the case where the condition device overlaps with the bonus and is "Type 1 BB" and "Non-rare role" in the seventh target game state, the effects are both executed with a 100% probability (FIG. 164). See the columns for "Type 1 BB" and "Non-rare role" with overlapping bonuses). Specifically, when the condition device overlaps with the bonus, only "cut-in effect" is selected.

Therefore, the probability that some effect will be executed when the condition device overlaps with the bonus and is "Type 1 BB" and "Non-rare role" in the seventh target game state is
127/65536 × 100/100
= 127/65536 formula (7-9)
Will be. Here, the result of equation (7-8) (“127/65536”) was used.

<Probability that some effect will be executed when the condition device overlaps with the bonus>
From the above, the probability that some effect will be executed when the conditional device overlaps with the bonus in the seventh target game state is 240/65536 + 127/65536 from the equations (7-7) and (7-9).
= 367/65536 formula (7-10)
Will be.

<Probability that the production is executed in the 7th target game state>
From the above, the probability that some effect will be executed in the seventh target game state is determined from the equations (7-5) and (7-10).
5204/65536 + 367/65536
= 5571/65536 formula (7-11)
Will be.

<Comparison result between the first target game state and the seventh target game state>
The probability of executing some effect in the first target game state is determined from the equation (1-11).
35531/65536
Is. Further, the probability of executing some effect in the seventh target game state is determined from the equation (7-11).
5571/65536
Is.

therefore,
35531 / 65536> 5571/65536 formula (7-12)
Is established, and when the first target game state and the seventh target game state are compared, the probability of executing some effect in the first target game state is higher than the probability of executing some effect in the seventh target game state. Is also configured to be high.

As described above, in the first target gaming state, the gaming section is a normal section, the RT state is RT0, and the state related to AT is a low probability state. On the other hand, in the seventh target gaming state, the gaming section is an advantageous section, the RT state is RT0, and the state related to AT is the pullback (weak) state. Therefore, when the RT states of the target game state are both RT0, the effect is more easily executed in the normal section than in the advantageous section. The seventh target gaming state is a state in which there is a possibility of returning to the AT in-progress state through a return precursor state after the AT in-progress state ends, but basically, a state in which the game section returns to the normal section. Is. Therefore, it is preferable to suggest that the normal section is returned by a simple effect, rather than giving a feeling of expectation to return to the AT state. In addition, the seventh target game state ends after 10 games have passed, in other words, since the stay period is short, the effect is generated so that the expectation of returning (pulling back) to the AT state is high when the effect occurs. It is preferable to configure the game so as to reduce the frequency in order to improve the fun of the game.

<<< Modification 1-2 >>>
As described above, in the third embodiment, the AT counter is subtracted when the state related to AT is in the AT state, and the state related to AT is changed from the state in AT on condition that the value of the AT counter becomes 0. The state related to the AT is changed to the low probability state on condition that the RT state is changed from RT1 to RT0 when the state related to the AT is the state waiting for the fall.

FIG. 165 is a block diagram showing an AT state transition diagram of Modification 1-2. In the modification 1-2, as shown in FIG. 165, even if the value of the AT counter becomes 0 when the state related to AT is in the AT state, the state related to AT is not shifted to the fall waiting state. Move to the pullback (strong) state. As described above, in the modified example 1-2, the gaming section is an advantageous section, the RT state is RT1, and the state related to AT is the pullback (strong) state (hereinafter referred to as the eighth target gaming state). ) Is provided.

In this pullback (strong) state, the RT state is RT1, so that the same state as the RT state during the AT is maintained. Therefore, by returning to the AT in-progress state on the condition that the predetermined condition is satisfied in the pull-back (strong) state, it is possible to raise the expectation that the profit can be further increased by executing the navigation.

<< AT state transition control process >>
FIG. 166 is a flowchart showing a part of the AT state transition control process in the modified example 1-2. Also in the modified example 1-2, the process of FIG. 114 of the third embodiment and the process of FIG. 161 of the modified example 1-1 are executed in the same manner. FIG. 166 is a process corresponding to FIG. 116 of the third embodiment, and when No in step 1832 or 1834 of FIG. 116, the process shown in FIG. 166 is executed. Further, after the processing shown in FIG. 166 is completed, the process proceeds to the processing of FIG. 161 of the modified example 1-1. As described above, in the modified example 1-2, first, the processes of FIGS. 114 and 115 of the third embodiment are executed, and then the processes of FIGS. 166 and 161 are executed.

First, in the case of No in step 1832 or 1834 of FIG. 115, in step 2952 of FIG. 166, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state related to AT is the AT in progress state. In the case of Yes in step 2952, in step 2954, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the AT counter value is 0 and the RT state is RT1 in the game. In the case of Yes in step 2954, in step 2965, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the state related to the AT after the next game to the pullback (strong) state from the state related to the AT after the next game, and ends this subroutine. do. If No in step 2954, the subroutine is immediately terminated.

If No in step 2952, in step 2958, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state related to the AT is the pullback (strong) state. In the case of Yes in step 2985, in step 2960, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the condition device related to the game is the replay-D1 to D3. In the case of Yes in step 2960, in step 2962, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the selection candidate of the state related to the AT after the next game based on the state related to the current AT and the winning condition device. , End this subroutine. If No in step 2960, the subroutine is immediately terminated.

The AT-related state selection candidate for the AT after the next game of the process of step 2962 includes the AT in-progress state. As shown in FIG. 167, when the AT-related state of the game is the pullback (strong) state, there are two selection candidates, the AT in-probability state and the low probability state. When the re-game 01, the re-game 02, and the re-game 03 are stopped and displayed, the AT-during state is selected as the state related to the AT after the next game, and when the re-game 04 is stopped and displayed, the next game is displayed. A low probability state is selected as the state related to the subsequent AT.

<< Scenario lottery table determination process >>
FIG. 168 is a flowchart showing the scenario lottery table determination process in the modified example 1-2. As described above, in the modification 1-2, the pullback (strong) state is included in the state related to AT, and the scenario effect table corresponding to the pullback (strong) state is selected. In the flowchart shown in FIG. 168, the same reference numerals are given to the steps for performing the same processing as in the third embodiment.

First, if No in step 4108, in step 4162, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the state related to AT is pulled back (strong). In the case of Yes in step 4162, in step 4164, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S selects the scenario effect table T5. In this way, the scenario effect table T5 is selected as the scenario effect table corresponding to the pullback (strong) state.

If No in step 4162, in step 4116, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the state related to AT is the AT preparation state 2. In the case of Yes in step 4116, in step 4118, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S selects the scenario effect table T2.

Further, as shown in the AT state transition diagram of FIG. 166, the modified example 1-2 does not have a fall waiting state as a state related to AT. Therefore, in the case of Yes in step 4124, in step 4130, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the state related to AT is a low probability state. In the case of Yes in step 4130, in step 4132, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the RT state is RT1.

In the case of Yes in step 4132, in step 4134, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S selects the scenario effect table T7.

If No in step 4132, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S selects the scenario effect table T1 in step 4136.

If No in step 4124 and No in step 4130, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S shifts the process to step 4112.

<< Eighth target game state >>
As described above, in the eighth target gaming state, the gaming section is an advantageous section, the RT state is RT1, and the state related to AT is the pullback (strong) state. FIG. 169 (A) is an effect selection probability table in the case of the eighth target gaming state. Further, FIG. 169 (B) is a scenario selection probability table in the case of the eighth target gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 169 (B), when the condition device is a bonus non-overlapping and is a loss, a non-rare role, and a rare role, only scenario 1 is selected, and other scenarios 2 and 3 are selected. There is no case. When the condition device is a bonus overlap and is a loss, a non-rare role, and a rare role, scenario 1 is most likely to be selected, and then any of scenarios 2 and 3 is likely to be selected with the same probability.

As shown in FIG. 169 (A), when the condition device is a bonus non-overlapping and is lost, only "no effect" is selected, and no other effect is selected. When the condition device is a non-overlapping bonus and a non-rare role, only the "aiming effect" is selected, and no other effect is selected. If the condition device is a bonus non-overlapping and a rare role, or a bonus duplication and a lost non-rare role or a rare role, only "cut-in effect" is selected and another effect is selected. Will not be done.

<8th target game state>
The probability that the effect will be executed in the eighth target game state,
(A) When the conditional device is a "rare role" with non-overlapping bonuses (b) When the conditional device is "missing" and "non-rare role" with non-overlapping bonuses (c) When the conditional device overlaps with the bonus " In the case of "rare role" (d) Calculated for each of the cases where the condition device overlaps with the bonus and is "type 1 BB" and "non-rare role". As described above, in the eighth target gaming state, the gaming section is an advantageous section, the RT state is RT1, and the state related to AT is the pullback (strong) state.

<(A) When the condition device is a "rare role" with non-overlapping bonuses>
The winning rate in which the conditional device when the game is executed in the eighth target game state becomes a "rare role" with non-overlapping bonuses is the sum of the number of all the conditional devices belonging to the group "rare role" with non-overlapping bonuses. Obtained by doing. In particular,
(3204 + 1000 + 700 + 300) / 65536
= 5204/65536 equation (8-1)
(See the number of columns in the RT1 column in FIG. 105). In the formula (8-1), the number of "winning-B" is 3204, the number of "winning-C" is 1000, the number of "winning-D" is 700, and the number of "winning-E" is set. The number 300 was used (see the number in the column of RT1 in FIG. 105).

In addition, when the condition device is a "rare role" with no bonus overlap in the eighth target game state, "no effect" is not selected, and the effect is executed with a 100% probability (Fig.). See the "Rare Role" column for 1690 bonus non-overlapping). As shown in FIG. 169, specifically, in the case of non-overlapping bonuses, "cut-in effect" is selected. Therefore, the probability that some effect will be executed when the condition device is a "rare role" with non-overlapping bonuses in the eighth target game state is
5204/65536 × 100/100
= 5204/65536 formula (8-2)
Will be. Here, the result of equation (8-1) (“5204/65536”) was used.

<(B) When the condition device is "missing" and "non-rare role" with non-overlapping bonus>
The winning rate when the condition device when the game is executed in the eighth target game state is "lost" and "non-rare role" due to non-overlapping bonus is all belonging to the group "lost" and the group "non-rare role". It is obtained by adding the number of condition devices. In particular,
(65536-376-5204) / 65536
= 59965/65536 formula (8-3)
Will be. Here, the numerical value "367" in the equation (8-3) is the sum of the number of units won by the conditional device that is the single bonus and the number of units that the conditional device that overlaps with the bonus wins.

The sum of the number of units won by the condition device that is a single bonus is the number of units of "Type 1 BB-A" 40, the number of units of "Type 1 BB-B" 40, and the number of "Type 1 BB-C". It is the sum of the number 40 and 120 (= 40 + 40 + 40) (see the number in the column of RT1 in FIG. 105).

In addition, the number of places that the condition device that overlaps with the bonus wins is the number of places of "1 type BB-B + prize-C" 40, the number of places of "1 type BB-B + prize-D", and "1 type". BB-B + prize-E "number 40," 1 type BB-C + prize-C "number 40," 1 type BB-C + prize-D "number 40, and" 1 type BB- " The sum of the numbers 240 (= 40 + 40 + 40 + 40 + 40 + 40) with the number 40 of "C + winning-E" (see the number of columns in RT1 in FIG. 105) and the number 1 of "Type 1 BB-B + Replay-A" , "Class 1 BB-B + Winning-A1", "Class 1 BB-B + Winning-A2", "Class 1 BB-B + Winning-A3", and "Class 1 BB-B + Winning-A3". The sum of 1 of "1st class BB-B + winning-A4", 1 of "1st class BB-B + winning-A5", and 1 of "1st class BB-B + winning-A6" (7) = 1 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1) (see the number of columns in RT1 in FIG. 105) and the sum 247 (= 240 + 7).

Therefore, the numerical value "367" in the equation (8-3) can be calculated by the sum of the number 120 in which the condition device that is the single bonus is won and the number 247 in which the condition device that overlaps with the bonus is won. Further, the numerical value "5204" in the equation (8-3) is the result of the equation (8-1). As shown in the formula (8-3), by calculating "65536-376-5204", the number of places where the condition device that becomes a single bonus wins, the number of places that the condition device that overlaps with the bonus wins, and the number of places that the condition device overlaps with the bonus wins. It is possible to exclude the number of "rare roles", and it is possible to calculate the number of positions when the condition device is "missing" and "non-rare role" with non-overlapping bonuses.

In addition, the winning rate when the condition device when the game is executed in the eighth target game state is "missing" due to non-overlapping bonus is
19827/65536 formula (8-3-1)
(See the number of columns in the RT1 column of FIG. 105). Furthermore, the winning rate at which the condition device when the game is executed in the eighth target game state becomes a "non-rare role" with a non-overlapping bonus is
(59965-19827) / 65536
= 40138/65536 equation (8-3-2)
Is.

Further, when the condition device is "missing" due to non-overlapping bonus in the eighth target game state, the probability of "no effect" is 100%, and the effect is not executed (group of FIG. 169). See the "Loss" column).

Further, in the eighth target gaming state, when the condition device is a non-overlapping bonus and is a “non-rare role”, the probability that the effect is executed is 100%. Specifically, as shown in the columns of the groups "replay" and "bell" in FIG. 169, the "aiming effect" is always executed.

Therefore, the probability that some effect will be executed when the condition device is "lost" and "non-rare role" with non-overlapping bonuses in the eighth target game state is
19827/65536 × 0/100
+40138/65536 × 100/100
= 0/65536 + 40138/65536
= 40138/65536 equation (8-4)
Will be. Here, the results of equations (8-3-1) and (8-3-2) were used.

<Probability that some effect will be executed when the condition device is non-overlapping bonus>
From the above, the probability that some effect will be executed when the condition device is non-overlapping in the eighth target game state is 5204/65536 + 40138/65536 from the equations (8-2) and (8-4).
= 45342/65536 formula (8-5)
Will be.

<(C) When the condition device overlaps with the bonus and is a "rare role">
The winning rate in which the condition device when the game is executed in the eighth target game state overlaps with the bonus and becomes a "rare role" is the number of all the condition devices belonging to the group "rare role" with the bonus overlap. It can be obtained by. In particular,
(80 + 80 + 80) / 65536
= 240/65536 formula (8-6)
Will be. In the formula (8-6), the first "80" is the sum of the number 40 of "1st class BB-B + winning-C" and the number 40 of "1st class BB-C + winning-C". Yes, the next "80" is the sum of the number 40 of "Type 1 BB-B + Winning-D" and the number 40 of "Type 1 BB-C + Winning-D", and the final "80" is , The sum of the number 40 of "Type 1 BB-B + Winning-E" and the number 40 of "Type 1 BB-C + Winning-E" (see the number of columns of RT1 in FIG. 105).

Further, when the condition device overlaps with the bonus and is a "rare role" in the eighth target game state, the probability that the effect is executed is 100%. Specifically, as shown in the column of the group "rare technique" in FIG. 169, the "cut-in effect" is always executed.

Therefore, the probability that some effect will be executed when the conditional device overlaps with the bonus and is a "rare role" in the eighth target game state is determined by using the equation (8-6).
240/65536 × 100/100
= 240/65536 formula (8-7)
Will be.

<(D) When the condition device overlaps with the bonus and is "Type 1 BB" and "Non-rare role">
The winning rate when the condition device when the game is executed in the eighth target game state overlaps with the bonus and becomes "Type 1 BB" and "Non-rare role" is the group "Type 1 BB" and the group "Non-rare role". It is obtained by adding the number of all condition devices belonging to. In particular,
(120 + 1 + 6) / 65536
= 127/65536 formula (8-8)
Will be. In the formula (3-8), the first "120" is the number 40 of "Type 1 BB-A", the number 40 of "Type 1 BB-B", and "Type 1 BB-C". The next "1" is the number 1 of "Type 1 BB-B + Replay-A", and the final "6" is "Type 1 BB-B + Winning A1". It is the sum 6 of the number 1 of "1" to "1 type BB-B + winning A6" (see the number of columns of RT1 in FIG. 105).

Further, in the eighth target gaming state, when the condition device overlaps with the bonus and is "Type 1 BB" and "Non-rare role", the probability that the effect is executed is 100%. Specifically, as shown in the columns of the groups "Type 1 BB" and "Non-rare role" in FIG. 169, the "cut-in effect" is always executed.

Therefore, the probability that some effect will be executed when the condition device overlaps with the bonus and is "Type 1 BB" and "Non-rare role" in the eighth target game state is
127/65536 × 100/100
= 127/65536 formula (8-9)
Will be.

<Probability that some effect will be executed when the condition device overlaps with the bonus>
From the above, the probability that some effect will be executed when the conditional device overlaps with the bonus in the eighth target game state is 240/65536 + 127/65536 from the equations (8-7) and (3-9).
= 367/65536 formula (8-10)
Will be.

<Probability that the production is executed in the 8th target game state>
From the above, the probability that some effect will be executed in the eighth target game state is determined from the equations (8-5) and (8-10).
45342/65536 + 367/65536
= 45709/65536 equation (8-11)
Will be.

<Comparison result between the third target game state and the eighth target game state>
The probability of executing some kind of effect in the third target game state is calculated from equation (3-11).
13565/65536
Is. Further, the probability of executing some effect in the eighth target game state is determined from the equation (8-11).
45709/65536
Is.

therefore,
13565/65536 <45709/65536 formula (8-12)
Is established, and when the third target game state and the eighth target game state are compared, the probability of executing some effect in the eighth target game state is higher than the probability of executing some effect in the third target game state. Is also configured to be high.

As described above, in the eighth target gaming state, the gaming section is an advantageous section, the RT state is RT1, and the state related to AT is the pullback (strong) state. On the other hand, in the third target gaming state, the gaming section is an advantageous section, the RT state is RT1, and the state related to AT is the AT in progress state. The eighth target game state is a pullback (strong) state that shifts when the RT state ends the AT state while maintaining RT1, and the pullback condition (in this example, replay-D1 to D3 winning). Occasionally, a stop display other than the replay 04) is established, which is a state in which there is a possibility of sufficiently returning to the AT in-progress state. For this reason, it is preferable that the player has an expectation that he / she may be able to return to the AT state. In the eighth target game state, the probability of executing some effect is higher than that of the third target game state. ing.

In the eighth target game state, when the condition device is a non-overlapping bonus and is a "non-rare role", if the condition device is a re-game, the "aiming effect" is always executed, while the condition device is a bell. In the case of, it may be configured so that the "aiming effect" is not executed. Further, in this example, the probability of executing some effect in the eighth target game state is configured to be higher than the probability of executing some effect in the third target game state, but the present invention is not limited to this. By adjusting the frequency of occurrence of "aiming effect" and the lottery probability of loss, bell, replay, etc., the probability of executing some effect in the eighth target game state is to execute some effect in the third target game state. It may be configured to be lower than the probability.

<<< Modification 1-3 >>>
In the typical state flow in the third embodiment described above, the game section shifts from the normal section to the advantageous section, and after the bonus in the advantageous section ends, the state related to AT shifts to the AT state. rice field.

FIG. 170 (A) is a block diagram showing an RT state transition diagram of Modification 1-3. FIG. 170B is a block diagram showing an AT state transition diagram. The RT state transition shown in FIG. 170 (A) and the AT state transition shown in FIG. 170 (B) selectively describe typical states, and have other RT states and AT-related states. Can be done.

As shown in FIG. 170 (A), the modified example 1-3 has "RT0", "RT1", "RT2", "bonus internal winning", and "bonus" as RT states. "RT0" is the RT state in which the probability that the conditional device wins the re-game is the lowest, and "RT1" is the RT state in which the probability that the conditional device wins the re-game is the highest.

For example, when the RT state is "RT0" and the replay 04 symbol is stopped and displayed, the process shifts to "RT1" (arrow (1)). Further, when the RT state is "RT1" and the replay 06 symbol is stopped and displayed, the process shifts to "RT2" (arrow (2)). When the RT state is "RT1" or "RT2", if the winning 08-11 symbols are stopped and displayed, the process shifts to "RT0" (arrow (3)).

Furthermore, if the bonus is won when the RT state is "RT0", "RT1" or "RT2", the process shifts to "internal winning", and when the RT state is "internal winning", the bonus is given. By stopping and displaying the symbol combination of, it shifts to "Type 1 BB-A, B, C", and when "Type 1 BB-A, B, C" is completed, it returns to the original RT state.

Further, as shown in FIG. 170 (B), when the game section is a normal section, the state related to AT is a normal state. In this normal state, the RT state is either "RT0" or "RT1". Further, when the state related to AT is the normal state, the RT state shifts to "RT2", so that the state related to AT becomes the AT in progress state. When the AT is in progress, the state related to AT returns to the normal state by satisfying a predetermined end condition, for example, a condition such that the AT counter becomes zero. Although not shown, in the modified example 1-3, the push order replay that can shift to RT2 in the state of shifting to RT1 by itself (for example, it is a three-choice push order replay, and the correct answer is pushed. When stopped in order, the re-game that shifts from RT1 to RT2 is stopped and displayed, and if it is stopped in the order of pressing the incorrect answer, the re-game that shifts from RT1 to RT0 is stopped and displayed (the re-game that maintains RT1 is stopped and displayed). If you win the game)), a push order guessing game will occur (displayed as "? When it is hit, it is configured to shift to RT2 and shift to the AT state.

In addition, regardless of whether the game section is a normal section or an advantageous section, if the bonus is won, it shifts to "internal winning", and when it is "internal winning", the bonus symbol is displayed. By displaying the stop, it shifts to "Type 1 BB-A, B, C", and when "Type 1 BB-A, B, C" is completed, it returns to the state related to the original AT.

In the modified example 1-3, the game section is a normal section, the RT state is RT1 (a state in which the player shifts to RT1 by himself / herself), and the state related to AT is a normal state (low probability state). It is called the target game state.

<Fifth target game state>
First, the probability that the effect will be executed in the fifth target game state is determined.
(A) When the conditional device is a "rare role" with non-overlapping bonuses (b) When the conditional device is "missing" and "non-rare role" with non-overlapping bonuses (c) When the conditional device overlaps with the bonus " In the case of "rare role" (d) Calculated for each of the cases where the condition device overlaps with the bonus and is "type 1 BB" and "non-rare role". As described above, in the fifth target gaming state, the gaming section is a normal section, the RT state is RT1, and the state related to AT is a low probability state.

<(A) When the condition device is a "rare role" with non-overlapping bonuses>
The winning rate in which the conditional device when the game is executed in the fifth target game state becomes a "rare role" with non-overlapping bonuses is the sum of the number of all the conditional devices belonging to the group "rare role" with non-overlapping bonuses. Obtained by doing. In particular,
(3204 + 1000 + 700 + 300) / 65536
= 5204/65536 equation (5-1)
(See the number of columns in the RT1 column in FIG. 105). The equation (5-1) can be calculated in the same manner as the equation (3-1) (see the number of columns of RT1 in FIG. 105).

In addition, when the condition device is a "rare role" with no bonus overlap in the fifth target game state, "no effect" is not selected, and the effect is executed with a 100% probability (Fig.). See the "Rare role" column for 154 non-overlapping bonuses). As shown in FIG. 154, specifically, in the case of non-overlapping bonuses, "character production" (25%), "conversation production" (25%), "cut-in production" (25%), and "confrontation". One of the effects of "Production" (25%) is selected. Therefore, the probability that some effect will be executed when the condition device is a "rare role" with non-overlapping bonuses in the fifth target game state is
5204/65536 × 100/100
= 5204/65536 formula (5-2)
Will be. Here, the result of equation (5-1) (“5204/65536”) was used.

<(B) When the condition device is "missing" and "non-rare role" with non-overlapping bonus>
The winning rate when the condition device when the game is executed in the fifth target game state is "lost" and "non-rare role" due to non-overlapping bonus is all belonging to the group "lost" and the group "non-rare role". It is obtained by adding the positions of the condition devices (see the number of columns of RT1 in FIG. 105). In particular,
(65536-376-5204) / 65536
= 59965/65536 formula (5-3)
Will be. Here, the RT state of the fifth target gaming state is RT1, and the equation (5-3) can be calculated in the same manner as the equation (3-3).

In addition, the winning rate at which the condition device when the game is executed in the fifth target game state is "lost" due to non-overlapping bonuses is
19827/65536 formula (5-3-1)
(See the number of columns in the RT1 column of FIG. 105). Furthermore, the winning rate at which the condition device when the game is executed in the fifth target game state becomes a "non-rare role" with a non-overlapping bonus is
(59965-19827) / 65536
= 40138/65536 formula (5-3-2)
Is.

Further, in the fifth target game state, when the condition device is "missing" due to non-overlapping bonus, the effect is executed with a probability of 50%. The probability of "no effect" is 50%, and the probability that some effect is executed is 100-50 = 50. Specifically, as shown in the column of the group "Loss" in FIG. 154, one of "Character production" (25%), "Conversation production" (24%), and "Confrontation production" (1%). Is selected.

Further, in the fifth target gaming state, when the condition device is a non-overlapping bonus and is a “non-rare role”, the probability that the effect is executed is 100%. Specifically, as shown in the columns of the groups "replay" and "bell" in FIG. 154, the "aiming effect" is always executed.

Therefore, the probability that some effect will be executed when the condition device is a "loss" and a "non-rare role" with non-overlapping bonuses in the fifth target gaming state is
19827/65536 × 50/100
+40138/65536 × 100/100
≒ 9914/65536 + 40138/65536
= 50052/65536 Equation (5-4)
Will be. Here, the results of equations (5-3-1) and (5-3-2) were used.

<Probability that some effect will be executed when the condition device is non-overlapping bonus>
From the above, the probability that some effect will be executed when the condition device is non-overlapping in the fifth target gaming state is 5204/65536 + 50052/65536 from the equations (5-2) and (5-4).
= 55256/65536 formula (5-5)
Will be.

<(C) When the condition device overlaps with the bonus and is a "rare role">
The winning rate in which the condition device when the game is executed in the fifth target game state overlaps with the bonus and becomes a "rare role" is the number of all the condition devices belonging to the group "rare role" with the bonus overlap. It can be obtained by. In particular,
(80 + 80 + 80) / 65536
= 240/65536 formula (5-6)
Will be. The equation (5-6) can be calculated in the same manner as the equation (3-6) (see the number of columns of RT1 in FIG. 105).

Further, in the fifth target game state, when the conditional device overlaps with the bonus and is a "rare role", the effect is executed with a probability of 93.75%. That is, as shown in FIG. 154, the probability of "no effect" in the group "rare role" is 6.25%, and the probability that some effect is executed is 100-6.25 = 93.75. .. Specifically, as shown in the column of "rare role", which overlaps with the bonus in FIG. 154, "character production" (6.25%), "conversation production" (12.5%), and "cut-in production". Either (37.5%) or "confrontation production" (37.5%) is selected.

Therefore, the probability that some effect will be executed when the condition device overlaps with the bonus and is a "rare role" in the fifth target game state is
240/65536 × 93.75 / 100
= 225/65536 formula (5-7)
Will be. Here, the result of the formula (5-6) (“240/65536”) was used.

<(D) When the condition device overlaps with the bonus and is "Type 1 BB" and "Non-rare role">
The winning rate when the condition device when the game is executed in the fifth target game state overlaps with the bonus and becomes "Type 1 BB" and "Non-rare role" is the group "Type 1 BB" and the group "Non-rare role". It is obtained by adding the number of all condition devices belonging to. In particular,
(120 + 1 + 6) / 65536
= 127/65536 formula (5-8)
Will be. The equation (5-8) can be calculated in the same manner as the equation (3-8) (see the number of columns of RT1 in FIG. 105).

Further, in the case where the condition device overlaps with the bonus and is "Type 1 BB" and "Non-rare role" in the fifth target game state, the effect is executed with a probability of 93.75%. That is, as shown in FIG. 61, the probability of "no effect" in the group "Type 1 BB" and the group "non-rare role" is 6.25%, and the probability that some effect is executed is 100-6. 0.25 = 93.75. Specifically, as shown in the columns of the roles of the group "Type 1 BB" and the group "Non-rare role" due to the duplication of bonuses in FIG. 154, "Character production" (6.25%) and "Conversation production" (12). Either .5%) or "Confrontation production" (75%) is selected.

Therefore, the probability that some effect will be executed when the conditional device overlaps with the bonus and is "Type 1 BB" and "Non-rare role" in the fifth target gaming state is
127/65536 × 93.75 / 100
≒ 119/65536 formula (5-9)
Will be.

<Probability that some effect will be executed when the condition device overlaps with the bonus>
From the above, the probability that some effect will be executed when the condition device overlaps with the bonus in the fifth target game state is 225/65536 + 119/65536 from the equations (5-7) and (5-9).
= 344/65536 formula (5-10)
Will be.

<Probability that the production is executed in the fifth target game state>
From the above, the probability that some effect will be executed in the fifth target game state is determined from the equations (5-5) and (5-10).
55256/65536 + 344/65536
= 55600/65536 formula (5-11)
Will be.

<Comparison result between the first target game state and the fifth target game state>
The probability of executing some effect in the first target game state is determined from the equation (1-11).
35531/65536
Is. Further, the probability of executing some effect in the fifth target game state is determined from the equation (5-11).
55600/65536
Is.

therefore,
35531/65536 <55600/65536 formula (5-12)
Is established, and when the first target game state and the fifth target game state are compared, the probability of executing some effect in the fifth target game state is higher than the probability of executing some effect in the first target game state. Is also configured to be high.

As described above, in the first target gaming state, the gaming section is the normal section, the RT state is RT0, and the state related to AT is the normal state (low probability state). On the other hand, in the fifth target gaming state, the gaming section is a normal section, the RT state is RT1 (a state in which the player shifts to RT1 by himself / herself), and the state related to AT is a normal state (low probability state). Therefore, although the game sections in the target game state are common in the situation where they are both normal sections, the effect is configured so that the effect is more easily executed when the RT state is RT1 than when the RT state is RT0. ..

As described above, if the player looks at the advantageous section indicator YH, it is possible to determine whether or not the game section is currently an advantageous section. For this reason, if the game section can be recognized as a normal section, the motivation for the game is reduced. Therefore, in the normal section, various effects are frequently executed to move to an advantageous section. It is possible to raise expectations for the transition. Furthermore, when the RT state changes, it can be an opportunity to change the type of effect, and not only can the effect be executed more frequently, but also the effect can be narrowed down to a certain level. Further, the sense of expectation can be increased, and by changing the production in the normal section, the player can be less likely to get bored and the motivation to continue the game can be increased.

<<< Modification 1-4 >>>
In the effect content determination process of FIG. 145 described above, the scenario is first determined and then the specific effect is determined, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect is not executed according to the scenario. First, the effect content may be determined by the lottery process, and then the scenario may be determined by the lottery process if the scenario has not been determined. As a result, when the scenario has not been decided, a concrete effect can be immediately executed.

<<< Modification 1-5 >>>
Further, the scenario and the production content may be determined at the same time. For example, the presence or absence of a scenario is associated with each effect content, and if the effect content determined by the lottery process does not have a scenario, the effect is executed without a scenario, and if there is a scenario, the effect is executed. Perform the production according to the scenario.

For example, the number 1 to 99 of the lottery process of the effect content is assigned to execute the confrontation effect of one game, and the number 100 to 199 of the lottery process of the effect content is to execute the character effect of one game. Allocate and assign the number of lottery processes of the effect contents to be 200 to 299 so as to execute the confrontation effect of 4 games. When the confrontation effect of the four games is decided, the confrontation effect is executed from the game to the fourth game. By executing such a lottery process, the scenario and the effect content can be determined at the same time, and the process can be simplified.

<<< Modification 1-6 >>>
Further, other elements (parameters) such as an effect mode may be introduced. In the above-mentioned example, the effect is determined based on the game section, the state related to AT, and the RT state. Therefore, if they match, it is determined that they are all in the same game state, and the content of the effect is determined. These game sections, AT-related states, and RT states are determined by the main control board M, and the sub-control board determines the effect content by using other elements such as the effect mode. You can expand the selection of contents. For example, the direction of change of the state can be included depending on the current RT state and the original RT state, and the current AT state and the original AT state, and the effect mode is determined based on these. The lottery table for determining the content can be made different, and the production can be further developed.

For example, in the case of shifting to RT1 by itself in the low probability state of the normal section and the case of returning from the advantageous section to the normal section and being in the low probability state while maintaining RT1, the game section, the state related to AT, and the RT state are , Same, but different directions of state change. By including the direction of such changes, it is possible to easily develop the production.

<<< Modification 1-7 >>>
Furthermore, when the freeze effect is determined on the main control board M side, a specific effect lottery table may be referred to on the sub control board S side.

<<< Fourth Embodiment >>>
As described above, in the third embodiment, the advantageous section has a single advantageous BB state.

FIG. 171 is a block diagram showing an AT state transition diagram of the fourth embodiment. In the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 171, the advantageous section has four states A to D, and is configured to be able to shift from the normal section to any of the states A to D. Further, the state D is configured so that it can be transferred only from the normal section.

In the fourth embodiment, the condition device includes cherry 1, cherry 2, cherry 3, and cherry 4 + 1 species BB-C. Further, in the second embodiment, the RT state mainly staying in the states A to C of the normal section and the advantageous section is RT0, and the RT state mainly staying in the state D of the advantageous section is more advantageous than RT0. It is RT1 (the winning rate of the re-game is high), and the RT state in the inside of the BB and the inside of the advantageous BB is RT2 which is different from RT0 and RT1.

<State A>
When the cherry 1 is won by the lottery process when the state related to AT is a low probability state, the state shifts to the "advantageous state A" of the state A in the advantageous section. If the BB is won in the "advantageous state A", the game shifts to the "advantageous BB internal medium game", and then the symbol of the BB role is stopped and displayed to shift to the "advantageous BB state" and executed. When the BB ends, it returns to the advantageous state A. The state A is a state including these "advantageous state A", "advantageous BB internal middle game", and "advantageous BB state". The game returns to the low probability state on condition that the number of games executed in the state A reaches the predetermined number of games A. For example, the number of games A can be 500 games.

<State B>
If the cherry 2 is won by the lottery process when the state related to AT is a low probability state, the state shifts to the "advantageous state B" of the state B in the advantageous section. If the BB is won in the "advantageous state B", the game shifts to the "advantageous BB internal medium game", and then the symbol of the BB role is stopped and displayed to shift to the "advantageous BB state" and executed. When the BB ends, the advantageous state B is returned. The state B is a state including these "advantageous state B", "advantageous BB internal middle game", and "advantageous BB state". The game returns to the low probability state on condition that the number of games executed in the state B reaches the predetermined number of games B. For example, the number of games B can be 300 games.

<State C>
If the cherry 3 is won by the lottery process when the state related to AT is a low probability state, the state shifts to the "advantageous state C" of the state C in the advantageous section. If the BB is won in the "advantageous state C", the game shifts to the "advantageous BB internal medium game", and then the symbol of the BB role is stopped and displayed to shift to the "advantageous BB state" and executed. When the BB ends, it returns to the advantageous state C. The state C is a state including these "advantageous state C", "advantageous BB internal middle game", and "advantageous BB state". The game returns to the low probability state on condition that the number of games executed in the state B reaches the predetermined number of games C. For example, the number of games C can be 100 games. As described above, in the second embodiment, "number of games A> number of games B> number of games C". Further, as shown in FIG. 171, when the state A, the state B, and the state C are entered, the push order navigation can be executed when the push order bell is won for the first time, but the subsequent push order bells are won. In the game that was played (the same applies to the game that won the push order replay), the push order navigation is not executed. On the other hand, when the game shifts to the state D described later, all the games that win the push order bell and the games that win the push order replay are configured to execute the push order navigation, and the states D are the states A to C. It is a more advantageous game state for the player.

<State D>
When the state related to AT is a low probability state, it shifts to "state D" by winning the cherry 4 + 1 type BB-C. The “state D” of the second embodiment has the same configuration as the advantageous section of the present embodiment.

When the state related to AT is a low probability state and the cherry 4 + 1 type BB-C is won by the lottery process, the state shifts to the "advantageous BB internal middle game" of the advantageous section state D. By stopping and displaying the symbol of the BB role in the "advantageous BB internal middle game", the process shifts to the "advantageous BB state". When the executed BB ends, it shifts to the AT preparation state 1, and shifts to the "AT in progress state" through the AT preparation state 2. The transition between "AT in progress state", "specialization precursor state", "additional specialization state", "specialization state after fall", "AT in progress state after fall", and "bell overflow state" is carried out in this implementation. Similar to morphology.

When the state related to AT is "AT in progress" and the AT counter value is 11 or more, there is a 1/2 chance of shifting to the "additional specialization state" when the watermelon B is won. You can acquire the right and move to the "specialization precursor state". On the other hand, when the state related to AT is "AT in progress" and the AT counter value is 10 or less, even if the watermelon B is won, the right to shift to the "additional specialization state" is acquired. The lottery (sometimes also referred to as a specialization state transition lottery) is not executed, and is configured not to shift to the "specialization precursor state" and the "additional specialization state".

Further, when the state related to AT is the "specialization precursor state", the state related to AT shifts to the "additional specialization state" on condition that the stop display of the replay 07 symbol is performed. In the "additional specialization state", the game returns to the "AT in progress state" on condition that the stop display of the replay 06 symbol is displayed.

Further, as described above, as in the third embodiment, it has a "AT in progress state after falling", a "state after bell overflow", and a "specialized state after falling", and under the same transition conditions. Can be migrated.

<< AT state transition control process >>
172 and 173 are flowcharts showing a part of the AT state transition control process in the fourth embodiment.

FIG. 172 is a process corresponding to FIG. 114 of the third embodiment, and the same reference numerals are given to the steps for performing the same process as in FIG. 114.

If No in step 1402, when the process of step 3000 is executed, in step 5002, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the current state related to AT is a low probability state. In the case of Yes in step 5002, in step 5004, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the condition device related to the game is a state promotion combination (cherry 1). In the case of Yes in step 5004, in step 5006, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the state related to AT after the next game to the advantageous state A, and ends this subroutine.

If No in step 5002, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S shifts to step 5020.

If No in step 5004, in step 5008, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the condition device related to the game is a state promotion combination (cherry 2). In the case of Yes in step 5008, in step 5010, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the state related to AT after the next game to the advantageous state B, and ends this subroutine.

If No in step 5008, in step 5012, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the condition device related to the game is a state promotion combination (cherry 3). In the case of Yes in step 5012, in step 5014, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the state related to AT after the next game to the advantageous state C, and ends this subroutine.

If No in step 5012, in step 5016, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the condition device related to the game is a state promotion combination (cherry 4 + 1 type BB-C). In the case of Yes in step 5016, in step 5018, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the state related to AT after the next game to the advantageous state D (advantageous internal middle game), and ends this subroutine.

If No in step 5016, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S shifts to step 5020.

If No in step 5002 or step 5016, in step 5020, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the current state regarding the AT is the advantageous state A.

In the case of Yes in step 5020, in step 5022, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the number of games has reached a predetermined number A in the game.

In the case of Yes in step 5022, in step 5024, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the state related to AT after the next game to the low probability state, and ends this subroutine.

If No in step 5020, in step 5026, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the current state related to AT is the advantageous state B.

In the case of Yes in step 5026, in step 5028, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the number of games has reached a predetermined number B in the game.

In the case of Yes in step 5028, in step 5030, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the state related to AT after the next game to the low probability state, and ends this subroutine.

If No in step 5026, in step 5032, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the current state related to AT is the advantageous state C.

In the case of Yes in step 5032, in step 5034, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the number of games has reached a predetermined number of games C in the game.

In the case of Yes in step 5034, in step 5036, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the state related to AT after the next game to the low probability state, and ends this subroutine.

Even if No in step 5034, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S ends this subroutine.

FIG. 174 is a diagram showing an example of an effect executed when the gaming state changes. FIG. 174 (A) is an effect executed when shifting from the advantageous state A to the normal section. When the advantageous state A is set, the confrontation effect is executed, the effect of winning (successful) as a result of the confrontation is executed, and the normal section is entered. On the other hand, FIG. 174 (B) is an effect executed when shifting from the normal section to the advantageous state A. The confrontation effect is executed in the normal section, the defeat (failure) effect is executed as a result of the confrontation, and the state shifts to the advantageous state A. It should be noted that FIG. 174 (A) is also an effect executed when the transition from the advantageous state B or the advantageous state C to the normal section, and FIG. 174 (B) shows the transition from the normal section to the advantageous state B or the advantageous state C. It is also a production that is executed when you do. It should be noted that the effect of FIG. 174 (B) may be executed when the transition from the advantageous state A, the advantageous state B or the advantageous state C does not occur to the normal section (when the number of games still remains). Further, FIG. 174 (A) is also an effect executed when shifting from the normal section to the state D. Incidentally, since there is no transition from the advantageous state A, the advantageous state B or the advantageous state C to the state D, FIG. 174 (A) is not executed in the advantageous state A, the advantageous state B or the advantageous state C.

<<< Modification 2-1 >>>
In the above-mentioned example, the end condition of the states A to C in the advantageous section is due to the digestion of the predetermined number of games A to C, but the predetermined condition device, for example, winning-A1 to winning-A6 is won. The game may be returned to the normal section when the symbols of the winning 01, the winning 02, or the winning 03 are stopped and displayed in the game. It is possible to return to the normal section before the predetermined number of games A to C is exhausted, creating the possibility of accelerating the timing of shifting to the state D of the advantageous section, and expecting the transition to the state D of the advantageous section. Can be done. Further, even if the predetermined number of games A to C is subtracted based on winning the winning-C, winning-D or winning-E, there is a possibility of accelerating the timing of shifting to the state D of the advantageous section. It can be generated and expected to shift to the state D of the advantageous section.

<<< Modification 2-2 >>>
Further, in the above-mentioned example, the transition from the state A to the state D of the advantageous section needs to go through the normal section once, but from any of the states A to D of the advantageous section to the other advantageous section. You can be able to transition to a state. In particular, it is possible to shift from any of the states A to C in the advantageous section to the state D. For example, by winning a rare role (“winning-B”, “winning-C”, “winning-D”, “winning-E”), it is possible to shift to the state of another advantageous section. By doing so, it can be expected that even the states A to C in the advantageous section can be directly shifted to the state D.

<<< Modification 2-3 >>>
Furthermore, in the above-mentioned example, the end condition of the states A to C of the advantageous section is due to the digestion of a certain number of games A to C, but these numbers A to C are determined by the lottery process. You may do so. For example, the number of games A to C can be determined by referring to a table in which the number of positions is different in each of the states A to C in the advantageous section. Specifically, in the case of state A, the number of games is set so that 10 games are 10%, 50 games are 10%, 100 games are 10%, 300 games are 30%, and 500 games are 40%. The average number of games can be 306 games. In the case of state B, the number of games is set so that 10 games are 20%, 50 games are 20%, 100 games are 20%, 300 games are 20%, and 500 games are 20%, and the average number of games is set. Can be 192 games. Further, in the case of state C, the number of games is set so that 10 games are 50%, 50 games are 30%, 100 games are 20%, 300 games are 0%, and 500 games are 0%, and the average number of games is set. Can be 40 games. By doing so, even when the transition from the state A to the state C of the advantageous section occurs, there is a possibility that the player can return to the normal section with a small number of games, and the expectation of the player can be increased.

<<< Modification 2-4 >>>
Further, as described above, the RT states mainly staying in the states A to C of the normal section and the advantageous section are both RT0, but the RT state having the highest stay rate is the state A to the state of the advantageous section. The RT state having a high stay rate in C may be set to RT5 (RT state in which cherries 1 to 3 shift by displaying a stop), and the RT state having a high stay rate in a normal section may be set to RT0. The development of the game can be diversified. Further, by configuring RT0 to have a higher winning rate of the replay than RT5, the winning rate of the replay is higher in the normal section than in the states A to C of the advantageous section. Can be configured as follows.

<<< Rare role suggestion production >>>
The execution mode of the effect applicable to the spinning machine according to this example will be described in detail below. The rare role suggestion effect is an effect executed in the game in which the rare role is won, and is a notice effect that suggests to the player that the rare role has been won in the game. The notice effect performed only in the game in which the rare role is won may be used as the rare role suggestion effect, or all the advance notice effects executed in the game in which the rare role is won may be used as the rare role suggestion effect.

Further, the timing at which the player can recognize that the rare role has been won may be the start timing of the rare role suggestion effect, or the timing at which the image or the like that can guess the winning role of the game being executed by the player is started to be displayed. May be the start timing of the rare role suggestion production. As an example of the start timing of the rare role suggestion effect, (1) an image of the color of the pattern related to the rare role (red apple is related to cherry, green apple is related to watermelon, etc.) The display is started, (2) the image of the color with a relatively high expectation of the role of rare (the color in which the symbol related to the color does not exist, for example, purple) is started to be displayed, (3) the rare. Display of symbols and characters related to the role ("CHANGE", "!", "!?", Etc.) Start timing, (4) Execution start timing of actions with relatively high expectations for rare roles (character jumps) Flashy actions such as), (5) Notice production start timing that may win a rare role (for example, as an action in which the character has a relatively low expectation of a rare role, the action of "stumbling on a stone" is started. Even if it does, it is sufficient if the action has the possibility of winning the rare role).

Further, the rare role suggestion effect is not limited to the effect displayed by the effect display device S40, and the rare role may be suggested by the effect sound output from the speaker S20, or the lighting mode of the decorative lamp unit D150 may be used. You may suggest a rare role. That is, the rare role suggestion effect in the configuration for comparing the execution timing of the rare role suggestion effect between the execution and non-execution of the continuous effect, which will be described later, may be used as the effect sound output from the speaker S20, or the decorative lamp unit. It may be the lighting mode of D150. Further, they may be combined, and for example, the execution timing of the rare role suggestion effect which is the display in the effect display device S40 and the rare role suggestion effect which is the lighting mode of the decorative lamp unit D150 may be compared. ..

Further, the definition of the rare role may be defined as follows.
<Definition 1>
A combination with a relatively low lottery probability may be a rare role. For example, it is a conditional device in which the lottery probability (winning probability) is 1/50 or less in all RT states except during the bonus, and the combination is excluded from the bonus combination. May be a rare role. When applied to this embodiment, re-game-B, re-game-C, winning-C, winning-D, and winning-E are rare roles. In addition, the winning numbers that are "BB role + rare role" (double role of BB role and rare role) such as "Type 1 BB-B + Winning-C" of winning number 21 are also included in the rare role. You may.

<Definition 2>
Other than the acquisition of game medals, a role that may be highly profitable (or relatively high) for the player may be a rare role. For example, the state related to AT shifts to an advantageous state (“low probability state → high probability state”, etc.), and when applied to this embodiment, prize-C, prize-D, and prize-E It will be a rare role.

<Definition 3>
A role with a relatively high expectation that overlaps with the bonus role may be a rare role. For example, a role that overlaps with the bonus with a probability of 1/100 (1%) or more in a situation where it is not inside the bonus. May be a rare role. More specifically, as a winning combination including the winning-C cherry, the winning number 14 that does not overlap with the bonus winning combination is "1000", and the winning number 21 that overlaps with the bonus winning combination. Winning number 25 Since the number of winnings is "40 + 40 = 80", the expectation of winning a bonus role when winning a role including winning-C is "80 ÷ 1080 × 100 ≒ 7.4%". ", And the prize-C will be a rare role. When applied to this embodiment, winning-C, winning-D, and winning-E are rare roles.

<Definition 4>
Of the winning numbers excluding the winning number including the bonus role and the loss, the winning number corresponding to one production group number may be a rare role (bonus execution). When applied to this embodiment, re-game-A, re-game-B, re-game-C, prize-B, prize-C, prize-D, and prize-E are rare roles. Further, among the winning numbers excluding the winning numbers that are lost, a role in which only one condition device (winning combination or replaying combination) corresponding to one production group number may be used as a rare role may be used. When defined in this way, the winning numbers are different between the winning number 14 winning-C and the winning number 21 type 1 BB-B + winning-C, but both are winning numbers including the winning-C. Therefore, the difference in conditions except for the bonus is the same (overlapping), and it is a rare role. When applied to this embodiment, re-game-A, re-game-B, re-game-C, prize-B, prize-C, prize-D, and prize-E are rare roles.

Further, the same condition device or winning number as in the third embodiment described above may be defined as a rare combination.

Next, FIG. 175 is a diagram showing the occurrence timing of the rare role suggestion effect. In the figure, in "(a) normal production", as a production that is completed in one game (a production that is not a continuous production), a case where a prize-C cherry is won and a rare role suggestion production is executed. , "(B) During continuous production (night mode)", the case where the rare role suggestion production is executed by winning the winning-C cherry is illustrated.

First, "(a) normal production" will be described. It should be noted that the normal production is a game executed in a situation where the continuous production is not executed.

In "(a) Normal production", the start lever is operated and the rotation of the reel starts. In the game, the cherry (winning-C) is won as a result of the internal lottery. After the start lever is operated, the rare role suggestion effect is not generated (triggered by the operation of the start lever). After that, the rare combination suggestion effect does not occur even after the operation of the first stop button and the operation of the second stop button. After that, after the operation of the third stop button, "red apple (many)", which is a rare role suggestion effect, occurs, suggesting that there is a possibility that the cherry has been won in the running game. In addition, "red apple (many)" is a production in which a large amount of red apples fall from the tree, and it is suggested that the cherry is won because the design of the cherry pattern is based on red. ing. In addition, suggesting that the cherry has been won means that the winning number including the cherry has been won. More specifically, in this embodiment as an example, the winning number 14 "winning-C" , It indicates that the player has won the "1st class BB-B + winning-C" of the winning number 21 or the "1st class BB-C + winning-C" of the winning number 25. When the reels are stopped in the order of "left reel-> middle reel-> right reel", the first stop is the left reel, the second stop is the middle reel, and the third stop is the right reel. As described above, in the case of (a) normal effect in the figure, the rare role suggestion effect is started to be executed with the operation of the third stop button as a trigger.

Next, "(b) continuous production (night mode)" will be described. In the figure, the case where the bonus is not won will be illustrated. First, in the first game of continuous production executed over four games, the start lever is operated in the situation where the background production is in the night mode, and the rotation of the reel starts. In the game, the result of the internal lottery is lost, and in the game, the rare role suggestion effect is not executed. Next, in the second game of continuous production executed over four games, the start lever is operated and the rotation of the reel starts. In the game, the cherry (winning-C) was won as a result of the internal lottery, and triggered by the operation of the start lever (in other words, before the operation of the first stop button), the rare role suggestion production "CHANGE". ! ”Is displayed. The "CHANGE!" Is continuously displayed until the next game is started (the display may be erased after the operation of the third stop button). In this way, when the rare role is won during the continuous production, the timing at which the rare role suggestion production occurs is relatively earlier than when the rare role is won during the discontinuous production. .. With this configuration, in a game in which a rare role is won in "continuous production", where the possibility of winning a bonus or AT is relatively higher than in discontinuous production, it is higher than in discontinuous production. By suggesting the winning of the rare role at a relatively early timing, it is possible to clearly notify that the game requires a push, and the player can concentrate on the result of the continuous production. In addition, the player will not be discouraged by missing the rare role during "continuous production" (that is, the result of the continuous production will not be successful because the rare role was missed, etc.). ) It is possible to develop the production. Here, "red apple (many)" and "CHANGE!" Are exemplified as the production suggesting that the cherry has been won, but "red apple (many)" and "CHANGE!" Have multiple rare roles. It may be configured to suggest that there is a high possibility that any one (for example, cherry, watermelon, chance eye, etc.) has been won. Further, as a rare role suggestion effect corresponding to the cherry, it may be configured to have a red apple (many) and a red apple (small), and in such a configuration, it is more than a red apple (small). By adjusting the appearance frequency of the production, such as red apple (many) is more likely to overlap with the bonus, it is more likely to shift to a game state that is advantageous to the player, etc. It can be a highly reliable gaming machine. In the figure, a game executed in a situation where the continuous effect is not executed is compared with a game executed during the execution of the continuous effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the continuous effect is executed. The situation that has not been done is defined as the game in which the above-mentioned "no scenario (none)" is determined, and the game executed during the execution of the continuous production is determined to be a game other than the above-mentioned "no scenario (none)". It may be a game that you have. The configuration related to the continuous production, which will be described later, may be paraphrased in the same manner. Also, when executing the red apple (many), the red apple (many) is displayed as a trigger of the third stop operation, rather than the red apple (many) being displayed as a trigger of the first stop operation. In some cases, there is a high possibility that the bonus overlaps with the bonus, the game state is likely to be favorable to the player, and so on. With such a configuration, the later the timing at which the rare role suggestion effect is executed, the higher the possibility that it will be profitable for the player, and "start lever on-> first stop operation-> second stop operation-> third stop operation". As it becomes, it is possible to raise the expectation that the rare role suggestion production has not been executed yet.

Next, FIG. 176 is a diagram showing the occurrence timing of the rare combination suggestion effect in the game in which the advantageous section indicator YH is lit. In the figure, since the operation is the same as that in FIG. 175, only the differences will be described. Both "(a) normal production" and "(b) continuous production" are normal sections, and the cherry is won in the game executed in the situation where the advantageous section indicator YH is turned off. After that, the advantageous section indicator YH is lit by operating the third stop button to enter the advantageous section after the final reel has stopped. That is, in the game in which the advantageous section indicator YH controlled by the CPUC100 of the main control board M described above is newly lit, the execution start timing of the rare role suggestion effect in the game in which the rare role is won during the discontinuous effect. Rather, the execution start timing of the rare role suggestion effect in the game in which the rare role is won during the continuous production is configured to be relatively earlier. With this configuration, it is suggested at a relatively early timing that an event advantageous to the player may have occurred (for example, winning a rare role) in the game that triggered the execution of the continuous production. It is possible to reduce the possibility of missing a rare role, and it is possible to pay attention to the continuous production. In addition, "the normal section and the advantageous section indicator YH is off → the first rare role is won → the normal section and the advantageous section indicator YH is still off, and the first rare role is won. The continuous production of 4 games is executed with this as an opportunity → Winning the second rare role in the second game of the continuous production → By winning the second rare role, it becomes an advantageous section after the third stop In the case of an action such as "the advantageous section indicator YH is lit", it is possible to recognize that the continuous production is executed with the winning of the first rare role as an opportunity, and to confirm the advantageous section indicator YH. As a result, it can be confirmed that the section has become advantageous with the winning of the second rare role, and the rare role (first rare role) that triggered the continuous production and the rare that was won in the middle of the continuous production. It is possible to prevent a situation in which it is confused as to which of the roles (the second rare role) should be expected.

Next, FIG. 177 is a diagram showing the occurrence timing of the rare combination suggestion effect at the time of the normal effect and the time of the bonus determination. “(A) During normal production” is omitted because it has the same operation as in FIG. 175. "(B) At the time of bonus confirmation" exemplifies the action of displaying the bonus confirmation screen that notifies the player that the bonus has been won, and the action of displaying the bonus confirmation screen. As an example, "Winning a duplicate role of a rare role and a bonus role-> Continuous production is executed-> It is notified that the continuous production was successful as a result of the continuous production-> The bonus confirmation screen will be displayed from the next game-> The bonus symbol is stopped and displayed → The bonus confirmation screen is erased, and the screen is displayed during the bonus. " If the bonus combination is stopped and displayed before the result of the continuous production is notified (or the game that notifies the result of the continuous production) after winning the overlapping combination of the rare role and the bonus role. The screen is displayed during the bonus without displaying the bonus confirmation screen.

To elaborate on the effect of "(b) When the bonus is confirmed", "Bonus confirmed!" Is displayed indicating that the bonus has already been won and the bonus has been confirmed, and the bonus confirmation screen is displayed. In a game executed in a situation where the bonus is inside (for example, the state related to AT is "normal BB inside game"), if the cherry is won, after the start lever is operated (in other words, the first stop button). Before the operation of, and after the game start condition is satisfied), "CHANGE!" Is displayed as a rare role suggestion effect. The "CHANGE!" Is continuously displayed until the next game is started (or the final reel is stopped). That is, if a rare role is won while the bonus confirmation screen is being displayed (inside the bonus), it is executed in a situation where the continuous production is not executed and the bonus confirmation screen is not displayed. It is a game that has been played, and it may be inside the bonus or inside the bonus), so that the timing when the rare role suggestion effect occurs is relatively earlier than when the rare role is won. It is configured. With this configuration, when the bonus is confirmed, the bonus role that is advantageous to the player has already been won, and the player is concentrating on stopping the bonus role, so the bonus role is stopped. Since it is assumed that the game is not concentrated except in games where it is possible, it is possible to prevent the rare role from being missed by suggesting that the possibility of the rare role is high relatively quickly. Here, "red apple (many)" and "CHANGE!" Are exemplified as the production suggesting that the cherry has been won, but "red apple (many)" and "CHANGE!" Have multiple rare roles. It may be configured to suggest that there is a high possibility that any one (for example, cherry, watermelon, chance eye, etc.) has been won. As shown in the figure, the display mode of the rare role suggestion effect displayed by winning the rare role in the game executed while the bonus confirmation screen is displayed, and the display mode of the continuous effect are executed. The display mode of the rare role suggestion effect displayed by winning the rare role in the game may be the same, or displayed by winning the rare role in the game executed while the bonus confirmation screen is being displayed. The display mode of the rare role suggestion effect to be displayed and the display mode of the rare role suggestion effect displayed by winning the rare role in the game executed during the execution of the continuous effect may be different. ..

Next, FIG. 178 is an example of a rare combination suggestion effect selection mode applicable to this example. The table at the top of the figure exemplifies the selection ratio of the effects executed in the game in which the cherry is won, as an example of the case where the rare role is won. The selection rate in the figure is the rate at which the effect is selected as a result.

First, in the upper part of the figure, the selection mode of the rare role suggestion effect at the time of winning the cherry will be described in detail. A common effect, a fruit effect, and a cut-in effect can be executed as rare role suggestion effects during non-execution of continuous effects during AT (a state related to AT in which push order navigation occurs, for example, during AT). It is configured. The common effect (for example, the same effect as the above-mentioned common navigation effect) is selected by 80/256 when the cherry is won during the non-execution of the continuous effect during AT, of which 50/256 operates the start lever. The rare role suggestion effect is started to be executed, 5/256 is the rare role suggestion effect triggered by the operation of the first stop button, and 5/256 is the rare role suggestion effect triggered by the operation of the second stop button. Is started to be executed, and 5/256 is triggered by the operation of the third stop button to start the execution of the rare role suggestion effect.

Next, the fruit effect (the above-mentioned apple red (many) etc. is the fruit effect) is selected in 80/256 when the cherry is won during the non-execution of the continuous effect during AT, of which 0 /. 256 triggers the operation of the start lever to start executing the rare role suggestion effect (when the fruit effect is executed, the rare role suggestion effect is not executed when the start lever is operated), and 35/256 operates the first stop button. The rare role suggestion effect is started to be executed, 30/256 is the rare role suggestion effect to be executed by the operation of the second stop button, and 15/256 is the rare role suggestion to be executed by the operation of the third stop button. The production starts to be executed.

Next, the cut-in effect is selected in 96/256 when the cherry is won during the non-execution of the continuous effect during AT, of which 36/256 starts executing the rare role suggestion effect triggered by the operation of the start lever. Then, 15/256 starts executing the rare role suggestion effect triggered by the operation of the first stop button, and 10/256 starts the execution of the rare role suggestion effect triggered by the operation of the second stop button, and 35/256. The operation of the third stop button triggers the execution of the rare role suggestion effect.

In this way, the rare role suggestion effect executed when the continuous effect is not executed during AT has a case where the execution is not started triggered by the start lever or a case where the execution is started at the timing after the first stop button. .. In addition, in the figure, although it is shown that the continuous production is not being executed, the situation where the bonus confirmation screen is not displayed is also shown. The production execution start timing is in the order of "start lever-> first stop-> second stop-> third stop" from the earliest timing.

Next, the CHANCE effect can be executed as a rare role suggestion effect during the execution of the continuous effect during AT. The CHANGE effect is selected at 256/256 when the cherry is won during the execution of the continuous effect during AT, in other words, only the CHANGE effect is selected when the cherry is won during the execution of the continuous effect during AT. It is executed, and 256/256 (all) of them start executing the rare role suggestion effect triggered by the operation of the start lever.

Next, the CHANCE effect can be executed as a rare role suggestion effect during the display of the bonus confirmation screen during AT (for example, as a state related to AT when the bonus confirmation screen is displayed). It is configured as. The CHANGE effect is selected on 256/256 when the cherry is won while the bonus confirmation screen during AT is displayed. In other words, the CHANGE effect is selected when the cherry is won while the bonus confirmation screen during AT is displayed. Only is executed, and 256/256 (all) of them start executing the rare role suggestion effect triggered by the operation of the start lever.

In this way, when the rare role (cherry in the figure) is won during AT, the rare role is won during the continuous production rather than the rare role during the non-execution of the continuous production. Is configured so that the rare role suggestion effect can be easily started at a relatively early timing. Also, if you win a rare role (cherry in the figure) during AT, if you win a rare role while the bonus confirmation screen is displayed, rather than if you win a rare role while the bonus confirmation screen is hidden. Is configured so that the rare role suggestion effect can be easily started at a relatively early timing.

Next, if a rare role is won during non-execution of continuous production during non-AT (a state related to AT in which push order navigation is not executed, for example, a low probability state), as a rare role suggestion effect, It is configured so that common effects, jump effects, and cut-in effects can be executed.

The common effect is selected by 80/256 when the cherry is won during the non-execution of the continuous effect during non-AT, and 50/256 of them starts executing the rare role suggestion effect when the start lever is operated. / 256 starts the execution of the rare role suggestion effect triggered by the operation of the first stop button, 5/256 starts the execution of the rare role suggestion effect triggered by the operation of the second stop button, and 5/256 stops the third. Rare role suggestion production is started when the button is operated.

Next, the jump effect is selected at 80/256 when the cherry is won during the non-execution of the continuous effect during non-AT, and 0/256 of them starts executing the rare role suggestion effect triggered by the operation of the start lever. (When the fruit effect is executed, the rare role suggestion effect is not executed when the start lever is operated), and 35/256 starts the execution of the rare role suggestion effect when the first stop button is operated, and 30/256 is The operation of the second stop button triggers the execution of the rare combination suggestion effect, and 15/256 triggers the operation of the third stop button to start the execution of the rare combination suggestion effect.

Next, the cut-in effect is selected in 96/256 when the cherry is won during the non-execution of the continuous effect during non-AT, of which 36/256 executes the rare role suggestion effect triggered by the operation of the start lever. 15/256 starts executing the rare role suggestion effect triggered by the operation of the first stop button, and 10/256 starts the execution of the rare role suggestion effect triggered by the operation of the second stop button, 35/256. However, the operation of the third stop button triggers the execution of the rare role suggestion effect.

In this way, the rare role suggestion effect that is executed when the continuous effect is not executed during non-AT has a case where the execution is not started triggered by the start lever or a case where the execution is started at the timing after the first stop button. There is. In addition, in the figure, although it is shown that the continuous production is not being executed, the situation where the bonus confirmation screen is not displayed is also shown. The production execution start timing is in the order of "start lever-> first stop-> second stop-> third stop" from the earliest timing.

Next, the CHANCE effect can be executed as a rare role suggestion effect during the execution of the continuous effect during non-AT. The CHANGE effect is selected at 256/256 when the cherry is won during the execution of the continuous effect during non-AT, in other words, the CHANGE effect when the cherry is won during the execution of the continuous effect during non-AT. Only is executed, and 256/256 (all) of them start executing the rare role suggestion effect triggered by the operation of the start lever.

Next, while the bonus confirmation screen is being displayed during non-AT (as for the state related to AT when the bonus confirmation screen is displayed, for example, a normal BB internal medium game), the CHANCE effect is executed as a rare role suggestion effect. It is configured to get. The CHANGE effect is selected on 256/256 when the cherry is won while the non-AT bonus confirmation screen is displayed, in other words, when the cherry is won while the non-AT bonus confirmation screen is displayed. Only the CHANGE effect is executed, and 256/256 (all) of them start executing the rare role suggestion effect triggered by the operation of the start lever.

In this way, when the rare role (cherry in the figure) is won during the non-AT, the rare role is won during the continuous production than when the rare role is won during the non-execution of the continuous production. In the case, it is configured so that the rare role suggestion effect can be easily started at a relatively early timing. In addition, when a rare role (cherry in the figure) is won during non-AT, the rare role is won while the bonus confirmation screen is displayed rather than when the rare role is won while the bonus confirmation screen is hidden. In the case, it is configured so that the rare role suggestion effect can be easily started at a relatively early timing.

First, in the lower part of the figure, the selection mode of the effect at the time of winning the push order will be described in detail. During AT (a state related to AT in which push order navigation occurs, for example, during AT), the start lever is displayed in all of the continuous production execution, non-execution of continuous production, and display of the bonus confirmation screen. The push order navigation effect is executed with the operation as an opportunity. In addition, during non-AT (a state related to AT in which push order navigation does not occur, for example, a low probability state), no effect is selected during the execution of continuous effect (all triggered by the operation of the start lever). Although it is shown, since the effect is not executed, the advance notice effect corresponding to the winning of the push order bell is not executed as a trigger of the operation of the start lever), all the push order navigation effect is selected while the bonus confirmation screen is displayed, and the continuous effect During non-execution, common effect, jump effect, conversation effect, cut-in effect, and no effect can be selected. In addition, the timing for starting the advance notice effect when the push order bell is won during the non-execution of the continuous effect during the non-AT (when the bonus confirmation screen is not displayed) may be triggered by the operation of the start lever. The operation of the first stop button, the second stop button, and the third stop button may be triggered. In addition, during non-execution of continuous production, the same production (for example, cut-in production) may be executed depending on whether the push order bell is won or the cherry (rare role) is won, but it is continuous. The CHANCE effect, which is a rare role suggestion effect that is executed while the effect is being executed or the bonus confirmation screen is displayed, cannot be executed when the push order bell is won. That is, the player is configured to be able to recognize that he / she has won the rare role when he / she visually recognizes the CHANCE effect as the rare role suggestion effect.

In the figure, only the case where the cherry is won as a rare role is illustrated, but when the rare role is configured to have a cherry and a watermelon A, the cherry is won during the non-execution of the continuous production during AT. In the game that was played, apple red (many) can be executed as a fruit effect, and in the game that won the watermelon A during non-execution of the continuous effect during AT, apple green (many) is executed as a fruit effect. It is configured so that the rare role suggestion effect can be executed in a different effect mode depending on whether the cherry or the watermelon A is won during the non-execution of the continuous effect during the AT. In the game where the cherry is won during the continuous production of, "CHANGE!" Is displayed as the CHANGE effect, and in the game where the watermelon A is won during the continuous production during AT, "CHANGE!" Is displayed as the CHANGE effect. Is displayed, even if it is configured so that the rare role suggestion effect can be executed in the same effect mode regardless of whether the cherry or the watermelon A is won during the execution of the continuous effect during AT. good. Further, even during the execution of the continuous production during AT, the rare role suggestion production may be executed in different production modes depending on whether the cherry is won or the watermelon A is won. In the case of configuration, the ratio of the rare role suggestion effect in the game in which the cherry is won during the non-execution of the continuous effect during AT and the rare role suggestion effect in the game in which the watermelon A is won is more than the same ratio. , The ratio of the rare role suggestion effect in the game in which the cherry is won and the rare role suggestion effect in the game in which the watermelon A is won is higher during the execution of the continuous effect during AT. Is preferable.

Similarly, when the role of rare is configured to have cherry and watermelon A, apple red (many) is used as a fruit effect in the game in which the cherry is won while the bonus confirmation screen during AT is hidden. In the game that is configured to be able to be executed and the watermelon A is won while the bonus confirmation screen during AT is hidden, the apple green (many) can be executed as a fruit effect, and the bonus confirmation screen during AT is configured. While the game is not displayed, the rare role suggestion effect can be executed in different production modes depending on whether the cherry or watermelon A is won, and the cherry is won while the bonus confirmation screen during AT is displayed. In the game, "CHANGE!" Is displayed as a CHANGE effect, and "CHANGE!" Is displayed as a CHANGE effect even in the game in which Watermelon A is won while the bonus confirmation screen during AT is displayed. While the bonus confirmation screen is being displayed, the rare role suggestion effect may be executed in the same effect mode regardless of whether the cherry or the watermelon A is won. Further, even while the bonus confirmation screen during AT is being displayed, the rare role suggestion effect may be executed in different production modes depending on whether the cherry is won or the watermelon A is won. In the case of the above configuration, the ratio of the rare role suggestion effect in the game in which the cherry is won while the bonus confirmation screen is hidden during AT and the rare role suggestion effect in the game in which the watermelon A is won is the same. The ratio of the rare role suggestion effect in the game in which the cherry is won and the rare role suggestion effect in the game in which the watermelon A is won is higher than that in the display of the bonus confirmation screen during AT. It is preferable to configure it as such. Although the above configuration has been described in detail only during AT, it is merely an example, and the same configuration can be applied to the production mode of the rare role suggestion effect during non-AT.

With this configuration, there is a possibility that an event that is advantageous to the player has occurred in the game that triggered the execution of the continuous production. Therefore, if a rare role is won during the execution of the continuous production, it will be continuous. By notifying the player of the rare role suggestion effect with a simple display and at an earlier timing than when the rare role is won during the non-execution of the effect, the possibility that the player misses the rare role is reduced. At the same time, the player can concentrate more on the result of the continuous production. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused as to which of the rare role that triggered the execution of the continuous production and the rare role that was won during the execution of the continuous production.

In addition, in this specification, the description that B is more likely to be executed than A includes the case where A is not executed, and the rate at which B is executed is higher than the rate at which A is executed. It should be added that the description of A includes the case where A is not executed.

(Fifth Embodiment)
In the third embodiment, it is possible to create a highly entertaining gaming machine by making it possible to execute a freeze that delays the progress of the game, but the execution condition of the freeze is the same as that of the third embodiment. Is not limited. Therefore, the configuration of the spinning-type gaming machine capable of executing a freeze different from the configuration of the third embodiment is set as the fifth embodiment, and the differences from the third embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIG. 179 is a flowchart of the freeze lottery execution process according to the subroutine of step 3100 of FIG. 112 in the fifth embodiment. The difference from the third embodiment is step 3140, that is, in step 3140, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the condition device related to the game is a combination including a bonus. In the case of Yes in step 3140, in step 3106, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a specific freeze execution lottery that is won with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/10). Next, in step 3108, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the specific freeze execution lottery executed in step 3106 has been won. If Yes in step 3108, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the freeze execution flag in step 3110. Next, in step 3112, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a specific freeze execution command (command to the sub control board S side), and shifts to the next process (process of step 1550). Even if No in step 3140 or step 3108, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1550).

Here, the right side of the figure is a list of winning numbers in which a specific freeze can be executed. In the figure, the number of places when the set value is set to 1 is illustrated. Further, the total number of positions is 65536, and for example, when the number of positions is 10, it is shown that the player wins at 10/65536. As shown in the figure, the winning combination including the bonus in the determination process of step 3140 is the winning number 19 to 40, and the winning combination of the winning numbers 19, 20, and 24 (overlapping with the winning combination and the replaying combination). (Only the bonus role that has not been won), the "rare role + bonus role" that is a duplicate of the rare role and bonus role of winning numbers 21-23 and winning numbers 25-27, and the winning number 24-40. It is composed of "rare role + bonus role" which is a duplicate role of non-rare role and bonus role. Here, the rare roles in the figure are prize-C (cherry), prize-D (watermelon A) and prize E (watermelon B), and the non-rare role is replay-A, prize-. A1, prize-A2, prize-A3, prize-A4, prize-A5, and prize-A6. That is, as in the above-mentioned "Definition 1", in the fifth embodiment, the winning combination with a relatively low lottery probability is a rare role, and the lottery probability (winning probability) is set in all RT states except during the bonus. A condition device having a probability of 1/50 or less is used as a rare role. With this configuration, the probability that the rare role will be won and the specific freeze execution lottery will be executed is (40 + 40 + 40 + 40 + 40 + 40) / 65536 = 240/65536, and the non-rare role will be won and the specific freeze execution lottery will be executed. The probability is (1 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1) / 65536 = 7/65536, and the specific freeze execution lottery is easier to execute when the rare role is won than the non-rare role, in other words, the specific freeze is easier to execute. Has been done. In the game in which the specific freeze is executed, the specific freeze effect is executed on the sub-control board S side.

Further, the definition of the rare role is not limited to this, and when it is defined in the same manner as the above-mentioned "Definition 4", the prize-C (cherry), the prize-D (watermelon A) and the prize E (watermelon B) are defined. , Re-game-A, and the non-rare roles are prize-A1, prize-A2, prize-A3, prize-A4, prize-A5, and prize-A6. That is, among the winning numbers excluding the winning numbers that are lost, the role in which only one condition device (winning combination or replaying combination) corresponding to one production group number can be regarded as a rare role can be used. ..

In this configuration, the production group number corresponding to the winning-C is "7" in all of the winning numbers 14, 21, and 25, and the production group number corresponding to the winning-D is the winning number 15. , 22, 26 are all "8", and the production group number corresponding to winning-E is "9" in all winning numbers 16, 23, 27, and it corresponds to replay-A. The production group number is "1" in all of the winning numbers 1 and 34, and there is only one condition device (winning combination or replaying combination) corresponding to the production group number of 1. On the other hand, prize-A1, prize-A2, prize-A3, prize-A4, prize-A5, and prize-A6 are different condition devices, but the corresponding production group numbers are all "5". .. In this way, even when the rare role and the non-rare role are defined, the probability that the rare role will be won and the specific freeze execution lottery will be executed is (40 + 40 + 40 + 40 + 40 + 40 + 1) / 65536 = 241/65536, and the non-rare role will be used. The probability of winning and executing the specific freeze execution lottery is (1 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1) / 65536 = 6/65536, and it is easier to execute the specific freeze execution lottery when the rare role is won than the non-rare role, in other words. Then, it is configured so that the specific freeze is easily executed. With this configuration, when a rare role is won, which is relatively easy for a player to have an advantageous event (bonus winning in the figure), a specific freeze is more likely to be executed than when a non-rare role is won. It is possible to configure a gaming machine that appropriately executes a freeze.

Further, the specific freeze may be executed only when the rare role is won, or the freeze execution mode (freeze time) and the effect mode on the sub-control board S side may be different for each rare role. good. With such a configuration, it is possible to have a one-to-one correspondence between the condition device (winning combination or replaying combination) that becomes a rare role and the production group number, and the winning combination is grasped (limited) from the production group number. It is possible to easily execute the freeze effect peculiar to the winning combination.

Next, FIG. 180 is an image of executing a button effect in the fifth embodiment. It should be noted that the embodiment to which the button effect illustrated in the figure can be applied is not limited to the fifth embodiment, and can be applied to all the embodiments exemplified in this example.

First, (a) shown in the upper part of the figure will be described in detail. In a normal game state (a non-AT game state in which push order navigation is not executed, for example, a "low probability state"), the start lever is operated to execute the game (reel rotation starts). After that, in the situation where the reels are rotating and the first stop operation is not executed (the first stop button is not operated and all the reels are rotating), the sub input button is used as a button effect. An image prompting the player to operate is displayed. After that, the sub input button is operated, and the above-mentioned red apple (many) is displayed. In the game, the case where the cherry is won is illustrated. As described above, in this example, the button effect can be displayed as an opportunity to execute the above-mentioned rare role suggestion effect. In addition, when the button effect is executed in the normal game state and the rare role suggestion effect is executed by operating the sub input button, the operation of the start lever is triggered in the above-mentioned "AT in progress state". As a result, the rare role suggestion effect will be started at a later timing than the rare role suggestion effect is executed. In this configuration, if "reel rotation start-> button effect display start-> sub-input button is operated-> first stop button is operated", the sub-input button is operated. If a red apple (many) is displayed as an opportunity and "reel rotation start-> button effect display start-> first stop button is operated-> sub-input button is operated", the sub-input button is displayed. It may be configured so that the red apple (many) is not displayed as a trigger of the operation.

Next, (b) shown in the lower part of the figure will be described in detail. During AT (a game state in which push order navigation can be executed, for example, "AT in progress state"), the start lever is operated to execute the game (reel rotation starts), and the game is rare. Since the role of Cherry has been won, "!!!", which is a rare role suggestion effect, is displayed when the start lever is operated. After that, a third stop operation (final stop operation) is performed, and after all the reels are stopped, an image prompting the player to operate the sub input button is displayed as a button effect. In the figure, it is illustrated as a case where the symbol combination corresponding to the cherry is stopped and displayed, but the player mistakenly performs the reel stop operation (pressing) and the symbol combination corresponding to the cherry is stopped and displayed. It may be configured so that the button effect can be executed even if it does not exist. After that, the sub input button is operated, and "+ 50G" is displayed as a display notifying that the number of remaining AT games has been added. As described above, in this example, the button effect is configured to be displayable even when the above-mentioned addition of the number of AT games is notified.

The button effect illustrated in the figure can be configured to be feasible in various situations, but when a rare role is won, when an AT lottery is won, or when the number of AT games is added (before). It is easy to execute when the expectation that a favorable result for the player will occur is relatively high, such as (including the case where the number of AT games has been added by the game and the number of AT games has not been notified). It may be configured to be. As an example of such a configuration, it can be exemplified that the case where the rare role is won is configured so that the button effect is more likely to occur than the case where the role other than the rare role is won. Further, when the role is defined as a rare role as in the above-mentioned "Definition 4", the condition device (winning role or replaying role) corresponding to one of the winning numbers excluding the winning number that is lost is one of the production group numbers. It can be exemplified that a game in which a rare role, which is a role in which only one role is won, is configured so that a button effect is more easily executed than a game in which a role other than the rare role is won. By configuring in this way, the button production can be made into a production with relatively high expectations, and the button production can be managed by the production group number, which constitutes a gaming machine that is less susceptible to fraudulent damage. be able to.

Further, regarding the above-mentioned ambiguous production (ambiguous notification), it can be exemplified that the case where the rare role is won is less likely to cause the ambiguous production than the case where the role other than the rare role is won. Further, when the role is defined as a rare role as in the above-mentioned "Definition 4", the condition device (winning role or replaying role) corresponding to one of the winning numbers excluding the winning number that is lost is one of the production group numbers. It can be exemplified that a game in which a rare role, which is a role in which only one role is won, is configured so that an ambiguous effect is less likely to be executed than a game in which a role other than the rare role is won. By configuring in this way, the ambiguous production can be made into a production with a relatively low expectation, a difference from other productions such as a button production can be provided, and the ambiguous production is managed by the production group number. It is possible to configure a gaming machine that is less susceptible to fraudulent damage. Similarly, for various productions in which there is a difference in the production occurrence probability between the time when the rare role is won and the time when the rare role ratio is won, the rare role is defined using the production group number and the production probability is compared. It should be added that is possible.

Further, although the configuration in which the rare combination is defined by the number of types of winning numbers corresponding to the effect group numbers and the effect occurrence probabilities are compared is described above, the effect group number is transferred from the main control board M to the sub control board S, "normally. When it is configured so that it can be transmitted only in the "section", it may be configured to compare the effect occurrence probabilities in the "normal section".

<<< Character selection screen >>>
Next, the configuration related to the character selection screen applicable to this example will be described in detail below. It should be added that the configuration of the effect illustrated below is applicable to all the embodiments exemplified in this example.

<< First pattern >>
First, FIG. 181 is a transition diagram in the case of determining by operating the start lever of the first pattern. First, in the game in which the AT is in progress, the display of "Moon stage entry" is displayed on the effect display device S40 as a display indicating that AT is started (sometimes referred to as an AT start screen) (AT). You may perform a freeze at the start). Next, after the third stop of the game in which the AT start screen is displayed, the character selection screen is displayed. It should be noted that the "moon stage entry" and the character selection screen may be displayed after the third stop one game before the transition to the "AT in progress state". As an effect mode of the character selection screen, one selection candidate character (here, an elephant) is shining (highlighted), and the other selection candidate characters (here, a lion and a giraffe) are darkened. (Not highlighted). It should be noted that the selection candidate character that shines is changed (the shining character changes) every predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds), and the character is determined according to the timing at which the player performs the determination operation. It is configured. In the figure, as a determination operation, by operating the start lever while the specified number is bet (by operating the game start operation), the shining character (here, the elephant) is determined and AT. (Moon stage) starts, and the screen during reel rotation in the AT state is displayed. In the figure, the case of operating the start lever, which is an operating member controlled by the main control board M side, is illustrated as a determination operation, but the max bet button is operated as the operating member controlled by the main control board M side. It may be configured so that it can be determined by betting. It is preferable that the operation of the settlement button (settlement of game medals) is not determined.

In addition, when the game medal is settled by operating the settlement button when the character selection screen is not displayed, the standby screen may be displayed, while the settlement button is operated while the character selection screen is displayed for the game. When the medals are settled, the standby screen may not be displayed. Further, the standby screen may be displayed even when the game medal is settled by operating the settlement button while the character selection screen is displayed. In such a configuration, the standby screen may be displayed. It is preferable to configure the character so that the character is not determined even if the game medal is inserted during the display. Further, the character may not be determined even if the sub input button is operated while the standby screen is displayed. By such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a character is determined even though the character selection screen is not displayed, and the player can smoothly determine a desired character. Can be configured.

Next, FIG. 182 is a transition diagram in the case of determining by operating the sub input button of the first pattern. First, in the game in which the AT is in progress, the display of "Moon stage entry" is displayed on the effect display device S40 as a display indicating that AT is started (sometimes referred to as an AT start screen) (AT). You may perform a freeze at the start). Next, after the third stop of the game in which the AT start screen is displayed, the character selection screen is displayed. It should be noted that the "moon stage entry" and the character selection screen may be displayed after the third stop one game before the transition to the "AT in progress state". As an effect mode of the character selection screen, one selection candidate character (here, an elephant) is shining (highlighted), and the other selection candidate characters (here, a lion and a giraffe) are darkened. (Not highlighted). It should be noted that the selection candidate character that shines is changed (the shining character changes) every predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds), and the character is determined according to the timing at which the player performs the determination operation. It is configured. Next, as a determination operation, the sub-input button, which is an operating member controlled on the sub-control board S side, is operated to determine the shining character, and the display "decided to be an elephant" is determined. It is displayed on the effect display device S40 as a notification image. After that, when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses, the display of "decided to be an elephant", which is a decision notification image, is erased, AT (moon stage) starts, and the reel is rotating in the AT state. A similar screen will be displayed. If the game is started by operating the start lever before the predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses, the decision notification image is displayed at the time when the game starts (at the time when the operation of the start lever is accepted). It will be erased and the screen during reel rotation in the AT state will be displayed.

In this way, when the player operates the selection operation (here, the operation for selecting the character), the player operates the start lever, which is an operation member controlled by the main control board M side, and the sub control board. The display mode of the effect is different from the case of operating the sub input button which is the operation member controlled on the S side, in other words, the player operates the start lever which is the operation member controlled on the main control board M side. If the decision notification image is not displayed, the decision notification image is displayed when the sub input button, which is an operation member controlled on the sub control board S side, is operated. Prevents the player from being confused as to whether the sub input button, which is an operation member on the sub side that does not affect the result of the game, or the start lever, which is the operation member on the main side that affects the result of the game, is operated. be able to. In addition, by executing the effect that is displayed only when the sub input button is pressed, the player can be motivated to press the sub input button, and the player who wants to enjoy the effect can press the sub input button. By operating the game, the player can enjoy the effect, and the player who wants to proceed with the game can quickly proceed with the game by operating the start lever.

Even when the bet button, which is an operating member on the main side that affects the result of the game, is operated, the main side that affects the result of the game can be configured in the same manner as when the start lever is operated. The case where the operation member of the above is operated and the operation member on the sub side which does not affect the result of the game are clearly distinguished by the difference in the effect transition, and it is possible to prevent the player from being confused. .. In addition, the music at the start of AT is configured to be the same when the operation member (start lever, bet button) on the main side is operated and when the operation member (sub input button) on the sub side is operated. It may be configured differently.

<< Second pattern >>
Next, FIG. 183 is a transition diagram in the case of determining by operating the start lever of the second pattern. First, in the game in which the AT is in progress, the display of "Moon stage entry" is displayed on the effect display device S40 as a display indicating that AT is started (sometimes referred to as an AT start screen) (AT). You may perform a freeze at the start). After that, the sub input is in a situation where all reels are stopped and a predetermined condition (for example, the operating member controlled by the main control board M is not operated for 5 seconds after all reels are stopped) is satisfied. When the button is operated, a customization screen (sometimes referred to as a menu screen) is displayed on the effect display device S40. While the customization screen is displayed, select which customization (for example, music selection, volume adjustment, character selection, light intensity adjustment, etc.) is to be performed by operating the cross key and the sub input button. Here, by operating the cross key to move the cursor to "Music selection" and deciding to "Music selection" by operating the sub input button, the screen shifts to the music selection screen for selecting which music to use. However, the cursor is placed on the music A. After that, when the player operates the start lever (when the game start condition is satisfied) in the situation where the music has not been decided and the specified number is bet, the music to which the cursor is placed (here). , Music A), the rotation of the reel related to the next game starts, and the screen during the reel rotation in the AT state is displayed.

Next, FIG. 184 is a transition diagram in the case of determining by operating the sub input button of the second pattern. First, in the game in which the AT is in progress, the display of "Moon stage entry" is displayed on the effect display device S40 as a display indicating that AT is started (sometimes referred to as an AT start screen) (AT). You may perform a freeze at the start). After that, the sub input is in a situation where all reels are stopped and a predetermined condition (for example, the operating member controlled by the main control board M is not operated for 5 seconds after all reels are stopped) is satisfied. When the button is operated, a customization screen (sometimes referred to as a menu screen) is displayed on the effect display device S40. While the customization screen is displayed, select which customization (for example, music selection, volume adjustment, character selection, light intensity adjustment, etc.) is to be performed by operating the cross key and the sub input button. Here, by operating the cross key to move the cursor to "Music selection" and deciding to "Music selection" by operating the sub input button, the screen shifts to the music selection screen for selecting which music to use. However, the cursor is placed on the music A. After that, the sub-input button was operated again while the cursor was placed on the song A, so that the song on which the cursor was placed (here, song A) was determined, and "the song A was determined." Is displayed on the effect display device S40 as a decision notification image. After that, when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses, the display of "decided to music A", which is a decision notification image, is erased, AT (moon stage) starts, and the reel is rotating in the AT state. A screen similar to the above will be displayed. It should be noted that the music to be determined is the music to which the cursor is placed, regardless of whether the music is determined by operating the sub input button or the start lever. The music determination mode is the same. It has become.

In this way, as in FIGS. 181 and 182, the customized screen is configured so that the display mode of the effect differs depending on whether the player operates the start lever or the sub-input button. The player may be confused as to whether the sub input button, which is the operation member on the sub side that does not affect the result of the game, or the start lever, which is the operation member on the main side that affects the result of the game, is operated. Can be prevented. Further, by executing the effect displayed only when the sub-input button is pressed, the player can be motivated to press the sub-input button, and the interest of the game can be improved.

As described above, when the operation member (for example, the sub input button) controlled on the sub control board S side is operated in the customization screen (menu screen), the character selection screen, the execution of the button effect, etc., it is specified. An effect (for example, a decision notification image) is displayed, and when an operation member (for example, a start lever) controlled by the main control board M side is operated, a specific effect (for example, a decision notification image) is not displayed. By configuring the configuration, it becomes easy to determine whether the player has operated the operating member controlled on the sub control board S side or the operating member controlled on the main control board M side, which confuses the player. It is possible to configure a gaming machine that does not allow it. In the above, it is determined that the determination operation has been performed (for example, the character has been determined) when the start lever is operated to satisfy the game start condition as the operation member controlled on the main control board M side. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be determined that the determination operation has been performed (for example, the character has been determined) by operating various bet buttons such as the max bet button. .. In such a configuration, since various bet buttons such as the max bet button are operating members controlled by the main control board M side, even if the determination operation is performed by operating various bet buttons such as the max bet button. The specific effect will not be executed.

<<< Configuration related to back lamp production >>>
Next, the configuration related to the character selection screen applicable to this example will be described in detail below. It should be added that the configuration of the effect illustrated below is applicable to all the embodiments exemplified in this example.

Next, FIGS. 185 and 186 are views showing a lighting pattern of the reel by the rotating cylinder backlight S30. First, "(a) when the replay is established" will be described with reference to FIG. 185. In the figure, the effective line is one of the middle horizontal lines, that is, the "left reel middle stage, middle reel middle stage, right reel middle stage" is the effective line. In the figure, the effective line is one of the middle horizontal lines, but the line is not limited to this, and is the same downward-sloping line as in the present embodiment, "left reel upper stage, middle reel middle stage, right reel". There is no problem with the "lower" line, and there is no problem even if the effective line is not one line. First, the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game combination is stopped and displayed on a line that is not an effective line (a line that descends to the right and is a line of "upper left reel, middle middle reel, lower right reel").

It should be noted that the symbol on the reel corresponding to the replaying combination is the replay A symbol in which the letter "R" is drawn in the circle (because the name of the symbol on the reel is the same as that of the present embodiment). , Refer to FIGS. 7 to 9), and the player recognizes that the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination is stopped and displayed by visually recognizing that the replay A symbol is stopped and displayed in a straight line. .. In the figure, in the game in which the replay combination is won, the replay A symbol is stopped and displayed in a straight line on a downward-sloping line that is not the effective line, but since the effective line is a straight line in the middle stage. The symbol that is stopped and displayed on the valid line is "Black Seven Replay A Bell". At this time, should the player see the symbol combination of "Black Seven Replay A / Bell" on the effective line, or should he see the symbol combination of "Replay A / Replay A / Replay A" that goes down to the right? , May be confusing. Actually, it doesn't matter which one you look at (it is a replay (replay) in "Black Seven Replay A Bell", and it has the same meaning as Replay A symbol alignment, which is an apparent symbol alignment). In the unlikely event of confusion, it is preferable to configure the system so that it can be notified by a unified notification mode so that it can be grasped that the symbol combination corresponding to the replaying combination has been stopped and displayed. Therefore, in the figure, the back lamp effect of turning on the backlight of the reels in the order of left reel → middle reel → right reel is executed (left → middle → right lighting pattern). Although the details will be described later, the rotating cylinder backlight S30 is configured to be able to be turned on and off for each area corresponding to each symbol stop position of each reel, and more specifically, on the upper stage of the left reel. Corresponding area, area corresponding to the middle stage of the left reel, area corresponding to the lower stage of the left reel, area corresponding to the upper stage of the middle reel, area corresponding to the middle stage of the middle reel, area corresponding to the lower stage of the middle reel, corresponding to the upper stage of the right reel The nine areas of the area, the area corresponding to the middle stage of the right reel, and the area corresponding to the lower stage of the right reel are divided into at least nine areas so that they can be turned on and off (lighting controllable).

Since the left-to-middle-to-right lighting pattern shown in the figure is a lighting pattern corresponding to the re-gaming role, a player who is not accustomed to the gaming machine (has not played much) can play the game. Even if the effective line or the stop display combination (the symbol combination of the winning combination) is unknown, the player can easily grasp that the game is a re-game by the lighting pattern.

Next, "(b) when the bell is established" will be described with reference to FIG. 186. Also in FIG. 186, the effective line is one of the middle horizontal lines, as in “(a) When replay is established” in FIG. 185. First, the symbol combination corresponding to the bell role is stopped and displayed on a line that is not an effective line (a line that rises to the right and is a line of "lower left reel, middle middle reel, upper right reel").

The symbol on the reel corresponding to the bell combination is a bell symbol (see FIGS. 7 to 9 because the name of the symbol on the reel is the same as that of the present embodiment), and the player can use the bell symbol. By visually recognizing that the display is stopped in a straight line, it is recognized that the symbol combination corresponding to the bell role is displayed as a stop. In the figure, in the game in which the role of bell is won, the bell symbol is stopped and displayed in a straight line on the upward-sloping line that is not the effective line, but since the effective line is in the middle straight line, the effective line is displayed. The symbol that is stopped and displayed is "Replay B, Bell, Replay A". At this time, the player is confused as to whether to see the symbol combination of "Replay B / Bell / Replay A" on the effective line or the symbol combination of "Bell / Bell / Bell" falling to the right. There is a fear. In reality, it doesn't matter which one you look at ("Replay B, Bell, Replay A" is a bell, which has the same meaning as the bell pattern alignment, which is an apparent pattern alignment), but it is confusing. However, it is preferable to configure the system so that it can be notified by a unified notification mode so that it can be grasped that the symbol combination corresponding to the bell combination has been stopped and displayed. Therefore, in the figure, it is configured to execute a back lamp effect in which the backlight of the reel is turned on so as to swirl counterclockwise.

The lighting pattern that swirls counterclockwise as shown in the figure is a lighting pattern that corresponds to the role of the bell, so players who are not accustomed to the gaming machine are playing the game, and the effective line and stop display are displayed. Even if the combination (the combination of the symbols of the winning combination) is unknown, the player can easily grasp that it is a bell by the lighting pattern.

By configuring in this way, even if the same symbol is unavoidably not stopped and displayed on the effective line (the symbols are not aligned) due to the design of the gaming machine, the player does not misidentify the winning combination (stop display combination). Can be configured.

Next, FIG. 187 is an execution image of the back lamp effect applicable to this example. As described above, in the spinning type gaming machine according to this example, the area corresponding to the upper stage of the left reel, the area corresponding to the middle stage of the left reel, the area corresponding to the lower stage of the left reel, the area corresponding to the upper stage of the middle reel, and the middle. The area corresponding to the middle stage of the reel, the area corresponding to the lower stage of the middle reel, the area corresponding to the upper stage of the right reel, the area corresponding to the middle stage of the right reel, and the area corresponding to the lower stage of the right reel are lit and lit at least by dividing them into nine areas. It is configured so that it can be turned off (lighting control is possible), and in the figure, the area corresponding to the upper stage of the left reel = 1, the area corresponding to the middle stage of the left reel = 2, the area corresponding to the lower stage of the left reel = 3, the middle reel. Area corresponding to the upper stage = 4, area corresponding to the middle stage of the middle reel = 5, area corresponding to the lower stage of the middle reel = 6, area corresponding to the upper stage of the right reel = 7, area corresponding to the middle stage of the right reel = 8, right reel It will be described as the area corresponding to the lower row = 9. The effective lines are "2", "5", and "8".

First, the details of the back lamp effect when the symbol combination corresponding to the bell combination is stopped and displayed in the "bell stop display" in the upper part of the figure will be illustrated. While the reels are rotating (any of the reels is rotating), the back lamp is configured to light all areas from "1" to "9". Hereinafter, the explanation will be given using the table shown in the upper left corner of the figure. In this table, time elapses from left to right.

(1) First, the third stop operation (final stop operation) is executed while the reel is rotating and the back lamps in all areas from "1" to "9" are lit, and the bell is belled. The symbol combination corresponding to the combination is stopped and displayed.
(2) The lighting mode of the back lamp is "1: lighting", "2: lighting", "3: off", "4: lighting", "5: lighting", "6: off", "7: lighting". , "8: On", "9: Off".
(3) The lighting mode of the back lamp is "1: lighting", "2: lighting", "3: lighting", "4: lighting", "5: lighting", "6: lighting", "7: extinguishing". , "8: Off", "9: Off".
(4) The lighting mode of the back lamp is "1: off", "2: on", "3: on", "4: off", "5: on", "6: on", "7: off". , "8: Lighting", "9: Lighting".
(5) The lighting mode of the back lamp is "1: off", "2: off", "3: on", "4: on", "5: on", "6: on", "7: on". , "8: Lighting", "9: Lighting".
(6) The lighting mode of the back lamp is "1: lit", "2: off", "3: lit", "4: lit", "5: off", "6: lit", "7: lit". , "8: Lighting", "9: Lighting".
(7) The lighting mode of the back lamp is "1: lighting", "2: lighting", "3: lighting", "4: lighting", "5: off", "6: lighting", "7: lighting". , "8: Lighting", "9: Lighting".
(8) The lighting mode of the back lamp is "1: lighting", "2: lighting", "3: lighting", "4: lighting", "5: lighting", "6: lighting", "7: lighting". , "8: Lighting", "9: Lighting".

As described above, when the symbol combination corresponding to the bell role (exemplifying the push order bell role) is stopped and displayed, the backlight of the reel is turned on so as to swirl counterclockwise as a back lamp effect. It is configured to perform a backlight effect. It should be noted that the back lamp effect may be executed only when the symbol combination corresponding to the push order bell combination is stopped and displayed, or the back lamp effect may be executed even when the common bell is won. You may. In addition, even when the push order bell combination is won, the above back lamp effect is executed only when the symbol combination with the maximum payout number is stopped and displayed, and when the symbol combination with the payout number less than the maximum payout number is stopped and displayed. May be configured so that the back lamp effect is not executed or the back lamp effect is executed in an effect mode different from the above.

Next, the upper right corner of the figure is an example of a symbol combination corresponding to the bell combination (pushing order bell combination). As shown in (a), when "bell, bell, bell" stops at the effective line, and as shown in (b), the line is different from the effective line and the symbol stop position on the effective line. When "bell, bell, bell" stops at the upward-sloping line (the middle reel of the middle reel is the overlapping symbol stop position), and as shown in (c), what is the effective line? It is possible to exemplify a case where "bell, bell, bell" stops at a lower straight line that is a different line and does not overlap with the symbol stop position on the effective line. In this way, by visually recognizing that the player has stopped and displayed in a straight line, it is recognized that the symbol combination corresponding to the bell combination has stopped and displayed. It is configured to have only one (only a part) stop display and no stop display, but in any of the stop displays, the same back lamp effect corresponding to the bell role is executed. As a result, the player can proceed with the game without feeling uncomfortable. In addition, even if no bell symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line, the symbol stop position on the effective line is set when the back lamp effect corresponding to the bell role is executed so that the player is not misunderstood. The corresponding area (the area of "2", "5", "8" in the figure) is always turned off once ("lighting-> off-> lighting"), so that it is an effective line. It is configured to clearly notify the original symbol combination displayed as stopped above.

Next, the details of the back lamp effect when the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game combination is stopped and displayed in the "re-game stop display" at the bottom of the figure will be illustrated. While the reels are rotating (any of the reels is rotating), the back lamp is configured to light all areas from "1" to "9". Hereinafter, the explanation will be given using the table shown in the lower left part of the figure. In this table, time elapses from left to right.

(1) First, the third stop operation (final stop operation) is executed in the situation where the reel is rotating and the back lamps in all areas from "1" to "9" are lit, and then again. The symbol combination corresponding to the game combination is stopped and displayed.
(2) The lighting mode of the back lamp is "1: lighting", "2: lighting", "3: lighting", "4: lighting", "5: lighting", "6: lighting", "7: lighting". , "8: Lighting", "9: Lighting".
(3) The lighting mode of the back lamp is "1: off", "2: off", "3: off", "4: on", "5: on", "6: on", "7: on". , "8: Lighting", "9: Lighting".
(4) The lighting mode of the back lamp is "1: off", "2: off", "3: off", "4: on", "5: on", "6: on", "7: on". , "8: Lighting", "9: Lighting".
(5) The lighting mode of the back lamp is "1: lit", "2: lit", "3: lit", "4: off", "5: off", "6: off", "7: on". , "8: Lighting", "9: Lighting".
(6) The lighting mode of the back lamp is "1: lit", "2: lit", "3: lit", "4: off", "5: off", "6: off", "7: on". , "8: Lighting", "9: Lighting".
(7) The lighting mode of the back lamp is "1: lighting", "2: lighting", "3: lighting", "4: lighting", "5: lighting", "6: lighting", "7: extinguishing". , "8: Off", "9: Off".
(8) The lighting mode of the back lamp is "1: lighting", "2: lighting", "3: lighting", "4: lighting", "5: lighting", "6: lighting", "7: extinguishing". , "8: Off", "9: Off".

As described above, when the symbol combination corresponding to the replaying combination is stopped and displayed, the back lamp effect in which the backlight of the reel is turned on from left to right is executed as the back lamp effect. It should be noted that the back lamp effect may be executed only when the symbol combinations corresponding to some of the replaying combinations are stopped and displayed, or the symbol combinations corresponding to all the replaying combinations may be stopped and displayed. The back lamp effect may be configured to be executed only in the case.

Next, the lower right part of the figure is an example of a symbol combination corresponding to the replaying combination. As shown in (a), when "replay A, replay A, replay A" stops at the effective line, and as shown in (b), the line is different from the effective line and is on the effective line. When "Replay A, Replay B, Replay A" stops on the upward-sloping line that partially overlaps with the symbol stop position (the middle reel middle stage is the overlapping symbol stop position), as shown in (c). In addition, a case where "Replay A, Replay B, Replay B" stops at a lower straight line that is different from the effective line and does not overlap with the symbol stop position on the effective line can be exemplified. .. In this way, replay A or replay B is stopped and displayed in a straight line as a symbol that recognizes that the symbol combination corresponding to the re-player combination is stopped and displayed by visually recognizing that the player has stopped and displayed in a straight line. Just do it. It should be noted that this does not apply when the above-mentioned replay-B or the like is won. In this way, all three replay A symbols and replay B symbols, which are recognized as having stopped and displayed the symbol combination corresponding to the replaying combination by visually recognizing that the player has stopped and displayed in a straight line, are all three on the effective line. It is configured to have a case where the stop display is displayed, a case where only one (only a part) stop display is displayed, and a case where no stop display is performed. By executing the back lamp effect of, the player can proceed with the game without discomfort. In addition, even if none of the replay A symbol and the replay B symbol are stopped and displayed on the effective line, the effective line is used when the back lamp effect corresponding to the replay combination is executed so as not to mislead the player. The area corresponding to the above symbol stop position (the area of "2", "5", "8" in the figure) is always turned off once ("lighting-> off-> lighting"). By doing so, it is configured to clearly notify the original symbol combination displayed as a stop on the effective line. The shape and design of the replay A symbol and the replay B symbol are similar, and even if the same symbol stops in a straight line, such as "replay A, replay A, replay A", the player can "replay B". Even if similar symbols such as "Replay A / Replay A" stop in a straight line, it is configured so that it can be recognized that the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination is stopped and displayed. The straight line may be an effective line or a straight line different from the effective line.

In addition, even if the symbol combination different from the normal rotation is apparently stopped and displayed due to the reel rotation failure described above, the back lamp effect corresponding to the winning combination or the replaying combination that is stopped and displayed as an internal process is produced. By executing this, the player can recognize which combination of symbols corresponds to the stopped display.

It should be noted that the difference in the lighting mode of the back lamp between the lighting mode A and the lighting mode B means that the order of the regions corresponding to the symbol stop position where the back lamp blinks (turns off) between the lighting mode A and the lighting mode B, and the blinking time. (Extinguishing time) or when the combination is different, the lighting mode may be different, or even if the symbol stop position where the back lamp blinks (turns off) is the same in the lighting mode A and the lighting mode B, the back lamp is backed up. If the blinking speed of the lamp is different, the lighting mode may be different.

Further, in the above, the case where the back lamp effect is executed after the symbol combination stop display after the third stop is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the back lamp effect is executed after the first stop or the second stop. It may be configured to do so. As a specific example, when the bell symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line (stop position of "2", "5", "8") in FIG. 187, when the left reel is stopped as the first stop, "1". The back lamps corresponding to the areas of "4" and "6" are turned off, and then the back lamps corresponding to the areas of "4" and "6" are turned off when the middle reel is stopped as the second stop. When the right reel is stopped as the third stop, the back lamp effect after the bell stop display illustrated in FIG. 187 is executed immediately after the back lamp corresponding to the areas "7" and "9" is turned off. It may be configured. In this configuration, the back lamp in the area corresponding to the effective line is not turned off in the first stop operation and the second stop operation, but the area corresponding to the effective line in the third stop operation (after all reels are stopped). The back lamps can be configured to be extinguished so that the visibility of the effective line is increased when one of the reels is spinning, in other words, when the player needs to perform a stop operation in the running game. The back lamp in the area corresponding to the effective line is configured to light so as not to interfere, and after all reels are stopped, the technician does not need to perform the stop operation in the game, so the back including the effective line is back. By performing the back lamp effect using all the areas where the lamp can blink, the effect of the back lamp effect can be enhanced.

Also, if you win the bell role, the bell symbols may be aligned on a straight line that is different from the effective line, or if you win the replay role, the replay symbols may be aligned on a straight line that is different from the effective line. By configuring it as such, the degree of freedom in arranging the symbols on the reels is increased, and it is possible to create a more entertaining gaming machine.

Further, the above-mentioned decorative lamp unit may also be configured to be able to execute a frame lamp effect that lights up (blinks) when the bell is won or when the replay stop is displayed, and even if such a configuration is made, the winning combination can be used. It is preferable to configure the frame lamp effect to be executed in the corresponding effect mode. In other words, the effect mode of the frame lamp effect when the symbol combination corresponding to the push order bell is stopped and displayed is different from the effect mode of the frame lamp effect when the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination is stopped and displayed. Is preferable.

<<< Action when the reel is stopped in a push order different from the push order navigation >>>
Next, the operation when the reels are stopped in a push order different from the push order navigation, which is applicable to this example, will be described in detail below. It should be noted that the actions exemplified below are applicable to all the embodiments exemplified in this example.

First, FIGS. 188 and 189 are image diagrams when push navigation occurs during AT. First, "(a) Successful push order (during continuous production: warp production)" will be described. Here, the push order navigation is in the "AT in progress state", which is a game state in which the navigation can be executed, and the continuous effect (warp effect) executed over the plurality of games described above is being executed, and the push order is executed. By winning the bell, the push order navigation of "left → right → middle" has occurred.

First, the left stop button corresponding to the first stop of the correct push order displayed in the push order navigation is operated, and the display corresponding to the first stop of the push order navigation (display of "1") is deleted. The left reel stops. Next, the right stop button corresponding to the second stop of the correct push order displayed in the push order navigation is operated, and the display corresponding to the second stop of the push order navigation (display of "2") is deleted. , The right reel stops. Next, the middle stop button corresponding to the third stop of the correct push order displayed in the push order navigation is operated, and the display corresponding to the third stop of the push order navigation (display of "3") is deleted. , The middle reel stops. Since the stop button is operated in the order of pressing the correct answer, the player is given 11 game medals with the largest number of payouts when the pressing order bell is won.

Next, "(b) push order failure (during continuous production: warp production)" will be described. Here, the push order navigation is in the "AT in progress state", which is a game state in which the navigation can be executed, and the continuous effect (warp effect) executed over the plurality of games described above is being executed, and the push order is executed. By winning the bell, the push order navigation of "left → right → middle" has occurred.

First, the left stop button corresponding to the first stop of the correct push order displayed in the push order navigation is operated, and the display corresponding to the first stop of the push order navigation (display of "1") is deleted. The left reel stops. Next, instead of the right stop button corresponding to the second stop of the correct push order displayed in the push order navigation, the middle stop button is operated, and the display corresponding to the third stop of the push order navigation ("3"). Is displayed) is erased, and the middle reel stops. After that, since the stop operation was not performed in the correct pressing order, the display of the pressing order navigation is deleted. After that, as the third stop, the right stop button is operated and the right reel is stopped. Since the stop button was not operated in the order in which the correct answer was pressed, one game medal, which is less than the 11 cards with the largest number of payouts at the time of winning the push order bell, is given to the player.

In this way, when the push order navigation is executed during the continuous production, the background effect changes regardless of whether the reels are stopped in the correct push order or the incorrect push order. It is configured so that it never happens. Although not shown, when notifying (suggesting) that the continuous production has failed in the final game of the continuous production (for example, the fact that the number of AT games has not been won) is notified (suggestion) as the notification of the result of the continuous production. Is configured to darken the background effect at any timing in the final game (for example, after the third stop operation). With this configuration, the push order navigation is executed during the execution of the continuous effect, and even if the player mistakenly operates the stop button and stops the reels in the wrong push order, the background effect is produced. By not darkening, the player can continue to pay attention to the continuous production without misunderstanding that the result of the continuous production is a failure even though the result of the continuous production is not notified.

Next, "(c) Successful push order (during discontinuous production)" will be described. Here, the game state in which the push order navigation can be executed is the "AT in progress state", and the continuous effect (warp effect) executed over the plurality of games described above is not executed, and the push is performed. By winning the order bell, the push order navigation of "left → right → middle" has occurred.

First, the left stop button corresponding to the first stop of the correct push order displayed in the push order navigation is operated, and the display corresponding to the first stop of the push order navigation (display of "1") is deleted. The left reel stops. Next, the right stop button corresponding to the second stop of the correct push order displayed in the push order navigation is operated, and the display corresponding to the second stop of the push order navigation (display of "2") is deleted. , The right reel stops. Next, the middle stop button corresponding to the third stop of the correct push order displayed in the push order navigation is operated, and the display corresponding to the third stop of the push order navigation (display of "3") is deleted. , The middle reel stops. Since the stop button is operated in the order of pressing the correct answer, the player is given 11 game medals with the largest number of payouts when the pressing order bell is won. In other words, when the stop button is operated according to the push order navigation, there is a difference in the background effect between the continuous effect and the discontinuous effect during AT, but other effect transitions (whether or not the background effect changes, etc.) ) Is the same.

Next, "(d) failure in push order (during discontinuous production)" will be described. Here, the game state in which the push order navigation can be executed is the "AT in progress state", and the continuous effect (warp effect) executed over the plurality of games described above is not executed, and the push is performed. By winning the order bell, the push order navigation of "left → right → middle" has occurred.

First, the left stop button corresponding to the first stop of the correct push order displayed in the push order navigation is operated, and the display corresponding to the first stop of the push order navigation (display of "1") is deleted. The left reel stops. Next, instead of the right stop button corresponding to the second stop of the correct push order displayed in the push order navigation, the middle stop button is operated, and the display corresponding to the third stop of the push order navigation ("3"). Is displayed) is erased, and the middle reel stops. After that, since the stop operation was not performed in the correct pressing order, the display of the pressing order navigation is erased and the background effect is dimmed. After that, as the third stop, the right stop button is operated and the right reel is stopped. Since the stop button was not operated in the order in which the correct answer was pressed, one game medal, which is less than the 11 cards with the largest number of payouts at the time of winning the push order bell, is given to the player. Even if the reels that are different from the correct push order are stopped, the push order navigation display may be continuously displayed without being erased. In such a configuration, it is preferable to configure the navigation display in the push order to be darkened together with the background effect.

In this way, in a situation where continuous production is not executed, even if the background production is darkened when the reels are stopped in a push order different from the correct answer, the player will not be misunderstood. By accurately notifying that there was an operation that is disadvantageous to the reel, the player plays the game more carefully so as not to make a mistake in the push order in the next game in which the push order navigation is executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the disadvantage of the player.

In this example, if the reels are stopped in a push order different from the push order navigation during the execution of continuous production (when the push order is incorrect), the screen does not go dark (the brightness of the screen decreases). On the other hand, if the reels are stopped in a push order different from the push order navigation (when the push order is incorrect) while the continuous production is not executed, the screen goes dark (screen). (Brightness is reduced, visibility is reduced), but is not limited to this.
(1) When the reels are stopped in a push order different from the push order navigation during the execution of continuous production (when the push order is incorrect), the reels are stopped in the correct push order (stop button). When the reels are stopped in a different push order from the push order navigation while the continuous effect is not being executed (for example, the effect in which the enemy character is defeated) is executed. If the answer is correct), a different effect (for example, an effect that the enemy character cuts) is performed, which is different from the case where the reels are stopped (the stop button is operated) in the order in which the correct answer is pressed.
(2) If the reels are stopped in a push order different from the push order navigation during execution of continuous production (when the push order is incorrect), a specific production sound is not output, but continuous production is not performed. When the reels are stopped in a push order different from the push order navigation during execution (when the push order is incorrect), a specific production sound (for example, "Awawawa" is output) is output.
(3) If the reels are stopped in a push order different from the push order navigation during the execution of the continuous effect (when the push order is incorrect), a specific effect (for example, an effect in which the screen goes dark) is performed. When a specific effect sound (for example, "Awawawa" is output) that is not executed and the reels are stopped in a press order different from the push order navigation during the execution of continuous effect (the push order is incorrect). In the case of), a specific effect is executed and a specific effect sound is output.
It may be configured as described above.

<<< Volume and BGM tempo >>>
Next, an example of the configuration of the volume output from the speaker and the tempo of the BGM applicable to this example will be described in detail below. It should be noted that the configurations exemplified below are applicable to all the embodiments exemplified in this example.

First, FIG. 190 is a diagram showing the volume of the sound output from the speaker and the tempo of the BGM. During non-AT (a state related to AT that does not execute push order navigation, for example, "low probability state"), there are four types of stay stages, a grassland stage, a desert stage, a wilderness stage, and a volcano stage, during AT. (A state related to an AT capable of executing push order navigation, for example, "AT in progress state") is provided with two types of stay stages, a lunar stage and a Saturn stage, as stay stages. In the figure, the case where only one type of BGM is output in one stay stage is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect content to be executed even in one stay stage, etc. The BGM output based on the above may be configured to be determined from a plurality of types of selection candidates. In such a configuration, the average tempo of the BGM in one stay stage may be calculated and compared for each gaming state. For example, (1) in the grassland stage, the tempo is 100 with the first BGM. When the second BGM having a tempo of 60 can be output, the average tempo is compared for each gaming state, that is, it is output, assuming that the average tempo is 80, such as (100 + 60) ÷ 2 = 80. The total tempo is divided by the number of types of BGM to calculate the average tempo, and the average tempo is compared for each game state. (2) In the grassland stage, the tempo 100 is the first BGM and the tempo is 60. When a certain second BGM can be output and the ratio of the output period of the output BGM is "first BGM: second BGM = 2: 1", (100 × 2 + 60) ÷ 3 ≈ 86.6. As described above, assuming that the average tempo is 86.6, the average tempo is compared for each gaming state, that is, the average tempo is calculated in consideration of the ratio of the output period of the output BGM, and the average tempo is calculated for each gaming state. It may be configured to compare average tempos. The ratio of the output period of the output BGM may be the ratio of the average time during which the BGM is output in one stay stage, or the selection ratio of the BGM output in one game in one stay stage. May be. Further, when there is a period (time) in which the BGM is not output, the average tempo of the period in which the BGM is output in one stay stage may be calculated and compared for each gaming state. The tempo unit shown in the figure may be the same unit, but it is, for example, BPM.

Further, the volume switch is an operation member controlled on the sub-control board S side that can be operated only by the administrator and can be operated by opening the front door, and is output from the speaker as a whole by operating the volume switch. It is possible to adjust the volume of the sound (sometimes referred to as the master volume), and the volume can be adjusted to three levels of "loud", "medium", and "low". It should be noted that the three stages are merely examples, and the volume may be adjusted in more detail by a knob that can be rotated. In addition, the volume of the sound output from the speaker can be adjusted by operating the sub input button and the cross key, which are operating members controlled on the sub control board S side that can be operated by the player. As a step, it can be adjusted to 5 steps of "level 1", "level 2", "level 3", "level 4", and "level 5" (the volume may be referred to as a sub input button volume). ). The three stages are just an example, and the volume may be adjusted in more detail. In the spinning machine according to this example, the volume output from the speaker is determined by the combination of the volume setting (step) of the volume switch and the volume setting (step) of the sub-input button volume. ing.

In FIG. 190, the tempos (average tempo) of the BGMs in the four types of stay stages during non-AT are: grassland stage: tempo 100, desert stage: tempo 90, wilderness stage: tempo 95, volcano stage: tempo 100, respectively. It has become. In addition, the two types of stay stages during AT are the moon stage: tempo 110 and the Saturn stage: tempo 120, respectively.

In addition, there is no difference in the volume of the four types of stay stages during non-AT depending on the combination of the sub input button volume and the volume switch, and when the volume switch is large, level 1:80 (unit: dB). , Level 2:82, Level 3:85, Level 4:90, Level 5:90, When the volume switch is medium, Level 1:75, Level 2:78, Level 3:80, Level 4:85, Level 5 : 88, when the volume switch is small, it is level 1: 1, level 2: 68, level 3: 70, level 4: 72, level 5:75. In addition, there is no difference in the volume of the two types of stay stages during AT depending on the combination of the sub input button volume and the volume switch, and when the volume switch is large, level 1:85, level 2:89, Level 3: 92, Level 4: 92, Level 5: 92, When the volume switch is medium, Level 1:80, Level 2: 85, Level 3: 90, Level 4: 90, Level 5:90, Volume switch When it is small, it is level 1: 1, level 2: 75, level 3: 78, level 4: 82, level 5:85.

In the event of an error, an error sound with a tempo of 80 (for example, "the door is open", "call a clerk", etc.) is output. The volume level is level 1 to 5:95 when the volume switch is large, level 1 to 5:90 when the volume switch is medium, and level 1 to 5:78 when the volume switch is small. ..

Here, comparing the stay stage during non-AT and the stay stage during AT, the tempo of BGM in the stay stage during AT is (110 + 120) ÷ 2 = 115, and the tempo in the stay stage during non-AT is The tempo of BGM is (100 + 90 + 95 + 100) ÷ 4 = 96.25, and the tempo of BGM in the stay stage during AT is relatively faster than the tempo of BGM in the stay stage during non-AT. ..

Further, at the same volume switch level (large, medium, small) and the same volume level (levels 1 to 5), the volume of the BGM in the stay stage during AT is relative to the volume of the BGM in the stay stage during non-AT. (Because they are the same or louder, the volume of the BGM during the entire AT is relatively louder than the volume of the BGM during the entire non-AT. By configuring the non-AT to have a relatively loud volume and a relatively fast tempo than during the AT, an uplifting feeling that the number of balls to be ejected increases during the AT, which is an advantageous period for the player. Also, at the time of error, an error sound is output at a slower tempo (tempo 80) than during AT or non-AT. However, the volume of the error sound is the same volume. In the case of the switch setting, it is configured to be the same as or larger than that during AT and non-AT, so that the clerk or the player of the game store can clearly recognize that the error has occurred.

The tempo and volume of the BGM during AT, non-AT, and error are illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to configure the LED lighting mode to be different. For example, when comparing during AT and during non-AT, it may be configured so that the switching interval of the LED lighting mode is shorter (LED flashes flashily) during AT, and the one during AT. Even if the number of emitted colors is likely to increase at one timing, it is possible to easily feel the uplifting feeling that the number of balls is increased during AT, which is an advantageous period for the player.

In FIG. 190, only one type of error sound is used, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the mode and volume of the error sound may be different depending on the type of error. In such a case, an error that has a great influence on the result of the game such as an unrecoverable error (a high-importance error, for example, a display determination error) is a less important error (for example, a medal). It is preferable to configure the volume so that the volume is relatively louder than the empty error).

(Sixth Embodiment)
In the above-described embodiments up to the fifth embodiment, a configuration in which a game having a common game property can be executed is illustrated regardless of the specified number, but in the sixth embodiment, the game is played with two and three specified numbers. It shows a configuration in which games of different genders can be executed. The configuration different from the fifth embodiment is defined as the sixth embodiment, and the differences from the embodiments up to the fifth embodiment are mainly described in detail below.

Next, FIG. 191 is a list of basic specifications of the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. The spinning reel type gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment has a specified number (the number of game medals in which one game can be executed) is 3 or 2, and the number of frames of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53 is any. There are also 20 frames, and the effective line for which the prize is determined is one of "left reel M51 upper row, middle reel M52 middle row, right reel M53 lower row". The maximum number of payouts is 11, and the minimum number of payouts is one (the correspondence between the winning combination and the number of payouts will be described later). In addition, the priority winning order (drawing priority order) is "replaying role-> small role (bell, watermelon, etc.)-> bonus". The configuration shown in the figure is just an example, and the number of frames on each reel can be changed (for example, changed to 21 frames), or the configuration of effective lines can be changed (for example, 5 horizontal lines and 2 diagonal lines). There is no problem even if it is changed to one line, left reel M51 lower stage, middle reel M52 middle stage, right reel M53 upper stage). In addition, as the pull-in control (sometimes called stop control) when the push order small winning combination, which gives different benefits to the player depending on the push order, is paid out when the stop operation is performed in the correct push order. Controls to stop and display the symbol combinations that have a relatively large number of sheets, and if the wrong answer is pressed in a different order from the correct answer and the stop operation is performed at a predetermined timing, the number of payouts is relatively small. It is configured to control the combination so that it can be stopped and displayed (it is realized by using the number priority control and the number priority control for each reel, but the details of the number priority control and the number priority control will be described later).

Next, FIG. 192 is a list of reel arrangements of the rotating drum type gaming machine in the sixth embodiment. As shown in the figure, the number of frames of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53 is 20 frames (0th to 19th), and the symbols are "black seven", "white seven", and " There are 10 types: "sheep", "blank", "bell", "replay A", "replay B", "watermelon A", "watermelon B", and "cherry". Here, the "blank" is a symbol included in the symbol combination constituting the winning combination like other symbols, and does not mean a symbol not constituting the winning combination, but a symbol constituting the winning combination including the "blank". As a combination, for example, "Watermelon B / Replay A / Blank" is replay 02. The configuration shown in the figure is just an example, and there is no problem even if the types of symbols are increased / decreased / changed.

Next, FIGS. 193 to 195 are a list of symbol combinations 1 to 3 in the sixth embodiment. In the sixth embodiment, a plurality of symbol combinations exist for each condition device, and as will be described later, depending on the stop order and stop position of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53, Any one of the symbol combinations is configured to be stopped and displayed on the effective line (the above-mentioned one line). Even if the same type of symbols are not aligned on the effective line, it is easy for the player to align the same symbols in a row on the line other than the effective line (in the case of watermelon, in the middle row). It is configured so that three watermelon patterns are aligned in a straight line on any of the reels, such as aligning them in a horizontal straight line). Further, in the sixth embodiment, a combination of symbols serving as a type 1 BB combination (a so-called type 1 special accessory continuous operation device, which may be simply referred to as a BB combination) is combined. Type 1 BB-A (RB-A is continuously operated and finished with a payout of more than 100 sheets) "Sheep / Sheep / Sheep" and Type 1 BB-B (RB-B is continuously operated and finished with 100 sheets) It has two symbol combinations with "Black Seven, Black Seven, Black Seven" that will end with a payout exceeding the above. In the sixth embodiment, when the first type BB combination is won and the BB is executed (the accessory is activated), during the execution of the BB, 1 in all the games in the BB. It is configured so that the winning combination (small combination) other than the winning combination can be drawn by referring to one lottery table (the table to be referred to at the time of the winning combination lottery during the execution of one BB is not switched. Hereinafter, it may be referred to as an all-JACIN type). The format of the first-class BB combination is not limited to this, and may be configured so that the table referred to at the time of the combination lottery can be switched during the execution of one BB. In addition, it may be configured to have a symbol combination in which RB-A is operated and a symbol combination in which RB-B is activated.

Further, when the push order bell, which is the condition device of "winning-A1" to "winning-A6" described later, is won, the reels are stopped in the pushing order most advantageous to the player, and the reels are 13th to 19th. The symbol combinations corresponding to "Prize 01" to "Prize 03" are stopped and displayed, and 11 game medals are paid out, while the reels are stopped in a push order different from the push order that is most advantageous for the player. , The symbol combinations corresponding to the 31st to 48th "winning 08" to "winning 11" are stopped and displayed, and one game medal is paid out. In addition, "-" in the figure indicates that any symbol may be stopped and displayed. For example, "Bell-Bell" corresponding to No. 15 is an effective line of the left reel M51 and the right reel M53. If the bell is stopped and displayed on the top, 11 game medals can be obtained regardless of which symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line of the middle reel M52.

Next, FIG. 196 is a list of condition devices according to the sixth embodiment. In the sixth embodiment, the re-game-A (winning number 1) is provided as the re-game combination, and the stop display is performed according to the stop order and stop position of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53. It is configured so that the reels can be different. Here, in the sixth embodiment, as shown in the item of "conditional apparatus breakdown" in the rightmost column, depending on the stop order and stop position of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53. It is configured so that multiple types of symbol combinations (names) can be stopped and displayed, and among the multiple types of symbol combinations (names), the symbol combinations (names) that have the same winning number are grouped together and are the third from the right. It is illustrated in the item of "conditional device" in the column of. Specifically, for example, in the "replay-A" condition device corresponding to the winning number 1, "replay" is performed according to the stop order and stop position of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53. It is configured so that three types of symbol combinations (names) of "01", "re-game 02", and "re-game 03" can be stopped and displayed. Further, "re-game 01" and the like are names of symbol combinations, and the symbol combinations that become "re-game 01" are configured so that there may be a plurality of types. In addition, a name such as "re-game 01" or a conditional device such as "re-game-A" may be referred to as a re-game role, and a name such as "winning 01" or a conditional device such as "winning-A1" may be referred to as a small. Sometimes referred to as a combination, and a conditional device such as "Type 1 BB-A" may be referred to as a BB combination.

Next, in the item of "role", what kind of role the "condition device" (or the symbol combination that can be stopped and displayed) plays is illustrated, and the "normal replay" corresponding to the winning number 1 is shown. Is a condition device related to the re-game in which the symbol combination related to the re-game combination in which the RT state does not shift is stopped and displayed regardless of the order in which the stop buttons are pressed.

Further, the "push order bell 123" to "push order bell 321" corresponding to the winning numbers 2 to 7 are conditional devices in which the winning small winning combination may differ depending on which of the six reel stop orders is used. For example, "left reel M51: 1, middle reel M52: 2, right reel M53: 3", and in the case of "123", stop in the order of pushing "left reel M51 → middle reel M52 → right reel M53". For example, in the case of "winning A-1" (winning number 2), stopping in the order of "123" = "left → middle → right" (correctly answering in the order of pressing) is the maximum number of winnings. The symbol combination that becomes "winning 01" that can acquire 11 game medals will be stopped and displayed. In addition, "123" and the like of "push order bell 123" indicate the push order (reel stop order) in which the maximum number of winning sheets in the winning number can be obtained. In addition, when the reels are stopped in a push order other than the push order in which the maximum number of sheets can be obtained, that is, if the correct answer cannot be obtained in the push order, one piece is paid out. Then, in the state related to AT such as "AT in progress", the push order of the re-game combination and the push order of the bell are navigated (the push order that gives the highest profit is displayed on the push order display device D270), and the "normal game state" is displayed. It is possible to create a plurality of gaming states in which the profit margins of the players are different, that is, the push order is not navigated to the states related to AT such as. The state related to AT will be described later.

In addition, the "common bell" corresponding to the winning number 8 is a condition device in which 6 game medals can be obtained regardless of which of the winning 04 to the winning 07 is stopped, that is, the maximum profit can be obtained regardless of the pushing order. Yes, it may be called a bell regardless of the push order. Further, the "watermelon A" corresponding to the winning number 10 is configured so that three watermelons (either watermelon A or watermelon B) can be aligned in a parallel line. For example, the 52nd prize in FIG. In No. 14, three watermelons A or B are arranged in the middle of each reel. Further, the "watermelon B" corresponding to the winning number 11 is configured so that three watermelons (either watermelon A or watermelon B) can be easily aligned on the diagonal line. For example, the 58th prize in FIG. 195 is awarded. In No. 16, three watermelons are arranged diagonally downward to the right, such as watermelon B on the upper stage of the left reel M51, watermelon B on the middle stage of the middle reel M52, and watermelon A on the lower stage of the right reel M53.

Next, in the item of "bonus winning information", numerical values from 0 to 2 are assigned to each winning number. In the sixth embodiment, the winning number that does not include the bonus (BB role) has the bonus winning information set to 0, and the winning number that includes the bonus (BB role) is the winning number (12) that includes one type BB-A. ) Bonus winning information is 1, and the bonus winning information of the winning number (13) including the first type BB-B is 2. By storing the bonus winning information in the main control board M, it is possible to store information relating to which BB is established and which BB combination is won. The details of the bonus winning information will be described later.

Next, in the item of "winning / replay winning information", numerical values from 0 to 11 are assigned to each winning number. In the sixth embodiment, the winning numbers (winning numbers 0 corresponding to the loss and winning numbers 12 and 13 corresponding to the bonus) that do not include the re-game winning combination and the small winning combination are set to 0 for the winning / re-gaming winning information. 1 to 11 winning / re-gaming winning information is distributed to each condition device for the winning number including the small winning combination or the re-gaming combination. By storing the winning / re-gaming winning information in the main control board M, it is possible to store the information relating to which small winning combination or re-gaming winning combination is won. The details of the winning / replay winning information will be described later.

Next, in the item of "effect group number", numerical values from 0 to 6 are assigned to each winning number. By transmitting the effect group number from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side, it is configured so that the effect to be executed by the sub control board S side can be determined. The details of the production group number will be described later.

Next, FIG. 197 shows a lottery probability (also referred to as a winning rate) in which the winning numbers and bonuses (also referred to as BB and BB winning combinations) relating to the small winning combination and the replaying combination in the sixth embodiment are determined by the winning combination lottery means. It is a list showing. In the figure, the lottery probability of the winning number is shown. FIG. 197 shows the case where the set value is 1, the upper part of FIG. 197 shows the lottery probability when the specified number of sheets is 3, and the lower part of FIG. 197 shows the lottery probability when the specified number of sheets is 2.

First, the lottery probability at the time of the specified number of 3 sheets shown in the upper part of FIG. 197 will be described in detail. In the sixth embodiment, the lottery probability in "RT1" excluding the condition device related to BB and the lottery probability in "RT2" are configured to be the same. In "RT1", Class 1 BB-A is configured not to win.

Next, the lottery probability in "Type 1 BB-A, B in operation", which is the RT state during BB operation (BB according to the sixth embodiment is an all JACIN type), will be described in detail. In the sixth embodiment, the "common bell" of the winning number 8 is configured to win or lose while the BB is in operation.

Next, the lottery probability when the specified number of two sheets is shown in the lower part of FIG. 197 will be described in detail. In the sixth embodiment, the lottery probability in "RT1" excluding the conditional device related to BB and the lottery probability in "RT2" are configured to be the same as in the case of the specified number of three sheets. In "RT1", only the replay-A and the winning-B and the type 1 BB-A are won, and in "RT2", only the replay-A and the winning-B are won. It is configured in.

Next, FIGS. 198 to 219 are flowcharts showing a general flow of processing performed by the main control board M in the sixth embodiment.

The flowchart is mainly composed of terminals (shown by rounded rectangles) indicating processing steps (shown by rectangles), judgments (shown by diamonds), flow lines (arrows), start / end / return, etc. ing. Further, when the details of the processing steps are shown in another flowchart, the one that refers to the other flowchart is shown as a subroutine (shown by a rectangle in which the left and right lines are double lines). .. Here, at the stage of developing a gaming machine, it is also possible to develop a gaming machine with different specifications at the same time, but in this example, a subroutine (in this example, executed by a gaming machine with different specifications) is executed in the processing on the main side. It is configured so as not to leave a subroutine (which is not normally used), and prevents processing related to an unused subroutine, which is not normally executed, from being executed due to noise or fraudulent activity.

First, FIG. 198 is a flowchart showing the flow of processing that is executed for the first time on the CPUC100 of the main control board M after the power of the spinning machine P is turned on (or at the time of system reset or user reset). .. First, in step 1000, the power of the rotating drum type gaming machine P is turned on, and then in step 1002, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the initial setting of the timer interrupt (here, the timer interrupt is started). Instead, it only sets the type of timer interrupt, and in the subsequent processing, when the timer interrupt is started, the flowchart related to the timer interrupt processing described later is periodically executed). Next, in step 1004, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes serial communication settings (speed, data length, data transmission method settings) and the like as function settings of the main control chip C. Next, in step 1006, the CPUC100 of the main control board M calculates the checksum from the start address of the RAM area to the address immediately before the checksum area. Next, in step 1008, the CPUC100 of the main control board M checks the RAM area (for example, the power is turned off and the power is turned off and restored based on the calculated checksum and the checksum data held in the checksum area. Checks whether the data stored in the built-in RAMC 120 is correctly held), and generates power-off / recovery data. Next, in step 1010, the CPUC100 of the main control board M confirms the switch state of the setting key switch M20. Next, in step 1014, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the setting key switch M20 is off.

In the case of Yes in step 1014, in step 1016, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns on / off the power off processing flag in the RAM (turns on in step 1904) and the checksum state of all RAMs (in step 1006). (Check result) is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the power supply cutoff / recovery data in the RAM is normal. In the case of Yes in step 1016, in step 1020, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes initialization of the RAM area within the determined initialization range. Next, in step 1022, the CPUC100 of the main control board M returns the stack pointer based on the data related to the stack pointer saved in the process when the power is turned off (step 1902). Next, in step 1036, the CPUC100 of the main control board M refers to the inside of the RAM area, and determines whether or not the data related to the set value in the RAM area is within the normal range (0 to 5 in this example). judge. In the case of Yes in step 1036, in step 1038, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the reading of the input port. Next, in step 1040, the CPUC100 of the main control board M starts the timer interrupt set in step 1002. Next, in step 1042, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns off the power-off processing completed flag, and returns to the processing at the time of power-off according to the returned stack pointer.

If No in step 1016, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets the backup error display (for example, sets the error number in the register area) in step 1024. Next, in step 1300, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes a non-recoverable error process described later.

If No in step 1036, in step 1046, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets a set value error display (for example, it will be displayed on the payout number display device D270) (for example, in the register area). Set to). Next, in step 1300, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes a non-recoverable error process described later.

If No in step 1014, in step 1028, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns on / off the power off processing flag in the RAM (turns on in step 1904) and the checksum state of all RAMs (step 1904). (Check result in 1006) is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the power supply cutoff / recovery data in the RAM is normal. In the case of Yes in step 1028, in step 1030, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets the initialization range of the RAM to a storage area for storing the set value (set value data) in the RAM and a storage area for storing the bonus carry-over information. It is determined and set in a predetermined range to be excluded (for example, set in the register area), and the process proceeds to step 1034. Here, the bonus carry-over information is information about the winning bonus, and is configured so that the information of the winning bonus is not initialized even if the setting is changed. Here, in the gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment, the player bets three cards on "RT2" inside the first-class BB (a specified number of three cards may be referred to as a three-card bet). (The same configuration is used in the 7th embodiment, and the details will be described later in the 7th embodiment). With this configuration, the manager of the game hall (or the manufacturer of the game machine before shipment from the factory) may bet two cards on "RT1" (a specified number of two cards may be referred to as a two-card bet). ) Is executed, and the game can be shifted to "RT2" by not stopping and displaying the symbol combination related to the type 1 BB-A in the game in which the type 1 BB-A is won. In this example, by executing the process of step 1030 (sixth), the manager of the game hall (or the manufacturer of the game machine before the factory shipment) shifts to "RT2" and then executes the setting change. Even so, it remains "RT2" and can be operated in the amusement park with an arbitrary set value. In addition, in order to make it easier for the manager of the amusement park to shift to "RT2", when the type 1 BB-A is won in "RT1", the entire effect display device S40 is displayed in white, and the frame lamp is white. It is preferable to configure the device so that it is easy to recognize that the class 1 BB-A has been won, such as turning it on. In the game in which Type 1 BB-A is won, if the left reels Nos. 4 to 16 are stopped at the lower timing as the first stop, the symbol combination related to Type 1 BB-A will not be stopped and displayed. It will shift to "RT2".

Further, the range not included in the initialization range of the RAM is not limited to the storage area for storing the set value (set value data), and the total cumulative number of games in the "advantageous section" and the total cumulative number of game sections (advantageous). Section + normal section) As a result of calculating the number of games and the stay ratio of the "advantageous section", etc. are also within the range not included in the initialization range of the RAM. With this configuration, the ratio of staying in the "advantageous section" in the game (advantageous section ratio) can be calculated and displayed. Further, the calculation process of the advantageous section ratio is configured to be calculated at the timing when the unit game ends. Further, the advantageous section ratio is displayed when the power of the gaming machine is turned on (for example, it is displayed on a 4-digit 7-segment display). As a specific display mode, it is repeated at 5 second intervals in the order of "advantageous section ratio-> continuous bonus ratio per 6000 games-> bonus ratio per 6000 games-> cumulative continuous bonus ratio-> cumulative bonus ratio". Is displayed. The continuous bonus ratio is "the number of payouts / total payouts when the RB is operating", and the bonus ratio is the "number of payouts when the RB, CB, or SB is operating". / Total number of payouts ". On the other hand, if No in step 1028, in step 1032, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the initialization range of the RAM to be a specific range including the storage area for storing the set value (set value data) in the RAM. It is set (for example, set in the register area), and the process proceeds to step 1034. Next, in step 1034, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes initialization of the RAM area within the initialization range determined in step 1030 or step 1032. Next, in step 1100, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the setting change device control process described later.

Although not shown, it is preferable that the initial value (value at the start of processing) of the temporary storage area (RAM area, etc.) mounted on the main control board M is configured so as not to be a value at which a special game is executed. (To prevent the special game from being erroneously executed when the process of determining the execution of the special game is executed due to noise or fraudulent activity immediately after the start of the program process). Further, although not shown, when a random number such as a winning random number is stored in the RAM area of the main control board M, a dedicated storage area is secured and the information related to the random number is stored in the byte. It is preferable to configure it so that only the information related to the random number is stored (other information such as various timer values is not stored) (when operating another data stored in the same 1 byte, due to noise or the like). To prevent the information related to random numbers from being rewritten).

Next, FIG. 199 is a flowchart of the setting change device control process according to the subroutine of step 1100 in FIG. 198, and is also referred to as a setting change mode. First, in step 1102, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets the stack pointer (initializes at the start address of the process). Next, in step 1104, the CPUC100 of the main control board M activates a timer interrupt. Next, in step 1106, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the set value (set value data) in the RAM area is within the normal range (0 to 5 in this example). When the set value (set value data) is managed by 1 to 6, it is necessary to perform the initialization of the RAM and return it to "1" when the set value becomes "0". Therefore, in this example, by managing the normal range of the set value (set value data) as 0 to 5, the set value (set value data) is corrected after the RAM is initialized (step 1106 and). The processing of step 1108) can be eliminated, and the processing time can be shortened and the processing capacity can be reduced. In the case of Yes in step 1106, in step 1108, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets a predetermined value (for example, 0 = the most disadvantageous value for the player) in the set value (set value data), and in step 1110. Transition. On the other hand, even if No in step 1106, the process proceeds to step 1110. Next, in step 1110, the CPUC100 of the main control board M indicates to the error display LED (for example, the payout number display device D270) that the setting change device is operating (for example, "88" for lighting all segments). Then, the set value is displayed on the setting display LED (not shown) (the display related to the set value is a numerical value obtained by adding 1 to the set value (set value data) held in the RAM), and step 1112. Move to. As described above, the payout number display device D270 is also used to notify the push order. Since it is configured in this way, for example, when a failure has occurred in a part of the 7-segment LED (there is a segment that cannot be turned on) and the push order is notified, incorrect information may be notified. possible. In order to prevent such a situation, by making the payout number display device D270 all lights up "88" while the setting change device is operating, it is possible to confirm whether or not the 7 segments are out of order, which is not possible for the player. It is possible to prevent giving profits. Further, as a configuration related to the display of the set value (set value data), the RAM for displaying the set value for storing the data obtained by adding 1 to the set value (set value data) in the storage area for storing the set value is stored. It may be configured to have an area and display a set value with reference to the storage area. Although not shown, after executing the process of step 1110, a process for transmitting a command indicating that the setting change mode has been entered is executed on the sub-control board S side.

Next, in step 1112, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the setting / reset button M30 has been switched from off to on. In the case of Yes in step 1112, in step 1114, the CPUC100 of the main control board M adds 1 to the current set value (set value data) (when the added result set value (set value data) exceeds 5). The set value (set value data) becomes 0), and the process proceeds to step 1116. Even if No in step 1112, the process proceeds to step 1116. Next, in step 1116, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the start lever D50 has been switched from off to on. If No in step 1116, the process proceeds to step 1112, and the processes of steps 1112 to 1116 are looped. In the case of Yes in step 1116, in step 1118, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the setting key switch M20 is switched from on to off. If No in step 1118, the process of step 1118 is looped. On the other hand, in the case of Yes in step 1118, in step 1120, the CPUC100 of the main control board M displays on the error display LED (not shown) that the operation of the setting change device has been completed, and displays the setting display LED (not shown). The display of the set value (set value data) is erased, and the process proceeds to the game progress control process of step 1200. Although not shown, after executing the process of step 1120, a process for transmitting a command indicating that the setting change mode is terminated is executed on the sub-control board S side.

Next, FIG. 200 is a flowchart of non-recoverable error processing according to the subroutine of step 1300 (and called in another flowchart) in FIG. 198. First, in step 1302, the CPUC100 of the main control board M prohibits interrupts (after that, the flowchart related to the timer interrupt time processing described later is not executed). Next, in step 1304, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets the output port address and the number of output ports. Next, in step 1306, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns off the output ports (0 to 6 in this example, display outputs to various LEDs and drive outputs to various motors). Next, in step 1308, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets the next port output address (by repeating this, the display output to various LEDs and the drive output to various motors are sequentially stopped). Next, in step 1310, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the output to each output port is completed. In the case of Yes in step 1310, in step 1312, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the set error display (some error has occurred when executing this process), and the process is concerned. Is repeated, and when the power supply voltage drops, a reset signal is input and the process ends. (That is, since it enters an infinite loop, it does not accept any operation that prompts it to return). If No in step 1310, the process proceeds to step 1306. The processes of steps 1306 to 1310 are processes for clearing the output to the LED / motor (however, since the external output signal is not cleared, information on the error and the game progress status when the error occurs are displayed on the hall computer side. It is possible to output to).

Next, FIG. 201 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (first sheet) according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. 199. First, in step 1202, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets the stack pointer (initializes at the start address of the process). Next, in step 1203, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets data in the RAM area required for the game (for example, the maximum number of bets, valid lines for winning, etc.). In step 1203, the data for clearing the data used in the previous game {for example, the conditional device number (winning number), the effect group number, the instruction information} (“0” for clearing the RAM address). It also includes the process of setting the data) in the RAM. It should be noted that the condition device number, the effect group number, the instruction information, and the like may not be cleared, and the number selected when the next game is executed may be overwritten. Next, in step 1204, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets the RT state (for example, “RT1” or the like) in the game (sets the RT state determined in step 1704 of FIG. 210). Next, in step 1205, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets a command (command to the sub side) related to the RT state set in step 1204. The process of setting the RT state may be executed in step 1704 of FIG. 210. Further, a command related to the RT state (command to the sub side) may be set in step 1704. Further, when the RT state is transmitted to the sub side, it is not necessary to always transmit the RT state, and the RT state may be transmitted to the sub side only when the game section is the “advantageous section”. Next, in step 1206, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets a state related to AT in the game (for example, "AT in progress state", etc.) (determined in steps 1440-3 and 14240-6 in FIG. 205). Set the state related to AT). Next, in step 1207, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets a command (command to the sub side) related to the AT set in step 1206. Further, when transmitting the state related to AT to the sub side, it is not necessary to always transmit, and the state related to AT may be transmitted to the sub side only when the game section is the “advantageous section”. Next, in step 1208, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets a game section (for example, an “advantageous section”) in the game (step 3510, step 3539, step 3542, step 3520-1 in FIG. 214). Set the determined game section). Next, in step 1208-1, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets a command (command to the sub side) related to the game section set in step 1208. Next, in step 1209, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the medal payout device H is full of game medals. Specifically, it is equipped with a medal auxiliary tank HS (details will be described later) for storing medals overflowing from the medal payout device H, and two full detection electrodes DE (details will be described later) that can enter the inside of the medal auxiliary tank HS. It is judged by the continuity / non-conduction of the current due to (if the current is conducted through the medal, it is judged to be full). If Yes in step 1209, the process proceeds to step 1218.

On the other hand, if No in step 1209, in step 1210, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns on the medal full error flag (for example, the inside of the medal full error flag area in the RAM area is updated with a value corresponding to on. ). Next, in step 1212, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the display of the error number corresponding to the medal full error with the 7-segment LED (for example, the storage display LED or the acquired number LED). Next, in step 1214, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the medal full error has been canceled (for example, the current from the two full detection electrodes provided in the medal auxiliary tank HS is non-conducting and is set / set /. Whether or not the reset button M30 is pressed) is determined. In the case of Yes in step 1214, in step 1216, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns off the medal full error flag (for example, updates the inside of the medal full error flag area in the RAM area with a value corresponding to off), and steps. Move to 1218. On the other hand, if No in step 1214, the process proceeds to step 1212. Next, in step 1218, the CPUC100 of the main control board M permits the acceptance of medal insertion (the insertion operation is automatically executed in the next game of the replaying combination), and the next process (step 1220). Process). Here, in step 1218, the blocker D100 is turned on (process for forming the medal flow path). Specifically, when the re-game combination is established in the previous game, the blocker D100 is turned on on the condition that the current storage number (credit) is less than a predetermined value (50 in this example). Execute. In other words, when the current storage number (credit) is a predetermined value, the blocker D100 is not turned on. On the other hand, if the re-game combination is not established in the previous game, the blocker D100 is uniformly turned on. With this configuration, even if the re-game combination is established, if the stored number (credit) does not reach the predetermined value, the game medal can be inserted, and the re-game combination appears. Even if the replay role (replay that pretends to be a small role: bell-bell-bell on the invalid line or a symbol combination with cherry stopped on the left reel) is stopped, the player will rhythm. You can play the game well (without feeling uncomfortable).

Next, FIG. 202 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (second sheet) according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. 201. First, in step 1220, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the game medal has not been bet or saved (credit does not exist). In the case of Yes in step 1220, in step 1221, the CPUC100 of the main control board M satisfies the set value display condition (for example, when the door switch D80 and the setting key switch M20 are all turned on, the condition is satisfied). Judge whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 1221, in step 1222, the CPUC100 of the main control board M is set to the setting display LED (not shown, but may be the payout number display device D270, the credit number display device D200, or the input number display lamp D210). The value is displayed (shifts to the setting confirmation mode), and the transition to step 1221 is performed on condition that the setting key switch M20 is turned off. When the transition condition of the setting change mode is satisfied, the process for sending a command indicating to start the setting change mode to the sub control board S side, and the setting change mode when the end condition of the setting change mode is satisfied. Is executing a process to send a command indicating that the command is to be terminated. If No in step 1220 or 1221, in step 1224, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes management related to the insertion and settlement of game medals. Next, in step 1225, the CPUC100 of the main control board M confirms the number of game medals that can be accepted. Next, in step 1226, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the blocker D100 is on. In the case of Yes in step 1226, in step 1227, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the first throwing sensor D20s or the second throwing sensor D30s is on (in the sixth embodiment, the medal is thrown in). It has two throwing sensors for detecting, and when the first throwing sensor D20s or the second throwing sensor D30s is turned on, it is determined that one game medal has been accepted). In the case of Yes in step 1227, in step 1230, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the first input sensor D20s and the second input sensor D30s are off (first input sensor D20s or second input sensor D20s). When the first throwing sensor D20s and the second throwing sensor D30s are turned off after the sensor D30s is turned on, it is determined that one received game medal has passed through the first throwing sensor D20s and the second throwing sensor D30s. ). In the case of Yes in step 1230, in step 1231, it is determined that the CPUC100 of the main control board M has accepted the insertion of one normal game medal. Although not shown, after step 1231, whether or not the CPUC100 of the main control board M has a maximum number of credits (50 in this example) and a maximum number of bets (3 in this example). If it is determined to be Yes, the blocker D100 is controlled to be off (a state in which a medal flow path is not formed). If No in step 1230, the process of step 1230 is repeated, and if No in step 1226 or 1227, the process proceeds to step 1232.

Next, in step 1232, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the settlement button D60 has been operated. In the case of Yes in step 1232, in step 1233, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not there is a remaining number of credits or a bet game medal. In the case of Yes in step 1233, in step 1234, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns on the hopper drive flag (a flag in the RAM area, which is turned on when the hopper motor H80 is being driven), and the game is played. Pay out one medal. Next, in step 1236, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is on (to detect the payout of medals in the sixth embodiment). When the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is turned on, it is determined that one game medal is being paid out). If Yes in step 1236, the process proceeds to step 1247. Here, although not specified in the flowchart, if the previous game was a re-game, only the remaining number of credits will be subject to settlement.

On the other hand, if No in step 1236, in step 1241, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the hopper was driven (after the timing of the processing in step 1234). .. Specifically, did the situation in which it was determined that the medal was not paid out continued for a predetermined time even though the hopper drive signal was transmitted to the hopper motor H80 (the hopper motor H80 is rotating)? Judge whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 1241, in step 1242, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns on the medal empty error flag (for example, the inside of the medal empty error flag area is updated with a value corresponding to on). Next, in step 1244, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes a medal empty error display. Next, in step 1245, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the medal empty error has been canceled (for example, whether or not the setting / reset button M30 has been pressed). In the case of Yes in step 1245, in step 1246, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns off the medal empty error flag (for example, updates the inside of the medal empty error flag area in the RAM area with a value corresponding to off), and steps. Move to 1247. On the other hand, if No in step 1245, the process proceeds to step 1244.

Next, in step 1247, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s are off (the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is turned on). When the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s are turned off, it is determined that the payout operation of one game medal in which the payout operation has been performed is completed). In the case of Yes in step 1247, in step 1248, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns off the hopper drive flag and proceeds to step 1233. If No in step 1241 or 1247, the process proceeds to step 1236.

On the other hand, if No in step 1232 or step 1233, the start lever D50 is effective for the CPUC100 of the main control board M in step 1251 (for example, a predetermined number of game medals for starting the game have been inserted, etc.). ), And it is determined whether or not the start lever D50 has been operated. In the case of Yes in step 1251, in step 1253, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the set value in the RAM area is within the normal range (0 to 5 in this example). In the case of Yes in step 1253, in step 1254, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes a process of acquiring a random number and turning off the blocker D100, and then proceeds to the next process (process of step 3600). On the other hand, if No in step 1253, in step 1256, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets the set value error display (for example, the error number is set in the register area). Next, in step 1300, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes an unrecoverable error process. If No in step 1251, the process proceeds to step 1220.

Next, FIG. 203 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (third sheet) according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. 201. First, in step 3600, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes an internal lottery execution process, which will be described later.

Next, in step 1292-1, the CPUC100 of the main control board M reduces the specified number related to this game from the counter value of the difference number counter. In this step 1292-1, the counter value of the difference number counter is also subtracted even at the start of the game after the automatic bet after the re-game symbol is stopped and displayed.

Here, the difference number counter is a counter for measuring the maximum increase number (acquired number) of game medals in the advantageous section where the advantageous section ends. The maximum increase in the number of game medals in an advantageous section is from the player's point of view, from the state where the number of game medals obtained is the smallest in one continuous advantageous section to the state where the number of game medals is the largest. Is the increased number of medals. For example, a maximum of 50 game medals have decreased as medals held since the transition to the advantageous section (50 more game medals bet on the game machine than the game medals paid out by the game machine), and then the medals held When the number of medals is increased by 1000, the counter value of the difference number counter is 1000, and the number of game medals increased from the time when the player shifts to the advantageous section as a medal possessed by the player is "1000-50 = 950". There is. In this case, "1000" (the counter value of the difference counter is also 1000) is the maximum increase in the number of game medals in the advantageous section. In this example, when the maximum number of game medals increased in the advantageous section (sometimes referred to as the number of game values acquired in the advantageous section, the maximum number of increased numbers, etc.) reaches 2400, the advantageous section is determined. It is configured to be forced to terminate. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the game medals from being paid out more than expected in a short period of time.

Next, in step 1400, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the AT state transition control process described later. Next, in step 1450, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the condition device number management process described later.

Next, in step 1550, the CPUC100 of the main control board M starts the rotation of all reels, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 1261-1. Next, in step 1261-1, the CPUC100 of the main control board M is requested to determine the stop position of the pull-in point creation request (rotating left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53, and the stop order is It is determined whether or not there is a request as appropriate depending on the stop position of other reels. In the case of Yes in step 1261-1, in step 1262, the CPUC100 of the main control board M creates a pull-in point and proceeds to step 1263. On the other hand, even if No in step 1261-1, the process proceeds to step 1263. In this way, in the "BB internal reeling game", in the game in which the push order bell was won, the stop buttons were not stopped in the correct push order of 11 payouts (for example, in the case of winning-A1). Even if the stop button is not stopped in the order of "left → middle → right" (when the reels are stopped in the order of pressing incorrect answers), 11 symbol combinations will be paid out by the reel stop control. It is configured to win a prize. Next, in step 1263, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes a reel stop acceptance / rejection check. Next, in step 1264, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not any of the stop buttons (left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, right stop button D43) has been operated. In the case of Yes in step 1264, in step 1265, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the stop position of the reel corresponding to the operated stop button (for example, the left reel M51 corresponds to the left stop button D41). .. On the other hand, even if No in step 1264, the process proceeds to step 1266. Next, in step 1266, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the all reel stop check process. Next, in step 1267, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not all the reels (left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) have stopped. In the case of Yes in step 1267, in step 1268, the CPUC100 of the main control board M compares the symbol stop position data in the RAM with the internal winning combination stoptable position data. Next, in step 1269, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the combination of the displayed symbols is normal (abnormal if it does not match the winning combination determined by the internal lottery). Is determined to be). The determination of whether or not the combination of the displayed symbols in step 1269 is normal determines whether or not the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button is normally completed, and the winning combination is won. In the game being played, when the operation of the stop button is executed in an operation mode in which the winning combination can win, the reel position actually stopped is not normal (the winning determined by the internal lottery becomes possible). Even if the winning combination is not displayed as a stop from the appearance of the player), if the reel stop control is normally executed by the processing inside the gaming machine, the game medal based on the winning combination of the winning combination will be awarded. The payout is configured to be performed. If Yes in step 1269, the process proceeds to step 1274. On the other hand, if No in step 1269, in step 1270, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets the display determination error display (for example, it is set in the register area). Next, in step 1300, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes an unrecoverable error process. On the other hand, if No in step 1267, the process proceeds to step 1261-1.

Next, in step 1274, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes a game medal payout process by winning a prize. Next, in step 1275, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not there is a prize for paying out the game medal {the game medal obtained by the prize exceeds the maximum number of credits (50 in this example). If so, the game medal will be paid out}. In the case of Yes in step 1275, in step 1276, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns on the hopper drive flag (the flag that is turned on when driving the hopper motor H80), and executes the payout of one game medal. .. Next, in step 1277, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is on (the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is on). Then, it is determined that one game medal is being paid out). If Yes in step 1277, the process proceeds to step 1286.

On the other hand, if No in step 1277, in step 1279, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the hopper was driven (after the timing of the processing in step 1276). .. In the case of Yes in step 1279, in step 1280, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns on the medal empty error flag (for example, the inside of the medal empty error flag area in the RAM area is updated with a value corresponding to on). Next, in step 1281, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the medal empty error display with the 7-segment LED. Next, in step 1282, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the medal empty error has been canceled (for example, whether or not the setting / reset button M30 has been pressed). In the case of Yes in step 1282, in step 1283, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns off the medal empty error flag (for example, updates the inside of the medal empty error flag area in the RAM area with a value corresponding to off) and steps. Move to 1286. On the other hand, if No in step 1282, the process proceeds to step 1281.

Next, in step 1286, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s are off (the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is turned on). When the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s are turned off, it is determined that the payout operation of one game medal in which the payout operation has been performed is completed). In the case of Yes in step 1286, in step 1288, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns off the hopper drive flag and proceeds to step 1290. If No in step 1279 or step 1286, the process proceeds to step 1277. Next, in step 1290, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the payout corresponding to the prize (the prize that became Yes in step 1275) is completed. In the case of Yes in step 1290, the process proceeds to step 3400. If No in step 1286, the process proceeds to step 1277, if No in step 1275, the process proceeds to step 3400, and if No in step 1290, the process proceeds to step 1276.

Next, in step 3400, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the remaining game number management process, which will be described later. Next, in step 1700, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the RT state transition control process described later. Next, in step 1750, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the AT state start control process described later. Next, in step 3500, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the game section transition control process described later. Next, in step 1293, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes a game end process (for example, clearing the number of bets, transition process of the game state, etc.), and shifts to the next process (process of step 1202).

Next, FIG. 204 is a flowchart of the internal lottery execution process according to the subroutine of step 3600 of FIG. 203 in the sixth embodiment. First, in step 3602, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets an internal lottery table (a table used when executing an internal lottery in which a winning number, a set number for comparison with a acquired random number, etc. are stored). Then, the process proceeds to step 3604. Next, in step 3604, the CPUC100 of the main control board M acquires the winning number related to the set internal lottery table address. It should be noted that the winning / replay winning information can be generated from the winning number. In addition, if the bonus and the small winning combination are won in duplicate, or if the bonus and the replaying combination are won in duplicate, both the winning / replaying winning information and the bonus winning information are obtained from the winning number. Winning information can be generated. The specific generation process will be described later. Next, in step 3606, the CPUC100 of the main control board M acquires the number of repetitions related to the set internal lottery table address. Here, the number of repetitions is the number of consecutive winning numbers having the same set number for comparison with the acquired random numbers, and is stored in advance in the ROM of the main control board M.

Next, in step 3610, the CPUC100 of the main control board M acquires the set value data. Next, in step 3612, the CPUC100 of the main control board M acquires the designated address data. Next, in step 3614, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the internal lottery has been won (whether or not the acquired random number exists in the internal lottery table searched this time). In the case of Yes in step 3614, since it is determined that the internal lottery has been won, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1259) without executing the determination (lottery) for the subsequent internal lottery table address. On the other hand, if No in step 3614, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M updates the number of repetitions in step 3616. Next, in step 3618, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not there is a remaining number of repetitions. In the case of Yes in step 3618, the process proceeds to step 3610, and the processes of steps 3610 to 3618 are repeatedly executed until the remaining number of repetitions is exhausted or the internal lottery is won. If No in step 3618, in step 3620, the CPUC100 of the main control board M updates the internal lottery table address, proceeds to step 3604, and executes the processes after step 3604. The specific processing of the internal lottery will be described later.

Next, FIG. 205 is a flowchart of the AT state transition control process according to the subroutine of step 1400 of FIG. 203 in the sixth embodiment. First, in step 1440-1, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the game section is a normal section.

In step 1440-1, in the case of Yes, in step 1440-2, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the condition device related to the game is a condition device capable of executing the advantageous section lottery. In the process of step 1440-2, the determination is made by the condition devices listed in the column of the condition devices of the game in the table on the left side of FIG. 206.

In step 1440-2, in the case of Yes, in step 1440-3, the CPUC100 of the main control board M refers to the low probability advantageous section lottery table (table on the left side of FIG. 206), executes the advantageous section lottery, and executes the advantageous section lottery. The state related to the AT of the next game is determined, and the process is moved to step 1440-7. If the result is No in step 1440-2, the process is immediately moved to step 1440-7.

In step 1440-1 described above, if No, in step 1440-4, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the state related to AT is a high probability state. Here, the high-probability state includes both the high-probability state A and the high-probability state B.

In step 1440-4, in the case of Yes, in step 1440-5, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the condition device related to the game is a condition device capable of executing the advantageous section lottery. In the process of step 1440-4, the determination is made by the condition devices listed in the column of the condition devices of the game in the table on the right side of FIG. 206.

In step 1440-5, in the case of Yes, in step 1440-6, the CPUC100 of the main control board M refers to the high-accuracy advantageous section lottery table (table on the right side of FIG. 206), executes the advantageous section lottery, and executes the advantageous section lottery. The state related to the AT of the next game is determined, and the process is moved to step 1440-7. If the result is No in steps 1440-4 and 1440-5, the process is immediately transferred to step 1440-7.

In step 1440-7, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the state related to the AT of the next game has been determined.

In step 1440-7, in the case of Yes, in step 1440-8, the CPUC100 of the main control board M of the next game is based on the state related to the AT of the game, the condition device related to the game, and the current game situation. A candidate for the state related to AT is determined, and the process proceeds to the next process.

FIG. 206 is a diagram showing a low probability advantageous section table (left) and a high probability advantageous section table (right). The low probability advantageous section table is referred to in the process of step 1440-3 of FIG. 205 described above, and the high probability advantageous section table is referred to in the process of step 1440-5 of FIG. 205. The low probability advantageous section table and the high probability advantageous section table are tables for determining the state related to AT after the next game by lottery processing according to the conditional device won in the game. The distributions in the low-probability advantageous section table (left) and the high-probability advantageous section table (right) indicate the number when the denominator is 65536.

The low probability advantageous section table is configured as follows. The low-probability state is a normal section, and the high-probability state and the AT-during state are advantageous sections. When one type BB-A or one type BB-B is won in the game, the state related to AT after the next game shifts to the high probability state at 40,000 / 65536, and the state related to AT after the next game is 25536 /. It is configured to be in a low probability state at 65536. When the type 1 BB-A or the type 1 BB-B is won, it is configured so that the transition to the high probability state is easier than the low probability state. In this example, it is a normal section (low probability state) and is non-internal (a state in which the winning of the bonus is not carried over, RT1), and is a type 1 BB-A (or a type 1 BB-B). ), It is configured to execute an advantageous section transition lottery (a lottery for whether or not to newly shift to an advantageous section in a normal section is called an advantageous section transition lottery). On the other hand, the same random number as the random number that is in the normal section (low probability state) and is won by the type 1 BB-A (or the type 1 BB-B) in the inside of the type 1 BB (RT2) is acquired as a result of the internal lottery. In that case, the same stop control as in the case of losing in RT2 is taken, and since the BB is not newly won, the advantageous section transition lottery is not executed. Since it is configured in this way, it is a normal interval (low probability state) and non-internal (bonus winning) by the amount of the random number that the 1st class BB-A (or the 1st class BB-B) wins. Is not carried over, RT1) is a normal section (low probability state), and it is easier to win the advantageous section transition lottery (easier to shift to the advantageous section) than in the inside of Type 1 BB (RT2). ) Is configured.

In addition, when the watermelon A (winning-D) is won in the game, the state related to AT after the next game shifts to the high probability state at 33000/65536, shifts to the AT in-probability state at 2536/65536, and reaches 30,000 /. It is configured to maintain a low probability state at 65536. In this way, when the watermelon A is won, it is configured so that it is easier to shift to the high probability state or maintain the low probability state than to shift to the AT state, and maintain the transition probability to the high probability state and the low probability state. The probability of doing so is almost equal.

Further, when the watermelon B (winning-E) is won in the game, the state related to AT after the next game is configured to shift to the high probability state at 53000/65536 and to the AT middle state at 12536/65536. Has been done. As described above, when the watermelon B is won, it is configured so that it is easier to shift to the high probability state than in the AT state.

In addition, when the cherry (winning-C) is won in the game, the state related to AT after the next game shifts to the high probability state at 1536/65536, shifts to the AT in progress state at 4000/65536, and 60000/65536. Is configured to maintain a low probability state. As described above, when the cherry is won, the probability of maintaining the low probability state is the highest, then it is easy to shift to the AT state, and it is the most difficult to shift to the high probability state.

In addition, when the normal replay (replay-A) is won in the game, the state related to AT after the next game shifts to the high probability state at 536/655536 and maintains the low probability state at 65000/65536. It is configured.

The high-accuracy advantageous section table is configured as follows. The high-probability advantageous section table is a lottery for whether or not to shift from a high-probability state, which is an advantageous section, to a state related to an advantageous section and another AT (for example, an AT lottery for shifting to a state during AT). It is a table to be referred to when executing. When the type 1 BB-A or the type 1 BB-B is won in the high probability state, the state related to the AT after the next game is configured to be 65536/65536, which is a high probability state. That is, when the type 1 BB-A or the type 1 BB-B is won, the AT lottery is not won.

In addition, when watermelon A (winning-D) is won in the game, the state related to AT after the next game is configured to maintain a high probability state at 33000/65536 and shift to the AT state at 32536/65536. Has been done.

In addition, when the watermelon B (winning-E) is won in the game, the state related to AT after the next game is configured to maintain a high probability state at 23000/42536 and shift to the AT state at 32536/65536. Has been done. As described above, when the watermelon B is won, it is configured so that it is easier to shift to the AT state than to maintain the high probability state.

When the cherry (winning-C) is won in the game, the state related to AT after the next game is configured to shift to the AT in-progress state at 65536/65536. That is, when the cherry is won, it is configured to always shift to the AT state.

When the normal replay (replay-A) is won in the game, the state related to AT after the next game is configured to maintain a high probability state at 65536/65536. That is, when a normal replay is won, it is configured to maintain a high probability state.

Next, FIG. 207 is a flowchart of the condition device number management process according to the subroutine of step 1450 of FIG. 203 in the sixth embodiment. First, in step 1451, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current gaming section is an “advantageous section”. In the case of Yes in step 1451, in step 1452, the CPUC100 of the main control board M is a command related to winning / replay winning information (a command on the sub control board S side, for example, winning / replay winning related to the game). Set the command related to information). Next, in step 1454, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the game is a game that executes an instruction. In the case of Yes in step 1454, in step 1458, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines an instruction number (also referred to as a push order number) in the game based on the winning / replay winning information related to the game, and gives an instruction. It is stored in the RAM address for storing the number (an address different from the RAM address for displaying the push order navigation). The instruction number is information related to the pressing order, and in this example, the main control board M is determined and transmitted to the sub control board S (details will be described later). Further, the sub-control board S can display the push order navigation on the effect display device S40 by receiving the instruction number. It should be noted that the instruction number is determined even when the push order navigation is not executed (although not shown, the instruction number becomes the initial value based on clearing the instruction number). When the push order guessing game is executed, a predetermined instruction number (for example, AX) dedicated to the push order guessing game may be determined. Next, in step 1460, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the push order navigation display on the push order display device D270 based on the instruction number related to the game. Next, in step 1466, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets a command (command to the sub side) related to the instruction number determined in step 1458 (for example, sets it in the register area), and proceeds to step 1472. .. In this example, displaying the reel stop order that is most profitable to the player on the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 is referred to as a push order navigation, a push order navigation display, and the like. ing. In the sixth embodiment, the push order navigation is displayed based on the instruction number. For example, the push order of "left → middle → right" is displayed as "= 1" on the push order display device D270. It is configured to display "= 1" in both the push order bell and the push order replay. In addition, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the case of displaying the push order navigation of "left → middle → right" on the push order display device D270 in the game related to the push order bell, and in the game related to the push order replay game, " The display mode may be different from the case where the push order navigation of "left → middle → right" is displayed on the push order display device D270. That is, the number of types of the push order navigation display mode displayed on the push order display device D270 may be the same as the number of types of winning / replay winning information.

If No in step 1451 or 1454, in step 1468, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes mask processing on the winning / replay winning information of the game, and the masked information is used as the predetermined address of the RAM. Remember in. Here, when the winning / replay winning information related to the game is transmitted to the sub-control board S side, if the winning / replay winning information is recognized due to an illegal act, it is considered to be a high profit related to the game. The push order (reel stop order) will be recognized. Therefore, in this example, the sub-control board S is executed after performing mask processing {processing for concealing winning / replay winning information (especially information related to the push order)} for the winning / replay winning information related to the game. By configuring it to send to, it is configured so that the highly profitable push order cannot be recognized. As the mask processing method in the sixth embodiment, a plurality of winning / replay winning information (winning / replay winning information having a similar role is preferable, and the number of payouts differs depending on the pushing order, for example. It is configured to transmit the effect group number to the sub-control board S side with a plurality of winning / replay winning information) that can be stopped and displayed as a possible push order bell symbol combination as one effect group number. The method of mask processing is not limited to this, and for example, a new winning / replay winning information after mask processing may be provided after the provided winning / replay winning information. good. Even in such a case, a plurality of winning / replay winning information among the existing winning / replay winning information such as the production group number can be used as one winning / replay winning information for winning / replaying after mask processing. It is desirable to configure the game winning information to be provided. If it is determined that the game is to notify the operation information (push order navigation) based on the state related to AT on the main control board M, the winning / re-game winning information is transmitted to the sub control board S side. In a game that does not notify the operation information, the effect group number may be transmitted to the sub control board S side. When configured in this way, the command related to the instruction number may be transmitted to the sub-control board S side, or may be configured not to be transmitted.

Next, in step 1470, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets a command (command to the sub side) related to the effect group number after executing the mask processing (for example, sets it in the register area), and then steps. Move to 1472. Next, in step 1472, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets a command (command to the sub side) related to the bonus winning information (whether or not the bonus is won can be recognized by the sub side) (for example,). (Set in the register area), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1550). In the sixth embodiment, the winning / replay winning information and the bonus winning information are derived from the winning number, but the derivation method will be described later. As described above, in the sixth embodiment, when the game section is an "advantageous section", the winning / re-game winning information (type of winning combination and the most advantageous pushing order for the player) is sent to the sub-control board S side. While it is configured to be able to transmit (a number that can specify) and an instruction number (a number that can specify the most advantageous push order for the player), when the game section is a "normal section", the sub-control board It is configured so that the effect group number (a number that can identify only the outline of the winning combination) can be transmitted to the S side. That is, in the "advantageous section", the winning / re-gaming winning information related to the game, including the winning / re-gaming winning information in which the result of the game and the profit of the player differ depending on the pushing order, is used as it is on the sub-control board S side. On the other hand, in a game section that is not an "advantageous section", the winning / replay winning information related to the game is not transmitted, and the result of the game and the profit of the player differ depending on the pushing order. In the case of winning information, it is configured to transmit the effect group number concealing the information related to the push order to the sub-control board S side.

When the game section is not an "advantageous section", mask processing is executed when the winning / re-game winning information determined by the main control board M is transmitted to the sub control board S to determine the effect group number. Then, the effect group number is configured to be transmitted to the sub-control board S. In addition, the production group number is the winning / replay winning information related to the winning combination (for example, the replaying role including the falling replaying role, the push order bell, etc.) having the same role. Are grouped and numbers are assigned. It is configured to execute mask processing {processing to keep the winning / replay winning information (especially information related to the push order) confidential} on the winning / replay winning information related to the game, and then send it to the sub-control board S. This prevents a situation in which the information related to the winning / replay winning information is recognized due to an illegal act, and the pushing order (reel stop order) that is highly profitable related to the game is recognized.

Next, FIG. 208 is a flowchart of the reel rotation start preparation process according to the subroutine of step 1550 of FIG. 203 in the sixth embodiment. First, in step 1552, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the timer value of the game interval minimum time timer M70 (subtraction timer) is 0. Here, the game interval minimum time timer M70 is a time (4.1 seconds in this example) that should be secured from a certain game start timing (reel rotation start timing) to the next game start timing (reel rotation start timing). It is a timer to measure. In the case of Yes in step 1552, in step 1554, the CPUC100 of the main control board M newly sets the timer value of the game interval minimum time timer M70 to the minimum time (4.1 seconds in this example) and starts. On the other hand, if No in step 1552, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes an infinite loop process. Next, in step 1556, the CPUC100 of the main control board M clears the information related to the reel stop order and the information related to the push order related to the finished game. Next, in step 1558, the CPUC100 of the main control board M clears the information related to the reel stop related to the finished game and the pull-in point creation request. Next, in step 1560, the CPUC100 of the main control board M initializes the symbol stop position data related to the finished game. Next, in step 1562, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets an output request during reel rotation start standby related to the game. Next, in step 1564, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets a reel control command related to the game. Next, in step 1566, the CPUC100 of the main control board M updates the reel drive state from the reel stop state to the reel rotation start standby state, and shifts to the next process (process of step 1260). In other words, by the processing of steps 1562 to 1566, a command for indicating that the reel starts rotating can be transmitted to the sub-control board S.

Next, FIG. 209 is a flowchart of the remaining game number management process according to the subroutine of step 3400 of FIG. 203 in the sixth embodiment. First, in step 3402, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current gaming section is an “advantageous section”. The details will be described later, but the "advantageous section" is one of the game sections, and the game situation is advantageous for the player, such as when the state related to AT is "AT in progress state". It is a game section that is easy to set in. In the case of Yes in step 3402, in step 3404, the CPUC100 of the main control board M initially has 1500, which is the number of games remaining in the advantageous section counter YKc-1 (the decrement counter, which is the maximum number of games that can stay in the "advantageous section". The counter value of the counter (counter that is set as a value and can be subtracted every game in the "advantageous interval") is subtracted by 1.

Next, in step 3408, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state related to AT is the “AT in progress state”. In the case of Yes in step 3408, in step 3410, the CPUC100 of the main control board M subtracts 1 from the AT counter value. Next, in step 3430, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the state related to the AT is a high probability state. In the case of Yes in step 3430, in step 3432, the CPUC100 of the main control board M subtracts 1 from the counter value of the high securing failure counter KHc, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 3433). Even if No in step 3402, step 3408 or step 3430, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 3433).

Next, in step 3433, the CPUC100 of the main control board M adds the number of payouts related to the current game to the counter value of the difference number counter. If there is no payout in the game (when neither the small role nor the replay is stopped and displayed), it is not added to the counter value of the difference number counter. In addition, the counter value of the difference number counter is also added when the automatic bet is executed after the re-game symbol is stopped and displayed. As for the timing of executing the counter value addition processing of the difference number counter when the symbol combination related to the re-game is stopped and displayed, the symbol combination related to the re-game is stopped before the symbol combination related to the re-game is stopped and displayed. After the display, it may be before the execution timing of the automatic bet related to the re-game, and so on.

Next, in step 3434, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the counter value of the difference number counter is less than 0.

In the case of Yes in step 3434, in step 3435, the CPUC100 of the main control board M corrects the counter value of the difference number counter to 0, and proceeds to the next process. If No in step 3434, the process immediately proceeds to the next process.

When the counter value of the difference number counter becomes less than 0 as in the above-mentioned processing, it is corrected to 0 at the end of the game, so that an erroneous process is executed by the difference number counter or the value of the difference number counter. Can be prevented from being misjudged and the difference number counter can be kept in an appropriate state. Further, as described above, when the maximum increase number of game medals in the advantageous section reaches 2400, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated, but the game is played after shifting to the advantageous section. Since there is a possibility that the number of medals held by the player may decrease, the amount of game medals inserted into the game machine is subtracted from the counter value of the difference number counter, and the amount of game medals paid out from the game machine is the counter value of the difference number counter. When the counter value of the difference number counter reaches 2400, which is the end of the advantageous section, if it is configured so that it is not corrected to 0 even if the counter value of the difference number counter becomes less than 0. Since the maximum increase number of game medals in the advantageous section may exceed 2400 (for example, 2500), the counter value of the difference number counter is 2400 by configuring to execute the above zero correction. Reaching is synonymous with reaching 2400 for the maximum increase in the number of game medals in the advantageous section, and the advantageous section may be terminated when the counter value of the difference number counter reaches 2400. It is possible to reduce the burden of processing related to the measurement of the maximum increase in the number of game medals in the above.

Next, FIG. 210 is a flowchart of the RT state transition control process according to the subroutine of step 1700 in FIG. 203 in the sixth embodiment. First, in step 1702, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the RT state transition enable condition is satisfied in the game. Here, in the sixth embodiment, the RT state transitionable condition is configured to be satisfied by the execution of RAM clear (RAM initialization) and the winning / starting / ending of BB. In the case of Yes in step 1702, in step 1704, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not RT state transition is possible and the RT state after the next game based on the satisfied RT state transition enable condition (RT state transition in FIG. 211). (See the figure), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1750). Even if No in step 1702, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1750). In the sixth embodiment, the RT state transition control process is executed after all reels are stopped, but when shifting to "RT2", the shift timing may be shifted when the lever is turned on. The timing for shifting the RT state (storing the RT number in the RAM) can be appropriately determined. As a specific example, it shifts to "RT2" (inside the inside of the type 1 BB-A) when the start lever related to the game in which the type 1 BB-A (condition device related to the type 1 BB-A) is won in the "RT1" is turned on. It may be configured to do so.

Next, FIG. 211 is an RT state transition diagram in the sixth embodiment. In the sixth embodiment, there are three RT states of "RT1" to "RT2" and "Type 1 BB-A, B in operation", and RT is satisfied by satisfying the conditions shown by the arrows in the figure. The state will shift.

As a specific example of transition to the RT state, the transition to "RT1" is performed when the RAM initialization is executed or when the operation of the first type BB-A, B is completed.

When the RT state is "RT1", the condition device related to the type 1 BB-A, B is activated, and when the symbol combination related to the type 1 BB-A, B is not stopped and displayed, the process shifts to "RT2". .. Further, when the RT state is "RT1" and the type 1 BB-A or the type 1 BB-B is operated, the process shifts to "type 1 BB-A, B in operation".

When the RT state is "RT2", the condition device related to type 1 BB-A, B is activated, and when the symbol combination related to type 1 BB-A, B is stopped and displayed, type 1 BB-A or type 1 is displayed. BB-B is activated, and the RT state shifts to "Type 1 BB-A, B in operation".

When the RT state is "Type 1 BB-A, B is in operation" and the operation of Type 1 BB-A or Type 1 BB-B is completed, the process shifts to "RT1".

Next, FIG. 212 is a flowchart of the AT state start control process according to the subroutine of step 1750 of FIG. 203 in the sixth embodiment. First, in step 1752, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the AT state transitionable condition is satisfied in the game. The AT state transitionable condition is satisfied, for example, when the AT lottery is won. In the case of Yes in step 1756, in step 1754, the CPUC100 of the main control board M is the number of AT initial games (in this example, it is 100, and the number of games for which subtraction is started after shifting to the "AT in progress state"). Is set in the AT counter M60, and the process proceeds to step 1756. Even if No in step 1756, the process proceeds to step 1756. Next, in step 1756, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state related to AT is a high probability state. In the case of Yes in step 1756, in step 1758, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the state related to the AT of the next game is a high probability state. In the case of Yes in step 1758, in step 1760, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets the number of high-securing obstacle games (10 in this example) in the high-securing obstacle counter, and performs the next processing (processing of step 3500). Transition. Even if No in step 1756 or step 1758, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 3500).

Next, FIG. 213 is an AT state transition diagram in the sixth embodiment. In the sixth embodiment, "low probability state A", "high probability state A", "AT in progress state A", "low probability state B", "high probability state B", "AT in progress state B", " There are seven AT-related states of "in BB", and the state related to AT shifts when the conditions shown by the arrows in the figure are satisfied.

When inside the BB, it is in one of the "low probability state A", "high probability state A", and "AT in progress state A". Further, when it is in the non-internal state, it becomes one of the "low probability state B", the "high probability state B", and the "AT in progress state B". Further, the above-mentioned "low probability state A" and "low probability state B" are normal sections, and are "high probability state A", "AT in progress state A", "high probability state B", and "AT in progress state B". "And" in BB "are advantageous sections. When the BB is operating and the state related to AT is "in BB" and the condition for ending the advantageous section is satisfied (for example, the counter value of the number of remaining games in the advantageous section is 0, the difference number). When the counter value reaches 2400, when an arbitrary condition is satisfied, etc., the details of the arbitrary condition will be described later), it is supplemented that the transition to the normal section is performed even during the BB operation. Keep it.

When the transition to the high probability state is won in the advantageous section lottery in the "low probability state A", the transition to the "high probability state A" is performed. When the AT lottery is won in the "low probability state A", the process shifts to the "AT in progress state A".

When the number of guaranteed games, for example, 10 games is exhausted in the "high probability state A", the game returns to the "low probability state A". Further, when the transition to the AT in progress state is won in the advantageous section transition lottery in the "high probability state A", the transition to the "AT in progress state A" is performed.

When the advantageous section ends in the "AT in progress state A", the process returns to the "low probability state A".

When the transition to the high probability state is won in the advantageous section lottery in the "low probability state B", the transition to the "high probability state B" is performed. When the AT lottery is won in the "low probability state B", the process shifts to the "AT in progress state B".

When the number of guaranteed games, for example, 10 games is exhausted in the "high probability state B", the game returns to the "low probability state B". Further, when the transition to the AT in progress state is won in the advantageous section transition lottery in the "high probability state B", the transition to the "AT in progress state B" is performed.

When the advantageous section ends in the "AT in-probability state B", the process returns to the "low probability state A".

Further, as described above, the "low probability state A", the "high probability state A", and the "AT in-probability state A" are the BB internal medium states, and when the BB is activated while the BB internal medium state is in effect. , Move to "in BB". Further, the "low probability state B", the "high probability state B", and the "AT in-probability state B" are non-internal middle states, and when they are in the non-internal middle state, they become BB (sometimes referred to as a bonus). If the symbol combination related to BB is stopped and displayed in the winning game, the process shifts to "in BB".

In this example, the lottery for shifting to the advantageous section is executed by winning the condition device related to the bonus, and when the bonus is won in the non-internal, it is configured to be able to shift to the advantageous section. For example, if the bonus is won in the low probability state B and the symbol combination related to the bonus is not stopped and displayed, it is configured to be able to shift to the high probability state A inside the BB.

Next, FIG. 214 is a flowchart of the game section transition control process according to the subroutine of step 3500 of FIG. 203 in the sixth embodiment. First, in the sixth embodiment, the game section is provided as a section related to the state of the game, and the game section is a "normal section" which is relatively low profit for the player and a relatively low profit for the player. It has two game sections, an "advantageous section", which is a highly profitable section. As a description of the flowchart, first, in step 3508, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the game section related to the game is a “normal section”.

In the case of Yes in step 3508, in step 3510, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the game section after the next game as the game section corresponding to the current AT-related state and the current game situation, and proceeds to step 3540. do. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3508, in other words, when the game section is an "advantageous section", in step 3514, the CPUC100 of the main control board M has a counter value of 0 in the game number counter YKc-1 remaining in the advantageous section. Whether or not, in other words, whether or not the "advantageous section" has reached the maximum number of games that can be continued is determined.

In the case of Yes in step 3514, the CPUC100 of the main control board M clears the counter value of the number of remaining games in the advantageous section to zero in step 3536, clears the difference number counter value to zero in step 3537, and displays the advantageous section in step 3538. The lighting flag (sometimes referred to as a lighting flag) is turned off, and in step 3539, the advantageous section flag is turned off, all the information regarding the advantageous section is cleared, and the process is transferred to step 3540 described later. As described above, in the sixth embodiment, when the advantageous section ends (when shifting to the normal section), "the counter value of the number of games remaining in the advantageous section is cleared (clearing process related to the counter of the number of games remaining in the advantageous section)". → Clear the difference number counter value (clear processing related to the difference number counter) → turn off the advantageous section indicator lighting flag (turn off control processing on the main processing side related to the advantageous section indicator YH) → turn off the advantageous section flag (advantageous section) It is configured to execute the processing in the order of "termination processing)". With this configuration, the advantageous section indicator lighting flag is turned on even though the advantageous section flag is off, and the advantageous section indicator YH is lit even though the advantageous section is finished. Can be prevented from being possessed by the order of processing, and a fair gaming machine that can be operated in the amusement park can be obtained. When the advantageous section ends, "turn off the advantageous section indicator lighting flag (turn-off control process on the main processing side related to the advantageous section indicator YH) → clear the counter value of the number of advantageous section remaining games (advantageous section remaining game). It may be configured to execute the process in the order of "clear process related to the number counter)-> clear the difference number counter value (clear process related to the difference number counter)-> turn off the advantageous section flag (end process of the advantageous section). In addition, the order of "clearing the counter value of the number of remaining games in the advantageous section (clearing process related to the number of games remaining in the advantageous section) → clearing the counter value of the difference number (clearing process related to the number of difference counter)" is changed to "counter value of difference number". (Clearing process related to the difference number counter) → Clearing the value of the counter for the number of games remaining in the advantageous section (clearing process related to the counter for the number of games remaining in the advantageous section) ”.

It should be noted that the number of game medals acquired in the advantageous section (games inserted from the number of game medals paid out in the advantageous section) in the AT state, which is an advantageous section and is a state related to the AT in which push order navigation can be executed. The sub-control board S controls the number of game medals acquired in the AT state (value obtained by subtracting the number of medals) or the number of game medals acquired in the AT state (value obtained by subtracting the number of inserted game medals from the number of game medals paid out in the AT state). It may be configured to be displayed (sometimes referred to as acquisition number display) on the effect display device S40. In such a configuration, when the advantageous section flag is turned off during AT, a command relating to the fact that the advantageous section flag is turned off is transmitted from the main control board side to the sub control board side, and the sub control board is used. Is configured to erase the acquired number display displayed on the effect display device S40 and clear the information on the acquired number stored for display on the acquired number display when the command is received. You may.

Further, as a configuration in which the above-mentioned acquired number display can be displayed, the acquired number display is displayed in the AT state, and then the number of remaining AT games becomes 0, so that another advantageous section (when the AT in-state ends) For example, it may be configured to be able to shift to the high probability state), and in such a configuration, the AT in-game state is changed again within a predetermined number of games (for example, 50 games) after the AT in-game state ends. In the case (the advantageous section continues), the information regarding the number of acquired cards is not cleared, and at the start of the re-transitioned AT in progress state, the acquired number of sheets is displayed at the end of the AT in progress state in which the player first stayed. It may be configured to be able to display (take over) the number of acquired sheets in consideration of the increased or decreased number of acquired sheets from the display of the acquired number of sheets at the end of the AT in progress state where the player was staying for the first time to the transition to the AT in progress state again. .. Even in such a configuration, when the advantageous section flag is turned off in the other advantageous section after the AT in-state state in which the user stayed for the first time is completed, the sub-control is performed from the main control board side. When a command relating to the fact that the advantageous section flag is turned off is transmitted to the board side and the sub-control board receives the command, the acquired number display displayed on the effect display device S40 is erased and acquired. It may be configured to clear the information regarding the acquired number of sheets stored for displaying on the number of sheets display. That is, in the case of transitioning to the AT-in-progress state again within 50 games after the end of the first AT-in-progress state, and in the case of re-entering the AT-in-progress state while maintaining the advantageous section after the end of the first AT-in-progress state. While inheriting the acquired number display, when the advantageous section flag is turned off after the end of the first AT state (or after a specific game such as 10 games), the normal section is entered, and then the AT state is changed again. The information on the number of acquired cards has been cleared, and the display of the number of acquired cards may not be inherited.

In this way, by configuring the information regarding the acquired number display on the sub-control board S side to be cleared at the end of the advantageous section, the acquired number display is a large value (for example, 10,000) when the acquired number display is taken over. It is possible to prevent the number of cards from becoming (more than one), and it is possible to make an appropriate gaming machine that does not excessively arouse the gambling spirit of the player. It should be noted that, at any timing of executing the processes of steps 3536 to 3539 in FIG. 214, the sub-control board S may be configured to clear the information related to the advantageous section such as the information related to the display of the acquired number of sheets. ..

On the other hand, if No in step 3514, in step 3518, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the difference counter value is an upper limit value, for example, 2400 or more. In the case of Yes in step 3518, the CPUC100 of the main control board M proceeds to the above-mentioned step 3536.

On the other hand, if No in step 3518, it is determined whether or not an arbitrary advantageous section end condition is satisfied. Here, the arbitrary advantageous section end condition is an end condition of the "advantageous section" other than the case where the counter value of the advantageous section remaining game number counter YKc-1 becomes 0, and for example, the AT counter value is 0. This is the case when the push order navigation is executed a predetermined number of times. If No in step 3518, that is, if any advantageous section end condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step 3515. As described above, in the sixth embodiment, when the "advantageous section" is completed and the "normal section" is set after the next game, the advantageous section remaining game number counter value, difference number counter value, and advantageous section display. Since all AT-related information (including information related to the number of AT continuous games, AT remaining games, etc.) such as the device lighting flag and the advantageous section flag is cleared, the "advantageous section" is again used in the subsequent "normal section". It is configured so that unfair game machines such as those that are easy to shift to are not designed.

In addition, AT-related information such as the counter value of the number of games remaining in the advantageous section, the counter value of the difference number of sheets, the lighting flag of the advantageous section indicator, and the advantageous section flag is cleared by clearing the RAM when the setting is changed, and becomes "the number of stored sheets" and the like. Such information is also cleared by clearing the RAM when the setting is changed. On the other hand, in the process of steps 3536 to 3039 described above, the information related to the "number of stored sheets" and the like is not cleared. As described above, the RAM clear range at the time of changing the setting and the clear range at the end of the "advantageous section" (for example, at the time of executing the processing of steps 3536 to 3539) are different.

Further, as will be described later, the addresses in the range to be cleared at the end of the "advantageous section" are continuous (see FIG. 204). By making the addresses in the range to be cleared at the end of the "advantageous section" continuous in this way, it is possible to clear by a simple process of designating the range of the start address to be cleared and the range of the addresses to be cleared in the clearing process. Further, when the "advantageous section" is completed, a command relating to the end of the "advantageous section" is transmitted from the main control board M to the sub control board S. However, even if the sub-control board S side receives the command, it is configured so that the game history such as the fact that it was an "advantageous section" and the information related to how many games the "AT in progress state" was executed is not deleted. ing. However, when the RAM is cleared when the setting is changed, the game history such as the fact that it was an "advantageous section" on the sub-control board S side and the information on how many games the "AT in progress state" was executed. Will also be erased.

When the "advantageous section" ends because the counter value of the game number counter YKc-1 remaining in the advantageous section becomes 0, (1) when the current AT-related state is the "high probability state". In the next game, the state related to AT becomes "low probability state". (2) If the current state related to AT is "AT in progress state", the state related to AT becomes "low probability state" in the next game. (3) If the current state related to AT is "in BB", the state related to AT is maintained in "in BB" in the next game, but the number of games remaining in the advantageous section counter YKc Since the counter value of -1 becomes 0, the advantageous section ends and the normal section is started.

In the case of Yes in step 3518 described above, in step 3520, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the game section after the next game as an "advantageous section", and shifts to step 3540.

Next, in step 3540, it was decided that the CPUC100 of the main control board M was newly set to the "advantageous section" in the next game (it was decided to set the "normal section" to the "advantageous section"). Judge whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 3540, in step 3541, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets a predetermined value in the advantageous section remaining game number counter YKc-1. The predetermined value set in the advantageous section remaining game number counter YKc-1 is a fixed value (1500 in this example) common to all the set values.

Next, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns on the advantageous section flag in step 3542, turns on the advantageous section indicator lighting flag in step 3543, and proceeds to the next process (process in step 1293). Further, even if No in step 3540 described above, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1293).

Next, FIG. 215 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing according to the subroutine of step 1600 in the sixth embodiment. The processing of the subroutine is started when the timer interrupt is started in the processing of step 1040 or step 1104, and thereafter, a predetermined time (in this example, T is set, but for example, a time of about 2 ms is set. It is configured to be executed periodically with a cycle of).

First, in step 1602, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes a process at the start of an interrupt (for example, saving data held in a register in the CPUC100, checking an input port for a power failure detection signal, and the like). Next, in step 1604, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the power failure is currently detected (in the interrupt processing this time). If No in step 1604, in step 1900, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes a power-off process described later. On the other hand, in the case of Yes in step 1604, in step 1606, the CPUC100 of the main control board M starts timer measurement (update processing of various timers managed by software). Next, in step 1608, the CPUC100 of the main control board M generates input port data and stores the data (updates the storage area of each input port data in the RAM area). Here, the input port data includes the settlement button D60, the start lever D50, the stop button D40, the door switch D80, the setting key switch M20, the setting / reset button M30, the power cutoff detection signal, the on reception sensor D10s, and the first on sensor. Information related to the detection of D20s, the second input sensor D30s, the first payout sensor H10s, the second payout sensor H20s, etc. Will be).

Next, in step 1610, the CPUC100 of the main control board M refers to the input port data in the RAM area, and turns on / off the door switch flag and the setting key switch flag according to the sampling result of each input port data. Switching (for example, when the switch state of the door switch D80 is continuously on for multiple samplings, by turning on the door switch flag, the front door DU is opened without being affected by noise. It can also be detected that it is). Next, in step 6100, the CPUC100 of the main control board M is a rotation cylinder drive control process (process related to drive control of the reel M50) of all reels (left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53), and details thereof. Will be described later). Next, in step 1612, the CPUC100 of the main control board M refers to the AT counter M60 and determines whether or not the counter value is larger than 0. In the case of Yes in step 1612, in step 1613, the CPUC100 of the main control board M displays the number of remaining AT games (number of AT games) on the AT counter value display device D280, and proceeds to step 1614. Even if No in step 1612, the process proceeds to step 1614. If the AT counter value display device D280 controlled by the main control board M is not provided, the processes of steps 1612 and 1613 are unnecessary. Next, in step 1614, the CPUC100 of the main control board M outputs the output data to the output port. Here, the output data is data for driving the reel M50, the blocker D100, and the like. Next, in step 1616, the CPUC100 of the main control board M has all the error flags turned off (although not shown, the inserted medal backflow error flag, the inserted number of sheets error flag, the inserted medal retention error flag, and the inserted abnormal error flag, It is determined whether or not all the flags related to the error such as the payout abnormality error flag, the payout medal retention error flag, the door switch flag, etc. are off). In the case of Yes in step 1616, in step 1618, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets an error undetected command (a command to the sub side and a command related to the fact that an error is not detected) (for example, a register). (Set in the area), and the process proceeds to step 1622. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1616, in step 1620, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets an error detection command (a command to the sub side and a command related to the fact that an error is detected) (for example,). (Set in the register area), and the process proceeds to step 1622. In step 1620, information related to an error corresponding to the error flag that is turned on (an error that is currently occurring) is configured to be transmitted to the sub side. In addition, the error-undetected command may be set only when the error is cleared from the state in which the error occurred (only when it is determined that the flag is turned off), and when the error is not detected, the relevant command is applicable. It is not necessary to execute the information setting process (step 1618 may be omitted). Further, the error detection command may execute the set process only when an error occurs from the state where no error has occurred, or from the state where the first error (for example, the inserted medal retention error) has occurred. The set process may be executed when the type of error changes, such as the second error (for example, the payout medal retention error).

Next, in step 1622, the CPUC100 of the main control board M transmits a control command (command on the sub side) (for example, if it is set in the register area in step 1618 or step 1620, it is set. Control commands will be sent). Here, as commands to be transmitted to the sub-control board S, a command related to the start lever operation timing (sent immediately after the start lever operation) and a command related to the first reel stop acceptance timing (the stop button was operated as the first stop). Command related to the second reel stop acceptance timing (sent immediately after operating the stop button as the second stop), command related to the third reel stop acceptance timing (sending the stop button as the third stop) (Sent immediately after operation), command related to stop timing of stop display symbol (sent immediately after operating the stop button as display symbol stop), winning / re-winning Command related to game winning information (sent immediately after starting lever operation (only during advantageous section)), command related to bonus winning information (sent immediately after starting lever operation), command related to RT status (all reels Commands related to AT status (sent between when all reels are stopped and when the next game is started), Highly secured failure counter value command (sent immediately after starting lever operation), command related to the number of AT remaining games (between all reels stopped until the next game starts, or immediately after starting lever operation (Sent), commands related to the game section (sent between the time all reels stop and the next game start), and so on. Next, in step 1624, the CPUC100 of the main control board M outputs an external terminal signal (a signal for transmitting information from the spinning machine P to an external hall computer or the like). Although not shown, the information related to the error output by the external signal includes a door opening error, a closing error error, a payout error error, a closing reception sensor retention error, and the like. The door opening error is configured to be an error when the front door DU is opened and the door switch flag is turned on, and the insertion reception sensor retention error is when the insertion reception sensor detects the retention of the game medal. Is configured to result in an error. Next, in step 1626, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns on the output data of the LED (7-segment LED lamp, etc.) (for example, a predetermined 7-segment LED unit among the plurality of 7-segment LED units, 7). Outputs (lights a predetermined segment of the segment) (so-called dynamic lighting). Next, in step 1628, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes an LED lighting mode (for example, changing the LED lighting color). Note that step 1628 does not have to be executed. Next, in step 1630, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes soft random number management processing (update processing of random number values managed by software, etc.). Next, in step 1632, the CPUC100 of the main control board M acquires the internal information register data (the internal information register has an area in which the error flag bit is set when an abnormality occurs in the random number generation circuit). .. Next, in step 1634, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the frequency of the random number update clock is normal (whether or not the abnormality flag bit indicating the frequency abnormality is set). Specifically, when the frequency of the random number update clock falls below a predetermined value, the error flag bit is set. In the case of Yes in step 1634, in step 1636, the CPUC100 of the main control board M has whether or not the update state of the built-in random number is normal (whether or not the error flag bit indicating the update state abnormality is set). Is determined. In the case of Yes in step 1636, in step 1638, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the interrupt end process and shifts to the next process (process of step 1602). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1634 or step 1636, in step 1640, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets the built-in random number error display (for example, the error number is set in the register area). Next, in step 1300, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the above-mentioned non-recoverable error processing.

Next, FIG. 216 is a flowchart of the rotating cylinder drive control process according to the subroutine of step 6100 of FIG. 215 in the sixth embodiment. In this process, the process for one reel is illustrated, but it is supplemented that the process corresponding to each of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53 is executed. First, in step 6102, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the reel rotation start standby state start timing (for example, the timing after the execution of the process of step 1564 in FIG. 208) has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 6102, in step 6104, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the reel drive state to the reel rotation start standby state, and shifts to step 6106. On the other hand, even if No in step 6102, the process proceeds to step 6106.

Next, in step 6106, the CPUMC of the main control board M is the reel acceleration state start timing (the timing at which the reel rotation start standby state ends and the reel acceleration process starts to be executed. For example, in step 1260 of FIG. 203. It is determined whether or not the processing execution timing) has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 6106, in step 6108, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the reel drive state to the reel acceleration state. Next, in step 6110, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the reel acceleration process, and proceeds to step 6112. When the reel is stopped, the rotation of the reel is started by this process. On the other hand, even if No in step 6106, the process proceeds to step 6112.

Next, in step 6112, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the current reel driving state is the reel acceleration state. In the case of Yes in step 6112, in step 6114, the CPUMC of the main control board M has executed all interrupt processing for the end timing of the reel acceleration state (for example, the “number of interrupt executions” in the reel acceleration state in FIG. 218 described later). It is determined whether or not the timing) has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 6114, in step 6116, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the reel drive state to the reel constant speed state. Next, in step 6118, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the reel constant speed maintenance process, and proceeds to step 6120. Even if No in step 6112 or 6114, the process proceeds to step 6120.

Next, in step 6120, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the current reel driving state is the reel constant speed state. In the case of Yes in step 6120, in step 6122, after the CPUMC of the main control board M is in the reel constant speed state (after executing the process of step 6116), the reel sensor corresponds to the reel (corresponds to the process of this subroutine). It is determined whether or not the index provided on the reel) is detected. Here, although not shown, each reel is provided with one index (which may be two or more). The index is provided on the peripheral side surface of the reel, for example, in a convex shape, and is used when detecting whether or not the reel has passed a predetermined position, whether or not the reel has made one rotation, and the like. Then, each index is detected by the reel sensor. The signal of the reel sensor is electrically connected to the main control board M. Then, when the reel sensor detects (turns off) the index, the input signal is input to the main control board M, and it is detected that the reel has passed a predetermined position. In the case of Yes in step 6122, it is determined that the rotation speed of the reel has reached a constant speed, and the process proceeds to step 6130. On the other hand, if No in step 6122, the CPUMC of the main control board M has elapsed a predetermined time (for example, a time value for executing interrupt processing 400 times) after the reel drive state is changed to the reel constant speed state in step 6124. Determine if it has been done. If No in step 6124, it is determined that the rotation speed of the reel has reached a constant speed, and the process proceeds to step 6130. As described above, in this example, it is possible to determine whether the reel rotation speed is normally set to the constant speed by detecting the index by the reel sensor within a predetermined time after the reel drive state becomes the reel constant speed state. It is configured. In this example, the predetermined time is a time value for executing 400 interrupt processes (configured so that 400 steps can be rotated with 400 interrupt processes), and the reel rotation speed is a constant speed. It is longer than the time for one rotation (one turn) of the reel (for example, one rotation of the reel is 336 steps, which is the time value for executing the interrupt process 336 times). With this configuration, how far is the distance between the index and the reel sensor (distance until the reel rotates and the index is detected by the reel sensor) at the timing when the reel drive state becomes the constant speed state. However, when the reel rotation speed is constant, the reel sensor detects the index within the predetermined time (time value for executing interrupt processing 400 times) after the reel drive state becomes the reel constant speed state. It is configured to be able to.

Returning to the explanation of the flowchart, in the case of Yes in step 6124, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the reel drive state to the reel acceleration state in step 6126. Next, in step 6128, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the reel reacceleration process, and shifts to the process of step 6130. As described above, in this example, when the reel sensor does not detect the index within a predetermined time (for example, the time value for executing the interrupt process 400 times) after the reel drive state becomes the reel constant speed state. , The reel drive state is updated again to the reel acceleration state, and the reel reacceleration process (the excitation mode of the stepping motor is the same as that of the reel acceleration process) is executed. Even if No in step 6120, the process proceeds to step 6130. The reel re-acceleration process does not have to be the same as the reel acceleration process described above, and the reel re-acceleration process and the reel acceleration process require interrupt processing for each combination of the exciting phase of the stepping motor and the combination of the exciting phases. The number of executions of may be different.

Next, FIG. 217 is a flowchart of the reel rotation stop processing according to the subroutine of step 6200 of FIG. 215 in the sixth embodiment. First, in step 6106, the CPUMC of the main control board M is the reel deceleration standby state start timing (the timing at which the reel constant speed state ends, and for example, the reel deceleration standby state start timing is set by operating the stop button. It is determined whether or not the reels have been reached. In the case of Yes in step 6130, in step 6132, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the reel drive state to the reel deceleration standby state, and shifts to step 6134. On the other hand, even if No in step 6130, the process proceeds to step 6134.

Next, in step 6134, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the current reel drive state is the reel deceleration standby state. In the case of Yes in step 6136, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the reel deceleration standby state end timing (timing to start execution of the reel deceleration process) has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 6136, in step 6138, the CPUMC of the main control board M starts deceleration of the reel (reel deceleration process). Next, in step 6140, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state, and shifts to the process of step 6142. Even if No in step 6134 or step 6136, the process proceeds to step 6142.

Next, in step 6142, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the current reel drive state is the reel deceleration state. In the case of Yes in step 6142, in step 6144, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the reel deceleration state end timing (timing at which the reel deceleration process is executed ends) has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 6144, in step 6146, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the reel drive state to the reel stop state, and shifts to the next process (process of step 1612). Even if No in step 6142 or step 6144, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1612).

Next, with reference to FIG. 218, the rotational operation of the reel M50 of the spinning machine according to this example will be described in detail. The rotating cylinder type gaming machine according to this example starts the rotation of the stepping motor based on the operation of the start lever D50, and when the rotation speed of the reel reaches a constant speed, the constant speed is maintained thereafter (reel). When the drive state becomes the reel constant speed state, the reel constant speed maintenance process is executed, but the rotation speed may not actually reach the constant speed). Then, when any of the stop buttons is operated, stop control is performed on the reel (stepping motor) corresponding to the operated stop button. Here, the stepping motor is a 4-phase stepping motor having four phases of Φ0, Φ1, Φ2, and Φ3 (there is no problem even if it is not a 4-phase stepping motor), the phase to be excited is switched, and the stepping motor is 1-2. Rotation control is performed by phase excitation. That is, the stepping motor can be rotated in the positive direction by cyclically changing the drive pulse data (combination of exciting phases). In the figure, among Φ0 to Φ3, the one indicating which phase is specified to be excited is shown in the column of “Phase to be excited” (details will be described later).

In addition, as shown in the "reel rotation speed image" at the top of the figure, the drive state from the start of rotation to the stop of the stepping motor is divided into six, and the stepping motor is set according to the drive pattern according to each drive state. The drive is controlled. Here, the drive state includes a "reel stop state", a "reel rotation start standby state", a "reel acceleration state", a "reel constant speed state", a "reel deceleration standby state", and a "reel deceleration state". In the "reel rotation speed image", the vertical axis is the reel rotation speed and the speed increases upward, and the horizontal axis is time and the time elapses to the right. There is. In addition, the example shown in the figure illustrates the case where the reel rotation failure does not occur, and this is limited to the case where the reel rotation failure occurs due to factors such as holding the reel by hand or causing step-out. It is not (the case where the reel rotation failure occurs will be described later).

The "reel stop state" indicates a state in which the reel is stopped, and when the "reel stop state" is in the "reel stop state", the reel is in a stationary state and all four phases of the stepping motor are in a stationary state. Is not excited.

Next, in the "reel stop state", the reel drive state is updated to the "reel rotation start standby state" based on the operation of the start lever D50 at the timing (1) in the figure. .. Here, the "reel rotation start standby state" indicates a state of waiting from the operation of the start lever D50 until the acceleration processing (reel acceleration processing) of the stepping motor is started. This standby period is a period until the reel drive state shifts from the "reel stop state" to the "reel acceleration state". For example, the time from the time when the reel drive state becomes the "reel acceleration state" in the previous game is timed, and the start lever D50 related to this game is operated before the minimum game time (about 4.1 seconds) elapses. If this is the case, the "reel rotation start standby state" is set.

Next, at the timing (2) in the figure, the reel drive state is updated from the "reel rotation start standby state" to the "reel acceleration state". Here, the "reel acceleration state" is a state in which the reel is accelerated in order to reach a constant speed from the state in which the reel is stationary. In this example, when the timer interrupt process is executed 220 times (“100 + 60 + 30 + 15 + 8 + 4 + 2 + 1 = 220”, refer to the number of interrupt executions in the reel acceleration state in the lower left of the figure), the acceleration state ends (the reel drive state is “reel constant speed”. It is configured to update to "state"). Next, the reel rotation speed reaches a constant speed at the timing (3) in the figure, in other words, at the timing when the "reel acceleration state" ends by executing one more timer interrupt process. At this timing, the reel drive state remains the "reel acceleration state". Next, at the timing (4) in the figure, the reel drive state is updated from the "reel rotation start standby state" to the "reel acceleration state", and then the timer interrupt process is executed 220 times to drive the reel. The state is updated to "reel constant speed state". As described above, in this example, after the reel rotation speed reaches a constant speed, the reel drive state remains in the "reel acceleration state" for one timer interrupt process, in other words, the final in the "reel acceleration state". In "φ3, φ0", which is a combination of the phases to be excited, the interrupt processing is configured to be executed only once, which is the same as the "reel constant speed state" in which the interrupt processing is executed once for each combination of the phases to be excited. (When no abnormal rotation of the reel occurs). With this configuration, the acceleration process until the reel rotation speed reaches a constant speed can be stably executed.

Here, the lower part of the figure is a “step motor excitation image”. In the figure, a step motor excitation image when the reel drive state is the “reel acceleration state” and a step motor excitation image when the reel drive state is the “reel constant speed state” are illustrated. First, the step motor excitation image when the reel drive state is the “reel acceleration state” will be described in detail with reference to the lower left part of the figure. The "exciting phase" is a combination of the exciting phases, and the "number of interrupt executions" indicates the number of times the interrupt processing to be excited by the combination of the exciting phases is executed. In this example, when the reel acceleration process is executed, the step motor (stepping motor) is configured to excite 220 times of the timer interrupt process, and (KA) "φ0" interrupts the interrupt process 100 times → ( KB) Interrupt processing 60 times at "φ0, φ1" → (KC) Interrupt processing 30 times at "φ1" → (KD) Interrupt processing 15 times at "φ1, φ2" → (KE) "φ2" Interrupt processing 8 times at (KF) "φ2, φ3" → Interrupt processing 2 times at (KG) "φ3" → Interrupt at (KH) "φ3, φ0" It is configured to execute interrupt processing once to excite the step motor (stepping motor) (the number of times interrupt processing is executed is just an example, and there is no problem even if it is changed). As described above, in this example, when the reel acceleration processing is executed, the number of times the interrupt processing is executed by the combination of the exciting phases of 1 is gradually reduced.

Next, the step motor excitation image when the reel drive state is the “reel constant speed state” will be described in detail with reference to the lower right part of the figure. In this example, when the reel is in a constant speed state (when executing the reel constant speed maintenance process), interrupt processing is performed once at (TA) "φ0" → (TB) at "φ0, φ1". Interrupt processing once → (TC) “φ1” interrupt processing once → (TD) “φ1, φ2” interrupt processing once → (TE) “φ2” interrupt processing once → (TF) Interrupt processing once at "φ2, φ3" → (TG) Interrupt processing once at "φ3" → (TH) Interrupt processing once at "φ3, φ0" → (TA) " Interrupt processing is executed once at "φ0" → (TB) Interrupt processing is performed once at "φ0, φ1" → ..., (TA) to (TG) are repeatedly executed once for each interrupt processing. It is configured to excite a step motor (stepping motor). As described above, in this example, when the reel constant speed maintenance process is executed, the interrupt process is executed once with the combination of the exciting phases of 1.

Next, in the situation where the reel drive state is the "reel constant speed state", the stop button corresponding to any of the reels is operated at the timing (5) in the figure, and the reel drive state is the "reel deceleration standby state". Is updated to. Here, the "reel constant speed state" is a state in which the rotation speed of the reel is constant (a state in which the combination of exciting phases is switched for each interrupt process), and is a "reel deceleration standby state". "" Indicates the state from the operation of the stop button by the player to the start of the stop control (in the reel deceleration standby state, the reel slips corresponding to the number of slip frames). .. The period of this drive state is determined based on the operation timing of the stop button.

Next, at the timing (6) in the figure, the reel drive state is updated from the "reel deceleration standby state" to the "reel deceleration state", and the reel deceleration is started. When the reel drive state is updated from the "reel deceleration standby state" to the "reel deceleration state", a specific phase of the stepping motor is continuously excited for a predetermined time in order to stop the rotation of the reel. Performs 4-phase excitation to excite everything. Then, when the excitation is performed for a predetermined time, the reel drive state is updated from the "reel deceleration state" to the "reel stop state" at the timing (7) in the figure, and the reel is stopped.

As described above, in the reeling game machine according to this example, the reel sensor detects the index within a predetermined time (for example, the time value for executing the interrupt process 400 times) after the reel drive state becomes the reel constant speed state. If not, the reel drive state is updated again to the reel acceleration state, and the reel reacceleration process (the excitation mode of the stepping motor is the same as the reel acceleration process) is executed. When the reel driving state is the reel acceleration state, in other words, it is not determined whether or not the reel acceleration is normally executed during the reel acceleration processing. Further, whether the reel has been accelerated normally, in other words, whether the reel is at a constant speed (whether a reel rotation failure has occurred) is the process of step 6124 (the reel drive state is changed to the reel constant speed state). Judgment is made after a predetermined time has elapsed since the update), but the reel is not at a constant speed because the reel sensor did not detect the index in the process of step 6124 (reel rotation failure). If it is determined that the reel acceleration process has occurred), the reel reacceleration process is executed, that is, the reel acceleration process is executed again from the beginning. In this way, by configuring so that it is not determined whether or not the reel acceleration is normally executed during the execution of the reel acceleration processing, even if a reel rotation failure occurs during the execution of the reel acceleration processing, the reel rotation failure is subsequently performed. If the reel rotation failure is resolved and the reel rotation speed can be reached to a constant speed by the remaining reel acceleration processing until the reel acceleration processing is completed, the reel drive state is the reel constant speed state. By detecting the index by the reel sensor until a predetermined time elapses after being updated to, the reel constant speed maintenance process is executed without executing the re-acceleration process, and the player is executed by executing the reel re-acceleration process. It is possible to make it difficult for a situation in which the game cannot proceed (the stop button cannot be operated) to occur. Further, by configuring so that the process of determining whether or not the reel acceleration is normally executed is not executed during the execution of the reel acceleration process, the amount of data required for the process related to the rotation of the reel can be reduced. Since it is configured in this way, if a reel rotation failure occurs while the spinning machine according to this example is executing the reel acceleration process, it acts as follows. Will be.

<Action 1>
Reel rotation starts → Reel drive state is updated to reel acceleration state → Reel acceleration process is executed → Reel acceleration process execution ends → Reel drive state is updated to reel constant speed state → Reel constant speed maintenance process is executed → Reel constant Reel rotation failure occurs during execution of speed maintenance processing → Reel rotation failure is detected → Reel reacceleration processing is executed. It is configured to be able to operate as described above.
In addition, the reel rotation failure means that the reel rotation is hindered by a member provided near the reel such as the reel window D160 (the reel rubs against the reel window D160, etc.), and the reel is accelerated due to step-out. Refers to the case where is not executed normally. As described above, by configuring the reel re-acceleration process to be executed even when the reel rotation failure occurs during the execution of the reel constant speed maintenance process, the game can be smoothly advanced.

<Action 2>
Reel rotation starts → Reel drive state is updated to reel acceleration state → Reel acceleration processing is executed → Reel rotation failure occurs during execution of reel acceleration processing → Reel acceleration processing is continuously executed → Reel acceleration processing execution ends → Update the reel drive state to the reel constant speed state → Execute the reel constant speed maintenance process → Detect the reel rotation failure → Execute the reel reacceleration process It is configured to be able to operate as described above. In this way, even if a reel rotation failure occurs during the execution of the reel acceleration process, the game can proceed smoothly by configuring the reel re-acceleration process to be executed when the reel rotation failure is subsequently detected. Will be possible.

<Action 3>
Reel rotation starts → Reel drive state is updated to reel acceleration state → Reel acceleration processing is executed → Power cut occurs during execution of reel acceleration processing → Recovery from power cut → Continue execution of reel acceleration processing (unprocessed) Execute reel acceleration processing) → Reel rotation failure occurs during execution of reel acceleration processing → Continue execution of reel acceleration processing (execute unprocessed reel acceleration processing) → End of execution of reel acceleration processing → Reel drive state Is updated to the reel constant speed state → the reel constant speed maintenance process is executed → the reel rotation failure is detected → the reel reacceleration process is executed. In this way, even if a power failure occurs during the execution of the reel acceleration process, the reel acceleration process is continuously executed after the power is restored, and then within a predetermined time after the reel drive state is updated to the reel constant speed state. By executing the reel reacceleration process when the reel sensor does not detect the index, the game can proceed smoothly. In addition, if the power is cut off during the reel acceleration process, the reel acceleration process is continuously executed after the power is restored, and then the reel sensor is within a predetermined time after the reel drive state is updated to the reel constant speed state. Is configured not to execute the reel reacceleration process when the index is detected, and by such a configuration, the player cannot proceed with the game (the stop button cannot be operated) due to the reel reacceleration process. It can be made less likely to occur.

<< Action after operating the final stop button >>
In the spinning machine according to this example, the final reel (a reel that rotates to the end and is also referred to as a third reel) is stopped after the operation of the final stop button (third stop button), and the winning combination is obtained. Although it is configured so that the payout of the game medal can be executed when the symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the action related to the payout of the game medal may be configured as follows.

<Action 1>
Reel rotation starts → Update reel drive state to constant speed state → Execute constant speed state maintenance process → Acceptance of stop button becomes effective → Operate 1st stop button as stop operation of 1st reel → 1st reel Stop display → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Stop display of the 2nd reel → Operate the 3rd stop button as the stop operation of the 3rd reel (accept the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Reel Update the drive state to the reel deceleration state → Power off occurs → Move the 3rd reel to the stop display position (rotation) → Detect power off → Execute power off processing → Power return → Design corresponding to the winning combination on the reel The combination may be configured to operate as described above by displaying the stop display → executing the process related to the payout of the game medal. With this configuration, the stop operation of the third stop button is accepted in the game such as the common bell mentioned above, in which a small winning combination that can be won regardless of the operation timing of the stop button if won is won. Even if a power outage occurs immediately after a power outage in the amusement park, regardless of the planned stop position of the third reel (even if the number of slip frames is the maximum), the power outage is detected before the power outage is detected. It can be configured to complete the movement (rotation) to the planned stop position. In addition, when the symbol combination (for example, the common bell) constituting the winning combination is stopped and displayed after the power is restored, the game medal can be paid out normally, and the player is unlikely to be disadvantaged. Can be configured.

<Action 2>
Reel rotation starts → Update reel drive state to constant speed state → Execute constant speed state maintenance process → Acceptance of stop button becomes effective → Operate 1st stop button as stop operation of 1st reel → 1st reel Stop display → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Stop display of the 2nd reel → Operate the 3rd stop button as the stop operation of the 3rd reel (accept the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Reel Update the drive state to the reel deceleration state → Reel rotation failure occurs → The third reel cannot move (rotate) to the scheduled stop position from the player's point of view → The symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination on the reel from the player's point of view stops Although not displayed, in the determination process of step 1269, it is determined that the symbol combination is normal (when it is determined that the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button has been completed normally, for example, the bell role is won. In the game, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning role of the bell role was not stopped and displayed on the reel from the player's point of view, but it became the bell role by the processing inside the game machine corresponding to the operation of the player's stop button. When the stop control for displaying the corresponding symbol combination is stopped normally) → The process related to the payout of the game medal is executed. It may be configured to operate as described above. With this configuration, even if the reel rotation failure occurs immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not stopped and displayed on the reel from the player's point of view. , Accepts the operation of the stop button corresponding to each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) at the timing when the winning combination is won by the internal processing of the gaming machine and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination can be stopped and displayed. When the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is normally executed, the game medal can be paid out, and the player is less likely to be disadvantaged. can do.

Next, FIG. 219 is a flowchart of the power cutoff process according to the subroutine of step 1900 in FIG. 215. First, in step 1902, the CPUC100 of the main control board M saves the stack pointer. Next, in step 1904, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns on the power-off processed flag (for example, updates the inside of the power-off processed flag area of the RAM area with a value corresponding to on). Next, in step 1906, the CPUC100 of the main control board M calculates a checksum from the start address of the RAM area to the address immediately before the checksum area, and error detection information (for example, the calculation) based on the calculated checksum. The lower 1 byte of the checksum, or its complement) is set in the checksum area. Next, in step 1912, the CPUC100 of the main control board M prohibits the writing of the RAM, and proceeds to step 1914. Next, in step 1914, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes an infinite loop process for waiting for a reset.

<<< Advantageous section indicator YH turn-off timing >>>
One of the features of the sixth embodiment is the timing of turning off the advantageous section indicator YH. The conditions for ending the advantageous section are (1) when the number of games in the advantageous section reaches 1500 (the counter value of the number of games remaining in the advantageous section becomes 0), and (2) the maximum number of game medals in the advantageous section. When the increased number of sheets (difference number counter value) reaches 2400 sheets, (3) when an arbitrary end condition is satisfied, there are three cases. When any of these conditions is satisfied, the process for ending the advantageous section is executed.

<< End processing of advantageous section >>
At the end of the advantageous section, the difference number counter is cleared, the advantageous section remaining game number counter YKc-1 is cleared, the lighting flag for controlling the advantageous section indicator YH is cleared, and the advantageous section flag is cleared. Hereinafter, these processes will be described. In the following, for the sake of simplicity, the YKc-1 counter for the number of games remaining in the advantageous section will be simply referred to as the counter for the number of games remaining in the advantageous section.

The advantageous section remaining game number counter is a counter for counting the number of games executed in the advantageous section. The number of games is counted from the first game in the advantageous section, and the counted value is stored in the counter for the number of games remaining in the advantageous section. Further, when the advantageous section ends and the normal section is entered, the value of the game number counter remaining in the advantageous section is cleared. A specific example of the counter for the number of games remaining in the advantageous section will be described later (see FIG. 229).

The difference number counter is a counter for counting the maximum increase number of game medals in the advantageous section. Specific examples of the difference number counter and the starting game will be described later (see FIGS. 224, 225, 226, 227, and 228).

The lighting flag is a flag for controlling the lighting or extinguishing of the advantageous section indicator YH, and the CPUC100 of the main control board M refers to the value of the lighting flag and controls the lighting or extinguishing by timer interrupt processing. Execute. For example, the CPUC100 of the main control board M lights the advantageous section indicator YH when the value of the lighting flag is 1 (hereinafter referred to as on), and the value of the lighting flag is 0 (hereinafter referred to as off). At one point, the advantageous section indicator YH is turned off.

The advantageous section flag is a flag for determining whether the section is a normal section or an advantageous section, and whether the CPUC100 of the main control board M is a normal section or an advantageous section with reference to the value of the advantageous section flag. To judge. For example, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines that the advantageous section flag is an advantageous section when the value of the advantageous section flag is 1 (hereinafter referred to as on), and the value of the advantageous section flag is 0 (hereinafter referred to as off). When is, it is determined that it is a normal section.

The above-mentioned clearing of the difference number counter, clearing of the advantageous section remaining game number counter, the lighting flag, and the advantageous section flag are stored in a certain storage area of the built-in RAMC 120 of the main control board M. FIG. 220 is a diagram showing an outline of an advantageous section remaining game number counter, a difference number counter, a lighting flag, and an advantageous section flag stored in a certain storage area of the built-in RAMC 120. In the example shown in FIG. 220, the advantage section remaining game number counter (2 bytes) is stored from 7FC0H of the built-in RAMC120, the difference number counter (2 bytes) is stored from 7FC2H, the lighting flag (1 byte) is stored from 7FC4H, and from 7FC5H. The advantageous interval flag (1 byte) is stored. As described above, the address values of the advantageous section remaining game number counter, the difference number counter, the lighting flag, and the advantageous section flag are continuously stored in the built-in RAMC 120. At the end of the advantageous section, the upper address 7FC0H is cleared to the lower address 7FC5H. That is, in the end processing of the advantageous section, the values are cleared in the order of the number of games remaining in the advantageous section counter, the difference number counter, the lighting flag, and the advantageous section flag. With this configuration, in the sixth embodiment, (1) the difference number counter value or the advantageous section remaining game number counter value is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the condition for ending the advantageous section is satisfied. , (2) When the condition for ending the advantageous section is satisfied, the number of bytes to be cleared is set, and (3) the number of games remaining in the advantageous section counter, the difference number counter, the lighting flag, and the advantageous section flag are cleared in this order. It will be. As the order of the addresses to be stored, the order of the advantageous section remaining game number counter and the difference number counter may be reversed, and the advantageous section indicator lighting flag is higher than the advantageous section remaining game number counter and the difference number counter. It may be configured to be stored in the address.

Further, as shown in the figure, the set value data is stored in the highest address, and the information regarding the number of games remaining in the advantageous section counter, the information regarding the difference number counter, the information regarding the lighting flag of the advantageous section indicator, and the advantageous section flag are stored. Information about the information is stored in an address lower than the set value data and stored in an address higher than the control command buffer. Similar to the configuration described above in FIG. 59, when an unexpected problem (unexpected power failure, etc.) occurs, the stack pointer indicates an address higher than "7FF8H", and the saved data is stored in the higher address. Therefore, it is preferable to configure the data so that the data having a greater influence on the progress of the game is stored in the higher address. Under these circumstances, information about the advantageous section remaining game number counter, information about the difference number counter, information about the advantageous section indicator lighting flag, and information about the advantageous section flag should be stored in an address lower than the set value data. Is preferable, and if it is higher than the control command buffer, it is configured to be stored in the address between (1) and (2) in the figure, the address between (2) and (3), and the like. May be good.

FIG. 221 is a timing chart showing the order of end processing of the advantageous section. At time t1, the value of the number of games remaining in the advantageous section counter or the difference number counter is cleared. Next, at time t2 later than time t1, the lighting flag is changed to off, and at time t3 later than time t2, the advantageous section flag is changed to off. By processing in this way, the lighting flag is turned off before the advantageous section flag is turned off. That is, in the execution of the program, first, the lighting flag is changed to off (off), and then the advantageous section flag is changed to off (normal section), so that the advantageous section flag is turned off (normal section). At the previous point, the process of turning off (turning off) the lighting flag can be completed.

The control of turning on or off of the advantageous section indicator YH is executed by the interrupt processing described above (FIG. 199 described above), and depending on the timing of calling the interrupt processing, at the time t4 after the start of the normal section. , The control to turn off the advantageous section indicator YH may be executed. However, the interrupt processing is read and executed in a time of, for example, about 2 ms, and the difference is so small that it cannot be discriminated by the human eye.

As described above, before the process of turning off the advantageous section flag (normal section), the process of turning off the lighting flag (turning off) is completed, but the process of turning off the lighting flag (turning off) is performed. ), Immediately after executing the process of turning off the advantageous section flag (normal section). That is, no other process is executed between the process of turning off the lighting flag (turning off) and the process of turning off the advantageous section flag (normal section). As shown in FIG. 220, the area for storing the advantageous section remaining game number counter, the area for storing the difference number counter, the area for storing the lighting flag, and the area for storing the advantageous section flag are in the built-in RAMC 120. These areas are continuously arranged, and by executing the process of clearing the continuous storage areas of these built-in RAMC 120s, these areas can be continuously cleared without executing other processes. The player confirms whether or not the section is advantageous by visually recognizing the point aspect of the advantageous section indicator YH, but as described above, the advantageous section indicator lighting flag (also referred to as a lighting flag) may be used. ) Is executed, and then the process of turning off the advantageous section flag is executed, so that the advantageous section indicator YH lights up because it is an advantageous section (because the advantageous section flag is on). However, after the advantageous section indicator YH is turned off, the advantageous section ends (the advantageous section flag is turned off), which confuses the player who is not in the advantageous section but the advantageous section indicator YH is lit. The situation can be prevented and an appropriate gaming machine can be designed. Further, it may be configured to output an external terminal signal indicating that it is an advantageous section, and in such a configuration, it is configured to output an external terminal signal after turning on the advantageous section indicator lighting flag. Is preferable. With such a configuration, the external terminal signal is output after notifying (lighting) that the advantageous section indicator YH controlled by the main control board is in the advantageous section, and the output of the external terminal signal causes the output of the external terminal signal. It is possible to solve the problem that the advantageous section indicator YH is found to be an advantageous section even though it is not lit.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 220 described above, an example in which the advantageous section remaining game number counter is stored in the upper address and the difference number counter is stored in the lower address is shown, but the difference number counter is stored in the upper address. Even if it is stored and the counter for the number of games remaining in the advantageous section is stored in the lower address, it may be stored in the continuous address.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 220 described above, an example is shown in which the advantageous section remaining game number counter, the difference number counter, the lighting flag, and the advantageous section flag are stored in the area between the RAM checksum data and the control command buffer. However, it may be stored in an area lower than the set value data and higher than the control command buffer.

<< Start processing of advantageous section >>
The end processing of the advantageous section is executed in the above-mentioned order, but the start processing of the advantageous section may be executed in the reverse order. That is, after turning on the advantageous section flag, the lighting flag is turned on (lighting).

<<< Advantageous section indicator YH >>>
The advantageous section display YH is a dot-shaped LED among the eight LEDs constituting the 7-segment display (see FIG. 37). FIG. 222 is a diagram showing the relationship between the configuration of the 7-segment display and the storage area for turning on or off the eight LEDs.

The 7-segment display consists of seven linear LEDs and one circular LED DP. The seven linear LEDs consist of segments a to g. It has an output port for turning on or off the eight LEDs, and by writing data related to turning on or off to the output port, it is possible to turn on or off the eight LEDs.

By writing 1 in the area corresponding to the segment in the output port, the corresponding segment can be turned on, and by writing 0 in the area corresponding to the segment in the output port, the corresponding segment can be turned off. The advantageous section indicator YH is composed of a circular LED DP, and by writing 1 in the area corresponding to the LED DP in the output port, the circular LED DP can be turned on, indicating that the advantageous section is an advantageous section. It can be notified. On the other hand, by writing 0 in the area corresponding to the LED DP in the output port, the circular LED DP can be turned off and it can be notified that it is a normal section. The lighting mode of the advantageous section indicator YH is not limited to that of this example, and there is no problem even if it can be changed as long as it can be clearly notified that it is an advantageous section.

As shown in FIG. 223, in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to this example, four 7-segment displays are juxtaposed, and the two are configured as a set. As an example, the first set is the push order display device D270, and the second set is the credit number display device D200. For example, the advantageous section display YH can use the DP of the one-digit 7-segment display constituting the credit number display device D200. The first set may be the credit number display device D200, and the second set may be the push order display device D270. Further, the advantageous section display YH may use the DP of the one-position 7-segment display constituting the push order display device D270.

In the sixth embodiment, the lighting of the four 7-segment displays is controlled by dynamic control. That is, the lighting is controlled by sequentially switching each of the four 7-segment displays. For example, each of the four 7-segment displays is switched every execution of interrupt processing (for example, 2 ms) to control lighting.

FIG. 223 shows a state in which the four 7-segment displays A to D are lit by dynamic control. FIG. 223 (a) shows a state in which the 7-segment display D is lit and controlled, FIG. 223 (b) shows a state in which the 7-segment display A is lit and controlled, and FIG. 223 (c) shows a state in which the 7-segment display A is lit. FIG. 223 (d) shows a state in which the segment display B is lit and controlled, FIG. 223 (d) shows a state in which the 7-segment display C is lit and controlled, and FIG. 223 (e) shows a state in which the 7-segment display D is lit and controlled. Indicates the state of being. In FIG. 223, the state in which lighting is controlled is shown by a solid line, and the state in which lighting is not controlled is shown by a broken line.

First, as shown in FIG. 223 (a), the 7-segment display D is controlled to be lit, and a numerical value in the first digit of the credit number display device D200 is displayed (numerical value omitted). Further, at this point, it is an advantageous section, and by writing 1 to the area corresponding to the LED DP in the output port of FIG. 222, the advantageous section display YH of the 7-segment display D is turned on.

Next, as shown in FIG. 223 (b), the 7-segment display A is controlled to be lit, and the tens digit of the push order display device D270 is displayed (numerical value omitted). At this point, the lighting of the 7-segment display D is not controlled, and the advantageous section display YH of the 7-segment display D is turned off.

Next, as shown in FIG. 223 (c), the 7-segment display B is controlled to be lit, and the numerical value of the first digit of the push order display device D270 is displayed (numerical value omitted). Even at this point, the lighting of the 7-segment display D is not controlled, and the advantageous section display YH of the 7-segment display D is turned off.

Further, as shown in FIG. 223 (d), the 7-segment display C is controlled to be lit, and a numerical value in the tens digit of the credit number display device D200 is displayed (numerical value omitted). Even at this point, the lighting of the 7-segment display D is not controlled, and the advantageous section display YH of the 7-segment display D is turned off.

As described above, as shown in FIGS. 223 (b) to 223 (d), when the 7-segment display D is not controlled to be lit, the advantageous section of the 7-segment display D is irrespective of whether or not it is an advantageous section. The display YH is turned off. In this example, when the 7-segment displays A to C are controlled to be lit (FIGS. 223 (b) to 223 (d)), the advantageous section ends and the section shifts to the normal section.

Again, as shown in FIG. 223 (e), the lighting of the 7-segment display D is controlled, and the numerical value of the first digit of the credit number display device D200 is displayed (numerical value omitted). At this point, the advantageous section ends and becomes a normal section, and 0 is written in the area corresponding to the LED DP in the output port, so that the advantageous section indicator YH of the 7-segment display D is turned off.

As described above, when the lighting of the 7-segment display D is not controlled (FIGS. 223 (b) to 223 (d)), the advantageous section display of the 7-segment display D regardless of whether or not it is an advantageous section. YH is turned off. Next, the 7-segment display D is in the stage of lighting control (FIG. 223 (e)), but at this time, the advantageous section ends and becomes a normal section, and the area corresponding to the LED DP in the output port is reached. By writing 0, the advantageous section display YH of the 7-segment display D continues to be turned off.

<< Difference number counter >>
As described above, the difference number counter is a counter for counting the difference number counted from the starting game. FIG. 224 (a) is a diagram showing the processing of the difference number counter for each game (for each unit game). In the example shown in FIG. 224 (a), the winning condition device, the input processing, the payout processing, and the processing of the difference number counter are shown for each of the games 1 to 9.

Games 1 to 3 are games executed in an advantageous section. First, in the game 1, the number of bets is subtracted from the counter value of the difference number counter by the input processing. In game 1, the bell is won and the symbol combination related to the bell is stopped and displayed, and the number of payouts is added to the counter value of the difference number counter by the payout process. Similarly, in the game 2 and the game 3, the difference number counter is deducted by the number of bets by the input process, the bell is won, and the difference number counter is added by the payout number by the payout process. In this game 3, the advantageous section ends by satisfying the end condition of the advantageous section. That is, either (1) the number of games in the advantageous section has reached 1500, (2) the difference number counted from the starting game has reached 2400, or (3) any end condition has been satisfied. By satisfying, the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied.

By satisfying the end condition of the advantageous section in this game 3, the normal section is started from the next game, so that the value of the difference number counter is cleared and becomes 0.

In game 4 to game 6, it is a normal section. First, in the game 4, the difference number counter is subtracted by the number of bets by the input processing. In game 4, it is a loss and the difference number counter is not added. As described above, in the game 3, the value of the difference number counter is cleared to 0. In the game 4, the number of bets is subtracted by the input processing. Therefore, since the value of the difference number counter is less than 0, zero correction is executed and becomes 0.

Next, in the game 5, the value of the difference number counter is subtracted by the number of bets by the input processing, and since it is a loss, the difference number counter is not added. Therefore, even in the game 5, the value of the difference number counter is less than 0, so that the zero correction is executed and the value becomes 0 again.

Further, in the game 6, the value of the difference number counter is subtracted by the number of bets by the input processing, the watermelon is won, and the difference number counter is added by the number of payouts by the payout processing. In this game 6, the advantageous section transition lottery is won, and the advantageous section starts from the next game 7. Since it becomes an advantageous section from the next game, the value of the difference number counter is cleared and becomes 0.

In games 7 to 9, it is an advantageous section. First, in the game 7, the difference number counter is subtracted by the number of bets by the input process. In game 7, the bell is won, and the difference number counter is added by the number of payouts by the payout process. Similarly, in the game 8 and the game 9, the difference number counter is deducted by the number of bets by the input process, the bell is won, and the difference number counter is added by the payout number by the payout process.

The difference number counter is a counter for determining the end condition of the advantageous section, and it is only necessary to count in the advantageous section, and it is not necessary to count in the normal section. However, in FIG. 224 (a) described above, even in the normal section, the difference number counter is subtracted by the input process and the difference number counter is added by the payout process, as in the advantageous section. By configuring in this way, the capacity of the program can be reduced by counting the difference number counter and sharing the processing between the normal section and the advantageous section without distinguishing between the normal section and the advantageous section. At the same time, it is possible to simplify the process while simplifying the content of the process.

<< Counter for the number of games remaining in the advantageous section >>
The advantageous section remaining game number counter is a counter for counting the number of games executed in the advantageous section. FIG. 224 (b) is a diagram showing processing of a counter for the number of games remaining in an advantageous section for each game (for each unit game). In the example shown in FIG. 224 (b), the winning condition device, the input processing, and the processing of the game number counter remaining in the advantageous section are shown for each of the games 1 to 9.

In games 1 to 3, it is an advantageous section. First, in the game 1, the game is started by the input processing, and the counter for the number of remaining games in the advantageous section is subtracted by 1. Similarly, in game 2 and game 3, the number of games remaining in the advantageous section counter is subtracted by 1 by the input processing. By satisfying the end condition of the advantageous section in this game 3, the advantageous section ends, and the next game becomes a normal section. Therefore, the value of the counter for the number of games remaining in the advantageous section is cleared and becomes 0.

In game 4 to game 6, it is a normal section. First, in the game 4, the game is started by the input processing, and the counter for the number of remaining games in the advantageous section is subtracted by 1. As described above, in the game 3, the value of the game counter for the number of remaining games in the advantageous section is 0, and in the game 4, only 1 is subtracted by the input process. Therefore, since the value of the counter for the number of remaining games in the advantageous section is less than 0, zero correction is executed and the value becomes 0 again.

Next, also in games 5 and 6, the counter for the number of games remaining in the advantageous section is subtracted by 1 and becomes less than 0, so that zero correction is executed and the counter becomes 0 again.

Further, in the game 6, the advantageous section transition lottery is won, and the advantageous section starts from the next game 7. Since the next game will be an advantageous section, the value of the number of games remaining in the advantageous section counter is set to 1500 times.

In games 7 to 9, it is an advantageous section. First, in the game 7, the game is started by the input processing, and the counter for the number of remaining games in the advantageous section is subtracted by 1. Similarly, in the game 8 and the game 9, the number of games remaining in the advantageous section counter is subtracted by 1 by the input processing.

The counter for the number of games remaining in the advantageous section is a counter for determining the end condition of the advantageous section, like the difference number counter, and it is only necessary to count in the advantageous section, and it is not necessary to count in the normal section. However, in FIG. 224 (b) described above, even in the normal section, the counter for the number of games remaining in the advantageous section is subtracted by the input processing as in the advantageous section. By configuring in this way, the capacity of the program can be increased by counting the number of games remaining in the advantageous section counter without distinguishing between the normal section and the advantageous section and sharing the processing between the normal section and the advantageous section. It can be reduced, and the processing can be simplified while simplifying the content of the processing.

<< Changes in the difference counter >>
FIG. 225 (a) is a diagram showing changes in the difference number counter when the lottery result is lost. FIG. 225 (b) is a diagram showing changes in the difference number counter when the lottery result is a bell.

In FIGS. 225 (a) and 225 (b), the horizontal axis represents the number of games, and the vertical axis represents the counter value of the difference number counter. In FIGS. 225 (a) and 225 (b), the portion indicated by the downward solid arrow (the portion where the value of the difference number counter decreases downward) indicates the process in which the difference number counter is subtracted by the start of the game. Further, among the parts where the value of the difference number counter increases upward, the part indicated by the upward solid arrow indicates the process in which the difference number counter is added by winning.

As shown in FIG. 225 (a), first, the game is started (for example, a lever-on operation), the difference number counter is subtracted, and the three left reels M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53 rotate. Next, the left reel M51 is stopped by the operation of the left stop button, the middle reel M52 is stopped by the operation of the middle stop button, and the right reel M53 is stopped by the operation of the right stop button. When the three left reels M51, middle reel M52, and right reel M53 are stopped, the symbols are stopped and displayed, and in the example shown in FIG. 225 (a), the symbols are lost (indicated by black circles). Is stopped and displayed). In case of loss, the difference number counter does not change (does not add to the counter value). When the next game is started, the difference number counter is subtracted again. The subtraction timing of the difference number counter value may be any timing from the operation timing of the start lever to the activation of the operation of the stop button. As an example outside the above period, for example, if the difference number counter value is subtracted at the bet button (max bet button) operation timing, the settlement button is operated before the start lever is operated thereafter. Since it is necessary to add the difference number counter value, the data capacity used for the addition / subtraction process of the difference number counter value becomes large.

As shown in FIG. 225 (b), first, the game is started (for example, a lever-on operation), the difference number counter is subtracted, and the three left reels M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53 rotate. Next, the left reel M51 is stopped by the operation of the left stop button, the middle reel M52 is stopped by the operation of the middle stop button, and the right reel M53 is stopped by the operation of the right stop button. When the three left reels M51, middle reel M52, and right reel M53 are stopped, the symbol is stopped and displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 225 (b), the bell symbol is stopped and displayed (displayed as a white square). The value corresponding to the stop display of is added to the difference number counter. When the next game is started, the difference number counter is subtracted again.

<< Example of change in the difference number counter (zero correction) >>
FIG. 226 is a diagram showing how the difference number counter changes as the game progresses during the advantageous section. In FIG. 226, the stop operation is omitted, and the value of the difference number counter that changes as a plurality of games are played is shown.

In FIG. 226, the horizontal axis indicates the number of games, and the vertical axis indicates the difference number counter. In FIG. 226, the portion indicated by the downward solid arrow (the portion where the value of the difference number counter decreases downward) indicates the process in which the difference number counter is subtracted by the start of the game. Further, among the parts where the value of the difference number counter increases upward, the part indicated by the upward solid arrow indicates the process in which the difference number counter is added by winning. Further, the upward broken line arrow in the portion where the value of the difference number counter increases upward indicates the zero correction process. Furthermore, the black dots indicate the loss. Hereinafter, changes in the difference number counter will be described for the games M to V shown in FIG. 226.

<Game M>
In the game M, the difference number counter is subtracted by the input process to become 0. The game M is lost, and the difference number counter value remains 0.

<Game N>
Next, in the game N, the difference number counter is subtracted by the input process and becomes less than 0. Game N is a loss, and the difference number counter value becomes 0 by zero correction.

<Game O>
Next, even in the game O, the difference number counter is subtracted by the input process and becomes less than 0. Game O is a loss, and the difference number counter value becomes 0 by zero correction.

<Game P>
Next, in the game P, the difference number counter is subtracted by the input process and becomes less than 0. In the game P, the small winning combination is won (the combination of symbols related to the small winning combination is stopped and displayed), and the game medal is paid out, so that the difference counter value is 0 or more.

<Game Q>
Next, in the game Q, the difference number counter value is subtracted by the input process and becomes 0 or more and less than 0. The game Q is a loss, and the difference number counter value becomes 0 by zero correction.

<Game R>
Next, in the game R, the difference number counter is subtracted by the input process and becomes less than 0. Game R is a loss, and the difference number counter value becomes 0 by zero correction.

<Game S>
Next, in the game S, the difference number counter is subtracted by the input process and becomes less than 0. Game S is a prize, and the difference number counter value is 0 or more.

<Game T>
In the game T, the difference number counter is subtracted by the input process and becomes 0 or more and less than 0. In the game T, the small winning combination is won (the combination of symbols related to the small winning combination is stopped and displayed), and the game medal is paid out, so that the difference counter value is 0 or more.
<Game U>
In the game U, the difference number counter is subtracted by the input process, but it becomes 0 or more. Game U is a prize, and the difference number counter is further increased when it is 0 or more.
<Game V>
In the game V, the difference number counter is subtracted by the input process, but it becomes 0 or more. Although not shown, after that, the small winning combination wins (the symbol combination related to the small winning combination is stopped and displayed), and the game medal is paid out, so that the difference number counter is further increased when it is 0 or more.

<< Example of change in the difference number counter (cleared when 2400 sheets are reached) >>
FIG. 227 is a diagram showing how the difference number counter changes as the game progresses. In FIG. 227, the horizontal axis indicates the number of games, and the vertical axis indicates the difference number counter. In FIG. 227, the portion indicated by the downward solid arrow (the portion where the value of the difference number counter decreases downward) indicates the process in which the difference number counter is subtracted by the start of the game. Further, among the parts where the value of the difference number counter increases upward, the part indicated by the upward solid arrow indicates the process in which the difference number counter is added by winning. Further, the upward broken line arrow in the portion where the value of the difference number counter increases upward indicates the zero correction or clearing process. Furthermore, the black dots indicate the loss. Hereinafter, changes in the difference number counter will be described for games A to I shown in FIG. 227.

<Game A>
In the game A, the difference number counter is subtracted by the input process, but it becomes 0 or more. In game A, the small winning combination is won (the combination of symbols related to the small winning combination is stopped and displayed), and the game medal is paid out. Therefore, the difference counter value is further increased when it is 0 or more.

<Game B>
In the game B, the difference number counter is subtracted by the input process, but it becomes 0 or more. Game B is a loss, and the difference number counter value does not change.

<Games C, D, E>
In the games C, D, and E, the difference number counter is subtracted by the input processing, but it becomes 0 or more. In games C, D, and E, the small winning combination is won (the combination of symbols related to the small winning combination is stopped and displayed), and the game medal is paid out. Therefore, the difference counter value gradually increases when it is 0 or more. By increasing the difference number counter in game E, the number reaches 2400. As a result, the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, and the difference number counter is cleared to 0.

<Game F>
Next, in the game F, in the normal section, the difference number counter is subtracted by the input processing and becomes less than 0. Game F is a loss, and the difference number counter value becomes 0 by zero correction.

<Game G>
Next, in the game G, the difference number counter is subtracted by the input process and becomes less than 0. In the game G, the small winning combination is won (the combination of symbols related to the small winning combination is stopped and displayed), and the game medal is paid out. Therefore, the difference counter value is added and becomes 0 or more.

<Game H>
Next, in the game H, the difference number counter is subtracted by the input process and becomes less than 0. Game H is a loss, and the difference number counter value becomes 0 by zero correction.

<< Example of change in the difference number counter (when shifting to an advantageous section by replay) >>
FIG. 228 is a diagram showing how the difference number counter changes as the game progresses. In FIG. 228, the horizontal axis indicates the number of games, and the vertical axis indicates the difference number counter. In FIG. 228, the portion of the downward solid arrow (the portion where the value of the difference number counter decreases downward) shows the process in which the difference number counter is subtracted by the start of the game. Further, among the parts where the value of the difference number counter increases upward, the part indicated by the upward solid arrow indicates the process in which the difference number counter is added by winning. Furthermore, the black dots indicate the loss. Hereinafter, changes in the difference number counter will be described for games X to Z shown in FIG. 228.

<Game X>
In the game X, the difference number counter value is subtracted by the input process and becomes 0. Game X is a loss, and the difference number counter value remains 0.

<Game Y>
Next, in the game Y, the difference number counter value is subtracted by the input process and becomes less than 0. In the game Y, the lottery result is a replay (re-game), the symbol combination related to the re-game is stopped and displayed, and the automatic bet results in 0. This game Y wins the advantageous section transition lottery, and the next game Z shifts to the advantageous section.

<Game Z>
Next, in the game Z, the difference number counter value is subtracted by the input process related to the automatic bet of the re-game, and the value becomes less than 0. Game Z is a prize, and the difference number counter is added to become 0 or more. For the player, since the game in which the re-game is won is the final game in the normal section, the bet related to the first game in the advantageous section has already been executed by the automatic bet related to the re-game, so that the difference number is reached. The counter value is subtracted by the number of automatic bets related to the re-game, but the number of newly inserted (bet) game medals in the advantageous section is 0. From this, in the situation as shown in FIG. 228, when the difference number counter value continues to increase without being corrected to zero after shifting to the advantageous section and the end condition of 2400 sheets is satisfied, the difference number counter is set. In the situation of 2399, the game is newly executed with a bet of 3 cards, the counter value becomes 2396, the symbol combination for paying out 15 cards is stopped and displayed, the difference number counter value becomes 2411, and the advantageous section ends. In some cases. From this, in the situation as shown in FIG. 228, since "-3" is changed to "2411" by the input processing related to the automatic bet of the re-game in the first game, the difference number counter after shifting to the advantageous section The maximum increase is "2414". Further, as a modification, in the case where the game can be executed by betting one card, the difference counter value continues to increase without being corrected to zero after shifting to the advantageous section, and the end condition of 2400 cards is satisfied. In that case, the game is newly executed with one bet in the situation where the difference number counter is 2399, the counter value becomes 2398, the symbol combination for paying out 15 sheets is stopped and displayed, and the difference number counter value is 2413. And the advantageous section may end. From this, when the game is configured to be playable with one bet, it changes from "-3" to "2413" due to the input processing related to the automatic bet of the re-game in the first game, so that the section shifts to an advantageous section. The maximum increase number of the difference number counter from is "2416".

In addition, as the configuration regarding the difference number counter described above, the advantageous section is terminated when the difference number counter value reaches 2400, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the difference number counter value exceeds 2400 (difference). It may be configured to end the advantageous section when the number counter value reaches 2401). In the case of such a configuration, in the situation as shown in FIG. 228, the difference number counter value continues to increase without being corrected to zero after shifting to the advantageous section, and the end condition exceeding 2400 sheets is satisfied. In the situation where the difference number counter is 2400, the game is newly executed with a bet of 3 cards, the counter value becomes 2397, the symbol combination for paying out 15 cards is stopped and displayed, and the difference number counter value is 2412. The advantageous section may end. From this, when the configuration in which the advantageous section ends when the difference number counter value exceeds 2400 is applied to the situation as shown in FIG. Since it changes from "3" to "2412", the maximum increase number of the difference number counter after shifting to the advantageous section is "2415". Further, as a modification, when the advantageous section ends when the difference number counter value exceeds 2400 and the game can be executed with one bet, the difference number counter value after shifting to the advantageous section. Continues to increase without being corrected to zero, and if the end condition exceeding 2400 is satisfied, the game is executed with a new bet of 2400 in the situation where the difference counter is 2400, and the counter value is 2399. Therefore, the combination of symbols to be paid out of 15 sheets may be stopped and displayed, the difference number counter value may be 2414, and the advantageous section may end. From this, when the advantageous section ends when the difference counter value exceeds 2400, and the game is configured to be playable with one bet, the input process related to the automatic bet of the re-game in the first game is performed. Since "-3" is changed to "2414" according to the above, the maximum increase number of the difference number counter after shifting to the advantageous section is "2417". It should be added that the configuration of ending the advantageous section when the difference number counter value exceeds 2400 is applicable to all the embodiments.

When the replay shifts to the advantageous section in this way, the difference number counter is counted from less than 0.

<<< Modification 1 of the sixth embodiment >>>
As described above, the difference number counter and the number of games remaining in the advantageous section counter are counters for determining the end condition of the advantageous section, and it is only necessary to count in the advantageous section, and it is not necessary to count in the normal section. However, in the above-mentioned example, an example in which the same counting as in the advantageous section is executed even in the normal section is shown. In the following, an example of not counting in the normal section is shown.

<Difference number counter>
In games 1 to 3 shown in FIG. 229 (a), the same processing as in FIG. 224 (a) described above is executed. In game 3, the difference number counter is cleared and becomes zero.

The games 4 to 6 are normal sections. First, in the games 4 to 6, the game is started by the input processing, but the difference number counter is not subtracted and the value is held and the zero number is maintained.

In games 7 to 9, the same processing as in FIG. 224 described above is executed.

<Counter for the number of games remaining in the advantageous section>
In games 1 to 3 shown in FIG. 229 (b), the same processing as in FIG. 224 (b) described above is executed. In game 3, the counter for the number of games remaining in the advantageous section is cleared and the number of cards becomes zero.

Games 4 to 6 are normal sections. First, in games 4 to 6, the game is started by the input processing, but the value is held without subtracting the counter for the number of remaining games in the advantageous section, and zero cards are maintained. Will be done.

In games 7 to 9, the same processing as in FIG. 224 (b) described above is executed, and the counter for the number of remaining games in the advantageous section is subtracted by 1 by the input processing.

<<< Modification 2 of the sixth embodiment >>>
One of the features of the second modification of the sixth embodiment is that the advantageous section transition lottery can be performed not only in the general game but also in the game state other than the general game including the inside of the BB. That is, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, other than in general (the state in which the bonus is not operating and the condition device related to the bonus is not won is called general), inside BB, inside general, and inside BB. It is possible to draw an advantageous section transition even in the game state of. In the following, this feature will be described using the table shown in FIG. 230. FIG. 230 is a table showing the number of values for determining the winning probability of each of the conditional devices in each of the plurality of gaming states. The table shown in FIG. 230 also shows the processing related to the advantageous section and the probability of transition to the advantageous section. The processing related to the advantageous section and the probability of transition to the advantageous section will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 230, the gaming states include general (RT0 and RT1), BB internal, CB, type 1 BB1RB, and type 1 BB2RB. Inside the BB, the role of BB has been won and no prize has been won, and here, it may be simply abbreviated as inside the inside. If the conditions described below are satisfied, the advantageous section transition lottery can be performed even inside the BB. Further, the general state is a state in which the inside of the BB is not inside and the BB is not in operation.

In the example shown in FIG. 230, the conditional device is a replay combination, a winning combination, and a bonus. The replay role includes replay 1, replay 2, and replay 3. Winners include bells, watermelons, and cherries. Bonuses include CB, Type 1 BB1 and Type 1 BB2.

As described above, in the second modification of the sixth embodiment, if the predetermined conditions are satisfied, the advantageous section transition lottery is performed even in the gaming state other than the general, BB internal, general medium, and BB internal. It is possible. This advantageous section transition lottery is a lottery for shifting from a normal section to an advantageous section. In the following, the conditions for enabling the advantageous section transition lottery will be described.

<First condition for being able to draw an advantageous section transition>
First, in the gaming state where the number of lottery processes of the condition device is the same as the number of lottery processes of the condition device in general, the advantageous section transition lottery can be performed. That is, it is not possible to perform an advantageous section transition lottery in a gaming state in which the number of placements fluctuates based on the number of placements in the lottery processing of the condition device in general.

For example, in the replay 1 shown in FIG. 230, the number of lottery processes of the condition device in the general (RT0, RT1) is 8978 (dashed line portion), and the lottery process of the condition device in the inside of the BB and in the type 1 BB2RB is performed. The number of units is also 8978 (dashed line portion), and when the replay 1 is won in the general middle (RT0, RT1), the inside of the BB, and the type 1 BB2RB, the advantageous section transition lottery can be executed. On the other hand, the number in CB is 16384, the number in 1 BB1RB is 0, and it is different from the number 8978 in general (RT0, RT1). Even if you win, you cannot execute the advantageous section transition lottery.

Further, in the replay 2 shown in FIG. 230, the number of lottery processes of the condition device in RT0 in general is 500, and the number of lottery processes of the condition device in RT1 in general is 18,000, and the number of lottery processes in the BB is inside. The number of lottery processes of the condition device is 500. The number of RT0s in general and the number in BB are 500, which are the same values, but the number of RT1s in general varies from the number of RT0s in general, and is in general. Since the number of lottery processes of the conditional device fluctuates in the above, it is not possible to use the number of lottery processes of the conditional device as a reference in general. Therefore, in any game state, winning the replay 2 is an advantageous section. You cannot run a transition lottery.

Further, in the watermelon shown in FIG. 230, the number of lottery processes of the condition device in the general middle (RT0, RT1) is 180 (broken line portion), and the lottery of the condition device in the inside of the BB, in the CB, and in the type 1 BB2RB. The number of processing is 180 (dashed line part), and when a watermelon is won in the general middle (RT0, RT1), in the BB, in the CB, and in the type 1 BB2RB, the advantageous section transition lottery can be executed. .. On the other hand, the number of lottery processes of the condition device in the type 1 BB1RB is 500, which is different from the number 180 in the general (RT0, RT1), so even if the watermelon is won in the type 1 BB1RB. It is not possible to execute the advantageous section transition lottery.

<Example of conditions under which the advantageous section transition lottery cannot be executed>
When the lottery probability of the conditional device in general and the lottery probability of the conditional device in the BB internal medium state are different, the conditional device is configured not to execute the advantageous section transition lottery.

For example, in the replay 3 shown in FIG. 230, the number of positions related to the replay 3 in the general middle (RT0 and RT1) is 200, and the number of positions related to the replay 3 in the BB is 10, which is more general than in the BB. Medium (RT0 and RT1) is more advantageous. Therefore, even if the replay 3 is won in any of the game states, the advantageous section transition lottery cannot be executed.

<Second condition for being able to draw an advantageous section transition>
Even if the condition device does not change the number of values in the lottery process, for the condition device that is determined not to perform the advantageous section transition lottery in general, the advantageous section transition lottery shall be performed even in other gaming states including the inside of the BB. Can't.

For example, in the bell shown in FIG. 230, the number of conditional devices placed in the general middle (RT0, RT1) is 8192, and the number of placed conditional devices in the inside of the BB and in the CB is also 8192. The number does not change. Therefore, as a general rule, when the bell is won in the general (RT0 and RT1), BB internal, and CB, the advantageous section transition lottery can be performed. However, when it is decided that the advantageous section transition lottery will not be held even if the bell is won in the general middle (RT0 and RT1) due to playability, etc., it is the case that the bell is won in the inside of the BB or in the CB. However, it is not possible to draw an advantageous section transition lottery.

In addition, it can be arbitrarily determined whether or not to draw an advantageous section transition lottery in a game state other than general.

For example, in the cherry shown in FIG. 230, the number of lottery processes of the condition device in all the gaming states in the general (RT0, RT1), BB internal, CB, 1st class BB1RB, and 1st class BB2RB is 256. However, due to playability, etc., when a cherry is won in the 1st class BB2RB, even if it is decided not to draw an advantageous section transition lottery, the general middle (RT0, RT1), the inside of the BB, the middle of the CB, If the cherry is won in the type 1 BB1RB (dashed line portion), the advantageous section transition lottery can be performed.

<For bonus role>
The bonus combination type 1 BB1 or type 1 BB2 is a condition device that can be selected by lottery processing in general, but inside the BB, the type 1 BB1 or the type 1 BB2 has already been won. Therefore, you will not win by lottery processing. Therefore, it can be said that the number of bonus combinations varies between the general and the inside of the BB, but in the case of the bonus combination, as an exception, a lottery for shifting to an advantageous section in the general can be performed. It should be noted that the bonus combination in the general market may or may not be used for the advantageous section transition lottery, but in the present embodiment, it is premised that the bonus combination in the general market is used for the advantageous section transition lottery.

Further, in the CB shown in FIG. 230, the number of the conditional devices in the general (RT0, RT1) and the CB is 64, and the number of the conditional devices in the BB is 0. In this way, the number of condition devices placed inside the BB fluctuates at 0, but for the CB, which is a bonus combination, when the CB is won during the general (RT0, RT1) and CB, the advantageous section transition lottery is held. can do.

Similarly, in the type 1 BB1 shown in FIG. 230, the number of conditioned devices in the general (RT0, RT1) and CB is 100, and the number of conditioned devices in the BB is 0. In this way, the number of condition devices placed inside the BB fluctuates at 0, but the 1st class BB1 which is a bonus combination is advantageous when the 1st class BB1 is won in the general (RT0, RT1) and CB. A section transition lottery can be held.

Further, in the type 1 BB2 shown in FIG. 230, the number of conditioned devices in the general (RT0, RT1) and CB is 25, and the number of conditioned devices in the BB is 0. In this way, the number of condition devices placed inside the BB fluctuates at 0, but the 1st class BB2, which is a bonus combination, is advantageous when the 1st class BB2 is won in the general (RT0, RT1) and CB. A section transition lottery can be held.

The number shown in the column of "number of lottery for advantageous section transition" in the table shown in FIG. 230 is the number of lottery processing for shifting from the normal section to the advantageous section when each of the conditional devices is won. Further, the value shown in the column of "advantageous section transition probability" in the table shown in FIG. 230 is the probability of transition from the normal section to the advantageous section when each of the conditional devices is won.

For example, the replay 1 shown in FIG. 230 is won with a probability of 8978/65536 in general (RT0, RT1) and the like. Further, when Replay 1 is won, there is a probability of 64/65536 to shift from the normal section to the advantageous section. Therefore, the probability of winning Replay 1 and shifting from the normal section to the advantageous section is 2.34 / 17500.

Further, the watermelon shown in FIG. 230 is won with a probability of 180/65536 in general (RT0, RT1) and the like. Furthermore, when the watermelon is won, there is a probability of 16384/65536 to shift from the normal section to the advantageous section. Therefore, the probability of winning a watermelon and shifting from a normal section to an advantageous section is 12.02 / 17500.

Further, the cherry shown in FIG. 230 is won with a probability of 256/65536 in general (RT0, RT1) and the like. Furthermore, when the cherry is won, there is a probability of 4096/65536 to shift from the normal section to the advantageous section. Therefore, the probability of winning the cherry and shifting from the normal section to the advantageous section is 4.27 / 17500.

Further, the CB shown in FIG. 230 is won with a probability of 64/65536 in general (RT0, RT1) and the like. Furthermore, when the CB is won, there is a probability of 4096/65536 to shift from the normal section to the advantageous section. Therefore, the probability of winning the CB and shifting from the normal section to the advantageous section is 1.07 / 17500.

Further, the type 1 BB1 shown in FIG. 230 is won with a probability of 100/65536 in general (RT0, RT1) and the like. Furthermore, when one type BB1 is won, there is a probability of 4096/65536 to shift from the normal section to the advantageous section. Therefore, the probability of winning the Type 1 BB1 and shifting from the normal section to the advantageous section is 1.67 / 17500.

Further, the type 1 BB2 shown in FIG. 230 is won with a probability of 25/65536 in general (RT0, RT1) and the like. Furthermore, when the first class BB2 is won, there is a probability of 32768/65536 to shift from the normal section to the advantageous section. Therefore, the probability of winning the Type 1 BB2 and shifting from the normal section to the advantageous section is 3.34 / 17500.

<Normal section and advantageous section>
In the normal section, the lottery for shifting to the advantageous section must be performed in association with the lottery of the conditional device, but in the advantageous section, the lottery process can be performed without being linked to the lottery of the conditional device, so that the advantageous section is possible. I want to move to. Therefore, we would like to shift to the advantageous section by lottery of the conditional device in the general and inside the BB, but the conditional device that can perform the advantageous section transition lottery in the BB is limited to the conditional device that can perform the advantageous section transition lottery even in the general. Has been done.

<In CB (Type 2 special character)>
In the CB, the game can be executed on the assumption that all the condition devices related to the prize are unconditionally won (all the condition devices related to the prize are operating). In this way, all the conditional devices related to the prize are unconditionally won. Further, during the CB, the internal lottery may be executed (replay, bonus, etc.), or the internal lottery may not be executed. Further, when the internal lottery is not executed during the CB, it is preferable to configure so that the advantageous section transition lottery is not executed during the CB, and when the internal lottery is executed during the CB, the result of the internal lottery is If the condition device that can execute the advantageous section transition lottery is won in general, the advantageous section transition lottery may be configured to be executable.

<Relationship with the specified number>
The table shown in FIG. 230 is for when the specified number is 3, but the specified number as in the sixth embodiment is such that the game can be executed with two or three pieces, and the cherry is used as a winning combination. As an execution mode of the advantageous section transition lottery in the game in which the cherry A is won in the gaming machine having A,
(1) In general, if the number of winning cherries differs between the specified number of 3 cards and the specified number of 2 cards, the advantageous section transition lottery will not be executed due to the winning of Cherry A.
(2) In general, even if the number of cherries to be won is different between the specified number of 3 sheets and the specified number of 2 sheets, the above-mentioned advantageous section transition lottery can be executed for each specified number in FIG. 230. In the state, it is possible to execute the advantageous section transition lottery by winning Cherry A.
(3) The number of payouts when the symbol combination related to Cherry A when the specified number of cards is 3 is stopped and displayed is the same as the number of payouts when the symbol combination related to Cherry A when the specified number of cards is 2 is stopped and displayed. In general, even if the number of winning cherries is different between the specified number of 3 sheets and the specified number of 2 sheets, in a state where the above-mentioned advantageous section transition lottery described in FIG. 230 can be executed for each specified number. By winning Cherry A, it is possible to execute an advantageous section transition lottery,
(4) The number of payouts when the symbol combination related to Cherry A when the specified number of cards is 3 is stopped and displayed is different from the number of payouts when the symbol combination related to Cherry A when the specified number of cards is 2 is stopped and displayed. In general, even if the number of cherries to be won is different between the specified number of 3 sheets and the specified number of 2 sheets, the above-mentioned advantageous section transition lottery described in FIG. 230 can be executed for each specified number. Can execute the advantageous section transition lottery by winning Cherry A,
It may be configured as described above.

FIG. 231 is an RT state transition diagram (upper row) and an AT state transition diagram (lower row) realized by the table shown in FIG. 230.

<RT state transition>
After the RAM is initialized, the RT state shifts to RT0 (replay winning probability: low) in general, and the symbol of the replay combination (replay 1 etc.) is stopped and displayed in RT0 in general. , Shift between RT1 (replay winning probability: high) in general. In addition, in RT1 (replay winning probability: high) in general, the symbols such as the replay combination (replay 2) are stopped and displayed, so that the game is between RT1 (replay winning probability: low) in general. Transition.

In addition, by winning the 1st class BB at the time of general (RT0 or RT1), it shifts to the inside of the 1st class BB, and the symbol combination related to the 1st class BB is stopped and displayed inside the 1st class BB. It shifts during the operation of Type 1 BB. By satisfying the end condition in Type 1 BB, it returns to General Medium (RT0).

Further, when the 1st class BB is won during the general event (RT0 or RT1) and the symbol combination related to the 1st class BB is stopped and displayed in the game, the game shifts to the 1st class BB operation.

Further, when the CB is won during the general game (RT0 or RT1) and the symbol combination related to the CB is stopped and displayed in the game, the game shifts to the CB operation. By satisfying the end condition during CB operation, the system returns to the general state (RT0 or RT1) which is the RT state at the time of CB winning (or may be RT0 or RT1 even during CB operation).

<AT state transition>
The AT state is a normal section and an advantageous section, and a predetermined condition (for example, when the advantageous section transition lottery is won in the normal section, the transition to the advantageous section is performed, and the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied in the advantageous section. In some cases, it shifts to the normal section) to shift between the normal section and the advantageous section. In the normal section, when the condition device (replay 1, watermelon, cherry, CB, type 1 BB1, type 1 BB2, etc. shown in FIG. 231) is won, the advantageous section transition lottery is executed, and a predetermined probability (see FIG. 231). Advantageous section transition When you win with the probability determined by the number of lottery values shown), you will be transferred to the advantageous section. The advantageous section includes a high probability state, an AT in-probability state, and a CZ, and has a probability shown in the column of "advantageous section transition processing" in FIG. Move to either.

For example, if you win Replay 1 and win the advantageous section transition lottery process, there is a 58/64 probability of shifting from the normal section to the advantageous section in the high probability state (20 games), and the probability of 6/64. Then, it shifts from the normal section to the advantageous section of CZ (the number of games is 20 times).

In addition, if you win the watermelon and win the advantageous section transition lottery process, there is a 31/64 probability that you will shift from the normal section to the advantageous section (20 games) in a high probability state, and there is a 32/64 probability. , It shifts from the normal section to the advantageous section of CZ (the number of games is 20 times), and with a probability of 1/64, it shifts from the normal section to the advantageous section in the AT state (the number of games is 20 times).

In addition, if the cherry is won and the advantageous section transition lottery process is won, there is a 42/64 probability of shifting from the normal section to the advantageous section (20 games) in a high probability state, and a 21/64 probability. , It shifts from the normal section to the advantageous section of CZ (10 games), and with a probability of 1/64, it shifts from the normal section to the advantageous section in the AT state (20 games).

In addition, if you win the CB and win the advantageous section transition lottery process, there is a 32/64 probability that you will shift from the normal section to the advantageous section (20 games) in a high probability state, and there is a 32/64 probability. , Shift from the normal section to the advantageous section in the AT state (50 games).

In addition, if you win the 1st class BB1 and win the advantageous section transition lottery process, there is a 32/64 probability of shifting from the normal section to the advantageous section in the high probability state (20 games), and 32/64. With a probability, it shifts from the normal section to the advantageous section in the AT state (50 games).

In addition, if you win the 1st class BB2 and win the advantageous section transition lottery process, there is a 32/64 probability of shifting from the normal section to the advantageous section in the high probability state (20 games), and 32/64. With a probability, it shifts from the normal section to the advantageous section in the AT state (50 games).

When the end condition is satisfied in each of the high probability state, AT in progress state, and CZ of the advantageous section, the process returns to the normal section. As described above, the end conditions of the advantageous section include (1) when the number of games in the advantageous section exceeds 1500, and (2) when the difference number counted from the starting game exceeds 2400, (3). ) Arbitrary conditions (for example, the number of remaining AT games is 0, the continuous lottery related to the number of sets is not won, and the predetermined game has passed since the game became CZ without winning the AT lottery in CZ. Arbitrary conditions include performing a stop operation in a push order different from the push order displayed on the push order display device D270, shifting the RT state, shifting the state related to AT, and activating the bonus). There are three.

In the second modification of the sixth embodiment, the advantageous section is configured to have a high probability state, an AT in-probability state, and a CZ. It is a state related to AT that executes push order navigation (relatively likely to be executed) in the game that won the push order role of, and the high probability state and CZ are easier to shift to the AT state than the normal state. It is in a state related to AT. In addition, CZ is in a state related to AT that is easier to shift to the AT state than the high probability state. For example, in a game in which the cherry is won in the normal state, the right to shift to the AT state is acquired at 1/1000. , In the game where the cherry is won in the high probability state, the right to shift to the AT state is acquired at 1/10, and in the game where the cherry is won in the CZ, the right to shift to the AT state is acquired at 1/1. It may be configured as follows.

<<< Modification 3 of the sixth embodiment >>>
<When drawing a lottery to shift to an advantageous section by winning a bonus in general>
FIG. 232 (a-1) is a table showing an advantageous section transition lottery in the general public, and FIG. 232 (a-2) is a table showing an advantageous section transition lottery in the inside of the BB. In FIGS. 232 (a-1) and (a-2), for the sake of simplicity, the lottery results of the conditional devices are set to "normal replay", "small role", "bonus", and "loss". As described above, the condition device capable of performing the advantageous section transition lottery inside the BB can be drawn even during the general period, and the number of lottery processes of the condition device is different between the general area and the inside of the BB. It does not fluctuate.

As shown in the advantageous section transition lottery (a-1), the lottery results in the general public are "normal replay", "small role", and "bonus". On the other hand, as shown in the advantageous section transition lottery (a-2), the lottery results inside the BB are "normal replay", "small role", and "loss". As mentioned above, in the inside of the bonus (for example, inside the type 1 BB), if a random number that will win the bonus in general is acquired, the condition device related to the bonus has already been won. , The bonus is not newly won, and in the figure, the case where a random number that will win the bonus is acquired inside the bonus is regarded as "missing". In addition, the winning rate and the presence / absence of execution of the advantageous section transition lottery between the normal replay and the small winning combination are the same between the general middle and the internal bonus. In addition, depending on the winning of the bonus in the general (winning of the condition device related to the bonus), the advantageous section transition lottery can be won, but in the case of loss in the bonus, the advantageous section transition lottery is not executed (not won). The middle and the inside of the bonus are configured so that the general middle is easier to win the advantageous section transition lottery (it is easier to shift to the advantageous section). In addition, although it is possible to win the advantageous section transition lottery by winning the bonus in general, it is configured not to win the AT lottery by winning the bonus.

In this way, even in the gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment, which is a gaming property in which the game progresses within the bonus by configuring to execute the advantageous section transition lottery even in the general public, the manager of the amusement park. Even if he forgets to execute the game with two bets and shift to the inside of the bonus (RT2), the player can execute the advantageous section transition lottery even during the general public, so the player is disadvantaged. It can be hard to wear. In addition, even when the player executes the game after the manager of the amusement place executes the game with a bet of two cards and shifts to the inside of the bonus (RT2), the lottery for shifting to the advantageous section is performed by winning the bonus in the general. In order to win the prize, the player can start the game from the advantageous section on the first day of introduction in the game hall, so that the operation of the game machine can be improved. Similarly, by configuring the general public to win the advantageous section transition lottery more easily than the inside of the bonus, the player can start the game from the advantageous section on the first day of introduction in the amusement park. Moreover, since the player can start the game after the manager has executed the game in the general public where it is easy to win the advantageous section transition lottery, it is possible to increase the possibility that the player will start the game from the advantageous section.

<If you do not draw a lottery to shift to an advantageous section due to winning a bonus in general>
FIG. 232 (b-1) is a table showing an advantageous section transition lottery in the general public, and FIG. 232 (b-2) is a table showing an advantageous section transition lottery in the inside of the BB. Also in FIGS. 232 (b-1) and (b-2), the result of the lottery of the conditional device is "normally replayed" for the sake of simplicity, as in FIGS. 232 (a-1) and (a-2) described above. "Small role", "bonus" and "miss".

As shown in the advantageous section transition lottery (b-1), the lottery results in the general public are "normal replay", "small role", and "bonus". In the example shown in the advantageous section transition lottery (b-1), in general, even if the "bonus" is won, the advantageous section transition lottery is not performed. In addition, the winning rate and the presence / absence of execution of the advantageous section transition lottery between the normal replay and the small winning combination are the same between the general middle and the internal bonus. On the other hand, as shown in the advantageous section transition lottery (b-2), the lottery results inside the BB are "normal replay", "small role", and "loss". Inside the BB, the bonus is won and the bonus is not won, so the "bonus" is not won. Therefore, in the inside of the BB, as in the advantageous section transition lottery (a-2), the "bonus" in the general is made to correspond to the "loss". For example, the area from the lower limit value to the upper limit value that determines the number of "bonus" in the general is changed so as to be associated with the "loss" in the BB.

As described above, in the examples shown in FIGS. 232 (b-1) and (b-2), neither the "bonus" in the general nor the "loss" in the inside of the BB does not draw the advantageous section transition lottery. Therefore, both in general and inside the BB, the advantageous section transition lottery is performed only by "normal replay" and "small role". In this configuration, the ease of transition to the advantageous section in the general is the same as the ease of transition to the advantageous section in the BB. That is, (easy to shift to the advantageous section in the general) = (easy to shift to the advantageous section in the BB) is established.

In this way, by making the winning ease of the advantageous section transition lottery the same between the general and the inside of the bonus, the player intentionally executes the game with a two-card bet, which is different from the normal game method. Even if the game is executed by the game method and transferred to the general public, it is not advantageous for the player, so that it is possible to prevent a situation in which an unintended capture is made.

<Relationship between winning the advantageous section and winning the AT>
FIG. 232 (c-1) is a table showing the relationship between the advantageous section transition lottery and AT winning in the general public, and FIG. 232 (c-2) shows the relationship between the advantageous section transition lottery and AT winning in the BB interior. It is a table to show. In FIGS. 232 (c-1) and (c-2), for the sake of simplicity, the result of the lottery of the conditional device is "normal replay", "bell", "watermelon", "cherry", "bonus", and "missing". I made it. As described above, the condition device capable of performing the advantageous section transition lottery inside the BB can be drawn even during the general period, and the number of lottery processes of the condition device is different between the general area and the inside of the BB. It does not fluctuate.

As shown in FIG. 232 (c-1), the lottery results in general are "normal replay", "bell", "watermelon", "cherry", and "bonus". In general, the advantageous section transition lottery can be performed corresponding to all of "normal replay", "bell", "watermelon", "cherry" and "bonus". In this way, the advantageous section transition lottery can be executed corresponding to all the conditional devices of "normal replay", "bell", "watermelon", "cherry" and "bonus", but the winning of AT is "watermelon". Only two condition devices, "cherry" and "cherry", are supported.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 232 (c-2), the lottery results inside the BB are "normal replay", "bell", "watermelon", "cherry", and "loss". Inside the BB, the bonus is won and the bonus is not won, so the "bonus" is not won. Therefore, inside the BB, the "bonus" in the general is made to correspond to the "loss". For example, the area from the lower limit value to the upper limit value that determines the number of "bonus" in the general is changed so as to be associated with the "loss" in the BB.

Inside the BB, an advantageous section transition lottery can be performed corresponding to "normal replay", "bell", "watermelon", and "cherry". The winning of the AT corresponds only to the two conditional devices of "watermelon" and "cherry", so-called rare roles, as in the general case.

As a gaming store, we want to increase the operating rate of gaming machines by making it easier to shift to advantageous sections. However, if the AT winning is always executed in the advantageous section transition lottery, the disadvantage of the game store becomes large, and considering the balance between the profit of the game store and the profit of the player, it can be said that it is rather overkill.

However, depending on the type of the conditional device, there is a possibility that a sufficient balance can be achieved even if the AT is won in the advantageous section transition lottery. For example, if a rare role such as "cherry" or "watermelon" is used to shift to an advantageous section, the profit can be balanced even if the AT is won immediately.

<Expectation of AT winning>
The expectation of winning the AT can be higher for rare roles such as "cherry" and "watermelon" than for bonuses. That is, (expectation of AT winning corresponding to "watermelon")> (expectation of AT winning corresponding to "bonus") or (expectation of AT winning corresponding to "cherry")>("bonus" The corresponding AT winning expectation) is established.

<Expected degree of winning in advantageous section>
On the other hand, the expectation of winning the advantageous section is the same for all conditional devices. That is, (expectation of winning the advantageous section corresponding to "watermelon") = (expectation of winning of the advantageous section corresponding to "bonus") or (expectation of winning of the advantageous section corresponding to "cherry"). = (Expectation of winning the advantageous section corresponding to the "bonus") is established.

In this way, the expectation of winning the advantageous section is the same for all the condition devices, so that the expectation of the player can be increased, and the expectation of winning the AT can be set to rare such as "cherry" and "watermelon". By enhancing only the role, it is possible to balance the profit of the game store and the profit of the player.

As described above, in the configuration of (c-1) and (c-2), the advantageous section transition lottery is a bonus in general as in the configuration of (a-1) and (a-2) described above. It is possible to win the advantageous section transition lottery by, and it is configured so that it is easier for the general public to win the advantageous section transition lottery than inside the bonus, and the manager of the game hall executes the game with two bets. Even if the player forgets to shift to the inside of the bonus (RT2), the player can be less likely to suffer a disadvantage because the advantageous section transition lottery can be executed even during the general public. In addition, even when the player executes the game after the manager of the amusement place executes the game with a bet of two cards and shifts to the inside of the bonus (RT2), the lottery for shifting to the advantageous section is performed by winning the bonus in the general. In order to win the prize, the player can start the game from the advantageous section on the first day of introduction in the game hall, so that the operation of the game machine can be improved. Similarly, by configuring the general public to win the advantageous section transition lottery more easily than the inside of the bonus, the player can start the game from the advantageous section on the first day of introduction in the amusement park. Moreover, since the player can start the game after the manager has executed the game in the general public where it is easy to win the advantageous section transition lottery, it is possible to increase the possibility that the player will start the game from the advantageous section. However, if the AT lottery is configured to be won by winning bells, normal replays, and bonuses in general, the AT lottery has already been won when the player starts the game on the first day of introduction in the amusement park. There is a risk that there will be multiple gaming machines, and the gaming field may suffer significant unintended losses. Therefore, in the configurations of (c-1) and (c-2), it is possible to win the advantageous section transition lottery by winning the bell, normal replay, and bonus in the general, but it is configured not to win the AT lottery. ing. In addition, it may be configured so that the AT lottery can be won by the bell in the general public or normal replay, and if the manager of the amusement park is configured not to win the AT lottery by winning the bonus in the general public. no problem.

In addition, although the configuration that can win the advantageous section transition lottery by winning the bonus in the general is illustrated, it may be configured to win the advantageous section transition lottery with a 100% probability when the bonus is won in the general. .. Such a configuration is applicable to all the embodiments described above, and is also applicable to all the embodiments described later. Further, even when a winning combination that can execute an advantageous section transition lottery other than the bonus is won, the probability of winning the advantageous section transition lottery may be 100%. For example, 100% may be won in the advantageous section transition lottery in both the case where the bonus is won in the general public and the case where the cherry is won. In addition, in such a configuration, if the bonus is won during the general period, the AT lottery will not be won even if the section shifts to the advantageous section, while if the cherry is won during the general period, the advantageous section will not be won. It may be configured so that it can be won in the AT lottery, and it is possible to win the AT lottery regardless of whether the cherry is won in the general public or the bonus is won in the general public, but the bonus is won. It may be configured so that it is easier to win the AT lottery when the cherry is won than when the cherry is won.

(7th Embodiment)
In the sixth embodiment, a configuration in which a game can be executed with two and three cards is exemplified as a predetermined number, but the gaming machine having such a configuration is not limited to the configuration of the sixth embodiment. Therefore, as a configuration of a gaming machine capable of executing a game with two and three cards applicable to this example, a configuration different from the sixth embodiment is set as the seventh embodiment, and only the differences from the sixth embodiment are used. It will be described in detail below. It should be noted that there is no problem even if the same configuration as that of the sixth embodiment is applied to the configuration not described in detail in the seventh embodiment.

First, FIG. 233 is a list of basic specifications of the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. The number of spinning reel type gaming machines according to the seventh embodiment is three and two, and the number of frames of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53 is 20 each, which is an effective line for which a prize is determined. Is one line of "left reel M51 middle stage, middle reel M52 middle stage, right reel M53 middle stage". As described above, in the seventh embodiment, the game can be executed by betting three cards (three specified number of cards) or two bets (two specified number of cards) as in the sixth embodiment. Although the details will be described later, when the player advances the game, the game is configured to proceed with a bet of three cards. The maximum number of payouts is 15, and the minimum number of payouts is 1 (the correspondence between the winning combination and the number of payouts will be described later). In addition, the priority winning order (pull-in priority order) is "replaying role-> small role (bell etc.)-> bonus role" from the one with the highest priority. For example, the replaying role and the bonus role are established at the same time. If it is (for example, if you win the duplicate role of the re-game role and the bonus role, or if you win the re-game role in the bonus that carries over the bonus role, etc.), the symbol corresponding to the re-game role In a situation where there is still a possibility that the combination and the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination will be stopped and displayed, the position where both the symbol corresponding to the replay combination and the symbol corresponding to the bonus combination can be pulled in (stop on the effective line). When the stop button is operated at the position where it can be displayed), the symbol corresponding to the re-game combination is drawn onto the effective line (the same applies to the re-game combination and the small combination). Priority is given to the design corresponding to the role). The stop display of the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game combination may be referred to as the stop display of the re-game combination, and the stop display of the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination may be referred to as the stop display of the bonus combination. It should be added that the small combination may stop and display that the symbol combination corresponding to the small combination is stopped and displayed, and the small combination may be referred to as winning.

The configuration shown in the figure is just an example, and the number of frames on each reel can be changed (for example, changed to 21 frames), or the configuration of effective lines can be changed (for example, 5 horizontal lines and 2 diagonal lines). There is no problem even if it is changed to one line, left reel M51 lower stage, middle reel M52 middle stage, right reel M53 upper stage). In addition, as the pull-in control (sometimes called stop control) when the push order small winning combination, which gives different benefits to the player depending on the push order, is paid out when the stop operation is performed in the correct push order. Controls to stop and display the symbol combinations that have a relatively large number of sheets, and if the wrong answer is pressed in a different order from the correct answer and the stop operation is performed at a predetermined timing, the number of payouts is relatively small. It is configured to control the combination so that it can be stopped and displayed (it is realized by using the number priority control and the number priority control for each reel, but the details of the number priority control and the number priority control will be described later).

Next, FIG. 234 is a list of reel arrangements of the spinning machine according to the seventh embodiment. As shown in the figure, the number of frames of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53 is 20 frames (0th to 19th), and the symbols are "Red Seven", "White Seven", and " There are 10 types: "sheep", "replay", "bell", "watermelon", "cherry A", "cherry B", "blank A", and "blank B". Here, "blank A" and "blank B" are symbols included in the symbol combination constituting the winning combination like other symbols, and do not mean the symbols not constituting the winning combination, but "blank A", As a combination of symbols constituting the winning combination including "Blank B", for example, "Bell Cherry A / Blank B" is replay 03, and "Blank A / Cherry A / Sheep" is replay 06. The configuration shown in the figure is just an example, and there is no problem even if the types of symbols are increased / decreased / changed.

Next, FIGS. 235 to 239 are symbol combination lists 1 to 5 in the seventh embodiment. In the seventh embodiment, a plurality of symbol combinations exist for each condition device, and as will be described later, depending on the stop order and stop position of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53, Any one of the symbol combinations is configured to be stopped and displayed on the effective line (the above-mentioned one line). Even if the same type of symbols are not aligned on the effective line, the same symbol may be aligned in a row on a line other than the effective line from the player's point of view. Further, in the seventh embodiment, the combination of the first type BB (the combination of symbols corresponding to the combination of the first type BB is stopped and displayed to operate the continuous operation device of the accessory related to the first type special accessory. , Hereinafter, as a combination of symbols corresponding to the BB role and the bonus role), the type 1 BB-A (the RB is continuously operated and the payment is completed with more than one piece) is "White Seven Watermelon. It has two symbol combinations, "sheep" and one kind BB-B (RB is continuously operated and finished with payout of more than 23 sheets). In addition, in the type 1 BB-A and the type 1 BB-B which are BB roles, the conditions for winning are set for each specified number. First, Type 1 BB-A is a BB role that may be won when the specified number is 2, and when the specified number is 3, Type 1 BB-A is not won (has a random number to win). Not configured). Further, the type 1 BB-B is a BB combination that may be won when the specified number is 3, and the type 1 BB-B is configured not to be won when the specified number is 2. In the seventh embodiment, when the first type BB combination is won and the BB is executed, the RB is continuously operated until the end of the BB, and in all the games during the BB (during the RB), the RB is continuously operated. It is configured to execute the lottery by referring to one lottery table (a method in which the table referred to at the time of the winning combination lottery is not switched during the execution of one BB, and is hereinafter referred to as an all-JACIN type. There is). The format of the first-class BB combination is not limited to this, and may be configured so that the table referred to at the time of the combination lottery can be switched during the execution of one BB. When the push order bell, which is the condition device of "winning-A1" to "winning-D6" described later, is won, the most advantageous push order for the player (push order when the push order navigation is executed) When the reels are stopped in the same push order as the navigation), the symbol combinations corresponding to the 85th to 93rd "winning 01" to "winning 06" are stopped and displayed, and 15 game medals are paid out. , When the reels are stopped in a pushing order different from the pushing order that is most advantageous for the player, the symbol combinations of "winning 07" to "winning 31" corresponding to the 94th to 145th are stopped and displayed, and one game is played. The medals are paid out, or the symbol combinations that are "winning 07" to "winning 31" are not stopped and displayed.

Next, FIG. 240 is a list of condition devices according to the seventh embodiment. In the figure, the conditional device number is referred to as a winning number, and the conditional device number may be referred to as a winning number thereafter. In the seventh embodiment, the re-game combination is provided from re-game-A to re-game-M (winning numbers 1 to 13), and the stop order and stop position of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53. It is configured so that the reels to be stopped and displayed may be different depending on the reels. Further, in the re-gaming combination, the condition device that can be won differs depending on whether the specified number is 3 or the specified number is 2. For example, the re-game-A to the re-game-H (winning numbers 1 to 8) are conditional devices that can be won when the specified number is three, and the re-game-I to the re-game M. Is a conditional device that serves as a replaying combination that can be won when the specified number is two. As described above, in the seventh embodiment, there are a conditional device that can be won and a conditional device that cannot be won for each specified number. Winning-A1 to winning-D6 (winning numbers 14 to 37) as a push order bell role is a push order role that can be won when the specified number is 3, and the reels are stopped in the most advantageous push order. By performing the operation, it is possible to obtain the payout of the 15-card combination, which is the most payout, and by not performing the reel stop operation in the most advantageous push order, the payout of the 1-card combination is obtained. Or there is no payout. Winning-E (winning number 38) is a conditional device that allows one to be paid out when the specified number is three, but it is specific when the player performs a reel stop operation. It is possible to get one payout by performing the stop operation within the range (the range where the combination of symbols constituting the winning-E can be stopped), but when the stop operation is not performed within a specific range. Is not displayed as a stop display (because it cannot be withdrawn), and no payout is made. Winning-F to winning-M (winning numbers 39 to 46) are conditional devices that can be won when the specified number is two. Winning-N (winning number 47) is a conditional device that allows you to get one payout when the specified number is two, but like winning-E (winning number 38), the game It is possible to obtain one payout by performing the stop operation within a specific range (the range in which the symbol combination constituting the winning-E can be stopped) when the person performs the reel stop operation. When the stop operation is not performed within the range of, the symbol combinations constituting the winning-N are not displayed as stopped (because they cannot be retracted), and no payout is made. In the winning-O and the winning-P (winning numbers 48 and 49), it is a conditional device in which the BB combination can be won during operation. In the type 1 BB-A and the type 1 BB-B, it is a so-called BB role. In this example, the RB is configured to operate continuously during the operation of the type 1 BB-A and the type 1 BB-B, but the BB combination is not limited to this, and for example, the type 1 BB operation. A so-called shift RB that draws RBs may be installed therein.

Here, in the seventh embodiment, as shown in the item of "conditional apparatus breakdown" in the rightmost column, depending on the stop order and stop position of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53. It is configured so that multiple types of symbol combinations (names) can be stopped and displayed, and among the multiple types of symbol combinations (names), the symbol combinations (names) that have the same winning number are grouped together and are the third from the right. It is illustrated in the item of "conditional device" in the column of. Specifically, for example, in the "replay-A" condition device corresponding to the winning number 1, "replay" is performed according to the stop order and stop position of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53. It is configured so that the three types of symbol combinations (names) of "01", "re-game 02", and "re-game 03" can be stopped and displayed, and in "winning-A1" which is a conditional device corresponding to the winning number 14. There are five types of "winning 01", "winning 07", "winning 08", "winning 16", and "winning 20" according to the stop order and stop position of the left reel M51, middle reel M52, and right reel M53. It is configured so that the symbol combination (name) of can be stopped and displayed. Further, "re-game 01" and the like are names of symbol combinations, and the symbol combinations that become "re-game 01" are configured so that there may be a plurality of types. In addition, a name such as "re-game 01" or a conditional device such as "re-game-A" may be referred to as a re-game role, and a name such as "winning 01" or a conditional device such as "winning-A1" may be referred to as a small. Sometimes referred to as a combination, and a conditional device such as "Type 1 BB-A" may be referred to as a BB combination.

Next, in the item of "role", what kind of role the "condition device" plays is illustrated, and the "normal replay" corresponding to the winning numbers 1 to 4 is concerned with the order in which the stop button is pressed. It is a condition device related to the re-game in which the re-game combination (symbol combination related to the re-game) in which the RT state does not shift is stopped and displayed. The "watermelon" corresponding to the winning number 5 is a conditional device related to the replaying combination, but by performing a stop operation so that the watermelon is stopped and displayed on a predetermined reel, a game is played when all reels are stopped. From the perspective of a person, the watermelons may appear to be aligned downward to the right (the watermelon symbol is displayed as a stop on the upper row of the left reel, the middle row of the middle reel, and the lower row of the right reel). The "watermelon" corresponding to the winning number 5 is configured so that the cherry B can be stopped as a substitute symbol for the watermelon even when the stop operation is performed so that the watermelon is not stopped and displayed on a predetermined reel. , Even if the watermelon symbol is not stopped and displayed on the upper row of the left reel, the middle row of the middle reel, and the lower row of the right reel, any of the symbol combinations that become "replay 05" corresponding to the winning number 5 is stopped and displayed. , It is configured so that a situation that is disadvantageous to the player does not occur. The "cherry" corresponding to the winning number 6 is a conditional device related to the replaying combination as in the winning number 5, but when the left reel M51 is stopped, the cherry A or the cherry B is in the upper stage of the left reel. , Middle or lower, is configured to be able to stop. When all reels are stopped, the cherry symbol may be displayed as stopped in various stop modes (for example, Cherry A-Cherry A-Cherry A in the lower right corner, Cherry only in the lower row of the left reel. A, Cherry A on the bottom of the left reel, Cherry A on the middle of the middle reel, Cherry design does not appear on the right reel, etc.). Further, like the "watermelon" corresponding to the winning number 5, it is a condition device related to the replaying combination, and even if the stop operation is performed so that the cherry symbol is not stopped and displayed on the left reel, the winning number 6 is set. The corresponding "re-game 06" or "re-game 07" is stopped and displayed so that a situation disadvantageous to the player does not occur. The re-gaming role related to these "watermelons" and "cherries" mainly shifts the gaming state to a gaming state (advantageous section) that is advantageous to the player (executes an advantageous section transition lottery) or is in AT. It is a conditional device that has a role of being advantageous to the player by performing a lottery for adding the number of AT sets or a lottery for adding the number of remaining games in the AT state. "Strong cherry (AT direct hit winning role)" and "Reach eye role (AT direct hit winning role)" corresponding to winning number 7 and winning number 8 become replay roles like winning number 5 and winning number 6. This is a conditional device that can execute an advantageous section transition lottery that shifts the gaming state to the AT state. The "re-game-I" to "re-game-M" corresponding to the winning numbers 9 to 13 are the re-gaming roles as in the winning numbers 1 to 8, but the winning numbers 1 to 8 are the specified number that can be won. Is different. The re-game combination corresponding to the winning numbers 9 to 13 is a conditional device that can be won when the specified number of cards is two, and is a conditional device that cannot be won when the specified number of cards is three. It should be noted that the role of the re-gaming role corresponding to the winning numbers 9 to 13 is the same as that of the conditional device having the same role among the winning numbers 1 to 8, so detailed explanation is omitted.

Further, the "push order bell A" to "push order bell D" corresponding to the winning numbers 14 to 37 are conditional devices in which the winning small winning combination may differ depending on which of the six reel stop orders is used. For example, "left reel M51: 1, middle reel M52: 2, right reel M53: 3", and in the case of "123", the reels are stopped in the order of pushing "left reel M51 → middle reel M52 → right reel M53". This means that the reels are stopped in the order of "123" = "left → middle → right". For example, in the case of "Winning A-1" (winning number 14), if you stop in the order of "123" = "left → middle → right" (correctly answer in the order of pressing), the maximum number of 15 game medals won The symbol combination that becomes the "winning 01" that can be obtained will be stopped and displayed. In addition, when the reels are stopped in a pushing order other than the pushing order in which the maximum number of winning sheets can be obtained, that is, if the correct answer cannot be obtained in the pushing order, one piece is paid out or no payout is made. By configuring the above, the push order of the re-game combination and the push order of the bell can be navigated in the state related to AT which is advantageous for the player such as "AT in progress state" (push order which is the highest profit on the push order display device D270). It is possible to create a plurality of gaming states in which the profit margins of the players are different, that is, the push order is not navigated to the AT-related states such as "normal gaming state". In the seventh embodiment, four types of push order bell groups, prize-A1 to A6, prize-B1 to B6, prize-C1 to C6, and prize-D1 to D6, are provided as six-choice push order bells. ing. With this configuration, when adjusting the design value such as the winning probability of the push order bell, it is possible to easily adjust by adjusting the number of positions between the push order bell groups.

In addition, the "technical intervention role when the specified number of cards is 3" corresponding to the winning number 38 constitutes a prize 07 by the player performing a stop operation at a specific push position of the middle reel M52 when the specified number of cards is 3. If the combination of symbols to be played is stopped and one game medal can be obtained, that is, if the player does not perform the stop operation at a specific push position of the middle reel M52, the combination of symbols constituting the winning 07 is obtained. There will be no payout without stopping. The "winning-F to K" corresponding to the winning numbers 39 to 44 is a condition device that can be won when the specified number of cards is two, and it is possible to obtain six or one payout. The "common bell D" corresponding to the winning number 45 is a condition device that can be won when the specified number of cards is two, and is a bell role. The difference from "Winning-F to K" corresponding to the winning numbers 39 to 44 is that it is possible to get 6 payouts regardless of the order of pushing. The "winning-L" corresponding to the winning number 45 is a condition device that can be won when the specified number of cards is two, and is a bell role. The "winning-M" corresponding to the winning number 46 can be paid out regardless of the order of pushing. In the "winning-N" corresponding to the winning number 47, when the specified number of medals is two, the player performs a stop operation at a specific push position of a predetermined reel, so that the combination of symbols constituting the winning 07 is stopped. If one game medal can be obtained, that is, if the player does not perform the stop operation at a specific push position of a predetermined reel, the combination of symbols constituting the winning 07 is not stopped and is lost. The "winning-O" and "winning-P" corresponding to the winning numbers 48 and 49 are conditional devices that can be won during the continuous operation of the RB based on the winning of the BB combination. It should be noted that during the operation of Type 1 BB, details will be described later.

Next, in the item of "bonus winning information", numerical values from 0 to 2 are assigned to each winning number. In the seventh embodiment, the winning number that does not include the bonus (BB role) has the bonus winning information set to 0, and the winning number that includes the bonus (BB role) is the winning number (50) that includes one type BB-A. ) Bonus winning information is 1, and the bonus winning information of the winning number (51) including the first type BB-B is 2. In the seventh embodiment, it is stipulated that the bonus (BB role) is not won in duplicate with the small role, but is won independently, but the bonus (BB role) is to be won in duplicate with the small role. It is also possible to configure to. In the inside of the bonus, the bonus winning information related to the carried-over bonus is stored. For example, when the game is executed inside the type 1 BB-A and the "re-game-A" is won. The bonus winning information related to the game is 1.

Next, in the item of "winning / replay winning information", numerical values from 0 to 49 are assigned to each winning number. In the seventh embodiment, the winning number (winning number 0 corresponding to the loss and winning number 49/50 corresponding to the bonus) that does not include the re-game winning combination and the small winning combination is set to 0 for the winning / re-gaming winning information. 1 to 49 winning / re-game winning information is distributed to each condition device for the winning number including the re-game combination or the small combination.

Next, in the item of "effect group number", numerical values from 0 to 29 are assigned to each winning number. By transmitting the effect group number from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side, it is configured so that the effect to be executed by the sub control board S side can be determined.

Next, in FIG. 241, a winning number (also referred to as a conditional device number or a winning combination) and a bonus (also referred to as a BB or BB combination) relating to a small winning combination, a replaying combination, and a bonus (also referred to as a BB or BB combination) in the seventh embodiment when the specified number of cards is three are used. It is a list showing the lottery probability (also referred to as a winning rate) determined by the lottery means. In the figure, the winning rate of the winning number is shown.

First, the lottery probability in "RT0" when the type 1 BB is not operated will be described in detail. In the seventh embodiment, the lottery probability of the winning combination may differ depending on the RT state. In addition, when the type 1 BB is not operated, the type 1 BB combination that can be won is not the type 1 BB-A and the type 1 BB-B, but only the type 1 BB-B. This is because the lottery table to be referred to is changed for each specified number, and the type 1 BB combination that can be won differs between the specified number of 3 sheets and the specified number of 2 sheets. The lottery probability may differ depending on the RT state, but in the seventh embodiment, "RT0" and "RT1 (inside Type 1 BB)" described later are replaying roles ("replaying"). It is assumed that the lottery probabilities of "-A" to "replay-M") are the same. The "replay games A to D" that can be stopped and displayed with the winning numbers 1 to 4 correspond to the above-mentioned normal replay. In addition, "re-game-E to H" that can be stopped and displayed with winning numbers 5 to 8 is a re-game combination, and depending on the stop operation, a so-called stop display of a combination of symbols in which watermelons or cherries are lined up in a straight line is displayed. It is a replaying role that has a role as a rare role. In addition, the "re-game combination-IM" that can be stopped and displayed at the winning numbers 9 to 13 is a re-game combination that is not won when the specified number of cards is three. The "winning-A1 to D6" that can be stopped and displayed at the winning numbers 14 to 37 is a push order bell role, and in the game that wins the "winning-A1 to D6", the reel stop that is most advantageous to the player. The push order navigation for notifying the order can be executed by the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40, and the details of the stop display mode of the bell combination based on the push order will be described later. The winning number 38, "winning-E", is a bell role like "winning-A1 to D6", but there is a possibility that the player will stop and display by performing technical intervention when performing the stop operation. It is a condition device. The technical intervention is to perform a stop operation within a specific range so that the symbol combinations constituting "Winning-E" among the symbols drawn on a predetermined reel are stopped and displayed. The winning numbers 39 to 47, "winning-F to N", are the same as in the case of "replaying combination-IM", and are bell roles that are not won when the specified number of cards is three. The winning numbers 48 to 49, "winning-OP", are conditional devices that can be stopped and displayed during continuous RB operation by the type 1 BB combination operation. "Type 1 BB-A to Type 1 BB-B" with winning numbers 50 to 51 is a BB role, and when the specified number of cards is 3, only "Type 1 BB-B" with winning number 51 can win. It is the role of BB. In this example, as in the sixth embodiment, when the first type BB-A and the first type BB-B, which are the BB roles, are won, the transition lottery to the "advantageous section" (advantageous section transition lottery) is executed. It is configured to do. In "RT2", which will be described later, the BB combination is won (the winning of the BB role is carried over), and the BB is not operating. As a result of the internal lottery, the winning number 51 is the type 1 BB. -Even if a random number to win B is acquired, the condition device related to BB is carried over, so the stop control will be the same as when the loss with winning number 0 is won in "RT2". , The advantageous section transition lottery is not executed. Since it is configured in this way, in the seventh embodiment, "RT0" is a "advantageous section" rather than "RT2" because of the number 19441 related to the type 1 BB-B which is the winning number 51. It is configured to make it easy to move to. In addition, if you win the 1st class BB-A (when betting 2 cards) or the 1st class BB-B (when betting 3 cards) at "RT0", you can win the advantageous section transition lottery, but it is advantageous. Even if the section transition lottery is won, it is configured not to transition to the AT in-progress state as a state related to AT. That is, regardless of whether it is "RT0" or "RT2", it is configured not to shift to the AT state depending on the winning of the BB combination (acquisition of a random number corresponding to the BB combination).

Next, the lottery probability in "RB operation" during BB operation will be described in detail. In the seventh embodiment, during BB operation and RB operation, two small winning combinations, "15 cards in RB" with winning number 48 and "1 card in RB" with winning number 49, can be won. It is also configured to have a "loss". Although the details will be described later, "RB is in operation" is configured so that the probability that "one card in RB" with winning number 49 will be won is particularly high. The expected value of increasing or decreasing medals per game of "RB is operating" is negative, that is, the number of game medals to be paid out is relatively smaller than the number of game medals to be inserted, and the number of medals is reduced by the amount of the game. It is configured to go on. The details of the winning rate (lottery probability) for each condition device of "RB is operating" will be described later.

Next, in FIG. 242, a winning number (also referred to as a conditional device number or a winning combination) and a bonus (also referred to as a BB or BB combination) relating to a small winning combination, a replaying combination, and a bonus (also referred to as a BB or BB combination) in the seventh embodiment when the specified number of cards is two are used. It is a list showing the lottery probability (also referred to as a winning rate) determined by the lottery means. In the figure, the winning rate of the winning numbers is shown. In addition, the explanation of the content that overlaps with the content explained when the specified number of sheets is 3 is omitted.

First, the lottery probability in "RT0" when the type 1 BB is not operated will be described in detail. In the seventh embodiment, the lottery probability of the winning combination may differ depending on the RT state. In addition, when the type 1 BB is not operated, the type 1 BB combination that can be won is not the type 1 BB-A and the type 1 BB-B, but only the type 1 BB-A. "Re-game-A1 to H" is different from the specified number of 3 cards, and is not won when the specified number of cards is 2. Further, the "re-game combination-IM" having the winning numbers 9 to 13 is a re-game combination corresponding to the "re-game-A to H" that can be won when the specified number of cards is three. The winning number 9 "re-game-I" is a re-game combination corresponding to "re-game-AD" that can be won when the specified number of cards is three. Further, the "re-game-J to M" having the winning numbers 10 to 13 is a re-game role corresponding to the "re-game-E to H" that can be won when the specified number of cards is three. "Prize-A1 to E" will not be won when the specified number of cards is 2, unlike when the specified number of cards is 3. Winning numbers 39 to 44 and 46, "winning-FK, M" are bell roles called common bell roles. The "winning-L" that can be stopped and displayed at the winning number 45 is the same as the "winning-FK, M" as the bell role called the common bell role, but relates to the bell role that wins according to the pushing order. The condition device is different. Specifically, "winning-L" is composed of six condition devices of "winning 01 to 06". For example, when the reels are stopped in the order of "123" = "left → middle → right". , The symbol combinations constituting "Winning 01" are stopped and displayed. When the reels are stopped in the order of "132" = "left → right → middle", the symbol combinations constituting "winning 02" are stopped and displayed. When the reels are stopped in the order of "213" = "middle-> left-> right", the symbol combinations constituting "winning 03" are stopped and displayed. When the reels are stopped in the order of "231" = "right → left → middle", the symbol combinations constituting "winning 04" are stopped and displayed. When the reels are stopped in the order of "312" = "middle-> right-> left", the symbol combinations constituting "winning 05" are stopped and displayed. When the reels are stopped in the order of "321" = "right → middle → left", the symbol combinations constituting "winning 06" are stopped and displayed. In this way, the symbol combinations constituting the condition device corresponding to the pressing order are stopped and displayed. "Type 1 BB-A to Type 1 BB-B" that can be stopped and displayed with winning numbers 50 to 51 is a BB role, and when the specified number of cards is two, only "Type 1 BB-A" with winning number 50 Is a BB role that can be won.

In addition, when the specified number of cards is 2, unlike the specified number of 3 cards, the number of cards related to the winning rate (lottery probability) of "Type 1 BB-A" is changed to "Replay-I" regardless of the RT state. I'm adding. With this configuration, it is "RT1", and in the situation where it is won (carried over) to Type 1 BB-A, the winning rate (lottery probability) of the replaying role is increased, and "RT0". It creates a state that is more advantageous to the player than the state in. In addition, the carry-over type 1 BB-A will continue to be elected.

Next, the stop display mode of the bell combination based on the push order in the seventh embodiment will be described in detail. As an example, if the case of "winning-A1" (conditional device number 14) is explained in detail, it is stopped in the order of "123" = "left → middle → right", that is, the most advantageous pressing order (correct answer pressing). If you execute the stop operation in (sometimes called order), 15 cards will be paid out, and you will stop in the order of "132" = "left → right → middle", that is, the first stop is the same as the most advantageous push order. The second stop and the third stop are 1 when the stop operation is performed in a push order different from the most advantageous push order (the push order other than the most advantageous push order may be referred to as an incorrect push order). The cards are paid out, and the other push order, that is, the first stop operation such as "* 1 *" = "middle → * → *" or "** 1" = "right → * → *" is the most advantageous push. If it is not the left reel in order, there is a 1/4 chance that one will be paid out, and 3/4 will be lost (no payout) (one will be paid out depending on the operation timing of the stop button). The symbol combination is configured to have a case where the stop display is displayed and a case where the stop display is not performed).

In the case of "winning-A1" (condition device number 14), the push order by the reel stop operation (for example, "123" = "left → middle → right", "132" = "left → right → middle", "* As mentioned above, the number of payouts differs depending on 1 * "=" middle → * → * "or" ** 1 "=" right → * → * "), but this is for each winning condition device. This is because the stop control is defined in the above, and the reel stop control is provided based on the reel stop order and the stop operation timing. As an example, the case where "Winning-A1" (conditional device number 14) is won will be described in detail as an example.

The "winning-A1" (conditional device number 14) is composed of five conditional devices: winning 01, winning 07, winning 08, winning 16, and winning 20. In addition, the number of payouts determined for each conditional device is 15 when the combination of symbols constituting the winning 01 is stopped and displayed, and similarly, the number of the symbols constituting the winning 07, the winning 08, the winning 16, and the winning 20. When the combination is stopped and displayed, it is one sheet. Of these five condition devices, which of the five condition devices to stop and display the combination of symbols constituting the winning is configured to be different depending on the stop order of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53. Has been done. In this example, the reel stop order is "123" = "left → middle → right", "132" = "left → right → middle", "* 1 *" = "middle → * → *", "**" 1 ”=“ right → * → * ”, and the condition devices corresponding to each stop order are prize 01, prize 07, prize 08, prize 16, and prize 20. Specifically, a conditional device for treating a prize for each reel stop order will be described.

First, the reel stop order "123" = "left → middle → right" will be described. (1) When the reel stop order is "123" = "left → middle → right", it is determined to stop and display the symbol combinations constituting the winning 01. This is because when the reel stop order is "123" = "left → middle → right", the number of payouts is the largest among the five conditional devices constituting "winning-A1" (conditional device number 14). When the first stop operation is the left reel, the number of sheets is prioritized as described above in order to preferentially stop and display a large number of items. Among the symbols constituting the corresponding symbol combination, the symbols constituting the symbol combination having the largest number of payouts are drawn from the symbols that can be drawn. In this way, the control of preferentially drawing the symbols constituting the symbol combination having the largest number of payouts to the effective line among the drawable symbols is called the number priority control, and is defined for each stop operation order or stop operation timing. It is possible (for example, it can be different depending on whether the left reel is stopped as the first stop, the middle reel is stopped as the first stop, the right reel is stopped as the first stop, etc.). ing.

To explain the reel stop control for each reel stop operation in more detail, when the left reel is stopped as the first stop operation, the defined "123" = "left → middle → right" first stop operation. (Correct answer in push order), the replay symbol of the left reel in the symbol combination constituting the winning 01 can be stopped at the effective line regardless of the operation timing (PB is the symbol that can be stopped at the effective line regardless of the operation timing. (Sometimes referred to as = 1), so the replay symbol is controlled to stop at the effective line. Next, when the middle reel is stopped as the second stop operation, it matches the specified second stop operation of "123" = "left → middle → right" (correct answer in push order), so the number of sheets is prioritized. It becomes a control and controls to stop the cherry A (cherry A is PB = 1) of the middle reel in the symbol combination constituting the prize 01. Next, when the right reel is stopped as the third stop operation, it matches the specified "123" = "left → middle → right" third stop operation (correct answer in push order), so the prize is 01. Control to stop the sheep or watermelon on the right reel in the symbol combination that composes (either the sheep or the watermelon can be stopped at the effective line regardless of the stop operation timing, and in such a case, the sheep and the watermelon May be referred to as PB = 1 in combination). In this way, when the reel stop order is "123" = "left → middle → right" (push order correct answer), the symbol combinations constituting the winning 01 are preferentially stopped.

Next, (2) when the stop order of the reels is "132" = "left → right → middle", it is determined to stop and display the symbol combination constituting the winning 07 or the winning 08. Explaining the reel stop control for each reel stop operation in more detail, when the left reel is stopped as the first stop operation, it matches the first stop operation of "123" = "left → middle → right". (Correct answer in push order), the number of reels is prioritized, and the replay of the left reel is controlled in the same manner as when the reel stop order is "123" = "left → middle → right". Next, when the right reel is stopped as the second stop operation, it does not match the second stop operation of "123" = "left → middle → right" (push order incorrect answer). In addition, since the replay is stopped and displayed on the left reel, the condition that the left reel is defined as replay among the five condition devices constituting the five condition devices of winning 01, winning 07, winning 08, winning 16, and winning 20. The apparatus has a prize of 01, a prize of 07, and a prize of 08. Here, when the stop operation is performed at the timing when the 17th reel on the right reel is located at the lower stage, the sheep constituting the winning 01, the replay constituting the winning 07 or 08, and the bell constituting the winning 07 or 08 3 Types of symbols can be drawn into the effective line. Here, when the sheep is pulled into the effective line, only the symbol combination of No. 85 (see FIG. 221) constituting the winning 01 in the future can be stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when the bell is pulled into the valid line, two types, the 95th symbol combination constituting the winning 07 and the 97th symbol combination constituting the winning 08, can be stopped and displayed in the future. From this, when the stop operation is performed at the timing when the 17th of the right reel is located at the lower stage, the number of symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed in the future is larger when the bell is pulled in than when the sheep is pulled in. Will increase. In such a case, controlling to pull in the bell instead of the sheep is called number priority control. If the stop operation is performed at the timing when the 17th reel on the right reel is located at the lower stage, the bell can be designed to be pulled in because the combination of two types of symbols can be stopped and displayed even if the replay and the pull-in are performed. May be designed to pull in. In this example (which can also be applied to other embodiments), it is possible to determine whether to perform the number priority control or the number priority control for each stop operation order or stop operation timing (for example, as the first stop). It can be different depending on whether the left reel is stopped, the middle reel is stopped as the first stop, the right reel is stopped as the first stop, etc.), and such stop control is performed for each condition device. It suffices if it is defined on a one-to-one basis. Here, the case of pulling the bell into the effective line of the right reel will be described in detail. When the bell is pulled into the effective line of the right reel, the symbol combination that can be stopped and displayed after that is the 95th "Replay Watermelon Bell" that constitutes the winning 07 or the 97th "Replay Cherry B" that constitutes the winning 08.・ Because it becomes a "bell" and neither watermelon nor cherry B has a stop operation timing to pull in to the effective line of the middle reel, it can be pulled to the effective line by the stop operation timing of the middle reel of watermelon and cherry B. It is configured to stop and display the symbol. It should be noted that the number of payouts is one regardless of whether the prize 07 is displayed as stopped or the prize 08 is displayed as stopped.

Next, (3) when the stop order of the reels is "* 1 *" = "medium → * → *", it is determined to stop and display the symbol combinations constituting the winning 16. To explain the reel stop control for each stop operation of each reel in more detail, when the middle reel is stopped as the first stop operation, the stop order is different for the push order of "123" = "left → middle → right". It is determined that the reel is stopped and operated (incorrect answer in push order), and it is related to the symbol combination constituting any of the five conditional devices of winning 01, winning 07, winning 08, winning 16, and winning 20. Whether to stop the symbol is the number priority control as in the case of the second stop operation of the push order "132" = "left → right → middle", and the total number of patterns of the symbol combination that can be stopped and displayed in the future is compared. It is decided by doing. In this case as well, since both the cherry A constituting the winning 01 and the replay constituting the winning 16 have PB = 1, the stop display can be performed regardless of the stop operation timing, but the cherry A is stopped and displayed on the effective line. The number of symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed is larger when the replay is stopped and displayed on the effective line than when the replay is stopped (when Cherry A is stopped and displayed on the effective line, No. 85 and No. 86 are 2). When the type and replay are stopped and displayed, there are three types: 114, 115, and 116), so the middle reel is configured to pull in the replay. After that, depending on the stop operation timing, any of the 114th, 115th, and 116th symbol combinations will be stopped and displayed (the number of payouts is one).

Next, (4) when the reel stop order is "** 1" = "right → * → *", it is determined to stop and display the symbol combinations constituting the winning 20. To explain the reel stop control for each reel stop operation in more detail, when the right reel is stopped as the first stop operation, the stop order is different for the push order of "123" = "left → middle → right". It is determined that the reel is stopped and operated (incorrect answer in push order), and it is related to the symbol combination constituting any of the five conditional devices of winning 01, winning 07, winning 08, winning 16, and winning 20. Whether to stop the symbol is the number priority control as in the case of the second stop operation of the push order "132" = "left → right → middle", and the total number of patterns of the symbol combination that can be stopped and displayed in the future is compared. It is decided by doing. In this case as well, if the sheep that make up the winning 01 are stopped at the effective line, only one type is No. 85, and if the watermelon that makes up the winning 01 is stopped at the effective line, only one type is No. 86. Can be stopped and displayed. Since each of the sheep and the watermelon does not have PB = 1, it is determined whether or not the sheep and the watermelon can be retracted depending on the stop operation timing of the right reel. On the other hand, if the blank B constituting the winning 20 has PB = 1 and the blank B is pulled into the effective line of the right reel, then the combination of the three types of symbols 126, 127 and 128 is stopped. It can be displayed. Therefore, even in this case, the right reel is configured to draw the blank B into the effective line. After that, depending on the stop operation timing, any of the symbol combinations 126, 127, and 128 will be stopped and displayed (the number of payouts is one).

Further, the "winning-A2" to "winning-D6" as the push order bell role similar to the "winning-A1" are configured to have the same reel stop control as the "winning-A1". In other words, when the reels are stopped in the correct push order, which is the most advantageous push order (push order correct answer), the number of symbols to be paid out is the largest among the symbol combinations constituting the winning condition device. Reel stop control (whether to use the number priority control or the number priority control) is defined so that the stop display is given priority, and when the stop operation of each reel is performed in the order of pressing incorrect answers (pushing order). Incorrect answer), reel stop control (whether to use the number priority control or the number priority control) is defined so that the one with the largest number of payouts is not stopped and displayed. With this configuration, even if the condition devices selected as winning combinations are the same (for example, "winning-A1"), when the push order is correct, the symbol combination with the largest number of payouts (for example, winning 01) is used. By preferentially stopping and displaying the constituent symbol combinations), 15 payouts can be obtained, and when the push order is incorrect, the display ratio of the symbol combinations based on the stopped symbols of the reels that have not yet been stopped in the future will be displayed. By preferentially stopping high symbol combinations (for example, winning 07, winning 08, winning 16, winning 20), one payout can be obtained, and the condition device for winning can be changed according to the pushing order. In the reel stop control, not only the push order but also the position where the reel stop operation is performed, in other words, "when the stop operation is performed in the range from the symbol number 〇 to the symbol number △, it is the most. "Reel stop control is performed so that the combination of symbols with a large number of payouts is preferentially stopped", and "If the stop operation is performed in the range from symbol number □ to symbol number x, it will still be stopped in the future. It is also possible to perform reel stop control such as "perform reel stop control so as to preferentially stop the symbol combination having a high display ratio of the symbol combination based on the stop symbol of the reel that has not been stopped". In this example, when the stop operation is performed in the order of pressing incorrect answers, the control is configured so that the one with the largest number of payouts is not stopped and displayed, but the control is not limited to this, and the order of pressing incorrect answers is not limited to this. Even in the case of, the symbol combination with the largest number of payouts may be configured to be stop-displayable depending on the push order and stop operation timing, or a relatively small number of payouts such as one depending on the push order and stop operation timing. The symbol combination of may also be configured so that there is no payout without displaying the stop.

Next, the reel stop control based on the push position will be described in detail. For example, in the case of "Winning-A1", the bell symbol can be stopped in the upper row, but the probability that the bell symbol actually stops is the probability shown in the figure (2187/65536). In the situation where the push order navigation does not occur, the bell symbol will stop if the correct answer is given in the 6-choice push order in which the 15-card combination will win. In addition, in the situation where the push order navigation does not occur, the bell symbol does not stop if the correct answer is not given in the 6-choice push order that will win the 15-card combination, and "Prize 07-08, 16, 20". The combination of cards such as, etc., or the loss (the stop display of the symbol combination without payout may be referred to as the loss) is stopped. In a situation where push order navigation can occur, if the reels are stopped according to the push order navigation, 15 cards will always win a prize. Specifically, for example, in a situation where the condition device number 14 corresponding to "winning-A1" is determined, (1) when the left reel is operated by the first stop operation, the 15-card combination of winning 01 Or, one piece of winning 07 to winning 08 wins. More specifically, (1-1) when the left reel is stopped by the first stop operation, the replay is stopped and displayed in the middle stage, and (1-2) the middle reel is stopped by the second stop operation. In that case, Cherry A is stopped and displayed in the middle row, and when the right reel is stopped by the third stop operation, either watermelon or sheep is stopped and displayed in the middle row depending on the stop operation timing to win a prize. When the symbol combination corresponding to 01 (upper bell alignment) is stopped and displayed, 15 cards are paid out, and (1-3) when the right reel is stopped by the second stop operation, it depends on the stop operation timing. If either the replay or the bell is stopped and displayed in the middle row, and if the middle reel is stopped by the third stop operation, either the watermelon or the cherry B is stopped and displayed depending on the stop operation timing, and the prizes 07 to 08 are won. When the symbol combination corresponding to any of them is stopped and displayed, one card combination is paid out.

(2) When the middle reel is stopped by the first stop operation, one of the winning 16 wins is won or lost. More specifically, (2-1) when the middle reel is stopped by the first stop operation, the replay is stopped and displayed in the middle stage, and (2-2) the left reel is stopped by the second stop operation. In that case, either Red Seven, Replay, or Cherry A is stopped and displayed in the middle depending on the stop operation timing, and if the right reel is stopped by the third stop operation, Red Seven (Red Seven ( When the seven symbols that make up the winning 16 within 4 frames after receiving the stop operation are displayed as a stop in the middle row, and when the red seven cannot be stopped and displayed in the middle row, the stop operation timing (the symbol number 18 in the middle row of the right reel) When the stop operation is performed at the operation timing other than the red seven of the sheep to the symbol number 2, the symbols other than the red seven constituting the winning 16 are stopped and displayed in the middle row, and the red seven is stopped and displayed in the middle row of the right reel. In that case, one of the winning 16 will be paid out by winning, and if the red seven is not stopped and displayed in the middle of the right reel, it will be a loss. (2-3) When the right reel is stopped by the second stop operation, the red seven (seven symbols that make up the winning 16 within 4 frames after receiving the stop operation) is placed in the middle row depending on the stop operation timing. When the stop operation is displayed, or when the stop operation timing is such that the red seven cannot be stopped and displayed in the middle row (operation timing other than the sheep with symbol number 18 to the red seven with symbol number 2 in the middle row of the right reel), the stop operation is performed. If a symbol other than the red seven that constitutes the winning 16 is stopped and displayed in the middle row and the left reel is stopped by the third stop operation, either red seven, replay, or cherry A is displayed in the middle row depending on the stop operation timing. Is displayed as a stop, and if the red seven is stopped and displayed in the middle of the right reel, one card is paid out by winning any of the winning 16s, and if the red seven is not stopped and displayed in the middle of the right reel, it is lost. Will be. From the above, when the condition device number 14 corresponding to "Winning-A1" is determined and the middle reel is stopped by the first stop operation, the winning probability of the winning 16 is 5/20 (1). / 4). If the right reel is operated at a timing other than a specific operation timing (operation timing other than the sheep with symbol number 3 to the red seven with symbol number 7 in the middle of the reel), the symbol combination corresponding to the winning 16 is stopped and displayed. Instead, it becomes a loss, and the stop display probability of the loss is 15/20 (3/4).

(3) When the right reel is stopped by the first stop operation, one of the prizes 20 will be won or lost. More specifically, (3-1) when the right reel is stopped by the first stop operation, the blank B is stopped and displayed in the middle stage, and (3-2) the left reel is stopped by the second stop operation. If this is the case, either Red Seven, Bell, or Cherry A will be stopped and displayed in the middle row depending on the stop operation timing, and if the middle reel is stopped by the third stop operation, Red Seven will be stopped depending on the stop operation timing. (Seven symbols that make up the winning 20 within 4 frames after receiving the stop operation) is displayed as a stop in the middle row, and the stop operation timing that the red seven cannot be stopped and displayed in the middle row (symbol number 18 in the middle row of the middle reel) When the stop operation is performed at the replay of symbol number 2 other than the red seven operation timing), the symbols other than the red seven that make up the winning 20 are stopped and displayed, and the red seven is stopped and displayed in the middle of the middle reel. In that case, if any one of the winning 20 wins, one card combination will be paid out, and if the red seven is not stopped and displayed in the middle of the middle reel, it will be a loss. (3-3) When the middle reel is stopped by the second stop operation, the red seven (seven symbols constituting the winning 20 within 4 frames after receiving the stop operation) is placed in the middle stage depending on the stop operation timing. When the stop operation is displayed, or when the stop operation timing is such that the red seven cannot be stopped and displayed in the middle row (replay of symbol number 18 to the operation timing other than the red seven of symbol number 2 in the middle row of the middle reel), the stop operation is performed. If a symbol other than the red seven that constitutes the winning 20 is stopped and displayed in the middle row and the left reel is stopped by the third stop operation, either red seven, bell, or cherry A is displayed in the middle row depending on the stop operation timing. Is displayed as a stop, and if the red seven is stopped and displayed in the middle of the middle reel, one card is paid out by winning any of the winning 20s, and if the red seven is not stopped and displayed in the middle of the middle reel, it is lost. Will be. From the above, in the situation where the condition device number 14 corresponding to "Winning-A1" is determined, if the right reel is stopped by the first stop operation, the winning probability of the winning 20 is 5/20 (1). / 4). If the middle reel is operated at a timing other than a specific operation timing (replay of symbol number 18 in the middle of the reel to operation timing other than red seven of symbol number 2), the symbol combination corresponding to the winning 20 is stopped and displayed. Instead, it becomes a loss, and the stop display probability of the loss is 15/20 (3/4). The reel stop control based on the pushing order when "winning-A1" is determined as the conditional device number has been described, but the reel stop control based on this pushing order is the same for "winning-A2" to "winning-A6". It has become.

For example, in a situation where the condition device number 15 corresponding to "winning-A2" is determined, when the first stop operation is the middle reel, the white seven is stopped and displayed on the right reel (1/4). When it is operated, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning 17 is stopped and displayed, and at other operation timings (3/4), White Seven is not stopped and displayed, resulting in a loss. In addition, when the condition device number of "Winning-A2" is determined and the first stop operation is the right reel, the operation is performed at the timing (1/4) when the white seven is stopped and displayed on the middle reel. The symbol combination corresponding to the winning 21 is stopped and displayed, and at other operation timings (3/4), the white seven is not stopped and displayed, resulting in a loss.

When the condition device number 16 corresponding to "Winning-A3" is determined, the first stop operation is the left reel, the second stop operation is the middle reel, and the third stop operation is the right reel, the right reel is used. When the red seven is operated at the timing (1/4) when the red seven is stopped, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning 24 is stopped and displayed, and at other operation timings (3/4), the symbol combination corresponding to the winning 24 is stopped. Is not displayed as a stop and the loss is displayed as a stop. Further, in the situation where the condition device number 16 corresponding to "winning-A3" is determined, when the first stop operation is the left reel, the second stop operation is the right reel, and the third stop operation is the middle reel, the middle reel is used. When the red seven is operated at the timing (1/4) when the red seven is stopped and displayed on the reel, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning 28 is stopped and displayed, and at other operation timings (3/4), it corresponds to the winning 28. The symbol combination is not stopped and displayed, and the loss is stopped and displayed. Further, in the situation where the condition device number 16 of "winning-A3" is determined, when the first stop operation is the right reel, the operation is performed at the timing (1/4) when the sheep is stopped and displayed on the middle reel. The symbol combination corresponding to the winning 22 is stopped and displayed, and at other operation timings (3/4), the symbol combination corresponding to the winning 22 is not stopped and displayed, resulting in a loss.

When the condition device number 17 corresponding to "Winning-A4" is determined, the first stop operation is the left reel, the second stop operation is the middle reel, and the third stop operation is the right reel, the right reel is used. When the white seven is operated at the timing (1/4) when it is stopped and displayed, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning 25 is stopped and displayed, and at other operation timings (3/4), the symbol combination corresponding to the winning 25 is stopped. Is not displayed as a stop and the loss is displayed as a stop. Further, in the situation where the condition device number 17 corresponding to "winning-A4" is determined, when the first stop operation is the left reel, the second stop operation is the right reel, and the third stop operation is the middle reel, the middle reel is used. When the white seven is operated at the timing (1/4) when the white seven is stopped and displayed on the reel, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning 29 is stopped and displayed, and at other operation timings (3/4), it corresponds to the winning 29. The symbol combination is not stopped and displayed, and the loss is stopped and displayed. Further, in the situation where the condition device number 17 of "winning-A4" is determined, when the first stop operation is the right reel, the operation is performed at the timing (1/4) when the blank B is stopped and displayed on the middle reel. In that case, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning 23 is stopped and displayed, and at other operation timings (3/4), the symbol combination corresponding to the winning 23 is not stopped and displayed, resulting in a loss.

When the condition device number 18 corresponding to "Winning-A5" is determined, the first stop operation is the left reel, the second stop operation is the middle reel, and the third stop operation is the right reel, the right reel is used. When the cherry A is operated at the timing (1/4) when it is stopped and displayed, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning 26 is stopped and displayed, and at other operation timings (3/4), the symbol combination corresponding to the winning 26 is stopped. Is not displayed as a stop and the loss is displayed as a stop. Further, in the situation where the condition device number 18 corresponding to "Winning-A5" is determined, when the first stop operation is the left reel, the second stop operation is the right reel, and the third stop operation is the middle reel, the middle reel is used. When the sheep is operated at the timing (1/4) when the sheep is stopped and displayed on the reel, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning 30 is stopped and displayed, and at other operation timings (3/4), the symbol corresponding to the winning 30 is displayed. The combination is not stopped and displayed, and the loss is stopped and displayed. Further, in the situation where the condition device number 18 of "winning-A5" is determined, when the first stop operation is the middle reel, the cherry A is operated at the timing (1/4) when the cherry A is stopped and displayed on the right reel. In that case, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning 18 is stopped and displayed, and at other operation timings (3/4), the symbol combination corresponding to the winning 18 is not stopped and displayed, resulting in a loss.

When the condition device number 19 corresponding to "Winning-A6" is determined, the first stop operation is the left reel, the second stop operation is the middle reel, and the third stop operation is the right reel, the right reel is used. When the cherry B is operated at the timing (1/4) when it is stopped and displayed, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning 27 is stopped and displayed, and at other operation timings (3/4), the symbol combination corresponding to the winning 27 is stopped and displayed. Is not displayed as a stop and the loss is displayed as a stop. Further, in the situation where the condition device number 19 corresponding to "winning-A6" is determined, when the first stop operation is the left reel, the second stop operation is the right reel, and the third stop operation is the middle reel, the middle reel is used. When the blank B is operated at the timing (1/4) when the blank B is stopped and displayed on the reel, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning 31 is stopped and displayed, and at other operation timings (3/4), it corresponds to the winning 31. The symbol combination is not stopped and displayed, and the loss is stopped and displayed. Further, in the situation where the condition device number 19 of "winning-A6" is determined, when the first stop operation is the middle reel, the cherry B is operated at the timing (1/4) when the cherry B is stopped and displayed on the right reel. In that case, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning 19 is stopped and displayed, and at other operation timings (3/4), the symbol combination corresponding to the winning 19 is not stopped and displayed, resulting in a loss.

Further, the "winning-B1" to "winning-D6" as the push order bell role similar to the "winning-A1 to A6" are configured to have the same reel stop control as the "winning-A1". In other words, when the reels are stopped in a predetermined stop order (correct answer in push order), the one with the largest number of payouts is given priority among the symbol combinations that make up the winning condition device. The reel stop control is performed so that the stop display is performed, the reels are stopped in the predetermined stop order in the first stop operation, and each reel is stopped in the predetermined stop order in the second stop operation. If the stop operation of is not performed, the reel stop control is performed so that the symbol combinations constituting the one-card combination are preferentially stopped and displayed. Further, when the stop operation of each reel is not performed in the predetermined stop order in the first stop operation, the stop operation is performed within the range in which the symbol combination constituting the one-card combination on the predetermined reel can be stopped. For example, the reel control is performed so that the symbol combinations constituting the one-card combination are stopped and displayed by (for example, in the range of 1/4), while the stop operation is performed within the range in which the symbol combinations constituting the one-card combination can be stopped on a predetermined reel. If there is no such thing (for example, in the range of 3/4), the symbol combinations constituting the one-card combination will not be stopped and displayed, resulting in a loss.

Next, FIG. 243 is an RT state transition diagram in the seventh embodiment. In the seventh embodiment, a game with a specified number of two cards and a game with a specified number of three cards, that is, a game with a plurality of specified numbers can be played. The BB combination that can be won when the specified number of cards is two is type 1 BB-A, and the BB combination that can be won when the specified number of sheets is three is type 1 BB-B. "RT0" is specified as the RT state inside the BB, and the RT state is "RT1" as the inside of the type 1 BB-A by winning the type 1 BB-A when the specified number of sheets is two. , And by winning the Type 1 BB-B when the specified number of cards is 3, the RT state is configured to transition to "RT2" as the inside of the Type 1 BB-B. It is assumed that the RT state does not transition from "RT1" to "RT2", and the state transition across the game of changing the specified number is not performed. In addition, it is considered that there is virtually no opportunity for the player to actually play a game with a specified number of two, in other words, when the player actually plays a game, it is assumed that the specified number is only three. It is supposed to be. In the seventh embodiment, the game is configured so that the game can be played in both the case of the specified number of 2 sheets and the specified number of 3 sheets.

FIG. 243 will be described in detail. In the seventh embodiment, there are three RT states of "RT0", "RT1", and "RT2" as RT states that can be played with two or three specified numbers, and the specified number is three. There are two RT states, "Type 1 BB-A operating" and "Type 1 BB-B operating", as RT states that can be played only at the time of playing. Here, as described above, "RT1" is inside the type 1 BB-A, that is, the type 1 BB-A is elected and carries over the type 1 BB-A, and the "RT2" is 1. Inside the species BB-B, that is, the type 1 BB-B is elected and the type 1 BB-B is carried over. Further, if one of the BB roles is won and carried over, the other BB role will not be won in duplicate. For example, even if the specified number of cards is 2 and the specified number of BB-A is won and the 1st class BB-A is carried over, the specified number is changed from 2 to 3 and the game is played. Class 1 BB-B will not win. Further, since the type 1 BB-A is a winning combination during a three-card betting game, it has a stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination related to the type 1 BB-A at the time of a three-card bet. If the game is executed with a 3-card bet on "RT1", the symbol combination related to Type 1 BB-A will not be stopped and displayed regardless of the stop order or stop operation timing, and Type 1 BB-A will not be displayed. Is configured to not work. In addition, even if the specified number is changed from 3 to 2 while the 1st type BB-B is elected and the 1st type BB-B is carried over, the game is played. Class 1 BB-A will not win.

Next, the transition condition of the RT state will be described. The RT state shifts when the conditions shown by the arrows in the figure are satisfied. First, as a specific transition example in which the RT state shifts to "RT0", the RT state is "RT1", "RT2", "Type 1 BB-A in operation", and "Type 1 BB-B in operation". When (all RT states except "RT0"), RAM initialization is executed, or when the operation of type 1 BB-A and type 1 BB-B is completed, the process shifts to "RT0". do. When the operation of the 1st class BB-A and the 1st class BB-B is completed, specifically, the 1st class BB-A role and the 1st class BB-B role are won, and the winning 1st class BB-A is won. A plurality of games of the 1st type BB-A and the 1st type BB-B, which are activated by winning the combination and the 1st type BB-B combination, are digested, and the payout for the specified number of medals is completed.

Next, as a specific transition example in which the RT state shifts to "RT1", when the RT state is "RT0", when the type 1 BB-A is won, the transition to "RT1" is performed. The specified number at this time is two. It should be noted that the state in which the player wins the Type 1 BB-A and carries it over is configured to be inherited even when the specified number is changed from 2 to 3 and the game is played. Furthermore, even if the specified number is changed from 2 to 3 in the RT state of "RT1", the game does not shift to "RT2" as the RT state, and the game is played in the state of "RT1". It is structured so that it can proceed. Next, as a specific example of transition in which the RT state shifts to "Type 1 BB-A in operation", in the RT state of "RT1", the winning Type 1 BB-A role is won or ". In the RT state of "RT0", the winning type 1 BB-A combination is won, and the RT state shifts to "type 1 BB-A in operation". In addition, when directly shifting from "RT0" to "Type 1 BB-A in operation", "RT1", that is, 1 in the winning game of the Type 1 BB-A role without going through the inside of Type 1 BB-A. This is the case when the seed BB-A role is won. Next, as a specific transition example in which the RT state shifts to "RT2", when the RT state is "RT0", when the type 1 BB-B is won, the transition to "RT2" is performed. The specified number at this time is three. It should be noted that the state in which the player wins the Type 1 BB-B and carries it over is configured to be inherited even when the specified number is changed from 3 to 2 and the game is played. Furthermore, even if the specified number is changed from 3 to 2 in the RT state of "RT2", the game does not shift to "RT1" as the RT state, and the game is played in the state of "RT2". It is structured so that it can proceed. Next, as a specific example of transition in which the RT state shifts to "Type 1 BB-B in operation", in the RT state of "RT2", the winning Type 1 BB-B role is won or ". In the RT state of "RT0", the RT state shifts to "Type 1 BB-B in operation" by stopping and displaying the symbol combination related to the winning type 1 BB-B combination. In addition, when directly shifting from "RT0" to "Type 1 BB-B in operation", in "RT2", that is, in the winning game of the Type 1 BB-B role without going through the inside of Type 1 BB-B. This is a case where the symbol combination related to the Type 1 BB-B combination is stopped and displayed.

As described above, in the seventh embodiment, it is configured so that it is possible to shift to a different RT state in the game when the specified number of cards is 2 and the specified number of cards is 3. Furthermore, the RT state shifted in each case of the specified number of 2 cards or the specified number of 3 cards is a game in which the RT state is maintained even if the specified number is changed in the subsequent game. It is configured to be able to proceed. With this configuration, for example, when the section in which the player mainly plays is set to the RT state of "RT1", the game is played with a predetermined number of two cards in advance, and the type 1 BB-A combination is won. Or, when the section where the player mainly plays is set to "RT2", the player plays a game with a specified number of 3 cards in advance and keeps the 1st class BB-B role won. It is possible to change the RT state of the section mainly played as appropriate.

In the gaming machine of the seventh embodiment, the game is executed by the manager of the gaming field or the gaming machine by betting two cards before the factory shipment of the gaming machine, and the condition device according to the first type BB-A is won. The symbol combination related to the type BB-A is shifted to "RT1" without being stopped and displayed, and the player can play the game by betting three cards on the "RT1". As in the sixth embodiment, the bonus information carried over is not cleared even if the setting is changed. With this configuration, as in the sixth embodiment, the AT lottery is executed at "RT1" inside the BB, and the player shifts to the AT-in-progress state, which is advantageous to the player, and obtains a game medal. It is possible to create a gaming machine capable of executing a highly reliable game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 244, the lottery probability during the RB operation will be described in detail. In the seventh embodiment, two small wins, "winning-O" with winning number 49 and "winning-P" with winning number 50, can be won while the RB is operating. Explaining "winning-O" and "winning-P" in detail, "winning-O" is a conditional device having a plurality of conditional devices of winning 01 to winning 31, and "winning-P" is winning 07 to winning. It is a condition device having a plurality of condition devices of 33. The number of "winning-O" and "winning-P" at the time of type 1 BB operation is 6175 and 30942, respectively. Let's compare the winning probability of the condition device while the RB is not operating and when the RB is operating. Of the conditional devices that can be won when the RB is not operating, the conditional devices that have (including) winning 01 are "winning-A1", "winning-B2", "winning-C1", and "winning-D2". There is, and the total number of winnings of the four conditional devices is 6174. On the other hand, among the conditional devices that can be won during the RB operation, the conditional device having (including) winning 01 is one of "winning-O", and the number of winnings of "winning-O" is 6175. Therefore, the number of places that can win the conditional device including the prize 01 while the RB is not operating, in other words, the number of places that can win the prize 01 is 6174, and the number of places that can win the prize 01 while the RB is operating is It is 6175, and the possibility of winning the prize 01 is more advantageous when the RB is operating than when the RB is not operating. Further, in the prizes 02 to 06 in which 15 cards are paid out, similarly, it is more advantageous that the RB is operating than that the RB is not operating. On the other hand, in the game in which "Winning-O" is won, the combination of symbols related to a plurality of conditional devices such as Winning 1 and Winning 02 is not stopped and displayed in one game, and 30 cards are not paid out. Therefore, RT1 (As described above, the gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment is a gaming machine that advances the game by betting three cards at RT1), and the game is played in the most advantageous operation mode. (For example, in a game in which the push order navigation is executed, the game is executed according to the push order navigation), the condition device having a symbol combination of 15 payouts is awarded-A1 to A6, winning. -B1 to B6, winning-C1 to C6, and the total number of placements is "2187 + 2187 + 2187 + 2187 + 2187 + 2187 + 2187 + 2187 + 2187 + 2187 + 2187 + 2187 + 900 + 900 + 900 + 900 + 900 + 900 + 900 + 900 + 900 + 900 + 900 + 900 = 37044". The total number of units to be played is 37044. On the other hand, when the game is executed by betting 3 cards while the RB is operating and the game is executed in the most advantageous operation mode, the conditional device having a symbol combination of 15 cards to be paid out is a prize-O. The total number of placements is "6175", and during the RB operation, the total number of placements to be won in the conditional device having a symbol combination of 15 payouts is 6175. That is, when the game is executed in the most advantageous operation mode, it is more advantageous when the RB is not operated than when the RB is operated. In other words, the expected value (number of payouts / number of inputs) per game is higher when the game is executed in the most advantageous operation mode when the RB is not operated than when the RB is operated.

With the above configuration, according to the spinning machine according to the seventh embodiment, the game is configured to proceed inside the type 1 BB, and the number of condition devices related to the push order combination is set. As a possibility of winning the condition device that has the largest number of payouts from winning 01 to winning 06, the RB is configured to be more advantageous when the RB is operating than when the RB is not operating, so that the RB is more advantageous than when the RB is operating. It is possible to increase the expected value (number of payouts / number of inserts) per game when the game is executed in the most advantageous operation mode when it is not operated. The expected value (number of payouts / number of inserts) per game in the AT state in which the push order navigation is executed in the game that wins (condition device-push order bell of A1 etc.) can be increased, and the AT state. Can be made into a more advantageous gaming state for the player. In addition, by setting the number priority control and the number priority control as the reel stop control based on the condition device, the symbol combination that pays out 15 sheets with the largest number of payouts in the normal gaming state where the push order navigation is not executed can be obtained. By making it difficult to stop, it is advantageous for the player while suppressing the payout rate (average value of the number of payouts / the number of inserts) of the entire game (when considering the stay ratio such as the normal game state and the AT state). It is possible to create a more entertaining gaming machine by adding a balance between the state and the state that is disadvantageous to the player.

(8th Embodiment)
In the seventh embodiment, a configuration is exemplified in which it is possible to give a sharp distinction between a state advantageous to the player and a state disadvantageous to the player, and to increase the expected value per game in the AT state. , Such a configuration is not limited to the configuration of the seventh embodiment. Therefore, a configuration different from the seventh embodiment, which makes it possible to increase the expected value per game in the AT state, while giving a sharp distinction between a state advantageous to the player and a state disadvantageous to the player, is the first. Eight embodiments will be made, and only the differences from the seventh embodiment will be described in detail below. It should be noted that the configuration not described in detail in the eighth embodiment may be applied with the same configuration as the seventh embodiment without any problem.

Next, FIG. 245 is a list of basic specifications of the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. The number of spinning reel type gaming machines according to the eighth embodiment is three, the number of frames of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53 is 20 frames, and the effective line for which the winning judgment is determined is "left". It is one line of "reel M51 middle stage, middle reel M52 middle stage, right reel M53 middle stage". The maximum number of payouts is 10, and the minimum number of payouts is 1 (the correspondence between the winning combination and the number of payouts will be described later). In addition, the priority winning order (drawing priority order) is "replaying role-> small role (bell, watermelon, etc.)-> bonus". Further, as the pull-in control when the push order small winning combination, which gives different benefits to the player depending on the push order, is won, the push order is operated in a predetermined correct push order as in the seventh embodiment described above. In that case, it is controlled by using the number of sheets priority control so that the small winning combination with a large number of payouts is preferentially drawn in, and if it is operated in the wrong answer pressing order different from the correct answer pressing order, the stop display is displayed. Increase the possibility of winning among the possible symbols (located within 4 frames from the stop operation) (the most likely to win among the combinations of multiple symbols that can be won) The number priority control to draw in the symbols It is used for control.

Next, FIG. 246 is a list of reel arrangements of the spinning machine according to the eighth embodiment. As shown in the figure, the number of frames of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53 is 20 frames (0th to 19th), and the symbols are "Red Seven", "White Seven", and " There are 10 types: "sheep", "blank", "bell A", "bell B", "replay", "watermelon A", "watermelon B", and "cherry". Here, the "blank" is a symbol included in the symbol combination constituting the winning combination like other symbols, and does not mean a symbol not constituting the winning combination, but a symbol constituting the winning combination including the "blank". As a combination, for example, "Watermelon A / Red Seven / Blank" has a prize of 08, and "Watermelon A / White Seven / Blank" has a prize of 10. The configuration shown in the figure is just an example, and there is no problem even if the types of symbols are increased / decreased / changed.

Next, FIGS. 247 to 250 are a list of symbol combinations 1 to 4 in the eighth embodiment. In the eighth embodiment, a plurality of symbol combinations exist for each condition device, and as will be described later, depending on the stop order and stop position of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53, Any one of the symbol combinations is configured to be stopped and displayed on the effective line (the above-mentioned one line). Even if the same type of symbols are not aligned on the effective line, the same symbol is easily aligned in a row on the line other than the effective line from the player's point of view. Further, in the eighth embodiment, "Blank / Watermelon B / Red Seven", which is a type 1 BB-A (finished with a payout of more than 70 sheets), and a type 1 as a symbol combination corresponding to the type 1 BB combination. It has two symbol combinations with BB-B (finished with payout of more than 70 sheets) "Blank / Watermelon B / Blank". In Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-B, unlike the all-JACIN type condition device that continuously operates the RB combination, the RB combination is drawn by lottery while the Type 1 BB is operating and inside the RB. The so-called shift RB type is adopted. The role of RB is RB-A (RB in operation of type 1 BB), RB-B (RB in operation of type 1 BB), RB-C (RB in operation of type 1 BB), RB-D ( It has four RBs) during the operation of the type 1 BB, and is configured to draw these four RB combinations with a predetermined probability while the type 1 BB is operating and inside the RB. If the push order bell, which is the condition device for "winning-A1" to "winning-B6", which will be described later, is won, stopping the reels in the pushing order that is most advantageous to the player corresponds to the 30th to 37th. When the combination of symbols from "Winning 01" to "Winning 06" is stopped and displayed, 10 game medals are paid out, and the reels are stopped in a pushing order different from the pushing order that is most advantageous for the player, 38 The symbol combinations of "winning 07" to "winning 32" corresponding to the numbers to 94 are stopped and displayed, and one game medal is paid out or lost. In the eighth embodiment, the RB combination is drawn while the type 1 BB is operating and the RB is not inside, and the RB combination is not drawn while the RB is operating. RB-B may be configured to be elected while -A is operating, or RB-A may be configured to be elected while RB-A is operating. If RB-B is elected during the operation of RB-A, the winning of RB-B is carried over until the operation of RB-A is completed, and the symbol combination related to RB-B is performed after the operation of RB-A is completed. May be configured to operate RB-B by displaying a stop (the same may be made when RB-A is elected while RB-A is operating). As such a configuration, for example, when the RB-B operation is more advantageous for the player than the RB-A operation (for example, the expected value of the ball output is high), the player RB -It will be noticed which RB (RB-A or RB-B) has been won during the operation of A, and it is possible to create a highly entertaining gaming machine.

Next, FIG. 251 is a list of condition devices according to the eighth embodiment. In the figure, the conditional device number is referred to as a winning number, and the conditional device number may be referred to as a winning number thereafter. In the eighth embodiment, the re-game combination is provided from re-game-A to re-game-M (winning numbers 1 to 13), and the stop order and stop position of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53. It is configured so that the reels to be stopped and displayed may be different depending on the reels. Winning-A1 to winning-B6 (winning numbers 14 to 25) as a push order bell role is a push order role, and the reel is stopped according to a predetermined push order, and the most payout is 10 It is possible to get the payout of the card combination, and if the reel stop operation is not performed according to the predetermined push order, the payout of the single card combination is obtained or it is lost (described above). The number priority control and the number priority control are used). In winning-C and winning-D (winning numbers 26 and 27), it is a conditional device that can be won while the RB is operating. Type 1 BB is a conditional device according to type 1 BB. In this example, the shift RB type is adopted, in which the RB is not configured to operate continuously while the type 1 BB is operating, and the RB combination is drawn while the type 1 BB is operating. RB-A to D (winning numbers 29 to 32) are RB combinations, and a lottery is performed at a predetermined winning rate (lottery probability) in a situation where the type 1 BB is operating and the RB is not inside.

Here, in the eighth embodiment, as shown in the item of "conditional apparatus breakdown" in the rightmost column, depending on the stop order and stop position of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53. It is configured so that multiple types of symbol combinations (names) can be stopped and displayed, and among the multiple types of symbol combinations (names), the symbol combinations (names) that have the same winning number are grouped together and are the third from the right. It is illustrated in the item of "conditional device" in the column of. Specifically, for example, in the "winning-A1" which is a conditional device corresponding to the winning number 14, "winning 01" is obtained according to the stop order and stop position of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53. , "Prize 15", "Prize 20", "Prize 23", "Prize 27" 5 types of symbol combinations (names) can be stopped and displayed. Further, "re-game 01" and the like are names of symbol combinations, and the symbol combinations that become "re-game 01" are configured so that there may be a plurality of types. In addition, a name such as "re-game 01" or a conditional device such as "re-game-A" may be referred to as a re-game role, and a name such as "winning 01" or a conditional device such as "winning-A1" may be referred to as a small. Sometimes referred to as a combination, and a conditional device such as "Type 1 BB-A" may be referred to as a BB combination.

Next, in the item of "role", what kind of role the "condition device" plays is illustrated, and the "normal replay" corresponding to the winning number 1 is performed regardless of the order in which the stop button is pressed. It is a condition device related to the re-game in which the re-game combination in which the RT state does not shift is stopped and displayed. "Watermelon A" and "Watermelon B" corresponding to the winning numbers 2 to 3 are conditional devices related to the replaying role, but when the player performs the stop operation of all reels, the watermelon (watermelon A, It is configured so that the watermelon B) appears to be aligned in the middle row or downward to the right (watermelon A or watermelon B is stopped and displayed in a straight line in the middle row or downward to the right). The "weak cherry" and "strong cherry" corresponding to the winning numbers 4 to 5 are conditional devices related to the replaying role as in the winning numbers 2 to 3, and the cherry is released when the left reel M51 is stopped. It is configured so that it can stop at any of the upper, middle, and lower stages of the left reel. When all reels are stopped, the cherry symbol may be displayed as stopped in various stop modes (for example, cherry-cherry-cherry in the lower right, cherry only in the lower row of the left reel, and left. Cherry on the bottom of the reel, cherry on the middle of the middle reel, no cherry pattern on the right reel, etc.). Even if the stop operation is performed so that the cherry symbol is not stopped and displayed on the left reel, the replay symbol on the left reel is a substitute symbol for the cherry symbol, and the winning numbers 4 to 5 where the left reel is a replay. Since the symbol combinations constituting the above can always be stopped and displayed, it is configured so that a disadvantageous situation does not occur to the player. The "chance eyes A to D" corresponding to the winning numbers 6 to 9 are conditional devices related to the replaying combination as in the winning numbers 2 to 5, and the winning numbers 6 are used regardless of the player's stop operation. The symbol combinations related to "replay-FI" corresponding to 9 to 9 are configured to be stopped and displayed. "Watermelon A (strong)" and "watermelon B (strong)" corresponding to the winning numbers 11 to 12 are conditional devices related to the replaying combination, but are viewed by the player when all reels are stopped. And watermelons (watermelon A, watermelon B) appear to be aligned in the middle or downward to the right (watermelon A or watermelon B is stopped and displayed in a straight line in the middle or downward to the right). The "weak cherry (strong)" corresponding to the winning number 13 is a conditional device related to the replaying role as in the winning numbers 2 to 3, but when the left reel M51 is stopped, the cherry is on the left reel. It is configured so that it can stop at any of the upper, middle, and lower stages. When all reels are stopped, the cherry symbol may be displayed as stopped in various stop modes (for example, cherry-cherry-cherry in the lower right, cherry only in the lower row of the left reel, and left. Cherry on the bottom of the reel, cherry on the middle of the middle reel, no cherry pattern on the right reel, etc.). Further, even if the stop operation is performed so that the cherry symbol is not stopped and displayed on the left reel, the symbol combination related to "re-game-DE" corresponding to the winning number 13 is stopped and displayed, which is disadvantageous to the player. It is configured so that various situations do not occur. These "watermelon", "cherry", and "chance eyes" replaying roles mainly shift the gaming state to a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, or in the AT in-progress state, the number of AT sets is increased. It is a conditional device that has a role of being advantageous to the player by performing an additional lottery or a lottery for adding the number of games in the AT state. In addition, "re-game-KM" corresponding to winning numbers 11 to 13 is more important than "re-game-B to E" corresponding to winning numbers 2 to 5, which are re-game roles as "watermelon" and "cherry". Is configured to give preferential treatment to the game state that is advantageous to the player, the lottery to add the number of AT sets, or the lottery to add the number of games in the AT state, etc. ing.

In addition, the "push order bell 123 (6 choices)" to "push order bell 321 (6 choices)" corresponding to the winning numbers 14 to 25 are small winning combinations depending on which of the 6 choices is the reel stop order. Is a condition device that can be different, for example, "left reel M51: 1, middle reel M52: 2, right reel M53: 3", and in the case of "123", "left reel M51 → middle reel M52 → right reel". It means to stop in the push order of "M53", and means to stop the reels in the order of "123" = "left → middle → right". For example, in the case of "winning A-1" (winning number 14), if "123" = "left → middle → right" is stopped (correctly answered in the order of pressing), the maximum number of 10 game medals won The symbol combination that becomes the "winning 01" that can be obtained will be stopped and displayed. In addition, when the reels are stopped in a pushing order other than the pushing order in which the maximum number of winning sheets can be obtained, that is, if the correct answer cannot be obtained in the pushing order, one piece is paid out or lost. By configuring it, you can navigate the push order of the re-game combination and the push order of the bell in the state related to AT such as "AT in progress state" (the push order display device D270 displays the push order that is the most profitable). It is possible to create a plurality of gaming states in which the profit margins of the players differ, that is, the push order is not navigated to the AT-related states such as "normal gaming state". The state related to AT will be described later.

Further, the "winning-C" and "winning-D" corresponding to the winning numbers 26 and 27 are conditional devices that can be won during the RB operation. In the eighth embodiment, the RB is not a type of condition device in which the RB operates continuously while the BB is operating, but a lottery for the RB role is performed while the type 1 BB is operating, and the RB is further awarded to win the RB so that the RB is operating. It is configured to be. In RB-A to D, it is a so-called RB role. The details of the type 1 BB operation and the RB operation will be described later.

Next, in the item of "bonus winning information", numerical values from 0 to 2 are assigned to each winning number. In the eighth embodiment, the winning number that does not include the bonus (BB combination) has the bonus winning information set to 0, and the winning number that includes the bonus (BB combination) is the winning number (28) that includes one type BB. The bonus winning information is 1, the bonus winning information of the winning number (29) including RB-A is 2, the bonus winning information of the winning number (30) including RB-B is 3, and the winning number including RB-C. The bonus winning information of (31) is 4, and the bonus winning information of the winning number (32) including RB-D is 5. In the eighth embodiment, it is stipulated that the bonus (BB role) is not won in duplicate with the small role, but is won independently, but the bonus (BB role) is to be won in duplicate with the small role. It is also possible to configure to. In addition, when the replay game-E with the winning number 5 is won in the state where the 1st class BB is won, the bonus winning information is not 0, and the bonus winning information corresponding to the winning bonus is displayed. Assigned.

Next, in the item of "winning / replay winning information", numerical values from 0 to 27 are assigned to each winning number. In the eighth embodiment, the winning numbers (winning numbers 0 corresponding to the loss and winning numbers 28 to 32 corresponding to the bonus) that do not include the re-game winning combination and the small winning combination are set to 0 for the winning / re-gaming winning information. The winning numbers 1 to 27 winning / re-gaming winning information including the re-gaming combination or the small winning combination are distributed to each condition device.

Next, in the item of "effect group number", numerical values from 0 to 15 are assigned to each winning number. By transmitting the effect group number from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side, the effect to be executed by the sub control board S side can be determined.

Next, FIG. 252 shows a lottery in which the winning numbers (also referred to as conditional device numbers and winning combinations) and bonuses (also referred to as BB and BB combinations) relating to the small winning combination and the replaying combination in the eighth embodiment are determined by the winning combination lottery means. It is a list showing the probability (also called the winning rate). In the figure, the winning rate of the winning numbers is shown.

First, the lottery probability in "RT0" when the type 1 BB is not operated and inside the type 1 BB is not described in detail. In the eighth embodiment, the lottery probability of the winning combination may differ depending on the RT state. In the eighth embodiment, it is assumed that the lottery probability of the re-game combination ("re-game-A" to "re-game-M") is the same for "RT0" and "inside the type 1 BB" described later. .. The winning number 1 "re-game A" corresponds to a general re-game combination. In addition, "re-game-BM", which can be stopped and displayed with winning numbers 2 to 13, is a part of the re-game role, but depending on the stop operation, a combination of symbols in which watermelons are lined up in a straight line and cherries are on the left reel. It has a role as a so-called rare role of stopping and displaying in the upper, middle or lower tiers. The winning numbers 14 to 25, "winning-A1 to B6", are push order bells, and push order navigation that informs the player of the reel stop order that is most advantageous to the player is pushed order display device D270 and effect display device S40. The details of the stop display mode of the bell role based on the push order will be described later. The "winning-C to D" winning numbers 26 to 27 are conditional devices that can be stopped and displayed during the RB operation by the type 1 BB combination operation. The winning number 28, "Type 1 BB", is the role of BB. The winning numbers 29 to 32, "RB-A to D", are RB roles. In this example, the transition lottery to the "advantageous section" (advantageous section transition lottery) is performed by winning the type 1 BB which is the BB role as in the sixth embodiment and the seventh embodiment described above. And.

Next, the lottery probability in "type 1 BB operating and RB non-internal" during BB operation will be described in detail. "Type 1 BB is operating and RB is not inside" is a state in which the BB is operating and the RB has not been won (the condition device related to the RB has not been carried over). In this state, the lottery of "Winning-A1 to B6" is performed at the same winning rate (lottery probability) as "RT0". Unlike "RT0", a lottery of "RB-A to D" is performed. "RB-A to D" are RB roles, but unless the player performs a stop operation in a specific range of the reels, the symbol combinations constituting RB-A to D are not stopped and displayed, and the RB operates. It is configured not to. Further, the specific range in which the symbol combination related to RB can be stopped and displayed is configured to be different for each RB combination. For example, when the symbol combination related to RB-A is stopped and displayed, the stop operation is executed. The symbol combinations related to RB-B to RB-D are configured so that they cannot be stopped and displayed, and when the symbol combinations related to RB-B execute a stop operation capable of stopping and displaying, they are related to RB-A to RB-D. The symbol combination is configured so that it cannot be stopped and displayed, and when the symbol combination related to RB-C executes a stop operation that allows stop display, the symbol combination related to RB-A, RB-B, and RB-D is stopped and displayed. It is configured so that when the symbol combination related to RB-D is stopped and displayed, the symbol combination related to RB-A, RB-B, and RB-C cannot be stopped and displayed. There is.

Next, the lottery probability in "type 1 BB operating and inside RB" during BB operation will be described in detail. "Type 1 BB is operating and inside the RB" is a state in which the BB is operating and the RB has been elected (carried over). In this state, the lottery of "Winning-A1 to B6" is performed at the same winning rate (lottery probability) as "RT0", but in "RB-A to D", one of the RB roles has already been played. Since it is in the winning state, the lottery will not be held. When a random number that wins any of the winning numbers 29 to 32 "RB-A to D" is acquired, the stop is the same as when a loss occurs in "Type 1 BB is operating and inside the RB". It becomes control. In addition, the lottery for "replay-A", which was not done in the "type 1 BB operating and RB non-internal", is configured to be performed.

Next, the lottery probability in "RB is operating" during RB operation will be described in detail. In the eighth embodiment, during the RB operation, two small winning combinations, "all winnings are won" with winning number 26 and "all winnings with one winning combination are won" with winning number 27, can be won. It is also configured to have a "loss". The details will be described later, but "RB is operating" is 1 of "RB is operating" because it is configured so that the probability that "all 1-card winnings are won" of winning number 27 is particularly high. The expected value for increasing or decreasing medals per game is negative, that is, the number of medals decreases as the game is played.

<Stop control of "RT0", "Type 1 BB inside" and "Type 1 BB general and RB non-inside">
Next, the stop display mode of the bell combination based on the push order will be described in detail. First, in the eighth embodiment, the stop display mode of the bell role in "RT0", "inside the type 1 BB" and "inside the general type 1 BB and not inside the RB" will be described in detail.

Explaining in detail the case of "winning-A1" (condition device number 14), it is stopped in the order of "123" = "left → middle → right", that is, if the correct answer is given in the pressing order, 10 cards are paid out, and "132". ”=“ Left → Right → Middle ”, that is, if the correct answer cannot be answered in the second and third push orders, one card will be paid out, and the other push orders, that is,“ 2 ** ”=“ If the first stop operation such as "Middle → * → *" or "3 **" = "Right → * → *" is not the left reel and the pressing order cannot be answered correctly, there is a 1/4 chance of 1 It is configured so that the number of sheets is paid out and the loss is 3/4.

Next, the reel stop control based on the push position will be described in detail. For example, in the case of "Winning-A1", the bell symbol can stop rising to the right, but the probability that the bell symbol actually stops is the probability shown in the figure (4844/65536). Instead, in the situation where the push order navigation does not occur, the bell symbol will stop if the correct answer is given in the 6-choice push order in which the 10-card combination will win. In addition, in the situation where the push order navigation does not occur, if the correct answer is not given in the 6-choice push order that will win the 10-card combination, the bell design will not stop and "Prize 15, 20, 23, 27". The role of one piece such as, or the loss stops. In a situation where push order navigation can occur, if the reels are stopped according to the push order navigation, 10 cards will always win a prize. Specifically, for example, in a situation where the condition device number 14 corresponding to "winning-A1" is determined, (1) when the left reel is operated by the first stop operation, the winning combination of 10 cards of winning 01 is obtained. Or, one of the winning 27 will win the prize. More specifically, (1-1) when the left reel is stopped by the first stop operation, the watermelon A is stopped and displayed in the middle stage, and (1-2) the middle reel is stopped by the second stop operation. If this is the case, the bell A will be stopped and displayed in the middle row, and if the right reel is stopped and displayed in the third stop operation, the cherry will be stopped and displayed in the middle row to match the symbol combination corresponding to the winning 01 (upward to the right). When the bell alignment) is stopped and displayed, 10 cards are paid out, and (1-3) when the right reel is stopped by the second stop operation, the bell A is stopped and displayed, and the third stop operation is performed. When the middle reel is stopped, either a blank or a cherry is stopped and displayed depending on the stop operation timing, and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning 27 is stopped and displayed, so that one card combination is paid out.

(2) If the middle reel is stopped by the first stop operation, the winning 15 or the winning 20 will be won or lost. More specifically, (2-1) when the middle reel is stopped by the first stop operation, the replay is stopped and displayed in the middle stage, and (2-2) the left reel is stopped by the second stop operation. In that case, depending on the stop operation timing, sheep, bell A (sheep and bell A constituting the winning 15 within 4 frames after receiving the stop operation), red seven, bell B (4 after receiving the stop operation). One of the red sevens and bells B) that make up the winning 20 within the frame is displayed as a stop in the middle row, and (2-2-1) the sheep and bell A on the left reel in the second stop operation depending on the stop operation timing. (The sheep and bell A that make up the winning 15 within 4 frames after receiving the stop operation) are stopped and displayed in the middle row, and the stop operation timing (left reel) where the sheep and bell A cannot be stopped and displayed in the middle row. When the reel is stopped at the operation timing other than the watermelon A of the symbol number 2 to the bell A of the symbol number 11 in the middle row, the sheep constituting the winning 15 and the symbols other than the bell A are stopped and displayed in the middle row. When the sheep and bell A are stopped and displayed in the middle of the left reel, and when the right reel is stopped by the third stop operation, Red Seven (within 4 frames after receiving the stop operation) depending on the stop operation timing. When the red seven that constitutes the winning 15 in is displayed as a stop in the middle row, and when the stop operation timing is such that the red seven cannot be stopped and displayed in the middle row (watermelon A with symbol number 14 to red seven with symbol number 18 in the middle row of the right reel). Operation timing other than) When the stop operation is performed, the symbols other than the red seven that make up the winning 15 are stopped and displayed in the middle row, and the sheep and bell A are stopped and displayed in the middle row of the left reel, and the right reel. If Red Seven is stopped and displayed in the middle row, one of the winning 15 will be paid out by winning, and if sheep and Bell A are not stopped and displayed in the middle row of the left reel, or in the middle row of the right reel. If Red Seven is not displayed as a stop, it will be lost. (2-2-2) Depending on the stop operation timing, Red Seven will be on the left reel in the second stop operation, and Bell B (a prize within 4 frames after receiving the stop operation). When the red seven and bell B that make up 20 are stopped and displayed in the middle row, and the stop operation timing when the red seven and bell B cannot be stopped and displayed in the middle row (watermelon A to symbol with symbol number 12 in the middle row of the left reel) When the stop operation is performed at the operation timing other than the bell B of the number 1, the red seven constituting the winning 20 and the symbols other than the bell B are stopped and displayed in the middle row. If Red Seven and Bell B are stopped and displayed in the middle of the left reel, and if Red Seven is stopped and displayed in the middle of the right reel, one of the winning 20 prizes will be paid out. , If the red seven and bell B are not stopped and displayed in the middle of the left reel, or if the red seven is not stopped and displayed in the middle of the right reel, it is a loss. From the above, when the condition device number 14 corresponding to "Winning-A1" is determined and the middle reel is stopped by the first stop operation, the total winning probability of the winning 15 and the winning 20 is It becomes 1/4. As a detailed calculation, first, the permissible stop range of the left reel configuration symbol (sheep and bell A) in the winning 15 is 1/2 of all 20 frames, and the right reel configuration symbol (red seven) is stopped. Since the permissible range is 1/4 of all 20 frames, it can be derived as 1/8 by multiplication. Similarly, the stop allowance range of the left reel configuration symbol (Red Seven and Bell B) in the winning 20 is 1/2 of all 20 frames, and the stop allowance half of the right reel configuration symbol (Red Seven) is half. Since it is 1/4 of all 20 frames, it can be derived as 1/8 by multiplication, and the total of each is 1/4. From the above, it can be said that in the left reel, any one of the sheep, the bell A, the red seven, and the bell B constituting the winning 15 and the winning 20 can be stopped in the middle stage regardless of the pushing position. , When the right reel is operated at a timing other than a specific operation timing (operation timing other than watermelon A of symbol number 14 to red seven of symbol number 18 in the middle of the right reel), it corresponds to winning 15 and winning 20. The symbol combination is not displayed as a stop and is lost, and the stop display probability of the loss is 15/20 (3/4).

(3) When the right reel is stopped by the first stop operation, one of the prizes 23 will be won or lost. More specifically, (3-1) when the right reel is stopped by the first stop operation, the watermelon A is stopped and displayed in the middle stage, and (3-2) the left reel is stopped by the second stop operation. If this is the case, either Red Seven, Bell A, or Bell B will be stopped and displayed in the middle row depending on the stop operation timing, and if the middle reel is stopped by the third stop operation, it will be red depending on the stop operation timing. When Seven (seven symbols that make up the winning 20 within 4 frames after receiving the stop operation) is stopped and displayed in the middle row, and when the red seven cannot be stopped and displayed in the middle row (the symbol number in the middle row of the middle reel) When the stop operation is performed at the watermelon B of 14 to the operation timing other than the red seven of the symbol number 18, the symbols other than the red seven constituting the winning 23 are stopped and displayed, and the red seven is stopped and displayed in the middle of the middle reel. If any of the prizes 23 is won, one card will be paid out, and if the red seven is not stopped and displayed in the middle of the middle reel, it will be a loss. (3-3) When the middle reel is stopped by the second stop operation, the red seven (seven symbols constituting the winning 23 within 4 frames after receiving the stop operation) is placed in the middle stage depending on the stop operation timing. When the stop operation is displayed, or when the stop operation timing is such that the red seven cannot be stopped and displayed in the middle stage (the operation timing other than the watermelon B of the symbol number 14 to the red seven of the symbol number 18 in the middle stage of the middle reel). , A symbol other than the red seven that constitutes the prize 23 is stopped and displayed in the middle row, and when the left reel is stopped by the third stop operation, the red seven, bell A, or bell A is displayed in the middle row depending on the stop operation timing. If any of them is stopped and displayed, and if Red Seven is stopped and displayed in the middle of the middle reel, one card is paid out by winning any of the winning 20s, and if Red Seven is not stopped and displayed in the middle of the middle reel. Will be lost. From the above, in the situation where the condition device number 14 corresponding to "Winning-A1" is determined, if the right reel is stopped by the first stop operation, the winning probability of the winning 23 is 5/20 (1). / 4). Further, if the middle reel is operated at a timing other than a specific operation timing (operation timing other than watermelon B of symbol number 15 to red seven of symbol number 19 in the middle stage of the reel), the symbol combination corresponding to the winning 23 is stopped. It is not displayed and becomes a loss, and the stop display probability of the loss is 15/20 (3/4). The reel stop control based on the pushing order when "winning-A1" is determined as the conditional device number has been described, but the reel stop control based on this pushing order is the same for "winning-A2" to "winning-A6". It has become.

When the condition device number 15 corresponding to "Winning-A2" is determined and the first stop operation is the middle reel, it is operated at the timing (1/4) when the white seven is stopped and displayed on the right reel. In that case, the symbol combinations corresponding to the winning 15 and the winning 20 are stopped and displayed, and at other operation timings (3/4), the white seven is not stopped and displayed, resulting in a loss. In addition, when the condition device number of "Winning-A2" is determined and the first stop operation is the right reel, the operation is performed at the timing (1/4) when the white seven is stopped and displayed on the middle reel. The symbol combination corresponding to the winning 24 is stopped and displayed, and at other operation timings (3/4), the symbol combination corresponding to the winning 24 is not stopped and displayed, resulting in a loss.

When the condition device number 16 corresponding to "Winning-A3" is determined and the first stop operation is the left reel, the timing (1/2) when the red seven and the white seven are stopped and displayed on the middle reel. ), And when the operation is performed at the timing (1/2 * 1/2 = 1/4) when the sheep and the blank are stopped and displayed on the right reel, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning 08 and the winning 10 is stopped and displayed. At other operation timings (3/4), the symbols constituting the winning 08 and the winning 10 are not stopped and displayed, resulting in a loss. In addition, in the situation where the condition device number of "Winning-A3" is determined, when the first stop operation is the right reel, when the sheep is operated at the timing (1/4) when the sheep is stopped and displayed on the middle reel. The symbol combination corresponding to the winning 25 is stopped and displayed, and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning 25 is not stopped and displayed at other operation timings (3/4), resulting in a loss.

When the condition device number 17 corresponding to "Winning-A4" is determined and the first stop operation is the left reel, the timing (1/2) when the sheep and the blank are stopped and displayed on the middle reel. Moreover, when the operation is performed at the timing (1/2 * 1/2 = 1/4) when the red seven and the white seven are stopped and displayed on the right reel, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning 07 and the winning 09 is stopped and displayed. At other operation timings (3/4), the symbols constituting the winning 07 and the winning 09 are not stopped and displayed, resulting in a loss. Further, in the situation where the condition device number of "winning-A4" is determined, when the first stop operation is the right reel, it is operated at the timing (1/4) when the blank is stopped and displayed on the middle reel. The symbol combination corresponding to the winning 26 is stopped and displayed, and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning 26 is not stopped and displayed at other operation timings (3/4), resulting in a loss.

When the condition device number 18 corresponding to "Winning-A5" is determined and the first stop operation is the left reel, the timing (1/2) when the sheep and the blank are stopped and displayed on the middle reel. Moreover, when the sheep and the blank are operated at the timing (1/2 * 1/2 = 1/4) when the sheep and the blank are stopped and displayed on the right reel, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning 12 and the winning 14 is stopped and displayed. At other operation timings (3/4), the symbols constituting the winning 12 and the winning 14 are not stopped and displayed, resulting in a loss. In addition, when the condition device number of "Winning-A5" is determined and the first stop operation is the middle reel, the timing when the sheep is stopped and displayed on the right reel (1/4), or the sheep on the left reel. , And at the timing when any of the bell A is stopped and displayed (1/2 * 1/4 = 1/8), the symbol combination corresponding to the winning 17 is stopped and displayed, and the blank is stopped and displayed on the right reel. At (1/4), or at the timing (1/2 * 1/4 = 1/8) when either Red Seven or Bell B is stopped and displayed on the left reel, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning 22 is stopped and displayed. At other operation timings (3/4), the symbol combinations corresponding to the winning 17 and the winning 22 are not stopped and displayed, resulting in a loss.

When the condition device number 18 corresponding to "Winning-A6" is determined and the first stop operation is the left reel, the timing (1/2) when the sheep and the blank are stopped and displayed on the middle reel. Moreover, when the red seven and the white seven are stopped and displayed on the right reel (1/2 * 1/2 = 1/4), the symbol combination corresponding to the winning 11 and the winning 13 is stopped and displayed. At other operation timings (3/4), the symbols constituting the winning 11 and the winning 13 are not stopped and displayed, resulting in a loss. In addition, when the condition device number of "Winning-A6" is determined and the first stop operation is the middle reel, the blank is displayed on the right reel as a stop (1/4), or the sheep on the left reel. , And at the timing when any of the bell A is stopped and displayed (1/2 * 1/4 = 1/8), the symbol combination corresponding to the winning 17 is stopped and displayed, and the sheep is stopped and displayed on the right reel. At (1/4), or at the timing (1/2 * 1/4 = 1/8) when either Red Seven or Bell B is stopped and displayed on the left reel, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning 21 is stopped and displayed. At other operation timings (3/4), the symbol combinations constituting the winning 18 and the winning 21 are not stopped and displayed, resulting in a loss.

Further, the "winning-B1" to "winning-B6" as the push order bell role similar to the "winning-A1 to A6" are configured to have the same reel stop control as the "winning-A1". In other words, when the reels are stopped in a predetermined stop order (correct answer in push order), the one with the largest number of payouts is given priority among the symbol combinations that make up the winning condition device. The reel stop control is performed so that the stop display is performed, the reels are stopped in the predetermined stop order in the first stop operation, and each reel is stopped in the predetermined stop order in the second stop operation. If the stop operation is not performed, the reel stop control is performed so that the symbol combinations constituting the one-card combination are preferentially stopped and displayed. Further, when the stop operation of each reel is not performed in the predetermined stop order in the first stop operation, the stop operation is performed within the range in which the symbol combination constituting the one-card combination on the predetermined reel can be stopped. For example, the reels are controlled so that the symbol combinations constituting the one-card combination are stopped and displayed by (1 / 2 * 1/2 = 1/4 range) with two reels, while the one-card combination is configured with a predetermined reel. By not performing the stop operation within the range in which the symbol combination can be stopped (for example, in the range of 3/4), the symbol combinations constituting the one-card combination are not stopped and displayed, resulting in a loss.

<Stop control of "inside RB">
Next, the stop display mode of the bell role in "inside the RB" in the eighth embodiment will be described in detail.

Explaining in detail the case of "winning-A1" (condition device number 14), 10 cards are paid out regardless of the push order and the stop operation timing. That is, regardless of the push order and the stop operation timing, the number of sheets is prioritized in the first stop operation and the second stop operation, and the winning 01 is stopped and displayed. In addition, the symbol combination of No. 30 which is the prize 01 is "Watermelon A / Bell A / Cherry", and the watermelon A on the left reel, the bell A on the middle reel, and the cherry on the right reel are all PB = 1. Therefore, in the game in which "Winning-A1" (conditional device number 14) is won, the symbol combination of No. 30, which is the winning 01, is stopped and displayed regardless of the stop operation timing.

Also, for "Prize-A2" to "Prize-A6", as with "Prize-A1", the number of sheets is prioritized for the first stop operation and the second stop operation regardless of the push order and stop operation timing, and the prize is won. Any one of 02 to winning 06 will be stopped and displayed. In addition, "winning-A1" to "winning-A6" may be collectively referred to as a push order bell A group.

Explaining in detail the case of "winning-B1" (condition device number 20), one piece is paid out or no payout is made regardless of the push order and the stop operation timing (10 pieces are not paid out). That is, regardless of the push order and the stop operation timing, the number priority control is performed in the first stop operation and the second stop operation. The symbol combinations (names) of "Prize-B1" are prize 01, prize 15, prize 20, prize 24, and prize 27.

The case of "winning-B1" will be described in detail with a specific example.
(1) When the left reel is stopped as the first stop, the symbol "watermelon A" with PB = 1 is stopped and displayed by the number priority control. The design combinations where the left reel is "Watermelon A" are No. 30 "Watermelon A / Bell A / Cherry", No. 82 "Watermelon A / Blank Bell A" and No. 83 "Watermelon A / Cherry / Bell A". The symbols on the left reel of the other symbol combinations are "sheep", "bell A", "red seven", and "bell B", and each of them can be stopped and displayed afterwards. Since there are two or less combinations, "Watermelon A" is displayed on the left reel as a stop display (the display of a stop on the effective line may be simply referred to as a stop display, and the same applies hereinafter).
(1-1) When the middle reel is stopped as the second stop after the left reel is stopped as the first stop, "cherry", which is a symbol of PB = 1, is stopped and displayed by the number priority control. The symbol combination in which the middle reel is "cherry" has one type of "watermelon A, cherry bell A" of No. 83, and the symbols of the middle reels in the other symbol combinations are "bell A" and "bell A". It is a "blank", and there is one type of symbol combination that can be stopped and displayed after that (the same number as the "cherry"), and in the eighth embodiment, it is defined that the "cherry" is stopped and displayed.
(1-1-1) When the middle reel is stopped as the second stop and then the right reel is stopped as the third stop, the symbol "Bell A" with PB = 1 is stopped and displayed, and the 83rd "Bell A" is displayed. "Watermelon A, Cherry, Bell A" will be stopped and displayed, and one piece will be paid out.

(1-2) When the left reel is stopped as the first stop and then the right reel is stopped as the second stop, "Bell A", which is a symbol of PB = 1, is stopped and displayed by the number priority control. There are two types of symbol combinations where the right reel is "Bell A", No. 82 "Watermelon A / Blank Bell A" and No. 83 "Watermelon A / Cherry Bell A", and other symbol combinations. The symbol on the right reel of the watermelon is "cherry", and since there is only one type of symbol combination that can be stopped and displayed after that, "bell A" is stopped and displayed on the right reel.
(1-2-1) When the right reel is stopped as the second stop and then the middle reel is stopped as the third stop, the symbol "cherry" with PB = 1 is stopped and displayed (not "blank"). (It is stipulated that "cherry" is stopped and displayed), No. 83 "Watermelon A, Cherry, Bell A" will be stopped and displayed, and one payout will be made.

(2) When the middle reel is stopped as the first stop, the "replay" symbol of PB = 1 is stopped and displayed by the number priority control. The symbol combinations for which the middle reel is "replay" are No. 54 "Sheep / Replay / Red Seven", No. 55 "Bell A / Replay / Red Seven" and No. 64 "Red Seven / Replay / White Seven". It has 4 types of No. 65 "Bell B / Replay / White Seven", and the middle reel designs of other design combinations are "Bell A", "White Seven", "Blank", and "Cherry". Since there are three or less kinds of symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed after that, "replay" is stopped and displayed on the middle reel.
(2-1) When the left reel is stopped at the timing when the left reels 1 to 10 are located at the lower stage as the second stop after the middle reel is stopped as the first stop, "Bell A" is controlled by priority control. Is stopped and displayed. The symbol combination in which the left reel is "Bell A" is No. 55 "Bell A, Replay, Red Seven", and the symbols on the left reel of the other symbol combinations are "Sheep", "Bell B", and "Bell B". Since it is "Red Seven" and the symbol combination that is placed in a position where it cannot be retracted or can be stopped and displayed is the same type as "Bell A", "Bell A" should be stopped and displayed in the eighth embodiment. It is stipulated in.
(2-1-1) After the left reel has stopped as the second stop ("Bell A" is displayed as a stop on the left reel), the right reel has 13 to 17 as the third stop at the timing when it is located in the lower row. When the reel is stopped, the 55th "Bell A / Replay / Red Seven" will be stopped and displayed, and one payout will be made. Also, if the right reel is stopped at the timing when the right reels 18 to 19 or 0 to 12 are located in the lower row as the third stop, "Red Seven" cannot be stopped and displayed on the right reel (cannot be retracted). Therefore, the 55th "Bell A, Replay, Red Seven" will not be stopped and will not be paid out.
(2-2) When the left reel is stopped at the timing when 0 or 11 to 19 of the left reel is located at the lower stage as the second stop after the middle reel is stopped as the first stop, the number priority control is used for "2-2". "Bell B" is stopped and displayed. The symbol combination in which the left reel is "Bell B" is No. 65 "Bell B / Replay / White Seven", and the symbols on the left reel of the other symbol combinations are "Sheep", "Bell A", and "Bell A". Since it is "Red Seven" and the symbol combination that is placed in a position where it cannot be retracted or can be stopped and displayed is the same type as "Bell B", "Bell B" should be stopped and displayed in the eighth embodiment. It is stipulated in.
(2-2-1) After the left reel is stopped as the second stop (“Bell B” is displayed as a stop on the left reel), the right reel is on the right at the timing when the 8th to 12th of the right reel are located at the bottom as the third stop. When the reel is stopped, the 65th "Bell B / Replay / White Seven" will be stopped and displayed, and one payout will be made. Also, if the right reel is stopped at the timing when the right reels 0 to 7 or 13 to 19 are located in the lower row as the third stop, "White Seven" cannot be stopped and displayed on the right reel (cannot be retracted). Therefore, the 65th "Bell B, Replay, White Seven" will not be stopped and will not be paid out.
(2-3) If the right reel is stopped at the timing when the 13th to 17th of the right reel are located at the lower stage as the second stop after the middle reel is stopped as the first stop, the 54th reel is on the right reel. "Red Seven" that composes "Sheep / Replay / Red Seven" and No. 55 "Bell A / Replay / Red Seven" is stopped and displayed ("White Seven" cannot be stopped and displayed).
(2-3-1) After the right reel is stopped as the second stop ("Red Seven" is displayed as a stop on the right reel), the left reel is on the left at the timing when the 1st to 10th of the left reel are located in the lower row as the third stop. When the reel is stopped, "Bell A" is stopped and displayed on the left reel (it is stipulated that "Bell A" is stopped and displayed instead of "Sheep"), and the 55th "Bell A Replay" is displayed.・ "Red Seven" will be stopped and displayed, and one card will be paid out. In addition, when the left reel is stopped at the timing when 0 or 11 to 19 of the left reel is located at the lower stage as the third stop, neither "bell A" nor "sheep" can be stopped and displayed on the left reel (pull-in). No. 54 "Sheep / Replay / Red Seven" and No. 55 "Bell A / Replay / Red Seven" will not be stopped and will not be paid out.
(2-4) When the right reel is stopped at the timing when the 8th to 12th of the right reel is located at the lower stage as the second stop after the middle reel is stopped as the first stop, the right reel is the 64th. "Red Seven / Replay / White Seven" and "White Seven" that composes No. 65 "Bell B / Replay / White Seven" are stopped and displayed ("Red Seven" cannot be stopped and displayed).
(2-4-1) After the right reel stops as the second stop (“White Seven” is displayed as a stop on the right reel), the timing when 0 or 11 to 19 of the left reel is located in the lower row as the third stop. When the left reel is stopped with, "Bell B" is stopped and displayed on the left reel (it is stipulated that "Bell B" is stopped and displayed instead of "Red Seven"), and the 65th "Bell" is displayed. "B. Replay / White Seven" will be stopped and displayed, and one card will be paid out. Also, if the left reel is stopped at the timing when the left reels 1 to 10 are located in the lower row as the third stop, neither "Bell B" nor "Red Seven" can be stopped and displayed on the left reel (cannot be retracted). ) Therefore, the 64th "Red Seven Replay White Seven" and the 65th "Bell B Replay White Seven" will not be stopped and will not be paid out.
(2-5) If the right reel is stopped at the timing when the right reels 0 to 7 or 18 to 19 are located at the lower stage as the second stop after the middle reel is stopped as the first stop, the right reel will be stopped. , Since neither "Red Seven" nor "White Seven" can be drawn in, the combination of symbols related to winning will not be stopped and there will be no payout.

(3) When the right reel is stopped as the first stop, the symbol "watermelon A" with PB = 1 is stopped and displayed by the number priority control. The design combinations in which the right reel is "Watermelon A" are No. 73 "Red Seven / White Seven / Watermelon A", No. 74 "Bell A / White Seven / Watermelon A" and No. 75 "Bell B / White Seven".・ It has three types with "Watermelon A", and the symbols on the right reel of the other symbol combinations are "Cherry", "Red Seven", "White Seven", and "Bell A", respectively, and then stop display. Since there are two or less possible symbol combinations, "Watermelon A" will be stopped and displayed on the right reel.
(3-1) If the left reel is stopped at the timing when 0 or 11 to 19 of the left reel is located at the lower stage as the second stop after the right reel is stopped as the first stop, the left reel will be stopped. "Bell B" is stopped and displayed (there is one type of symbol combination where the left reel is "Red Seven", and there is one type of symbol combination where the left reel is "Bell B", and both can be stopped and displayed. Even if the stop operation is performed at the timing, it is stipulated that "Bell B" is stopped and displayed instead of "Red Seven").
(3-1-1) After the left reel is stopped as the second stop (“Bell B” is displayed as a stop on the left reel), the middle reel is in the middle at the timing when the 8th to 12th of the middle reel are located in the lower stage as the third stop. When the reels are stopped, "White Seven" is stopped and displayed on the middle reel, and "Bell B, White Seven, Watermelon A" No. 75 is stopped and displayed, and one payout is made. In addition, when the middle reel is stopped at the timing when the middle reels 0 to 7 or 13 to 19 are located at the lower stage as the third stop, "white seven" cannot be stopped and displayed on the middle reel, so that the number 75 is used. "Bell B / White Seven / Watermelon A" does not stop and is not paid out.
(3-2) If the left reel is stopped at the timing when the left reels 1 to 10 are located at the lower stage as the second stop after the right reel is stopped as the first stop, the left reel will have a "bell". "A" is stopped and displayed.
(3-2-1) After the left reel is stopped as the second stop (“Bell A” is displayed as a stop on the left reel), the middle reel is in the middle at the timing when the 8th to 12th of the middle reel are located in the lower stage as the third stop. When the reels are stopped, "White Seven" is stopped and displayed on the middle reel, and "Bell A, White Seven, Watermelon A" No. 74 is stopped and displayed, and one payout is made. In addition, when the middle reel is stopped at the timing when the middle reels 0 to 7 or 13 to 19 are located at the lower stage as the third stop, "white seven" cannot be stopped and displayed on the middle reel, so that the number 74 is used. "Bell A / White Seven / Watermelon A" does not stop and is not paid out.
(3-3) When the right reel is stopped as the first stop and then the middle reel is stopped at the timing when the 8th to 12th of the middle reels are located at the lower stage as the second stop, "White Seven" is applied to the middle reel. Is stopped and displayed.
(3-3-1) After the middle reel stops as the second stop ("White Seven" is displayed as a stop on the middle reel), the left reel is on the left at the timing when the left reels 1 to 10 are located in the lower row as the third stop. When the reels are stopped, "Bell A" is stopped and displayed on the left reel, and "Bell A, White Seven, Watermelon A" No. 74 is stopped and displayed, and one payout is made.
(3-3-2) After the middle reel stops as the second stop (“White Seven” is displayed as a stop on the middle reel), the timing when 0 or 11 to 19 on the left reel is located at the bottom as the third stop. When the left reel is stopped with, "Bell B" is stopped and displayed on the left reel (there is one type of symbol combination where the left reel is "Red Seven", and the left reel is "Bell B". There is only one type of symbol combination, and even if the stop operation is performed at the timing when the stop display is possible, it is stipulated that "Bell B" is stopped and displayed instead of "Red Seven"), No. 75 "Bell B".・ "White Seven Watermelon A" will be stopped and displayed, and one piece will be paid out.
(3-4) If the right reel is stopped as the first stop and then the middle reel is stopped at the timing when the middle reels 0 to 7 or 13 to 19 are located at the lower stage as the second stop, the middle reel is stopped. Since "White Seven" cannot be stopped and displayed, the combination of symbols related to winning will not be stopped and no payout will be made.

Also, for "Prize-B2" to "Prize-B6", as with "Prize-B1", the number is prioritized for the first stop operation and the second stop operation regardless of the push order and stop operation timing. The symbol combination to be paid out is displayed as stopped or not paid out (the symbol combination related to the winning is not stopped and displayed). In addition, "winning-B1" to "winning-B6" may be collectively referred to as a push order bell B group.

As described above, in the "inside RB", when the push order bell A group is won, 10 payouts (relatively large number of payouts) regardless of the stop operation mode (push order and stop operation timing). ) Is stopped and displayed, and if the push order bell B group is won, the symbol combination that is one payout (relatively small number of payouts) is stopped and displayed, or the symbol combination that is not paid out is It is configured to stop and display (the symbol combination related to the winning is not stopped and displayed).

Next, FIG. 253 is an RT state transition diagram in the eighth embodiment. FIG. 253 will be described in detail. In the eighth embodiment, there are five RT states of "RT0", "Type 1 BB internal", "Type 1 BB general and RB non-internal", "RB internal", and "RB operating". is doing. In addition, in the type 1 BB in the eighth embodiment, unlike the all-JACIN type condition device that continuously operates the RB combination, the so-called shift in which the RB combination is drawn while the type 1 BB is operating and inside the RB is not. RB type is adopted. "Inside the 1st class BB" is a state in which the 1st class BB is elected and the 1st class BB is carried over. "Type 1 BB general and RB non-internal" is a state in which the type 1 BB combination is operating and the RB combination is not won (hereinafter, may also be referred to as type 1 BB general). .. "Inside the RB" is a state in which the type 1 BB combination is operating and a state in which the RB combination is elected and carried over. "RB is operating" is a state in which the RB combination is operating.

Next, the transition condition of the RT state will be described. The RT state shifts when the conditions shown by the arrows in the figure are satisfied. First, as a specific transition example in which the RT state shifts to "RT0", the RT state is "inside type 1 BB", "in operation of type 1 BB", "inside RB", and "in operation of RB". In the case of (all RT states except "RT0"), RAM initialization is executed, or when the operation of the first type BB is completed, the process shifts to "RT0".

Next, as a specific transition example in which the RT state shifts to "inside the type 1 BB", when the RT state is "RT0", the transition to "RT1" is performed when the type 1 BB is won. Next, as a specific example of transition in which the RT state shifts to "Type 1 BB in operation", in the RT state of "Type 1 BB inside", the winning Type 1 BB combination is awarded or ". In the RT state of "RT0", the RT state is changed to "1 type" by stopping and displaying the symbol combination related to the winning 1st type BB combination, or by ending the operation of RB-A to D while the 1st type BB is operating. It shifts to "BB is in operation". In addition, when directly shifting from "RT0" to "Type 1 BB in operation", the symbol combination related to Type 1 BB role is used in the winning game of Type 1 BB role without going through "Type 1 BB inside". This is the case when the stop display is displayed. Next, as a specific transition example in which the RT state shifts to "inside the RB", when the RT state is "Type 1 BB is in operation", the RB combination is won and the symbol combination related to the RB combination is used. If does not stop and display, it shifts to "inside RB". Next, as a specific transition example in which the RT state shifts to "RB is in operation", the symbol combination related to the winning RB combination is stopped and displayed in the RT state of "inside RB", or "1". In the RT state of "seed BB operating", the RT state shifts to "RB operating" by stopping and displaying the symbol combination related to the RB combination in the game in which the RB combination is won. Further, as described above, it is also possible to configure the RB combination to be drawn by lottery during "RB operation". If the RB role is drawn by lottery during "RB operation" and the RB role is won, the winning information of the RB role is carried over, and when the RB operation is completed and the transition to "Type 1 BB is in operation" is carried over. It is configured to move to "inside RB" again with reference to the winning information of RB.

As described above, in the eighth embodiment, unlike the all-JACIN type condition device that continuously operates the RB combination as the type 1 BB, the so-called shift in which the RB combination is drawn while the type 1 BB is operating and inside the RB is not. By adopting the RB type, it has a configuration having a section (referred to as a general type 1 BB) for drawing RBs during the operation of the type 1 BB.

Next, FIG. 254 is an AT state transition diagram in the eighth embodiment. FIG. 254 will be described. In the eighth embodiment, "low probability state A", "low probability state B", "high probability state A", "high probability state B", "AT in progress state A", "AT in progress state B", " There are nine AT-related states of "Type 1 BB general and RB non-internal", "RB internal", and "RB operating", and the AT is related by satisfying the conditions shown by the arrows in the figure. The state will shift. As the game section, the states related to the two ATs "low probability state A" and "low probability state B" are set to "normal section", and "high probability state A", "high probability state B", and "high probability state B" are set. The seven AT-related states of "AT in progress A", "AT in progress B", "Type 1 BB general and RB non-internal", "RB inward", and "RB in operation" are set as "advantageous sections". Will be done. That is, even if the state related to the seven ATs that are the "advantageous section" is transitioned (shifted), if 1500 games have passed without going through the "normal section" (the counter value of the game counter for the remaining advantageous section becomes 0). In the case of), the "advantageous section" is forcibly terminated and set to the "normal section". In setting each state of the "normal section" and the "advantageous section", for example, the "low probability state A" and the "low probability state B" are also set as the "advantageous section", and all nine ATs are related. It is also possible to set the state as an "advantageous section". Further, in the eighth embodiment, the type 1 BB combination is designed to be won with a high probability, but it is not in an advantageous state for the player while the type 1 BB is in operation.

The "low probability state A" and the "low probability state B" are normal intervals. The "low probability state A" is a state in which the type 1 BB combination is won and the type 1 BB combination is not won. The "low probability state B" is a state in which the type 1 BB combination has not been won. Transition to "advantageous section" As a lottery, mainly in "low probability state A" and "low probability state B", transition to "advantageous section" at a predetermined winning rate based on the winning of a predetermined small winning combination. A lottery will be held. As for the small winning combination that performs the transition lottery to the "advantageous section", as described in detail in the sixth embodiment, the inside of the winning type 1 BB combination and the 1st type BB winning combination are won. It is preferable that it is a small role in which the winning rate does not change in the non-internal. Here, for example, a conditional device related to a push order bell or a conditional device related to a replaying combination as a rare role mainly performs a transition lottery to an advantageous section. Further, even in the condition device related to the bonus such as the type 1 BB combination, it is possible to configure the transition lottery to the "advantageous section". In the "low probability state A" and the "low probability state B", the state related to AT is shifted based on the lottery result of the winning predetermined condition device. For example, in the "low probability state B", the lottery for the predetermined condition device is performed to win the transition lottery to the "high probability state B", and the state related to the AT shifts to the "high probability state B". Further, in the "low probability state A", the transition lottery of the "AT in progress state A" is won by the lottery of the predetermined condition device, and the state related to the AT shifts to the "AT in progress state A".

The "high probability state A" and the "high probability state B" are advantageous sections. The "high probability state A" is a state in which the type 1 BB combination is won and the type 1 BB combination is not won. The "high probability state B" is a state in which the type 1 BB combination has not been won. In addition, the "high probability state A" and the "high probability state B" are compared with the "low probability state A" and the "low probability state B", and the lottery for shifting to the "AT in progress state" which is advantageous for the player is performed. It can be said that it is in a state of preferential treatment. The "high probability state A" and the "high probability state B" are advantageous sections that are the end conditions of the "advantageous section" that won the transition lottery to the "AT in progress state", for example, in which the type 1 BB combination was won. The 1500G game was played after the start of the game (the counter value of the game number counter remaining in the advantageous section became 0), or the maximum number of game medals increased in the advantageous section (from the situation where the number of game medals decreased most for the player). The number of game medals increased) exceeded 2400, or any end condition of the advantageous section was satisfied (for example, the number of remaining AT games became 0 in the AT in-progress state A or B, high probability state A or The number of guaranteed games became 0 in B, the loop lottery of the 40G1 set was not won (AT in progress), the fixed 32G passed (Gase precursor state), and the push order navigation was executed during AT. Despite this, the player did not operate the stop button in the push order of the push order navigation, the game state (RT state or BB operation state) was changed, etc.), and the end condition of the "advantageous section" Is judged to be satisfied and terminated.

"AT in progress state A" and "AT in progress state B" are advantageous sections, and a push order navigation is generated in which the push order bell combination can be acquired with the 10 cards having the largest number of acquisitions. Further, in the "AT in-progress state A" and the "AT in-progress state B", for example, when a predetermined combination (rare role) is won, it is configured to have an "additional specialization state" which is more advantageous for the player. You may. With this configuration, the number of remaining games in "AT in progress A" and "AT in progress B" can be lengthened, and at the same time, it is possible to have a plurality of advantageous states for the player, which makes the game more enjoyable. Can be improved. The sections of "AT in progress state A" and "AT in progress state B" can be arbitrarily determined, but in the eighth embodiment, the initial number of games is set to 50 games. In the sections of "AT in progress A" and "AT in progress B", not only the number of games is managed, but also the difference number management defined by the number of game medals given (increased) by the player, Alternatively, the number of navigations specified by the number of times the push order navigation is executed (the number of times the instruction is executed) in the game in which the push order bell is won is managed. The number of remaining AT games may be added (adding the number of sets) by winning the additional lottery with the predetermined number of games as one set, or a combination of a plurality of these may be used.

"Class 1 BB in general", "RB inside", and "RB in operation" are normal sections or advantageous sections, and are in a state where they can stay when the Type 1 BB combination is won. In the eighth embodiment, in the type 1 BB-A and the type 1 BB-B, which are the type 1 BB combinations, unlike the all-JACIN type condition device that continuously operates the RB combination, the type 1 BB is in operation. Moreover, a so-called shift RB type is adopted in which the RB combination is drawn by lottery inside the RB. In the eighth embodiment, it is stipulated that the lottery for newly shifting to the advantageous section is not performed in the above three states in which the type 1 BB is operating, but it is also possible to configure the lottery for the advantageous section. Is.

In the eighth embodiment, similarly to the sixth embodiment and the seventh embodiment, the player is configured to proceed with the game inside the type 1 BB. However, in the eighth embodiment, since the game can be executed only by betting three cards, the winning of the conditional device related to the type 1 BB is carried over inside the type 1 BB that can be won by betting three cards. In this state), there is a possibility that the symbol combination related to the type 1 BB combination (the condition device related to the type 1 BB may be referred to as the type 1 BB combination) is stopped and displayed. Therefore, in the eighth embodiment, in a game in which the symbol combination related to the type 1 BB combination may be stopped and displayed, it is suggested to the player not to stop and display the symbol combination constituting the type 1 BB combination. It is configured. This is because, in the eighth embodiment, the expected value for increasing or decreasing medals is lowered by operating the type 1 BB. As an execution mode of the suggestion, an image prompting the stop operation is displayed at a position where the symbol combination related to the type 1 BB combination is not stopped and displayed (for example, an image like black smoke is displayed on the entire screen and the vicinity of the bar is stopped. (Prompt to operate)) Output a voice suggesting that the symbol combination related to the Type 1 BB role may be stopped and displayed (for example, output a voice saying "Bashun" or a voice saying "It's a chance") , A lamp such as a side lamp may be turned on to suggest that the symbol combination related to the type 1 BB combination may be stopped and displayed, or a plurality of these may be combined to suggest.

FIGS. 255 (a) and 255 (b) are diagrams showing changes in the RT state and the AT state. In FIG. 255 (a), the game is executed in a situation where the RT state is RT0, which is a normal section, and as a result of the internal lottery, the condition device related to BB is won. Further, in the eighth embodiment, a lottery for shifting to an advantageous section (a lottery for whether or not to shift from the normal section to the advantageous section is performed by winning the condition device related to the BB in the normal section, and even if it is configured to win 100%. Since it is configured to execute (good), it wins the advantageous section transition lottery (wins the advantageous section). Further, in the game, the symbol combination related to the BB combination is not stopped and displayed. In this case, from the next game, the RT state shifts to the inside of the type 1 BB, and also shifts from the normal section to the advantageous section to start the advantageous section.

In FIG. 255 (b), it is a normal section, and when the RT state is RT0, the condition device related to the BB is won as a result of the internal lottery. Further, as in (a), the advantageous section transition lottery is executed and the advantageous section is won. In this example, in the game, the stop operation for stopping and displaying the symbol combination related to the BB combination is performed, so that the symbol combination related to the BB combination is stopped and displayed. In this case, from the next game, the RT state shifts to the type 1 BB general and the RB non-internal (BB operation), and also shifts from the normal section to the advantageous section to start the advantageous section. Even if the BB end condition is satisfied and the BB ends, the normal section is not returned and the advantageous section is maintained. In the eighth embodiment, it is configured to be disadvantageous to the player if the symbol combination related to the type 1 BB combination is stopped and displayed, but by such a configuration, the player mistakenly performs the stop operation. Even if the symbol combination related to the BB combination is stopped and displayed, it is possible to reduce the disadvantage to the player by maintaining the advantageous section when the BB ends.

With the above configuration, according to the spinning-type gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment, the game can be advanced in the inside of the first-class BB, and the symbol combination related to the first-class BB combination is stopped. By configuring to avoid the display, the state that is advantageous to the player and the state that is disadvantageous to the player can be sharpened, and the expected value (number of payouts / number of inserts) per game in the AT state is high. It is possible to create a more entertaining gaming machine. Further, even if the symbol combination related to the type 1 BB combination is stopped and displayed, the player is configured so as not to cause a large loss while the type 1 BB is in operation (particularly inside the RB). By having (the number of game medals possessed does not decrease significantly), it is possible to secure a game machine that allows a player who is not good at pushing eyes to proceed with the game without stress.

(9th Embodiment)
In the 7th embodiment and the 8th embodiment, it is possible to give a sharp distinction between a state advantageous to the player and a state disadvantageous to the player, and to raise the expected value per game in the AT state. Although the configuration is exemplified, such a configuration is not limited to the configuration of the 7th embodiment and the 8th embodiment. Therefore, with the 7th and 8th embodiments, it is possible to give a sharp distinction between a state advantageous to the player and a state disadvantageous to the player, and to increase the expected value per game in the AT state. Has a different configuration as the ninth embodiment, and only the differences from the seventh embodiment will be described in detail below. It should be noted that the configuration not described in detail in the ninth embodiment may be applied with the same configuration as the seventh embodiment or the other embodiments described above.

Next, FIG. 256 is a list of basic specifications of the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. The number of spinning reel type gaming machines according to the ninth embodiment is three, the number of frames of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53 is 20 frames, and the effective line for which the winning judgment is determined is "left". It is one line of "reel M51 middle stage, middle reel M52 middle stage, right reel M53 middle stage". The maximum number of payouts is 15, and the minimum number of payouts is 1 (the correspondence between the winning combination and the number of payouts will be described later). In addition, the priority winning order (drawing priority order) is "replaying role-> small role (bell, watermelon, etc.)-> bonus". The configuration shown in the figure is just an example, and the number of frames on each reel can be changed (for example, changed to 21 frames), or the configuration of effective lines can be changed (for example, 5 horizontal lines and 2 diagonal lines). There is no problem even if it is changed to one line, left reel M51 lower stage, middle reel M52 middle stage, right reel M53 upper stage). Further, as the pull-in control when the push order small winning combination, which gives different benefits to the player depending on the push order, is won, the push order is operated in a predetermined correct push order as in the seventh embodiment described above. In that case, it is controlled by using the number of sheets priority control so that the small winning combination with a large number of payouts is preferentially drawn in, and if it is operated in the wrong answer pressing order different from the correct answer pressing order, the stop display is displayed. Increase the possibility of winning among the possible symbols (located within 4 frames from the stop operation) (the most likely to win among the combinations of multiple symbols that can be won) The number priority control to draw in the symbols It is used for control.

Next, FIG. 257 is a list of reel arrangements of the spinning machine according to the ninth embodiment. As shown in the figure, the number of frames of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53 is 20 frames (0 to 19), and the patterns are "sheep", "elephant", and "white seven". , "Red Seven", "Bell A", "Bell B", "Replay", "Watermelon", "Blank A", and "Blank B". Here, "blank A" and "blank B" are symbols included in the symbol combination constituting the winning combination like other symbols, and do not mean the symbols not constituting the winning combination, but "blank A", As a combination of symbols constituting the winning combination including "Blank B", for example, "Blank A / Bell A / Sheep" has a replay 03, and "Replay / Blank B / Bell B" has a prize of 01. The configuration shown in the figure is just an example, and there is no problem even if the types of symbols are increased / decreased / changed.

Next, FIGS. 258 to 263 are a list of symbol combinations 1 to 6 in the ninth embodiment. In the ninth embodiment, a plurality of symbol combinations exist for each condition device, and as will be described later, depending on the stop order and stop position of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53, Any one of the symbol combinations is configured to be stopped and displayed on the effective line (the above-mentioned one line). Even if the same type of symbols are not aligned on the effective line, it is easy for the player to align the same symbols in a row on the line other than the effective line (in the case of the bell, in the middle row). It is configured so that three bell symbols are aligned in a straight line on any of the reels, such as aligning in a horizontal straight line). Further, in the ninth embodiment, it becomes a type 1 BB combination (a so-called type 1 special accessory continuous operation device, but hereinafter may be referred to as a type 1 BB combination or a type BB combination). As a combination of symbols, "Sheep / Sheep / Red Seven" which is 1 type BB-A (continuous operation of RB and ends with payout exceeding 69 sheets) and 1 type BB-B (continuous operation of RB, 69 sheets) It has two symbol combinations with "elephant, elephant, red seven" that will end with a payout exceeding the above. In the ninth embodiment, when one type BB combination is won and the BB is executed (the accessory is activated), one lottery table is used in all the games in the BB during the execution of the BB. It is configured to draw a winning combination (small combination) other than the winning combination or a loss (a method that does not switch the table to be referred to at the time of the winning combination lottery during the execution of one BB). Hereinafter, it may be referred to as an all-JACIN type). The format of the type 1 BB combination is not limited to this, and the table referred to at the time of the combination lottery may be switched during the execution of one BB. If the push order bell, which is the condition device for "winning-A1" to "winning-B12", which will be described later, is won, stopping the reels in the pushing order that is most advantageous to the player corresponds to the 76th to 88th. The combination of symbols from "Winning 24" to "Winning 36" is stopped and displayed, and 15 game medals are paid out. On the other hand, when the reels are stopped in a pushing order different from the pushing order that is most advantageous for the player, 22 The symbol combinations of "Prize 01" to "Prize 23" corresponding to Nos. No. 75 are stopped and displayed, and one game medal is paid out or lost.

Next, FIG. 264 is a list of condition devices according to the ninth embodiment. In the figure, the conditional device number is referred to as a winning number, and the conditional device number may be referred to as a winning number thereafter. In the ninth embodiment, the re-game combination is provided from re-game-A to re-game-L (winning numbers 1 to 12), and the stop order and stop position of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53. It is configured so that the symbol combination of the re-game combination to be stopped and displayed may be different depending on the above. Winning-A1-winning-B12 (winning numbers 13-36) as a push order bell role is paid out most by performing the reel stop operation according to the predetermined push order (correct push order) 15 It is possible to get the payout of the reels, and if the stop operation is performed differently from the pressing order of the correct answer, the payout of the reels will be obtained or the game will be lost. The winning-C to E (winning numbers 37 to 39), which is the role of the bell, is the role of the bell, which makes it possible to obtain the payout of the 15-card role, which is the most paid out, similar to the winning-A1 to the winning-B12. However, it is a conditional device that makes it possible to obtain the payout of the 15-card combination, which is the most payout, regardless of the stop operation by the reel pushing order. The winning-F to winning-Q (winning numbers 40 to 49) are conditional devices that can be won while the BB (RB) is in operation. In the type 1 BB-A and the type 1 BB-B, it is a so-called BB role. In this example, the RB is configured to operate continuously during the operation of the type 1 BB-A and the type 1 BB-B, but the BB combination is not limited to this, and for example, the type 1 BB operation. A so-called shift RB that draws RBs may be installed therein.

Here, in the ninth embodiment, as shown in the item of "conditional apparatus breakdown" in the rightmost column, depending on the stop order and stop position of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53. It is configured so that multiple types of symbol combinations (names) can be stopped and displayed, and among the multiple types of symbol combinations (names), the symbol combinations (names) that have the same winning number are grouped together and are the third from the right. It is illustrated in the item of "conditional device" in the column of. Specifically, for example, in the "replay-A" condition device corresponding to the winning number 1, "replay" is performed according to the stop order and stop position of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53. It is configured so that four types of symbol combinations (names) of "01", "re-game 02", "re-game 03", and "re-game 04" can be stopped and displayed. In "Prize-A1", the left reel 6 of "Prize 01", "Prize 08", "Prize 13", "Prize 18", "Prize 23", "Prize 24" according to the stop order and stop position of M51, middle reel M52 and right reel M53. It is configured so that the type of symbol combination (name) can be stopped and displayed. Further, "re-game 01" and the like are names of symbol combinations, and the symbol combinations that become "re-game 01" are configured so that there may be a plurality of types. In addition, a name such as "re-game 01" or a conditional device such as "re-game-A" may be referred to as a re-game role, and a name such as "winning 01" or a conditional device such as "winning-A1" may be referred to as a small. Sometimes referred to as a combination, and a conditional device such as "Type 1 BB-A" may be referred to as a BB combination.

Next, in the "role" item, the role of the "conditional device" is illustrated, and the "replay" corresponding to the winning numbers 1 to 10 is performed regardless of the order in which the stop buttons are pressed. , The condition device for the re-game in which the re-game combination in which the RT state does not shift is stopped and displayed. The "watermelon" corresponding to the winning numbers 11 and 12 is a conditional device related to the replaying combination, but when the stop operation is performed so that the watermelon is stopped and displayed on a predetermined reel, all the reels are stopped. From the player's point of view, the watermelons appear to be aligned in the upper row (the watermelons are stopped and displayed in a straight line in the middle row).

In addition, the "push order bell 123 correct answer" to "push order bell 321 correct answer" corresponding to the winning numbers 13 to 36 are conditional devices in which the winning small winning combination may differ depending on which of the six reel stop orders is used. For example, "left reel M51: 1, middle reel M52: 2, right reel M53: 3", and in the case of "123", the push order is "left reel M51 → middle reel M52 → right reel M53". It means to stop, and means that the reels are stopped in the order of "123" = "left → middle → right". For example, in the case of "Winning A-1" (winning number 13), if you stop in the order of "123" = "left → middle → right" (correctly answer in the order of pressing), the maximum number of 15 game medals won The symbol combination that becomes the "winning 24" that can be obtained will be stopped and displayed. In addition, when the reels are stopped in a pushing order other than the pushing order in which the maximum number of winning sheets can be obtained, that is, if the correct answer cannot be obtained in the pushing order, one piece is paid out or lost. By configuring it, you can navigate the push order of the re-game combination and the push order of the bell in the state related to AT such as "AT in progress state" (the push order display device D270 displays the push order that is the most profitable). It is possible to create a plurality of game states in which the profit margins of the players are different, that is, the push order is not navigated to the state related to AT such as "normal state". The state related to AT will be described later.

In addition, the "small V-bell" corresponding to the winning numbers 37 to 39 is configured so that the maximum number of winnings can be obtained by stopping and displaying the symbol combinations constituting the winning 36 regardless of the pressing order. It is a device. The "15 sheets" to "1 sheet" corresponding to the winning numbers 40 to 51 are conditional devices that may be won only during the RB operation during the BB operation. The "15 sheets" corresponding to the winning numbers 40 to 41 are conditional devices that are won during the RB operation. The "winning-F" and "winning-G", which are the conditional devices corresponding to the winning numbers 40 and 41, are composed of a plurality of conditional devices from winning 01 to winning 37 or winning 38, and are composed of a plurality of conditional devices in the order of pressing. Regardless of this, it is configured to give priority to any one of the winning prizes 24 to 37 that can obtain the maximum number of winnings. "6 sheets" corresponding to the winning number 42 is a condition device for winning while the RB is operating. The "winning-H", which is a conditional device corresponding to the winning number 42, is composed of a plurality of conditional devices from winning 24 to winning 39, and can win 6 pieces regardless of the pushing order. It is configured to give priority to any one of the prizes. "1" to "1" corresponding to the winning numbers 43 to 51 are all composed of a plurality of conditional devices, but they are configured so that one can be obtained regardless of the order of pressing. It is common. This is based on the above-mentioned number priority control, and among the plurality of symbol combinations constituting the winning condition device when the reel is stopped, the number of symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed after that is the largest. It is realized by using the control that preferentially pulls in the symbol. "Type 1 BB-A" and "Type 1 BB-B" corresponding to the winning numbers 52 and 53 are BB roles.

Next, in the item of "bonus winning information", numerical values from 0 to 2 are assigned to each winning number. In the ninth embodiment, the winning number not including the bonus (BB combination) has the bonus winning information set to 0, and the winning number including the bonus (BB combination) is the winning number (52) including the type 1 BB-A. ), The bonus winning information is 1, and the bonus winning information of the winning number (53) including the type 1 BB-B is 2. In the ninth embodiment, it is stipulated that the bonus (BB role) is not won in duplicate with the small role, but is won independently, but the bonus (BB role) is to be won in duplicate with the small role. It is also possible to configure to.

Next, in the item of "winning / replay winning information", numerical values from 0 to 51 are assigned to each winning number. In the ninth embodiment, the winning numbers (winning numbers 0 corresponding to the loss and winning numbers 52 and 53 corresponding to the bonus) that do not include the re-game winning combination and the small winning combination are set to 0 for the winning / re-gaming winning information. The winning numbers 1 to 51 winning / re-gaming winning information including the re-gaming combination or the small winning combination are distributed to each condition device.

Next, in the item of "effect group number", numerical values from 0 to 29 are assigned to each winning number. By transmitting the effect group number from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side, it is configured so that the effect to be executed by the sub control board S side can be determined.

Next, FIG. 265 is a lottery in which the winning numbers (also referred to as conditional device numbers and winning combinations) and bonuses (also referred to as BB and BB combinations) relating to the small winning combination and the replaying combination in the ninth embodiment are determined by the winning combination lottery means. It is a list showing the probability (also called the winning rate). In the figure, the winning rate of the winning numbers is shown.

First, the lottery probability in "RT0" when the type 1 BB is not operated will be described in detail. In the ninth embodiment, the lottery probability of the winning combination may differ depending on the RT state. In addition, when the type 1 BB is not operated, there are two types of the type 1 BB combination that can be won: the type 1 BB-A and the type 1 BB-B. The "re-games A to J" that can be stopped and displayed with the winning numbers 1 to 10 correspond to a general re-game combination. In addition, "re-game-KL" that can be stopped and displayed with winning numbers 11 to 12 is a part of the re-game role, but depending on the stop operation, the symbol combination in which the watermelons are lined up in a straight line is stopped and displayed. It has a role as a so-called rare role. In addition, the winning numbers 9 to 13 can be stopped and displayed. The "winning-A1 to B12" that can be stopped and displayed at the winning numbers 13 to 36 is a push order bell role, and the push order navigation that informs the player of the reel stop order that is most advantageous to the player is pressed with the push order display device D270 and. It is configured to be executed by the effect display device S40, and the details of the stop display mode of the bell combination based on the pressing order will be described later. "Prize-C to E" that can be stopped and displayed with winning numbers 37 to 39 is a bell role like "Prize-A1 to B12", but it is configured so that the maximum number of winnings can be obtained regardless of the order of pressing. It is a conditional device. The "winning-F to Q" that can be stopped and displayed at the winning numbers 40 to 51 is a condition device that can be stopped and displayed during the continuous operation of the RB by the operation of the type 1 BB combination. "Type 1 BB-A to Type 1 BB-B" that can be stopped and displayed at winning numbers 52 to 53 is a BB role.

Further, in the ninth embodiment, "Type 1 BB-A" and "Type 1 BB-" are selected (carried over) in "Type 1 BB-A" and "Type 1 BB-B". The number of places related to the lottery probability of "B" is added to "replay-A". With this configuration, "inside the 1st class BB" becomes a replay role compared to the state of "RT0" which has not won the "1st class BB-A" and "1st class BB-B". It is possible to increase the probability of winning, and it is possible to create an advantageous state for the player as compared with "RT0". In addition, the carry-over type 1 BB-A will continue to be elected.

Next, the lottery probability in "RB operation" during BB operation will be described in detail. In the ninth embodiment, while the RB is in operation, a plurality of small wins of "winning-F" to "winning-Q" of winning numbers 40 to 51 can be won, and the "loss" is I don't have it. Although the details will be described later, "RB is in operation" is configured so that the probability that "1 piece" of the winning number 44 will be won is particularly high. The winning number 44 is configured so that the winning combination is stopped and displayed. Therefore, the expected value of increasing or decreasing medals per game of "RB is operating" is negative, that is, the number of medals is reduced by the amount of the game. The details of the winning rate (lottery probability) for each condition device of "RB is operating" will be described later.

Next, the stop display mode of the bell combination based on the push order will be described in detail. Explaining in detail the case of "winning-A1" (condition device number 13), it is stopped in the order of "123" = "left → middle → right", that is, if the correct answer is given in the pressing order, 15 cards are paid out, and "132". ”=“ Left → Right → Middle ”, that is, if the correct answer cannot be answered in the second and third push orders, one card will be paid out, and the other push orders, that is,“ 2 ** ”=“ If the first stop operation such as "Middle → * → *" or "3 **" = "Right → * → *" is not the left reel and the pressing order cannot be answered correctly, there is a 1/8 chance of 1 It is configured so that the number of cards will be paid out and it will be lost on 7/8.

Next, the reel stop control based on the push position will be described in detail. For example, in the case of "Winning-A1", the bell symbol can be stopped in the upper row, but the probability that the bell symbol actually stops is the probability shown in the figure (3782/65536). In the situation where the push order navigation does not occur, the bell symbol will stop if the correct answer is given in the 6-choice push order in which the 15-card combination will win. In addition, in the situation where the push order navigation does not occur, the bell symbol does not stop if the correct answer is not given in the 6-choice push order that will win the 15-card combination, and "Prize 01, 08, 13, 18, The role of one piece such as "23" or the loss is stopped. In a situation where push order navigation can occur, if the reels are stopped according to the push order navigation, 15 cards will always win a prize. Specifically, for example, in a situation where the condition device number 14 corresponding to "winning-A1" is determined, (1) when the left reel is operated by the first stop operation, the 15-card combination of winning 24 Or, one piece of prize 01 wins. More specifically, (1-1) when the left reel is stopped by the first stop operation, the replay is stopped and displayed in the middle stage, and (1-2) the middle reel is stopped by the second stop operation. In that case, the watermelon is stopped and displayed in the middle row, and when the right reel is stopped and displayed in the third stop operation, the replay is stopped and displayed in the middle row to match the symbol combination corresponding to the winning 24 (upper bell alignment). Is displayed as a stop, and 15 cards are paid out. (1-3) When the right reel is stopped by the second stop operation, either Bell B or watermelon is stopped and displayed in the middle depending on the stop operation timing. Then, when the middle reel is stopped by the third stop operation, either the blank A or the blank B is stopped and displayed depending on the stop operation timing, so that the symbol combination corresponding to any of the winning 01 is stopped and displayed. As a result, one card is paid out.

(2) When the middle reel is stopped by the first stop operation, the winning combination of one of the winnings 08, 13, 18 and 23 is won or lost. More specifically, (2-1) When the middle reel is stopped in the first stop operation, one of white seven, red seven, sheep, and elephant is stopped and displayed in the middle row, and (2-2). When the white seven is stopped and displayed by the first stop operation of the middle reel, and when the left reel is stopped by the second stop operation, the sheep and the sheep are moved to the left reel by the second stop operation depending on the stop operation timing. When the elephant (the sheep and the elephant that make up the winning 08 within 4 frames after receiving the stop operation) is displayed as a stop in the middle row, and when the sheep and the elephant cannot be stopped and displayed in the middle row as the stop operation timing (on the left reel) When the stop operation is performed at the operation timing other than the blank A of the symbol number 4 to the elephant of the symbol number 13 in the middle row, the sheep constituting the prize 08 and the symbols other than the elephant are stopped and displayed in the middle row, and the left reel When the sheep and elephant are stopped and displayed in the middle row, and when the right reel is stopped by the third stop operation, the sheep (winning 08 within 4 frames after receiving the stop operation) is awarded according to the stop operation timing. When the sheep that make up) are stopped and displayed in the middle row, and when the sheep cannot be stopped and displayed in the middle row, the stop operation is performed at the stop operation timing (replay of symbol number 4 in the middle row of the right reel to operation timing other than the sheep of symbol number 8). In this case, if the symbols other than the sheep that make up the prize 08 are stopped and displayed in the middle row, the sheep and elephant are stopped and displayed in the middle row of the left reel, and the sheep is stopped and displayed in the middle row of the right reel. If any of the prizes 08 wins, one piece will be paid out, and if the sheep and elephant are not stopped and displayed in the middle of the left reel, or if the sheep is not stopped and displayed in the middle of the right reel, it will be lost. , (2-3) When the red seven is stopped and displayed by the first stop operation of the middle reel, and when the left reel is stopped by the second stop operation, the second stop operation is performed depending on the stop operation timing. When the sheep and elephant (sheep and elephant constituting the winning 13 within 4 frames after receiving the stop operation) are stopped and displayed in the middle row on the left reel, and when the sheep and elephant cannot be stopped and displayed in the middle row. If the operation is stopped at the operation timing (the operation timing other than the blank A of symbol number 4 to the elephant of symbol number 13 in the middle of the left reel), the sheep constituting the winning 13 and the symbols other than the elephant stop in the middle row. When the sheep and the elephant are stopped and displayed in the middle of the left reel, and when the right reel is stopped by the third stop operation, the elephant (4 frames after receiving the stop operation) depending on the stop operation timing. When the elephant that constitutes the winning prize 13 within is displayed as a stop in the middle row, and when the elephant cannot be stopped and displayed in the middle row, the stop operation timing (replay of symbol number 9 in the middle row of the right reel-operation other than the elephant with symbol number 13) When the stop operation is performed at (timing), the symbols other than the elephant constituting the winning 13 are stopped and displayed in the middle row, the sheep and the elephant are stopped and displayed in the middle row of the left reel, and the elephant is displayed in the middle row of the right reel. If is stopped and displayed, one of the winning 13 will be paid out by winning, and if the sheep and elephant are not stopped and displayed in the middle of the left reel, or if the elephant is not stopped and displayed in the middle of the right reel. (2-4) When the sheep is displayed as stopped by the first stop operation of the middle reel, and when the left reel is stopped by the second stop operation, the second stop operation timing is used. When the white seven and red seven (white seven and red seven that make up the winning 18 within 4 frames after receiving the stop operation) are stopped and displayed on the left reel by the stop operation, the white seven, and If the stop operation timing is such that the red seven cannot be stopped and displayed in the middle row (operation timings other than the blank A of symbol number 14 to the red seven of symbol number 3 in the middle row of the left reel), the white constituting the winning 18 is formed. When symbols other than Seven and Red Seven are stopped and displayed in the middle row, White Seven and Red Seven are stopped and displayed in the middle row of the left reel, and when the right reel is stopped by the third stop operation, Depending on the stop operation timing, white seven (white seven that constitutes winning 18 within 4 frames after receiving the stop operation) is displayed as a stop in the middle row, and white seven cannot be stopped and displayed in the middle row (right reel). When the stop operation is performed in the middle row from the replay of symbol number 14 to the operation timing other than white seven of symbol number 18, the symbols other than white seven constituting the winning 18 are stopped and displayed in the middle row, and the middle row of the left reel. If White Seven and Red Seven are stopped and displayed, and if White Seven is stopped and displayed in the middle of the right reel, one of the winning 18 will be paid out by winning, and one of the winning cards will be paid out in the middle of the left reel. If White Seven and Red Seven are not stopped and displayed, or if White Seven is not displayed stopped in the middle of the right reel, it will be lost, and the elephant will be stopped and displayed by the first stop operation of the middle reel (2-5). In this case, and when the left reel is stopped by the second stop operation, the second stop operation is performed depending on the stop operation timing. When White Seven and Red Seven (White Seven and Red Seven that make up the winning 23 within 4 frames after receiving the stop operation) are stopped and displayed in the middle row on the left reel, White Seven and Red Seven are displayed. If the stop operation timing is such that the stop cannot be displayed in the middle row (operation timings other than the blank A of symbol number 14 to the red seven of symbol number 3 in the middle row of the left reel), the white sevens constituting the winning 23 and the white sevens constituting the winning 23 are When a symbol other than Red Seven is stopped and displayed in the middle row, White Seven and Red Seven are stopped and displayed in the middle row of the left reel, and when the right reel is stopped by the third stop operation, the stop operation timing When the red seven (red seven that constitutes the winning 23 within 4 frames after receiving the stop operation) is stopped and displayed in the middle row, and when the red seven cannot be stopped and displayed in the middle row (in the middle row of the right reel) When the stop operation is performed from the replay of symbol number 19 to the operation timing other than red seven of symbol number 3, the symbols other than red seven constituting the winning 23 are stopped and displayed in the middle row, and the white seven is displayed in the middle row of the left reel. , And when the red seven is stopped and displayed, and when the red seven is stopped and displayed in the middle of the right reel, one of the prizes 23 is paid out by winning, and the white seven is paid out in the middle of the left reel. And if Red Seven is not displayed as a stop, or if Red Seven is not displayed as a stop in the middle of the right reel, it will be a loss. As the reel stop order, the case where the reels are stopped in the order of "middle-> left-> right" has been described above, but if the first stop operation is not the left reel, for example, "middle". The same reel stop control is used even when "-> right-> left", "right-> middle-> left", or "right-> left-> middle" is selected. From the above, when the condition device number 14 corresponding to "Winning-A1" is determined and the first stop operation is stopped on a reel other than the left reel, winning 08, winning 13, winning 18, winning. The total winning probability of 23 is 1/8. As a detailed calculation, first, the stop allowance range of the constituent symbols (white seven) of the middle reel in winning 08 is 1/4 of all 20 frames, and the stop allowance of the constituent symbols (sheep and elephant) of the left reel. Since the range is 1/2 of all 20 frames and the stop allowable range of the constituent symbol (sheep) of the right reel is 1/4 of all 20 frames, the winning probability can be derived as 1/32. Similarly, in the case of winning 13, winning 18, and winning 23, the winning probability can be derived as 1/32, and the total of each is 1/8. From the above, in the middle reel, any of the sheep, elephant, red seven, and white seven constituting the prize 08, the prize 13, the prize 18, and the prize 23 can be stopped in the middle stage regardless of the push position. Therefore, when the left reel is operated at a timing other than a specific operation timing (for example, an operation timing other than the blank A of the symbol number 4 to the elephant of the symbol number 13 in the middle of the reel), and the right reel is a specific operation. If the operation is performed at a timing other than the timing (for example, the replay of symbol number 4 in the middle of the reel to the operation timing other than the sheep of symbol number 8), the symbol combinations corresponding to prize 08, prize 13, prize 18, and prize 23 are stopped. It is not displayed and it becomes a loss, and the stop display probability of the loss is 7/8. The reel stop control based on the pushing order when "winning-A1" is determined as the conditional device number has been described, but the reel stop control based on this pushing order is the same for "winning-A2" to "winning-A12". It has become.

Condition corresponding to "Winning-A2" Under the situation where the device number 14 is determined, when the first stop operation is the middle reel, if the white seven is stopped and displayed on the middle reel, the elephant is stopped and displayed on the right reel. When the operation is performed at the timing (1/4), and when the sheep and the elephant are stopped and displayed on the left reel (1/2), the symbol combination corresponding to the winning 09 is stopped and displayed. , The operation timing (7/8) is not operated at the timing (1/4) when the elephant is stopped and displayed on the right reel, or the sheep and the elephant are not operated at the timing (1/2) when the elephant is stopped and displayed on the left reel. The symbol combination corresponding to the winning 09 is not stopped and displayed, and it is lost.

When the condition device number 15 corresponding to "Winning-A3" is determined, when the first stop operation is the middle reel, if the white seven is stopped and displayed on the middle reel, the white seven is stopped on the right reel. When the operation is performed at the displayed timing (1/4), and when the sheep and elephant are stopped and displayed on the left reel (1/2), the symbol combination corresponding to the winning 10 is stopped and displayed. The operation timing (7/8) is not operated at the timing (1/4) when the white seven is stopped and displayed on the right reel, or the sheep and elephant are not operated at the timing (1/2) when the sheep and elephant are stopped and displayed on the left reel. In), the symbol combination corresponding to the winning 10 is not stopped and displayed, resulting in a loss.

When the condition device number 16 corresponding to "Winning-A4" is determined, when the first stop operation is the middle reel, if the white seven is stopped and displayed on the middle reel, the red seven is stopped on the right reel. When the operation is performed at the displayed timing (1/4), and when the sheep and elephant are stopped and displayed on the left reel (1/2), the symbol combination corresponding to the winning 11 is stopped and displayed. The operation timing (7/8) is not operated at the timing (1/4) when the red seven is stopped and displayed on the right reel, or when the sheep and elephant are stopped and displayed on the left reel (1/2). In), the symbol combination corresponding to the winning 11 is not stopped and displayed, resulting in a loss.

When the condition device number 17 corresponding to "Winning-A5" is determined, when the first stop operation is the left reel, if the white seven is stopped and displayed on the left reel, the red seven is stopped on the right reel. The symbols corresponding to the winning 18 and the winning 23 when operated at the displayed timing (1/4) and when the sheep and the elephant are operated at the timing (1/2) when the sheep and the elephant are stopped and displayed on the middle reel. Operation timing when the combination is stopped and displayed and Red Seven is not operated at the timing (1/4) when the red seven is stopped and displayed on the right reel, or when sheep and elephant are stopped and displayed on the middle reel (1/2). In (7/8), the symbol combinations corresponding to the winning 18 and the winning 23 are not stopped and displayed and are lost.

Condition corresponding to "Winning-A6" Under the situation where the device number 18 is determined, when the first stop operation is the left reel, if the white seven is stopped and displayed on the left reel, the red seven is stopped on the right reel. Symbols corresponding to winning 19 and winning 20 when operated at the displayed timing (1/4) and when the sheep and elephant are stopped and displayed at the timing (1/2) displayed on the middle reel. Operation timing when the combination is stopped and displayed and Red Seven is not operated at the timing (1/4) when the red seven is stopped and displayed on the right reel, or when sheep and elephant are stopped and displayed on the middle reel (1/2). In (7/8), the symbol combinations corresponding to the winning 19 and the winning 20 are not stopped and displayed and are lost.

In addition, "Prize-A7" to "Prize-A12" as the push order bell role similar to "Prize-A1 to A6", and "Prize-A1" in "Prize-B1" to "Prize-B12". It is configured to have the same reel stop control as. In other words, when the reels are stopped in a predetermined stop order (correct answer in push order), the one with the largest number of payouts is given priority among the symbol combinations that make up the winning condition device. The reel stop control is performed so that the stop display is performed, the reels are stopped in the predetermined stop order in the first stop operation, and each reel is stopped in the predetermined stop order in the second stop operation. If the stop operation is not performed, the reel stop control is performed so that the symbol combinations constituting the one-card combination are preferentially stopped and displayed. Further, when the stop operation of each reel is not performed in the predetermined stop order in the first stop operation, the stop operation is performed within the range in which the symbol combination constituting the one-card combination on the predetermined reel can be stopped. For example, the reels are controlled so that the symbol combinations constituting the one-card combination are stopped and displayed by (1 / 2 * 1/4 = 1/8 range) with two reels, while the one-card combination is configured with a predetermined reel. By not performing the stop operation within the range in which the symbol combination can be stopped (for example, in the range of 7/8), the symbol combinations constituting the single reel combination are not stopped and displayed, resulting in a loss.

Next, FIG. 266 is an RT state transition diagram in the ninth embodiment. In the ninth embodiment, the configuration does not have "Type 2 BB" but only "Type 1 BB". In FIG. 266, there are three RT states of "RT0", "inside type 1 BB", and "in operation of type 1 BB", and the RT state is changed by satisfying the condition indicated by the arrow in the figure. It will be migrated. As a specific example of transition to the RT state, RAM initialization is executed when the RT state is "inside type 1 BB" and "type 1 BB is in operation" (all RT states except "RT0"). Or, when the operation of the first type BB is completed, the process shifts to "RT0". When the operation of the 1st class BB is completed, specifically, the 1st class BB role that has been activated by winning the 1st class BB role and winning the winning 1st class BB role is digested in multiple games, and the medal is stipulated. The payout for the number of sheets is completed.

Next, when the RT state is "RT0", by winning the AT and winning the 1st class BB combination, a stop operation is instructed so that the 1st class BB combination is not won in the winning game. Navigation occurs. By performing the stop operation according to the generated navigation, the RT state shifts to "inside the type 1 BB" without winning the type 1 BB combination. In addition, when the AT is not won and the 1st class BB combination is won, a navigation for instructing a stop operation to win the 1st class BB combination in the winning game is generated. By performing the stop operation according to the generated navigation, a prize is won in the type 1 BB combination, and the RT state shifts to "type 1 BB in operation". In the ninth embodiment, the AT winning / failing lottery is mainly performed during "Type 1 BB operation". The flow of the AT winning / failing lottery for "Type 1 BB in operation" is determined based on the winning of a predetermined small winning combination (for example, a single winning combination or a replaying combination) during the game until the specified number of medals are paid out. AT lottery will be held with the probability of. Details such as the AT winning / failing lottery will be described in detail later. The result of the AT winning / failing lottery performed in "Type 1 BB operating" is retained, and the game in which the type 1 BB role is won again in "RT0" transferred after "Type 1 BB operating" Then, referring to the result of the AT lottery that was held, if the AT lottery is won, the display suggesting the stop operation that does not win the 1st class BB combination is executed, and if the AT lottery is not won, 1 A display suggesting a stop operation for winning the seed BB combination is executed.

The RT state of "inside the type 1 BB" in the state of winning the AT is a state in which push order navigation occurs as a state related to the AT, so there is a possibility that it will be a highly profitable state for the player. In the situation where the AT lottery has been won, if "Type 1 BB is inside", the push order navigation will be executed when the push order bell is won until the AT end condition (end condition during AT) is satisfied. Will be done. The player can receive the medal payout by performing the reel stop operation according to the navigated push order. As the end condition of the AT state, for example, when the AT counter value for managing the number of AT games becomes 0, the push order navigation does not occur in the subsequent games, and the correct answer is given to the bells generated after the game. If you can stop the reels in the order of pushing, you can continue "Inside Type 1 BB", but in the pushing order bell that occurred after the game, stop the reels in the order of pushing the wrong answer. In that case, there is a possibility that the symbol combination related to the type 1 BB combination is stopped and displayed. When the symbol combination related to the type 1 BB combination is stopped and displayed, the RT state shifts from "inside the type 1 BB" to "in operation of the type 1 BB".

Next, the case where the RT state is "Type 1 BB is in operation" will be described. The "type 1 BB operating" as the RT state of the ninth embodiment means a state in which the type 1 BB combination is won and the type 1 BB is operating. This game is set to end when the specified number of medals have been paid out. The number of medals to be paid out can be freely specified, but in the ninth embodiment, as an example, the operation of the BB is terminated when more than 70 medals are paid out. This is when the total value of the medals paid out based on the winning of the small winning combination (for example, the bell role) won in "Type 1 BB operating" exceeds 69, "Type 1 BB operating". Means to end. The definition of 69 sheets here is based on a method of subtracting the number of outs from the payout counter, and is simply an addition value of the number of outs without considering the number of ins. That is, when a winning combination is won, 1 is simply subtracted from the initial value of the payout counter assuming that the winning combination is paid out. As described above, the AT lottery is performed in this "Type 1 BB operating", and in the result of the AT lottery, even in the RT state of "RT0" which shifts after "Type 1 BB operating", it becomes the RT state. It is configured so that it can be held across.

In the ninth embodiment, in the case of "inside type 1 BB" and "AT in progress", the push order navigation occurs in the game in which the push order bell is won, so that the expectation per game is expected. The value is 1 or more. On the other hand, even in the state where the AT lottery has not been won and the type 1 BB role has been won, the RT state can be changed from "RT0" to "inside the type 1 BB", but the AT lottery is won. The push order navigation does not occur even in the game in which the small role related to the push order such as the push order bell role is won, and in the game in which the push order bell is won, if the game is executed in the wrong push order. It will not be advantageous for the player because one payout, the stop display of the symbol combination related to the bonus, or the loss will occur. In addition, in the state of "inside the type 1 BB" that has not won the AT lottery, that is, in the state of "inside the type 1 BB" and not in the "AT in progress state", the AT lottery is not executed or the AT lottery is won. It may be configured so that the probability is relatively low. With such a configuration, it is not advantageous for the player even if the stop operation is performed so as not to arrange the bonuses in the situation where the AT lottery has not been won, so that it is possible to prevent an unintended capture.

Further, the AT lottery may be configured to be executable only by "type 1 BB is in operation", or may be configured to be executable by "RT0" or "inside type 1 BB". In addition, the lottery for adding the number of AT games may be configured to be executable in "inside the type 1 BB", or the lottery for adding the number of AT sets may be "in operation of the type 1 BB", "RT0", or "inside the type 1 BB". It may be configured to be executable in "Medium". More specifically, if the player shifts to "Type 1 BB internal" in the situation where the AT lottery is won, 50 games are given as the number of remaining AT games, and when the AT state of the 50 games is exhausted, the AT state is in progress. Will end, but in the AT state, the lottery for adding the number of AT sets will be executed in the game that won the prize-L (watermelon), the prize-M (watermelon), etc., and the lottery for adding the number of AT sets will be performed. If you win, the additional information of the number of AT sets is stored, and then the RT state shifts from "Type 1 BB operating" to "RT0", and you win the type 1 BB role at "RT0". In this case, as in the case of winning the AT lottery, the display suggesting the stop operation not to win the type 1 BB combination is executed, and the state is changed to the AT in progress state (and "inside the type 1 BB") again. It may be a game like this.

Next, FIG. 267 is an image diagram of an effect display image displayed on the effect display device S40 in a game in which a type 1 BB combination is won in the RT state of “RT0”. As described above, when the RT state is "RT0" and the type 1 BB combination is won, the effect display image displayed on the effect display device S40 is different based on the result of the AT lottery. .. First, the upper part of the figure will be described in detail. If it is "RT0" and the type 1 BB role is won without winning the AT lottery, "Aim for sheep, sheep, 7" is displayed as the BB winning suggestion image 1 on the effect display device S40. Since "sheep / sheep / 7" is a symbol combination related to the type 1 BB role, the player stops the symbol combination related to the type 1 BB role by performing a stop operation aiming at "sheep / sheep / 7". It will be displayed and the RT state will shift from "RT0" to "Type 1 BB in operation". As for the display content of the BB winning suggestion image 1, for example, the display range of "sheep / sheep / 7" can be changed appropriately, and the display range may be reduced so that the liquid crystal display image can be easily seen. It may also be enlarged and displayed. Further, instead of notifying the winning of the first-class BB role by the effect display device S40, the winner may be notified by using a voice such as "Aim the sheep at the left reel!". By winning the 1st class BB role based on the BB winning suggestion image 1 and satisfying the end condition of the 1st class BB, as shown in the upper part on the right side of the figure, the image diagram of the game state of "RT0" again. Is displayed.

Next, the lower part of the figure will be described in detail. If it is "RT0" and the type 1 BB role is won in the state of winning the AT lottery, "Aim 7 from the right!" Is displayed as the BB winning suggestion image 2 on the effect display device S40. The symbol combination related to the 1st class BB role is "sheep / sheep / 7", and the player who sees the BB winning suggestion image 2 aims at 7 on all reels in order from the right reel and stops the 1st class BB. The symbol combination related to the combination is not stopped and displayed, and the RT state shifts from "RT0" to "Type 1 BB inside". In addition, the state related to AT will also shift to the AT state, and the push order navigation will be executed in the game in which the push order bell is subsequently won. Since the state has changed to the AT in progress state, "AT start !!" is displayed on the effect display device SGS40. It should be noted that the display content of the BB winning suggestion image 2 is not a display mode in which the symbol combination related to BB is not directly stopped and displayed, such as "Remove the type 1 BB role!", And as a result, the symbol combination related to BB is stopped. It is preferable that the display suggests an operation mode that is not displayed. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by the player's recognition that the BB is disadvantageous. Further, in the ninth embodiment, the BB winning suggestion image 2 is "Aim for 7 from the right!", And the symbol combination related to the 1st class BB role is "Sheep / Sheep / 7", so that the right. Since the stop operation related to the reel suggests the "7" symbol, the right reel suggests an operation mode in which the symbol combination related to the BB can be stopped and displayed.

As another modification, when displaying "Aim for 7 from the right!", At least in the range of 5 frames where the symbol can be drawn onto the effective line after the left reel M51 is stopped. By configuring not to place both "Sheep" and "7 (Red Seven)", the player is not required to perform accurate eye-pressing operation (difficult stop button operation timing), and roughly the operation timing. It may be possible to avoid the stop display of the symbol combination ("sheep / sheep / red seven") related to type 1 BB, or the 8th "sheep" drawn on the left reel M51 may be used. It can also be placed at the 13th "elephant". Specifically, when trying to operate the vicinity of No. 3 "7 (Red Seven)" of the left reel M51 at the operation timing, if the operation timing is mistakenly delayed, an unintended type 1 BB prize will occur. There is a possibility that it will be done. Therefore, by arranging the "sheep" on the 13th position of the left reel M51, in order to pull the "sheep" arranged on the 13th position onto the effective line, stop at the 9th to 13th positions of the left reel M51. Since it is necessary to operate the button and it is not arranged in the vicinity of the symbol (red seven) displayed in the BB winning suggestion image 2, it is possible to avoid an unintended winning. As a result, it is possible to provide user-friendly playability that minimizes anxiety about failure to push the eyes.

Here, as the configuration of the ninth embodiment, the configuration of the gaming machine having the first-class BB and the second-class BB will be described in detail below as a modified example of the ninth embodiment. FIG. 268 is an RT state transition diagram according to a modified example of the ninth embodiment. In the figure, there are five RT states of "RT0", "Type 1 BB inside", "Type 1 BB operating", "Type 2 BB inside", and "Type 2 BB operating". , The RT state shifts by satisfying the conditions indicated by the arrows in the figure. As a specific example of transition of the RT state, the RT state is "inside the type 1 BB", "in the operation of the type 1 BB", "inside the type 2 BB", "in the operation of the type 2 BB" ("RT0"). When the RAM initialization is executed, the operation of the type 1 BB is completed, or the operation of the type 2 BB is completed in all the RT states except the above, the process shifts to "RT0". When the operation of the 2nd class BB is completed, specifically, during the operation of the 2nd class BB that was activated by winning the 2nd class BB combination and winning the winning 2nd class BB combination, the specified number of medals The payout is complete. Since the transition of the RT state to "inside the type 1 BB" and "during the operation of the type 1 BB" is the same as in the ninth embodiment, detailed explanation is omitted.

Next, when the RT state is "RT0", by winning the 2nd class BB combination, the RT state shifts to either "2nd class BB inside" or "2nd class BB operating". In the latter case, when the 2nd type BB combination is won, the specific symbol 1 (the combination of the symbols related to the 2nd type BB combination) that is stopped and displayed at a specific push position of a predetermined reel wins a prize. In the former case, when the 2nd class BB combination is won, the specific symbol 2 (a combination of symbols that can avoid winning the 2nd class BB combination) that is stopped and displayed at a specific push position of a predetermined reel wins a prize. do. At the time of winning the 2nd class BB, either the specific symbol 1 or the specific symbol 2 is configured to win a prize depending on the pushing position. That is, by winning the specific symbol 2 that can avoid the prize of the specific symbol 1, it is possible to shift to "inside the 2nd class BB".

In the RT state of "Type 2 BB inside", the reel stop control related to the bell role managed by the push order is different from "Type 1 BB inside", and the maximum number of acquisitions is obtained regardless of the push order and push position. It can be said that it is in a highly profitable state for the player because it is configured so that a certain 15 cards can be acquired. Between these games, the push order navigation of the bell role, which is managed by the push order, does not occur. That is, instead of acquiring 15 bell roles according to the push order navigation, it is configured so that 15 bell roles can be acquired regardless of the stopping mode of the player. The number of games is not determined in advance in this "inside the 2nd class BB", and the game continues until the 2nd class BB winning combination is won at a predetermined winning rate (lottery probability). By winning the 2nd class BB role, "2nd class BB inside" ends and the RT state shifts from "2nd class BB inside" to "2nd class BB operating".

Next, the case where the RT state is "Type 2 BB is in operation" will be described. "Type 2 BB is operating" as the RT state of the ninth embodiment means a state in which the type 2 BB combination is won, the symbol combination related to the type 2 BB combination is stopped and displayed, and the type 2 BB is operating. .. This game is set to end when the payout of a predetermined medal is completed. The number of payouts of the game medium can be freely specified, but in the ninth embodiment, the number of payouts exceeds two as an example. For example, in "Type 2 BB operating", the end condition of "Type 2 BB operating" can be satisfied by executing the game in which two cards are paid out twice with a two-card bet.

Next, with reference to FIG. 269, the expected medal increase / decrease value and the state ratio in the ninth embodiment and the modified example of the ninth embodiment will be described. In the figure, a case where the game is advanced by the game method A (a striking method recommended for a player at a game store) is described in detail. First, the ninth embodiment shown in the upper part of the figure will be described in detail.

<Game method A>
An example of the game method A in the ninth embodiment will be described in detail. The game method A is a game method executed at the time of the first verification test in which the player executes the game so as not to lose the most, and in the game in which the push order navigation is not executed, the stop display is displayed depending on the stop position. The game is continued to be executed in an operation mode in which the symbol combinations (symbol combinations including symbols other than PB = 1) that may not be possible can be stopped and displayed as much as possible.

<Game method A in RT0>
As the game method A in RT0, in the game in which the type 1 BB combination is not won, the stop operation is performed in the order of "left → middle → right".
(1) As the first stop operation, the first bell A on the left reel stops the left stop button at the lower timing.
(1-1) When any of Nos. 1 to 4 is stopped and displayed in the lower row of the left reel (games that have not won re-game-K and re-game-L), 1 of the middle reel is used as the second stop operation. The replay of No. stops the middle stop button at the lower timing, and then, as the third stop operation, the first bell B on the right reel stops the right stop button at the lower timing.
(1-2) When the 5th replay is stopped and displayed at the bottom of the left reel (the game that won the replay-K or the replay-L), the 1st replay of the middle reel is performed as the second stop operation. The middle stop button is stopped at the lower timing, and then the 0th bell A on the right reel stops the right stop button at the lower timing as the third stop operation. Watermelon will be stopped and displayed on the upper stage of each reel.

Further, in the game in which the type 1 BB combination is won in RT0, the AT lottery is not won, and the BB winning suggestion image 1 is executed, the stop operation is performed in the order of "right → middle → left".
(1) As the first stop operation, the first bell B on the right reel stops the right stop button at the lower timing, and as the second stop operation, the sixth replay on the middle reel stops at the lower timing. The button is stopped, and as the third stop operation, the 6th bell A on the left reel stops the left stop button at the lower timing, and "Sheep / Sheep, Red Seven" is stopped and displayed on the effective line. Type 1 BB will operate (shift during Type 1 BB operation).

Further, in the game in which the type 1 BB combination is won in RT0 and the AT lottery is won, and the BB winning suggestion image 2 is executed, the stop operation is performed in the order of "right → middle → left".
(1) As the first stop operation, the first bell B on the right reel stops the right stop button at the lower timing, and as the second stop operation, the first replay on the middle reel stops at the lower timing. The button is stopped, and as the third stop operation, the first bell A on the left reel stops the left stop button at the lower timing, and "Sheep / Sheep, Red Seven" is not stopped and displayed on the effective line. Type 1 BB does not operate, and it will move into the inside of Type 1 BB.

<Game method A inside Type 1 BB>
Inside the Type 1 BB, in a game where push order navigation occurs, the stop operation is executed in the same push order as the push order navigation, and on the left reel, the first bell A is the left stop button at the lower timing. In the middle reel, the first replay operates the middle stop button at the lower timing, and on the right reel, the first bell B operates the right stop button at the lower timing.

Also, in games where push order navigation does not occur, the stop operation is performed in the order of "right → middle → left", and as the first stop operation, the first bell B on the right reel stops the right stop button at the lower timing. As the second stop operation, the 6th replay on the middle reel stops the middle stop button at the lower timing, and as the 3rd stop operation, the 6th bell A on the left reel stops left at the lower timing. Stop the button. In the game that has won the re-game, the symbol combination related to the re-game is stopped and displayed, and the push order bells other than "Prize-A11", "Prize-A12", "Prize-B11" and "Prize-B12" ( In the game in which "Right-> Middle-> Left" is not the correct push order but the push order bell), "Sheep / Sheep / Red Seven" is stopped and displayed on the effective line, and Type 1 BB is activated. (Transition during Type 1 BB operation). That is, if the end condition of AT is satisfied and the push order navigation does not occur and the push order bell whose "right → middle → left" is not the correct push order is won, the symbol combination related to the first type BB is stopped and displayed. Type 1 BB will be activated. In addition, the present invention is not limited to this, and the stop operation may be configured in the operation order such as “left → middle → right”.

<Game method A while Type 1 BB is operating>
As the game method A during the operation of the first type BB, the stop operation is performed in the order of "left → middle → right".
(1) As the first stop operation, the first bell A on the left reel stops the left stop button at the lower timing, and as the second stop operation, the first replay on the middle reel presses the middle stop button at the lower timing. The stop operation is performed, and as the third stop operation, the first bell B on the right reel stops the right stop button at the lower timing.

Next, the expected value of medal increase / decrease according to the ninth embodiment will be described. In the ninth embodiment, the gaming states have three gaming states of "RT0", "type 1 BB inside (AT in progress)", and "type 1 BB operating", and further, in push order. If the state in which the instruction by the navigation is generated is defined as "AT" and the state in which the instruction by the push order navigation is not generated is defined as "normal", "RT0" is usually "inside the type 1 BB (during AT)". "State)" can be defined as AT, and "Type 1 BB operating" can be defined as normal. The reel stop control at the time of winning a small winning combination when the game is executed by the game method A in each game state will be described. First, in "RT0", in the game in which the push order bell is won, the one-card combination is preferentially won regardless of the push order and the push position. This is due to the fact that the reels are stopped by the control based on the number priority control described above. In addition, since the push order navigation is generated in the "Type 1 BB internal (AT in progress state)", the push order navigation is generated in the game in which the push order bell is won, and the push order navigation is performed according to the push order navigation. When the reels are stopped, 15 cards are always won. Further, in "Type 1 BB is in operation", the symbol combination of 1 payout, 6 payouts, or 15 payouts is configured to be stopped and displayed. Next, the winning rate of the replay in each gaming state will be described. First, in "RT0", it is 1 / 7.3. Further, in "Type 1 BB inside (AT in progress)", the winning rate of the replay is higher than that of "RT0", which is 1 / 4.0. This is because the random number that wins the type 1 BB combination in the game state of "RT0" is a random number that wins the re-game combination, so that the winning rate of the replay is increasing. In addition, in "Type 1 BB is in operation", the replay does not appear because the lottery for the replaying role is not performed. Next, the expected value of medal increase / decrease in each gaming state will be described. The expected value of increase / decrease in medals per game can be calculated as "average number of payouts per game / number of medals inserted per game (3)" as described above, but here, medals are used. I will describe the numerical value of the rough calculation result about the tendency of the expected increase / decrease value. When the expected value of medal increase / decrease per game in each game state is calculated based on this calculation, it is about -2.0 in "RT0" and about -2.0 in "Type 1 BB internal (AT state)". At +9.0, "Type 1 BB is in operation", it can be derived as about -2.0. In other words, in the normal "RT0" and "Type 1 BB in operation", there is a high probability that one medal will win each game for every three medals inserted, so each game is about -2. It will be a decrease of 0 sheets. On the other hand, in "Type 1 BB inside (AT in progress)", the push order navigation occurs in the game in which the push order bell is won, so a prize of 15 cards is won, and the winning rate of the replay is also compared with "RT0". Because it is rising, it will be an increase of about +9.0 per game. Next, the winning rate (lottery probability) of the conditional device according to the first type BB will be described. In the game state of "RT0", 1 / 8.9 wins the 1st class BB. On the other hand, in "inside the type 1 BB (in the AT state)", the number of the conditional devices related to the winning of the type 1 BB in "RT0" is replaced with the number of the winning units of the re-game. Further, in "Type 1 BB is in operation", the number of setting of the condition device related to the winning of Type 1 BB in "RT0" is replaced with the number of small winning combination winning (for example, winning-J).

Next, the state ratio of each gaming state in the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 269. It should be noted that the state ratio greatly differs depending on how the game is played (reel stop mode) and how the reel stop control is performed for the winning of a small winning combination (reel stop control). It can be said that it is a reel. In the ninth embodiment, a game method A (a method recommended to a player at a game store), a game method B (a method of performing a stop operation that is the most profitable for each game, and details will be described later), and a game. The state ratio is calculated when the three game methods of Method C (a striking method in which the push position and the stop order are randomly stopped in all reels, the details of which will be described later) are performed. ..

<Game method B>
An example of the game method B in the ninth embodiment will be described in detail. The game method B is a game method in which a stop operation is performed, which is the most profitable for each game, and is a second method performed in order to provide an appropriate game machine in accordance with the Act on Regulation of Customs Business, etc. and Optimization of Business. This is a game method that is executed during the verification test. When the game is advanced by the game method B, the game in which the push order navigation occurs is not executed.

<Game method B in RT0>
As the game method B in RT0, in the game in which the type 1 BB combination is not won, the stop operation is performed in the order of "left → middle → right".
(1) In a game (winning numbers 0 to 12) that has won a loss or a re-game, the first bell A on the left reel stops the left stop button at the lower timing as the first stop operation.
(1-1) If any of Nos. 1 to 4 is stopped and displayed at the bottom of the left reel (games that have not won the re-game of winning number 11-K and the re-game of winning number 12-L), the first 2 As a stop operation, the 1st replay of the middle reel stops the middle stop button at the lower timing, and then as the 3rd stop operation, the 1st bell B of the right reel stops the right stop button at the lower timing. do.
(1-2) When the replay of No. 5 is stopped and displayed at the bottom of the left reel (the replay of winning number 11-K or the replay of winning number 12-the winning game), the second stop operation is performed. The first replay of the middle reel stops the middle stop button at the lower timing, and then the 0th bell A of the right reel stops the right stop button at the lower timing as the third stop operation. Watermelon will be stopped and displayed on the upper stage of each reel.
(2) In the game (winning numbers 13 to 39) in which the bell is won, the combination of 15 symbols from the winning 24 to the winning 36 is stopped and displayed.

Further, in the game in which the type 1 BB combination is won in RT0, the stop operation is performed in the order of "right->middle->left".
(1) As the first stop operation, the first bell B on the right reel stops the right stop button at the lower timing, and as the second stop operation, the sixth replay on the middle reel stops at the lower timing. The button is stopped, and as the third stop operation, the 6th bell A on the left reel stops the left stop button at the lower timing, and "Sheep / Sheep, Red Seven" is stopped and displayed on the effective line. Type 1 BB will operate (shift during Type 1 BB operation).
In the game method B, regardless of whether or not the AT lottery is won, the symbol combination in which the type 1 BB is operated in the game in which the type 1 BB combination is won is stopped and displayed.

<Game method B while Type 1 BB is operating>
As the game method B during the operation of the first type BB, the stop operation is performed in the order of "left → middle → right".
(1) As the first stop operation, the first bell A on the left reel stops the left stop button at the lower timing, and as the second stop operation, the first replay on the middle reel presses the middle stop button at the lower timing. The stop operation is performed, and as the third stop operation, the first bell B on the right reel stops the right stop button at the lower timing.

<Game method C>
Next, the game method C is a game method in which the game is played completely randomly, "left → middle → right", "left → right → middle", "middle → left → right", "middle → right → left", The push order is determined with an equal probability for each game from the six push orders of "right → left → middle" and "right → middle → left", and the stop timing is also uniform from the 0th to 19th stop operation positions. This is a game method in which the stop operation timing is determined for each reel of each game with a high probability. In addition, the opportunity for the actual game to be performed in this game method C is, for example, a game method executed by a player who has little experience in playing a pachinko machine (cannot perform a push operation), a customs business, or the like. This is a gaming method performed at the time of the third verification test conducted to provide an appropriate gaming machine in accordance with the Act on Regulation and Business Optimization.

<Game method C in RT0>
When the game is executed by the game method C in the game in which the type 1 BB combination is won at RT0, the symbol combination related to the type 1 BB may or may not be stopped and displayed, and the type 1 BB combination may be displayed. Since there is only one combination of symbols ("Sheep / Sheep / Red Seven" or "Elephant / Elephant / Red Seven") in which Type 1 BB will be activated in the game won in, it will be used as Type 1 BB at RT0. When the game is executed by the game method C in the winning game, the ratio of the symbol combination related to the type 1 BB not being stopped and displayed is higher than that of the symbol combination related to the type 1 BB being stopped and displayed. Further, even if the symbol combination related to the type 1 BB is not stopped and displayed, the next game is inside the type 1 BB, so that the symbol combination related to each game type 1 BB can be stopped and displayed even after the next game. There is sex.

<Condition ratio>
First, in the game method A, the state ratio of "Type 1 BB is in operation" is 72%, which is the highest ratio. This means that in the game state of "RT0", if the 1st class BB role is won with a high probability of 1 / 8.9 and the AT lottery is not won, the 1st class BB role is won. This is because the symbol combination related to the first type BB is stopped and displayed. Further, since the small winning combination won in "Type 1 BB is in operation" has a high ratio of paying out one card, the number of games required until the type 1 BB is completed in operation is relatively large.

Next, in the game method B, the state ratio of "inside the type 1 BB" is 0%. As described above, in the game method B, in the game in which the bonus combination (type 1 BB combination) is won, the bonus (type 1 BB in the ninth embodiment) is preferentially won. In the game where you win the bonus role (type 1 BB role) in "RT0" without staying in "inside the BB", that is, during the period when you carry over the type 1 BB, you can play the type 1 BB in any case. Let me win a prize. In addition, the state ratio (also referred to as the state stay ratio) of "Type 1 BB is in operation" is 87%, which is higher than that at the time of the game method A. In this method, in the game state of "RT0", the game method B wins a type 1 BB combination that is won at 1 / 8.9 in any case in the winning game, while the game method A is a game method A. This is because if the 1st class BB combination is won while the AT lottery is won, the 1st class BB combination is transferred to the inside of the 1st class BB without winning a prize.

Next, in the game method C, the state ratio of "inside the type 1 BB" is 65%, which is higher than that of the game method A and the game method B. As described above, when the game is executed by the game method C in the game in which the 1st class BB combination is won at RT0, the symbol combination related to the 1st class BB may or may not be stopped and displayed. Since there is only one pattern combination ("sheep / sheep / red seven" or "elephant / elephant / red seven") in which the type 1 BB will operate in the game in which the type 1 BB role is won, at RT0. When the game is executed by the game method C in the game in which the 1st class BB combination is won, the ratio in which the symbol combination related to the 1st class BB is not stopped and displayed rather than the symbol combination related to the 1st class BB is stopped and displayed. Will be higher. In addition, even if the symbol combination related to the type 1 BB is not stopped and displayed, the next game is inside the type 1 BB, so that the symbol combination related to each game type 1 BB can be stopped and displayed even after the next game. However, since the ratio of the symbol combination related to the type 1 BB not being stopped and displayed is higher than the ratio of the symbol combination related to the type 1 BB being stopped and displayed, the ratio of staying inside the type 1 BB is relatively high. It gets higher. The ratio of the symbol combinations related to the first type BB to all the symbol combinations is "(5 x 5 x 5) / (20 x 20 x 20) = 125/8000".

Next, the state ratio of each gaming state in the modified example of the ninth embodiment shown in the lower part of the figure will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the ninth embodiment will be omitted. It should be noted that the game states of "RT0", "Type 1 BB inside", and "Type 1 BB in operation" are omitted because the description overlaps with the ninth embodiment. As the game state, it has two additional game states, "2 type BB inside" and "2 type BB inside", and "2 type BB inside" is "1 type BB inside". "BB in operation" can be defined as normal. In addition, in "inside the 2nd class BB", it is not a gaming state in which the push order navigation for the push order bell combination occurs. A case where the game is advanced by the game method A in each game state will be described.

<Game method A inside Type 2 BB>
As the game method A inside the Type 2 BB, the stop operation is performed in the order of “left → middle → right”.
(1) As the first stop operation, the first bell A on the left reel stops the left stop button at the lower timing, and as the second stop operation, the first replay on the middle reel presses the middle stop button at the lower timing. The stop operation is performed, and as the third stop operation, the first bell B on the right reel stops the right stop button at the lower timing.

In addition, in "Type 2 BB inside", the game state is such that push order navigation does not occur, but there is a relatively high probability that the winning combination, which always pays out 15 cards, will be won regardless of the push order and push position. It is configured to be.

<Game method A while Type 2 BB is operating>
As the game method A during the operation of the second type BB, the stop operation is performed in the order of “left → middle → right”.
(1) As the first stop operation, the first bell A on the left reel stops the left stop button at the lower timing, and as the second stop operation, the first replay on the middle reel presses the middle stop button at the lower timing. The stop operation is performed, and as the third stop operation, the first bell B on the right reel stops the right stop button at the lower timing.

Further, in "Type 2 BB is in operation", it is considered that at least all the winning combinations related to the small winning combination are won regardless of the lottery result, and the predetermined small winning combination is designed to appear. As described above, the winning combination lottery may be executed or the winning combination lottery may not be executed while the "Type 2 BB is in operation".

Next, the winning rate of the replay in each gaming state will be described. In "Type 2 BB inside", the winning rate of replay is higher than that of "RT0", which is 1 / 4.0. This is because the random number that wins the type 1 BB combination in the game state of "RT0" is a random number that wins the re-game combination, so that the winning rate of the replay is increasing. In addition, regardless of the result of any lottery, it is considered that at least all the winning roles related to the small winning combination have been won, and it is designed so that a predetermined small winning combination appears. Further, in "Type 2 BB is in operation", only one conditional device (for example, a two-card combination) is configured to win a prize, and the two-card combination wins at almost 100%.

<Game method B in RT0>
In addition, in the game in which the 2nd class BB role is won in RT0, the stop operation is performed in the order of "left → middle → right", and the game in which the 2nd class BB role is won regardless of whether or not the AT lottery is won. The combination of symbols that will activate the 2nd class BB is stopped and displayed at.

<Game method B while Type 2 BB is operating>
As the game method B during the operation of the second type BB, the stop operation is performed in the order of "left → middle → right".
(1) As the first stop operation, the first bell A on the left reel stops the left stop button at the lower timing, and as the second stop operation, the first replay on the middle reel presses the middle stop button at the lower timing. The stop operation is performed, and as the third stop operation, the first bell B on the right reel stops the right stop button at the lower timing.

<Game method C in RT0>
When the game is executed by the game method C in the game in which the 2nd type BB combination is won at RT0, the symbol combination related to the 2nd type BB may or may not be stopped and displayed. In addition, when the game is executed by the game method C in the game in which the 2nd type BB combination is won at RT0, the ratio of the symbol combination related to the 2nd type BB being stopped and displayed and the symbol combination related to the 2nd type BB are stopped. The ratio of not displaying will differ depending on the configuration of the reel arrangement (the reel arrangement may be appropriately designed in consideration of the ratio of stopping and displaying the symbol combination related to the type 2 BB).

<Condition ratio>
Next, the state ratio of each gaming state in the modified example of the ninth embodiment will be described. Regardless of the game method, in the case of RT0, there is a possibility of winning a type 1 BB combination and a type 2 BB combination. In the game in which the 2nd class BB combination is won at RT0, in the case of the game method A, the stop operation is performed so that the symbol combination related to the 2nd class BB is not stopped and displayed, and in the case of the game method B, the symbol related to the 2nd class BB is stopped. Since the stop operation is performed so that the combination is stopped and displayed, and in the case of the game method C, the stop operation is randomly performed, the symbol combination related to the type 2 BB may or may not be stopped and displayed.

In addition, it can be seen that there is not a little state ratio in "inside the type 2 BB" and "during the operation of the type 2 BB". The state ratios of "inside type 2 BB" and "inside type 1 BB" and "in operation of type 1 BB" are lowered by the amount of having the state ratios of "inside type 2 BB" and "in operation of type 2 BB". In addition, considering the instruction function such as push order navigation as an accessory, there are some restrictions on the payout by the accessory including the instruction function in the ball ejection test, and a gaming machine with an advantageous section ratio of 70% or more is used. When configuring, it is important that the number of payouts from the gaming machine does not become too large. In the modified example from the ninth embodiment, by configuring to have two types of BB, "(number of payouts during RB operation + number of payouts during CB operation + number of payouts during SB operation + number of payouts in the game in which the instruction is executed)". "/ All payouts x 100%" is set as the designated payout ratio, and the number of payouts is designed to be less than 70%, making it a fair gaming machine that does not overwhelm the number of payouts from the gaming machines. .. In the modified example from the ninth embodiment, by having the type 2 BB, the number of payouts during the CB operation (the number of payouts during the “type 2 BB operation”) constituting the numerator of the indicated payout ratio is slightly increased. (For example, by executing a game in which two cards are paid out twice in a two-card betting game, two cards will be paid out and the operation of the two-type BB will be terminated.) Since it is configured so that On the other hand, the "all payouts" that make up the denominator of the designated bonus ratio are significantly increased compared to the numerator due to the payout inside the Type 2 BB and during the operation of the Type 2 BB, so the designated bonus ratio is suppressed. It is possible to design as such. By configuring to have two types of BB as in the modified example of the ninth embodiment, the ratio of payout by the accessory including the instruction function can be reduced, so that the ball is paid out as compared with the ninth embodiment. It can be a gaming machine that is easy to pass the test.

Next, FIG. 270 is an AT state transition diagram in the ninth embodiment. In the ninth embodiment, there are four AT-related states: "normal state", "AT in progress state + 1 type BB inside", "non-AT in progress state + 1 type BB inside", and "1 type BB state". By satisfying the conditions shown by the arrows in the figure, the state related to AT will shift. For example, if a predetermined small winning combination is won in the "1st class BB state" and then the AT is won at a predetermined winning rate (for example, 1/5), the 1st class BB is won again in the "normal state". Taking this as an opportunity, it shifts to the "AT in progress state". Although not shown, the game section has a "normal section" and an "advantageous section" that is more advantageous for the player in terms of instructions than the "normal state". For example, when the state related to AT is "normal state", it is set as "normal section", and the state related to AT is "AT in progress state + 1 type BB inside", "non-AT in progress state + 1 type BB inside", " When it is "Type 1 BB state", it is defined as "advantageous section", and when the state related to AT is "normal state" and "non-AT in progress state + 1 type BB inside", it is "normal section". When the state related to AT is "AT in progress + 1 type BB inside" and "1 type BB state", it is defined as "advantageous section", and the state related to AT is "1 type BB state". At this time, a part of the "Type 1 BB state" may be defined as a "normal section", and a part may be defined as an "advantageous section". As a condition device for performing a transition lottery to the "advantageous section", there is a replay-E or a winning-A1. Further, the advantageous section transition lottery may be performed by winning the BB combination such as Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-B.

The "normal state" is a normal section or an advantageous section. In the ninth embodiment, based on the information about the AT held in the "Type 1 BB state" described later and the winning of the type 1 BB combination, the state related to the AT is set to "AT in state + 1 type BB inside". Alternatively, it is a state of determining whether to shift to "non-AT in progress state + 1 type BB inside". If the information related to AT is the information related to winning, the state related to AT is shifted to "AT in progress + 1 type BB inside", and if the information related to AT is information related to non-winning, the state related to AT. Is controlled to shift to "AT in progress + 1 type BB inside". If this "normal state" is a normal section, push order navigation is not performed, but if the "normal state" is an advantageous section, push order navigation may be performed. In addition, if the AT is won and the 1st class BB role is won and the 1st class BB role is won, the winning right of the AT will not be extinguished, and the information about the winning AT will be displayed. It is configured so that it can be taken over. When the operation of the 1st class BB is completed and the 1st class BB is won again in the "normal state", the AT state is entered by performing the stop operation so as not to win the 1st class BB combination.

"Non-AT in progress + 1 type BB inside" is a normal section or an advantageous section, and is a state in which the 1 type BB combination has been won and the AT lottery has not been won. Even in the "non-AT state + 1 type BB inside", the AT lottery may be configured to be executed, or the AT lottery may not be executed.

"AT in progress + 1 type BB inside" is an advantageous section, and is a state in which the type 1 BB combination is won and the information about AT is determined to be won. When a predetermined role (rare role) is won in "AT in progress + 1 type BB inside", the number of AT sets is added at a predetermined winning rate, or the number of AT games is added. Is also feasible. In addition, although not shown, when a predetermined small role (rare role) is won in the "AT medium state + 1 type BB internal medium", the player is further advantageous in the "additional special state (AT set)". It may be configured to have "a state in which the expected value such as the addition of the number or the number of games is high)". With this configuration, the game period of "AT in progress + 1 type BB inside" can be lengthened, so that the interest of the game can be improved. Since "AT in progress + 1 type BB inside" is in AT, 100% of the push order navigation for winning the bell role is generated. The section of "AT in progress + 1 type BB inside" can be arbitrarily defined, but in the 9th embodiment, it is defined as 50 games. In the section of "AT in progress + 1 type BB inside", not only the number of games is managed, but also the difference number management specified by the number of game media given by the player, or the number of bell push order navigations. You may also manage the number of navigations specified in. In addition, in the AT state, if the carry-over type 1 BB combination is won, the operation of the type 1 BB ends without any particular subtraction of the number of AT games, and the "normal state" is performed again. When the 1st class BB is won, the AT state is entered by performing a stop operation so as not to win the 1st class BB combination. At this time, if the AT is won during the operation of the 1st class BB, the number of newly won AT games is added to the number of AT games remaining at the timing when the 1st class BB role is won. To. In addition, there is no special penalty when the 1st class BB role is won in the AT state, but the expected value of medal increase / decrease is lower than the AT mode during the 1st class BB operation, so the medal Can occur in a situation where the number of medals is greatly reduced. "AT in progress + 1 type BB inside" is, for example, the end condition of the "advantageous section" that satisfies the end condition of the AT state (for example, the number of games of 50G is exhausted), in which the 1st type BB combination is won. It is determined that the end condition is satisfied based on whether the 1500G game has been performed since the start of the advantageous section, the number of medals paid out exceeds 2,400, and the like, and the game is ended.

In addition, when the counter value of the AT counter becomes 0 in "AT in progress state + 1 type BB inside", it becomes "non-AT in progress state + 1 type BB inside", so the push order bell role is won. Push order navigation for this does not occur. When the counter value of the AT counter becomes 0, the push order navigation for winning the push order bell role does not occur, so that the type 1 BB carrying over the winning can easily win the prize (push in the ninth embodiment). If the forward bell is overflowed, the 1st class BB role can win a prize). That is, as long as the reels are stopped in the order in which the correct answer is pushed, the push order bell role wins and the prize in the type 1 BB combination can be avoided. Is configured so that a type 1 BB role may win a prize.

The "type 1 BB state" is a normal section or an advantageous section, and is a state in which the combination is won by winning the type 1 BB combination and winning the type 1 BB combination. Further, in the ninth embodiment, the AT lottery is performed in this "type 1 BB state". In the AT lottery, a predetermined small winning combination (for example, a single winning combination) is won with a predetermined probability, and information about the winning AT is temporarily retained. The "Type 1 BB state" is a state in which the Type 1 BB is operating, and is a state in which the game is terminated when a predetermined number of game media are paid out. In the ninth embodiment, the number of game media to be paid out exceeds 69. It ends with.

In the "normal state", the "AT in progress state + 1 type BB inside" as the AT in progress state, followed by the "1 type BB state" in which the prize was awarded, or the "non-AT in progress state + 1 type BB" as the "normal section". Regardless of the "Type 1 BB state" that was awarded after "Inside the inside", it is a gaming state that always shifts after the "Type 1 BB state".

Next, FIG. 271 is an AT state transition diagram in the modified example of the ninth embodiment. In the modified example of the ninth embodiment, "normal state", "AT in progress state + 1 type BB inside", "non-AT in progress state + 1 type BB inside", "1 type BB state", "2 type BB inside" There are four AT-related states, "medium" and "type 2 BB state", and the state related to AT shifts when the conditions shown by the arrows in the figure are satisfied. Since the "AT in progress state + 1 type BB inside", "non-AT in progress state + 1 type BB inside", and "1 type BB state" are the same as those in the ninth embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Although not shown, the game section has a "normal section" and an "advantageous section" that is more advantageous for the player in terms of instructions than the "normal state". For example, when the state related to AT is "normal state", it is set as "normal section", and the state related to AT is "AT in progress state + 1 type BB inside", "non-AT in progress state + 1 type BB inside", " When it is "inside type 2 BB", "type 1 BB state", and "type 2 BB state", it is defined as "advantageous section", and when the state related to AT is "type 1 BB state", it is "type 1 BB state". A part of the "Type 1 BB state" may be defined as a "normal section", and a part may be defined as an "advantageous section". Further, the state related to all ATs may be defined as an "advantageous section". Regarding the transition to the "advantageous section", in "normal state", "AT in progress state + 1 type BB inside", "non-AT in progress state + 1 type BB inside", and "2 type BB inside". It is preferable to draw lots with small wins with the same winning rate. As a condition device for performing a transition lottery to the "advantageous section", there is a replay-E or a winning-A1. Further, the BB combination such as Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-B may also be configured to perform a transition lottery to an advantageous section.

"Inside the 2nd class BB" is an advantageous section, and is in a state where the 2nd class BB role is won and the 2nd class BB is not won. In the modified example of the ninth embodiment, the inside of the two types of BB is defined as an advantageous section. Regarding the transition from "normal state" to "inside type 2 BB", when the type 2 BB combination is won, the specific symbol 2 (type 2 BB combination) that is stopped and displayed at a specific push position of a predetermined reel is displayed. A combination of symbols that can avoid winning a prize) will be transferred by winning a prize. In addition, this "inside 2 type BB" has a higher probability of replay than the "normal state", and the stop control different from the "normal state" is used in the push order bell role. When all the condition devices related to the push order bell combination are won regardless of the push order and the push position, the 15 roles with the highest payout can be obtained. Since "inside the 2nd class BB" is a period during which the push order navigation does not occur, the payout of the 15-card combination by winning the push order bell role does not have to be regarded as the payout by the instruction function. In "inside the 2nd class BB", the 2nd class BB combination wins, that is, the specific symbol 1 (the combination of symbols related to the 2nd class BB combination) that is stopped and displayed at a specific push position of the predetermined reel wins. finish.

The "type 2 BB state" is a normal section or an advantageous section, and is a state in which the combination is won by winning the type 2 BB combination and winning the type 2 BB combination. Further, in the ninth embodiment, the AT lottery is not performed in this "type 2 BB state". In the "Type 2 BB state", the small winning combinations include, for example, the two-card combination that can be obtained regardless of the pushing order and the pushing position, and in the "Type 2 BB state", the two-card combination can be obtained 100%. It is configured, and the "type 2 BB state" ends when the predetermined number of payouts is exceeded.

With the above configuration, according to the spinning machine according to the ninth embodiment, the state advantageous to the player and the state disadvantageous to the player are sharpened, and 1 in the AT state. The expected value per game (number of payouts / number of inserts) can be increased, and a more entertaining gaming machine can be created. In addition, it is possible to create a novel game property in which an AT lottery is executed while the type 1 BB is operating and an AT advantageous to the player is executed inside the type 1 BB.

<Other configurations applicable to this example>
Here, the configurations applicable to all the embodiments having the above-mentioned advantageous sections will be described in detail below.

Next, FIG. 272 is an example of a push order navigation execution mode applicable to this example. Under the condition that it is a normal section, the advantageous section indicator YH (advantageous section lamp) is turned off, and the state related to AT is a non-AT state (a state related to AT other than the AT state, for example, a normal state). , The payout rate is calculated for each game. Here, the payout rate is a numerical value calculated by "game medals paid out from the gaming machine / game medals bet on the gaming machine x 100%". As a mode for calculating the payout rate, it has a payout number counter for measuring the game medals paid out from the game machine and an input number counter for measuring the game medals bet on the game machine, and after each game game is completed. It may be configured to calculate the payout rate (after the payout is completed) and store the payout rate. Further, the timing for calculating the payout rate is not limited to the end of the game, and may be configured to be calculated at the game start timing, or may be configured to be calculated after the end of the internal lottery.

After that, the advantageous section transition lottery was won in the normal section, and the first game of the advantageous section was executed at the timing 1 in the figure, so that the advantageous section indicator YH lights up. The ball output rate is less than 100% and 40% or more. After that, the game progresses in the advantageous section and in the non-AT state, and the push order navigation is not executed, so that the ball ejection rate decreases, and at the timing 2 in the figure, the ball ejection rate is less than 100% and 40. The game is executed under the condition of% or more. In the game, the push order bell is won, but the push order navigation (instruction in the figure) is not executed, and the stop operation is performed in the order of the left stop button → middle stop button → right stop button, and the wrong answer is pushed. Since it was in order, the symbol combination of 3 payouts is stopped and displayed (the symbol combination related to the bell at the time of the correct answer in the push order is not stopped and displayed). In the game, the game is executed with a 3-bet and 3 cards are paid out, so that the payout rate does not change. The correct push order of the push order bells won in the game is "middle-> left-> right".

After that, the game progresses in the advantageous section and in the non-AT state, and the push order navigation is not executed, so that the ball ejection rate decreases, and at the timing of 3 in the figure, the ball ejection rate is less than 40% and 33. The game is executed under the condition of% or more. In the game, "left → middle → right" is the correct push order, and the push order bell is won, and the ball output rate is less than the threshold of 40%, so "left → middle → right" The push order navigation that instructs the stop operation in order is executed. The player operates the stop operation in the order of the left stop button → middle stop button → right stop button according to the push order navigation, and the stop operation is performed in the order of pressing the correct answer, so the symbol combination related to the bell to be paid out is displayed as a stop. (The symbol combination related to the bell when the push order is correct is stopped and displayed).

As described above, in the configuration according to the figure, in the advantageous section, in the situation where the ball ejection rate is less than 40%, which is a predetermined threshold value, the push order combination (the combination in which the push order navigation can be executed). ) Is configured to execute push order navigation. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being significantly disadvantaged in a short time, and also a short-time test in the type test (a test in which the game is advanced by the above-mentioned game method A). It is possible to prevent the ball output rate from becoming less than 33%. The threshold value is not limited to 40%, and may be any value of 33% or more. In addition, the role of executing the push order navigation when the ball output rate is less than the threshold value may be arbitrarily set. For example, the push order navigation is executed for the push order bell, but the push order replay is performed. It may be configured not to execute the push order navigation. Further, although the timing of starting the measurement of the ball ejection rate is not shown in the figure, it may be (1) when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, (2) when the setting is changed, (3) when the advantageous section is started, or the like. .. In addition, as conditions for executing the push order navigation when the value is less than the threshold value, (1) a predetermined game has elapsed since the power of the gaming machine was turned on, (2) a predetermined game has elapsed since the setting was changed, and (3) advantageous. It may be assumed that the predetermined game has elapsed from the start of the section. The predetermined game is, for example, 400 games.

Further, the lighting timing of the advantageous section indicator YH is not limited to the start of the advantageous section, and (1) when it becomes a predetermined value or more based on the payout rate after the end of the game (after the end of payout) in the advantageous section. The advantageous section indicator YH is turned on, and (2) the advantageous section indicator YH is turned on at any timing after the start of the game (arbitrary timing after the start lever is turned on) based on the ball output rate after betting in the advantageous section. The start, (3) the start timing of the push order navigation execution game based on the winning may be set as the push order combination in the situation where the payout rate is below the threshold value in the advantageous section.

In addition, until the predetermined number of games has elapsed after the RAM is initialized or after the setting is changed (may be after the power is turned on), the push order navigation is not executed even if the ball output rate is below the threshold value. May be good. By configuring in this way, it is possible to configure the player so that the player does not notice that the setting has been changed.

The above-mentioned configuration is particularly effective when applied to a gaming machine having a relatively high stay ratio in an advantageous section (a ratio of staying in an advantageous section in the entire game and not staying in a normal section).

When configuring a gaming machine with an advantageous section ratio of 70% or more, it is important not to make the number of payouts from the gaming machine too large. Therefore, an example of such a gaming machine will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 273.

Next, FIG. 273 is a configuration relating to the state ratio applicable to this example. In the figure, an example of the state ratio in the gaming machine adopting the shift RB as in the eighth embodiment will be described in detail. The reel arrangement, the condition device, and the like also have the same configuration as that of the eighth embodiment.

<Game method A in RT0>
As the game method A in "RT0", the stop operation is performed in the order of "left → middle → right".
(1) As the first stop operation, the 6th bell A on the left reel stops the left stop button at the lower timing, and as the 2nd stop operation, the 8th sheep on the middle reel stops at the lower timing. The button is stopped, and as the third stop operation, sheep No. 8 on the right reel stops the right stop button at the lower timing. It should be noted that the same stop operation is executed even in the game in which the type 1 BB is won, and the symbol combination related to the type 1 BB is shifted to "inside the type 1 BB" without stopping and displaying.

In addition, the gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment has a gaming property such that the manager of the gaming field executes the game at "RT0", transfers the game to the inside of the first type BB, and then operates the gaming machine. Therefore, when the game is executed by the game method A, the game proceeds in the "inside the 1st class BB" without winning the 1st class BB, so that the player does not stay at "RT0". As shown in the figure, the state ratio of "RT0" is 0%. It will be described later that it is advantageous for the player not to win the first class BB.

<Game method A inside Type 1 BB>
As the game method A in RT0, the stop operation is performed in the order of "left → middle → right".
(1) As the first stop operation, the 6th bell A on the left reel stops the left stop button at the lower timing, and as the 2nd stop operation, the 8th sheep on the middle reel stops at the lower timing. The button is stopped, and as the third stop operation, sheep No. 8 on the right reel stops the right stop button at the lower timing. As described above, since the symbol combination related to the type 1 BB is not stopped and displayed, it does not shift to "type 1 BB general and RB non-internal", "RB internal" and "RB in operation". It is configured.

<Game method B in RT0>
As the game method B in "RT0", the stop operation is performed in the order of "left → middle → right".
(1) In a game that has not won the Type 1 BB, as the first stop operation, the 6th bell A on the left reel stops the left stop button at the lower timing, and as the second stop operation, the middle reel. The 8th sheep of No. 8 stops the middle stop button at the lower timing, and as the 3rd stop operation, the 8th sheep of the right reel stops the right stop button at the lower timing.
(2) In the game in which the first type BB is won, as the first stop operation, the watermelon A No. 17 on the left reel stops the left stop button at the lower timing, and as the second stop operation, 17 on the middle reel. The replay of No. 17 stops the middle stop button at the timing of the lower row, and as the third stop operation, the replay of No. 17 on the right reel stops the right stop button at the timing of the lower row, and the symbol combination related to Type 1 BB is It will be displayed as a stop and will shift to the type 1 BB in general and the RB is not operating.
In this way, in the game method B in "RT0", when the 1st class BB combination is won, the symbol combination related to the 1st class BB combination won in the game is stopped and displayed, and "1st class BB general and RB non-general". Since it is configured to shift to "in operation", it does not stay in "inside Type 1 BB".

<Game method B during type 1 BB general and RB non-operation>
(1) In a game in which the RB is not won, as the first stop operation, the 6th bell A on the left reel stops the left stop button at the lower timing, and as the second stop operation, the 8 on the middle reel. The sheep No. 8 stops the middle stop button at the timing of the lower row, and as the third stop operation, the sheep No. 8 on the right reel stops the right stop button at the timing of the lower row.
(2) In the game in which the RB-A is won, the 17th watermelon A on the left reel stops the left stop button at the lower timing as the first stop operation, and the 17th on the middle reel as the second stop operation. The replay of No. 17 stops the middle stop button at the timing of the lower row, and as the third stop operation, the replay of No. 17 on the right reel stops the right stop button at the timing of the lower row, and the symbol combination related to RB-A is A stop display will be displayed and the transition will be made while the RB is in operation.
(3) In the game in which the RB-B is won, the 17th watermelon A on the left reel stops the left stop button at the lower timing as the first stop operation, and the middle reel 11 as the second stop operation. No. Cherry stops the middle stop button at the lower timing, and as the third stop operation, the 17th replay on the right reel stops the right stop button at the lower timing, and the symbol combination related to RB-B is A stop display will be displayed and the transition will be made while the RB is in operation.
(4) In the game in which the RB-C is won, as the first stop operation, the 17th watermelon A on the left reel stops the left stop button at the lower timing, and as the second stop operation, the middle reel 6 No. Cherry stops the middle stop button at the lower timing, and as the third stop operation, the 17th replay on the right reel stops the right stop button at the lower timing, and the symbol combination related to RB-C is A stop display will be displayed and the transition will be made while the RB is in operation.
(5) In the game in which the RB-D is won, as the first stop operation, the watermelon A No. 17 on the left reel stops the left stop button at the lower timing, and as the second stop operation, 1 on the middle reel. No. Cherry stops the middle stop button at the lower timing, and as the third stop operation, the 17th replay on the right reel stops the right stop button at the lower timing, and the symbol combination related to RB-D is A stop display will be displayed and the transition will be made while the RB is in operation.
In this way, in the game method B in "Type 1 BB in general and RB is not operating", no matter which RB combination is won, the symbol combination related to the RB combination won in the game is stopped and displayed. Since it is configured to shift to "RB in operation", it does not stay in "RB inside".

<Game method B while RB is operating>
(1) As the first stop operation, the 6th bell A on the left reel stops the left stop button at the lower timing, and as the 2nd stop operation, the 8th sheep on the middle reel stops at the lower timing. The button is stopped, and as the third stop operation, sheep No. 8 on the right reel stops the right stop button at the lower timing.

When the game is advanced by executing the game method B in the gaming machine of the present configuration, it is configured not to stay in "inside the type 1 BB" and "inside the RB".

<Game method C in RT0>
(1) When the game is executed by the game method C in the game in which the type 1 BB is won in "RT0", the symbol combination related to the type 1 BB may or may not be stopped and displayed. Since there are two combinations of symbols (“Blank / Watermelon B / Red Seven” or “Blank / Watermelon B / Blank”) in which the Type 1 BB operates in the game in which the Type 1 BB role is won, “RT0” When the game is executed by the game method C in the game in which the 1st class BB combination is won, the symbol combination related to the 1st class BB is not stopped and displayed rather than the symbol combination related to the 1st class BB is stopped and displayed. The ratio is higher. In addition, even if the symbol combination related to the 1st class BB is not stopped and displayed, the next game is "inside the 1st class BB", so that the symbol combination related to each game 1st class BB is stopped and displayed even after the next game. there's a possibility that. The ratio of the symbol combination related to the type 1 BB to all the symbol combinations is "(5 x 5 x 10) / (20 x 20 x 20) = 250/8000".

<Game method C during type 1 BB general and RB non-operation>
(1) When the game is executed by the game method C in the game in which the RB is won in "Type 1 BB general and RB is not operating", the symbol combination related to the RB is stopped and displayed. In some cases, the RB will be activated in the game that won the RB role ("Blank / Red Seven / Blank", "Blank / White Seven / Blank", "Blank / Sheep / Blank". "Or" blank blank blank "), so when the game is executed by the game method C in the game in which the RB combination is won in" RT0 ", the symbol combination related to the RB is stopped and displayed. , The ratio of the symbol combination related to RB not stopped and displayed is higher. Further, even if the symbol combination related to the RB is not stopped and displayed, the next game is "inside the RB", so that the symbol combination related to each game RB may be stopped and displayed even after the next game. The ratio of the symbol combinations related to RB to all the symbol combinations to be drawn into the effective line is "(5 x 5 x 5) / (20 x 20 x 20) = 125/8000". In addition, since the loss is determined to be about 1/5 in "inside RB", the game is executed by the game method C in "inside RB" and the symbol combination related to RB is stopped. The probability of being displayed is about (125/8000) × (1/5) = 125/40000.

Further, also in the gaming machine shown in FIG. 273, "(number of payouts during RB operation + number of payouts during CB operation + number of payouts during SB operation + number of payouts in the game in which the instruction is executed) / all payouts x 100%". By setting the ratio of the designated pachinko machines to be less than 70%, it is possible to obtain a fair gaming machine in which the number of payouts from the gaming machine does not become too large. Also in the sixth embodiment, the seventh embodiment, the eighth embodiment, and the ninth embodiment described above, it is possible to configure the advantageous section stay ratio to 70% or more, and when such a configuration is made, it is possible to configure it. It is preferable that the ratio of the designated accessory is less than 70%. Further, in the case of designing as shown in FIG. 273, the numerator in the designated bonus ratio is "the number of payouts during RB operation + the number of payouts during CB operation + the number of payouts during SB operation + the number of payouts in the game in which the instruction is executed. The ratio of "number of sheets" is "number of payouts during RB operation = 0" when the game is played by the above-mentioned game method A, so that the number of payouts during RB operation is 0% and the number of payouts in the game in which the instruction is executed. Is configured to be 100% (because it is a game that always stays inside the bonus). Further, when the game is played by the above-mentioned game method B, "the number of payouts in the game in which the instruction is executed = 0", so that the number of payouts during the RB operation is 100% and the number of payouts in the game in which the instruction is executed is 0. It is configured to be a percentage of% (to stop and display the symbol combination related to the bonus in the game that won the bonus).

In addition, since the gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment adopts the stop control at the time of winning the push order bell described above, "inside the RB" is for the player in the situation where the push order navigation is not executed. It is in the most advantageous RT state (high ball output rate) (if you win the push order bell group A, all 10 cards will be paid out). That is, in the situation where the push order navigation is not executed, "inside the RB" is more advantageous to the player than "inside the type 1 BB", and the player wins the type 1 BB. There is concern that it will be advantageous.

Therefore, in the eighth embodiment, it is configured as follows.
(1) AT lottery can be executed in "Type 1 BB inside" (2) AT lottery is not executed in "RB inside" (3) Push order navigation does not occur in "RB inside" (4) The number of remaining AT games is deducted even in "inside RB". It should be noted that all of the above configurations may be applied to the eighth embodiment, or only a part of the configurations may be applied to the eighth embodiment. Further, the configuration applied to "inside RB" may be applied to "in operation of RB" or "in general of type 1 BB and in non-inside RB". Further, although it may be configured so that the AT lottery can be won even in the "RB inside", it is preferable that the "RB inside" is more difficult to win the AT lottery than the "Type 1 BB inside". be.

With this configuration, including the execution mode of the AT lottery, "inside the RB" can be in a more advantageous state for the player than "inside the RB", and the player can "inside the RB". The game will proceed without winning the 1st class BB in "Inside the 1st class BB". In addition, even if the first type BB is intentionally won, it is only a loss for the player, so it is possible to prevent the game field from suffering a loss due to an unintended capture.

As an example of the above configuration, in the eighth embodiment, the AT lottery is executed by winning "re-game-B", "re-game-C", "re-game-D", and "re-game-E". It may be configured as follows. With such a configuration, in "Type 1 BB inside", "Re-game-B", "Re-game-C", "Re-game-D", and "Re-game-E" can be won, while In "inside RB", "re-game-B", "re-game-C", "re-game-D", and "re-game-E" are not won (see Fig. 252), so "1 type BB inside". It is possible to execute the AT lottery in "Medium", and it is possible to realize a configuration in which the AT lottery is not executed in "Inside RB".

Further, in the sixth to ninth embodiments described above, the configuration of the gaming machine in which the game proceeds within the bonus is illustrated, but the sixth to ninth embodiments are configured to have the following configurations. You may.

It may be configured so that the stop control of the push order combination (push order bell) is different between the inside of the bonus and the inside of the bonus. Whether or not the bonus is carried over is different between inside the bonus and inside the bonus (generally, sometimes referred to as RT0), that is, the winning condition device is different, so the push order role. There is no problem even if the stop control of (push order bell) is different. For example, when the push order bell has a symbol combination of 15 payouts and a symbol combination of 1 payout, the number priority control is adopted regardless of the push order while the bonus is not inside. It may be configured so that only the symbol combination for paying out the sheets is stopped and displayed. With such a configuration, it is possible to facilitate the design so that "expected value per game during non-bonus non-internal" <expected value per game during RB operation".

During the BB operation, the expected value per game may be less than 1. That is, it may be designed so that the number of game medals possessed decreases while the BB is operating. Further, the counter value of the difference number counter may be updated even during the BB operation. It may be configured to update only in the advantageous section, or may be configured to update only in the normal section. Further, the counter value of the game number counter remaining in the advantageous section may be updated even during the BB operation. It may be configured to update only in the advantageous section, or may be configured to update only in the normal section.

The expected value per game may be less than 1 while the bonus is not inside. That is, it may be designed so that the number of game medals possessed decreases while the bonus is not inside. Further, the counter value of the difference number counter may be updated even when the bonus is not inside. It may be configured to update only in the advantageous section, or may be configured to update only in the normal section. Further, the counter value of the game counter for the number of remaining games in the advantageous section may be updated even when the bonus is not inside. It may be configured to update only in the advantageous section, or may be configured to update only in the normal section.

When the AT lottery is won, the precursor state may be configured to shift to the AT state after a plurality of games (the number of games may be determined by the lottery when the AT lottery is won). In such a configuration, the precursory state after winning the AT lottery is an advantageous section, but the advantageous section indicator YH is not turned on and the number of games is consumed, and then the AT winning confirmation effect (to the player). It is an effect that definitely notifies that the AT lottery has been won, for example, a confirmation screen is displayed, a continuous effect is successful, "WIN" is displayed, a rainbow-colored image is displayed, etc.) is executed. The advantageous section indicator YH may be turned on in the game, or the advantageous section indicator YH may be turned on in the game transitioning to AT. Further, although the AT lottery has not been won, as an effect mode, a Gase precursor state that executes an effect similar to the precursor state may be provided as an advantageous section. Even in such a case, the advantageous section indicator YH may not be turned on in the state of precursory sign.

The configuration in which a plurality of types of push order bell groups are provided has been described above, but when such a configuration is adopted and the shift RB is adopted as in the eighth embodiment, the configuration may be as follows. ..
(1) In the type 1 BB non-internal middle (RT0), in the game in which the push order bell group A (sometimes referred to as the push order bell A group) is won, 15 out of 6 choices are paid out in the push order. Is one, and the remaining push order is one payout, or all are payout by stop control regardless of the push order. In addition, in the game in which the push order bell group B (sometimes referred to as the push order bell B group) is won, one push order is paid out for 15 out of 6 choices, and the remaining push order is paid out for one card. Or, regardless of the push order, all the cards will be paid out by stop control. The payout rate is designed to be about 50%.
(2) In the general BB and non-internal RB games, in the game in which the push order bell group A is won, one push order is paid out for 15 out of 6 choices, and the remaining push order is one. It will be paid out, or all will be paid out by stop control regardless of the push order. In addition, in the game in which the push order bell group B is won, one push order is paid out for 15 out of 6 options, and the remaining push order is paid out for one card, or by stop control regardless of the push order. All will be paid out one. The payout rate is designed to be about 40%. It should be noted that the winning probability of the re-game is lower in the general BB and in the non-internal RB than in the non-internal type 1 BB, and the ball ejection rate is designed to be low because it is difficult to win the re-game.
(3) Inside the RB, in the game in which the push order bell group A is won, one push order is paid out for 15 out of 6 choices, and the remaining push order is paid out one. Regardless of the order in which they are pushed, the stop control allows all ones to be paid out. In addition, if the push order bell group B is won, 15 cards will be paid out regardless of the push order. The payout rate is designed to be about 100%.

An elapsed game number counter that can measure the number of games since the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section is provided, and when the counter value reaches a predetermined value, the AT lottery is executed or the state is shifted to the AT state. It may be configured. In such a configuration, (1) the counter value is not updated during the bonus operation (especially suitable for the game nature in which the game progresses inside the bonus), (2) two cards. It may be configured so that the counter value is not updated in the execution of the game by betting (particularly, it is suitable in the case of the game nature in which the game is advanced by executing the game by betting three cards). On the other hand, it is preferable to update the remaining advantageous section game counter value both in the two-card bet and during the bonus operation. In addition, the number of medals held by the player after shifting from the normal section to the advantageous section (the number of game medals inserted into the game machine minus the number of game medals paid out from the game machine) is the predetermined number. When it reaches, the AT lottery may be executed or the state may be changed to the AT state.

The advantageous section indicator YH does not have to be turned on at the start of the advantageous section, but if it is turned on once, it is kept on until the end of the advantageous section and turned off at the end of the advantageous section. It is preferable to configure it. The lighting timing of the advantageous section indicator YH is as follows: (1) Check the on / off status of a specific flag when the advantageous section is won, turn it on if it is on, and do not turn it on if it is off, (2). It may be configured to check the on / off status of a specific flag when staying in the advantageous section and turn it on when it is on, or (3) turn it on at the start of the game in which the first push order navigation in the advantageous section is executed. .. Further, if the advantageous section is in the advantageous section even after the AT in-progress state ends, the advantageous section indicator YH may be left on (turns off when the advantageous section ends). With such a configuration, the player can have a feeling of expectation that the advantageous state has not been completed yet, or can have a feeling of expectation to bring back the advantageous state again.

As a configuration of a gaming machine in which an advantageous section is forcibly terminated when the difference number counter value reaches 2400, (1) a countdown occurs when the difference number counter value approaches 2400 (for example, when it reaches 2380). The effect is executed (for example, "remaining 20 sheets" is displayed), (2) the difference number counter value is always displayed on the effect display device S40, and (3) the difference number counter value is displayed when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Displayed on the device S40, (4) The end condition of the AT in-progress state is assumed to be the case where the difference number reaches a predetermined number, and when the number of sheets exceeds 2400, the additional display of the excess amount is not executed (5). ) The end condition of the AT state is when the difference number reaches a predetermined number, and when it is planned to exceed 2400 sheets, the additional display of the excess amount is changed to a display mode different from the normal display mode (for example, normal). When the time is displayed as "+20" and the excess is displayed as "GET!"), (6) When the difference counter value approaches 2400 (for example, when it reaches 2380), if the bonus is won. , The winning of the bonus may be notified after the difference counter value reaches 2400 without notifying the winning of the bonus. Further, the end condition of the AT in-progress state may be included in the number of times the push order navigation is executed, and if the player makes a mistake in the push order, the number of times the push order navigation is executed may be included in the number of times the push order navigation is executed. It does not have to be included.

In addition, it may be configured so that the loser is not won in the normal section (no loss is provided), and all the winning combinations are won in the advantageous section transition lottery. That is, when the game is executed in the normal section, the advantage section transition lottery may be won at 1/1. In addition, it has a loss, and in the normal section, all the roles other than the loss may be configured to win the advantageous section transition lottery.

Further, when the shift RB is adopted, in the general BB (while the BB is operating and the RB is not inside), all the positions other than the winning combination may be used as the number of positions to win the RB combination, and the player does not win the re-game. It may be configured as follows.

Further, in this example, although the reel and the stop button are exemplified for the three gaming machines, the reel and the stop button may be configured to have four reels and four stop buttons, respectively. When executing push order navigation on a gaming machine configured in this way,
(1) Draw "○", "△", "□", "×" on the stop button to make it visible to the player.
(2) As the sound output from the speaker, the stop button to be operated such as "1st", "2st", "3st", "4st", etc. outputs the sound that is easy for the player to recognize.
(3) For example, "Furinkazan" is displayed in random order on the production display device S40 as a four-character compound word (such as "Furinkazan"), and the pressing order of the four-character compound words is the correct pressing order ("Furinkazan"). In the case of "wind", "2341").
It may be configured as described above.

In the above, the configuration of a rotating cylinder type gaming machine has been illustrated as a gaming machine, but the above configuration is applicable to various gaming models such as pachinko gaming machines, rock-paper-scissors gaming machines, arrange balls, game machines, and casino machines. can.

Of the above configurations, the configuration related to the settings such as the setting change mode, the setting confirmation mode, the setting key switch, and the setting / reset button (for example, the configuration exemplified in FIG. 59) is also applicable to the pachinko gaming machine having the set value. Applicable.

(summary)
The following concepts can be extracted (listed) based on the configurations shown in the above examples. However, the concepts listed below are just examples, and not only the combination and separation of these listed concepts (upper conceptualization), but also the concepts based on the further configuration shown in the above examples are added to these concepts. You may.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (1) is
It has a strip-shaped reel tape (eg, reel strip MO) wound around the outer circumference of a reel base (eg, reel frame MW).
A plurality of types of symbols are arranged on the reel tape along the longitudinal direction of the reel tape.
As the type of the symbol, at least a first symbol (for example, white seven) and a second symbol (for example, a bell symbol) are included.
The maximum width value of the first symbol is configured to be larger than the maximum width value of the second symbol.
The second symbol is arranged at at least one of both ends in the longitudinal direction of the reel tape, and the first symbol is not arranged at each of both ends of the reel tape in the longitudinal direction. ,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the length of the reel tape in the longitudinal direction is longer than the outer circumference of the surface on which the reel tape is wound at the reel base.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (2) is
The main body of the game machine and
A front door (for example, a front door DU) that is openable and closable to the gaming machine body,
In a rotating cylinder type gaming machine provided with a reel unit (for example, a reel unit RU) inside the gaming machine main body,
Inside the main body of the gaming machine,
The pedestal portion (for example, the pedestal portion BU) on which the reel unit is installed and
A main tank member (for example, hopper H40) installed below the pedestal portion and storing the game medium, and
An auxiliary tank member (for example, a medal auxiliary tank HS) installed in the vicinity of the main tank member and for retracting the surplus game medium stored in the main tank member is provided.
A part of the main tank member is provided with a slope portion (for example, an inclined surface H64) that descends from the main tank member toward the auxiliary tank member.
The reel unit and the pedestal portion are detachably held by a locking component (for example, screw BS).
It is a gaming machine characterized in that the slope portion is located vertically below the locking component located at a position closest to the side where the front door opens and closes.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (3) is
The main body of the game machine and
A front door (for example, a front door DU) that is openable and closable to the gaming machine body,
In a rotating cylinder type gaming machine provided with a reel unit (for example, a reel unit RU) inside the gaming machine main body,
Inside the main body of the gaming machine,
The pedestal portion (for example, the pedestal portion BU) on which the reel unit is installed and
A main tank member (for example, hopper H40) installed below the pedestal portion and storing the game medium, and
An auxiliary tank member (for example, a medal auxiliary tank HS) installed in the vicinity of the main tank member and for retracting the surplus game medium stored in the main tank member is provided.
The reel unit and the pedestal portion are detachably held by a locking component (for example, screw BS).
The gaming machine is characterized in that the auxiliary tank member is located vertically below the locking component located at a position closest to the side where the front door opens and closes.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (4) is
With multiple reels (eg reel M50),
With multiple stop switches (eg, stop button D40),
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device S40) capable of displaying an effect,
It is equipped with an operation member (for example, sub-input button SB, cross key SB2) that can change the display content of the effect.
After rotating the plurality of reels by satisfying a predetermined game start condition, the rotation of the reels is stopped according to the operation of the stop switch, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is finally stopped. One game can be completed by performing the final stop switch operation, which is the operation of the stop switch corresponding to the reels, and stopping all of the plurality of reels.
When the final stop switch operation is performed, when the first predetermined time elapses without betting from the predetermined timing after the final stop switch operation is performed, a specific image (for example, for example) is displayed on the effect display unit. , Standby screen) is configured to be displayable,
When a predetermined operation member (for example, a sub input button SB) is operated after one game is completed, a predetermined image (for example, a menu screen) can be displayed on the effect display unit.
When the predetermined operating member is operated and the predetermined image is displayed, a second predetermined time elapses while the predetermined image is displayed from a specific timing after the predetermined operating member is operated. Then, the effect display unit is configured to be able to display the specific image.
The gaming machine is characterized in that the second predetermined time is longer than the first predetermined time.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (5) is
With multiple reels (eg reel M50),
With multiple stop switches (eg, stop button D40),
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device S40) capable of displaying an effect,
It is equipped with an operation member (for example, sub-input button SB, cross key SB2) that can change the display content of the effect.
After rotating the plurality of reels by satisfying a predetermined game start condition, the rotation of the reels is stopped according to the operation of the stop switch, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is finally stopped. One game can be completed by performing the final stop switch operation, which is the operation of the stop switch corresponding to the reels, and stopping all of the plurality of reels.
When the final stop switch operation is performed, when the first predetermined time elapses without betting from the predetermined timing after the final stop switch operation is performed, a specific image (for example, for example) is displayed on the effect display unit. , Standby screen) is configured to be displayable,
When a predetermined operation member (for example, a sub input button SB) is operated after one game is completed, a predetermined image (for example, a menu screen) can be displayed on the effect display unit.
When the predetermined operating member is operated and the predetermined image is displayed, a second predetermined time elapses while the predetermined image is displayed from a specific timing after the predetermined operating member is operated. Then, the effect display unit is configured to be able to display the specific image.
The second predetermined time is configured to be longer than the first predetermined time.
When the predetermined operating member is operated and the predetermined image is displayed, the second predetermined time is displayed while the predetermined image is displayed from a specific timing after the predetermined operating member is operated. When a specific operating member (for example, the cross key SB2) is operated before the lapse of time, the predetermined image is displayed while the predetermined image is displayed from a specific timing after the operation of the predetermined operating member. 2 While the specific image is not displayed on the effect display unit even after a predetermined time has elapsed,
When the final stop switch operation is performed, the stop switch is newly operated before the first predetermined time elapses without betting from the predetermined timing after the final stop switch operation is performed. Even if the operation of the above is performed, if the first predetermined time elapses without betting from the predetermined timing after the final stop switch operation is performed, the specific image can be displayed on the effect display unit. Is configured in
When the final stop switch operation is performed, if the bet is made before the first predetermined time elapses without betting from the predetermined timing after the final stop switch operation is performed. The game is characterized in that the specific image is not displayed on the effect display unit even after the first predetermined time has elapsed from the predetermined timing after the final stop switch operation is performed. It is a machine.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (6) is
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A setting switch (for example, a setting) that is electrically connected to the main game unit and is operated to shift to a setting change mode (for example, a setting change mode) in which a setting value related to an advantage for the player can be changed. With a key switch)
The main game unit is configured to be able to execute interrupt processing, which is processing to be executed at predetermined time intervals.
The setting switch is turned on in a situation where the power is cut off in a predetermined gaming state other than the setting change mode and the power is not supplied to the gaming machine, the power is started to be supplied to the gaming machine, and the mode shifts to the setting change mode. If the power is cut off after the power is turned off and the power supply to the gaming machine is started after the setting switch is turned off, the mode is configured to shift to the setting change mode.
When the power is cut off in a predetermined gaming state other than the setting change mode and the power is not supplied to the gaming machine, the setting switch is turned on, the power is started to be supplied to the gaming machine, and the power is supplied from the start. If the power is cut off before the predetermined time elapses and the power supply to the gaming machine is started after the setting switch is turned off, it is configured not to shift to the setting change mode. It is a characteristic gaming machine.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (7) is
A plurality of reels (for example, left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols, and
A stop switch (for example, a left stop button D41, a middle stop button D42, a right stop button D43) provided corresponding to each of the reels and operated by the player when the rotation of the reel is stopped.
A storage means (for example, a credit number display device D200) capable of electrically storing a game medium within a predetermined number range, and
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of a game,
A speaker that outputs a production sound (for example, speaker S20) and
It is equipped with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the output of the effect.
The main game club
The role lottery means to execute the role lottery, and
A reel control means for stopping and controlling the reel so as to correspond to the winning combination lottery result by the winning combination lottery means when the stop switch is operated is provided.
A storage number increase process for increasing the number of game media stored in the storage means, and a storage number increase process.
It is possible to execute the payout process that executes the payout of the game medium.
When a predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed by the reel control means, the game medium can be given to the player.
When the number of game media stored in the storage means is the predetermined number, the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed, and a specific number of game media is given, the storage number increase process is executed. It is configured to perform the payout process without
When the number of game media stored in the storage means is equal to or less than the value obtained by subtracting the specific number from the predetermined number, the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed, and the specific number of game media is given. In some cases, it is configured to execute the storage number increase processing and not to execute the payout processing.
In a situation where the number of gaming media stored in the storage means exceeds the predetermined number minus the specific number and is less than the predetermined number, the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed, and the specific number is displayed. When the game medium of is given, it is configured to execute the payout process after executing the stored number increase process.
The main game club
After the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the game medium grant information can be transmitted to the sub-game unit.
The sub-game club
Based on the reception of the game medium grant information, the game medium grant sound, which is an effect sound related to the game medium grant, can be output from the speaker.
In a situation where the number of game media stored in the storage means is the predetermined number, the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed, and when the specific number of game media is given, the game medium grant information. (For example, a game medium granting sound output when the credit is increased by 1, a game medium granting sound output when paying out one game medal) based on the receipt of Can be output and
When the number of game media stored in the storage means is equal to or less than the value obtained by subtracting the specific number from the predetermined number, the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed, and the specific number of game media is given. In this case, the predetermined game medium addition sound can be output based on the reception of the game medium addition information.
In a situation where the number of gaming media stored in the storage means exceeds the predetermined number minus the specific number and is less than the predetermined number, the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed, and the specific number is displayed. When the game medium is given, the predetermined game medium giving sound can be output based on the reception of the game medium giving information.
The time value from when the number of gaming media stored in the storage means becomes A (A is a natural number) to A + 1 during the execution of the storage number increase process, and N (N is a natural number, 2 ≦ N). ) M (M is a natural number, 1 ≦ M ≦ (N-1)) M + 1 from the start of execution of the payout process for the th game medium during the payout process for paying out the game media. It is a gaming machine characterized in that the time value until the start of execution of the payout process related to the gaming medium of the eye is different.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (8) is
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the production,
A game lamp (for example, a lamp unit) that can be turned on when the production is executed,
It is equipped with a setting value display unit (for example, setting display LED) that can display the setting value.
The game lamp has a plurality of lighting patterns (for example, element 6 in FIG. 77).
The lighting pattern is configured by combining a plurality of lighting modes (for example, element 5 in FIG. 77).
The lighting mode is a combination of a lighting color (for example, element 1 in FIG. 77) and a lighting time pattern (for example, element 4 in FIG. 77).
The lighting time pattern is a combination of a lighting time (for example, element 2 in FIG. 77) and an extinguishing time (for example, element 3 in FIG. 77).
It has a plurality of lighting colors, has a plurality of lighting times, and has a plurality of extinguishing times.
As the lighting pattern, a first lighting pattern that can be carried out at a predetermined abnormality, a second lighting pattern that can be carried out when a set value is displayed on the set value display unit, and a set value display that is not at a predetermined abnormality. It has at least a third lighting pattern that can be implemented when the set value is not displayed in the unit.
The first lighting pattern is configured to include a predetermined lighting mode.
The second lighting pattern and the third lighting pattern are configured not to include the predetermined lighting mode.
The second lighting pattern is configured to include a specific lighting mode.
The gaming machine is characterized in that the first lighting pattern and the third lighting pattern are configured not to include the specific lighting mode.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (9) is
A storage means capable of electrically storing the game medium within a predetermined number of ranges (for example, in this example, the game medal can be electrically stored as a credit in the game machine).
A switch that is operated when betting a game medium stored in a storage means, and is a bet switch (for example, a max bet button) capable of betting a plurality of game media.
A predetermined lamp (for example, 3-bet lamp D213) capable of notifying that a specified number, which is the maximum number of bets per game in a predetermined gaming state, has been bet, and
With certain lamps (eg, Max Bet Lamps) that can signal that the operation of the bet switch is valid,
Equipped with a role determination means that can determine the winning combination,
As a winning combination that is determined by the combination determining means, it is configured so that the replaying combination can be determined.
The sum of the game medium stored in the storage means and the number of bets is equal to or greater than the specified number, in the predetermined game state, the re-game combination has not been won in the game executed immediately before, and the game medium is stored in the storage means. Moreover, when the number of bets is less than the specified number, the specific lamp is configured to light up.
It is a gaming machine characterized in that when the number of bets reaches the specified number in a situation where the specific lamp is lit, the specific lamp is turned off after the predetermined lamp is lit.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (10) is
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
It is equipped with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the production.
It seems that the time from the start of power supply to the gaming machine to the start of the program of the main gaming department is longer than the time from the occurrence of the power outage to the end of the power supply to the gaming machine. It is composed and
The time from the start of power supply to the gaming machine to the start of the program of the main gaming unit is longer than the time from the start of power supply to the gaming machine to the activation of the program of the sub-game unit. It is a gaming machine characterized by being configured as such.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A1) is
A plurality of reels (for example, left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols, and
Internal lottery means and
A reel control means for controlling the reel is provided.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a game in which the predetermined game state is set and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player has a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. Are stopped, and after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed after the stop operation is performed at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player, the player is given a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. ,
In the game in which the predetermined game state is set and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively, and the subsequent game players can use the reels. Even after the symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to the predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation even though the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, the predetermined It is configured to give the player a game value corresponding to the symbol combination.
In the game in which the predetermined game state is set and a specific result different from the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on the reels. , The predetermined symbol combination is displayed even when the player is stopped at a specific timing as the final stop operation of the player and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation. It is a gaming machine characterized in that it is configured so as not to give a gaming value corresponding to a combination to a player.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A2) is
A plurality of reels (for example, left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols, and
Internal lottery means and
A reel control means for controlling the reel is provided.
When a power outage is detected, it is configured to be able to execute power outage processing.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a game in which the predetermined game state is set and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player has a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. Are stopped, and after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed after the stop operation is performed at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player, the player is given a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. ,
In the game in which the predetermined game state is set and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively, and the subsequent game players can use the reels. Even if a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to the execution of the power off processing based on the detection of the power disconnection even though the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, the power supply is supplied. After returning, it is configured to give the player a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination.
In the game in which the predetermined game state is set and a specific result different from the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on the reels. , The predetermined symbol combination is displayed even if the stop operation is performed at a specific timing as the final stop operation of the player thereafter and the power cutoff process based on the detection of the power cutoff is executed, so that the predetermined symbol combination is displayed. It is a gaming machine characterized in that it is configured so as not to give a gaming value corresponding to a combination to a player.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A3) is
A plurality of reels (for example, left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols, and
Internal lottery means and
A reel control means for controlling the reel is provided.
It is possible to execute a freeze that delays the progress of the game,
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a game in which the predetermined game state is set and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player has a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. Are stopped, and after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed after the stop operation is performed at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player, the player is given a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. ,
In the game in which the predetermined game state is set and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively, and the subsequent game players can use the reels. Even after the symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to the predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation even though the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, the predetermined It is configured to give the player a game value corresponding to the symbol combination.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a predetermined game after a specific result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a predetermined game after a specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, each of the reels has a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination stopped, and this is specified as the final stop operation of the player thereafter. After the stop operation is performed at the timing and the specific symbol combination is displayed, a predetermined freeze (for example, the freeze at the start of the bonus) can be executed.
In a predetermined game after a specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, each of the reels has a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination stopped, and this is specified as the final stop operation of the player thereafter. Even after the specific symbol combination is not displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure on the reel corresponding to the final stop operation even though the stop operation is performed at the timing, the predetermined freeze can be executed. Are

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A4) is
A plurality of reels (for example, left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols, and
Internal lottery means and
A reel control means for controlling the reel is provided.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a game in which the predetermined game state is set and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player has a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. Are stopped, and after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed after the stop operation is performed at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player, the player is given a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. ,
In the game in which the predetermined game state is set and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively, and the subsequent game players can use the reels. Even after the symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to the predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation even though the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, the predetermined It is configured to give the player a game value corresponding to the symbol combination.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a specific result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In the game in which the predetermined game state is set and the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively, and the subsequent player's game. After the stop operation is performed at a specific timing as the final stop operation and the specific symbol combination is displayed, the next game can be executed regardless of the game value being input.
In the game in which the predetermined game state is set and the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively, and the subsequent game players can use the reels. Even after the symbol combination other than the specific symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation even though the stop operation is performed at the specific timing as the final stop operation, the game value. Is configured so that the next game can be executed regardless of being thrown in.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A5) is
A plurality of reels (for example, left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols, and
Internal lottery means and
A reel control means for controlling the reel is provided.
The lottery state has at least a first lottery state and a second lottery state in which the probability that a specific result is determined is different from the first lottery state.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a game in which the predetermined game state is set and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player has a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. Are stopped, and after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed after the stop operation is performed at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player, the player is given a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. ,
In the game in which the predetermined game state is set and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively, and the subsequent game players can use the reels. Even after the symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to the predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation even though the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, the predetermined It is configured to give the player a game value corresponding to the symbol combination.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a specific result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a game executed in the case of the first lottery state and in which the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel has a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination. It is stopped, and after the stop operation is performed at a specific timing as the final stop operation of the player after that and the specific symbol combination is displayed, it is configured to be able to shift to the second lottery state.
In the game executed in the case of the first lottery state and the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel has a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination. Even though the game has been stopped and the player has stopped at a specific timing as the final stop operation of the player, the symbol combination other than the specific symbol combination is due to a predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation. It is a gaming machine characterized in that it is configured so that it can shift to the second lottery state even after is displayed.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A6) is
A plurality of reels (for example, left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols, and
Internal lottery means and
It comprises a reel control means for controlling the reel and a predetermined lamp (eg, replay lamp D290) that can be turned on based on the determination of a particular result.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a game in which the predetermined game state is set and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player has a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. Are stopped, and after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed after the stop operation is performed at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player, the player is given a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. ,
In the game in which the predetermined game state is set and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively, and the subsequent game players can use the reels. Even after the symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to the predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation even though the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, the predetermined It is configured to give the player a game value corresponding to the symbol combination.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a specific result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In the game in which the predetermined game state is set and the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively, and the subsequent game players can use the reels. After the stop operation is performed at a specific timing as the final stop operation and the specific symbol combination is displayed, the predetermined lamp is configured to light up.
In the game in which the predetermined game state is set and the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively, and the subsequent player's game. Even after the symbol combination other than the specific symbol combination is displayed due to the predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation even though the stop operation is performed at the specific timing as the final stop operation, the predetermined It is a gaming machine characterized in that the lamp of the reel is lit.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A7) is
A plurality of reels (for example, left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols, and
Internal lottery means and
It comprises a reel control means for controlling the reel and a predetermined lamp (eg, replay lamp D290) that can be turned on based on the determination of a particular result.
When a power outage is detected, it is configured to be able to execute power outage processing.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a game in which the predetermined game state is set and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player has a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. Are stopped, and after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed after the stop operation is performed at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player, the player is given a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. ,
In the game in which the predetermined game state is set and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively, and the subsequent game players can use the reels. Even if a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to the execution of the power off processing based on the detection of the power disconnection even though the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, the power supply is supplied. After returning, it is configured to give the player a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a specific result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In the game in which the predetermined game state is set and the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively, and the subsequent player's game. After the stop operation is performed at a specific timing as the final stop operation and the specific symbol combination is displayed, the predetermined lamp is configured to light up.
In the game in which the predetermined game state is set and the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively, and the subsequent player's game. Even if a symbol combination other than the specific symbol combination is displayed due to the execution of the power off processing based on the detection of the power off even though the stop operation is performed at the specific timing as the final stop operation, the power supply is supplied. It is a gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined lamp is lit after returning.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A8) is
N reels (for example, left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols (N is a natural number of 3 or more) and
A speaker that outputs a production sound (for example, speaker S20) and
Internal lottery means and
A reel control means for controlling the reel is provided.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a game in which the predetermined game state is set and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player has a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. Are stopped, and after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed after the stop operation is performed at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player, the player is given a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. ,
In the game in which the predetermined game state is set and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively, and the subsequent game players can use the reels. Even after the symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to the predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation even though the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, the predetermined It is configured to give the player a game value corresponding to the symbol combination.
In a game executed in a specific game state, a stop operation is performed at a specific timing as a stop operation for the N-1th reel of the player, and each of the stopped reels is stopped with a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination. After that, it is configured to be able to output a predetermined effect sound (for example, tempai sound) from the speaker.
In the game executed in the specific gaming state, a predetermined rotation with respect to the N-1st reel is performed even though the stop operation is performed at the specific timing as the stop operation with respect to the N-1th reel of the player. It is a gaming machine characterized in that a predetermined effect sound can be output from a speaker even after a symbol other than the symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination is stopped on each of the stopped reels due to a defect. ..

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A9) is
A plurality of reels (for example, left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols, and
A storage means (for example, a credit number display device D200) capable of electrically storing the game value within a predetermined number, and
A switch that is operated when betting the game value stored in the storage means, and is a bet switch that can bet a plurality of game values (for example, a max bet button).
With certain lamps (eg, Max Bet Lamps) that can signal that the operation of the bet switch is valid,
Internal lottery means and
A reel control means for controlling the reel is provided.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a game in which the predetermined game state is set and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player has a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. Are stopped, and after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed after the stop operation is performed at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player, the player is given a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. ,
In the game in which the predetermined game state is set and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively, and the subsequent game players can use the reels. Even after the symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to the predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation even though the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, the predetermined It is configured to give the player a game value corresponding to the symbol combination.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a specific result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a game in which one or more game media are stored in the storage means, the game is in the predetermined game state, and the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel has the specific symbol combination. After each of the corresponding symbols is stopped and the specific symbol combination is displayed after the stop operation is performed at a specific timing as the final stop operation of the player thereafter, the notification that the specific lamp is valid is not given. It is composed and
In a game in which one or more game media are stored in the storage means, the game is in the predetermined game state, and the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel has the specific symbol combination. Although each of the corresponding symbols is stopped and the stop operation is performed at the specific timing as the final stop operation of the player thereafter, the specification is made due to a predetermined rotation failure to the reel corresponding to the final stop operation. The gaming machine is characterized in that even after a symbol combination other than the symbol combination is displayed, the specific lamp is configured so as not to be notified that it is valid.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A10) is
A plurality of reels (for example, left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols, and
A storage means (for example, a credit number display device D200) capable of electrically storing the game value within a predetermined number, and
A switch that is operated when betting the game value stored in the storage means, and is a bet switch that can bet a plurality of game values (for example, a max bet button).
With certain lamps (eg, Max Bet Lamps) that can signal that the operation of the bet switch is valid,
Internal lottery means and
A reel control means for controlling the reel is provided.
When a power outage is detected, it is configured to be able to execute power outage processing.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a game in which the predetermined game state is set and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player has a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. Are stopped, and after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed after the stop operation is performed at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player, the player is given a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. ,
In the game in which the predetermined game state is set and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively, and the subsequent game players can use the reels. Even if a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to the execution of the power off processing based on the detection of the power disconnection even though the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, the power supply is supplied. After returning, it is configured to give the player a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a specific result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a game in which one or more game media are stored in the storage means, the game is in the predetermined game state, and the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel has the specific symbol combination. After each of the corresponding symbols is stopped and the specific symbol combination is displayed after the stop operation is performed at a specific timing as the final stop operation of the player thereafter, the notification that the specific lamp is valid is not given. It is composed and
In a game in which one or more game media are stored in the storage means, the game is in the predetermined game state, and the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, the reels have the specific symbol combination. The corresponding symbols have been stopped, and even though the stop operation was performed at the specific timing as the final stop operation of the player after that, the power cutoff process based on the power cutoff detection was executed. The gaming machine is characterized in that even when a symbol combination other than the specific symbol combination is displayed, the specific lamp is not notified that the specific lamp is valid after the power is restored.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A11) is
A plurality of reels (for example, left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols, and
A storage means (for example, a credit number display device D200) capable of electrically storing the game value within a predetermined number, and
A switch that is operated when betting the game value stored in the storage means, and is a bet switch that can bet a plurality of game values (for example, a max bet button).
With certain lamps (eg, Max Bet Lamps) that can signal that the operation of the bet switch is valid,
Internal lottery means and
A reel control means for controlling the reel is provided.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a game in which the predetermined game state is set and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player has a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. Are stopped, and after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed after the stop operation is performed at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player, the player is given a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. ,
In the game in which the predetermined game state is set and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively, and the subsequent game players can use the reels. Even after the symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to the predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation even though the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, the predetermined It is configured to give the player a game value corresponding to the symbol combination.
In a game in which one or more game media are stored in the storage means, the game is in the predetermined game state, and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel has the predetermined symbol combination. Each of the corresponding symbols is stopped, and after the stop operation is performed at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, it is notified that the specific lamp is valid. In a game in which one or more game media are stored in the storage means, the game is in the predetermined game state, and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the reels are stored. Although each of the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player thereafter, the predetermined reel corresponding to the final stop operation is specified. The gaming machine is characterized in that it is configured to notify that the specific lamp is valid even after a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a rotation defect.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A12) is
A plurality of reels (for example, left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols, and
A storage means (for example, a credit number display device D200) capable of electrically storing the game value within a predetermined number, and
A switch that is operated when betting the game value stored in the storage means, and is a bet switch that can bet a plurality of game values (for example, a max bet button).
With certain lamps (eg, Max Bet Lamps) that can signal that the operation of the bet switch is valid,
Internal lottery means and
A reel control means for controlling the reel is provided.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a game in which the predetermined game state is set and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player has a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. Are stopped, and after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed after the stop operation is performed at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player, the player is given a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. ,
In the game in which the predetermined game state is set and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively, and the subsequent game players can use the reels. Even if a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to the execution of the power off processing based on the detection of the power disconnection even though the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, the power supply is supplied. After returning, it is configured to give the player a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination.
In a game in which one or more game media are stored in the storage means, the game is in the predetermined game state, and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the reels have the predetermined symbol combination. Each of the corresponding symbols is stopped, and after the stop operation is performed at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, it is notified that the specific lamp is valid. In a game in which one or more game media are stored in the storage means, the game is in the predetermined game state, and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the reels are stored. Even though each of the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player thereafter, the power cutoff process based on the detection of the power outage is executed. It is a gaming machine characterized in that even when a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, the notification that the specific lamp is valid is given after the power is restored.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A13) is
A plurality of reels (for example, left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols, and
Internal lottery means and
A reel control means for controlling the reel is provided.
As a gaming state, it has at least a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player,
It is possible to execute a freeze that delays the progress of the game,
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a game in which the predetermined game state is set and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player has a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. Are stopped, and after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed after the stop operation is performed at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player, the player is given a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. ,
In the game in which the predetermined game state is set and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively, and the subsequent game players can use the reels. Even after the symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to the predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation even though the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, the predetermined It is configured to give the player a game value corresponding to the symbol combination.
When the end condition of the special game state is satisfied, a predetermined freeze (for example, a freeze at the end of the bonus) can be executed.
It is a special game state, and is a game newly executed in a situation where the end condition of the special game state is satisfied by giving the player a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination, and the internal lottery means. In the game in which the predetermined combination is determined by the above, each reel has a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination stopped, and the predetermined stop operation is performed at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player thereafter. After the symbol combination is displayed, it is configured to be able to execute the predetermined freeze.
It is a special game state, and is a game newly executed in a situation where the end condition of the special game state is satisfied by giving the player a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination, and the internal lottery means. In the game in which the predetermined combination is determined, each of the reels has a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination stopped, and the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player thereafter. Nevertheless, it is characterized in that the predetermined freeze can be executed even after a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure on the reel corresponding to the final stop operation. It is a game machine to play.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A14) is
A plurality of reels (for example, left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols, and
Internal lottery means and
A reel control means for controlling the reel is provided.
As a gaming state, it has at least a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player,
It is possible to execute a freeze that delays the progress of the game,
When a power outage is detected, it is configured to be able to execute power outage processing.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a game in which the predetermined game state is set and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player has a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. Are stopped, and after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed after the stop operation is performed at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player, the player is given a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. ,
In the game in which the predetermined game state is set and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively, and the subsequent game players can use the reels. Even if a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to the execution of the power off processing based on the detection of the power disconnection even though the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, the power supply is supplied. After returning, it is configured to give the player a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination.
When the end condition of the special game state is satisfied, a predetermined freeze (for example, a freeze at the end of the bonus) can be executed.
It is a special game state, and is a game newly executed in a situation where the end condition of the special game state is satisfied by giving the player a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination, and the internal lottery means. In the game in which the predetermined combination is determined by the above, each reel has a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination stopped, and the predetermined stop operation is performed at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player thereafter. After the symbol combination is displayed, it is configured to be able to execute the predetermined freeze.
It is a special game state, and is a game newly executed in a situation where the end condition of the special game state is satisfied by giving the player a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination, and the internal lottery means. In the game in which the predetermined combination is determined, each of the reels has a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination stopped, and the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player thereafter. Nevertheless, even if a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to the execution of the power off processing based on the detection of the power disconnection, the predetermined freeze can be executed after the power is restored. It is a gaming machine characterized by that.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A15) is
A plurality of reels (for example, left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols, and
Internal lottery means and
A reel control means for controlling the reel is provided.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a game in which the predetermined game state is set and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player has a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. Are stopped, and after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed after the stop operation is performed at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player, the player is given the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. Is configured to
In the game in which the predetermined game state is set and a specific result different from the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on the reels. After the stop operation is performed at a specific timing as the final stop operation of the player after that, and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to the predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation, the predetermined symbol combination is displayed. It is a gaming machine characterized in that it is configured so as not to give the player a gaming value corresponding to the above.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A16) is
A plurality of reels (for example, left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols, and
Internal lottery means and
A reel control means for controlling the reel is provided.
When a power outage is detected, it is configured to be able to execute power outage processing.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a game in which the predetermined game state is set and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player has a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. Are stopped, and after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed after the stop operation is performed at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player, the player is given the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. Is configured to
In the game in which the predetermined game state is set and a specific result different from the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on the reels. After the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to the stop operation being performed at a specific timing as the final stop operation of the player thereafter and the power cutoff process based on the detection of the power cutoff being executed, the predetermined symbol is displayed. It is a gaming machine characterized in that it is configured so as not to give a gaming value corresponding to a combination to a player.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A17) is
A plurality of reels (for example, left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols, and
Internal lottery means and
A reel control means for controlling the reel is provided.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a specific result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a game that is in the predetermined game state and the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player corresponds to the specific symbol combination. Each symbol is stopped, and after the specific symbol combination is displayed after the stop operation is performed at a specific timing as the final stop operation of the player after that, the next game is performed regardless of the game value being input. It is configured to be runable and
In the game in which the predetermined game state is set and the predetermined result different from the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combinations are stopped on the reels. After that, the player is stopped at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player, and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation, and then the game value is input. It is a gaming machine characterized in that it is configured so that the next game cannot be executed regardless of being played.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A18) is
A plurality of reels (for example, left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols, and
Internal lottery means and
A reel control means for controlling the reel is provided.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a specific result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In the game in which the predetermined game state is set and the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player corresponds to the specific symbol combination. Each symbol is stopped, and after the specific symbol combination is displayed after the stop operation is performed at a specific timing as the final stop operation of the player after that, the next game is performed regardless of the game value being input. It is configured to be runable and
In the game in which the predetermined game state is set and the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively, and the subsequent game players can use the reels. Even after the symbol combination other than the specific symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation even though the stop operation is performed at the specific timing as the final stop operation, the game value. It is a gaming machine characterized in that it is configured so that the next game can be executed regardless of the fact that the reel is thrown in.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A19) is
A plurality of reels (for example, left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols, and
Internal lottery means and
A reel control means for controlling the reel is provided.
As a game state, it has at least a special game transitionable state that is advantageous for the player.
It is possible to execute a freeze that delays the progress of the game,
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game after a specific result is determined by the internal lottery means.
From the time when the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means until the specific symbol combination is stopped, the special game transition state can be achieved.
In a predetermined game after the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the player's final stop operation is stopped with a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination. After the special symbol combination is displayed after the stop operation is performed at a specific timing as the final stop operation of the player after that, a predetermined freeze (for example, the freeze at the start of the bonus) can be executed. ,
In a game in which the special game transition is not possible and the lottery result of the winning combination by the winning combination lottery means is a predetermined result different from the specific result, each reel has a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination. After each is stopped, the stop operation is performed at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player thereafter, and the specific symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure to the reel corresponding to the final stop operation. , A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured not to execute the predetermined freeze.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A20) is
A plurality of reels (for example, left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols, and
Internal lottery means and
A reel control means for controlling the reel is provided.
It is possible to execute a freeze that delays the progress of the game,
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game after a specific result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a predetermined game after the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the player's final stop operation is stopped with a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination. Then, after the player is stopped at a specific timing as the final stop operation of the player and the specific symbol combination is displayed, a predetermined freeze (for example, a freeze at the start of the bonus) can be executed. ,
In a predetermined game after a specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, each of the reels has a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination stopped, and this is specified as the final stop operation of the player thereafter. Even after the specific symbol combination is not displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure on the reel corresponding to the final stop operation even though the stop operation is performed at the timing, the predetermined freeze can be executed. It is a gaming machine characterized by being a reel.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A21) is
A plurality of reels (for example, left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols, and
Internal lottery means and
A reel control means for controlling the reel is provided.
The lottery state has at least a first lottery state and a second lottery state in which the probability that a specific result is determined is different from the first lottery state.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a specific result is determined by the internal lottery means.
Each of the games executed in the first lottery state and stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player in the game in which the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means. Each of the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination is stopped on the reel, and after the stop operation is performed at a specific timing as the final stop operation of the player thereafter and the specific symbol combination is displayed, the second It is configured to be able to shift to the lottery state,
In a game that is executed in the case of the first lottery state and in which a predetermined result different from the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, the specific symbol combination is attached to each reel. Each of the symbols corresponding to the above is stopped, and the stop operation is performed at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player thereafter, and the symbols other than the specific symbol combination are caused by the predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation. After the combination is displayed, the gaming machine is configured so as not to shift to the second winning combination lottery state.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (B1) is
A plurality of reels (for example, left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols, and
Internal lottery means and
A reel control means for controlling the reel is provided.
It is possible to execute a freeze that delays the progress of the game,
When a power outage is detected, it is configured to be able to execute power outage processing.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a game in which the predetermined game state is set and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player has a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. Are stopped, and after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed after the stop operation is performed at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player, the player is given a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. ,
In the game in which the predetermined game state is set and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively, and the subsequent game players can use the reels. Even if a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to the execution of the power off processing based on the detection of the power disconnection even though the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, the power supply is supplied. After returning, it is configured to give the player a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a predetermined game after a specific result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a predetermined game after a specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, each of the reels has a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination stopped, and this is specified as the final stop operation of the player thereafter. After the stop operation is performed at the timing and the specific symbol combination is displayed, a predetermined freeze (for example, a freeze at the start of a special game) can be executed.
In a predetermined game after a specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, each of the reels has a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination stopped, and this is specified as the final stop operation of the player thereafter. Even if the specific symbol combination is not displayed due to the execution of the power off processing based on the detection of the power off even though the stop operation is performed at the timing, the predetermined freeze can be executed after the power is restored. It is a gaming machine characterized by being configured in.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (B2) is
A plurality of reels (for example, left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols, and
Internal lottery means and
A reel control means for controlling the reel is provided.
When a power outage is detected, it is configured to be able to execute power outage processing.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a game in which the predetermined game state is set and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player has a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. Are stopped, and after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed after the stop operation is performed at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player, the player is given a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. ,
In the game in which the predetermined game state is set and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively, and the subsequent game players can use the reels. Even if a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to the execution of the power off processing based on the detection of the power disconnection even though the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, the power supply is supplied. After returning, it is configured to give the player a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a specific result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In the game in which the predetermined game state is set and the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively, and the subsequent player's game. After the stop operation is performed at a specific timing as the final stop operation and the specific symbol combination is displayed, the next game can be executed regardless of the game value being input.
In the game in which the predetermined game state is set and the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively, and the subsequent player's game. Even if a symbol combination other than the specific symbol combination is displayed due to the execution of the power off processing based on the detection of the power off even though the stop operation is performed at the specific timing as the final stop operation, the power supply is supplied. It is a gaming machine characterized in that the next game can be executed regardless of the game value being input after the return.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (B3) is
A plurality of reels (for example, left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols, and
Internal lottery means and
A reel control means for controlling the reel is provided.
The lottery state has at least a first lottery state and a second lottery state in which the probability that a specific result is determined is different from the first lottery state.
When a power outage is detected, it is configured to be able to execute power outage processing.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a game in which the predetermined game state is set and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player has a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. Are stopped, and after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed after the stop operation is performed at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player, the player is given a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. ,
In the game in which the predetermined game state is set and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively, and the subsequent game players can use the reels. Even if a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to the execution of the power off processing based on the detection of the power disconnection even though the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, the power supply is supplied. After returning, it is configured to give the player a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a specific result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a game executed in the case of the first lottery state and in which the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel has a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination. It is stopped, and after the stop operation is performed at a specific timing as the final stop operation of the player after that and the specific symbol combination is displayed, it is configured to be able to shift to the second lottery state.
In a game executed in the case of the first lottery state and in which the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel has a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination. Although it has been stopped and the stop operation was performed at a specific timing as the final stop operation of the player thereafter, the power off time processing based on the detection of the power outage was executed, so that the symbols other than the specific symbol combination were executed. The gaming machine is characterized in that it can shift to the second lottery state after the power is restored even when the combination is displayed.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (B4) is
N reels (for example, left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols (N is a natural number of 3 or more) and
A speaker that outputs a production sound (for example, speaker S20) and
Internal lottery means and
A reel control means for controlling the reel is provided.
When a power outage is detected, it is configured to be able to execute power outage processing.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a game in which the predetermined game state is set and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player has a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. Are stopped, and after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed after the stop operation is performed at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player, the player is given a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. ,
In the game in which the predetermined game state is set and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively, and the subsequent game players can use the reels. Even if a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to the execution of the power off processing based on the detection of the power disconnection even though the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, the power supply is supplied. After returning, it is configured to give the player a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination.
In a game executed in a specific game state, a stop operation is performed at a specific timing as a stop operation for the N-1th reel of the player, and each of the stopped reels is stopped with a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination. After that, it is configured to be able to output a predetermined effect sound (for example, tempai sound) from the speaker.
In the game executed in the specific gaming state, even though the stop operation is performed at the specific timing as the stop operation for the N-1th reel of the player, the power off processing based on the detection of the power outage is performed. Is executed, and even if a symbol other than the symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination is stopped on each stopped reel, the predetermined effect sound can be output from the speaker after the power is restored. It is a gaming machine characterized by.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (B5) is
A plurality of reels (for example, left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols, and
Internal lottery means and
A reel control means for controlling the reel is provided.
The lottery state has at least a first lottery state and a second lottery state in which the probability that a specific result is determined is different from the first lottery state.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a specific result is determined by the internal lottery means.
Each of the games executed in the first lottery state and stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player in the game in which the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means. Each of the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination is stopped on the reel, and after the stop operation is performed at a specific timing as the final stop operation of the player thereafter and the specific symbol combination is displayed, the second It is configured to be able to shift to the lottery state,
In the game executed in the case of the first lottery state and the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel has a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination. Even though the game has been stopped and the player has stopped at a specific timing as the final stop operation of the player, the symbol combination other than the specific symbol combination is due to a predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation. The gaming machine is characterized in that it is configured to be able to shift to the second lottery state even after is displayed.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (C1) is
With multiple reels (eg reel M50),
With multiple stop switches (eg, stop button M40),
An effect notification unit (for example, an effect display device S40) capable of notifying an effect,
Equipped with an internal lottery means to perform an internal lottery,
A suggestion effect (for example, a rare role suggestion effect) that can be executed in a game in which a specific result (for example, winning-C in FIG. 10) is determined by the internal lottery means, which is an effect suggesting that the specific result has been determined. Can be notified by the production notification unit,
As the suggestion effect, the first suggestion effect (for example, the display of "CHANGE!" In FIG. 175), which is triggered by the satisfaction of the game start condition, and the notification is started when a predetermined stop operation is performed. Has at least a second suggestive effect (eg, red apple (many) in FIG. 175).
In the game in which the first suggestion effect is executed, the second suggestion effect is not executed.
A continuous effect (for example, the night mode in FIG. 175), which is an effect that is notified over a plurality of games, can be notified by the effect notification unit.
When the suggestion effect is executed in a game in which the specific result is determined, which is executed in a predetermined game state and the continuous effect is notified, the first suggestion effect is used. Is configured to be easier to execute than the second suggestion effect.
In the game in which the predetermined game state is determined and the specific result is determined, the game is the game executed in the situation where the continuous effect is notified, the game is the continuous effect. The spinning machine is characterized in that the first suggestion effect is more likely to be executed than in the case where the game is executed in a situation where is not notified.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (C2) is
With multiple reels (eg reel M50),
With multiple stop switches (eg, stop button M40),
An effect notification unit (for example, an effect display device S40) capable of notifying an effect,
A main control means (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A sub-control unit (for example, sub-control board S) for controlling the effect is provided.
The main control means
Internal lottery means to perform internal lottery,
It is equipped with a freeze execution means that executes a freeze that delays the progress of the game.
As a gaming state, it has a special gaming state that is advantageous for the player,
The winning numbers that can be determined by the internal lottery means include at least a first winning number (for example, winning number 14 in FIG. 10) and a second winning number (for example, winning number 7 in FIG. 10).
As the winning number that can be determined by the internal lottery means, there is a winning number (for example, the winning number 21 in FIG. 10) including a special result (for example, type 1 BB-B) that triggers the transition to the special gaming state. And
The effect group information (for example, the effect group number) corresponding to the winning number determined by the internal lottery means can be derived.
The effect group information corresponding to the first winning number is the first information (for example, the effect group number 7 in FIG. 10).
The effect group information corresponding to the second winning number is the second information (for example, the effect group number 5 in FIG. 10).
Among the winning numbers corresponding to the first information, the winning numbers that do not include the special result are only the first winning numbers.
Among the winning numbers corresponding to the second information, the winning numbers that do not include the special result have other than the second winning number.
The main control means is configured to be able to transmit the derived effect group information to the sub control means.
The sub-control means can notify a predetermined freeze execution suggestion effect (for example, a specific freeze effect) by the effect notification unit in a game in which a predetermined freeze (for example, a specific freeze) is executed.
A game in which the sub-control means receives the first information from the main control means is more than a game in which the sub-control means receives the second information from the main control means. It is a spinning-type gaming machine characterized in that it is configured so that it can be easily notified.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (C3) is
A main control means (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
Sub-control means (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect,
With multiple reels (eg reel M50),
A storage means (for example, a credit number display device D200) capable of electrically storing a game medium within a predetermined number range, and
A switch (for example, a max bet button) that is operated when betting a game medium stored in a storage means and is controlled by the main control means capable of betting a plurality of game media.
An effect notification unit (for example, an effect display device S40) capable of notifying an effect,
It is provided with an operable sub-operation member (for example, a sub-input button SB) controlled by the sub-control means.
The main control means
Equipped with an internal lottery means to perform an internal lottery
The sub-control means
In a situation where the plurality of reels are stopped, an operation effect (for example, a button effect) can be notified by the effect notification unit as an effect for prompting the player to operate the sub-operation member.
When the sub-operation member is operated in a predetermined gaming state and the operation effect is notified, the notification of the operation effect is terminated and a specific effect (for example, a decision notification image) is output. It is configured to notify you
In the predetermined game state, the re-game combination has not been won in the game executed immediately before, one or more game media are stored in the storage means, and the number of bets is the game. When the bet switch is operated in a situation where the number of bets is less than the specified number, which is the maximum number of bets, and the operation effect is notified, the notification of the operation effect is terminated and the specific effect is not notified. Is configured to
When the bet switch is operated in the predetermined game state, the re-game combination is won in the game executed immediately before, and the operation effect is notified, the above-mentioned It is configured to continue to notify the operation effect and not to notify the specific effect.
When the bet switch is operated in the predetermined gaming state, the game medium is not stored in the storage means, and the operation effect is notified, the operation effect is notified. Is configured not to notify the specific effect.
When the bet switch is operated in the predetermined gaming state, the number of bets is the specified number, and the operation effect is notified, the notification of the operation effect is continued. It is a rotating cylinder type gaming machine characterized in that it is configured not to notify the specific effect.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (C4) is
A plurality of reels (for example, reel M50) provided with a plurality of types of symbols, and
A plurality of back lamps (for example, a rotating cylinder backlight S30) that can be turned on and off, which are provided inside the plurality of reels,
Equipped with an internal lottery means to perform an internal lottery
As the symbols provided on the reels, there are at least a symbol belonging to the first symbol group (for example, a bell symbol) and a symbol belonging to the second symbol group (for example, a replay A symbol and a replay B symbol). ,
As a result that can be determined by the internal lottery means, it has at least a predetermined result (for example, winning-A1 in FIG. 10) and a specific result (for example, replay-A in FIG. 10).
In the game in which the predetermined result is determined, the combination of symbols belonging to the first symbol group is a predetermined straight line different from the effective line (for example, the middle stage of the left reel, the middle stage of the middle reel, and the middle stage of the right reel in FIG. 187). It may stop at the symbol stop position of each reel on the line (for example, the lower left reel, the middle middle reel, and the upper right reel in FIG. 187).
In the game in which the specific result is determined, the symbol stop position of each reel on a specific straight line whose combination of symbols belonging to the second symbol group is different from the effective line (for example, left in FIG. 187). It may stop at the lower reel, middle reel, upper right reel).
It is possible to execute a back lamp effect that turns on or off the back lamp corresponding to each symbol stop position on the plurality of reels.
As the lighting mode of the back lamp effect, a first lighting mode (for example, a lighting mode corresponding to the "bell stop display" shown in the upper part of FIG. 187) and a second lighting mode different from the first lighting mode are used. (For example, a lighting mode corresponding to the "replay stop display" shown in the lower part of FIG. 187).
When the back lamp effect is executed in the first lighting mode, the back lamp corresponding to each symbol stop position on the effective line is configured to be turned off at least once.
When the back lamp effect is executed in the second lighting mode, the back lamp corresponding to each symbol stop position on the effective line is configured to be turned off at least once.
In the game in which the predetermined result is determined, the back lamp effect can be executed in the first lighting mode, but the back lamp effect is not executed in the second lighting mode.
In the game in which the specific result is determined, the back lamp effect can be executed in the second lighting mode, but the back lamp effect is not executed in the first lighting mode. It is a spinning machine.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (C5) is
With multiple reels (eg reel M50),
A plurality of stop switches (for example, stop button M40), an effect display unit capable of displaying an effect (for example, an effect display device S40), and
Equipped with an internal lottery means to perform an internal lottery
By satisfying a predetermined condition, it is possible to control the notification state (for example, the AT state).
Under the situation controlled by the notification state, the operation mode of the stop switch corresponding to the predetermined result can be specified in the game in which the predetermined result (for example, winning-A1 in FIG. 10) is determined by the internal lottery means. Information can be displayed on the production display section,
It is possible to execute a privilege suggestion effect (for example, a continuous effect in FIG. 189), which is an effect suggesting whether or not a privilege is given to a player, which is executed over one or more games.
When it is suggested that the player is not given the privilege as a result of the privilege suggestion effect, the background effect can be displayed on the effect display unit in a specific mode.
In the game executed in the notification state, when the privilege suggestion effect is not executed and information that can specify the operation mode of the stop switch corresponding to the predetermined result is displayed, the displayed stop switch is displayed. When the stop switch is operated in an operation mode different from that of the above-mentioned operation mode, the brightness of the display in the effect display unit can be reduced.
In the game executed in the notification state, when the privilege suggestion effect is executed and information that can specify the operation mode of the stop switch corresponding to the predetermined result is displayed, the displayed stop switch is displayed. It is a rotating cylinder type gaming machine characterized in that it is configured so that the brightness of the display on the effect display unit does not decrease when the stop switch is operated in an operation mode different from the operation mode.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (C6) is
A speaker capable of outputting a directing sound (for example, speaker D20) and
An operation member A (for example, a sub input button) that can be operated by the player,
It is equipped with an operation member B (for example, a volume switch) that cannot be operated by the player.
The gaming state includes a normal state (for example, a low probability state), an advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state (for example, an AT in progress state), and an error state in which an error is detected. At least have
The volume level of the effect sound output from the speaker can be adjusted based on the operation state of the operation member A.
The volume level of the effect sound output from the speaker can be adjusted based on the operation state of the operation member B.
It is configured so that the volume level of the effect sound output from the speaker is determined based on the operation state of the operation member A and the operation state of the operation member B.
As a directing sound, it is possible to output multiple types of BGM that are repeatedly played over one or more games.
The BGM output in the advantageous state is configured so that the BGM output in the advantageous state is easier to select than the BGM output in the normal state.
In a situation where the volume level of the effect sound is determined to be a predetermined volume, the volume output in the advantageous state is relatively louder than that in the normal state.
In a situation where the volume level of the effect sound is determined to be the predetermined volume, an error occurs in the normal state and the error state occurs, and an error occurs in the advantageous state and the error state occurs. In the case of, the error sound, which is the effect sound when an error occurs, is output at the same volume.
The output volume is relatively louder in the advantageous state than in the normal state.
The gaming machine is characterized in that the output volume is relatively louder in the error state than in the advantageous state.

P-turning machine, DU front door (door)
D Door board, D10s Input reception sensor D20s 1st input sensor, D30s 2nd input sensor D40 Stop button, D41 Left stop button D42 Medium stop button, D43 Right stop button D50 Start lever, D60 Settlement button D70 Display panel, D80 Door switch D90 coin shooter, D100 blocker D130 upper panel, D140 lower panel D150 decorative lamp unit, D160 reel window D170 medal slot, D180 start lamp D290 replay lamp, D300 insertable lamp D200 credit count indicator, D210 insert count indicator D220 Bet button, D230 medal tray D240 outlet, D250 special game status display device D260 keyhole, D270 payout number display device (push order display device)
D280 AT counter value display device M Main control board M20 Setting key switch, M30 setting / reset button C Main control chip, M50 reel M51 Left reel, M52 Middle reel M53 Right reel, M60 AT counter M70 Game interval minimum timer S Sub control board , S10 LED lamp S20 speaker, S30 timer backlight S40 effect display device, SC sub-control chip E power supply board, E10 power switch H medal payout device, H10s first payout sensor H20s second payout sensor, H40 hopper H50 disk, H50a Disc rotation axis H60 game medal exit, H70 emission urging means H80 hopper motor S50 bet button lamp, S60 stop button lamp K rotating cylinder board, K10 rotating cylinder motor K20 rotating cylinder sensor IN relay board, SB sub input button KHc high securing obstacle counter , YKc-1 Advantageous section remaining game counter FZt Freeze execution timer RU reel unit, BU pedestal, H62 discharge guide, H64 inclined surface HS medal auxiliary tank, BS sensor, DE full detection electrode M55 1st end, M57 Second end, M58 superimposition, M59 cut MW reel frame, MO reel band

Claims (1)

With multiple reels
The reel unit including the plurality of reels and
A gaming machine housing with an open front and
A front door that is connected to the left side of the gaming machine housing via a hinge mechanism and can be opened and closed,
Equipped with internal lottery means,
Inside the gaming machine housing,
With the reel unit
A fixing part for fixing the reel unit and
The main tank member that stores the game medium and
It is installed in the vicinity of the main tank member, and is provided with an auxiliary tank member for storing the game medium overflowing from the main tank member.
A part of the main tank member is provided with a slope portion that descends from the main tank member toward the auxiliary tank member.
The reel unit and the fixing portion are configured to be holdable by a plurality of conductive locking parts.
In a state where the reel unit and the fixing portion are held by the plurality of locking parts, the slope portion is arranged vertically below a predetermined locking component among the plurality of locking parts.
In a state where the auxiliary tank member is installed inside the gaming machine housing, the first member and the second member for detecting whether or not the game medium stored in the auxiliary tank member is full are provided. At least, the distance between the first member and the second member is configured to be longer than the length in the longitudinal direction of the predetermined locking component.
The internal lottery means is configured to have a case where a predetermined result is determined and a case where a specific result is determined.
In the game in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the predetermined symbol combination can be stopped based on the fact that the player's stop operation is accepted in the predetermined operation mode.
When the predetermined symbol combination is stopped, the number of game media corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is configured to be given.
In the game in which the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, the specific symbol combination can be stopped based on the acceptance of the player's stop operation.
When the specific symbol combination is stopped, the replay is configured to be granted.
In the game in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the operation notification state capable of notifying the predetermined operation mode and the operation notification state.
The first section that does not enter the operation notification state and
The second section that can be in the operation notification state and
It has a difference counter capable of counting the difference number in the second section after shifting to the second section.
When the calculation result related to the difference counter becomes a negative value in the predetermined game in the second section, the specified value can be stored in the difference counter.
When the difference counter meets a predetermined condition, the second section is terminated.
If the power is cut off and then the voltage drops below the specified value, the power cutoff process is executed.
In the game in which the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on each reel stopped by the reception of the stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player. In this situation, when the player's final stop operation for a predetermined reel is accepted at the first timing and the specific symbol combination is stopped, the re-game is given.
In the game in which the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on each reel stopped by the reception of the stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player. In this situation, the power is cut off, and then the player's final stop operation for the predetermined reel is accepted at the first timing until the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the predetermined value, and then when the power is turned off. Even if the processing is executed and the specific symbol combination is not stopped when the plurality of reels are stopped, the re-game is given at the second timing after the power is restored. A featured reel-type gaming machine.

Images